As 128518 LJ-X8000 Um A78gb WW GB 2072 4

A78GB
,ASER0ROÚLER 1 Before Use
Installing the LJ-X8000

2
LJ-X8000 Series Series
Basic Operations and

3 Settings
User’s Manual 4 Head settings
(3D mode) 5 Measurement Tools
Read this manual before using the product in order to achieve maximum
performance.
6 Display/Output
Keep this manual in a safe place after reading it so that it can be used at any
time.
7 Utility
Environmental
8 Settings
Communication
9 Control
10 3PECIÚCATIONS
Appendix
Introduction
Introduction
This manual describes the setup procedures required for connections and initial installation of the LJ-X Series (3D mode), as well as
related information and product specifications.
Read this manual thoroughly in order to understand how the controller works and to maximize performance of the controller.
Always keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
Please ensure that the manual is passed to the end user of the software.
Symbols
The following warning symbols are used to ensure safety and to prevent human injury and/or damage to property when
using the system. Be sure to read these messages carefully.
DANGER
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in product damage as well as property injury.
NOTICE
Important Indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during operation.
Point Indicates additional information on proper operation.
Indicates items to enhance system understanding and other useful information.

Reference
Precautions
(1) Unauthorized reproduction of this manual in whole or part is prohibited.
(2) The contents of this manual may be changed for improvements without prior notice.
(3) An utmost effort has been made to ensure the contents of this manual are as complete as possible. If there are any
mistakes or questions, please contact a KEYENCE office listed in the back of the manual.
(4) Regardless of item (3), KEYENCE will not be liable for any effect resulting from the use of this unit.
(5) Any manuals with missing pages or other paging faults will be replaced.
The screen shots of this manual are examples for explanation. The values may differ from the actual situation.
(6) The screenshots in this manual are examples for explanation only. Numerical values indicated in the images may differ
from the actual situation.
(7) This User’s Manual is written in accordance with Windows 10.
Trademarks
• "SD Memory Card" is a registered trademark of the SD Association.
• Other company names and product names noted in this document are registered trademarks or trademarks of their
respective companies. This manual does not use the ™ or ® mark for the trademarks or registered trademarks in the text.
Software information
libjpeg
Copyright ©1991-2012, Thomas G. Lane.
This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
This software includes work that is distributed under the Apache License 2.0 and that was modified by KEYENCE.
2 LJ-X UM_GB
Introduction
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of
this definition, "control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty
percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated
documentation, and conversions to other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or
attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations,
elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that
remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that
is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner.
For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not
limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the
purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not
a Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within
the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge,
royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such
Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge,
royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such
license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their
Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a
lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You
under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object
form, provided that You meet the following conditions:
a.You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
b.You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and
c.You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work,
excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and
d.If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices
contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE
text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by
the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the
License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided
that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of
Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated
in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under
the terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any
separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for
reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS
IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-
INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or
redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as
deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or
consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of
goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility
of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support,
warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License.
However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to
indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such
warranty or additional liability.
A78GB LJ-X UM_GB 3

Safety Information for LJ-X/LJ-V Series
Safety Information for LJ-X/LJ-V Series
Safety information for LJ-X/LJ-V Series
General cautions
• Do not use this product for the purpose to protect a human body or a part of a human body.
• This product is not intended for use as an explosion-proof product. Do not use this product in a hazardous area and/or
DANGER potentially explosive atmosphere.
• Do not use this product for applications (power plants, aviation, railways, ships, vehicles, medical devices, recreational
equipment etc.) which could cause great harm to people and/or property.
• If the product is used in a manner not specified by this manual, the protection provided by the product may be impaired.
• When installing the product, perform a total risk assessment of the device and ensure that appropriate measures are
WARNING
taken to reduce risk. Take appropriate protective measures to ensure that the devices functions safely even in case of a
malfunction without the product.
• Before starting or operating the system, check to make sure all Keyence functions are working properly.
CAUTION
• Assume the unlikely case of a Keyence product failing and take all safety precautions to prevent damage.
• If the system is operated beyond its published specifications or if the system is modified, its functions and performance
cannot be guaranteed.
• Please note that when Keyence is used in combination with other instruments, its functions and performance may be
NOTICE
degraded.
• Do not subject the controller or connected devices to a sudden change in temperature. There is the risk of
condensation occurring.
Precautions for use
• Turn the main power supply off when performing cable connection or maintenance work etc. Failure to do so may cause
electric shock.
WARNING • Pay attention to prevent foreign matter such as metal particles, dust, paper or wood chips from entering the inside of
this unit. Failure to follow this may result in a fire, electric shock, malfunction or accidents.
• Use the specified voltage. Failure to do so may cause fire, electric shock or malfunction.
• Do not disassemble or modify the unit. This may cause fire or electric shock.
CAUTION
• Mount the head on a metallic plate. The surface of the head may become very hot and cause burns.
• Do not apply any vibration or shock. When a strong vibration or shock is applied to the head, malfunction or the
deterioration of the measurement accuracy can occur.
• Before making any connections/disconnection, be sure to turn off the power of this unit and connected devices. Failure
to do so may result in a malfunction of the controller or connected devices.
• Do not turn off this instrument when settings are being modified. Otherwise, all or part of the program settings may be
lost.
• Do not block the ventilation holes of the unit or surrounding devices. Increase of internal temperature could cause
failure.
• You are advised to back up the settings to prevent data loss in the event of system trouble or failure.
NOTICE • Due to mild fluctuations in the air, the measured value may fluctuate. In this case, take the following countermeasures.
- Enclose the measurement area with an appropriate enclosure.
- Agitate the air between the measurement point and the workpiece more strongly with a fan.
• Do not operate this device near lighting fixtures. If the unit must be used in such a location, install a light shielding board
or similar device so that the light will not affect the measurement.
• Wait approximately 30 minutes after the power is turned on before using the LJ-X8000 Series. Otherwise, the
measured value may gradually fluctuate as the circuit is not immediately stable after the power is turned on.
• A change in the ambient temperature may cause the measurement to fluctuate. Be sure to keep the temperature
stabilized. When the ambient temperature changed by 10°C, it takes 60 minutes for the distribution of internal
temperature to equalize.
4 LJ-X UM_GB
Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs
In the following cases, turn the power off immediately. Using the unit in an abnormal condition may cause fire, electric
shock, or product malfunction. Contact your local KEYENCE office for repair.
CAUTION • If liquid, including water or chemicals, or debris enters the unit.
• If the system is dropped or the case is damaged.
• If smoke or a burning smell emits from the controller.
Operating environment and conditions (precautions on installation)
To use the unit properly and safely, avoid installing this unit in the following locations. Failure to do so may cause fire,
electric shock or malfunction.
- Locations that contain moisture or dust, or that are poorly ventilated.
- Locations where the unit is exposed to direct sunlight or temperature increases.
WARNING
- Locations where there are flammable or corrosive gases.
- Locations where the unit may be directly subjected to vibration or impact.
- Locations where water, oil or chemicals may splash onto the unit
- Locations that are prone to static electricity
• Keep the machine and cables as far as possible from high voltage lines and power lines.
Otherwise, noise may cause malfunction or accidents.
• When connecting the cables, make sure to bundle the protective material, such as a spiral tube from outside. If they are
bundled directly, the load applied to the cables may be concentrated on the connector, which may cause a
disconnection or short.
• The controller and optional devices are precision components. To maintain performance, do not subject them to
vibration or shock.
NOTICE
In the following cases, foreign matter such as dust and debris or water and oil could cause differences in the
measurement values.
• Adhesion on the protective glass: Blow off the dirt on the cover glass with clean air. If dirt persists, wipe the glass
surface gently using a soft cloth moistened with alcohol.
• Adhesion on the target object: Blow off the dirt with clean air, or wipe the surface gently using a cloth.
• Intrusion of floating or sprinkled dust or dirt into the light-axis range: In this case, take corrective action with a protective
cover or air purge.
Maintenance
• Do not wipe the unit with a wet wipe, benzene, or thinner.

NOTICE
• If the unit has any dirt on it, wipe it off with a cloth moistened with a mild detergent, then wipe with a soft dry cloth.
Caution on wiring
Some of the I/O circuits of the controller are common internal terminals. Exercise caution to avoid a potential difference
WARNING between the common internal terminals due to the wiring or potential difference between the external devices. There is a
risk of fire occurring.
LJ-X UM_GB 5
Insulated condition between each I/O circuit
Input terminal (IN connector 2 to 6) Input circuit
COMIN1
Input terminal (parallel I/O connector 2 to 16) Input circuit
COMIN2 (parallel I/O connector 1)

Poly Switch
Output terminal (OUT connector 1 to 2) Output circuit
COMOUT1
Poly Switch
Output terminal (OUT connector 3 to 4/6 to 7) Output circuit
COMOUT_F
Poly Switch
Output terminal (parallel I/O connector 18 to 39) Output circuit
COMOUT2 (parallel I/O connector 17, 40)
RS-232C Signal line RS-232C Driver circuit
SG of RS-232C
ENCODER Input Encoder input circuit
Poly Switch
Laser ON Input terminal (I/O connector) Input circuit
Laser COM
Connector shield for Ethernet port
0 VDC
Connector shield and signal GND for USB port
Head connector shield
Connector shield and signal GND for RGB output
Earth terminal
Insulation resistance
10M Ω
Internal GND
0 VDC, laser COM terminal, connector shield and signal GND of the USB port and connector shield and signal GND of the
RGB output are common through a choke coil. Exercise caution to prevent a potential difference in the external devises such
as PC or PLC. If a potential difference occurs, use the power supply of the controller with insulation on the external device
side.
6 LJ-X UM_GB
Notes on the + grounding environment

When using the Simulation Software or the Terminal Software by connecting a PC via USB in a + grounding environment,
exercise caution to prevent the USB terminal from becoming + grounded through and external device.
External devices such as Earthing

personal computers Main unit
(1) (2)
Earth USB GND USB cable USB GND
terminal
24 VDC
24 VDC
0 VDC
Use external devices as a PC (1) or the power supply of the controller (2) with insulation on the + ground terminal.
Precautions on Regulations and Standards
CE marking
KEYENCE evaluates compliance with the requirements of the EU directive according to how products fulfill the below
conditions. When this product is used in EU nations, take note of the following precautions.
EMC Directive
• Applicable standard EN61326-1, ClassA
• This product is designed for use in industrial environments.
• All of the cables used to connect the controller and external device should not exceed 30 m.
• Be sure to connect the ground terminal to a grounding.
• For the head cable, attach the following ferrite core (this unit’s accessory) at a position 200 mm or less from the head
connector of the controller.
Model: ZCAT2035-0930A-BK (manufactured by TDK)
Note: These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with this product incorporated complies with the
essential requirements of EMC Directive.
The manufacturer of the end-product is solely responsible for the compliance on the end-product itself according to EMC
Directive.
CSA Certificate
This product complies with the following CSA and UL standards and has been certified by CSA.
• Applicable Standard CAN/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1
UL61010-1
Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product as a product certified by CSA.
• Overvoltage category I
• Use this product under pollution degree 2.
• Use this product at the altitude of 2000 m or less.
• Indoor use only.
• Mount the head on a metallic plate.
• Use in combination with LJ-X Series heads (except for LJ-V Series heads).
• Use a power supply equipped with the protective function against overcurrent of 8 A or higher.
LJ-X UM_GB 7
FCC Regulations
This product complies with the following regulations specified by the FCC.
• Applicable regulation FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A
• This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)This device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
• FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Precautions on laser products

The laser class of the heads that will be connected to this unit are classified as follows:
Models LJ-X8020 LJ-X8060 LJ-X8080 LJ-X8200 LJ-X8400 LJ-X8900

Wavelength 405 nm
IEC60825-1, Output 10 mW 10 mW 10 mW 10 mW 10 mW 10 mW
FDA(CDRH) Laser
Part1040.10 *1 Class 2M Class 2M Class 2M Class 2M Class 2M Class 2M
class
*1 The laser classification is implemented based on IEC60825-1 in accordance with the requirements of Laser Notice No. 56 of the FDA
(CDRH).
LJ-V7020K LJ-V7020 LJ-V7060K LJ-V7060 LJ-V7080 LJ-V7200 LJ-V7300

Models
LJ-V7020KB LJ-V7020B LJ-V7060KB LJ-V7060B LJ-V7080B LJ-V7200B LJ-V7300B
Wavelength 405 nm
IEC60825-1, Output 10 mW 10 mW 4.8mW 10 mW 4.8mW 4.8mW 4.8mW
FDA (CDRH) Laser
Class 2M Class 2M Class 2 Class 2M Class 2 Class 2 Class 2
Part 1040.10 *2 class
*2 Classified according to the standard IEC60825-1 based on Laser Notice No. 50 by the FDA (CDRH).
• Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous
radiation exposure. Follow the instructions mentioned in this manual. Otherwise, injury to the human body (eyes and
skin) may result.
Class 2M
- Do not stare into the direct or specularly reflected beam.
- Do not direct the beam at other people or into areas where other people unconnected with the laser work might be
present.
- Be cautious of the path of the laser beam. If there is a possibility that the operator may be exposed to the specular or
diffuse reflections, block the beam by installing a protective enclosure.
- Install this product so that the path of the laser beam is not at the same height as that of human eye.
WARNING - Do not direct the beam into an area where telescopic optical instruments (for example, telescopes and binoculars)
are likely to be used. Viewing the laser output with telescopic optical instruments may pose an eye hazard.
Class 2
- Do not stare into the direct or specularly reflected beam.
- Do not direct the beam at other people or into areas where other people unconnected with the laser work might be
present.
- Be cautious of the path of the laser beam. If there is a possibility that the operator may be exposed to the specular or
diffuse reflections, block the beam by installing a protective enclosure.
- Install this product so that the path of the laser beam is not at the same height as that of human eye.
• Laser emission from this product is not automatically stopped when it is disassembled. Do not disassemble this
product.
8 LJ-X UM_GB
Safety equipment for LJ-X Series

This unit is equipped with the following laser safety features.
Laser radiation LED

Lights or flashes while the LJ-X/LJ-V Series head is in operation.
Laser radiation LED
Laser ON terminal
Laser beam emits by short circuit between the LD ON terminal and the LD COM terminal.
Laser ON terminal
LD ON
LD COM
Short-circuit wire
* The laser ON terminal is shipped with a short circuit

attached.
LJ-X UM_GB 9
Warning labels
The position of the warning labels on the LJ-X/LJ-V Series head as well as the information written on them are displayed below.
The IEC (English) warning labels are attached to the unit when shipped from the factory. Warning labels other than IEC
(English) are included.
Use the warning label that is suitable for the destination and affix it to the specified position
Information displayed on warning labels

• LJ-X8020 / LJ-X8060 / LJ-X8080 / LJ-X8200 / LJ-X8400 / LJ-X8900 (LJ-X Series Class 2M Products)
• LJ-V7020K / LJ-V7020KB / LJ-V7020 / LJ-V7020B / LJ-V7060 / LJ-V7060B (LJ-V Series Class 2M Products)
• LJ-V7060K / LJ-V7060KB / LJ-V7080 / LJ-V7080B / LJ-V7200 / LJ-V7200B / LJ-V7300 / LJ-V7300B (LJ-V Series Class 2
Products)
10 LJ-X UM_GB
Warning label attachment positions

LJ-X Series
• LJ-X8020
LJ-X8020 LJ-X8020
• LJ-X8060
LJ-X8060 LJ-X8060
• LJ-X8080
LJ-X8080 LJ-X8080
• LJ-X8200
LJ-X8200 LJ-X8200
• LJ-X8400
LJ-X8400 LJ-X8400
• LJ-X8900
LJ-X8900 LJ-X8900
LJ-X UM_GB 11
LJ-V Series
• LJ-V7020 / LJ-V7020B / LJ-V7020K / LJ-V7020KB
• LJ-V7060 / LJ-V7060B
• LJ-V7060K / LJ-V7060KB
• LJ-V7080 / LJ-V7080B
• LJ-V7200 / LJ-V7200B
• LJ-V7300 / LJ-V7300B
12 LJ-X UM_GB
Safety Precautions on LED Product

The degree of risk of this product is shown below.
Model Light source Risk Group*

LJ-X8020
LJ-X8060
LJ-X8080
Blue LED Risk Group 1
LJ-X8200
LJ-X8400
LJ-X8900
* LED product is classified as shown below according to IEC 62471.
• Exempt Group Does not pose any photobiological hazard.

• Risk Group 1 (Low-Risk) Does not pose a hazard due to normal behavioral limitations on exposure.
• Risk Group 2 (Moderate-Risk) Does not pose a hazard due to the aversion response to very bright light sources or
due to thermal discomfort.
• Risk Group 3 (High-Risk) May pose a hazard even for momentary or brief exposure.
LJ-X UM_GB 13
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Introduction ..............................................................2 Run mode screen .............................................. 3-6

Safety Information for LJ-X/LJ-V Series...................4 3D Screen View ................................................... 3-7
Safety information for LJ-X/LJ-V Series ................ 4 Power On and Initial Set-Up ................................ 3-9
Precautions on Regulations and Standards .......... 7 Language selection ........................................... 3-9
Precautions on laser products ............................... 8 Using the Mouse ............................................... 3-10
Safety Precautions on LED Product .................... 13 Enter a Number or Text ..................................... 3-11
Table of Contents...................................................15 Enter a number ................................................ 3-11
Enter text ......................................................... 3-11
Context-Sensitive Menu (Context Menu) .......... 3-12
Chapter 1 Before Use Start/Stop Operation .......................................... 3-14
Checking the Package Contents ......................... 1-2 Start operation ................................................. 3-14
Standard package ............................................. 1-2 Stop operation ................................................. 3-14
List of Options .................................................... 1-3 Check Past Image in the Image Strip ................ 3-15
System Configuration .......................................... 1-5 Use the image strip in Run mode .................... 3-15
Part Names and Functions .................................. 1-6 Using the image strip in Setup mode ............... 3-16
Controller Unit (LJ-X8000) ................................. 1-6 Inspection/Measurement Condition Setting ....... 3-17
Head .................................................................. 1-8 Select the setting number 
Communication Expansion Unit  (inspection setting) ..................................... 3-17
(CB-NEC20E/CB-NEP20E/CB-NPN20E) .... 1-9 Adding new program settings .......................... 3-17
Changing to existing program settings ............ 3-18
Register image for measurement 
Chapter 2 Installing the LJ-X8000 (standard image registration) ..................... 3-18
Setting the measurement conditions (tool) ...... 3-19
Series Manage tools ................................................... 3-24
Mounting the Head .............................................. 2-2 Edit the measurement area ............................. 3-26
Installation cautions ........................................... 2-2 Deleting unnecessary feature information/
Mounting ............................................................ 2-3 boundary information (Eraser Tool) ........... 3-30
Creating feature information from contour
Installing the Controller Unit ................................ 2-5 information of graphics or images using
Caution on direction of controller mounting ....... 2-5 ShapeTrax3/ShapeTrax2
Precautions in regard to cooling the unit in the (Feature drawing tool) ................................ 3-31
installation site ............................................. 2-6 Set Multi-regions as Measurement Regions 
Installing the controller ....................................... 2-6
Connecting the controller and the head ............. 2-7 (Multi-region Mode) ...................................... 3-33
Installing the Communication Expansion Unit ... 2-8 Multi-region mode support tools ...................... 3-33
Connecting the power source to the  Enables multi-region mode for the specified 
controller ...................................................... 2-8 tool ............................................................. 3-34
How to Use the Terminal Block ........................... 2-9 Batch adjustment of Regions 
(batch adjustment) ..................................... 3-35
Inserting and Removing an SD Card ................ 2-10 Communization/individualizing settings per 
Inserting an SD card ........................................ 2-10 region ......................................................... 3-37
Removing an SD card ..................................... 2-11 Judgment condition graph ............................... 3-37
Connecting and Removing the USB HDD ......... 2-12 Screen display of information on 
multi-regions .............................................. 3-38
Connecting USB HDD ..................................... 2-12
Multi-region output item settings 
Removing USB HDD ....................................... 2-13
(measured value and judged value) .......... 3-39
Correct the Position (Position Adjustment) ........ 3-40
Chapter 3 Basic Operations and Managing Program Settings .............................. 3-42
Settings Saving a setting ............................................... 3-42
Copying a setting ............................................. 3-42
Device Overview ................................................. 3-2 Deleting a program .......................................... 3-42
Device Operation Flow ........................................ 3-3 Writing settings to SD card .............................. 3-43
Loading settings from SD card ........................ 3-43
Screen View ........................................................ 3-4
Renaming a program ....................................... 3-44
Setup mode screen ........................................... 3-4 Converting program settings ........................... 3-44
14 LJ-X UM_GB
Table of Contents
Custom Menu .................................................... 3-45 Edge Pitch ....................................................... 5-105

Overview of custom menu ...............................3-45 Edge Pairs ....................................................... 5-108
Creating a menu that collected only 
necessary items .........................................3-45 Defect .............................................................. 5-111
Blob ................................................................. 5-115
Grayscale Blob ................................................ 5-119
Chapter 4 Head settings
Profile Position ................................................ 5-124
Head Settings 
(When Using the LJ-X Series Head) .............. 4-2 Profile Width .................................................... 5-128
Configuring the Head Settings ...........................4-2 Profile Defect ................................................... 5-133
Head ..................................................................4-2 Intensity ........................................................... 5-138
Capture Settings ..............................................4-10
Correction Settings ..........................................4-15 OCR2 .............................................................. 5-141
List of Settings .................................................4-27 1D Code Reader ............................................. 5-147
Speed UP ........................................................4-28
2D Code Reader ............................................. 5-151
Head Settings 
(When Using the LJ-V Series Head) ............ 4-29 ShapeTrax2 ..................................................... 5-155
Configuring the Head Settings .........................4-29 OCR ................................................................ 5-160
Head ................................................................4-29 Image Region Generator ................................. 5-167
Capture Settings ..............................................4-36
Correction Settings ..........................................4-41 Line Display ..................................................... 5-170
List of Settings .................................................4-53 Circle Display .................................................. 5-172
Speed Up .........................................................4-53
Point Display ................................................... 5-175
Scale Display ................................................... 5-177
Chapter 5 Measurement Tools Calculation ....................................................... 5-179
3D Inspection...................................................... 5-2
Position Correction ........................................ 5-181
Height Measurement/Trend Height 
Position Correction With Shading Pattern ....... 5-182
Measurement Tools ....................................... 5-3
Position Correction With Outline Pattern ......... 5-185
Profile measurement tool/
Position Correction with the Edge ................... 5-188
Continuous profile measurement tool ............ 5-4
Profile Measurement ..........................................5-4 Position Correction With Straight Line 
Continuous Profile Measurement ......................5-5 Position and Angle ..................................... 5-191
Height extraction ................................................. 5-6 Position Correction of Circle Center ................ 5-194
What is height extraction? .................................5-6 Position Correction With Center of Gravity of 
Height extraction ................................................5-8
Creating gray-scale image from height  Cluster ........................................................ 5-197
image .........................................................5-10 Dark (Light) Cluster Center of Gravity
Specification of the zero plane for  Position Correction ..................................... 5-201
3D measurement .......................................5-13
Height measurement filters ..............................5-15
Correction of measured values ........................5-16
Chapter 6 Display/Output
Functions .......................................................... 5-20
Execute Condition ............................................... 6-2
Height measurement ......................................... 5-21 Displaying [Execute Condition Settings] 
Trend Height Measurement .............................. 5-24 Screen .......................................................... 6-2
Setting execute conditions 
Profile Measurement ......................................... 5-28 (Execute Condition Settings) ....................... 6-2
Continuous Profile Measurement ...................... 5-68 Main application of execute conditions 
(Example) ..................................................... 6-3
Free Multi-Point Height Measurement ............5-73
Overview of Output Settings ................................ 6-4
Arranged Multi-Point Height Measurement ......5-75
Displaying [Output Settings] Screen ..................6-4
Area ................................................................... 5-77 Judgment Settings ............................................. 6-4
Pattern Search .................................................. 5-80 OR Terminal ......................................................6-5
OUT Terminal ....................................................6-6
ShapeTrax3 ....................................................... 5-84 RS-232C (non-procedural) ................................6-6
PatternTrax ....................................................... 5-91 Ethernet (non-procedural) ................................. 6-7
SD Card 2 .......................................................... 6-9
Edge Position .................................................... 5-96 USB HDD ........................................................ 6-10
Edge Angle ........................................................ 5-99 PC Program .....................................................6-11
PLC-Link ..........................................................6-12
Edge Width ...................................................... 5-102 EtherNet/IP, EtherNet/IP Unit .......................... 6-12
LJ-X UM_GB 15
Table of Contents
PROFINET, PROFINET Unit ........................... 6-14 Change Account ................................................ 7-42

EtherCAT Unit ................................................. 6-16
File Management ............................................... 7-43
FTP .................................................................. 6-17
Image Output ................................................... 6-18 Check files stored on SD card or USB HDD .... 7-43
Managing folders and files ............................... 7-44
Perform SD card 2 removal processing 
Chapter 7 Utility (SD card 2 removal) ................................... 7-46
Perform USB HDD removal processing
Overview of Utility ............................................... 7-2 (Remove USB HDD) .................................. 7-46
3D Observation ................................................... 7-4 Checking and formatting SD cards and 
USB HDD (Memory Utility) ........................ 7-47
Adjustment Navigation ........................................ 7-5
Remove External Media .................................... 7-48
Share Judgment Condition .................................. 7-7 Removing SD Card 2 ....................................... 7-48
Trace Logs .......................................................... 7-8 Removing USB HDD ....................................... 7-48
Collecting Trace Logs ........................................ 7-8
Viewing Trace Logs ........................................... 7-9
Setting the Collection Condition for Trace  Chapter 8 Environmental Settings
Logs ........................................................... 7-11 External Input/Output Settings ............................ 8-2
Checking the Communication Data ................. 7-11 Network ............................................................. 8-2
Saving and Importing Trace Logs .................... 7-13 External Terminal .............................................. 8-2
I/O Monitor ........................................................ 7-15 Encoders ........................................................... 8-3
RS-232C Monitor .............................................. 7-16 RS-232C ............................................................ 8-4
FTP .................................................................... 8-4
Ethernet Monitor ................................................ 7-17 VNC ................................................................... 8-5
PLC-Link Memory Monitor ................................ 7-18 PLC-Link ............................................................ 8-6
PLC-Link via RS-232C ...................................... 8-6
EtherNet/IP Memory Monitor ............................. 7-19 PLC-Link via Ethernet ........................................ 8-7
PROFINET Memory Monitor ............................. 7-20 Common Settings for PLC-Link ......................... 8-8
EtherNet/IP ........................................................ 8-9
EtherCAT Memory Monitor ............................... 7-21 PROFINET ...................................................... 8-11
Encoder Monitor ................................................ 7-22 EtherCAT Unit ................................................. 8-12
Monitoring the Encoder Input Status ............... 7-22 SNTP ............................................................... 8-13
Line Scan Period Changes over Time  System Settings ................................................ 8-15
(Trend Graph) ............................................ 7-22 Controller Name .............................................. 8-15
Scaling Correction ............................................. 7-24 Choose the standard save format of the 
Convert measurements by multiplying them  standard image (standard image, 
by a constant factor .................................... 7-24 standard save format) ................................ 8-15
Specify the desired physical size based  Screen Capture Settings ................................. 8-15
on the actual measurement ....................... 7-25 Mouse Settings ................................................ 8-16
ERROR Output Settings .................................. 8-17
Operation Screen Setting .................................. 7-26
Notification Window Settings ........................... 8-17
Adding new operation screen .......................... 7-26 Decimal Display ............................................... 8-17
Manage the operation screen settings ............ 7-27 Change the display settings common 
Editing an operation screen ............................. 7-28 between the tools (Tool Common 
Editing display content at the common area .... 7-29 Display Settings) ........................................ 8-18
Editing display content of the data screen ....... 7-29 Startup Mode Settings ..................................... 8-18
Editing display content of the measured  Account Settings ............................................. 8-19
value .......................................................... 7-30 Protect from Incorrect Operation ..................... 8-19
Editing display content of the judgment  Limit Authority of Operator Account 
value .......................................................... 7-31 (Operator Settings) .................................... 8-20
Editing display content of the string ................. 7-32 Specify Startup Account After Power-on 
Statistics ............................................................ 7-33 (Startup Account Settings) ......................... 8-20
Set the measurement items for statistics. ........ 7-33 Date Settings ................................................... 8-21
Displaying statistics (Meas.Values List) .......... 7-34 Language ........................................................ 8-21
Displaying measured values along the time  Reboot ............................................................. 8-22
axis (Trend Graph) ..................................... 7-35 Switch to 2D mode .......................................... 8-22
Displaying the distribution of measured values System Information .......................................... 8-22
(Histogram) ................................................ 7-36
Evaluating quantitative process capability 
(Process Monitor) ....................................... 7-37 Chapter 9 Communication Control
Batch Test ......................................................... 7-38 List of Communication Control Commands ......... 9-2
Archived Image Setting ..................................... 7-39 Notes on command input/output ........................ 9-2
Operation mode and input allowed command 
Image Strip Settings .......................................... 7-40
(3D mode) .................................................... 9-3
Security Settings ............................................... 7-41 Trigger ............................................................... 9-4
System control ................................................... 9-4
16 LJ-X UM_GB
Table of Contents
Change inspection program ...............................9-7 Capture action of image .................................. 9-77

Capture control ..................................................9-8 Standard operation of the data output 
Measurement .....................................................9-9 terminals ....................................................9-80
I/O control ........................................................9-20 Operations of inputting using the control 
Utility ................................................................9-21 terminal ...................................................... 9-81
System .............................................................9-26 Overview of Control and Data Output by 
Control/Data Output via the PLC-Link ............... 9-29 EtherNet/IP ................................................... 9-86
Example of the PLC-Link usage ......................9-29 Operation flow ................................................. 9-87
Types of Compatible PLC-Link Connections .... 9-30 Prepare EtherNet/IP Unit 
Via RS-232C interface ....................................9-30 (when using CB-NEP20E) ............................ 9-88
Via Ethernet Interface ......................................9-32
Installing the EtherNet/IP Unit .........................9-88
Preparing the PLC ............................................. 9-33 CB-NEP20E EtherNet/IP Unit Specifications ..9-88
1. Wiring overview ...........................................9-33 Connecting to an EtherNet/IP Network ............ 9-88
2. Wiring for the PLC-Link and setting the  EtherNet/IP Communication Specifications ....... 9-89
link unit (RS-232C) .....................................9-33
Standard specifications ................................... 9-89
3. Wiring for the PLC-Link and setting the 
Allocation conditions of cyclic communication 
PLC side (Ethernet) ...................................9-36
data (3D mode) .......................................... 9-90
Outputting Measurement Data via PLC-Link ..... 9-38
Changing the EtherNet/IP Settings ................... 9-94
Data output procedure (Data Output Flow) ......9-38
Displaying the EtherNet/IP settings screen .....9-94
Using the PLC-Link via RS-232C 
(Measurement Data Output) ......................9-39 Outputting Measurement Data via EtherNet/
Using the PLC-Link via Ethernet  IP Cyclic Communication (Data Output) ...... 9-96
(Measurement Data Output) ......................9-40 Data output flow (example of connection with 
Data output setting ...........................................9-40 PLC EtherNet/IP unit) ................................ 9-96
Controlling this machine via PLC-Link  Controlling Controller with EtherNet/IP Cyclic
(PLC terminal) .............................................. 9-41 Communication (Command Control) ............ 9-98
Command execution procedure via PLC  Flow of command process using EtherNet/
terminal (Command Processing Flow) .......9-41 IP (example of connection with 
Using the PLC-Link via RS-232C  PLC EtherNet/IP unit) ................................ 9-98
(PLC Terminal) ...........................................9-42
Changing Execute Condition No. Using 
Using the PLC-Link via Ethernet 
(PLC Terminal) ...........................................9-43 EtherNet/IP Cyclic Communication 
Controlling this machine via PLC-Link  (Execute No. Change) ................................ 9-100
(Polling) ........................................................ 9-44 Flow of execute No. change using 
EtherNet/IP (example of connection with 
Command execution procedure via Polling
PLC EtherNet/IP unit) .............................. 9-100
(Command Processing Flow) .....................9-44
Using the PLC-Link via RS-232C (Polling) ......9-45 Troubleshooting ............................................... 9-101
Using PLC-Link via Ethernet (Polling) .............9-46 When correct operation does not occur ......... 9-101
Troubleshooting ................................................ 9-47 Error Messages .............................................9-102
When correct operation does not occur ...........9-47 Communicating with the Controller Using 
Error Messages ...............................................9-48 EtherNet/IP Message Communication ....... 9-103
Control/Data Output via I/O Terminals .............. 9-49 Object configuration .......................................9-103
Main functions available with I/O terminals ......9-49 ClassID: 4 (04H) Assembly Object 
Terminal Block Interface ..................................9-50 (3D Mode) ................................................9-104
Main functions of the input/output terminal  ClassID: 113 (71H) Measurement Object ......9-108
block ...........................................................9-52 Controlling the controller using EtherNet/IP message
Parallel I/O Interface ........................................9-53 communication ......................................... 9-114
Main Parallel Interface Action ..........................9-55 Resetting the controller using EtherNet/
Encoder terminal block interface .....................9-57 IP message communication ..................... 9-115
Input/Output Circuit Input Connections ............9-59 Controlling image capture with EtherNet/
Input/Output Circuit Output Connections .........9-60 IP message communication ..................... 9-115
Encoder Input Connections ............................9-62 Command control with EtherNet/IP message
communication ......................................... 9-116
Using Command Inputs via I/O Terminals ........ 9-65
Acquiring measurement data by EtherNet/
Command input timing .....................................9-65 IP message communications 
I/O command inputs available .........................9-67 (Acquire Data) ..........................................9-117
I/O command control procedures ....................9-70 Changing the execute number using 
Outputting Data Values via I/O Terminals ......... 9-71 EtherNet/IP message communication (
Output order .....................................................9-71 Change Execute Condition Number) ....... 9-118
Example of output ............................................9-71 Overview of control and data output by 
Timing Chart ...................................................... 9-72 PROFINET ................................................. 9-119
Operations at startup .......................................9-72 Operation flow ............................................... 9-119
Standard operation at trigger input ..................9-74
LJ-X UM_GB 17
Table of Contents
Prepare PROFINET Connection  Changing the execute condition No. using 

(when using CB-NPN20E) ......................... 9-120 EtherCAT cyclic communication 
Installing the PROFINET Unit ........................ 9-120 (Execute Condition No. Change) ............... 9-149
CB-NPN20E PROFINET Unit  Flow of execute condition No. change using
Specifications ........................................... 9-120 EtherCAT (Example of connection with 
Connecting to an PROFINET Network .......... 9-120 PLC EtherCAT unit) ................................. 9-149
PROFINET communication specifications ...... 9-121 Troubleshooting ............................................... 9-150
Standard specifications ................................. 9-121 Problems and Countermeasures ................... 9-150
Cyclic communication data allocation  Error Messages ............................................. 9-151
conditions (3D mode) ............................... 9-122
Changing the PROFINET settings .................. 9-126
Displaying the PROFINET settings screen .... 9-126 Chapter 10 Specifications
Output of measurement data using PROFINET  Specifications .................................................... 10-2
cyclic communications (Data Output) ........ 9-128 Controller specifications .................................. 10-2
Data output flow (example of connection  Communication expansion unit 
with PLC PROFINET unit) ....................... 9-128 specifications ............................................. 10-4
Controlling the controller with PROFINET  Head Specifications ......................................... 10-5
Cable Specifications ...................................... 10-18
cyclic communication  Monitor Specifications ................................... 10-18
(Command Control) ................................... 9-130 Diagram of External Dimensions ..................... 10-19
Flow of command process using  Head .............................................................. 10-19
PROFINET (Example of connection with  Controller(LJ-X8000,LJ-X8000E) .................. 10-29
PLC PROFINET unit) ............................... 9-130 Head cable .................................................... 10-31
Changing the execute condition No. using  Head extension cable .................................... 10-31
PROFINET cyclic communication  Head extension cable 
(L-shape connector cable) ....................... 10-31
(Execute Condition No. Change) ............... 9-132
Dedicated Mouse(OP-87506) ........................ 10-32
Flow of execute condition No. change  Monitor (CA-MP120)/Monitor Stand 
using PROFINET (Example of  (OP-87262) .............................................. 10-33
connection with PLC PROFINET unit) ..... 9-132 Power supply (CA-U4) ................................... 10-34
Troubleshooting .............................................. 9-133 Characteristics ................................................. 10-35
When correct operation does not occur ......... 9-133 Spot diameter ................................................ 10-35
Error Message ............................................... 9-134 Mutual interference region ............................. 10-41
Overview of Control/Data Output Using  Reference plane for the head ........................ 10-49
EtherCAT ................................................... 9-135 Options ............................................................ 10-56
Operation Flow .............................................. 9-135 Cables ........................................................... 10-56
Prepare EtherCAT Connection ....................... 9-136 Other ............................................................. 10-56
Installing the EtherCAT Unit .......................... 9-136
CB-NEC20E EtherCAT Unit Specifications ... 9-136
Connecting to an EtherCAT Network ............ 9-136 Appendix
EtherCAT Communication Specifications ....... 9-137 Fast Sampling Frequency ...................................A-2
Standard controller specifications .................. 9-137 LJ-X Series ........................................................A-2
EtherCAT Connection Supporting Models ..... 9-138 LJ-V Series ........................................................A-9
Process Data Object Map .............................. 9-138 Calculation Overview .........................................A-10
Cyclic communication data allocation state 
(3D mode) ................................................ 9-139 Operation Notations ..........................................A-11
Changing the EtherCAT Settings .................... 9-143 Supported Character Sets ...............................A-12
Operation Notations .........................................A-12
Opening the EtherCAT Setting Screen .......... 9-143 Programming ...................................................A-12
EtherCAT setting items that can be set  Temporary variables ........................................A-13
with this system ........................................ 9-143 Expressions and Operators .............................A-14
Output of measurement data using EtherCAT  Statements ......................................................A-15
cyclic communications (Data Output) ....... 9-145 Operation Function List .....................................A-18
Data output flow (example of connection  Mathematical functions ....................................A-20
with PLC EtherCAT unit) .......................... 9-145 Trigonometric functions ...................................A-24
Controlling the controller with EtherCAT cyclic Two-dimensional geometric operation 
communication (Command Control) .......... 9-147 function ......................................................A-26
Three-dimensional geometric operation 
Flow of command process using EtherCAT function ......................................................A-41
(Example of connection with  Calendar Functions .........................................A-48
PLC EtherCAT unit) ................................. 9-147 BIT functions ...................................................A-49
Other ...............................................................A-50
18 LJ-X UM_GB
Table of Contents
Operation Symbol/Output Item Comparison

Table(Measured Value/Judgment Value) ..... A-51
Pre-processing filter for contrast images ........... A-95
Filter Details ...................................................... A-99
Extract chips and dirts with difference 
filters ......................................................... A-99
Reduce the effect of illuminance variation 
with the illumination correction filter ........ A-100
Remove background information with the 
real-time difference filter ......................... A-101
Remove shading with a real-time contrast 
correction filter ........................................ A-102
Emphasizing only linear defects with a line 
defect extraction filter .............................. A-104
Remove or extract bright or dark pixel 
block with noise control filter ................... A-105
Technical Explanation ..................................... A-106
What is an edge? .......................................... A-106
What is trend edge measurement? ............... A-107
What is a defect measurement? ................... A-109
Supplementary Explanation of Recognition 
Category Tool ............................................ A-111
ASCII code table 
(hexadecimal/decimal notation) .............. A-111
Set conversion table to determine 
encrypted date and time information by 
built-in calendar (date and time 
encryption setting) ................................... A-112
Register the character pattern used for 
character recognition in the dictionary .... A-113
Saved File Types ............................................ A-117
Remedy when the screen display is slow ....... A-118
Perform recalculations manually ................... A-118
Error Messages ............................................... A-119
System error ................................................. A-119
Typical errors ................................................ A-130
Execution Error ............................................. A-135
LJ-X UM_GB 19
Table of Contents
20 LJ-X UM_GB
1
Chapter
Checking the Package Contents ................................ 1-2

Standard package .................................................... 1-2
Before Use
List of Options .......................................................... 1-3
System Configuration.................................................. 1-5
Before Use
Part Names and Functions.......................................... 1-6
Controller Unit (LJ-X8000)........................................ 1-6
Head......................................................................... 1-8
Communication Expansion Unit 
(CB-NEC20E/CB-NEP20E/CB-NPN20E)................. 1-9
LJ-X UM_GB 1-1

Checking the Package Contents
Checking the Package Contents
- LJ-X8200 (hexagon socket head bolt M5 x 60, 3 pieces)

Standard package
• Controller unit (LJ-X8000)
Before Use

- SD card (4 GB, mounted in the SD1 slot of this unit)
- Dedicated mouse
- Ferrite core (2)
- Instruction Manual
• Head
- LJ-V7020 / LJ-V7020B / LJ-V7020K / LJ-V7020KB

(hexagon socket head bolt M4 x 50, 2 pieces)
- LJ-V7060 / LJ-V7060B / LJ-V7060K / LJ-V7060KB

- LJ-X8080 (hexagon socket head bolt M4 x 65, 3 pieces) (hexagon socket head bolt M4 x 50, 2 pieces)
1-2 LJ-X UM_GB

- LJ-V7080 / LJ-V7080B
List of Options
- LCD monitor (CA-MP120)
- LJ-V7200 / LJ-V7200B
Before Use
• Monitor cable
(OP-66842: 3 m cable, OP-87055: 10 m cable)
- LJ-V7300 / LJ-V7300B
• Monitor stand (OP-87262)
• Warning labels (page 10)

• Head cable
- CB-B3: 3 m cable
- CB-B10: 10 m cable • RS-232C cable (2.5 m, straight)
• RS-232C conversion adapter
• Head extension cable Please select according to the connected

Reference
device."Preparing the PLC" (page 9-33)
- CB-B5E: 5 m extension cable
- CB-B10E: 10m extension cable
- CB-B20E: 20m extension cable
01
64
-2
P
O
• USB cable (OP-66844: 2 m)
• Extension cable L-shape connector

- CB-B05LU: 0.5 m extension cable L-shape connector (top)
- CB-B05LR: 0.5 m extension cable L-shape connector (right)
- CB-B05LR: 0.5 m extension cable L-shape connector (left)
LJ-X UM_GB 1-3

• Communication Expansion Unit

- EtherCAT :CB-NEC20E
- EtherNet/IP :CB-NEP20E
- PROFINET :CB-NPN20E
Before Use
1-4 LJ-X UM_GB

System Configuration
System Configuration
Dedicated mouse
(included with the
Before Use
Controller Unit
controller)
24 VDC power supply

CA-U4
Monitor cable
LCD Monitor
CA-MP120
Head cable
Head extension cable
Head (up to two heads of the same model

can be connected)
LJ-X UM_GB 1-5

Part Names and Functions
Part Names and Functions
Controller Unit (LJ-X8000)
(1) (2) Do not connect anything other than the

Before Use
dedicated mouse into the USB port for mouse.

(9) When other devices including a commercial USB
NOTICE
(8) mouse are connected, it may result in a
(3) (15)
breakdown or malfunction of the controller and/or
connection device.
(10)
(11) (10) USB port for mouse (backup)
(17)
(4) (16) Backup port to connect the USB mouse.
(7)
(12) (11) SD2 slot

(13)
(5) (18) Insert (options) SD card (for storing inspection settings and
(19) measurement data).
(12) SD1 slot

(6) (14) Insert SD card (for storing inspection settings and global
settings).
(1) POWER LED Note: the LJ-X/LJ-V ships with an SD card
Reference
Lights up in green when power is correctly supplied to the already inserted.
unit. LJ-X8000: 4 GB
(2) ERROR LED (13) USB HDD port

Indicates the controller status. Connect USB 3.0 or USB 2.0 compatible hard discs.
(Light off: In normal operation state; Light on (red): Error) The unit’s power GND (0 V) is shared in common
with the connector shield and signal GND.
(3) Parallel I/O connector
If there is a potential difference with the
The parallel I/O Interface connection (40-pin) used in signal NOTICE
connection for the USB HDD, this may result is
input/output. breakdowns or malfunctions of the unit and the
USB HDD.
(4) Output terminal
Terminal for external output (9-pin). • If there are concerns about the potential
Reference
difference with the connections, then use a
(5) Input terminal
USB HDD which supports bus-powered
Terminal for external output (6-pin). drives. The bus power supply capability of this
unit is 900 mA (USB 3.0 compliant). Contact
(6) Power and ground terminals
the manufacturer of the USB HDD to check
Used to connect power (24 VDC) and the ground wire to whether the USB HDD works on bus power.
the system. Do not use a USB hub as it may lead to
insufficient power supply and/or lower data
(7) Head B port (upper port)
transfer rate.
Head A port (lower port) • For details on connecting/removing USB HDD,
The port used to connect the sensor head cable to the refer to "Connecting/removing USB HDD"
controller. (page 2-12).
Use the head A connector if you use only one

(14) Ethernet port
NOTICE The port to connect the Ethernet cable.
head.
(8) USB port (15) RS-232C port

The port used to connect the USB cable. The port to connect RS-232C cable (OP-26487: 2.5 m, sold
(9) USB port for mouse separately).
The port used to connect the included dedicated mouse. (16) RGB output terminal
The port to connect the external monitor.
1-6 LJ-X UM_GB

(17) Encoder connection connector

The connector to input an encoder signal.
(18) I/O connector

Used to supply 5 V to the encoder and laser ON input.
(19) heat radiation fan

A fan for controller cooling is installed.
Before Use
LJ-X UM_GB 1-7

Head
(1) Laser radiation LED
(1) (6) Lights or flashes while the LJ-X/LJ-V Series device is in
operation.
• Lights green: When the target object is at around the center of
the measurement area.
• Lights orange: When the target object is in the measurement
Before Use
(2) area.
• Flashes orange: When the target object is out of the specified
(3)
(4) measurement area.
(5)
• Lights red: When any system error has occurred at the head.
For details, refer to "Lighting Status of Laser Radiation
LED".
(2) Head cable connector

Connects to the head cable. For details, refer to
"Connecting LJ-X/LJ-V Series heads and head cables"
(page 2-4).
(3) Transmitter
Emits the laser beam for measurement. This part is
protected with a glass cover.
(4) LED for laser emission spot check

Emits the LED beam to show the measurement area
clearer.
(5) Sensor (receiver)

Receives the laser beam for measurement. This part is
protected with a glass cover.
(6) Light shading sheet metal mounting holes

Used for mounting light shading sheet metal, etc. Do not
use it for fixing the head.
1-8 LJ-X UM_GB

Communication Expansion Unit (CB-NEC20E/CB-NEP20E/CB-NPN20E)

EtherCAT Unit (CB-NEC20E: option) (1) Connector on controller side
Install the communication expansion unit on the right side
of the controller.
(2) Point Only one EtherCAT unit can be connected to the
(3) controller.
(2) RUN indicator lamp (RUN)
Before Use
Indicates the EtherCAT communication state of the
(4)
controller (green).
(1) • ON: OPERATIONAL state.
The PDO communication and mailbox communication are
(5)
properly running.
• Flashing (single flash)*1: SAFE-OPERATIONAL state.
• Flashing (blinking)*2: PRE-OPERATIONAL state.
• OFF: INIT state.
*1 Repeats 0.2 seconds ON  1 second OFF.
*2 Repeats 0.2 seconds ON  0.2 seconds OFF.
(3) ERR indicator lamp (ERR)

• Indicates the error state of the EtherCAT communication of
the controller (red).
• Flashing (double flash)*1: Watchdog timeout.
- Make sure that the master is properly connected.
- Make sure that the master is properly running.
• Flashing (blinking)*2: Configuration error.
Make sure that no irregular process data object is assigned
to the Sync Manager.
• OFF: No error has occurred.
*1 Repeats 0.2 seconds ON  0.2 seconds OFF  0.2
seconds ON  1 second OFF.
*2 Repeats 0.2 seconds ON  0.2 seconds OFF.
When [External Input Request] is not assigned to

Reference
the process data object, the LED lighting state
does not change even when the connection with
the master is disconnected.
(4) IN port
Connect a LAN cable.
(5) OUT port

LJ-X UM_GB 1-9

EtherNet/IP Unit (CB-NEP20E: option) (1) Connector on controller side

of the controller.
(2) Point Only one EtherNet/IP unit can be connected to

(3) the controller.
(2) Network Status LED (NS)

Indicates the EtherNet/IP communication status.
(4)
• Not lit: The power is turned off or the IP address has not
Before Use
(1) been set.

• Lit in green: A connection has been established.
(5)
• Blinks in green: No connection has been established.
• Lit in red: A fatal error (such as duplicate IP addresses) has
occurred.
• Blinks in red: A time-out occurred during connection.
(3) Module Status LED (MS)

Indicates the status of the communication expansion unit.
• Not lit: The power is turned off.
• Lit in green: The scanner is in the Run state and is being
controlled.
• Blinks in green: The device has not been set or the scanner
is in the Idle state.
• Lit in red: A serious malfunction (such as the EXCEPTION
state and fatal errors) has occurred.
• Blinks in red: This is a recoverable malfunction. The module
has been set but the saved parameters are different from
the parameters that are being used.
(4) P1 port
(5) P2 port
1-10 LJ-X UM_GB

PROFINET Unit (CB-NPN20E: option) (1) Connector on controller side

of the controller.
② Point Only one PROFINET unit can be connected to
③ the controller.
(2) Network Status LED (NS)

Indicates the PROFINET communication status.
④
• Not lit: The power is turned off.
Before Use
① A connection between I/O and the controller has not been
established.
⑤
• Lit in green: A connection between I/O and the controller has
been established and the unit is in the RUN state.
• Blinks in green one time: A connection between I/O and the
controller has been established, but the unit is in the STOP
state or IO data is not normal.
• Blinks in green: Identification of network nodes is being
performed from the engineering tool.
• Lit in red: A serious internal error has occurred. (Use this in
combination with the Module Status LED lighting in red.)
• Blinks in red one time: The Station Name has not been set.
• Blinks in red two times: The IP address has not been set.
• Blinks in red three times: The settings specified from the I/O
controller differ from the actual settings.
(3) Module Status LED (MS)

Indicates the status of the communication expansion unit.
• Not lit: The power is turned off or the communication
expansion unit has not been initialized.
• Lit in green: The initialization of the communication
expansion unit is complete.
• Blinks in green one time: A diagnosis event exists.
• Lit in red: (When the Network Status LED is lit in red)
A serious internal error has occurred.
: (When the Network Status LED is not lit in red)
The communication expansion unit is in the EXCEPTION
state.
• Lights in red and green alternately: The firmware is being
updated. Do not turn the power off. Turning off the power
during this phase may lead to malfunctions.
(4) P1 port
(5) P2 port
LJ-X UM_GB 1-11

Before Use
1-12 LJ-X UM_GB

2
Chapter
Mounting the Head....................................................... 2-2

Installation cautions.................................................. 2-2
Installing the LJ-X8000 Series
Mounting................................................................... 2-3
Installing the Controller Unit....................................... 2-5

Caution on direction of controller mounting.............. 2-5
Precautions in regard to cooling the unit in the
installation site.......................................................... 2-6

Installing the controller ............................................. 2-6
Connecting the controller and the head ................... 2-7
Installing the Communication Expansion Unit .......... 2-8
Connecting the power source to the controller......... 2-8
How to Use the Terminal Block .................................. 2-9
Inserting and Removing an SD Card........................ 2-10

Inserting an SD card............................................... 2-10
Removing an SD card ............................................ 2-11
Connecting and Removing the USB HDD................ 2-12

Connecting USB HDD ............................................ 2-12
Removing USB HDD .............................................. 2-13
LJ-X UM_GB 2-1

Mounting the Head
Mounting the Head
Installation cautions
Be sure to read the installation cautions carefully and install
the head correctly.
Installation cautions
Depending on their shape, some target objects create a

dead zone in the measurement range. Make sure that the
dead zone does not affect the measurement result.
The sensor head uses a fan-shaped laser beam and
Make sure that the laser beam reflected from a wall is not
receiver system. For this reason, the dead zone will be
detected as stray light and affecting the measurement.
smaller near the center of the X axis measurement range.
• "Image mask"
Point The LJ-X 8020, LJ-X 8060, LJ-X 8080, LJ-V 7020 • “Peak selection” (page 4-12)
series, and LJ-V 7060 series are emitted nearly
parallel to the laser beam, so the influence of the
blind spot is reduced.
• "Dead Zone Interpolation" (page 4-14)
Profile image
Stray light
More dead Less dead zone

zone
Mount the unit making sure that the laser beam irradiating
the target object and the laser beam reflected from the Stray light
target object and entering the receiver are not obstructed
by a wall surface, etc.
• “Head” (page 4-2)
• “Measurement range” (page 4-8)
2-2 LJ-X UM_GB

Mounting the Head
Mounting
Fixing the LJ-X/LJ-V Series head • LJ-X8200
Align the head and the target object distance in reference to

the LJ-X/LJ-V Series head measurement range and secure
it to the metal plate via the bolts which come with the head.
• LJ-X8020

Hexagon socket
head bolt
(included) M5 x 60
(3 pieces)
• LJ-X8400
Hexagon socket
head bolt
(included)
M4 × 65 (3 pieces)
• LJ-X8060
Hexagon socket
head bolt
(included) M5 x 60
Hexagon socket head bolt (3 pieces)
(included)
M4 × 65 (3 pieces) • LJ-X8900
• LJ-X8080
Hexagon socket
head bolt Hexagon socket
(included) head bolt
M4 × 65 (3 pieces) (included)
M5 × 60 (3 pieces)
LJ-X UM_GB 2-3

Mounting the Head
• LJ-V7020 / LJ-V7020B / LJ-V7020K / LJ-V7020KB • LJ-V7200 / LJ-V7200B / LJ-V7300 / LJ-V7300B
Hexagon socket
head bolt
(included)
LJ-V7200: 
M4 × 50 (3 pieces)
Hexagon socket head
LJ-V7300: 
bolt
M5 × 65 (3 pieces)
(included)
M4 × 50 (2 pieces)
• LJ-V7060 / LJ-V7060B / LJ-V7060K / LJ-V7060KB

The tightening torque of the mounting screws
Reference
should be in the following ranges:
M4 screw: 1.2 to 1.8 Nm
M5 screw: 2.0 to 3.0Nm
Connecting the head to the head cable

Adjust the orientation of the
Hexagon socket head bolt connector, then push it all
(included) the way in while slowly With tools
M4 × 50 (2 pieces) Tightening
turning. Tighten the screws
with a torque of 1 to 1.5
• LJ-V7080 / LJ-V7080B
Nm.
• Check the direction of the connector. Inserting

the port in the wrong orientation may break the
port pins and result in a malfunction.
• Insert the connector so that it does not tilt,
NOTICE tighten it with your hand, and then firmly
tighten it with a tool such as pliers.
• If the tightening is weak, the connector may be
loosened by vibration etc., leading to contact
Hexagon socket head bolt
failure or head connection error.
(included)
M4 × 50 (2 pieces)
2-4 LJ-X UM_GB

Installing the Controller Unit
Installing the Controller Unit
Install the controller to the DIN rail, or use the holes on the bottom of the controller to secure it with screws.
• Do not install the controller in a location with lots of dust or water vapor. The controller does not have a mechanism to
protect it from dust or water. Dust or water entering the controller can cause damage to the controller.
NOTICE • Turn off the controller when connecting or disconnecting a cable or terminal block. Connecting or disconnecting the
head connector, cable, or terminal block while power is supplied may cause damage to the controller or peripheral
devices.

Caution on direction of controller mounting
The controller should be installed in the direction of the circled figure below. Do not install the controller in any other
direction.
LJ-X UM_GB 2-5

Precautions in regard to cooling the unit in the installation site

• For proper ventilation, allow a space of 50 mm or more on top of
the controller and a space of 50 mm or more on both sides.
Keep the space free of objects for 90 mm or more in the front of 50mm 50mm
the connector panel in order to connect the cables safely.
• If you mount two or more controllers side by side, allow a space
of 50 mm or more between the controllers and a space of 50 50mm 50mm 50mm
mm or more on top of the controllers.
50mm* 50mm*
* If a space of 50 mm or more is secured in the bottom direction

by mounting a DIN rail, etc., it can be used at a higher ambient
temperature.
• Do not block the air vents (top and bottom) on the controller body. Doing so may cause heat to build up inside the unit,
resulting which may in malfunction.
• If the temperature in the control panel (temperature at the upper front of the controller) exceeds the rating of the
NOTICE operating ambient temperature, secure ventilation by forced air cooling or widening the distance from the ambient, and
lower the operating ambient temperature below the rating.
• When mounting on the bottom, secure ventilation from the bottom to the top, for example, by providing a through hole at
the vent position on the bottom of the controller unit.
Installing the controller
Mounting the controller to the DIN rail Mounting using the bottom panel
The controller is designed to be mounted on a DIN rail. Pull
the tab on the bottom in the direction of the arrow to mount
or dismount the controller.
Nail
M4 screw
Mount the controller in a stable location that is

NOTICE
free from vibration.
2-6 LJ-X UM_GB

Connecting the controller and the head 2 Connect the dedicated mouse to the USB port for
the dedicated mouse on the controller unit.
Point Notes when connecting cables
• Make sure that there is no power to the
controller before connecting the cables.
Connecting a cable or terminal block while
power is supplied may cause damage to the
head or peripheral devices.
• Bundle the cables with protective material like
a spiral tube. Direct bundling will concentrate
the load on the bindings of the cable, which
can result in cable damage or short circuit. To USB connector for mouse only

• In the absence of other specifications, the
minimum cable bend radius (R) should be 3 3 Connect the monitor to the RGB output terminal on
times the external diameter (5 times is the controller unit.
recommended). Additionally, repeated flexing
and twisting should be avoided. The minimum The unit’s power GND (0 V) is shared in common
bend radius is the same, even when using with the connector shield and signal GND. If
high-flex cable. Unless otherwise stated, there is a potential difference with the connection
choose the R100 or greater when you use a NOTICE for the external monitor, this may result in
cableveyor. breakdowns or malfunctions of the unit and the
connected external monitor. (Recommended
1 Connect the LJ-X/LJ-V Series head(s) to the head monitor: CA-MP120)
ports on the controller.
Connect to connector A if only one head is used.
Point The monitor output of this unit is XGA (1024 x
768 pixels). If a commercial RGB analog monitor
other than an XGA monitor is used, the display
quality may worsen depending on the monitor’s
specifications. The resulting images may not be
displayed properly.
To connector A
Do not connect any device other than LJ-X

NOTICE Series or LJ-V Series head as it may cause a
failure.
LJ-X UM_GB 2-7

1 Connect 24 VDC and 0 V to the power terminals.

Installing the Communication
Expansion Unit
• Turn off the controller when connecting or

disconnecting an expansion unit. Connecting
or disconnecting an expansion unit while
connected to a power source may damage the
NOTICE controller or peripheral devices.
• When an expansion unit is not connected,
keep the connector protection cover attached.
Connecting to 24 VDC Connecting to 0 VDC
Using the controller with the connector
exposed may cause damage to the controller.
2
Connect the ground wire to the grounding terminal.
Installing the Communication Expansion Unit

When using communication via a communication
expansion unit, use an optional communication expansion
unit (EtherCAT: CB-NEC20E, EtherNet/IP: CB-NEP20E,
PROFINET: CB-NPN20E).
Remove the protective cover from the expansion unit
connector on the right side of the controller and install the
communication expansion unit. Connect ground wire here
• Ground each device separately.

• Use a Class D ground.
• Keep ground resistance to 100 or less.
• Keep the ground wire as short as possible.
• If it is not possible to ground each device
separately, ground them together. However,
make sure that the electrical cables are the
same length.
Main unit Other device Main unit Other device
NOTICE A B
A = B
Ground per Class D Ground per Class D
Ground resistance 100Ω Ground resistance 100Ω
Connecting the power source to the

controller
Main unit Other device
• Use electrical wiring AWG14 to AWG22. B

A
Round terminal Y terminal
A > B
5.8 mm or less 5.8 mm or less A < B
NOTICE • Make sure to connect the frame ground

terminal for the 24 VDC power source to a type
D ground.
• Tighten the screws with a torque of 0.5 to 0.75
[Nm].
2-8 LJ-X UM_GB

How to Use the Terminal Block
How to Use the Terminal Block
This section explains how to use the terminal block. 3 After stripping the insulating sheath 7 mm, insert
Use a wire with 80°C or higher temperature

the wires and then tighten the screws.
CAUTION
rating.
Important • Use a flat head screwdriver to connect the

power supply to the input terminals.
• Use a torque of 0.25 N·m or less to tighten the

screws.
• Use electrical wiring AWG16 to AWG28.
• Do not solder (pre-solder) the processed end
of the wire.
• The wire should be inserted all the way into
the terminal block.
• Attach the wire to the terminal block directly,
without using a solderless terminal, etc.
Approx. 7 mm
1 Remove the connector terminal block from the
controller. Point Pull the wire lightly and make sure that it has
been secured.
4 After connecting all the necessary wires, securely

insert the connector terminal block into the I/O
connector as far as it will go.
Terminal
block
2 Loosen the screw of the connector terminal block

using a flat head screwdriver.
Flathead screwdriver
LJ-X UM_GB 2-9

Inserting and Removing an SD Card
Inserting and Removing an SD Card
• Users can save the program settings or captured image

Inserting an SD card
data on an SD card.
• Since the SD memory card uses flash memory

as a storage element, repeated reading and
Inserting an SD card
writing may reach the end of life and the Insert an SD card into the SD1 and SD2 slot of the unit so
stored data may be lost. Back up the saved
that the triangle inscription is on the top of the card.
data on the SD card to another storage media
on a periodic basis.
NOTICE
• SD card 1 contains the unit’s environment
settings and other data necessary for the unit
SD2 slot
to operate. Make sure it is inserted at startup
and when powering up.
• Data that must be loaded by swapping SD
cards should be stored on SD card 2.
Insert an SD card.
Supported SD card models
SD1 slot
Our OP-87133 (512 MB, sold separately), CA-SD1G (1 GB, (Cannot be inserted /
removed while the power
sold separately), CA-SD4G (4 GB, sold separately) and is ON.)
CA-SD16G (16 GB, sold separately) are supported on the
• Be sure the card is oriented correctly when
controller. Note, the controller ships with CA-SD4G inserted inserting it. Inserting the card in the wrong
in the SD1 slot. direction may damage the data and SD card.
• The access drive light lights up while there is
• Do not use with SD card models other than
an SD card in the drive.
shown above. Doing so may result in data loss
- Green: An SD card is inserted and
or setting data damage.
NOTICE accessible.
• For details about file management and NOTICE
- Red: The SD card is being accessed.
formatting in an SD card, refer to "File
- Not lit: The SD card is not accessible (the
Management" (page 7-43).
SD card can be removed from the slot).
• When inserting the SD card into the SD1 slot,
first turn off the controller. Make sure the SD
card 1 is loaded at startup and when powering
up.
2-10 LJ-X UM_GB

Inserting and Removing an SD Card
Removing an SD card
Choose [Remove SD Card 2] operation, then press the SD
card in the SD2 slot inward to release and remove the card.
• Take the following steps to protect the SD card

and the data it contains.
• If you remove the SD card using a procedure
other than that specified, or if power is turned
off when the card is being accessed, any
NOTICE
writing task will stop resulting in a possible
loss of data or damage to the SD card.
• SD card 1 should not be removed while the

controller is turned on. When removing it, make
sure to turn off the unit first.
1 Select "Remove External Media" - "SD Card 2"

from utilities.
A confirmation screen appears.
2 Select [OK].
The LED indicator turns off, indicating that SD card 2 can
now be removed.
3 Remove the SD card which is in the unit's SD2 slot.
(1) Make sure that the

access lamp is off.
(2) Open the cover
(3) Press the SD card

to unlock it.
(4) Remove the SD card.
LJ-X UM_GB 2-11

Connecting and Removing the USB HDD
Connecting and Removing the USB HDD
The USB HDD can be used to save the inspection results,

captured image data, etc.
Connecting USB HDD
Connect the USB cable corresponding to the USB HDD to
• The unit’s power GND (0 V) is shared in
be connected to the USB HDD connector (blue terminal) of
common with the connector shield and signal
GND. If there is a potential difference with the the unit.
connection for the USB HDD, this may result is
breakdowns or malfunctions of the unit and the
NOTICE
USB HDD.
• The data stored on the USB HDD may be lost
due to end of service life or failure. Back up the
saved data on the USB HDD to another
storage media on a periodic basis. USB HDD connector
If a potential difference is expected to occur with

the connection destination, make sure to use a
USB HDD that supports bus power.
The power feeding capability of the bus power of Connect the
the unit is 900 mA (USB3.0-compliant). Contact USB cable.
Reference
the manufacturer of the USB HDD to check
whether the USB HDD works on bus power. Use a USB cable that supports the connected
Do not use a USB hub as it may lead to USB HDD. Correct operation of the controller
insufficient power supply and/or lower data and/or the USB HDD cannot be guaranteed when
NOTICE
transfer rate. another type of cable is used. Contact the
manufacturer of the USB HDD for the supported
USB cables.
Supported USB HDD
Be sure to format the connected USB HDD with
A USB2.0 or USB3.0 external HDD can be connected to Important
this unit before using it ("Checking and formatting
the USB HDD connector of the unit. SD cards and USB HDD (Memory Utility)" (page
However, this does not mean all external HDD products 7-47)). The controller may not be able to correctly
compliant with this standard are guaranteed to function recognize the USB HDD in its factory default
configuration and/or formatted using a PC.
correctly with this unit.
Point In this unit, the USB HDD can only be connected
The maximum disk capacity that can be
to the USB HDD connector with the blue terminal.
recognized on this unit is 2 TB. If multiple
The USB HDD cannot be connected to the
NOTICE partitions exist on the USB HDD, only the
MOUSE (USB) connector with a black terminal or
partition detected first by the unit will be
any other USB connectors.
recognized as a disk.
Point The power-saving function featured on some

USB HDD products may cause slower data
writing speed from the unit. It is recommended to
disable any function that is equivalent to the
power saving function.
2-12 LJ-X UM_GB

Removing USB HDD

Remove the USB cable and the USB HDD after executing
[Remove USB HDD].
• Be sure to follow the procedure to protect the

USB HDD and the data it contains.
• If you remove the USB HDD using a procedure
other than that specified, or if the power is
NOTICE
turned off while the USB HDD is being
accessed, the file saving operation will stop
resulting in a possible loss of data or damage
to the USB HDD.

1 Select "Remove External Media" - "USB HDD" from
utilities.
2 Select [OK].
3 When the confirmation screen appears to notify

that it is ready for removal, select [Close] to close
the confirmation screen.
USB HDD can be removed.
LJ-X UM_GB 2-13

2-14 LJ-X UM_GB

3
Chapter
Multi-region output item settings (measured 

value and judged value) ......................................... 3-39
Basic Operations and Settings
Correct the Position (Position Adjustment) ............ 3-40
Managing Program Settings ..................................... 3-42
Saving a setting ...................................................... 3-42
Copying a setting .................................................... 3-42
Deleting a program ................................................. 3-42
Writing settings to SD card ..................................... 3-43
Loading settings from SD card ............................... 3-43
Renaming a program .............................................. 3-44
Converting program settings .................................. 3-44

Device Overview .......................................................... 3-2
Custom Menu ............................................................. 3-45
Device Operation Flow ................................................ 3-3
Overview of custom menu ...................................... 3-45
Screen View .................................................................. 3-4
Creating a menu that collected only necessary 
Setup mode screen .................................................. 3-4
items ....................................................................... 3-45
Run mode screen ..................................................... 3-6
3D Screen View ............................................................ 3-7
Power On and Initial Set-Up ........................................ 3-9
Language selection .................................................. 3-9
Using the Mouse ........................................................ 3-10
Enter a Number or Text ............................................. 3-11
Enter a number ...................................................... 3-11
Enter text ................................................................ 3-11
Context-Sensitive Menu (Context Menu) .................. 3-12
Start/Stop Operation .................................................. 3-14
Start operation ........................................................ 3-14
Stop operation ........................................................ 3-14
Check Past Image in the Image Strip ....................... 3-15
Use the image strip in Run mode ........................... 3-15
Using the image strip in Setup mode ..................... 3-16
Inspection/Measurement Condition Setting ............ 3-17
Select the setting number (inspection setting) ....... 3-17
Adding new program settings ................................. 3-17
Changing to existing program settings ................... 3-18
Register image for measurement 
(standard image registration) ................................. 3-18
Setting the measurement conditions (tool) ............. 3-19
Manage tools .......................................................... 3-24
Edit the measurement area .................................... 3-26
Deleting unnecessary feature information/boundary
information (Eraser Tool) ....................................... 3-29
Creating feature information from contour information of
graphics or images using ShapeTrax3/ShapeTrax2
(Feature drawing tool) ............................................ 3-30
Set Multi-regions as Measurement Regions 
(Multi-region Mode) .................................................... 3-33
Multi-region mode support tools ............................. 3-33
Enables multi-region mode for the specified tool ... 3-34
Batch adjustment of Regions (batch adjustment) .. 3-35
Communization/individualizing settings per 
region ..................................................................... 3-37
Judgment condition graph ...................................... 3-37
Screen display of information on multi-regions ...... 3-38
LJ-X UM_GB 3-1

Device Overview
Device Overview
This series consists of a controller that performs processing according to settings and software (LJ-H1X) that performs
simulation on a PC and receives output data.
Control I/O Result output
Controller Application software

Result output
Ethernet
Simulation-Software
USB
Program Settings
Terminal-Software
SD card ・Execute the simulation on the PC using the

profile captured in the field
・Edit Inspection Settings
Perform on-site adjustments and Remote desktop
・Check the output data (simple collection of
additions to the controller measurement data)
Ethernet
USB
LJ-X Series controller (this product) LJ-X Series Terminal-Software

An execution environment that performs processing Communication software dedicated to the LJ-X Series.
according to settings for the acquired height image and The measurement result output from the controller can be
shading (contrast) image. received and saved in txt format. The image output can
The system programming and measurement execution can also be received. Remote monitoring and remote control of
be completed using the mouse. the controller through the remote desktop can also be
performed.
LJ-X Series Simulation-Software

Simulation software dedicated to the LJ-X Series.
The settings can be adjusted by simulating the
measurement by loading the inspection settings created
with the LJ-X Series and the images (height image and
shading (contrast image) taken. It also supports the
downloading and uploading of programs using a network
connection.
3-2 LJ-X UM_GB

Device Operation Flow
Device Operation Flow
The flow of inspection/measurement using this machine is

as shown below.
Preparing Measurement (Chapter 2)

Connect the head, monitor, etc. to the controller.
▼
Setting image capture for measurement
conditions (Chapter 4)
Adjust the capture conditions as necessary (page 4-1).

▼
Register the standard image (Chapter 3)
Register the standard image to be used as reference for
configuring settings (page 3-1).
▼
Setting tools (Chapter 5, Chapter 6 and Chapter 7) Registering Operation Screen (Chapter 7)
• Set the tools as appropriate for the inspection purpose Configure the Run Mode screen display as needed (page
(page 5-1). 7-26).
• Configure the following as necessary:
• Tool Position Adjustment (page 5-181)
▲ ▼
Set up the operating environment (Chapter 8)

• Mathematical Operations of Measurement Results (page
5-179) Configure overall operation of this machine common to all
• Output Settings (page 6-4) inspection settings, such as communication control
• Execute Condition (page 6-2) settings (page 8-8) account settings (page 8-19).
• The setting values which can also be put in the custom
menu.
▼
Perform trial operation (Chapter 7)
• Check if the intended evaluation can be correctly
performed under the set measurement conditions.
• Optimize the settings using the utility to optimize the
setting parameters for "Statistics" (page 7-33), "batch test"
(page 7-38), etc.
LJ-X UM_GB 3-3

Screen View
Screen View
The screen in the setting mode and Run mode of this machine is as shown below.
Setup mode screen
(9) (21) (10) (11)

(8) (12)
(7) (13)
(1)
(14)
(3)
(2) (15)
(4)
(5)
(16)
(6)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(1) Settings management menu (8) [Edit] menu

Opens the menu related to program settings such as Displays the edit menu for the selected tool.
change, add new, copy or delete .
(9) [Global] menu
(2) Set Head button Opens the Global Settings .
Configure the capture settings of the head.
(10) [Execute] button
(3) [Add Tools] button Display the [Execute condition setting] screen.
Add tools to perform various measurements.
(11) [Output] button
(4) [Position Adj.] button Displays [Output setting] screen
Open the setting that links the correction source and the
(12) [Utility] button
correction destination for the position correction.
Opens the [Utility] screen (page 7-2).
(5) View bar
(13) [Go to Run Mode] button
Change the screen display method.
Changes the system to Run mode.
(6) Data Screen
(14) Total Status
Display the captured height image and shading (contrast)
image. Display the Total status.
(7) [Save] button (15) Toolbar

Saves the program setting currently edited. Display the tools set in the examination setting.
3-4 LJ-X UM_GB

Screen View
(16) Result data display

Displays the result of the tool currently selected.
(17) Image strip display button

Displays the image strip (page 7-40).
(18) Profile display button

Switches the display profile ON/OFF when the profile
measurement tool is selected.
(19) [Register Image] button

Display the [Standard screen registration] screen.
(20) Trigger buttons

Retrieves the image and executes a measurement.
• Click the button to measure continuously.

• Click the button to measure continuously.
• Click the button to stop continuous trigger.
(21)Setting error list button

This is displayed only if a setting error occurs. The
condition of the error can be confirmed.
LJ-X UM_GB 3-5

Screen View
Run mode screen
(1) (3)
(4)
(2)
(5)
(1) Date and time display

Displays the date and time when the measurement was last
performed.
(2) [Count/NG Count display]

The cumulative number of measurement and the
cumulative NG count are displayed.
(3) [Prog. Time/Interval display]

• Interval: Displays shortest predicted value of trigger input
interval that can be input.
• Prog. Time: Processing time when the last measurement
was performed (time from trigger input to the end of image
processing) is displayed.
(4) [Go to Setup Mode] button

Switch to Setup mode.
(5) Statistics button

Displays the [Statistics] screen (page 7-33).
3-6 LJ-X UM_GB

3D Screen View
3D Screen View
We will explain the operations unique to 3D images displayed on the data screen.
Please refer to "Screen View" (page 3-4) for details operations common with 2D images.
Point The description displayed on the data screen differs depending on the type of tool, settings, display type etc.
(1)

(2)
(3)
(4) (5) (6)
(1) 2D display/3D display switch • Auto Fit Region: Displays color to match the range of the
Switch the 2-dimensional image/3-dimensional image height currently displayed. Automatically performs offset
display. region fit every time the screen is refreshed.
Depending on the tool, it can be switched to "ALL" where • Fit: Displays color to match the range of the height currently
the 2-dimensional image and 3-dimensional image are displayed.
displayed simultaneously on 2 screens.
(2) Display type switch

Switch display type using a button. Associated with the
display type switch of the VIEW bar.
(3) 3D image
In case of 3D display, the 3D image can be moved/rotated
by dragging on the screen.
(4) Options
The menu of the option settings, which can be used with
images currently being displayed, is displayed.
LJ-X UM_GB 3-7

3D Screen View
• Range Settings: Can change the color display method and - Z-Axis Scale: Set the display scale of the height
range of the height (Z-axis direction). Adjust the display between a range of 0 to 50,000%. Convenient as it
method to match the highs and lows of the work to be allows you to observe by zooming in small concaves/
inspected to make it easier to check the measurement target convexes.
range. - Display Thin Out Level: Set the thinning level of the
data used for the 3D display. The smaller the thinning
level, the more the target can be displayed in high
detail. Enable "Auto-Adjust" to change the display
thinning level to the most appropriate level according to
the maximization/minimization of the observation
target.
• 3D Display Operation: Display the display method guide
of the 3D display.
The 3D image can be displayed using a button operation.
- Auto Fit Region/Fit Region/Fit: The color of the color

bar is made to fit the image.
- Reset: Displays color to match the limits of the height
measurable range.
- Color Bar: Specify by dragging the maximum and
minimum of the color bar. Click "Update Color Bar" to
refresh so the position of the maximum and minimum
fits the color bar.
(5) Color bar
- Specify Center (2D display only): Specifies the center
Can change the color display method and range of the
of the display range of the height.
height (Z-axis direction).
- Upper/Lower: Can specify the maximum and minimum
• : Auto fit region
of the display range of the height using a numeric
value. • : Can specify maximum and minimum
- Expand/Reduce: Maximize/minimize the display range using the slider.
of the height. • : Reset
- Shift(High)/Shift(Low): Shift higher or lower without
• : A red arrow symbol (maximum)/blue arrow symbol
changing the breadth of the display range of the height.
(minimum) is displayed on the image. Set the position where
- Color Palette: Choose the color display type of the
the red arrow is shown to the maximum and minimum of the
height.
color display.
• 3D Display Settings: Set the display method of the 3D
display. (6) Height/contrast blend ratio settings
Set the blend ratio of the height image and concentration
image blends of the 3D image.
Only displayed if imaged using the LJ-X Series head or if
using the LJ-V Series head that can output luminance and
"Output Luminance" in head settings is enabled.
- Height/Grayscale Blend Ratio: Set the rate at which

the contrast image blends with the height image.
3-8 LJ-X UM_GB

Power On and Initial Set-Up
Power On and Initial Set-Up
This section describes the operation when power is

supplied to the controller in the initial state after purchase.
If the inspection settings have already been set,
Reference the operation may differ from the one described
below.
Language selection
1 Check the wiring for errors and then turn on the

power.
The initial startup screen is displayed.
If nothing is displayed on the monitor, check the following

items.
• Is the power supply connected correctly?
- Is a suitable 24 VDC power supply used?
- Are the "+24 V" and "0 V" of the power supply input
terminals connected in reverse?
• Is the monitor cable connected correctly?
• Is the monitor power supply on?
• Does your monitor support XGA (1024 x 768 pixels)
and vertical frequency of 60 Hz?
2 Select the language you want to use in the "System

Language" field.
3 In "System Mode" select 3D Mode or 2D Mode.
4 Select [OK].
The Setup mode initial screen is displayed.
LJ-X UM_GB 3-9

Using the Mouse
Using the Mouse
Use the supplied dedicated USB mouse (OP-87506) to operate this unit.
Reference
The mouse pointer speed can be changed in the Global Settings (page 8-16).
(1) left button

Press this to select the item. (1)
(2) right button (2)

Mainly used to display context menus (page 3-12). This
(3)
allows you to create a screen capture (page 3-12), or a
reset (page 3-12), etc.
(3) wheel
Turn the wheel to display the lower part of a list or to
change the zoom ratio of the screen.
Choose an item
The following section describes how to select or enter the
setting values.
1 Hover the pointer on the screen to the item
you want to set.
1 Move the mouse to set the screen pointer to the

desired item. 2 Click.
2 Click the mouse button.
This selects the item moused over in Step 1.
Reference
It is also possible to switch the roles of left and right mouse buttons. This manual is written based on the initial settings.
If the mouse buttons have been switched, the terms "left mouse button" and "right mouse button" should be read as "click" and "right-click",
respectively.
Drag
Dragging means sliding the mouse cursor while holding down Slide the mouse while
the left mouse button. This action is used for changing the size of the left button is pressed
a region, etc.
3-10 LJ-X UM_GB

Enter a Number or Text
Enter a Number or Text
Enter a number Enter text

To enter values for setting values etc., use the procedure To enter texts for setting name etc., use the procedure
described below. described below.
1 Click the field to enter a value. 1 Click the field to enter texts into.
The value input screen appears. The character input screen appears.

2 Click the digit to change with the mouse and click 2 Specify the character to be entered.
the up/down button displayed on the screen. Or The list of available characters appears.
turn the wheel of the mouse to specify the desired
3 Select the characters to input.
value.
Reference
Reference
Check "Edit All Languages" if you want to enter a text string that
You can also click to enter on the numeric keypad. automatically switches the language according to the display
3 When the value is changed, click [OK].

language when switching the display language of this machine.
If [Edit All Languages] is checked, the editing screen for all
This confirms and enters the specified value. languages that apply to the applicable string will open.
• When the string is edited after selecting the desired language
To cancel the change
field, the edited string will be displayed when switched to the
In Step 3 above, click [Cancel] instead of [OK]. applicable language.
• Automatically switches to the language input method according
When you want to return the value to the unset state
to the selected language.
("------") on the "Judgment Condition" screen
Select a value and click [Clear]. 4 To complete the input, select [OK].
LJ-X UM_GB 3-11

Context-Sensitive Menu (Context Menu)
Context-Sensitive Menu (Context Menu)
In Setup mode, context-sensitive menus (context menus) (3) Context menu displayed in the text editing area
can be used by pressing the right mouse button (right- • Restore: Cancel the previous text editing operation and
clicking). restore it
• Copy: Copy the selected text.
• Cut: Cut out the selected text.
Context menu displayed by right-click
• Paste: Paste the copied or cut text.
The context menu displayed varies depending on the • Paste by specifying tool ID: Duplicate and paste the
pointer location during right-click. copied tool by specifying its ID number.
Reference
Depending on the operation status, these menu items may not be

displayed or may not be selectable.
Menu displayed by holding the right button

down (common context menu)
The common context menu is displayed by holding the right
button down for around 1 second on the screen.
(1) Context menu displayed on toolbar

• Edit Tools: Opens the editing screen of the tool you right-
clicked.
• Delete Tools: Deletes the right-clicked tool.
• Copy Tools: Copies the right-clicked tool.
• Paste Tools: Duplicate and paste the copied tool.
• Paste with Tool ID: Duplicate and paste the copied tool by
specifying its ID number.
(2) Context menu displayed on the image

In addition to the items displayed by right-clicking the (1) Common context menu displayed in Run mode
toolbar, the following items are displayed. • Image Capture: Save the displayed screen as an image
• Undo editing of the region: Restores the area size file on the SD card. To change the save format, etc., see
changed on the image. “Screen capture settings” (page 8-15).
• Image Registration: Open the [Image Registration] screen • Change Account: Displays the "Change account" screen
(page 3-18). (page 7-42).
• Reset: Performs reset operation.
• Remove SD Card 2: Make the SD card 2 ready for
removal.
• Remove USB HDD: Make the USB HDD ready for
removal.
3-12 LJ-X UM_GB

Context-Sensitive Menu (Context Menu)
(2) Common context menu displayed in Setup mode

• Change to manual calc mode: Change the re-calculation
setting to "Manual" (if the current re-calculation setting is
"Automatic").
• Recalculate Now: Execute the re-calculation (if the current
re-calculation setting is "Manual").
• Change to auto calc mode: Change the re-calculation
setting to "Automatic" (if the current re-calculation setting is
"Manual").
• Image Capture: Save the displayed screen as an image
file on the SD card. To change the save format, etc., see
“Screen capture settings” (page 8-15).
• Reset: Performs reset operation.
LJ-X UM_GB 3-13

Start/Stop Operation
Start/Stop Operation
Start operation To change the opening screen displayed at

the start-up
1 Start power supply to this machine.
• Save the image of the 1024 x 768 pixel 24-bit bitmap format
After the opening screen appears on the monitor, the Setup
as "Logo.bmp" in "lj-x3d/setting" of SD card 1. The saved
mode screen should appear.
image file is displayed as the opening screen when the LJ-
X8000 series is started.
• If you do not want to display the opening screen, create a
black-only image file with commercially available graphics
software and save it as "Logo.bmp" in "lj-x3d/setting" on the
SD card 1.
Stop operation
To stop the operation, turn off the power supply to the
machine.
Point
Turning off the controller while it is accessing an SD card may
2 Click the [Go to Run mode] button to switch the

damage the card itself and/or corrupt the data that is being saved
on the SD card.
controller to Run mode.
To stop result output and only receive

judgement output
• Click the setting mode switching button to switch the LJ-
X8000 series to Setup mode.
• Only the result output can be stopped in the Run mode by
turning on the TEST input terminal.
When stopping imaging and image

processing
Turn ON the EXT input terminal to stop acceptance of the
trigger input.
3 Input the trigger (For external trigger).
Start image capture and judgment process under the
inspection conditions set.
To start the Run mode from the beginning

when the power is supplied
Select the [Run Mode] in [Startup Mode Setting] (page 8-
18) to start in the Run Mode when the power is supplied.
3-14 LJ-X UM_GB

Check Past Image in the Image Strip
Check Past Image in the Image Strip
Past inspection results are stored in the internal memory as

"Archived image".
Use the image strip in Run mode
Displays the image strip in which the archived image saved
Archived images and external image files displayed on the
on the SD card/USB HDD/FTP server can be checked.
image strip can be enlarged.
Reference
1 Select the target image in the image strip, then
For details on image strip display settings, refer to "Image strip
click .
settings" (page 7-40).
The Option toolbar appears.
Displaying image strip 2 Click "Zoom".

The [Zoom Viewer] screen appears.
Click
The image strip appears.
Click , and the image strip is hidden
Reference
Up to 1024 images can be displayed in the image strip.
LJ-X UM_GB 3-15

Check Past Image in the Image Strip
3 Specify the save condition of the archived image.

Using the image strip in Setup mode
Destination
Re-measure the archived image with the Select [SD Card] or [USB HDD].
latest settings
Destination
In Setup mode, when the image is selected on the image
Specify the folder where the archived image is to be saved.
strip, the image is re-measured using the currently setting
values. It is convenient as the measured results of the Save Data
adjusted setting values applied to the past archived images • All: Export all images.
can be verified. • Total Status NG Count: Writes out the image of
measurement times for which the overall judgment is
NG at the time of history accumulation.
Destination
• Create Folder Per Judgment Value: Check to
categorize the image into "OK" or "NG" folder for

each total judgment and output.
Image File Name

Clicking the [Display] button will show the file name of the
exported image.
The file name will be as follows.
• Height image: YYMMDD_HHMMSS_{number of
measurements}_IMG_HEIGHT_{total
You can recalculate all the images by clicking and judgment}.bmp
then clicking "Update Result" on the options bar. • Shading (Luminance gray) image:
YYMMDD_HHMMSS_{number of measurements}_
IMG_INTENSITY_{total judgment}.bmp
Export archived images
<Example>
Write archived image to SD card or USB HDD. 161001_092309_0000000001_IMG_HEIGHT_OK.b
Point mp
Do not use with third-party SD cards. Doing so may result in data
loss or setting data damage. 4 Click "Execute".
1 Click on the image strip.

A screen appears for selecting the image to save. Displaying magnified images
2 Check the image you want to export, then click You can magnify the image displayed in the image strip by
"Execute". clicking "Zoom" in the image strip.
The "Save Archived Image" screen is displayed.
3-16 LJ-X UM_GB

Inspection/Measurement Condition Setting
Inspection/Measurement Condition Setting
This section describes the basic operation flow required to create an inspection setting on this machine.
• Selecting setting number (Program Settings)
• "Register image for measurement (standard image registration)" (page 3-18)
• "Setting the measurement conditions (tool)"
• "Edit the measurement area" (page 3-26)
• "Converting a height image (Height Extraction)"
• "Specifying filter processing on the image (Filters)"
• "Assigning the Position Correction"
• "Managing Program Settings" (page 3-42)

Reference
Select the setting number (inspection • Program settings 000 to 999 can be specified for SD card 1 and
setting) SD card 2, but the actual number of programs that can be
registered varies depending on the SD card capacity or settings.
• When SD card 1 is removed, reference to the global settings is
Mechanism of data retention of this machine disabled and this machine does not operate correctly.
• The lifetime of the writing count of the SD memory card is
This machine manages various settings used for
100,000 times. Writing to the SD memory card is performed
measurement processing with setting numbers. Various
when saving settings using the mouse or command.
data files used in program settings are managed and saved
• By formatting SD card 1, you can initialize the settings. You can
as follows. format it via [Manage Files] in [Utility] (page 7-44).
Data specific to program settings

Setting data and standard image data are saved Adding new program settings
comprehensively (in group) in the folder for each inspection
setting. Add inspection settings required for measurement
processing. From the [Program No.] menu select [New/
Data common to all program settings
Edit/Del Programs].
Configuration data and dictionary data are stored in a
common folder among inspection settings. 1 Click and select
[Add New].
SD card 1
The "Add New" screen is displayed.
Program settings 000
Individual setting
Dictionary data parameters
Global settings data Master profile data

(All inspection settings
are common)
SD card 2
Program settings 000
2
Individual setting
parameters Specify the SD card for storing settings, program
setting No., program name, and program setting
Master profile data version, and then click [Execute].
A setting is newly created.
LJ-X UM_GB 3-17

Changing to existing program settings Register image for measurement

(standard image registration)
1 Click and
select [Change Programs]. Register an image to be used as the basis of measurement
The [Change Programs] screen appears. and judgment conditions, as a standard image.
These images are referenced when creating settings or
measuring actual workpieces.
Register the standard image
1 Click .
The [Reference Image Registration] screen appears.

2 Select the examination setting to switch, and then

click "OK".
This changes the program setting.
Reference
Program settings can be copied for other use or settings of other

controller can also be used. "Managing Program Settings" (page 3-
42)
Save format
Select the format in which to save the standard image.
• BMP: Bitmap format
• JPG: JPEG format
• PNG: PNG format
Reference
• For images registered with the JPEG format, the

measurement results may differ from those of images
registered with the BMP or PNG format due to image
degradation attributable to compression.
• Compression and decompression will be necessary if the
JPEG or PNG save format is selected, so saving and
importing the image will take longer than with the BMP
format.
2 Review the captured height and contrast images.
3 Click .
3-18 LJ-X UM_GB

4 Click [OK].
Setting the measurement conditions
The image currently displayed is registered with a specified
registration number as the standard image. The height
(tool)
image and the shading (contrast) image are registered
The LJ-X Series performs measurement by units referred to
respectively in one registration.
as a "Tool". The tools are classified into "Categories" based
on their use. This section describes the methods to add/
delete tools.
Tools List
First, select a desired measurement type from the
categories, and then the narrow measurement methods
down to the most suitable tool based on your part and
inspection type.

 Height
• The standard image is a set of height images and shading

(contrast) images.
• The registration number for standard images is specified
using the registration number for height images (0 to 399).
The registration number of the shading (contrast) image is
automatically registered as "number added 500".
• Standard images can be registered with up to 400 height
image/shading (contrast) image sets.
• Since the standard images are saved on the SD card, the
number of stored images vary depending on the SD card
capacity.
Reference
"Height Measurement"
You can use the image strip (page 7-40) to register any image from
"Trend Height Measurement”
the archived image as a master image.
"Profile Measurement"
“Cont. Profile Measurement"
Deleting registered standard images
On the [Standard Image Registration] screen, select the  Presence/Absence
registered image and click , and then left-click [OK] on
the confirmation screen.
Or, right-click the registered image and select [Delete] from
the context menu to delete it.
"Black/White-Specific Area"
“Pattern Match (Shading)"
“Pattern Match (Outline)"
"Shading"
LJ-X UM_GB 3-19

 Flaw Detection  Measurements & Dimentsions

 Measure Distance
"Total Defect Area"

"Each Defect" "Measure Distance: Points Distance"
"Black & White Area" "Measure Distance: Point/Line Distance"
"Contrast with Background" "Measure Distance: Lines Distance"
"Flaw on a Line" "Measure Distance: Point/Circle Distance"
"Flaw on a Ring" "Measure Distance: Line/Circle Distance"
"Flaw on a Curve" "Measure Distance: Circles Distance"
 Measure Width
 Alignment
"Measure Width: Edge Width"

"Pattern Match (Shading)" "Measure Width: Width (Max./Min.)"
"Pattern Match (Outline)" "Measure Width: Diameter (Max./Min.)"
"Edge Position" "Measure Width: Center Pitch"
"Line" "Measure Width: Gap Pitch"
"Circle" "Measure Width: Gap Pitch (Edge Pairs)"
"Edge Slope" "Measure Width: Points Distance"
"Edge to Circumference" "Measure Width: Peak-to-Peak Width"
"Tip"
"Cluster"
"Dark or Bright Clusters"
3-20 LJ-X UM_GB

 Line/Angle  Detect Circle

"Line/Angle: Line along with Profile (Detect Line)" "Detect Circle: Circle along with Profile (Detect Circle)"
"Line/Angle: Line Passing Two Points" "Detect Circle: Circle Passing Three Points"
"Line/Angle: Bisection of Two Lines"
"Line/Angle: Angle Formed by Two Lines"  Detect Point
 Intersection/Center
"Detect Point: Pattern Match (Shading) Position"

"Detect Point: Pattern Match (Outline) Position"
"Intersection/Center: Line/V-Line Intersection" "Detect Point: Edge Position"
"Intersection/Center: Two Lines Intersection" "Detect Point: Tip Position"
"Intersection/Center: Center of Quadrangle" "Detect Point: Gravity Center of Cluster"
"Intersection/Center: Midpoint of Points" "Detect Point: Dark or Bright Clusters”
LJ-X UM_GB 3-21

 Count  Graphic Display

"Cluster" "Line Display" (page 5-170)

"Edge" "Circle Display" (page 5-172)
"Pattern Match (Shading)" "Point Display" (page 5-175)
"Pattern Match (Outline)" "Scale Display" (page 5-177)
"Dark or Bright Clusers"
 Mathematical Operations
 ID & OCR/OCV
"Calculation" (page 5-179)

"Characters"
"1D Code"
"2D Code"
3-22 LJ-X UM_GB

 Function List  Position Adjustment

"Height Measurement" (page 5-21) "Pattern Match (Shading) Position" (page 5-182)
"Trend Height Measurement" (page 5-24) "Pattern Match (Outline) Position" (page 5-185)
"Profile Measurement" (page 5-28) "Edge Position" (page 5-188)
"Cont. Profile Measurement" (page 5-68) "Line Position and Angle" (page 5-191)
"Area" (page 5-77) "Center of Circle" (page 5-194)
"Pattern Search" (page 5-80) "Gravity Center of Cluster" (page 5-197)
"ShapeTrax3" (page 5-84) "Dark or Bright Clusters" (page 5-201)
"PatternTrax" (page 5-91)
"Edge Position" (page 5-96)
"Edge Angle" (page 5-99)
"Edge Width" (page 5-102)
"Edge Pitch" (page 5-105)
“Pair Edges” (page 5-108)
"Defect" (page 5-111)
"Blob" (page 5-115)
“Shading Blob" (page 5-119)
"Trend Edge Position" (page 5-124)
"Trend Edge Width" (page 5-128)
“Trend Edge Defect" (page 5-133)
"Shading Inspection" (page 5-138)
"OCR2" (page 5-141)
"1D Code Reader" (page 5-147)
"2D Code Reader" (page 5-151)
"ShapeTrax2" (page 5-155)
"OCR" (page 5-160)
"Image Region Generator" (page 5-167)
LJ-X UM_GB 3-23

Manage tools
Adding a tool
1 Click the in Setup mode.
The [Tool Catalog] screen is displayed.

2 In the category of lists, select an examination

category.
The relevant tool is displayed.
3 Select a tool, specify a tool ID, and click
Once the tool is added, the tool edit screen will appear.
3-24 LJ-X UM_GB

Reference
Re-editing tools
When adding tools other than the height category, select either the
height image or the contrast image to measure. 1 Right-click the desired tool for editing settings on
the toolbar and select [Edit Tools].

The tool edit screen appears.
Deleting a tool
Reference
1 Right-click the desired tool for deletion on the Double-clicking the tool displayed on the toolbar is another way to
toolbar and select [Delete Tools]. display the edit screen.
Copying a tool
1 Right-click the desired tool for copying on the
toolbar and select [Copy Tools].
2 Click [OK].
The tool is removed.
2 Right-click on the toolbar and select [Paste Tools].

The tool selected in step 1 is copied and pasted.
Reference
When [Paste with Tool ID] is selected, a desired ID number can be

specified for the copy of the tool to be created. (Usually, IDs are
automatically allocated sequentially from the first.)
LJ-X UM_GB 3-25

Points in tool editing Edit the measurement area

 Displaying guide
This section is about how to edit the size and position of the
To display a guide such as an explanation of the selected
inspection regions (including search region and pattern
item or an explanation of the setting method, click
region) and the mask region specified for the measurement
displayed on the tool editing screen.
unit.
This unit supports the following types of measurement and
mask regions.
Rectangle/Rotation Circle Oval

Rectangle
Circumference Arc Polygon

(e.g. hexagonal)
Drawing a rectangle
1 Drag a green handle on the frame line to change
the size.
2 Drag from within the frame line to move the

location of the region without changing the size.
Reference
After drawing, you can change the coordinates of Point 1 (upper

left) and Point 2 (upper right) from the menu opened with .
3-26 LJ-X UM_GB

Drawing a rotated rectangle 4 Drag from within the frame line to move the
the size.
Reference
2 Drag the red handle to change the angle. After drawing, you can change the XY coordinates of the center
and diameter from the menu opened with .

Drawing an oval
the size.

2 Drag the red handle to change the angle.
Reference
After drawing, you can change the width, height, XY coordinates of

the center and rotation angle from the menu opened with .
Drawing a circle
1 Specify the first point on the circle region to be
created.
2 In a similar way, specify the second and third

Reference
points.
After drawing, you can change the XY coordinates of the center,
A circle through 3 points is drawn.
Diameter 1, Diameter 2 and rotation angle from the menu opened
3 Drag a green handle on the frame line to change with .
the size.
Drawing a ring
1 Specify the first point on the ring region to be
created.
2 In a similar way, specify the second and third

points.
A circle through 3 points is drawn.
3 Specify the position of the inner circle or outer

circle.
LJ-X UM_GB 3-27
4 Drag a green handle on the frame line to change 6 Drag the red handle to change the angle.
the size.
5 Drag from within the frame line to move the 7 Drag from within the frame line to move the
location of the region without changing the size. location of the region without changing the size.
Reference
Reference
After drawing, you can change the XY coordinates of the center,
Diameter 1 of the outer circle and Diameter 2 of the inner circle After drawing, you can change the XY coordinates of the center,
from the menu opened with . Diameter 1 of the outer circle, Diameter 2 of the inner circle, start
angle and end angle from the menu opened with .
Drawing an arc
Drawing a polygon (hexagon)
1 Specify the start point of the arc.
Since the cursor direction is the same as the direction of
1 Specify the start point of the polygon.
movement, a vertical cursor showing the same direction as 2 Specify vertexes (12 points maximum)
the red arrow appears.
continuously.
2 Specify the end point of the arc.
3 Click the start point again.
3 Specify the intermediate point of the arc. A polygon is drawn.
An arc is drawn. When 12 vertexes are specified, a polygon is drawn at that
time.
4 Specify the position of the inner circle or outer
circle. 4 Drag a green handle on the frame line to change
the size.

the size.
3-28 LJ-X UM_GB

5 Drag from within the frame line to move the Partially hiding the measurement region
location of the region without changing the size. (Mask Region)
Up to four areas to exclude (mask regions) in the
measurement region can be specified for each tool. This is
useful when the target has a complicated shape or when an
area needs to be excluded from the measurement.
Reference Specified Measurement

Region
Vertexes may be added/deleted from the menu opened with .
Drawing a measurement region by Set the mask region

specifying values
Set mask area (up to 4)
1 Draw a region.
2 Click in [Inspection Region]. Specified Measurement

The region edit screen appears. Region
The section covered by the mask region

will be excluded from the measurement region.
Measurement region after

setting the mask region
1 Select the desired region shape for [Mask Region

0] to [Mask Region 3].
2 Draw it as in normal region.

3 Change the values to edit the region shape.
4 Click [OK].
LJ-X UM_GB 3-29

Deleting unnecessary feature Deleting unnecessary feature information

information/boundary information using PatternTrax
(Eraser Tool) When using tools based on the PatternTrax tool tone
changes within the range can be deleted by specifying any
location on the standard image.
Deleting unnecessary feature information
using ShapeTrax3/ShapeTrax2 1 Click on the tool edit screen.
When using tools based on ShapeTrax3 tool and
ShapeTrax2 tool unnecessary detection edges within the
range can be deleted as noise components by specifying
any location on the standard image.
1 Click on the tool edit screen.

2 Put a check on [Eraser Tool] and click [Edit].

The [Eraser Tool] screen appears showing the boundary
information of the image.
2 Put a check on [Eraser Tool] and click [Edit].

The [Eraser Tool] screen appears showing the edge
information with green (fine features) and blue (coarse
features).
3 Remove the unnecessary tone change parts by

tracing them while clicking the mouse.
4 After completing the editing, click [OK].
Reference
• The range to erase at a time can be changed with the [Size]

slider.
• If you wish to display on the screen by specifying the type of
3 Remove the unnecessary edge information while display feature, select either [Course] or [Fine] in the [Display
Feature] field.
clicking.
4 After completing the editing, click [OK].
Reference
• The range to erase at a time can be changed with the [Size]

slider.
• If you wish to display on the screen by specifying the type of
display feature, select either [Course] or [Fine] in the [Display
Feature] field.
3-30 LJ-X UM_GB

Creating feature information from Drawing a feature directly

contour information of graphics or If the feature cannot be extracted as expected, the feature
images using ShapeTrax3/ShapeTrax2 that should be extracted can be directly drawn while
(Feature drawing tool) viewing the image of the background.
Click the button on the "Add" field and draw the feature
When using tools based on ShapeTrax3 tool and using a graphic such as a line or rectangle.
ShapeTrax2 tool necessary features can be directly drawn
and edited on the pattern inspection using the feature
drawing tool. By doing so, a high-precision ShapeTrax3/
ShapeTrax2 measurement is possible even in cases such
as those below where the appropriate features cannot be
properly extracted from the image.
• The targets are adjacent to each other and the features
cannot be properly extracted
• Unnecessary features are extracted due to overexposure or

shadow of the background
• Targets, whose features cannot be properly extracted due to
shedding, are adjacent to each other
To use the feature drawing tool, put a check on [Feature

Drawing Tool] using the "Feature Extraction Condition"
screen and click [Edit].
Reference
• It cannot be used simultaneously with the "Eraser Tool".

• It cannot be used simultaneously with the "Mask Region".
LJ-X UM_GB 3-31

Correcting and using a feature extracted Using other functions

from the image
Trim
If drawing a feature using a graphic is difficult on a work Delete unnecessary parts of features by dragging the
shaped with difficult contours, it can be registered by mouse to trace.
correcting the feature extracted from the image.
Bright/Dark Direction
1 Click "auto extract" in the "Add" field. You can specify the brightness direction (bright → dark,
The "Auto Extract" screen will be displayed. dark → bright) on the features created using the feature
drawing tool and make the search stable.
• Setting the brightness direction automatically: Automatically
get the brightness information of directly drawn features and
near features based on the standard image.
• Setting the brightness direction to both directions: Set
brightness information near all features to both directions.
• Individual setting: Specify the brightness information (single
direction, two directions) per feature manually.
Fit Shape
Automatically adjust the position of the directly drawn
feature using the edge of the standard image as the
standard.
2 Choose the unnecessary features among the Simulate Detection

features automatically extracted from the image Can verify if it can be stably detected using the created
such as by encircling them as a region using click shape.
or drag, and then click "Deselect". The detection settings changed during verification is
reflected as is on the settings of the tool.
• If you accidentally deleted necessary features, click
"select" to revert.
• Check "Display Black Image" to make the
background turn into a black image and editing of
features easier.
• Check "Display Features Already Added" to show
features added before displaying the auto extract
dialog in green. Switch between display/hide to
easily distinguish features that you are trying to add
using auto extract.
• Click "Extraction Settings" - "paint" to paint the pixels
in the luminance range at the specified position with
the specified color (black, gray or white). You can
extract features by painting some of the locations
with low contrast and whose features were not
extracted, or un-extract features by painting locations
where unnecessary features were extracted.
Click the position to be painted on the image and
then adjust the maximum and minimum tone values
in the painting range.
3 After completing the correction, click [OK].
3-32 LJ-X UM_GB

Set Multi-regions as Measurement Regions (Multi-region Mode)
Set Multi-regions as Measurement Regions (Multi-

region Mode)
With a multi-region mode enabled tool, more than one measurement region can be set and the measurement results for
each region can be output and determined.
The detection conditions and judgment conditions can be common by measurement region, or can be specified individually
for each region.
32 measurement regions at a time can be setup to support multi-product development and multi-point measurement.
Reference
When using the same filter in multi-regions, you can specify the zero plane by using "Zero Plane of Other Tools", and check the box for
"Also Refer to Preprocessing" to shorten the processing time.

Multi-region mode support tools
: Supported ×: Not supported

Tool Multi-region mode support
possible/not possible
Height measurement 
Trend Height Measurement ×
Profile Measurement ×
Continuous profile measurement ×
Free Multi-Point Height ×
Measurement
Arranged Multi-Point Height ×
Measurement
Area 
Pattern Search ×
ShapeTrax3 ×
PatternTrax ×
Edge Position 
Edge Angle (%) 
Edge width 
Edge Pitch 
Pair Edges 
Defect 
Blob 
Shading blob 
Trend Edge Position ×
Trend edge width ×
Trend Edge Defect ×
Shading inspection 
OCR2 ×
1D Code Reader ×
2D Code Reader ×
ShapeTrax2 ×
OCR ×
Image Region Generator ×
LJ-X UM_GB 3-33

4 When the added measurement region editing is

Enables multi-region mode for the
complete, click "OK".
specified tool
Use the following procedure to create multiple regions with
the figure region (rectangle/rotated rectangle, circle, oval,
circumference, arc and polygon) selected as the region
type tool.
1 Create 1 figure region.
5
If necessary, repeat steps 3 to 4 to add additional

measurement regions.
• When a region is added it is assigned a region No.
each time one is added. Individual regions can be
switched by selecting the region No. at the top of the
screen.
• You can also bulk-move, resize, and align the
2 Check "Multi-Region Mode" at the top of the
regions added. For details, see "Batch adjustment of
screen. Regions (batch adjustment)" (page 3-35).
Changes to multi-region mode. • Measurement results for each measurement region
can be output and judged. In addition, you can share
setting items such as detection conditions and
judgment conditions, or set them individually. For
details, see "Communization/individualizing settings
per region" (page 3-37).
Point • Up to 32 measurement regions can be set.

• To delete, select the region you want to
delete, then click "Delete".
• If you set multiple regions and uncheck
"Multi-Region Mode", all other regions will be
deleted, leaving only the region with the
smallest number.
3 Click "Add" to add measurement regions.

A region of the same shape as the first region is added and
the "Edit Region" dialog is displayed.
The shape of the added measurement region can be
changed in the "Edit Region" dialog "Inspection Region".
3-34 LJ-X UM_GB

Batch adjustment of Regions (batch Move Regions

adjustment) You can move the selected measurement regions in
batches.
In multi-region mode, you can move, resize, and align
multiple regions at once. 1 Select the region you want to move.
If you want to move any region, click "Deselect All" to clear
the selection, then click to select the region you want to
1 Then click at the top of the screen. move on the data screen.
"Batch Region Adjustment" dialog appears.

2 Click "Start Moving".
2 Click the button of the content you want to adjust.
• Move Regions (page 3-35)
• Resize Regions (page 3-36)
• Align Regions (page 3-36)
3 Once adjustment is complete, click [Close].

"Batch Region Adjustment" dialog closes.
3 Drag the region on the image to move it.
4 When movement is complete, click "OK".

LJ-X UM_GB 3-35

Resize Regions Align Regions

You can resize selected measurement regions of the same Aligns the selected regions in a row.
shape in batches.
1 Select the region you want to align.
1 Select the region you want to resize.
2 Click "Start Aligning".

2 Click "Start Resizing". Alignment dialog appears.
"Resizing" dialog appears.
3 If you want to move the aligned regions, drag the

3 Click "OK" after resizing. region on both sides of the region on the data
4 Click [OK].
screen.
You can also change the order of the regions in the dialog
"Region List".
4 When alignment is complete, click "OK".
5 Click [OK].
3-36 LJ-X UM_GB

Communization/individualizing settings Judgment condition graph

per region
You can check the judgment conditions set for each region
You can set the tool name, detection condition, and in a graph display, and you can drag the upper/lower limit
judgment condition individually for each set region, and on the graph to change it. Also, it can be set in batches
share it with other regions. from the measurement values.
Point • To prevent mismatches in settings caused by Check the judgment condition of each region in the
setting changes when common settings are set, judgment condition graph
the combination of common and individual
settings is limited in the detection condition and 1 Click at the bottom of the result data display
judgment condition.
area of the "Judgment Conditions" column and the
- If the shape of the measurement region is the
same, a combination of detection condition: setting mode screen of the editing screen, and
individual, judgment condition: common cannot at the bottom of the results data display area of the
be set. operation mode screen.

- If the measurement region is of a different
The [Judgment Conditions] screen appears.
shape, common settings are not possible.
• There is no limit to the communization/individual
settings of tool names.
• Select Item For tools with multiple judgment items,

you can switch between the judgment items.
• Upper Limit/Lower Limit: If the setting of the
1 Click on the button next to the tool name, detection judgment condition is common, the upper/lower
conditions, and judgment conditions on the setting common limit can be specified numerically in all
regions. If the setting of the judgment condition is
screen ( : sharing settings, : configuring
individual, the upper/lower limit can be specified
individual settings).
numerically for each region.
"Share Setting" dialog appears. The upper to lower limit range is represented by a
blue band on the measurement graph. Drag the top
and bottom edges of the blue band to change the
upper/lower limit.
• Set by Batch Using Measured Value: By specifying
the upper/lower offset value from the measurement
value, the judgment condition can be set in batches.
For details, see "Setting judgment conditions from
measurement values in batches" (page 3-38).
• Measurement value graph: The measurement
values for each region are listed in a graph. The
graph is displayed in green if judgment is OK, and in
red if judgment is NG. When you select a graph for
each region, the measured values for the selected
2 Select common or individual settings, and then click
region are displayed. If the judgment condition
"OK".
settings are individual, you can set the judgment
If you select individual settings, you can set the detection conditions of the selected regions.
condition and judgment condition for each region by • : Enlarges the measurement value graph scale.
switching the region No. at the top of the screen. • : Reduces the measurement value graph scale.
LJ-X UM_GB 3-37

• : Adjusts the scale so that the all of the largest • Specified measurement value: Displays the
graph of the measurement value graph is displayed. measurement value of the selected region, which is
• : If there are 8 or more regions setup, the the upper/lower limit to be set. If "The measurement
measurement graph is displayed in multiple pages. value to be specified will be the average value of the
Changes the page when the measurement graph is entire region" is valid, the average of the
more than one page. measurement value of the whole region is displayed.
• : Displays the measurement graph for all • Offset of Upper Limit: Specify the upper limit value
regions on 1 page. by the offset from the specified measurement value.
• Offset of Lower Limit: Specify the lower limit value
by the offset from the specified measurement value.
Setting judgment conditions from measurement
values in batches 3 After completing the setting, click the [OK] button.
By specifying the upper/lower offset value from the The judgment condition is set in batches.
measurement value, the judgment conditions upper/lower
limit can be set in batches.
Screen display of information on multi-
If the judgment condition settings are individual, you can
set the judgment conditions within the selected regions in

regions
batches.
With a tool that sets the measurement region in multi-
If the setting of the judgment condition is common, the
region mode, you can see on the screen the number of
upper/lower limit of all regions can be specified in batches.
regions that have been set and the specific information for
each region.
1 Click the "Batch Setting Using Measured Value". Setup mode
"Batch Setting Using Measured Value" dialog appears.
Measurement
Number of time
regions
Region change Judgment

condition graph
2 Modify the settings as necessary. Run mode
• Specification Method: Select the judgment
condition to specify.
- Input Meas. Value to Upper and Lower: Select to Number of regions Measurement time
specify a judgment condition for both upper and

lower limits.
- Enter measurement values in upper limits:
Select to specify a judgment condition for upper
limits.
- Enter measurement values in lower limits:
Select to specify a judgment condition for lower
limits.
• The measurement value to be specified will be
the average value of the entire region: When
Region change Judgment
enabled, the original measurement value is set as condition graph
the average value of the entire region. • Number of regions
• Upper/Lower Limit: Displays the upper/lower limit The thumbnails on the toolbar display the number of regions
set by the values specified in "Specified that have been set.
Measurement Value", "Offset of Upper Limit", and • Measurement time:
"Offset of Lower Limit". Displays the measurement time of the selected region.
3-38 LJ-X UM_GB

"Measurement time of selected region" ms / "total • Region changing:

measurement time" ms You can change and display the measurement value of
each region.
: Judgment OK region
: Judgment NG region
/ : Selected region
• Judgment condition graph:
The judgment condition graph (page 3-37) appears.
In operation mode, the judgment condition cannot be
changed.
Multi-region output item settings

(measured value and judged value)
As an output setting output item, measurement values and

judgment values for each region can be selected.
• Measured Value
• Judged Value
LJ-X UM_GB 3-39

Correct the Position (Position Adjustment)
Correct the Position (Position Adjustment)
If the workpiece to be measured deviates with respect to Interpolation

the measurement area, the correction source tool If the measurement area is fixed, even if the workpiece to be
measures the workpiece position and feeds back the measured is slightly deviated, correct measurement will be
position. By this correction processing, it is possible to difficult. In such a case, by specifying the correction source tool
move the position of the measurement area following the as a reference so that the measurement can be correctly
movement of the workpiece and measure correctly. performed, the measurement area position of the tool registered
Reference as the correction destination is corrected based on the positional
If a tool in the "Position Adjustment" category is added, the deviation information of the correction source tool. This function is
following settings are unnecessary because the Position called misalignment correction function. In this machine, in
Correction settings are performed automatically. addition to batch correction in which only one correction source
tool is specified and applied collectively to the correction

1 Create a tool to be the source of correction.
destination tool, individual correction to specify the correction
2 Click . source tool for each component (X, Y, θ) of positional deviation
amount is possible. Enabling "Interpolation" suppresses distortion
The [Position Adjustment] screen appears.
of the image and reduces the error of the measurement result of
the correction destination tool. Interpolation processing can be
enabled/disabled only for a grayscale image after height
extraction or shading (contrast) image.
Tool available as reference

The below table indicates which tools can be specified as
reference for position adjustment.
Tool (Reference tool) Adjustment target

Pattern Search Position, angle
ShapeTrax3/ShapeTrax2 Position, angle
PatternTrax Position, angle
3 In the "Reference" field, select the tool to be the Edge Position Position, angle
correction source. Edge Angle (%) Center angle
If you check "Specific", you can correct misalignment of Defect Grouping OFF Position
"X", "Y" and "θ" from the results of separate tools. Grouping ON Center of gravity
4 Select the correction source added in step 3 in the

Blob Center of gravity, major axis
angle
"Default Reference at Adding Tools" field at the
Shading blob Center of gravity, major axis
bottom right of the screen.
angle
After that, when a new tool is added, the added tool is set Trend edge Circle/Line Position, angle
to be automatically corrected for mis-registration with the Position detectionOFF
correction source set in step 4.
Circle detectionON Detection circle center
When setting the correction source individually for Direct line Line center, line angle
each tool detectionON
Click to add and set the Position Correction Trend Edge Defect Defect position, defect angle
source, and then select the correction source for each tool 1DCord reader, 2Dcord reader Position, cord angle
in the "Target" field. Mathematical Operations ANS0 to 2*
If "Display only specified correction source" is selected from Line Passing Two Points Line center, line angle
the drop-down menu in the title bar of the correction Bisection of Two Lines Midpoint of Bisection, median
destination list, only the tools related to the correction angle
source selected in the correction source list will be
displayed.
3-40 LJ-X UM_GB

Correct the Position (Position Adjustment)
Tool (Reference tool) Adjustment target

Angle Formed by Two Lines Two Lines Intersection, best fit
line 1 angle
Line/V-Line Intersection Intersection, line angle
Line and point of intersection Intersection, best fit line 1 angle
Center of Quadrangle Center, best fit line 1 angle
Midpoint of Points Midpoint, line angle
Circle Passing Three Points Detection circle center
*ANS0 is X, ANS1 is Y, ANS2 is θ operation.
LJ-X UM_GB 3-41

Managing Program Settings
Managing Program Settings
Describes management method of saving, copying,

deleting, importing/exporting, name editing, etc. of program
Deleting a program
settings.
1 Click and select
Reference [Delete].
For details on how to add new program settings and switching
The [Delete] screen appears.
methods, refer to "Adding new program settings” (page 3-17) and
"Changing to existing program settings" (page 3-18).
Saving a setting
1 Click "Save" on the top left of the screen.

2 Click [OK].
Settings are saved.
Copying a setting
1 Click and select
2 Click [Target].
[Copy].
The [Select target Program] screen appears.
The [Copy] screen appears.
3 Select the examination setting you want to delete,
and then click [OK].
Reference
Currently active program settings cannot be deleted. To delete a

program being edited at that point, change the program setting to
a different one and then perform deletion.
4 Click [Delete].
5 Click [OK].
The program setting is deleted.
2 Click "Source" and "Destination" and select the

copy source and copy destination inspection
settings, then click "Execute".
The program setting is copied.
3-42 LJ-X UM_GB

Writing settings to SD card Loading settings from SD card

The test settings can be exported to an SD card and saved You can read the data exported by "Export" of this machine
as a backup. or [Export] of PC application (LJ-X Series Simulation-
Point
Software).
Do not use with third-party SD cards. Doing so may result in data Point
loss or setting data damage. Do not use with third-party SD cards. Doing so may result in data
loss or setting data damage.
1 Click and select

[Export]. 1 Click and select
The [Export] screen appears. [Import].
The [Import] screen appears.

2 Specify the program setting and the target data for
export. 2 Specify the program setting and the target data for
• Program Settings: Program setting file (inspect.dat) import.
including tools.
• Global Settings: Environment setting data (env.dat)
3 Click "Execute".
such as input/output. Executes the importing process.
• Reference Image: Standard image (ref*_*.bmp)
• Opening Screen: Image data (Logo.bmp) of screen
displayed at start-up. For details on the startup
screen, see "To change the opening screen
displayed at the start-up" (page 3-14).
• Archived Image: Exports images by specifying the
number of images from the latest archived images
(only when the export target is [Only Current
Program]). You can also output archived images to
[OK] or [NG] folder according to the total status.
• OCR Library: Dictionary data used by the OCR/
OCR2 tools(dic*.dat).
3 Click "Execute".
Executes the exporting process.
Reference
Please refer to page 3-12 for "Remove SD Card 2" and page 7-43
for "File Management".
LJ-X UM_GB 3-43

Renaming a program Converting program settings

1 Click and select
Converting program settings to the most recent
"Edit Name".
version
The "Edit Name" screen is displayed.
To use all the functions described in this manual, you need
to update the programs to the latest version. However,
updating the program version will prevent you from loading
them into older version controllers.
Reference
Be aware that settings cannot be restored to the earlier version
after conversion.
1 Left-click and
select [Change to Latest Version of Program
Setting].
2 Click [Target].
The [Select target Program] screen appears.
3 Select the program setting to rename and click

[OK].
4 Click "Edit" and enter a name.
2 Left-click [OK].
Reference
It is also possible to batch-convert all programs to the latest

version by selecting [Convert All Programs to Latest Version].
3-44 LJ-X UM_GB

Custom Menu
Custom Menu
Overview of custom menu Creating a menu that collected only

necessary items
When parameters of each tool are registered in the custom
menu, access to the frequently edited item can be easily
gained. With combination of Account Settings (page 8-19), Registering items in custom menu
the setting items that can be changed by an operator are
limited to the custom menu items. It can be used in various
1 In Setup Mode, open the screen of the desired item
ways. to register in the custom menu.
Example of custom menu

2 Click at the left of the item name.

The [Edit Custom Menu] screen appears.
Types of setting items that can be registered in the

custom menu
The following items can be registered:
• Tool setting items
• Some of the setting screens included in tools
• Tool itself 3 Input the [Custom Menu Name] and [Help]
(explanation displayed at selection of the menu
Number of items that can be registered in the custom
item) as necessary, and click [OK].
menu
When displayed before the item name selected in
A maximum of 100 items can be registered in the custom
Step 2 is changed to , registration is completed.
menu.
When registration in the custom menu is completed, the

custom menu button is displayed on the right of the tool
bar.
LJ-X UM_GB 3-45

Custom Menu
Reference Editing custom menu

From the setting screen of the custom menu, judgment Custom menu details including change of display sequence
condition items which are not set cannot be made valid. on the custom menu can be edited.
When registering a judgment condition item in the custom
menu, set the upper or lower limit in advance. Reference
If the account is not [Admin], the custom menu cannot be

edited.
Using custom menu
1 Put a check mark on [Edit Custom Menu] at the
1 Click on the right of the tool bar. lower part of the custom menu.
The custom menu can be edited.
The [Custom Menu] appears.
Reference
2 Edit the custom menu as necessary.
When the account is [User], it is not displayed (page 8- Changing display sequence of the items in the tool
19). Click or .
2 Click the desired item for adjustment. Changing menu item name or Help
Click [Edit] of the desired item for change.
The adjustment screen appears. Make adjustments similar
to normal tool settings. Deleting item
Click of the items to delete.
Reference
If [Help] is input during registration of the custom menu, 3 After setting, uncheck [Edit Custom Menu].
click [?] displayed on the menu item. The items input
as Help appear.
To use the custom menu in run mode

Check the [Permit to Change Judgment Conditions in Run
Mode] at the bottom of the custom menu to allow the
custom menu to be used in run mode.
Reference
The only custom menu functions that can be used in run

mode are adjusting the judgment conditions. The contents
of the custom menu cannot be edited.
3-46 LJ-X UM_GB
4
Chapter
Head Settings 
(When Using the LJ-X Series Head) ............................ 4-2
Head settings
Configuring the Head Settings .................................. 4-2
Head.......................................................................... 4-2
Capture Settings...................................................... 4-10
Correction Settings.................................................. 4-15
List of Settings......................................................... 4-27
Speed UP ................................................................ 4-28
Head Settings 
(When Using the LJ-V Series Head) .......................... 4-29
Configuring the Head Settings ................................ 4-29
Head........................................................................ 4-29
Capture Settings...................................................... 4-36
Head settings
Correction Settings.................................................. 4-41
List of Settings......................................................... 4-53
Speed Up ................................................................ 4-53
LJ-X UM_GB 4-1

Head Settings (When Using the LJ-X Series Head)
Head Settings (When Using the LJ-X Series Head)
Configuring the Head Settings Head
1 Click .
Configure the connected head type.
The [Head Settings] menu appears. 1 Open [Head Settings].
2 Select the [Head] tab.

Head settings
2 Configure the head settings.

“Head” (page 4-2)
“Capture settings” (page 4-36)
“Correction settings” (page 4-15)
“List of settings” (page 4-27)
3 After completing the setting, click [OK].
3 Select the head type with the head settings.
Head Settings
Model
Click [LJ-X]. Clicking on [Auto] will automatically recognize
the model, head type, and number of heads.
Head Model
Select a head type.
Luminance Output
Uncheck this if you are not using brightness data.
Reference
Unchecking this option and not using brightness data can help to save
on various types of storage space.
4-2 LJ-X UM_GB

Head Count Trigger Mode

Click [1] or [2] according to the number of heads
External TRG triggers input through the allocated external I/
connected.
Terminal O terminal.
Reference Mouse It is the trigger input by clicking "Measurement
Up to two heads of the same model can be connected. execution" with the mouse.
RS-232C It is the trigger input by command via RS-232C.
Ethernet It is the trigger input by command via Ethernet.
Trigger Settings
PLC Link It is the trigger input by command via RS-232C or
Selects the type of trigger to use. Ethernet PLC-Link.
EtherNet/IP This is the trigger input by the cyclic
communication, message communication, or a
command of EtherNet/IP.
PROFINET It is the trigger input by cyclic communication and
command of PROFINET.
EtherCAT This is the trigger input by the cyclic
Unit communication, non-cyclic communication, or a
External Capture images in response to trigger inputs from
command of an EtherCAT unit.
the mouse or trigger signals sent from an external
Head settings
device. Captures processing only once for each
Unit communication, message communication, or a
trigger input.
command of an EtherNet/IP unit.
Internal Sets the trigger cycle and captures images in
PROFINET This is the trigger input by the cyclic
response to trigger signals that are generated
periodically. Processing can be repeated without
command of a PROFINET unit.
the external trigger input
PC It is the trigger input from the method of the ActiveX
External Trigger Advanced Settings Application control.
To configure the advanced settings of the external trigger,
Trigger Delay (ms)
click .
Sets the trigger delay time when starting the capture image.
If you are using an encoder, set the delay count number.
Advanced Settings of Internal Trigger

To configure the advanced settings of the internal trigger,
click .
Trigger Cycle
Sets the trigger cycle and captures images in response to
trigger signals that are generated periodically.
LJ-X UM_GB 4-3

Line Scan Interval Settings Encoder Specification Line Scan Interval Settings
Select either [Time Delay] or [Specify Encoder] from [Line

Scan Interval].
Time Delay Set the line scan interval in hours.

Specify Set the line scan interval with the encoder count.
Encoder
Line Scan Interval Setting specified by time

Head settings
Scan Frequency (μs/line)

Specifies the line scan time interval.
The max speed will vary per head. Please check the
Scan Frequency (μs/line) specifications of the head.
The max speed will vary per head. Please check the Skipping
specifications of the head. Set the count number of encoders input per line.
Max Line Scan Frequency Use Dedicated Encoder

Indicates the fastest period that the head can acquire one Places a check when using our image processing system
line. encoders. Encoder configurations can be changed in the
If the value specified for the scan period exceeds the max [XY Ratio Adjustment Navigation] screen if this device is
line scan period, click the [Speed Up] button and adjust the connected with an RS-232C cable to our image processing
relevant settings. system Encoder.
Line Interpolation Max Line Scan Frequency

Only interpolates the profile for specified numbers. Indicates the fastest period that the head can acquire one
Select between None / 2 Lines / 4 Lines / 8 Lines /  line.
16 Lines. If the value specified for the line scan period exceeds the
max line scan period, click the [Speed Up] button and
Reference
adjust the relevant settings.
Example of Use
If the X profile data interval is 50 μm and the encoder is input every 100
μm, the aspect ratio becomes 1:1. If 2 Lines is selected in this example,
the profile will be obtained at every 100 μm, but the profile will be
interpolated, producing a 1:1 aspect ratio. This is used when you want
to maintain the aspect ratio without making the trigger input of the
encoder etc. faster (or finer).
4-4 LJ-X UM_GB

XY Ratio Adjustment Navigation counter clockwise.

Adjusts parameters related to line scan interval so that X/Y Yes (CW): Only counts during clockwise rotation.
resolution is aligned. Yes (Both directions): Counts during clockwise rotation,
and if there is a counter clockwise count, counts once that
amount is returned.
- CW/CCW Reverse:
None (initial value): Counts with CW (clockwise).
Yes: Counts with CCW (counter clockwise).
- Behavior at Z-Phase Input:
None (initial value): Z-phase input not used.
External trigger input: Used as a trigger input.
Counter reset: Used as an encoder counter reset.
Counter reset + external trigger input: Used as an encoder
counter reset and as a trigger input.
- Behavior at External Trigger Input:
Calculation Conditions - Timeout Detection: Sets a time once the trigger has
Head settings
• Calculation Method: been input as a timeout (unit: ms).
- Calculation from Scaling Coefficient: Takes images
Reference
of a workpiece with known X/Y dimensions while moving it
Relationship between sampling and direction detection
and finds X/Y direction scaling correction coefficients
based on the measured values and separately specified Clockwise (forward rotation) Counterclockwise (reverse)
actual values. The line scan interval is adjusted such that Encoder A phase
this scaling correction coefficient is 1:1.

Encoder B phase
- Direct Specification of Magnification: Takes images
Detection
of a workpiece with known X/Y dimensions while moving it direction Sampling Encoder count value
and calculates the line scan interval necessary to take an None 1X 1
1 2
2
3 4
3
5 6
4
7 8
5
9 10
6
11 12
2X
accurate image by specifying a magnification to modify the 4X 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
image times N in the Y direction. Yes

(CW
1X 1
1 2
2
3 4
3
5 6
3
6 6
3
6 6
3
6 6
2X
- Calculation with Encoder Resolution: Used in cases direction)
4X 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
where the number of pulses and movement distance per Yes

(both
1X 1 2 3 2 1 0
2X 1 2 3 4 5 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
encoder cycle is known. Movement distance per encoder directions)

4X 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
cycle can be specified either by the diameter of the pulley

installed in the encoder, or by its movement distance (only
when the encoder is specified by line scan interval).
Calculation Result
Clicking [Re-Calculate] under Calculation Conditions will
calculate the parameters needed to set the XY ratio to 1:1.
Once the calculation results and post-adjustment image
have been confirmed to not have errors, click [Reflect
Parameters] to set the parameters to match.
Line Scan Interval Settings

• Line Scan Interval:
- When Setting [Time Delay]: Specifies the interval per
line with a time.
- When Setting [Specify Encoder]: Specifies the
encoder input count per line.
• Sampling (Only during encoder specification):
- 1X (initial value): Counts at the rise of encoder phase A.
- 2X: Counts at the rise and fall of encoder phase A.
- 4X: Counts at the rise and fall of encoder phases A and B.
• Advanced Settings (Only during encoder specification)
- Direction Detection:
None (initial value): Counts with either clockwise or
LJ-X UM_GB 4-5

Capture Area Settings [Y-Direction] Total Line Count 

(When using continuous acquisition)
Capture Method
Configured when the line count with slice acquisition is
Select a height image/shading (contrast) image acquisition insufficient.
method from [Sheet-fed], [Continuous Acquisition], or If it is enabled, capture will stop when the acquisition for the
[Sheet-fed (auto part detection)]. total number of lines is completed after inputting the trigger.
By the time the total line number is reached, captures will
be taken for the number of captured images.
Scan Line Settings

Clicking [Scan Line Settings] will allow you to adjust various
parameters such as capture line count while checking the
captured height image/shading (contrast) image.
When using Sheet-fed 

(auto part detection)
Sheet-fed Captures one slice of the height image/shading

Head settings
(contrast) image. Imaging is initiated via the input

of the TRG signal and halted when capturing is
completed for the specified number of lines or
when the EXT signal is input.
Continuous Continuously captures the height image/shading
acquisition (contrast) image. Imaging is initiated via the input
of the TRG signal and halted via the input of the
EXT signal. Specify the total number of lines when
importing a specified number of lines and
inspecting a long workpiece.
[Y Direction] Number of Lines
Sheet-fed Continuously captures the height image/shading
Specifies the image acquisition line count.
(auto part (contrast) image. Images are imported when a
detection) workpiece is captured at the specified height or Capture start line offset
with the specified shading.
Specify the profile data range by the number of lines of
When Sheet-fed (auto part detection) is set, the offset from the workpiece detection position. Specify a
laser beam is emitted at all times. negative number as the offset if you want to move detected
If capturing is interrupted by the EXT signal, workpieces that have been captured further down in the
laser on terminal or TE command after the image, or specify a positive number if you want to move
NOTICE trigger is confirmed, the partially captured image them upward.
is generally discarded, but in some cases the
image may be captured as a black image and Detection lower limit (mm)
misjudged by the system. Do not interrupt Specify the minimum height of workpieces to be detected.
capturing during operation. Detection threshold judgment is performed for profile data
before the height range adjustment setting is applied.
When using sheet-fed or continuous acquisition
[Y Direction] Number of Lines Profile Mask
Specifies the image acquisition line count. This function disables profile data that is below the
minimum threshold.
[Y Direction] Overlap Lines
This function is applied in the 2D and 3D display. It is not
(When using continuous acquisition) used in the profile display or received image display.
Sets the number of lines to overlap
the image. Even if there is a foreign Auto Part Detection
substance at the boundary Clicking [Auto Part Detection] will allow you to adjust
between the image and the image, various parameters for automatic detection of workpieces
the image is handed over from the (page 4-7).
previous image and can be
inspected without omission.
4-6 LJ-X UM_GB

Auto Part Detection (When using Sheet-fed (auto Target

part detection)) Target: Select the target to be used for detection.
• Height: Sets height data as the target.
• Shading: Sets shading data as the target.
Detection Region
Specify a region in the X direction as the detection target.
Clicking [Edit] will allow you to set the left and right edges of
the detection area.
Treat Detection Area as Mask: If this option is enabled, the
entire area in the X direction except the detection area is
set as the target for detection.
Head settings
Detection Threshold
Specify a range from the maximum to the minimum height
(mm) or shading (gradation) of workpieces to be detected.
Detection threshold judgment is performed for profile data
Judgment Method
Specify the judgment conditions for profile data in the X
direction.
• Total Count: All data within the detection threshold that has
at least the judgment score in the X direction is treated as a
target for detection.
• Continuous: Data within the detection threshold that
continuously has at least the judgment score in the X
direction is treated as a target for detection.
Judgment Points
Specify the number of points in the X and Y directions that
are required for auto part detection.
Capture Start Line Offset • X Direction: Data within the detection threshold that has at
Specify the profile data range by the number of lines of least the number of points in the X direction that are
offset from the workpiece detection position. Specify a specified for the Judgment Method setting is treated as a
negative number as the offset if you want to move detected target for detection.
workpieces that have been captured further down in the • Y Direction: Profiles that are targets for detection are
image, or specify a positive number if you want to move detected by the auto part detection function if the specified
them upward. number of points in the Y direction continuously meet the
conditions.
Number of Mask Lines
Specify the number of lines to acquire without judging
whether they meet the conditions. Masking starts after
capturing the specified number of lines from the previous
workpiece detection position. Use this if there is an interval
where you do not want to detect workpieces.
Auto Part Detection Target

When using two heads, set the head that will be the target
for detection.
LJ-X UM_GB 4-7

Gap Interpolation Points Acquisition Range Advanced Settings

In some cases, data that is not a target for detection exists
between data that is a target for detection. Specify the Measurement Range Settings
maximum data size (points) to be treated as a detection To adjust the position of the measurement range, click
target in such cases. .
For the X direction, this can only be set when Judgment
Score is set to "Continuous Points".
• X Direction: Specify the number of consecutive data points
within the detection threshold that are treated as continuous
data when the number of consecutive points is below the
number set for the X direction.
• Y Direction: Specify the number of consecutive data points
number set for the Y direction.
Reference Height Correct

Specify the reference height correction to be used when
specific height data is used as a reference. This can only
Head settings
be set when the target is "Height".

• OFF: Absolute values are used to compare threshold
values.
• Correction ON: Uses the average, peak and bottom heights
of the correction area as a reference when judging the
threshold values.
The reference height used to judge the detection threshold
values for profile n is calculated from profile n-1 before it. If
peak or bottom is selected, X Transfer Average is applied.
• Correction ON (Tilt): Uses a slant created by a line passing
through the representative points of two correction areas as
a reference when judging the threshold values. The
reference height used to judge the detection threshold [X Direction] Profile Data Count
values for profile n is calculated from profile n-1 before it. The X-direction data count of the profile obtained from the
The representative points can be selected from the average, head.
peak or bottom height of the entire area. If peak or bottom is Determined via head count, X-direction measurement
selected, X Transfer Average is applied. range, binning, and X-direction compression.
Correction Area [Z Direction] Usage Range

Specify the area to be used for reference height correction. Narrowing the measurement range allows for increasing of
The reference plane used to judge the detection threshold the max speed line scan period.
is calculated from the previous profile. The measurement range that can be set varies depending
on the head type that is used and the conditions. For
X Moving Average
details, see "Fast Sampling Frequency" (page A-2).
A transfer average of a specified number of points is
applied to data that is subject to judgment about whether it Fine-tune the center of the range
is within the detection threshold. The judgment is When this option is enabled, the center position of the
performed for filtered data. This can only be set when the measurement range can be set in detail as a percentage of
target is "Height". the overall measurement range in the Z direction.
4-8 LJ-X UM_GB

[Z Direction] Center of Usage Range Binning

When the measurement range is narrowed, adjust the
Binning (Z)
center position of the measurement range.
• When "Fine-tune the center of the range" is disabled Setting binning (Z) to ON will sum up the signals of
The center position of the measurement range can be adjacent pixels, allowing for high-speed capturing at the
adjusted between a suitable number of levels for the size of cost of resolution.
the measurement range (level -23 (NEAR side) to level 23
Reference
(FAR side)). It is displayed when a binning (Z) supporting head is connected.
• When "Fine-tune the center of the range" is enabled
The center position of the measurement range can be set as Binning (X)
a percentage of the overall measurement range in the Z Processes data while treating a 2-pixel section in the X
direction (1.3% (NEAR side) to 98.8% (FAR side)). direction as a single pixel in the image sensor. When
enabled, this allows for raising the speed line scan period
[Z Direction] Height Display Resolution
to the limit without reducing the measurement range. The
The display resolution of the height data acquired from the number of profile data in the X direction is halved and the
head. Determined via the configured max. and min. values resolution is coarse.
of the height range.
X-Axis Data Skipping
Height Range Adjustment
Thins profile data in the X-direction. Reduces the resolution
Head settings
Set the acquisition range of height data. of the X-direction. Has no impact on max speed line scan
period.
Expansion Area Setting
Expansion Area
When LJ-X8400 is connected and Expansion Area is set to
ON, the Z-axis (height) measurement range will be
expanded to -220 mm to +95 mm.
Capture Area Settings

Specifies the image acquisition method. (page 4-6)
Out of Range Data

Selects a processing method for when a value exceeds the
max. or is below the min. to either clip or invalid value.
- Invalid Value: Treats both the + side and - side as invalid
values.
- Clip: Treats + side as the max. value and - side as the
min. value.
LJ-X UM_GB 4-9

Capture Settings Capture Settings by Sensitivity Adjustment

Click the [Sensitivity Adjustment] button to configure
Sets the head’s processing and capturing conditions for
sensitivity adjustment.
profiles.
1 Open [Head Settings].
2 Select the [Capture] tab.

Head settings
Adjustment Mode
Sensitivity adjustment automatically adjusts in accordance
with the dynamic range and exposure time of the object.
Please start from the center for the first time. If the amount
3 Set the capture settings. of reflected light is insufficient and the profile is missing,
Dynamic range, exposure time, and detection sensitivity adjust it to the [+] side. If the amount of reflected light is
can be automatically adjusted by clicking [Sensitivity high and false detection has been made due to multiple
Adjustment]. Or, if [Manual Settings] is checked, each reflected light from the surrounding area, adjust it to the [-]
parameter can be set manually. side.
If there is no problem with the profile, adjustment is
complete.
If the adjustment result is not optimal, adjust it to the [-] side
until the message disappears. If the desired profile cannot
be obtained, click [AUTO] on the trigger period setting or
delay the trigger period and adjust the sensitivity again.
4-10 LJ-X UM_GB

Capture Settings by MANUAL Settings

Clicking [Manual Settings] and placing a check will allow for
each parameter of capture settings to be set manually.
Head settings
Light Intensity Settings
Dynamic Range
Set the dynamic range of the head capture sensor.
A large value is useful if the difference in reflectance on the
object is large.
On the other hand, if you want to avoid false detections of
Adjustment Conditions
weak light when there are multiple light reflections etc.,
Scan Frequency setting the value low will aid in this.
Specifies the line scan time interval. (page 4-4) Exposure Time
Speed Up Set the exposure time of the head capture sensor.

If the reflected light from the workpiece is too strong or if
Adjusts settings related to speed UP.
the moving speed of the workpiece is too fast and the
• Exposure time (page 4-11)
received image is blurred, shortening the exposure time will
• Luminance Output (page 4-2)
improve this.
• [Z-Direction] Use Range (page 4-36)
• Binning Settings (page 4-9) Reference
If the exposure time is changed, perform sensitivity adjustment again.

Target Area
Set the range of light reception amount to use for feedback Detection sensitivity
control of light intensity on the capture sensor. By limiting Set the threshold of received light amount to be detected as
the target area to where you want to set, you can control a peak.
the amount of light more stably. Higher values make it easier to detect as peaks.
Or, if you want to avoid false peak detections due to
ambient light or multiple light reflections, set the value low.
Control Light Intensity

[MANUAL] is typically used for 3D measurements.
Light emitted from the laser is constrained to within the
upper limit and lower limit values of the control range. It is
recommended that the upper limit and lower limit values be
set to the same value when performing 3D measurements.
However, there are cases where modifying the control
range will provide stability in cases where the measurement
results are unstable.
LJ-X UM_GB 4-11

Exposure mode
Standard Measure the peak with the maximum amount of
Single capture Feedback the amount of light received when the received light.
last capture was taken, and set the capture NEAR The peak which is closer to the head is measured.
parameters for the next time you take a capture. If FAR The peak which is far from the head is measured.
the measurement is not stable as standard, select Treat as If there are multiple peaks in the same X
multiple flash. However, if multiple flash is set, the Invalid coordinate, it is treated as invalid data.
sensitivity adjustment function cannot be used.
Multiple flash For each sampling, captures are taken as many Reference
(synthesis) times as the number of flashes, changing the A selection cannot be made when the stray light control function is
brightness, and then combining the profile of each in use.
capture; this allows for the creation of a stable
profile even in work pieces with vast differences in Blurred Light Filter
reflectivity. Disturbance light and multiple reflection light are imaged as
To allow for capturing while changing the thick and dim light on the received image. Using this feature
brightness, Light Control Mode settings are will not detect that dim light.
ignored.
Multiple For each sampling, captures are taken as many
Image Mask
luminescence times as the number of flashes, and a profile is It will not detect the light on
(light quantity generated from the last capture result. the part where the mask is
Head settings
optimization) As feedback of received light amount is adjusted attached on the received

for the number of capture times to adjust capture image. Ignores ambient light
parameters, stable profile can be acquired. and stray light caused by A: Mask B: Stray light
Number of Times of Light Emission multiple reflections, allowing

for the creation of a profile.
In case of multi flash, set the number of flashes per
Set with upper mask, lower mask.
sampling.
As the number of flashes becomes greater, the max. speed None Not set
line scan period becomes slower. Rectangle Set the region disabling peak detection to a
rectangle.
Reference
Triangle Set the region disabling peak detection to a
If the exposure mode is set to [Standard], this is not shown.
triangle.
Edit Area by the Image Mask

Detection Mode 1 Click the [Settings] button for the image mask.
Configures irr. reflection removal, detection mode, blurred [Light Reception Mask] screen is displayed.
light filter, and image mask.
Irr. Reflection Removal

Set it to this function when you want to reduce the effect of
multiple reflections or ambient light on the profile.
Reference
It is effective only when the LJX head is connected.
Detection Mode
If multiple peaks are detected at the same X coordinate in
the received light image, set which peak to measure. Useful
for avoiding false detections due to multiple reflections.
4-12 LJ-X UM_GB

2 Select the shape of the mask area.  Edit the size of the rectangular area
The mask area is displayed in the imaging display area. • The vertical mask rectangle can be resized by selecting and
dragging within the rectangular area.
Select within
rectangle
Mask area • You can resize by selecting and dragging the vertices.
Select vertex
Drag
 Edit the size of the triangular area

3 Move and edit the size of the area.
You can select vertices and drag to move and resize them.
When you move the mouse cursor over the area, the
Head settings
mouse cursor changes to .
Select vertex
Drag
 Move the area

Reference
You can move the area by dragging in the area (other than
The area can also be set by entering a numerical value in the entry
field of the settings editing area. the vertex).
• Rectangular input field
Select in area
Drag
• Triangular input field
LJ-X UM_GB 4-13

Image mask position correction Reference
Perform settings to make the image mask conform to the • When LJ-X Series Head is connected: If set to 255, linear
work piece according to the displacement of the work interpolation will be used even if invalid data is 255 points or more
continuously up to 638 points. No interpolation will be performed if
piece.
continuously at 639 points or more.
• When the LJ-V Series head is connected: If set to 255, linear
interpolation will be performed even if the invalid data continues to be
255 points or more.
Dead Zone Interpolation
Not performing Does not interpolate blind spot data.

Leave the blind spot as an invalid pixel.
Horizontal/ Interpolate blind spot data horizontally
Vertical interpolation from the nearest point.
Linear interpolation Interpolate both ends of the blind spot
data with a straight line.
Head settings
Reference
If the head count is 2, cannot be selected individually for heads A

and B.
1 Check the [Image Mask Position Correct] box and

Advanced setting
click the [Settings] button.
Configures detailed operations of capture settings. To
2 Click Update reference profile to update the configure the settings, click .
reference profile.
3 Select the correction method and set each

correction item.
4 Select the process when the correction fails.
5 Click [OK].
X axis invalid data processing

Configures invalid data interpolation points and blind spot Image Buffer Settings
data interpolation. Set the number of times of capture to secure as a buffer for
prior capture.
Profile data pitch (X)

Specify the profile data pitch in the X-direction.
Number of Invalid Points

Invalid data is profile data considered to be undetectable
due to excessive or insufficient light intensity.
When invalid data is continuous in the X direction, if the
number of continuous data is less than the number of
interpolation points, it is replaced with valid data. The value
after replacement is the value obtained by linear
interpolation with the valid data at both ends of invalid data.
4-14 LJ-X UM_GB

Laser Emission Positioning Function Correction Settings

This function can be used when the LJ-X Series head is
Configure data processing for the detected profile.
connected and the received light image display is set
to ON. The LED light and laser beam built in the LJ-X 1 Open [Head Settings].
Series head can be lit at any brightness, allowing the user
to easily perform laser emission positioning. 2 Select the [Profile] tab.
Click the LED light button to adjust the brightness of
the LED and laser.
Head settings
3 Set the correction settings.
Height Image Filters

Configures profile alignment, dead zone noise cut, spike
noise cut (1), 2-head dead zone cut, spike noise cut (2),
and invalid pixel suppression.
Point Vibration Correction (Ver. 1.3 and earlier) can

also be used instead of Profile Alignment (page
4-21).
LJ-X UM_GB 4-15

Profile Alignment X Correction

If this option is enabled, it corrects deviation between the
This method corrects position deviation in the X direction
profiles of each line in the X, Z and  directions. In an
only, using the edges of the target object. The correction
environment where the workpiece or head vibrates, the
region of the edges is specified in a height image and the
influence of vibration can be corrected. The effects of
edge positions of the target for correction are detected.
eccentricity on a rotating workpiece can also be corrected.
Image distortion caused by deviation of the scan direction
or workpiece shape can also be corrected.
Edge Target
Specify the target data for edge detection.
Head settings
Edge level
Set the height and shading required for detection as an
edge. This is set automatically if [Automatic Setting] is set.
To configure advanced settings for X correction, click
.
Correction type
Select from the initial state of "X correction" and "Z
correction".
You can also add " correction" and "feature point
correction" by clicking the [Add] button.
Point • You can select multiple corrections as the

correction process.
• When multiple correction processes are
selected, the process is performed sequentially
from the top.
• You can change the order of the selected
correction process by clicking the [] or []
button.
4-16 LJ-X UM_GB

Correction Area 1 Height type

The specified rectangular region is referenced at all times. Select from Average, Peak or Bottom.
To configure advanced settings for Z correction, click
Refer to Prev. Section
.
If there is an object to correct Z (Z correction,  correction,
feature point correction) at the previous level, the edge
level is treated as a value relative to the detected Z height.
If there are multiple objects to correct Z at the previous
level, the closest correction detection results are
referenced. If there are no objects at the previous level, the
edge level is treated as an absolute value.
Edge direction
Specifies the profile change direction to be detected as an
edge.
• Both directions: Both rising and falling are the measurement
targets.
• Rising: Targets the direction crossing from bottom to top.
• Falling: Targets the direction crossing from top to bottom.
Head settings
Scan direction
Specify the direction for scanning for the edge within the
measurement range.
Detection label
Among the edge candidates that satisfy the conditions,
specify the label to be selected, using a number.
Correction Area 2
When this option is enabled, another correction region can
be added.
Vibration Threshold
When two regions are set in the same line and there is at
least a set difference between the correction values
calculated for the two regions, one of the two will be judged
as a detection of the intended workpiece shape or noise Correction Area 1
and the correction value will be calculated by interpolating Set the region for calculating the amount of correction.
from the previous and next correction values. Specify the Lines without an attached region are not corrected.
maximum difference between the two vibration components • Rectangle: The specified rectangular region is referenced
treated as detected. at all times.
• Ref. to Prev. Section: If there is an object to correct X (X
correction, feature point correction) at the previous level, the
Z correction shape of the correction area follows the X positions that are
This method corrects deviation in the height (Z) direction detected. The offset, width and upper and lower edge in the
only. The correction region of the height is specified in a Y direction can be specified. If there are multiple objects to
height image and deviation in the height direction is correct X at the previous level, the closest correction
detected. detection results are referenced.
• Refer to X Region Tracking: The shape of the correction
area follows the X positions detected by the X region tracing
settings. The offset and width can be specified.
Correction Area 2
be added.
LJ-X UM_GB 4-17

Vibration Threshold Correction reference

When two regions are set in the same line and there is at Select the standard for detecting tilt.
least a set difference between the correction values • Specified Angle: Calculates the tilt relative to the specified
calculated for the two regions, one of the two will be judged angle. Specify 0° if you want the correction region to be
as a detection of the intended workpiece shape or noise horizontal.
and the correction value will be calculated by interpolating • Align with the first line: Calculates the tilt relative to the first
from the previous and next correction values. Specify the profile for which tilt was detected.
maximum difference between the two vibration components To configure advanced settings for  correction, click .
treated as detected.
X Moving Average
This can be set when the height type is Peak or Bottom. By
applying a transfer average before calculating detection
points, you can stabilize calculation results.
Height Mask (mm)

Heights outside the range specified here are eliminated
when calculating the heights to be used as the correction
target for each line profile.
Head settings
Theta correction
This method detects and corrects the tilt ( angle) of each
line profile. It also corrects deviation in the Z direction.
Set the reference for the tilts to be detected in "Correction
standards". The correction region of the lines is specified in a
height image and the tilt of the target for correction is detected.
Correction Area 1
Set the region for calculating the amount of correction.
Lines without an attached region are not corrected.
• Rectangle: The specified rectangular region is referenced at
all times.
• Refer to the Previous Correction: If there is an object to
correct X (X correction, feature point correction) at the
previous level, the shape of the correction area follows the X
positions that are detected. The offset, width and upper and
lower edge in the Y direction can be specified. If there are
multiple objects to correct X at the previous level, the closest
correction detection results are referenced.
• Refer to X Region Tracing Settings: The shape of the
correction area follows the X positions detected by the X
region tracing settings. The offset and width can be
specified.
Correction Area 2
be added.
4-18 LJ-X UM_GB

Feature correction X Moving Average

This can be set when the feature point type is Peak Point or
In this method, the height (Z) and position (X) of the feature
Bottom Point. By applying a transfer average before
point are detected, and the deviation between the height
calculating detection points, you can stabilize calculation
direction and the X direction is simultaneously corrected.
results.
The correction region of the feature point is specified in a
height image and deviation in the height and position of the
feature point is detected. X Region Tracking
The correction region of the edges is specified in a height
image and the edge positions of the target for correction
are detected. Correction regions for Z correction, θ
correction and feature points can be set based on the edge
positions that are detected here.
Feature point
Select from Peak Point, Bottom Point or Intersection Point
(Line-Line).
To configure advanced settings for feature point correction,
Head settings
click .
Edge Target
Edge level
edge. This is set automatically if [Automatic Setting] is set.
To configure advanced settings for X region tracing, click
.
Correction Area 1
all times.
shape of the correction area follows the X positions that are
detected. The offset, width and upper and lower edge in the
Correction Area 1
Y direction can be specified. If there are multiple objects to
correct X at the previous level, the closest correction Specify the edge correction region.
detection results are referenced. The points for the top left and bottom right corner of the
• Refer to X Region Tracking: The shape of the correction rectangle can be specified numerically in [Edit].
area follows the X positions detected by the X region
tracing settings. The offset and width can be specified.
LJ-X UM_GB 4-19

Edge direction Correction Details (Z)

edge.
targets.
Scan direction
Specify the direction for scanning for the edge within the
measurement range.
Maintain Orientation
Detection label Maintains the tilt in the Y direction of the detected heights.
Among the edge candidates that satisfy the conditions, The tilt is maintained even if the workpiece tilts in the Z
specify the label to be selected, using a number. direction during capture.
Remove Irregular Point

Correction Details (X) Turning this option ON reduces effects caused by
workpiece shapes such as burrs, noise or dust when
Head settings
calculating the degree of correction.

• Abnormal Gap Size (mm):
A point is treated as an abnormal point when the deviation in
the Z direction of the previous and next profiles is larger than
the specified number of pixels.
• No. of Irr. Point Limit (%):
If more than a set number of abnormal points accumulate,
the cluster is treated as part of the intended workpiece
shape, not abnormal points. Specify the maximum number
of points to be treated as abnormal as a percentage of the
Maintains the tilt in the Y direction of the detected edges. number of points detected in the area.
The tilt is maintained even if the workpiece tilts in the X
direction during capture. Vibration Threshold Z (mm)
Set the maximum expected vibration. Lines where
correction above this value is detected are treated as failed
Turning this option ON reduces effects caused by correction calculations and the value is interpolated from
workpiece shapes such as burrs, noise or dust when the previous and next correction values.
• Outlier Threshold (pix): Correction Details (Theta)
the X direction of the previous and next profiles is larger than
the cluster is treated as part of the intended workpiece Vibration Threshold Theta (deg)
shape, not abnormal points. Specify the maximum number Set the maximum expected vibration. Lines where
of points to be treated as abnormal as a percentage of the correction above this value is detected are treated as failed
number of points detected in the area. correction calculations and the value is interpolated from
the previous and next correction values.
Vibration Threshold X (mm)
correction calculations and the value is interpolated from
4-20 LJ-X UM_GB

Vibration Correction (Ver. 1.3 and Earlier) Allowable Range for Ref. Detection
To display this, click , check "Enable Ver.1.3 Vibration Specify the range of height to allow when detecting the
Correction" and click [OK]. reference of vibration correction. Making smaller can
correct the vibration more accurately, but it cannot be
corrected if the bending or vibration of the reference plane
becomes large.
Number of reference lines

When the correction type is set to "Equal section
correction", this is the number of lines referred to up and
down when detecting the correction standard.
Correction Strength
Specify the level of correction processing for the detected
vibration.
Correction Reference Region

Specify the region to detect the reference used for vibration
correction. When using two correction reference regions,
Head settings
specify a region of the same height.
Dead Zone Noise Removal

When enabled, it compensates for vibration components
When enabled, allows for the removal of falsely detected
added to the height data. In an environment where the
data present within triangulated blind spots.
workpiece or head vibrates, the influence of vibration on the
The removed pixels will become invalid pixels.
height measurement value can be reduced. The effects of
eccentricity on a rotating workpiece can also be reduced.
Dead Zone Location

Configures processing direction for 3D blind spot removal.
Bottom side Select this when the work piece is proceeding

from the laser side to the light-receiving side.
(Typically, the blind spot is in the bottom of the
image)
Top side Select this when the work piece is proceeding
from the light-receiving side to the laser side.
Correction Type (Typically, the blind spot is in the top of the image)
Bottom side/ Select this when 2 heads are connected, the work
Select the vibration correction processing type.
top side piece is proceeding from the laser side to the
Plane (Zθ) Compensate for vertical and rotational vibrations light-receiving side of Head A, and the opposite
based on the plane in the acquired data. direction for Head B.
Plane Vertical vibration is corrected based on the plane Top side/ Select this when 2 heads are connected, the work
correction (Z) in acquired data. bottom side piece is proceeding from the light-receiving side
Equal section Select when there is no reference plane. to the laser side of Head A, and the opposite
correction (Z) Compensate for vertical vibration with a direction for Head B.
workpiece such as a cable that has almost the
Dead Zone Angle
same cross section.
Enter the angle of the light receiver in relation to the work
piece. Change this to fine-tune the effect.
LJ-X UM_GB 4-21

Detection Point Cut Target

Determines whether the data is the is height of the target Set the type of protruding point to be removed.
object or noise data, based on the noise data height and
Upper Part Removes only the protruding points that are high
specified blind spot angle. If the height is known, the size of
relative to the periphery.
the angle of the Y-direction from the blind spot angle is
Low side Removes only the protruding points that are low
calculated. If there is valid data of the detection points or
relative to the periphery.
more within the data which has been calculated as the blind
Both high and Removes both high and low side protruding points
spot, that height data is treated as noise.
low with respect to the periphery.
Dead Zone Processing Range
2-Head Dead Angle Cut
Enter a larger value for cases where a larger amount of
When measurement is performed using two heads (head A
noise data occurs in blind spots. However, the larger the
and head B), a height image captured by each head is
specified value, the more internal processing will be
shifted by a preset correction value to generate a
required, so select a value which balances processing time
composite image, With two heads it can create an image
with effect.
with reduced effects of blind spots, and can create an
Decimation Point image with reduced noise components.
When combining the profile information from two directions
Decimates the specified number of lines to refer to at
to generate a height image, check it and then click [Details]
calibration.
Head settings
to specify the combining condition.

The more the decimation point, the calibration speed
increases.
Spike Noise Cut (1)

When enabled, the pixels with prominent height due to
noise, etc. can be removed. The removed protruding points
become invalid pixels.
Set Region Settings

Specify the location where the common features are shown
in the images acquired by the two heads.
Execute Calibration
Specify of Processing Direction Calculates a correction value that will allow for overlapping
If the processing direction is specified, place a check and of characteristics present in the range specified in detection
then configure the processing direction in the [Processing region settings within the images shown by Heads A and B.
Direction] field.
Check Collection Values
X Eliminates continuous vertical protruding noise in You can check and correct the correction value calculated
the image, leaving continuous horizontal and
by calibration.
protruding dots.
Y Eliminates continuous horizontal protruding noise
in the image, leaving continuous vertical and
protruding dots.
XY individual You can adjust the deletion size individually for
each direction.
Cut Size
Removes protruding noise below the specified size width.
Cut Threshold (mm)

Removes the protruding points farther from the specified
height with respect to the periphery as noise.
4-22 LJ-X UM_GB

Processing Type Spike Noise Cut (2)

Select the method for combining the head A and B profiles. This can be used when 2 head blind spot removal is set to
ON. (page 4-22)
Noise deletion The noise is reduced by removing parts where the
height difference between the measured values of
heads A and B is large. It is effective for
eliminating disturbance light such as multiple
reflections.
Deletion of Two heads compensate for each other's blind
blind spot spots of the censor, reducing the effects of blind
(FAR data is spots. When there are data in both heads, the
prioritized) FAR side data is used.
Dead Angle Two heads compensate for each other's blind
Cut spots of the censor, reducing the effects of blind
spots. When there are data in both heads, the
average value is used.
Height Outputs the difference between the measured Invalid Pixel Suppression
difference values of heads A and B. It can be used to
When enabled, invalid pixels are suppressed with height
display confirm the calibration accuracy at the time of
data estimated from surrounding valid pixel values. Invalid
setting.
Head settings
pixel suppression does not affect the value of valid pixels
Noise Judgment Threshold (mm) around invalid pixels.
The heights of the heads A and B are compared, and a
pixel whose difference in height is larger than the specified
threshold is judged as noise.
Combine Grayscale images

Check this to use grayscale images as well for composition.
Use Grayscale Img. Also in Dead Ang. Judg.

Place a check here if using a shading image for blind spot Level
determination of noise pixels. Enabling this will allow for the
Specifies the suppression range of invalid pixels with an
output of accurate height data, stabilized with blind spot
intensity (0: no interpolation to 9; a 10-step scale). The
portions.
higher the intensity, the wider the range of invalid pixels can
Point • 2 heads, A and B, must be installed touching, be suppressed.
opposite the scan direction.
• Align the center position of the 2 opposing
Adj. Width
heads (X direction) to follow the scan direction. Selecting "Small" reduces the effect of the intensity, but
If the center position (X direction) slips, the X allows you to fine-tune the degree of suppression of invalid
direction measurement range will be pixels. The boundary between the remaining invalid pixels
decreased by that amount. In some heads, the and valid pixels is as it is in "small", and in "big"
laser’s center position does not match the interpolation is performed with invalid pixels at 0 (initial
case's center.
setting value: small).
Outline Interpolation Suppression

Suppressing the contour of the height image from being fat
by interpolation processing.
LJ-X UM_GB 4-23

Median (Y-Direction)
Filter Settings
Performs median processing in the Y direction on profile
Specify the data processing in the X and Y directions for the
data. Set the number of nearby points to use for median
detected profile.
processing. Median processing is processing that adopts
the central value when neighboring data is arranged in
descending order of value, and it is possible to eliminate
abnormal data in the outset.
*Not available on LJ-X8000SO(55209)
Time Axis Invalid Data Processing

To configure the time axis invalid data processing, click
.
X Direction
Preserve Shape
You can apply smoothing filter settings while the profile
maintains the shape of the object. (Filtering prevents the
Head settings
unevenness of the object from becoming dull.)

*Not available on LJ-X8000SO(55209)
Smoothing
Performs moving average processing of profile data in the
X direction.
The setting value specifies the moving average score. To
reduce the variation of profile data, increase the setting
value.
Reference
If shape retention is ON, the maximum number of points that can be set Number of Invalid Points
as smoothing points is 32. Invalid data processing is processing to cancel invalid data
that occurs suddenly. Holds the previous normal value of
Median (X-Direction)
the same X coordinate until invalid data is continuously
Performs median processing in the X direction on profile processed for the number of times of processing in the time
data. Set the number of nearby points to use for median direction.
the central value when neighboring data is arranged in Recovery Count
descending order of value, and it is possible to eliminate While processing invalid data, it is a process to cancel the
abnormal data in the outset. normal value that occurs suddenly. The invalid data is held
until the normal value is obtained continuously for the
Y Direction
number of times of recovery in the time direction.
Averaging
Y direction.
increase the repeatability of profile data, increase the
setting value. When doing external trigger settings,
Number of times of multiple triggers ≧
Median count + averaging count -1
Please set to become above.
4-24 LJ-X UM_GB

Installation Correction Invert

Configures data processing for detected profiles. X Direction
Flip the height image in the X
direction. Enable when the head
installation direction is reversed. With
2 heads, the image is reversed for
each head.
Z Direction
Flip the height image in the Z
direction. The image is reversed for
each head.
Y Direction
Flip the height image in the Y
direction. The image is reversed for
each head.
Head settings
Shift
Wide Combination
Links the height images/ X Direction
shading(contrast) images Offsets the height image/
of 2 heads in the X shading(contrast) image in
direction, and captures the X direction to correct
them as a single image. If the deviation. Use when
the linking points deviate, the head’s installation point
adjust them with the shift/ shifts from the standard
offset. point, or when the position linked by wide link shifts.
Profile Adjustment Z Direction
Image horizontal flip Offsets the profile in the Z

direction to correct a
Flips an entire height
deviation. Use when the
image obtained from 2
head’s installation point
heads horizontally.
shifts from the standard
point, or when the position
linked by wide link shifts.
LJ-X UM_GB 4-25

Offset Y Direction Tilt Correction

Offsets the height image/ Correct the tilt error in the X-axis direction caused by the tilt
shading(contrast) image in the Y of the head or object, with a fixed value.
direction to correct the deviation.
Use when the head’s installation
point shifts from the standard point,
or when the position linked by wide
link shifts. Offsets for each head when using 2 heads.
Profile Flattening Correction

Flattens distortions in the profile caused by factors such as
variations in head mounting or workpiece presentation.
Check the [Profile Flattening Correction] box and click the

[Settings] button.
Head settings
Calculation Area
The angle of the ideal straight line is calculated using the
Profile Flattening Correction measurement data of inclination calculation area 1 and
To enable, turn on the correction type. inclination calculation area 2. Please select an area where
the actual angle is known.
Calculation of adjustment values Calculated Angle
To change the reference profile, click "Update Profile". This is the angle of the straight line calculated using the
measurement data of inclination calculation area 1 and
Important • Place a flat workpiece within the X-axis range inclination calculation area 2.
at the same height as the actual parts to be
measured, then perform the correction. Corrected Angle
• This correction should be done regularly, as
Specifies the actual angle of the line. Click [Register] after
changes to the installation that occur over time
could impact this correction.
entering the angle.
Angle After Correction

The difference between the corrected angle and the
calculated angle is displayed.
Installation Tilt Correction Angle

The inclination of the measured profile is rotationally
corrected by the entered angle.
Height Correction
Set data processing for the detected profile.
4-26 LJ-X UM_GB

List of Settings
Allows for confirmation of currency set parameters.
1 Open [Head Settings].
2 Select the [List] tab.

A list of settings appears.
Reference
Values which have been changed from their defaults are shown in
blue.
Height Calculation Area
Head settings
The level difference is calculated using the difference
between the average height of height calculation area 1
and height calculation area 2. Select an area where the
actual level difference is known.
Calculated Height
This is the level difference calculated using the difference
and height calculation area 2.
Corrected Height
Specify the actual level difference. Click [Register] after
entering the value.
This is the magnification of the corrected height for the
calculated height.
Installation Height Correction Factor

Correct the height of the measured profile by multiplying it
with the magnification value entered.
Wide Binding
When the number of heads is 2, you can select wide
binding.
If you click on the check box for wide binding, the profiles of
the two heads will be combined in the X direction and
captured as one profile. If there is a deviation in the
combined part, please adjust it with the shift.
LJ-X UM_GB 4-27

Speed UP
Adjusts settings related to speed UP. Change each setting
and adjust displayed items so that the maximum speed
trigger period fits the specified trigger period.
If the exposure time is changed, perform sensitivity
adjustment.
1 Open "Head Settings".
2 Click the [Speed Up] button.

Head settings
4-28 LJ-X UM_GB

Head Settings (When Using the LJ-V Series Head)
Head Settings (When Using the LJ-V Series Head)
Configuring the Head Settings Head
1 Click .
The [Head Settings] menu appears. 1 Open [Head Settings].
2 Select the [Head] tab.
Head settings
2 Make settings about the head.
“Head” (page 4-2)
“Capture settings” (page 4-36)
“Correction settings” (page 4-15)
“List of settings” (page 4-27)
3 Select the head type with the head settings.
Head Settings
Model
Click [LJ-V]. Clicking on [Auto] will automatically recognize
the model, head type, and number of heads.
Head Model
Select a head type.
Luminance Output
Check this when using heads which support luminance
output (types with a model number ending in B).
LJ-X UM_GB 4-29

Trigger Mode
Reference
Unchecking this option and not using brightness data can help to save External TRG triggers input through the allocated external I/
on various types of storage space. Terminal O terminal.
Mouse It is the trigger input by clicking "Measurement
Head Count
execution" with the mouse.
Click [1] or [2] according to the number of heads
RS-232C It is the trigger input by command via RS-232C.
connected.
Ethernet It is the trigger input by command via Ethernet.
Reference PLC Link It is the trigger input by command via RS-232C or
Up to two heads of the same model can be connected. Ethernet PLC-Link.
communication, message communication, or a
Trigger Settings
command of EtherNet/IP.
Specify the type of the trigger to use. PROFINET It is the trigger input by cyclic communication and
command of PROFINET.
EtherCAT This is the trigger input by the cyclic
command of an EtherCAT unit.
Head settings
Unit communication, message communication, or a

command of an EtherNet/IP unit.
External Capture images in response to trigger inputs from
PROFINET This is the trigger input by the cyclic
the mouse or trigger signals sent from an external
device. Captures processing only once for each
command of a PROFINET unit.
trigger input.
PC It is the trigger input from the method of the ActiveX
Internal Sets the trigger cycle and captures images in
Application control.
response to trigger signals that are generated
periodically. Processing can be repeated without Trigger Delay (ms)
the external trigger input
Sets the trigger delay time when starting the capture image.
External Trigger Advanced Settings If you are using an encoder, set the delay count number.
To configure the advanced settings of the external trigger, Advanced Settings of Internal Trigger
click .
To configure the advanced settings of the internal trigger,
click .
Trigger Cycle
Sets the trigger cycle and captures images in response to
trigger signals that are generated periodically.
4-30 LJ-X UM_GB

Line Scan Interval Setting Encoder Specification Line Scan Interval Settings
Select "Time Delay" or "Specify Encoder" according to

"Line Scan Interval".
Time Delay Set the line scan interval in hours.

Specify Set the line scan interval with the encoder count.
Encoder
Line Scan Interval Setting specified by time
Scan Frequency (μs/line)

The max speed will vary per head. Please check the
Head settings
specifications of the head.
Skipping
Set the count number of encoders input per line.
Scan Frequency (μs/line) Use Dedicated Encoder

Specifies the line scan time interval. Places a check when using our image processing system
The max speed will vary per head. Please check the encoders. Encoder configurations can be changed in the
specifications of the head. [XY Ratio Adjustment Navigation] screen if this device is
connected with an RS-232C cable to our image processing
Max Line Scan Frequency system encoder.
Indicates the fastest period that the head can acquire one
line. Max Line Scan Frequency
If the value specified for the scan period exceeds the max Indicates the fastest period that the head can acquire one
line scan period, click the [Speed Up] button and adjust the line.
relevant settings. If the value specified for the line scan period exceeds the
max line scan period, click the [Speed Up] button and
Line Interpolation adjust the relevant settings.
Only interpolates the profile for specified numbers.
Select between None / 2 Lines / 4 Lines / 8 Lines /  XY Ratio Adjustment Navigation
16 Lines. Adjusts parameters related to line scan interval so that X/Y
resolution is aligned.
Reference
Example of Use
If the X profile data interval is 50 μm and the encoder is input every 100
μm, the aspect ratio becomes 1:1. If 2 Lines is selected in this example,
the profile will be obtained at every 100 μm, but the profile will be
interpolated, producing a 1:1 aspect ratio. This is used when you want
to maintain the aspect ratio without making the trigger input of the
encoder etc. faster (or finer).
LJ-X UM_GB 4-31

Calculation Conditions - Behavior at External Trigger Input:

• Calculation Method: External trigger input: Used as a trigger input.
- Calculation from Scaling Coefficient: Takes images Counter reset + external trigger input: Used as an encoder
of a workpiece with known X/Y dimensions while moving it counter reset and as a trigger input.
and finds X/Y direction scaling correction coefficients - Timeout Detection: Sets a time once the encoder count
based on the measured values and separately specified has been interrupted as a timeout (unit: ms).
actual values. The line scan interval is adjusted such that
Reference
this scaling correction coefficient is 1:1.
Relationship between sampling and direction detection
- Direct Specification of Magnification: Takes images
of a workpiece with known X/Y dimensions while moving it Clockwise (forward rotation) Counterclockwise (reverse)
and calculates the line scan interval necessary to take an Encoder A phase
accurate image by specifying a magnification to modify the Encoder B phase
image times N in the Y direction. Detection
- Calculation with Encoder Resolution: Used in cases direction Sampling Encoder count value
None 1X 1 2 3 4 5 6
where the number of pulses and movement distance per 2X 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
encoder cycle is known. Movement distance per encoder 4X 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
cycle can be specified either by the diameter of the pulley Yes 1X 1 2 3 3 3 3

(CW 2X 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
direction)
installed in the encoder, or by its movement distance (only 4X 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Head settings
when the encoder is specified by line scan interval). Yes 1X 1 2 3 2 1 0

(both 2X 1 2 3 4 5 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
directions)
4X 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Calculation Result
Clicking [Re-Calculate] under Calculation Conditions will
calculate the parameters needed to set the XY ratio to 1:1.
Once the calculation results and post-adjustment image
have been confirmed to not have errors, click [Reflect
Parameters] to set the parameters to match.
Line Scan Interval Settings

• Line Scan Interval:
- When Setting [Time Specification]: Specifies the
interval per line with a time.
- When Setting [Encoder Specification]: Specifies the
encoder input count per line.
• Sampling (Only during encoder specification):
- 1X (initial value): Counts at the rise of encoder phase A.
- 2X: Counts at the rise and fall of encoder phase A.
- 4X: Counts at the rise and fall of encoder phases A and B.
• Advanced Settings (Only during encoder specification)
- Direction Detection:
None (initial value): Counts with either clockwise or
counter clockwise.
Yes (CW): Only counts during clockwise rotation.
Yes (Both directions): Counts during clockwise rotation,
and if there is a counter clockwise count, counts once that
amount is returned.
- CW/CCW Reverse:
None (initial value): Counts with CW (clockwise).
Yes: Counts with CCW (counter clockwise).
- Behavior at Z-Phase Input:
None (initial value): Z-phase input not used.
Counter reset: Used as an encoder counter reset.
4-32 LJ-X UM_GB

Capture Area Settings [Y-Direction] Total Line Count (When using

continuous acquisition)
Capture Method
Configured when the line count with slice acquisition is
Select a height image/shading (contrast) image acquisition insufficient.
method from [Sheet-fed], [Continuous Acquisition], or If it is enabled, capture will stop when the acquisition for the
[Sheet-fed (auto part detection)]. total number of lines is completed after inputting the trigger.
By the time the total line number is reached, captures will
be taken for the number of captured images.
Scan Line Settings

Clicking [Scan Line Settings] will allow you to adjust various
parameters such as capture line count while checking the
captured height image/shading (contrast) image.
When using Sheet-fed (auto part detection)
Head settings
Sheet-fed Captures one slice of the height image/shading
(contrast) image. Imaging is initiated via the input
of the TRG signal and halted when capturing is
completed for the specified number of lines or
when the EXT signal is input.
Continuous Continuously captures the height image/shading
acquisition (contrast) image. Imaging is initiated via the input
of the TRG signal and halted via the input of the
EXT signal. Specify the total number of lines when
importing a specified number of lines and
inspecting a long workpiece.
Sheet-fed Continuously captures the height image/shading
(auto part (contrast) image. Images are imported when a Capture start line offset
detection) workpiece is captured at the specified height or Specify the profile data range by the number of lines of
with the specified shading.
offset from the workpiece detection position. Specify a
When Sheet-fed (auto part detection) is set, the negative number as the offset if you want to move detected
laser beam is emitted at all times. workpieces that have been captured further down in the
If capturing is interrupted by the EXT signal, image, or specify a positive number if you want to move
laser on terminal or TE command after the them upward.
NOTICE trigger is confirmed, the partially captured image
is generally discarded, but in some cases the Detection lower limit (mm)
image may be captured as a black image and Specify the minimum height of workpieces to be detected.
misjudged by the system. Do not interrupt Detection threshold judgment is performed for profile data
capturing during operation. before the height range adjustment setting is applied.
When using sheet-fed or continuous acquisition Profile Mask

[Y Direction] Number of Lines This function disables profile data that is below the
Specifies the image acquisition line count. minimum threshold.
This function is applied in the 2D and 3D display. It is not
[Y Direction] Overlap Lines 
used in the profile display or received image display.
(When using continuous acquisition)
Sets the number of lines to overlap Auto Part Detection
the image. Even if there is a foreign Clicking [Auto Part Detection] will allow you to adjust
substance at the boundary various parameters for automatic detection of workpieces.
between the image and the image, (page 4-34)
the image is handed over from the
previous image and can be
inspected without omission.
LJ-X UM_GB 4-33

Auto Part Detection (When using Sheet-fed (auto Target

part detection)) Target: Select the target to be used for detection.
• Luminance: Sets luminance data as the target
Detection Region
Specify a region in the X direction as the detection target.
Clicking [Edit] will allow you to set the left and right edges of
the detection area.
Treat Detection Area as Mask: If this option is enabled, the
entire area in the X direction except the detection area is
set as the target for detection.
Head settings
Detection Threshold
Specify a range from the maximum to the minimum height
(mm) or shading (gradation) of workpieces to be detected.
Detection threshold judgment is performed for profile data
Judgment Method
Specify the judgment conditions for profile data in the X
direction.
• Total Count: All data within the detection threshold that has
at least the judgment score in the X direction is treated as a
target for detection.
• Continuous: Data within the detection threshold that
continuously has at least the judgment score in the X
direction is treated as a target for detection.
Judgment Points
[Y Direction] Number of Lines Specify the number of points in the X and Y directions that
are required for auto part detection.
• X Direction: Data within the detection threshold that has at
Capture Start Line Offset least the number of points in the X direction that are
Specify the profile data range by the number of lines of specified for the Judgment Method setting is treated as a
offset from the workpiece detection position. Specify a target for detection.
negative number as the offset if you want to move detected • Y Direction: Profiles that are targets for detection are
workpieces that have been captured further down in the detected by the auto part detection function if the specified
image, or specify a positive number if you want to move number of points in the Y direction continuously meet the
them upward. conditions.
Number of Mask Lines

Specify the number of lines to acquire without judging
whether they meet the conditions. Masking starts after
capturing the specified number of lines from the previous
workpiece detection position. Use this if there is an interval
where you do not want to detect workpieces.
Auto Part Detection Target

When using two heads, set the head that will be the target
for detection.
4-34 LJ-X UM_GB

Gap Interpolation Points Advanced Setting of Capture Area Settings

Specify the number of consecutive invalid data points that
are treated as data that is not a target for detection when Measurement Range Settings
such data exists in the target data. To adjust the position of the measurement range, click
For the X direction, this can only be set when Judgment .
Score is set to "Continuous Points".
• X Direction: Specify the number of consecutive data points
number set for the X direction.
• Y Direction: Specify the number of consecutive data points
number set for the Y direction.
Reference Height Correct

Specify the reference height correction to be used when
specific height data is used as a reference. This can only
be set when the target is "Height".
Head settings
values.
• Correction ON: Uses the average, peak and bottom heights
of the correction area as a reference when judging the
threshold values.
The reference height used to judge the detection threshold
values for profile n is calculated from profile n-1 before it. If
peak or bottom is selected, X Transfer Average is applied.
• Correction ON (Tilt): Uses a slant created by a line passing
through the representative points of two correction areas as
a reference when judging the threshold values. The
reference height used to judge the detection threshold
values for profile n is calculated from profile n-1 before it.
The representative points can be selected from the average,
peak or bottom of the entire area. If the peak or bottom [X-Direction] Profile Data Count
height is selected, X Transfer Average is applied.
The X-direction data count of the profile obtained from the
head.
values.
Determined via head count, X-direction measurement
Correction Area range, binning, and X-direction compression.
Specify the area to be used for reference height correction. [X-Direction] Usage Range
The reference plane used to judge the detection threshold
Narrowing the measurement range allows for increasing of
is calculated from the previous profile.
the max speed line scan period.
X Moving Average - FULL: Performs measurement using the whole image
A transfer average of a specified number of points is sensor.
applied to data that is subject to judgment about whether it - 3/4: Performs measurement in a range of 3/4 of the whole
is within the detection threshold. The judgment is by reducing the left and right sides by 1/8.
performed for filtered data. This can only be set when the - 1/2: Performs measurement in a range of 1/2 of the whole
target is "Height". by reducing the left and right sides by 1/4.
LJ-X UM_GB 4-35

[Z-Direction] Usage Range

Capture Settings
Narrowing the measurement range allows for increasing of
the max speed line scan period. Sets the head’s processing and capturing conditions for
Select from Full, 3/4, and 1/2. profiles.
[Z-Direction] Height Display Resolution 1 Open "Head Settings".
The display resolution of the height data acquired from the
head. Determined via the configured max. and min. values 2 Select the "Capture" tab.
of the height range.
Height Range Adjustment

Set the acquisition range of height data.
Head settings
Over Measurement Range Value

Selects a processing method for when a value exceeds the
max. or is below the min. to either clip or invalid value.
- Invalid Value: Treats both the + side and - side as invalid
values.
- Clip: Treats + side as the max. value and - side as the 3 Set the capture settings.
min. value. Dynamic range, exposure time, and light control can be
automatically adjusted by clicking [Sensitivity Adjustment].
Binning Settings
Or, if [Manual Settings] is checked, each parameter can be
Binning set manually.
Processes data while treating a 2 x 2 pixel section as a

single pixel in the image sensor. When enabled, this allows
for raising the max. speed line scan period to the limit
without reducing the measurement range. The number of
profile data in the X direction is halved and the resolution is
coarse. Changes cannot be made to settings which cause
the profile data count to be less than 200.
X-Direction Data Thinning

Thins profile data in the X-direction. Reduces the resolution
of the X-direction. Has no impact on max speed line scan
period.
Acquisition Range Settings

Specifies the image acquisition method. (page 4-33)
4-36 LJ-X UM_GB

Capture setting by sensitivity adjustment

Click the [Sensitivity Adjustment] button to configure
sensitivity adjustment.
Head settings
Adjustment Conditions
Scan Frequency
Specifies the line scan time interval. (page 4-4)
Adjustment Mode
Sensitivity adjustment automatically adjusts in accordance Speed Up
with the dynamic range and exposure time of the object. Adjusts settings related to speed UP.
Please start from the center for the first time. If the amount • Exposure time (page 4-11)
of reflected light is insufficient and the profile is missing, • Parallel capture
adjust it to the [+] side. If the amount of reflected light is Performs [Exposure] and [Image Transfer] of the image
high and false detection has been made due to multiple sensor in parallel. This will increase the max speed line scan
reflected light from the surrounding area, adjust it to the [-] period, however the following restrictions exist.
side. - If the sampling interval is set to 10 ms or higher, height
If there is no problem with the profile, adjustment is data will be lost, and an invalid pixel line will be captured.
complete. • [X-Direction] Use Range (page 4-35)
If the adjustment result is not optimal, adjust it to the [-] side • [Z-Direction] Use Range (page 4-36)
until the message disappears. If the desired profile cannot • Binning (page 4-9)
be obtained, click [AUTO] on the trigger period setting or • Exposure Mode (page 4-12)
delay the trigger period and adjust the sensitivity again. • Peak Selection (page 4-12)
Target Area
Set the range of light reception amount to use for feedback
control of light intensity on the capture sensor. By limiting
the target area to where you want to set, you can control
the amount of light more stably.
LJ-X UM_GB 4-37

Capture Settings by MANUAL settings Exposure mode
Clicking [Manual Settings] and placing a check will allow for Standard Feedback the amount of light received when the
each parameter of capture settings to be set manually. last capture was taken, and set the capture
parameters for the next time you take a capture. If
the measurement is not stable as standard, select
multiple flash. However, if multiple flash is set, the
sensitivity adjustment function cannot be used.
Multiple flash For each sampling, captures are taken as many
(synthesis) times as the number of flashes, changing the
brightness, and then combining the profile of each
capture; this allows for the creation of a stable
profile even in work pieces with vast differences in
reflectivity.
To allow for capturing while changing the
brightness, Light Control Mode settings are
ignored.
Multiple For each sampling, captures are taken as many
luminescence times as the number of flashes, and a profile is
(light quantity generated from the last capture result.
Head settings
optimization) As feedback of received light amount is adjusted

Light Intensity Settings for the number of capture times to adjust capture
parameters, stable profile can be acquired.
Dynamic Range
Number of Times of Light Emission
Set the dynamic range of the head capture sensor.
In case of multi flash, set the number of flashes per
If the difference in the reflectance on the object is large,
sampling.
select high dynamic range 3, and if the difference in
As the number of flashes becomes greater, the max. speed
reflectance is small, select high dynamic range 1.
line scan period becomes slower.
On the other hand, select high precision if the difference in
the reflectance on the object is small, or if you wish to Reference
prevent the false detection of weak lighting conditions such If the exposure mode is set to [Standard], this is not shown.
as multiple reflections.
Exposure Time
Set the exposure time of the head capture sensor. Detection Mode
If the reflected light from the workpiece is too strong or if Configures stray light suppression function, peak selection,
the moving speed of the workpiece is too fast and the peak width filter, and image mask.
received image is blurred, shortening the exposure time will
improve this.
Reference
If the exposure time is changed, perform sensitivity adjustment again.
Detection sensitivity
Set the threshold of received light amount to be detected as
a peak.
Higher values make it easier to detect as peaks. Detection Mode
Or, if you want to avoid false peak detections due to If multiple peaks are detected at the same X coordinate in
ambient light or multiple light reflections, set the value low. the received light image, set which peak to measure. Useful
for avoiding false detections due to multiple reflections.
Control Light Intensity
[MANUAL] is typically used for 3D measurements.
Light emitted from the laser is constrained to within the
Upper Limit and Lower Limit values of the control range. It
is recommended that the Upper Limit and Lower Limit
values be set to the same value when performing 3D
measurements. However, there are cases where modifying
the control range will provide stability in cases where the
measurement results are unstable.
4-38 LJ-X UM_GB

Standard Measure the peak with the maximum amount of

2 Select the shape of the mask area.
received light.
The mask area is displayed in the imaging display area.
NEAR The peak which is closer to the head is measured.

FAR The peak which is far from the head is measured.
Eliminate X It emits X/Y polarized light and removes peaks
multiple that are multiply reflected in the X direction. A
reflections workpiece with irregularities in the laser line
direction, which has the effect of preventing false
detection. Mask area
Eliminate Y It emits X/Y polarized light and removes peaks
multiple that are multiply reflected in the Y direction. A
reflections workpiece with irregularities in the direction
perpendicular to the laser line has the effect of
preventing false detection.
Make invalid If there are multiple peaks in the same X
data coordinate, it is treated as invalid data.
3 Move and edit the size of the area.
Blurred Light Filter When you move the mouse cursor over the area, the
Disturbance light and multiple reflection light are imaged as mouse cursor changes to .
Head settings
thick and dim light on the received image. Using this feature
will not detect that dim light.
Image Mask
It will not detect the light on
the part where the mask is
attached on the received Reference
image. Ignores ambient light The area can also be set by entering a numerical value in the entry
and stray light caused by field of the settings editing area.
A: Mask B: Stray light
multiple reflections, allowing • Rectangular input field
for the creation of a profile.

Set with upper mask, lower mask.
None Not set

Rectangle Set the region disabling peak detection to a
rectangle.
Triangle Set the region disabling peak detection to a
triangle.
Edit Area by the Image Mask • Triangular input field
1 Click the [Settings] button for the image mask.

[Light Reception Mask] screen is displayed.
LJ-X UM_GB 4-39

 Edit the size of the rectangular area X axis invalid data processing
• The vertical mask rectangle can be resized by selecting and
Set the number of invalid points and the dead zone
dragging within the rectangular area.
interpolation.
Select within
rectangle
• You can resize by selecting and dragging the vertices.

Select vertex Invalid data is profile data considered to be undetectable
Drag due to excessive or insufficient light intensity.
When invalid data is continuous in the X direction, if the
number of continuous data is less than the number of
 Edit the size of the triangular area interpolation points, it is replaced with valid data. The value
You can select vertices and drag to move and resize them. after replacement is the value obtained by linear interpolation
with the valid data at both ends of invalid data.
Head settings
Reference
Select vertex • When LJ-V Series Head is Connected: If set to 255, linear
Drag interpolation will be used even if invalid data is 255 points or more
continuously.
• When LJ-X Series Head is connected: If set to 255, linear
 Move the area interpolation will be used even if invalid data is 255 points or more
continuously up to 638 points. No interpolation will be performed if
You can move the area by dragging in the area (other than
continuously at 639 points or more.
the vertex).
Dead Zone Interpolation
Not performing Does not interpolate blind spot data. Leave the
Select in area blind spot as an invalid pixel.
Drag Horizontal/ Interpolate blind spot data horizontally from the
Vertical nearest point.
interpolation
Linear Interpolate both ends of the blind spot data with a
interpolation straight line.
Reference
If the head count is 2, cannot be selected individually for heads A

and B.
Advanced Settings
Set the detailed operation of the capture settings. To
configure the settings, click .
Image Buffer Count

Set the number of times of capture to secure as a buffer for
prior capture.
4-40 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Alignment
Correction Settings
If this option is enabled, it corrects deviation between the
Configure data processing for the detected profile. profiles of each line in the X, Z and θ directions. In an
environment where the workpiece or head vibrates, the
1 Open [Head Settings]. influence of vibration can be corrected. The effects of
eccentricity on a rotating workpiece can also be corrected.
2 Select the [Profile] tab.
Image distortion caused by deviation of the scan direction
or workpiece shape can also be corrected.
Head settings
3 Set the correction settings.
Correction type
Select from the initial state of "X correction" and "Z
Height Image Filters correction".
Configures profile alignment, dead zone noise cut, spike You can also add "θ correction" and "feature point
noise cut (1), 2-head dead zone cut, spike noise cut (2), correction" by clicking the [Add] button.
and invalid pixel suppression.
Point • You can select multiple corrections as the
correction process.
• When multiple correction processes are
selected, the process is performed sequentially
from the top.
• You can change the order of the selected
correction process by clicking the [] or []
button.
Point Vibration Correction (Ver. 1.3 and earlier) can

also be used instead of Profile Alignment (page
4-21).
LJ-X UM_GB 4-41

X Correction Correction Area 1

The specified rectangular region is referenced at all times.
This method corrects position deviation in the X direction
only, using the edges of the target object. The correction Refer to Prev. Section
region of the edges is specified in a height image and the If there is an object to correct Z (Z correction,  correction,
edge positions of the target for correction are detected. feature point correction) at the previous level, the edge
level is treated as a value relative to the detected Z height.
If there are multiple objects to correct Z at the previous
level, the closest correction detection results are
referenced. If there are no objects at the previous level, the
edge level is treated as an absolute value.
Edge direction
edge.
Edge Target
Specify the target data for edge detection. targets.
• Height: Sets height data as the target. • Rising: Targets the direction crossing from bottom to top.
• Shading: Sets shading data as the target. • Falling: Targets the direction crossing from top to bottom.
Head settings
Edge level Scan direction

Set the height and shading required for detection as an Specify the direction for scanning for the edge within the
edge. This is set automatically if [Automatic Setting] is set. measurement range.
To configure advanced settings for X correction, click
. Detection label
Correction Area 2
be added.
Vibration Threshold
When two regions are set in the same line and there is at
least a set difference between the correction values
calculated for the two regions, one of the two will be judged
as a detection of the intended workpiece shape or noise
and the correction value will be calculated by interpolating
from the previous and next correction values. Specify the
maximum difference between the two vibration components
Z correction
This method corrects deviation in the height (Z) direction
only. The correction region of the height is specified in a
height image and deviation in the height direction is
detected.
4-42 LJ-X UM_GB

Height type Vibration Threshold

Select from Average, Peak or Bottom. When two regions are set in the same line and there is at
To configure advanced settings for Z correction, click least a set difference between the correction values
. calculated for the two regions, one of the two will be judged
as a detection of the intended workpiece shape or noise
and the correction value will be calculated by interpolating
from the previous and next correction values. Specify the
maximum difference between the two vibration components
X Moving Average
This can be set when the height type is Peak or Bottom. By
applying a transfer average before calculating detection
points, you can stabilize calculation results.
Height Mask (mm)

Heights outside the range specified here are eliminated
when calculating the heights to be used as the correction
target for each line profile.
Head settings
Theta correction
This method detects and corrects the tilt (θ angle) of each
line profile. It also corrects deviation in the Z direction.
Set the reference for the tilts to be detected in "Correction
standards". The correction region of the lines is specified in
a height image and the tilt of the target for correction is
detected.
Correction Area 1
Correction reference
• Rectangle: The specified rectangular region is referenced Select the standard for detecting tilt.
at all times. • Specified Angle: Calculates the tilt relative to the specified
• Ref. to Prev. Section: If there is an object to correct X (X angle. Specify 0° if you want the correction region to be
correction, feature point correction) at the previous level, the horizontal.
shape of the correction area follows the X positions that are • Align with the first line: Calculates the tilt relative to the first
detected. The offset, width and upper and lower edge in the profile for which tilt was detected.
Y direction can be specified. If there are multiple objects to To configure advanced settings for  correction, click .
correct X at the previous level, the closest correction
detection results are referenced.
area follows the X positions detected by the X region tracing
settings. The offset and width can be specified.
Correction Area 2
be added.
LJ-X UM_GB 4-43

Feature correction
In this method, the height (Z) and position (X) of the feature
point are detected, and the deviation between the height
direction and the X direction is simultaneously corrected.
The correction region of the feature point is specified in a
height image and deviation in the height and position of the
feature point is detected.
Feature point
Select from Peak Point, Bottom Point or Intersection Point
(Line-Line).
To configure advanced settings for feature point correction,
Head settings
click .
Correction Area 1
all times.
• Refer to the Previous Correction: If there is an object to
correct X (X correction, feature point correction) at the
previous level, the shape of the correction area follows the X
positions that are detected. The offset, width and upper and
lower edge in the Y direction can be specified. If there are
multiple objects to correct X at the previous level, the closest
correction detection results are referenced.
• Refer to X Region Tracing Settings: The shape of the
correction area follows the X positions detected by the X
region tracing settings. The offset and width can be
specified.
Correction Area 1
Correction Area 2 Set the region for calculating the amount of correction.
When this option is enabled, another correction region can Lines without an attached region are not corrected.
be added. • Rectangle: The specified rectangular region is referenced at
all times.
shape of the correction area follows the X positions that are
detected. The offset, width and upper and lower edge in the
Y direction can be specified. If there are multiple objects to
correct X at the previous level, the closest correction
detection results are referenced.
area follows the X positions detected by the X region
tracing settings. The offset and width can be specified.
4-44 LJ-X UM_GB

X Moving Average Edge direction

This can be set when the feature point type is Peak Point or Specifies the profile change direction to be detected as an
Bottom Point. By applying a transfer average before edge.
calculating detection points, you can stabilize calculation • Both directions: Both rising and falling are the measurement
results. targets.
X Region Tracking
Scan direction
The correction region of the edges is specified in a height
image and the edge positions of the target for correction Specify the direction for scanning for the edge within the
are detected. Correction regions for Z correction,  measurement range.
correction and feature points can be set based on the edge Detection label
positions that are detected here.
Correction Details (X)
Head settings
Edge Target
Edge level
edge. This is set automatically if [Automatic Setting] is set. Maintains the tilt in the Y direction of the detected edges.
To configure advanced settings for X region tracing, click The tilt is maintained even if the workpiece tilts in the X
. direction during capture.

Turning this option ON reduces effects caused by
• Outlier Threshold (pix):
the X direction of the previous and next profiles is larger than
number of points detected in the area.
Vibration Threshold X (mm)

Correction Area 1 correction above this value is detected are treated as failed
Specify the edge correction region. correction calculations and the value is interpolated from
The points for the top left and bottom right corner of the the previous and next correction values.
rectangle can be specified numerically in [Edit].
LJ-X UM_GB 4-45

Correction Details (Z) Vibration Correction (Ver. 1.3 and Earlier)

To display this, click , check "Enable Ver.1.3 Vibration
Correction" and click [OK].
Maintains the tilt in the Y direction of the detected heights.
The tilt is maintained even if the workpiece tilts in the Z
direction during capture.

Turning this option ON reduces effects caused by
Head settings

• Abnormal Gap Size (mm):
When enabled, it compensates for vibration components
the Z direction of the previous and next profiles is larger than
added to the height data. In an environment where the
workpiece or head vibrates, the influence of vibration on the
height measurement value can be reduced. The effects of
eccentricity on a rotating workpiece can also be reduced.
number of points detected in the area.
Vibration Threshold Z (mm)

Correction Details (Theta)
Vibration Threshold Theta (deg)

Set the maximum expected vibration. Lines where Correction Type
correction above this value is detected are treated as failed Select the vibration correction processing type.
the previous and next correction values. Plane (Zθ) Compensate for vertical and rotational vibrations
based on the plane in the acquired data.
Plane Vertical vibration is corrected based on the plane
correction (Z) in acquired data.
Equal section Select when there is no reference plane.
correction (Z) Compensate for vertical vibration with a
workpiece such as a cable that has almost the
same cross section.
4-46 LJ-X UM_GB

Allowable Range for Ref. Detection Detection Count

Specify the range of height to allow when detecting the Determines whether the data is the is height of the target
reference of vibration correction. Making smaller can object or noise data, based on the noise data height and
correct the vibration more accurately, but it cannot be specified blind spot angle. If the height is known, the size of
corrected if the bending or vibration of the reference plane the angle of the Y-direction from the blind spot angle is
becomes large. calculated. If there is valid data of the detection points or
more within the data which has been calculated as the blind
Number of reference lines
spot, that height data is treated as noise.
When the correction type is set to "Equal section
correction", this is the number of lines referred to up and Dead Zone Processing Range
down when detecting the correction standard. Enter a larger value for cases where a larger amount of
noise data occurs in blind spots. However, the larger the
Correction Strength
specified value, the more internal processing will be
Specify the level of correction processing for the detected required, so select a value which balances processing time
vibration. with effect.
Correction Reference Region Spike Noise Cut (1)
Specify the region to detect the reference used for vibration When enabled, the pixels with prominent height due to
correction. When using two correction reference regions, noise, etc. can be removed. The removed protruding points
Head settings
specify a region of the same height. become invalid pixels.
Dead Zone Noise Removal Decimation Point

When enabled, allows for the removal of falsely detected Decimates the specified number of lines to refer to at
data present within triangulated blind spots. calibration.
The removed pixels will become invalid pixels. The more the decimation point, the calibration speed
increases.
Dead Zone Location

Configures processing direction for 3D blind spot removal.
Bottom side Select this when the work piece is proceeding

from the laser side to the light-receiving side.
(Typically, the blind spot is in the bottom of the
Specify Processing Direction
image)
If the processing direction is specified, place a check and
Top side Select this when the work piece is proceeding
then configure the processing direction in the [Processing
from the light-receiving side to the laser side.
(Typically, the blind spot is in the top of the image)
Direction] field.
Bottom side/ Select this when 2 heads are connected, the work X Eliminates continuous vertical protruding noise in
top side piece is proceeding from the laser side to the the image, leaving continuous horizontal and
light-receiving side of Head A, and the opposite protruding dots.
direction for Head B.
Y Eliminates continuous horizontal protruding noise
Top side/ Select this when 2 heads are connected, the work in the image, leaving continuous vertical and
bottom side piece is proceeding from the light-receiving side protruding dots.
to the laser side of Head A, and the opposite
XY individual You can adjust the deletion size individually for
direction for Head B.
each direction.
Dead Zone Angle Cut Size

Enter the angle of the light receiver in relation to the work Removes protruding noise below the specified size width.
piece. Change this to fine-tune the effect.
Cut Threshold (mm)
Removes the protruding points farther from the specified
height with respect to the periphery as noise.
LJ-X UM_GB 4-47

Cut Target Processing Type

Set the type of protruding point to be removed. Select the method for combining the head A and B profiles.
Upper Part Removes only the protruding points that are high Noise deletion The noise is reduced by removing parts where the
relative to the periphery. height difference between the measured values of
Low side Removes only the protruding points that are low heads A and B is large. It is effective for
relative to the periphery. eliminating disturbance light such as multiple
Both high and Removes both high and low side protruding points reflections.
low with respect to the periphery. Dead Angle Two heads compensate for each other's blind
Cut (Dead spots of the censor, reducing the effects of blind
2-Head Dead Angle Cut Angle Cut spots. When there are data in both heads, the
When measurement is performed using two heads (head A (Far)) data on the FAR side is used.
and head B), a height image captured by each head is Dead Angle Two heads compensate for each other's blind
shifted by a preset correction value to generate a Cut spots of the Sensor, reducing the effects of blind
composite image, With two heads it can create an image spots.
with reduced effects of blind spots, and can create an Height Outputs the difference between the measured
image with reduced noise components. difference values of heads A and B. It can be used to
When combining profile information from two directions to display confirm the calibration accuracy at the time of
generate a height image, check it and then click "Details" to setting.
Head settings
specify the combining condition. Noise Judgment Threshold (mm)

The heights of the heads A and B are compared, and a
pixel whose difference in height is larger than the specified
threshold is judged as noise.
Combine Grayscale images

Check this to use grayscale images as well for composition.
Use Grayscale Img. Also in Dead Ang. Judg.

Place a check here if using a shading image for blind spot
determination of noise pixels. When enabled, stable and
accurate height data can be output in the blind spot (only
when an LJ-V head with luminance output type is
connected).
Set Detection Resion
Point • 2 heads, A and B, must be installed touching,
Specify the location where the common features are shown
opposite the scan direction.
in the images acquired by the two heads.
• Align the center position of the 2 opposing
Execute Calibration heads (X direction) to follow the scan direction.
If the center position (X direction) slips, the X
Calculates a correction value that will allow for overlapping
direction measurement range will be
of characteristics present in the range specified in detection
decreased by that amount. In some heads, the
region settings within the images shown by Heads A and B. laser’s center position does not match the
case's center.
Check Correction Values
You can check and correct the correction value calculated
by calibration.
4-48 LJ-X UM_GB

Spike Noise Cut (2) Filter Settings

This can be used when 2-head dead angle cut is set to ON.
Specify the data processing in the X and Y directions for the
(page 4-22)
detected profile.
X Direction
Invalid Pixel Suppression
Preserve Shape
When enabled, invalid pixels are suppressed with height
You can apply smoothing filter settings while the profile
data estimated from surrounding valid pixel values. Invalid
Head settings
maintains the shape of the object. (Filtering prevents the
unevenness of the object from becoming dull.)
around invalid pixels.
Smoothing
X direction.
reduce the variation of profile data, increase the setting
value.
Reference
Level If shape retention is ON, the maximum number of points that can be set
as smoothing points is 32.
Specifies the suppression range of invalid pixels with an
intensity (0: no interpolation to 9; a 10-step scale). The
higher the intensity, the wider the range of invalid pixels can Median (X-Direction)
be suppressed.
Performs median processing in the X direction on profile
Adjustment Width data. Set the number of nearby points to use for median
Selecting "Small" reduces the effect of the intensity, but
allows you to fine-tune the degree of suppression of invalid
pixels. The boundary between the remaining invalid pixels
and valid pixels is as it is in "small", and in "big"
interpolation is performed with invalid pixels at 0 (initial
setting value: small).
Outline Interpolation Suppression

Suppressing the contour of the height image from being fat
by interpolation processing.
LJ-X UM_GB 4-49

Y Direction Installation Correction

Averaging Set data processing for the detected profile.
Y direction.
increase the repeatability of profile data, increase the
setting value. When doing external trigger settings,
Number of times of multiple triggers≧
Median count + averaging count -1
Please set to become above.
Median (Y-Direction)
Performs median processing in the Y direction on profile
data. Set the number of nearby points to use for median
Head settings
Time Axis Invalid Data Processing

To configure the time axis invalid data processing, click Wide Combination
.
Links the height images/
shading(contrast) images
of 2 heads in the X
direction, and captures
them as a single image. If
the linking points deviate,
adjust them with the shift/
offset.
Profile Adjustment
Mirror Display
Flips an entire height
image obtained from 2
heads horizontally.

Invalid data processing is processing to cancel invalid data
that occurs suddenly. Holds the previous normal value of
the same X coordinate until invalid data is continuously
processed for the number of times of processing in the time
direction.
Recovery Count
While processing invalid data, it is a process to cancel the
normal value that occurs suddenly. The invalid data is held
until the normal value is obtained continuously for the
number of times of recovery in the time direction.
4-50 LJ-X UM_GB

Offset Y Direction
Invert
Offsets the height image/
X Direction shading(contrast) image in the Y
Flip the height image in the X direction to correct the deviation.
direction. Enable when the head Use when the head’s installation
installation direction is reversed. With point shifts from the standard point,
2 heads, the image is reversed for or when the position linked by wide
each head. link shifts. Offsets for each head when using 2 heads.
Z Direction Profile Flattening Correction

Flip the height image in the Z Flattens distortions in the profile caused by factors such as
direction. The image is reversed for variations in head mounting or workpiece presentation.
each head.
Y Direction
Flip the height image in the Y
direction. The image is reversed for Check the [Profile Flattening Correction] box and click the
each head. [Settings] button.
Head settings
Shift
X Direction
Offsets the height image/
shading(contrast) image in
the X direction to correct
the deviation. Use when
the head’s installation point Profile Flattening Correction
shifts from the standard To enable, turn on the correction method.

point, or when the position linked by wide link shifts.
Calculation of Adjusted Values
Z Direction To change the reference profile, click "Update Profile".
Offsets the profile in the Z
Important • Place a flat workpiece within the X-axis range
direction to correct a at the same height as the actual parts to be
deviation. Use when the measured, then perform the correction.
head’s installation point • This correction should be done regularly, as
shifts from the standard changes to the installation that occur over time
point, or when the position could impact this correction.
linked by wide link shifts.
LJ-X UM_GB 4-51

Tilt Correction
Correct the tilt error in the X-axis direction caused by the tilt
of the head or object, with a fixed value.
Height Calculation Area

Head settings
The level difference is calculated using the difference

and height calculation area 2. Select an area where the
actual level difference is known.
Calculated Height
Tilt Calculation Area This is the level difference calculated using the difference
The angle of the ideal straight line is calculated using the between the average height of height calculation area 1
measurement data of inclination calculation area 1 and and height calculation area 2.
inclination calculation area 2. Please select an area where
the actual angle is known. Corrected Height
Specify the actual level difference. Click [Register] after
Calculated Angle entering the angle.
This is the angle of the straight line calculated using the
measurement data of inclination calculation area 1 and Calculation Result
inclination calculation area 2. This is the magnification of the corrected height for the
calculated height.
Corrected Angle
Specifies the actual angle of the line. Click [Register] after Installation Height Correction Factor
entering the angle. Correct the height of the measured profile by multiplying it
with the magnification value entered.
The difference between the corrected angle and the Wide Binding
calculated angle is displayed. When the number of heads is 2, you can select wide
binding.
Installation Tilt Correction Angle If you click on the check box for wide binding, the profiles of
The inclination of the measured profile is rotationally the two heads will be combined in the X direction and
corrected by the entered angle. captured as one profile. If there is a deviation in the
combined part, please adjust it with the shift.
Correcting the Set Height

Set data processing for the detected profile.
4-52 LJ-X UM_GB

List of Settings Speed Up

Allows for confirmation of currency set parameters. Adjusts settings related to speed UP. Change each setting
and adjust displayed items so that the maximum speed
trigger period fits the specified trigger period.
2 Select the "List" tab. If the exposure time is changed, perform sensitivity
adjustment.
A list of settings appears.
Reference
Values which have been changed from their defaults are shown in 2 Click the [Speed Up] button.
blue.
Head settings
LJ-X UM_GB 4-53

Head settings
4-54 LJ-X UM_GB

5
Chapter
3D Inspection ................................................................ 5-2

Height Measurement/Trend Height Measurement 
Measurement Tools
Tools.......................................................................... 5-3
Profile measurement tool/Continuous profile 
measurement tool...................................................... 5-4
Height extraction ....................................................... 5-6
Functions..................................................................... 5-20
Height measurement ............................................... 5-21
Trend Height Measurement..................................... 5-24
Profile Measurement ............................................... 5-28
Continuous Profile Measurement ............................ 5-68
Free Multi-Point Height Measurement .................... 5-73
Arranged Multi-Point Height Measurement ............. 5-75
Area......................................................................... 5-77
Pattern Search ........................................................ 5-80
ShapeTrax3............................................................. 5-84
Measurement Tools
PatternTrax.............................................................. 5-91
Edge Position .......................................................... 5-96
Edge Angle.............................................................. 5-99
Edge Width............................................................ 5-102
Edge Pitch ............................................................. 5-105
Edge Pairs............................................................. 5-108
Defect .................................................................... 5-111
Blob ....................................................................... 5-115
Grayscale Blob ...................................................... 5-119
Profile Position ...................................................... 5-124
Profile Width .......................................................... 5-128
Profile Defect......................................................... 5-133
Intensity ................................................................. 5-138
OCR2 .................................................................... 5-141
1D Code Reader ................................................... 5-147
2D Code Reader ................................................... 5-151
ShapeTrax2........................................................... 5-155
OCR ...................................................................... 5-160
Image Region Generator....................................... 5-167
Line Display........................................................... 5-170
Circle Display ........................................................ 5-172
Point Display ......................................................... 5-175
Scale Display......................................................... 5-177
Calculation............................................................. 5-179
Position Correction................................................... 5-181

Position Correction With Shading Pattern ............. 5-182
Position Correction With Outline Pattern............... 5-185
Position Correction with the Edge ......................... 5-188
Position Correction With Straight Line Position 
and Angle .............................................................. 5-191
Position Correction of Circle Center ...................... 5-194
Position Correction With Center of Gravity of 
Cluster ................................................................... 5-197
Dark (Light) Cluster Center of GravityPosition 
Correction.............................................................. 5-201
LJ-X UM_GB 5-1

3D Inspection The LJ-X Series is equipped with the following functions to
process the height images obtained from the head. The
 combination of these functions allows for a wide variety of

inspections to be performed.
Tools for direct processing of height images

without height extraction
• Height measurement tool
 3D Inspection • Trend height measurement tool (page 5-24)
• Profile measurement tool (page 5-28)
• Continuous profile measurement tool (page 5-68)
Functions
Function for converting height images to
Position Correction gray scale images (height extraction) and
processing with existing measurement tools
• Height extraction function (page 5-6)
3D Inspection
5-2 LJ-X UM_GB

Height Measurement/Trend Height Measurement Tools
Height Measurement/Trend Height Measurement

Tools
Inspection is performed using the obtained height data. Measurements can be made within the configured measurement
area such as minimum height, maximum height, surface area of protrusions, and volume of protrusions etc. By specifying
the [Zero Plane] in the plane options, you can perform inspections more freely.
Zero plane specification (page 5-13) Height/area/volume measurements

By specifying a [Zero Plane] to reference height Measurements can be made of the surface area and
measurement on for each individual work piece, you can volume within the region enclosed by the inspection region
guarantee reliable measurements even if the orientation of and zero plane.
the work piece shifts.
3D Inspection
Before correction After correction
When the work piece is tilted, the zero face is automatically
set to match the workpiece to get the correct shape.
Trend Height Measurement (page 5-24) Pre-processing for height measurement

Performs numerous height measurements within a single (page 5-21)
specified region. A plane/circle can be detected from the A reliable measurement can be obtained by utilizing pre-
maximum/minimum values and multiple height data between the processing for height measurement (6 types: median,
maximum height calculated for each sub-region. average, Gaussian, smoothing, invalid pixel suppression,
spike noise cut.
Height Image after preprocessing

Grooves with a large gloss difference are unstable in the
measurement, but the pretreatment is applied to enable
stable measurement.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-3

Profile measurement tool/ Continuous profile measurement tool
Profile measurement tool/

Continuous profile measurement tool
Profile Measurement
A specified location’s cross-section can be measured for height, width, angle, cross-section area etc.
X-Y-θ position adjustment can be used as well, so in-line dimension inspection is also possible.
Height measurement of peak and bottom Height detection of circuit board

points components
The obtained (profile) cross-section’s height/height
difference, position, angle, cross-section area, count, and
defect detection can be measured, and inspections can be
performed such as dimension inspection and external
appearance inspection etc. Also, high precision inspection
can be performed using plane correction.
3D Inspection
Amplitude/Position Height difference Cross-Section Area Defect detection

Inflection point
Measuring point Reference line
Cross-Section Area
Height
difference
Reference plane Defects
Width Standard point
Measure the width and position Measure the difference in the Measure the cross-sectional A circle, a straight line, and a
of the specified condition. height of the measurement point area from the reference plane. free curve are used as a
for the reference point. reference line, and a part with
a large difference from the line
is detected as a defect.
5-4 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile measurement tool/ Continuous profile measurement tool
Continuous Profile Measurement

Minute changes in shape can be extracted from multiple cross-section profiles. Continuous measurement of profiles at an optional
pitch within a specified region can be helpful for inspection of welds and other items which require continuity, as well as for
inspecting solders which require inspection from 360°.
Weld shape inspection Solder shape inspection

Continuously measures the height and cross-section area, Inspects the form of a solder from 360°, allowing for the
and finds the max. and min. values, producing a stable extraction of minute surface variations.
inspection.
3D Inspection
LJ-X UM_GB 5-5

Height extraction
Height extraction
What is height extraction?

By creating a gray-scale image which emphasizes important heights from the obtained height image, a variety of image
processing can be applied.
The pre-processing done by this device which takes the obtained height image and converts it to gray-scale is called Height
Extraction. Various image processing is performed on the gray-scale image converted from a height image based on height
extraction settings.
Reference The reference plane is a virtual plane that passes through a position at a standard distance from the head.
Height extraction settings

Height extraction is configured during tool editing in setting
mode.
Image input
Set the optimal imaging
3D Inspection
conditions.
Image selection (only in 3D imaging mode)

Specify the height of image as the
image is to be used for the
measurement.
Reference Image Registration

Registers the image as the
reference for height extraction.
Tool settings
Specify the measurement area
and the image processing content
in the area.
Measurement method/
measurement area setting
Height extraction /
height binarization setting
Pre-processing setting
Image processing settings for

each measurement method
Flow of image processing

Height image processing
Capture Preprocessing Image processing
Height Various
Height Various
information measurement
extraction filters
from the head processing
Height Grayscale image
5-6 LJ-X UM_GB

Height extraction
Height extraction example

With height extraction, once a plane is specified at any given height, a gray-scale image is created which expresses the high
and low differences with respect to this plane in light and shade.
Using the free-form plane extraction function, protrusions along a curved surface can be effectively detected.
Inspection target (photo) Data obtained by LJ-V Display of measurement result

screen by this unit
(Example of using the real-time extraction
(free-form surface standard) in height
measurement of flaw measurement)
3D Inspection
LJ-X UM_GB 5-7

Height extraction
Height extraction
If you click [Height Extraction] in the measurement tool,
the [Height Extraction] screen appears (example showing
the [Height Extraction] screen in the defect tool.
3D Inspection
Method
Select a height region extraction method.
Planes can be specified for extraction as follows.
• 1-Point Specification: The extraction plane is a plane that is parallel to the reference plane has a Z-intercept
at the height of the specified point. This extraction plane will not vary based on the input image.
• 3-Point Specification: The extraction plane is a plane calculated based on the 3D data of 3 specified points.
This extraction plane will not vary based on the input image.
• Real-Time Extraction: The extraction plane is calculated with the 3D data of the input image within a
specified region. This extraction plane will vary based on the input image.
• Zero Plane of Other Tools: References the zero plane of other tools.
• Detection Plane of Other Tools: References the detection plane of other tools.
• Extraction Plane of Other Tools: References the extraction plane of other tools.
The relationship between the desired extraction plane and input image is summarized below.
Link to input image Do not link to input image
Plane parallel to reference Real-time extraction (average 1-Point specification
plane height-based)
Any plane Real-time extraction (plane-based) 3-Point specification
Free-form plane Real-time extraction (free-form -
plane-based)
5-8 LJ-X UM_GB

Height extraction
Calc. Basis
If [Real-time] is selected for [Method], select extraction plane calculation method.
• Plane-Based: The extraction plane is the calculated least-squares plane using the 3D data of the input image
within the specified region.
• Average Height-Based: Calculates the Z average of the input image within the specified region. The
extraction plane is a plane parallel to the reference plane with a Z-intercept at that calculated value.
• Multi-Point Specification: The extraction plane is a plane found using the minimum-squares method from
the average height data at each of many specified points.
• Free-Form Plane-Based: The extraction plane is a curved plane estimated based on the extraction size
value.
Extraction plane
If [1-Point Specification] or [3-Point Specification] is selected as [Method], extraction plane data is displayed.
Extraction Region
If [Real-time] is selected as [Method], and [Average Height-Based] or [Plane-Based] is specified as [Calculation
Method], this is specified. If the extraction plane is specified outside of the measured region, the extraction
region is specified individually. The mask region can also be configured.
The region specified here is only used for calculation of the extraction plane.
3D Inspection
Reference
Extraction size
If [Real-time] and [Free-Form Plane-Based] is selected for [Method], specify the high and low portion size you
would like to extract.
Reference As the extraction size gets smaller, tracking to steep curvatures increases, and more minute
protrusions are extracted (however, the processing time becomes longer).
Reference outside of region

If [Real-time] and [Free-Form Plane-Based] is selected for [Method], select whether to process while
referencing an image outside of the measuring region.
• OFF: Process without referencing an image outside of the region.
• ON (initial value): Process while referencing an image outside of the region.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-9

Height extraction
Creating gray-scale image from height image

If you click [Height Extraction] in the measurement tool,
the [Height Extraction] screen appears (example showing
the [Height Extraction] screen in the area tool).
3D Inspection
Method
Select a height region extraction method.
Planes can be specified for extraction as follows.
• 1-Point Specification: The extraction plane is a plane that is parallel to the reference plane has a Z-intercept
at the height of the specified point. This extraction plane will not vary based on the input image.
• 3-Point Specification: The extraction plane is a plane calculated based on the 3D data of 3 specified points.
This extraction plane will not vary based on the input image.
• Real-time: The extraction plane is calculated with the 3D data of the input image within a specified region.
This extraction plane will vary based on the input image.
• Zero Plane of Other Tools: References the zero plane of other tools.
• Detection Plane of Other Tools: References the detection plane of other tools.
• Extraction Plane of Other Tools: References the extraction plane of other tools.
The relationship between the desired extraction plane and input image is summarized below.
Link to input image Do not link to input image
Plane parallel to reference Real-time (average height-based) 1-Point specification
plane
Any plane Real-time (plane-based) 3-Point specification
Free-form plane Real-time (free-form plane-based) -
5-10 LJ-X UM_GB

Height extraction
Calc. Basis
If [Real-Time Extraction] is selected for [Extraction Method], select extraction plane calculation method.
• Plane: The extraction plane is the calculated least-squares plane using the 3D data of the input image within
the specified region.
• Average Height-Based: Calculates the Z average of the input image within the specified region. The
extraction plane is a plane parallel to the reference plane with a Z-intercept at that calculated value.
• Multi-Point Specification: The extraction plane is a plane found using the minimum-squares method from
the average height data at each of many specified points.
• Free-Form Plane-Based: The extraction plane is a curved plane estimated based on the extraction size
value.
Extraction plane
If [1-Point Specification] or [3-Point Specification] is selected as [Method], extraction plane data is displayed.
Extract Region
If [Real-Time Extraction] is selected as [Method], and [Average Height-Based] or [Plane] is specified as [Calc.
Basis], this is specified. If the extraction plane is specified outside of the measured region, the extraction region
is specified individually. The mask region can also be configured.
3D Inspection
Reference The region specified here is only used for calculation of the extraction plane.
Extraction size
If [Real-Time Extraction] and [Free-Form Plane-Based] is selected for [Extraction Method], specify the high and
low portion size you would like to extract.
Reference As the extraction size gets smaller, tracking to steep curvatures increases, and more minute
protrusions are extracted (however, the processing time becomes longer).
Reference outside of region

If [Real-Time Extraction] and [Free-Form Plane-Based] is selected for [Extraction Method], select whether to
process while referencing an image outside of the measuring region.
• OFF: Process without referencing an image outside of the region.
• ON (initial value): Process while referencing an image outside of the region.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-11

Height extraction
Options
Extract Height
Select the direction at the desired extraction height with regards to the extraction plane.
• Upper: Select this option to specify the upper side of the extraction plane as the extraction region (the color
tone of the extraction plane is set to 0).
• Lower: Select this option to specify the lower side of the extraction plane as the extraction region (the color
tone of the extraction plane is set to 255).
• Both: Select this option to specify both the higher and lower sides of the extract plane as the extraction range
(the color tone of the extraction plane is set to 128).
Gain
In the extracted image, specify the gradation value per 1 mm of height to be extracted. The extract range is
adjusted according to this tone.
Noise Cut
Removes the range where the height from the extraction surface is less than the specified value as noise.
Z Offset
Specifies the offset value in the Z-axis direction of the extract plane.
Invalid Pixels
3D Inspection
Select color tone after extraction of invalid pixels.

• Default Value: Treats as the height of the pixel which is furthest away from the extraction plane.
• Background Value: Treats as the height of a pixel on the extraction plane.
• Specified Value: Sets a specified tone value.
Copy Setup
Allows for the tool height extraction settings specified in [Copy Source] to be copied to [Copy Destination] tool.
5-12 LJ-X UM_GB

Height extraction
Specification of the zero plane for 3D measurement

The reference plane is a virtual plane that passes through a • Real-Time 3-Point Specification: The zero plane is a
position at a standard distance from the head. plane calculated based on the 3D data of the input
The zero plane is any plane which differs from the image within the 3 specified points.
reference plane, and is specified when a 3D measurement • Real-Time Multi-Point Specification: The zero
standard is desired. In the 3D measurement data, both the plane is a plane found using the minimum-squares
measurements based off the zero plane (MS), and the method from the average height data at each of many
absolute measurements based off the reference plane can (up to 10 points) specified points.
be obtained. To take the example of height measurement • Numeric Specification: The zero plane is specified
tools, both Z and H are values output as height numerically.
measurement results. Z is the height along the normal • Free-Form Plane-Based: The zero plane is a curved
vector of the reference plane, and H is the height along the plane estimated based on the extraction size (if Free-
normal vector of the zero plane. Form Plane-Based is selected, H is the height along the
Zero plane normal vector of the reference plane, and height H is
equivalent to Z:MS. Also, surface area is the surface
Reference plane
area of the range in which convex/concave portions are
projected in the reference plane) (only height
measurement and trend height measurement tools).
Z
Y • Zero Plane of Other Tools: References the zero
X plane of other tools.
3D Inspection
• Detection Plane of Other Tools: References the
Origin
detection plane of other tools.
• Extraction Plane of Other Tools: References the
Zero plane extraction plane of other tools.
(1) • Plane-Based (Specified per Segment): Calculates
Reference plane (2)
zero plane per segment (only when the measurement
region in trend height measurement is rectangular). The
(3)
zero plane calculation region is also specified per
Z
Y segment. The zero plane is the calculated least-squares
X (X,Y)
plane using the 3D data within the specified region.
(1) H • Average Height-Based (Specified per Segment):
Origin
(2) Z:MS Calculates zero plane per segment (only when the
(3) Z:AB measurement region in trend height measurement is
rectangular). The zero plane calculation region is also
For details on the height measurement tool, see overview specified per segment. The zero plane is a plane
in “3D Inspection” of this controller. parallel to the reference plane with a Z-intercept at the Z
Reference
average within that region.
When specifying the same plane as the zero plane by multiple tools, The relationship between the desired zero plane and input
you can shorten the processing time by referring to "Zero Plane of image is summarized below.
Other Tools", "Detection Plane of Other Tools" and "Extraction Plane of Link to Do not link to
Other Tools".
input image input image
Plane Average height- None, numerical
1 Select the zero plane specification method in the parallel to based specification
[Specification Method] field. reference
plane
Zero planes that can be specified are as follows (excluding
reference to other tools). Any plane Plane-Based,
• None: The reference plane is the zero plane. Real-Time 3-Point
• Plane-Based: The zero plane is the calculated least- Specification, Real- -
squares plane using the 3D data of the input image Time Multi-Point
within the specified region. Specification
• Average Height-Based: Calculates the Z average of Any curve Free-form Plane -
the input image within the specified region. The zero
plane is a plane parallel to the reference plane with a Z-
2 Specify the zero plane as per the specified method.
intercept at that value. 3 If the height from the zero plane will be removed as
noise below a specified value, specify this in
LJ-X UM_GB 5-13

Height extraction
[Noise Removal] (when using the height Ave. Height (Z, H) [ ]

measurement or trend height measurement tools). Outputs the height information of the average height in the
The unit of the noise removal setting is the unit specified by measurement region in full-scale values (mm or μm). The
the height direction unit. value of average height Z/H will be the average value of
height Z/H within the inspection region.
4 If a Z-offset with respect to the zero plane will be
specified, do so in the [Z-Offset] field. P-P Height H (Z, H) [ ]
Outputs the height difference of the max. height point/min.
5 Click [OK].
height point in the measurement region (mm or μm).
Valid Pixel Count

Measurement results output
Outputs the valid pixel count in the measurement region.
Plane Formula Info.
Area
Outputs the X/Y slopes and Z intercept of the calculated
Outputs the convex area/concave area in the measurement
zero plane and detected plane. The zero plane
region in full-scale value (mm²).
measurement value (MS) is a value which reflects [Scaling
• A concave area is an area on the zero plane occupied by
Correction].
the section lower than the zero plane (opposite side of the
Max. Height/Min Height (X, Y, Z, H) head).
Outputs the position coordinates of the max. height point/ • A convex area is an area on the zero plane occupied by the
min. height point in the inspection region in full-scale values section higher than the zero plane (head side). However, if
(mm or μm). the method for specifying the zero plane is set to [Free-form
• Outputs two types of values (Z and H) as the height Plane], the surface area is the range formed via the
3D Inspection
measurement result. projection of the area on the zero plane onto the reference
• Z is the height along the normal vector of the reference plane.
plane, and H is the height along the normal vector of the Concave accumulation
Zero plane
zero plane. However, if the method for specifying the zero
Reference plane Convex area
plane is set to [Free-form Plane], H is the height along the
normal vector of the reference plane.
Z
• The Z-direction height has a measured value based on the Y
X
zero plane (Z:MS) and absolute measured value based on Origin
the reference plane (Z:AB). If the method for specifying the
zero plane is set to [Free-form Plane], height H will be equal Volume
to Z:MS.
Outputs the convex volume/concave volume of the
Zero plane H measurement region (mm3).
Reference plane Z:MS Z:AB
• The concave volume is the volume of the section lower than
the zero plane (opposite side of the head) in the space
Z
Y between the detection points and zero plane converted to
X (X,Y)
actual size value.
Origin • The convex volume is the volume of the section higher than
• Maximum height/minimum height points are defined using the zero plane (opposite side of the head) in the space
the height in the Z direction based on the zero plane. between the detection points and zero plane converted to
• Maximum height H/minimum height H is the height in the H actual size value.
direction of the maximum height point/minimum height point. Concave volume
However, if the method for specifying the zero plan is set to Zero plane
Reference plane Convex area
[Free-form Plane], the height in the Z direction is used.
Maximum
height point Z
Y
H (Maximum X
Z (Maximum Origin
height) height)
Zero plane
Reference
plane
5-14 LJ-X UM_GB

Height extraction
Height measurement filters

The following 6 types of filters are provided as height Smoothing
measurement filters.
Pre-processing is equivalent to averaging, but increasing
Reference filter size has a stronger smoothing effect.
When specifying the same plane as the zero plane by multiple tools and • Size: Sets filter size.
using the same filter, you can specify the zero plane by using "Zero • Cycles: Updates the number of times the filter is applied.
Plane of Other Tools", and check the box for "Also Refer to
• Reference outside of region: Places a check in cases
Preprocessing" to shorten the processing time.
where processing will include information from outside of the
region.
Average • Expansion suppression: Reduces the effect of the height
of image's outline being wider than it actually is by filter
Smooths and stabilizes height variations that occur like
processing.
undulations on a plane. Even for invalid pixels, it has the
effect of interpolating by applying the average value of the
surroundings. Invalid Pixel Suppression
• Size: Sets filter size. 5 × 5 will be applied more strongly.
Performs suppression by estimating the height data of
• Cycles: Updates the number of times the filter is applied.
invalid pixels for which height data could not be obtained
• Expansion suppression: Reduces the effect of the height
using the pixel values of surrounding valid pixels. Invalid
processing.
surrounding the invalid pixel.
3D Inspection
• Suppression Strength: As suppression strength
Median increases, a wider range of invalid pixels can be
suppressed.
Applying the median of the heights of surrounding pixels to
• Adjustment Width: If [Small] is selected, the strength
the center pixel has the effect of removing anomalous
effectiveness will be small, but minor adjustments to the
height values that occur like spike noise.
degree of invalid pixel suppression can be made. The
border between the remaining invalid pixels and valid pixels
will not be interpolated with [Small], but will be interpolated
with [Large] (interpolated with invalid pixel value 0).
• Contour interpolation suppression: The contour of the
processing.
image is interpolated to suppress the effect of thickening the
height of the image.
Gaussian
This process reduces noise by applying heavier smoothing Spike Noise Cut
on pixels closer to the center. You can obtain more natural
Removes pixels with a height that causes a spike from
blur compared to [Average], but the noise reduction effect
surrounding pixels due to noise (spike noise) etc.
will be weaker.
• Processing Direction Specification: If enabled, the
direction of processing can be specified.
- X: Remove continuous spike noise in the vertical direction
of the image, and leave spike noise which continues in the
horizontal direction.
processing.
- Y: Eliminates continuous horizontal protruding noise in the
image, leaving continuous vertical and protruding dots.
- XV Individual: Allows for individual adjustment of removal
size for each direction.
• Removal Size: Removes spike noise of or below the
specified size width.
• Removal Threshold: Removes spike points which are
distant from the specified height with respect to their
surroundings.
• Cut Target: Selects the type of spike point to be removed
from [Upper], [Lower] or [Both].
LJ-X UM_GB 5-15

Height extraction
Correction of measured values
Displaying measured values in actual size 4 In the [Scaling Target Tool] field, specify the tool to
apply the scaling correction.
(scaling correction)
• All: Specifies all tools for scaling correction.
Specify a scaling correction value to handle measurements • Specify: Click [Settings] and specify the tool scaling
that have been converted into actual size values by correction.
displaying the screen, determining, calculating, external
input/output, etc. 5 After completing the setting, click [OK].
When settings are created by the controller, a scaling
correction value is configured which is appropriate for the
connected head model. If the head model to connect is
updated after setting creation or head settings are newly
created by the Simulation-Software, a scaling correction
value will need to be reconfigured by the explanation below.
Automatically Obtain Scaling Coefficient

from head
A scaling coefficient prepared in advance for each head
3D Inspection
can be applied.
1 From on the menu bar, click .

The [Scaling Settings] screen appears.
2 Click [Get Coefficient from Camera].

3 Click [OK].
5-16 LJ-X UM_GB

Height extraction
Measured Value is Converted via Specify Desired Actual Size Based on Actual
Multiplication by a Fixed Coefficient Measured Values
The correction coefficient may also be freely specified. The correction factor is obtained from the measurement
result of the workpiece width or pitch interval whose actual
size value is known. It is convenient to use a ruler or other
tool to determine the length when the target’s length is
unknown.

2 Perform imaging of something for which the actual

dimensions are known.
3 In the [Coefficient] column, click [Set Using Result

& Full Scale].
The [Scaling Coefficient Settings] screen appears.
3D Inspection
2 In [Coefficient] under the [Scaling Coefficient] field,
directly specify the correction magnification
coefficient (how many 1 pixel be converted into).
3 In the [Scaling Target Tool] field, specify the tool to

apply the scaling correction.
• Specify: Click [Settings] and specify the tool scaling
correction.
4 Click the tab which will be the conversion target (X

direction/Y direction/length direction).
5 Measure the width or pitch interval of something

for which the actual dimensions are known.
Measured values are displayed under "Measured" in the
"Adjustment Coefficient Calculation" field.
For more information about the edge measuring method,
refer to "What is an edge?" (page A-106).
6 Specify the measured width or pitch interval

dimensions and units in the [Adjustment
Coefficient Calculation] column, then click
[Recalculate].
The scaling coefficient is automatically calculated.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-17

Height extraction
7 Click other conversion target (X direction/Y Correct Measurement Results by an Offset

direction/length direction) tabs and repeat steps 5
Value (1-Point Correction)
and 6.
8 After completing all conversion target settings,

1 Click the of the items with measurements you
select [OK]. would like to correct.

The [Measured Value Correction] screen appears.
9 In the [Scaling Target Tool] field, specify the tool to
apply the scaling correction. 2 In the [Measured Value Correction] - [Correction
• All: Specifies all tools for scaling correction. Method] field, select [1-Point].
correction.
10After completing the setting, click [OK].
Correct Individual Measured Values

(Measurement Correction)
Items for which a is shown in the measurement tool’s
judgment condition setting field can be scaled to match the
actual size of measure values.
With this machine, actual size can be obtained as
measurement results, however measurement results can
3D Inspection
also be corrected via the following 2 methods. This is useful

for when the desired measurement location or zero plane
cannot be directly specified.
• Correct measurement results by an offset value (1-point
correction)
• Correct measurement results by an offset value after
multiplying by a coefficient (2-point correction)
3 Click [Input Meas. Value], then enter the current

measurement values in the [Before Correction]
field.
4 Enter the post-correction measurement values in

the [After Correction] field.
Offset on the measured value is calculated from the pre-
correction and post-correction values.
5-18 LJ-X UM_GB

Height extraction
Correct measurement results by an offset 6 Click [Correction Value 2] - [Input Meas. Value] in
[Correction Value Calculation], then enter the
value after multiplying by a coefficient (2-
current measurement values in the [Before
point correction) Correction] field of [Correction Value 2].
For both measured values, a pre-correction and post-
correction value is configured, and correction coefficients A
the [After Correction] field of [Correction Value 2].
and B are calculated from those results.
Correction coefficients A and B are calculated from the
1 Click the of the items with measurements you corrected measured values using correction values 1 and
would like to correct. 2.
The [Measured Value Correction] screen appears.
2 In the [Measured Value Correction] - [Correction

Method] field, select [2-Point].
3D Inspection
3 Click [Correction Value 1] - [Input Meas. Value] in

[Correction Value Calculation], then enter the
current measurement values in the [Before
Correction] field of [Correction Value 1].

the [After Correction] field of [Correction Value 1].
5 Perform measurement once more.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-19

Functions

3D Inspection
 Functions
Position Correction
Functions
5-20 LJ-X UM_GB

Height measurement
Height measurement
What is [Height Measurement]?

Measures the height, uneven area, and uneven volume with reference to the arbitrarily specified zero plane. The height H, uneven
area, and uneven volume are converted to actual size values according to the set scaling correction factor.
Measurement Image Measurement Sample
When the measurement region is a rectangle

X Origin
Y
Maximum height (point)
X：22.553
Y：12.755
Z：３.645
H：3.612
Functions
X：8.573
Y：26.254
Maximum height (point) Z：-1.788
H：-1.772
Measurement area
LJ-X UM_GB 5-21

Height measurement
Flow of Settings
1 Prepare tool.
 Add a tool
2
> >
3
4
 Register the reference image (page 3-
18)
If there is no reference image, register the
reference image.
5
2
Functions
Set the inspection region.

Lay out measurement region to surround the
desired measurement area.
3 Configure image enhance and zero plane specification (page 5-3).
4 Set detection conditions (page 5-23).
5 Set judgment conditions (page 5-23).

Set tolerance (maximum and minimum) on measured values.
Clicking the displayed in measurement items allows for correction of individual measurement
values. For details, see"Correct Individual Measured Values (Measurement Correction)" (page 5-18).
5-22 LJ-X UM_GB

Height measurement
Setting Detection Conditions
Setting item Settings

Height direction unit Selects the unit for measurement results of Z and H to [mm] or [μm]. If height unit is set to μm, noise
removal and Z-offset units are also set to μm.
Detect Plane The least squares plane is calculated and output from the 3D information of the input image in the
measurement area.
Setting judgment conditions

Max. height For the detected maximum height, specify the range to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" or
"Lower limit". The unit of tolerance for Z and H is the unit specified in "height unit" of detection
condition.
Min. height For the detected minimum height, specify the range to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" or "Lower
limit". The unit of tolerance for Z and H is the unit specified in "height unit" of detection condition.
Ave. height For the detected average height, specify the range to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" or "Lower
limit". The unit of tolerance for Z and H is the unit specified in "height unit" of detection condition.
Functions
P-P height For the detected peak-to-peak height, specify the range to be determined as OK with "Upper limit"
or "Lower limit".
Valid Pixel Count Specify the range of effective pixel number to be judged as OK by "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
The tolerance unit is the "number of pixels" of the measurement area.
Area Specify the range of the concave/convex area judged as OK by setting [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit]. The unit for tolerance is mm2.
Volume Specify the range of the concave/convex volume judged as OK by setting [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit]. The unit for tolerance is mm3.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-23

Trend Height Measurement
Trend Height Measurement
What is [Trend Height Measurement]?

Multiple segments can be placed in the measurement region to measure the height, area and volume for each
segment. Additionally, a circle or plane in a 3D space can be detected using multiple height information groups
obtained for each segment.
Measurement Image Measurement sample
When the measurement region is a rectangle When the measurement region is a rectangle
• Target data: Peak • Target data: Peak
• Trend direction: ↓ • Trend direction: ↓
Segment movement
Segment size
Peak detected H Peak H (Min.)
Trend (Minimum value) Trend 0.875 mm
Functions
direction direction
Peak detected H Peak H (Max.)
(Maximum value) 1.258 mm
Work to be measured
Measurement area
When the measurement region is a ring/arc When the measurement region is a ring/arc
• Target data: Peak • Target data: Peak
• Trend direction: Clockwise • Trend direction: Clockwise
Segment movement
Peak detected H
(Maximum value) Peak H (Max.)
Segment size
Measurement area
Peak detected H Peak H (Min.)

(Minimum value)
Trend direction Work to be measured Trend direction
5-24 LJ-X UM_GB

Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.
 Add a tool
> >
2
18)
3
reference image.
4
Functions
5

Clicking the displayed in measurement items allows for correction of individual measurement
values. For details, see"Correct Individual Measured Values (Measurement Correction)" (page 5-18).
LJ-X UM_GB 5-25


Target Data Select the measurements to focus on. If peak (bottom, average) is selected, peak (bottom,
average) is used for circle/plane detection. The position of the graphic display on the screen also
varies depending on the maximum and minimum values of the selected item.
Height Unit Selects the unit for measurement results of Z and H to [mm] or [μm]. If height unit is set to μm, noise
removal and Z-offset units are also set to μm.
Detection target Specify an object to be detected by the trend height measurement.
Trend Direction Selects the movement direction for the segment for which height is to be measured.
• Selects between [↓][→] when the measurement region is a rectangle.
• If the measurement region is a rotated rectangle, only [↓] is available (from the top side to bottom
side) and it will link with the rotation direction of the measurement region.
• When the measurement region is a ring or arc, only [Clockwise] is available.
Segment Size Specify the size of the segment in which the height is detected.
Starting offset/ Specify the amount (angle) to offset the start segment from the start edge of the measurement area.
Starting Angle If there is no detected object near the boundary of the measurement area, the leading segment can
be optimally positioned without changing the measurement area.
Segment Shift Specify the amount of the segment shift for detecting heights in the trend direction. The smaller the
segment shift value, the longer the processing time. At the same time, more segments can be
Functions
placed within the same region.

Max. Segments Specifies the maximum number of segments that can be detected. Specify that "maximum number
of segments" is larger than "number of segments". The "number of segments" changes in
conjunction with the measurement area, segment size, and movement settings.
Judged Label Specify the judgment target segment.
• Maximum: Specifies the segment with the maximum measured value as the judgment target.
• Minimum: Specifies the segment with the minimum measured value as the judgment target.
• Specified: Specify the segment of the specified No. as the judgment target.
• All: Specifies all segments as judgment targets. First, judges the measured value for each
segment. Then, compares the number of segments judged as NG to the number of NG judgment
condition segments or the number of consecutive NG segments, performing tool judgment.
Best fit Circle/Plane A circle or plane in a 3D space is detected from multiple height information groups obtained for each
segment.
Correction If this option is enabled, it reduces the noise influence.
5-26 LJ-X UM_GB

Setting Judgment Conditions

No. of detected segments Specify the range of the number of detected segments to be judged as OK with "Upper limit"
and "Lower limit".
NG Segments It can be set if "All" is selected on the judgment label. Specify the range in which the tool
judgment is OK with "Upper limit" for the total number of segments judged as NG.
Consecutive NG It can be set if "All" is selected on the judgment label. Specify the range in which the tool
Segments judgment is OK with "Upper limit" for the successive number of segments judged as NG.
Peak H (Max.)/ Specify the range of the maximum value or minimum value of the peak detected for each
Peak H (Min.) segment to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Peak H Specify the range of the peak detected for the judgment object segment to be judged as OK with
"Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Bottom H (Max.)/ Specify the range of the maximum value or minimum value of the bottom detected for each
Bottom H (Min.) segment to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Bottom H Specify the range of the bottom calculated for the judgment object segment to be judged as OK
with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Average H (Max.)/ Specify the range of the maximum value or minimum value of the average height calculated for
Average H (Min.) each segment to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Functions
Average H Specify the range of the average height calculated for the judgment object segment to be judged
as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
P-P Height H (Max.)/P-P Specify the range of the maximum value or minimum value of the height between peaks
Height H (Min.) calculated for each segment to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
P-P Height H Specify the range of the height between peaks calculated for the judgment object segment to be
judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Valid Pixel Count (Max.)/ Specify the range of the maximum value or minimum value of the effective number of pixels
Valid Pixel Count (Min.) calculated for each segment to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit". The
tolerance unit is the "number of pixels" of the measurement area.
Valid Pixel Count Specify the range of the effective number of pixels calculated for the judgment object segment
to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit". The tolerance unit is the "number of
pixels" of the measurement area.
Concave Area (Max.)/ Specify the range of the maximum value or minimum value of the convex area calculated for
Concave Area (Min.) each segment to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Concave Area Specify the range of the convex area calculated for the judgment object segment to be judged
Convex Area (Max.)/ Specify the range of the maximum value or minimum value of the convex volume calculated for
Convex Area (Min.) each segment to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Convex Area Specify the range of the convex area calculated for the judgment object segment to be judged
Concave Volume (Max.)/ Specify the range of the maximum value or minimum value of the concave volume calculated for
Concave Volume (Min.) each segment to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Concave Volume Specify the range of the concave volume calculated for the judgment object segment to be
Convex Volume (Max.)/ Specify the range of the maximum value or minimum value of the convex volume calculated for
Convex Volume (Min.) each segment to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Convex Volume Specify the range of the convex volume calculated for the judgment object segment to be
Detected circle radius/ Specify the range of the radius/diameter of the detected circle to be judged as OK with "Upper
diameter limit" and "Lower limit".
LJ-X UM_GB 5-27

Profile Measurement
Profile Measurement
What is [Profile Measurement]?

Allows for various measurements of a specified height image cross-section (profile).
For a profile obtained from a height image, sets what type (profile measurement type, page 5-37) of measurement,
what (measurement target, page 5-51) to measure, and what range (measurement area, page 5-64) to measure.
Measurement Image
• Profile measurement setting: [Height] (average) • Profile measurement setting: [Angle from Horizontal]
Measure average height within measurement range Measure the angle between the profile and the horizontal
line in the measurement range
Profile line
Profile line
Measurement range
Measurement range
Angle
Horizontal line
Profile
Functions
Profile
Approximate straight line
Profile line
Average Profile line Approximate straight line
Profile 2.492mm
-46.184°
Profile
Measurement range Measurement range

(left terminal/right terminal)
(left terminal/right terminal)
5-28 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Measurement
Usable Profile Measurement Types

General purpose
• Height • Width
Example: Measurement target: Average Example: Measurement target: Position 1/Position 2: Edge
Average
Profile
Edge
Profile
Height Width
Reference plane
Measurement range (Zero plane) Position 1 Position 2
• Height Difference • Angle from Horizontal
Example: Measurement target: Standard height: Bottom, Example: Measurement target: Straight line
Measurement height: Peak
Peak Approximate straight line

Height difference Profile
Angle from Horizontal line
Profile Horizontal line
Functions
Bottom
Measurement range
Measurement height Measurement height
• Angle Formed by 2 Straight Lines
Example: Measurement target: Standard angle: Straight
• Position
line, Measurement angle: Straight line
Example: Measurement target: Edge
Approximate
Position straight line
Angle of two
straight lines
Edge
Profile
Reference Measurement
Profile Angle angle
Horizontal line
Reference Angle Measurement angle

Measurement range Measurement range Measurement range
• Center Position • Radius of Circle
Example: Measurement target: Position 1/Position 2: Edge Example: Measurement target: Center of circle
Profile
Profile
Edge Center of Circle
Center Position Radius of Circle
Center Position Approximate circle
Position 1 Position 2 Measurement range

LJ-X UM_GB 5-29

Profile Measurement
Usable Profile Measurement Types (continued)

• Cross-section Area • Point/Line Distance
Example: Measurement target: Cross-section area Example: Measurement target: Point: Peak, straight line
Point: Peak
Cross-Section Area
Point/Line Distance
Reference plane
(Zero plane) Profile
Profile
Line
Measurement range Line Point

• Cross-section Area Enclosed by Straight Line
• Count
Example: Measurement target: Straight line, cross-section
Example: Measurement target: Edge
area
Cross-Section Area Count
5
Profile
Line
Profile
Edge
Functions
Measurement range
Line Cross-Section Area
Measurement range Measurement range • Fault detection
• Cross-section Area Enclosed by 2 Straight Lines Example: Measurement target: Difference from model line
Example: Measurement target: Straight line, cross-section
area Difference with
reference model
Cross-Section Area line (area)
Reference model line
Straight line 1
Profile
Profile
Straight line 2
Measurement range
Straight line 1 Cross-Section Area Straight line 2 • Profile Length

Measurement range Measurement range Measurement range
Example: Measurement target: Profile length
• Points Distance
Example: Measurement target: Point 1/Point 2: Peak
Profile Length
Point 1: Peak
Points Distance
Profile
Point 2: Peak
Measurement Range
Point 1 Point 2
5-30 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Measurement
For welding
• Throat Thickness • Undercut
The deepest point

of the welded area
Reference Line
(Base metal -
Bisection of
Undercut
Two Lines)
Throat Thickness
Base Metal (Left) Bead Base Metal (Right) Base Metal Undercut
Measurement Range Measurement Range Measurement Range Measurement Range Measurement Range
• Leg Length • Overlap
Parallel Lines of
Bead Start Edge Base Metal
Overlap
Intersection of
Base Metal
Leg Length
Bead Start Edge
Functions
Base Metal (Left) Bead Start Edge Base Metal (Right) Base Metal Bead Start Edge Point on Bead Surface
Measurement Range Measurement Range Measurement Range Measurement Range Measurement Range Measurement Range
LJ-X UM_GB 5-31

Profile Measurement
Usable Profile Measurement Target Types

• Average • Intersection of Profile and Measurement
Measurement
Measures the average Average range Line Range
Approximate
height of the profile in the The intersection of Straight Line
measurement range. Profile approximate straight lines Profile
calculated from the profile

and another profile in the Intersection of
Profile and Line
measurement range is
• Peak detected from another
Measurement
Measures the highest Peak range measurement range and the position and height are
position/height of the profile measured.
in the measurement range. Profile • Center of Circle
Measurement
The peak for a reference Measures the position/ range
(line or circle) can also be height of an approximated

Center of Circle
detected. circle calculated from the
profile in the measurement
• Bottom
Measurement range. Approximate Profile
Measures the lowest range
circle
position/height of the profile Profile
in the measurement range. • Edges
Edge Detection height
The bottom for a reference Measures positions which
Bottom
(line or circle) can also be cross the selected
Functions
detected. [Detection Height] of the Profile

profile in the measurement
• Inflection Points
Measurement range range. Measurement range
Measures the position/
Inflection
height in the measurement point
range where the profile Profile • Average Point
Average Point Measurement
bends. Detects the average profile Range
height and center position in

the measurement range. Profile
• Inflection point 2
Profile Measurement
Measures positions and Range
heights of profiles that are

at or further from the Inflection • Line
Point 2 Line Measurement
detection threshold of a line Calculates an approximate range
Detection Threshold Detection
or circle. Direction line from the profile in the
measurement range. It is Profile
possible to specify the
• Two Lines Intersection
Two Lines distance of the parallel
Specifies 2 measurement Intersection
translation.
regions and measures the
This is used for angle
position/height at which 2 Profile
calculation and profile segmentation.
approximated straight lines
• Line Passing One Point
calculated from the profile Measurement
Approximate Line Passing
range Detects a line parallel to a One Point
within each measurement Straight Line
reference line passing a
region intersect.
specified point. 
• Intersection of line and Intersection point Approximate A line at a different angle, Profile
circle of circle and
straight line
straight line Measurement
Approximate circle such as one perpendicular Range
Specifies a profile
to the reference line, can be
calculated from an Profile
created by setting a
approximated circle and a
Center of Circle tolerance angle.
profile calculated from an Measurement
approximated line, draws a range
line from the center of the

approximated circle to intersect the approximated line
perpendicularly and measures the position/height of the
intersection point.
5-32 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Measurement
• Line Passing Two Points • Difference from Model Line

Measurement range
Detects a line passing Line Passing
Measures the area of a
Difference with
through two different Two Points region of the profile which model line
specified points. It is differs from the model line Profile
possible to specify the within the measurement Reference
Measurement Profile model line
distance of the parallel Range range, and the position/
translation. height of the point which is
• Bisection of Two Lines furthest from the model line.
Measurement
Detects a line bisecting two Range • Profile Length
specified lines.  Two Lines Measures the distance Profile Length
Measurement
Range
Bisection
It is possible to specify an traversed by the profile in
angle rotating around the Profile the measurement range.
intersection between two 
lines or the distance 
between parallel lines.
• Cross-section Area • Auxiliary Target (Point)
Measurement
Measures the area of range Refers to an auxiliary target for a point.
segmented regions of the
profile in the measurement Profile • Auxiliary Target (Line)
range. Reference Refers to an auxiliary target for a line.
Cross-
Section plane
Additionally, by using a Area (Zero plane)
Functions
horizontal line or [Straight
Line], it can measure the
area of the measurement
area, profile, or regions segmented by a horizontal line
(straight line).
LJ-X UM_GB 5-33

Profile Measurement
Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.
 Add a tool
> >

18)
reference image.
2
Functions
Select the profile line type in the [Profile Line] field, then specify the profile line setting
method.
For details, see "Profile Line Settings" (page 5-36).
On the settings are completed, the [Profile Measurement] screen appears.
Updating Profile Line Settings
Click the [Profile Line] button, and once the settings have been updated on the [Profile Line
Settings] screen, click [OK].
5-34 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Measurement
4 Click
measured.
and specify the items and judgment conditions of the profile to be
For details, see "Profile Measurement Types" (page 5-37).
Deleting Profile Items

Select the items you would like to delete and click .
Updating Profile Item Settings

Select the items you would like to update the settings for and click [Edit].
Copying Profile Items

Select the items you would like to copy and click [Copy].
Functions
Click [OK].
LJ-X UM_GB 5-35

Profile Measurement
Profile Line Settings
Profile Line
Selects a specification method for the profile line.
• 2-Point: Specifies a start and end point in the image, and takes a profile line.
• Vertical: Specifies a vertical straight line on the image and takes a profile line.
• Horizontal: Specifies a horizontal straight line on the image and takes a profile line.
• Circle: Draw a profile line in a circumferential direction on the image.
Profile Width
Specify a profile line width.
Point The number of profiles specified in [Profile Width] are obtained, and profiles to measure are
obtained as per the settings in [Profile Calculation Method].
Profile Calculation Method

Specifies the profile calculation method to be used to acquire profiles for measurement from the profiles
obtained through profile line on the height image and [Profile Width] settings.
Functions
• Average Link: An average of obtained profiles is used as the profile for measurement.
• Max. Link: From the obtained profiles, the one with maximum pixels is linked and used as the profile for
measurement.
• Min. Link: From the obtained profiles, the one with minimum pixels is linked and used as the profile for
measurement.
Length Unit
Specify the unit of measurement result from [mm] or [μm] in length unit.
Profile Shape Correction

• Rotation + Projection: Even if the zero plane tilts in the direction of the cross section or perpendicular to it,
there will be no shape distortion.
Profile is rotated within the cross section, then a vertical cross section is projected onto the zero plane.
• Rotation Only: Even if the zero plane leans in the direction of the cross section, there will be no shape
distortion.
Profile is rotated within the cross section based on its tilt. Used for measurement with a cross section parallel
to the Z-axis.
• None: The zero plane’s height is subtracted to calculate the profile. If the zero plane tilts, there will be shape
distortion.
Effective pixel boundary processing

Select how to process the profile at the boundary between valid and invalid pixels. Affects only the edge and
inflection point measurements.
• Extend Up: Connect the lower limit and valid pixels.
• Extend Down: Connect the upper limit and valid pixels.
• None: Do not connect the profile with the border area. This will mean that edges and inflection points are not
detected.
5-36 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Measurement
Profile Measurement Types
Height
Measures the height of the profile in the measurement range.
Measurement Target
Specifies the measurement target (page 5-51) for height measurement.
Select a method for specifying the measurement region and perform necessary settings. Then, set the
measurement target detection conditions based on the specified measurement target.
• Average (page 5-51)
• Peak (page 5-52)
• Bottom (page 5-53)
• Inflection Points (page 5-54)
• Inflection Point 2 (page 5-55)
• Two Lines Intersection (page 5-56)
• Intersection of Line and Circle (page 5-57)
• Intersection of Profile and Line (page 5-58)
• Center of Circle (page 5-58)
• Difference from Model Line (page 5-62)
• Auxiliary Target (Point) (page 5-63)
Functions
Auxiliary Target
An auxiliary target can be used to measure the target with a combination of an auxiliary point and an auxiliary
line. Select a point or line and then select the measurement target to be used.
A measurement target with an auxiliary target can be referenced as an auxiliary point or auxiliary line from
another measurement target.
Measured Value Correction

Select [Settings] and adjust the measured values to match the actual size.
For details on setting method, see "Correcting Measured Values of Profile Measurements" (page 5-66).
Judgment Conditions
Set tolerance (maximum and minimum) on measured heights.
The unit for tolerance is [mm].
LJ-X UM_GB 5-37

Profile Measurement
Height Difference
Measure the height difference based on the [Height] of the profiles detected in two measurement ranges.
Measurement Target (Reference Height/Measurement Height)

Specifies the measurement target (page 5-51) for measurement of standard height/measurement height.
• Average (page 5-51)
Auxiliary Target
Functions

Judgment Conditions
Set tolerance (maximum and minimum) on measured height difference.
5-38 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Measurement
Position
Measures the [Position] of the profile in the measurement range.
Measurement Target
Specifies the measurement target (page 5-51) for position measurement.
Auxiliary Target
Functions

Judgment Conditions
Set tolerance (maximum and minimum) on measured position.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-39

Profile Measurement
Center Position
Measure the center position based on the [Position] of the profiles detected in two measurement ranges.
Measurement Target (Position 1/Position 2)

Specify the measurement target (page 5-51) for measuring Position 1/Position 2.
Auxiliary Target
Functions

Judgment Conditions
Set tolerance (maximum and minimum) on measured center position.
5-40 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Measurement
Width
Measure the width based on the [Position] of the profiles detected in two measurement ranges.
Measurement Target (Position 1/Position 2)

Specifies the measurement target (page 5-51) for position measurement.
Auxiliary Target
Functions

Judgment Conditions
Set tolerance (maximum and minimum) on measured width.
Angle from Horizontal

Measure the [Angle] between a line on the profile and the horizontal in the measurement range.
Measurement Target
Specify the measurement target for detection of lines.
Select a method for specifying the measurement region and perform necessary settings. Additionally, set line
detection settings (page 5-59).
• Line
• Line Passing One Point
• Line Passing Two Points
• Bisection of Two Lines
• Auxiliary Target (Line)
Auxiliary Target
Judgment Conditions
Set tolerance (maximum and minimum) on measured angle from horizontal.
The unit for tolerance is [° ].
LJ-X UM_GB 5-41

Profile Measurement
Options
Angle Range: Selects display range for the detected angle.
Angle Calculation Direction:
• Counterclockwise: Calculates the angle in a counter-clockwise direction from the horizontal position.
• Clockwise: Calculates the angle in a clockwise direction from the horizontal position.
Angle Formed by 2 Straight Lines

Measure the [Angle] formed by the line on the profile on one measurement region and the line on the profile in
the other measurement region.
Measurement Target (Reference Angle/Measurement Angle)

• Line
Auxiliary Target
Functions
Judgment Conditions
Set tolerance (maximum and minimum) on measured angle formed by 2 straight lines.
Options
Radius of Circle
Measures the [Radius of Circle] formed on the profile in the measurement range.
Measurement Target
Fixed by [Center of Circle].
Select a method for specifying the measurement region and perform necessary settings. Additionally, set center
of circle detection settings (page 5-23).

Judgment Conditions
Set tolerance (maximum and minimum) on measured radius of circle.
5-42 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Measurement
Cross-section Area
Measure the area of the region surrounded by the profile and zero plane in the measurement range.
Measurement Target
Fixed by [Cross-section Area].
Select a method for specifying the measurement region and perform necessary settings. Additionally, set cross-
section area detection settings (page 5-62).

Judgment Conditions
Set tolerance (maximum and minimum) on measured cross-section area.
The unit for tolerance is [mm2].
Options
Detection target: Selects cross-section area detection target.
• Both: Calculates area by adding the area of regions above the standard height to the area of regions below it.
• Concave: Calculates area of regions below the standard height.
• Convex: Calculates area of regions above the standard height.
Functions
• Add: Calculates area by adding the regions, treating the area of regions above the standard height as positive,
and the area below as negative.
Cross-section Area Enclosed by Straight Line

Measure the area of the region surrounded by a straight line and the zero plane in the measurement range.
Measurement Target (Straight Line)

Fixed by [Straight Line].
Measurement Target (Cross-section Area)


Judgment Conditions
Set tolerance (maximum and minimum) on measured cross-section area enclosed by 1 line.
Options
• Both: Calculates area by adding the area of regions above the standard height to the area of regions below it.
• Add: Calculates area by adding the regions, treating the area of regions above the standard height as
positive, and the area below as negative.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-43

Profile Measurement
Cross-section Area Enclosed by 2 Straight Lines

Measure the area of the region surrounded by 2 straight lines and the zero plane in the measurement range.
Measurement Target (Line 1/Line 2)

Fixed by [Straight Line].
Measurement Target (Cross-section Area)


Judgment Conditions
Set tolerance (maximum and minimum) on measured cross-section area enclosed by 2 lines.
Functions
Options
Point/Point Distance
Measure the distance based on [Points] of the profiles detected in two measurement ranges.
Measurement Target (Point 1/Point 2)

Specifies the measurement target (page 5-51) for point measurement.
• Average Point (page 5-52)
Auxiliary Target
5-44 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Measurement
Judgment Conditions
Set tolerance (maximum and minimum) on measured point-to-point distance.
Point/Line Distance
Measure the distance based on a [Point] on the profile detected in one measurement range and a [Line]
detected on the profile in the another measurement range.
Measurement Target (Point)

Specifies the measurement target (page 5-51) for point measurement.
• Average Point (page 5-52)
Functions
Measurement Target (Straight Line)
Select a method for specifying the measurement range and perform necessary settings. Additionally, set line
detection settings.
• Line
Auxiliary Target
Judgment Conditions
Set tolerance (maximum and minimum) on measured point-to-line distance.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-45

Profile Measurement
Count
Measures the number of measurement targets from the profile in the measurement range.
Measurement Target
Specifies the measurement target (page 5-51) to be counted.
• Edges (page 5-51)
Judgment Conditions
Set tolerance (maximum and minimum) on count number.
Fault Detection
Detects difference from the profile within the measurement range and measures the amount of fault using the
profile's [Standard Model Line].
Measurement Target
Fixed by [Difference from Model Line].
Functions
Select a method for specifying the measurement region and perform necessary settings. Additionally, set the
detection condition for the difference from model line (page 5-62).

Judgment Conditions
Set tolerance (maximum and minimum) on measured amount of fault.
Profile Length
Calculates the distance traveled by the profile in the measurement range.
Measurement Target
Fixed by Profile Length.
Select a method for specifying the measurement range and perform necessary settings.
Additionally, set profile length detection conditions (page 5-62).

Select [Settings] and adjust the measured values to match the actual size.
For details on the setting method, see "Correcting Measured Values of Profile Measurements" (page 5-66).
Judgment Conditions
Set tolerance (maximum and minimum) on measured profile lengths. 
5-46 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Measurement
Throat Thickness
Calculates the thickness of the cross section minus the raised area of the welded metal (throat thickness) for
fillet welding.
Specify Measurement Range

Specify the measurement range according to the figure below.
A: Base metal (orange)
B: Bead (yellow)
Measurement Target (Bead)
Functions
Fixed as [Bottom].
Measurement Target (Base Metal)

Fixed as [Two Lines Bisection].

Judgment Conditions
Set tolerance (maximum and minimum) on measured throat thickness.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-47

Profile Measurement
Leg Length
Calculates the distance from the base of the fillet (joint root) to the tip of the fillet weld (leg length) for fillet
welding. It is presumed that an auxiliary target is used.

Specify the detection region and then specify the measurement range according to the figure below.
A: Base metal (left) (purple)
B: Base metal (right) (green)
C: Bead start edge (orange)
Functions
Measurement Target (Joint Root)

Fixed as "Two Lines Intersection".
Measurement Target (Bead Start Edge)

Fixed as "Inflection Point 2".

Judgment Conditions
Set tolerance (maximum and minimum) on measured leg length.
5-48 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Measurement
Undercut
Calculates the undercut (the groove that is not filled with welding metal) from the base metal for fillet welding.

Specify the measurement range according to the figure below.
A: Undercut (yellow)
B: Base metal (orange)
Measurement Target (Undercut)

Fixed as [Bottom].
Functions
Measurement Target (Bead Start Edge)
[Line Passing One Point], [Line Passing Two Points], [Two Lines Bisection] or [Auxiliary Target (Line)] can be
selected in addition to [Line].

Judgment Conditions
Set tolerance (maximum and minimum) on measured undercut.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-49

Profile Measurement
Overlap
Calculates the angle of the line passing through the bead tip and overlap (the welding defect at the tip where the
welding metal does not fuse with the base material) relative to the base metal for fillet welding. It is presumed
that an auxiliary target is used.

Specify the detection region and then specify the measurement range according to the figure below.
A: Base metal (yellow)
B: Bead start edge (purple)
C: Point on bead surface (green)
Functions
Measurement Target (Base Metal)

[Line Passing One Point], [Two Lines Bisection] or [Auxiliary Target (Line)] can be selected in addition to [Line].
Measurement Target (Approximate Straight Line of Bead Surface)

Fixed as [Line Passing Two Points].
Judgment Conditions
Set tolerance (maximum and minimum) on measured overlap.
Options
5-50 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Measurement
Measurement Target Settings
Edges
Specifies measurement range and edge detection conditions and measures edges within the region.
Measurement Range
Specifies the range for measurement of edges.
• Numerical: Specifies the left and right edge of the measurement range using numbers. Measurement range
will not change.
• Refer to Other Position (1-Point): Specifies a region while referencing a position measured by another
profile measurement.
• Refer to Other Position (2-Point): Specifies a region from 2 points measured by another profile measurement.
For details on setting method, see "Measurement Range Settings" (page 5-64).
Edge Detection Settings

Specifies edge detection conditions. Measurement
range
• Detection Height: Specifies the height at which the profile crosses Detection height
within the measurement range which is detected as an edge. If Profile
[Automatic Settings] is selected, the height at which edges are
Detection label
detected in the profile during display is set automatically.
Functions
Edge Detection
• Edge Direction: Specifies the profile change for edge detection. direction direction
Both directions → 1 2 3 4 n-3 n-2 n-1 n
- Both: Both directions going up and going down are the Start → 1 2 n-1 n
measurement targets. Falling edge → 1 2 n-1 n
- Going Up: Crossings from the bottom to the top are the target. Both directions ← n n-2 n-3 n-4 4 3 2 1
Start ← n n-1 2 1
- Going Down: Crossings from the top to the bottom are the target. Falling edge ← n n-1 2 1
• Detection Direction: Specify the direction for scanning for the
edge within the measurement region.
- →: Scan from the left to the right of the displayed profile (from profile line start to end).
- ←: Scan from the right to the left of the displayed profile (from profile line end to start).
• Detection Label: Out of all edge candidates which meet the conditions, specifies the label of detection
targets with a number.
Average
Specifies the measurement range and measures the average height of the profile in the measurement range.
Measurement Range
Specifies the range for measurement of the average.
will not change.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-51

Profile Measurement
Average Point
Measures the average profile height and center position in the measurement range.
Measurement Range
Specify the range for measurement of the average point.
• Numerical: Specify the left and right edge of the measurement range using numbers. Measurement range
will not change.
• Refer to Other Position Measurement (1-Point): Specify a region while referencing a position measured by
another profile measurement.
• Refer to Other Position Measurement (2-Point): Specify a region from 2 points measured by another profile
measurement.
For details on the setting method, see "Measurement Range Settings" (page 5-64).
Peak
Specifies the measurement range and measures the maximum value of the profile in the measurement range.
When a reference is used, the peak for the reference type can be detected.
Measurement Range (Peak)

Specifies the range for measurement of the peak.
Functions
will not change.

Reference
When this is enabled, the peak for the reference type can be detected.
Reference Type (Straight Line)

Specify the type of measurement target to be used as the reference.
• Straight Line: Uses a straight line as the reference.
• Circle (Top Side): Uses the top half of a circle as the reference.
• Circle (Bottom Side): Uses the bottom half of a circle as the reference.
Refer to Another Measurement Target (Straight Line)

A measurement target can be referenced as a reference line or reference circle. An error occurs if an element
other than a line or circle is selected. During editing, a graphic representing the result for the referenced
measurement target is displayed.
Measurement Range (Reference)

Select the method for specifying the measurement range.
Multiple Range Specification (Reference)

If this option is enabled, another measurement range can be specified and approximated lines and circle can be
detected from those 2 areas. The method for specifying the measurement range is identical to that above.
Options
Deformation Correction: If enabled, reduces the noise influence during circle or line detection.
5-52 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Measurement
Bottom
Specifies the measurement range and measures the minimum value of the profile in the measurement range.
Measurement Range (Bottom)

Specifies the range for measurement of the bottom.
will not change.
Reference
When this is enabled, the bottom for the reference type can be detected.
Reference Type (Straight Line)

Specify the type of measurement target to be used as the reference.
• Straight Line: Uses a straight line as the reference.
• Circle (Top Side): Uses the top half of a circle as the reference.
• Circle (Bottom Side): Uses the bottom half of a circle as the reference.
Functions
A measurement target can be referenced as a reference line or reference circle. An error occurs if an element
other than a line or circle is selected. During editing, a graphic representing the result for the referenced
measurement target is displayed.
Measurement Range (Reference)

Multiple Range Specification (Reference)

Options
Deformation Correction: If enabled, reduces the noise influence during circle or line detection.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-53

Profile Measurement
Inflection point
Specifies the measurement range and inflection point detection settings and measures the inflection points of
the profile in the measurement range.
Measurement Range
Specifies the range for measurement of the inflection points.
will not change.
Inflection Point Detection Settings

Set the detection condition of inflection point.
• Sensitivity: A threshold value which determines at which point a change in the tilt of the profile (degree of
bend) will be detected as an inflection point.
While setting the sensitivity, a differential waveform (sensitivity profile) of the profile data is displayed to
emphasize inflection points.
Set the sensitivity between 1 to 100 such that the sensitivity profile of the desired detection points exceeds a
threshold.
Functions
• Inflection Point Graph Scale: Sets the display range

for the inflection point graph. If the inflection point Inflection point graph scale Sensitivity
graph is concentrated, set the value to be large.
Sensitivity profile
• Inflection Point Shape: Specifies the profile change Output

in tilt for inflection point detection. Output
Output Output
- Both: Both directions where the profile change in tilt Output
reduces and those where it increases are treated as

inflection points. Content Content
- Peaks: Directions where the profile change in tilt
Content
reduces are treated as inflection points. Content Content
- Valleys: Directions where the profile change in tilt
increases are treated as inflection points.
• Detection Direction: Specify the direction for scanning for the inflection points within the measurement region.
- →: Scan from the left to the right of the displayed profile (from profile line start to end).
- ←: Scan from the right to the left of the displayed profile (from profile line end to start).
• Detection Label: Out of all inflection point candidates which meet the conditions, specifies the label of
detection targets with a number.
• Number of calculation points: Set the number of pieces of data when calculating inflection points. Set a small
value if you want to capture subtle inflection points. However, a small value may make detection unstable.
5-54 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Measurement
Inflection Point 2
Detects points where the profile intersects a user-defined line or circle.
Detection Settings
• Detection Direction: Specify the profile change direction to be detected as Inflection Point 2.
- Top Right or Bottom Right: Sets a profile that diverges to the top right or bottom right of the line or circle as the
measurement target.
- Top Left or Bottom Left: Sets a profile that diverges to the top left or bottom left of the line or circle as the
measurement target.
- Top Right: Sets a profile that diverges to the top right of the line or circle as the measurement target.
- Bottom Right: Sets a profile that diverges to the bottom right of the line or circle as the measurement target.
- Top Left: Sets a profile that diverges to the top left of the line or circle as the measurement target.
- Bottom Left: Sets a profile that diverges to the bottom left of the line or circle as the measurement target.
• Detection Threshold (mm): Specify the distance from the line or circle where detection begins. Setting a
large value prevents false detections caused by noise near the line or circle, but deviation from the line or
circle is greater.
Measurement Range (Point)

Specify the range for measurement of Inflection Point 2.
will not change.
Functions
measurement.
Type (Line/Circle)
Specify the type of measurement target.
• Line: Detects areas at or further away from the threshold of distance from the line as Inflection Point 2.
• Circle (Top): Detects areas at or further away from the threshold of distance from the circle as Inflection Point
2. Specify this if you want to detect a circle from a raised area. Profiles outside the reference circle in the X
direction are not detected as detection points.
• Circle (Bottom): Detects areas at or further away from the threshold of distance from the circle as Inflection
Point 2. Specify this if you want to detect a circle from a depressed area. Profiles outside the reference circle
in the X direction are not detected as detection points.
Refer to Another Measurement Target (Straight Line/Circle)

A measurement target can be referenced as a line or circle. An error occurs if an element other than a line or
circle is selected. During editing, a graphic representing the result for the referenced measurement target is
displayed.
Measurement Range (Line/Circle)

Multiple Range Specification (Line/Circle)

LJ-X UM_GB 5-55

Profile Measurement
Options
Deformation Correction: If enabled, reduces the noise influence during line or circle detection.
Detection Method: Select the method for detecting Inflection Point 2.
• Search from Line Side: Searches for profiles from a line or circle and detects points that are at or further
away than the threshold. False detections may occur if there is a lot of noise near the line or circle.
• Search from Opposite Side: Searches for profiles from the side opposite to the line or circle and detects
points that are at or further than the threshold. This prevents false detection when there is a lot of noise near
the line or circle. This is effective if the profiles are at a uniform distance from the line or circle.
Number of Filter Points: Specifies the number of median filter points to be used when judging that a point is far
away from the line or circle. Setting a large value prevents false detections caused by noise, but fluctuations
between detection points are greater.
(Example) (Example) (Example)
Detection Direction: Top Right Detection Direction: Top Right Detection Direction: Bottom Left
Type: Straight Line Type: Circle (Top Side) Type: Circle (Bottom Side)
Profile Detection Point

Detection Point Detection Circle
Detection Direction
Detection Direction Profile
Detection Line Detection Threshold
Detection Threshold
Detection Threshold Profile
Detection Direction
Detection Circle
Detection Point
Functions
Intersection of two lines

Specifies 2 measurement regions and measures the position at which 2 approximated straight lines calculated
from the profile within each measurement region intersect.
Refer to Another Measurement Target (Line 1/Line 2)

A measurement target can be referenced as a line. An error occurs if a measurement target other than a line is
selected. During editing, a graphic representing the result for the referenced measurement target is displayed.
Measurement Range (Line 1/Line 2)

Specifies the measurement range for detection of approximated lines.
will not change.
Multiple Range Specification (Line 1/Line 2)

If this option is enabled, another measurement range can be specified and approximated lines can be detected
from those 2 areas. The method for specifying the measurement range is identical to that above.
Options
Deformation Correction: If enabled, reduces the noise influence during approximated line detection.
5-56 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Measurement
Intersection of line and circle

Specifies a profile calculated from an approximated circle and a profile calculated from an approximated line,
draws a line from the center of the circle to intersect the approximated line perpendicularly and measures the
position/height of the intersection point.
Refer to Another Measurement Target (Circle)

A measurement target can be referenced as a circle. An error occurs if a measurement target other than a circle
is selected. During editing, a graphic representing the result for the referenced measurement target is
displayed.
Measurement Range (Circle)

Specifies the measurement range for detection of approximated circle.
will not change.
Multiple Range Specification (Circle)

If this option is enabled, another measurement range can be specified and approximated circles/lines can be
Functions

Measurement Range (Straight Line)

will not change.
Multiple Range Specification (Straight Line)

Options
• Deformation Correction: If enabled, reduces the noise influence during approximated line and circle
detection.
• Intersection Type: Select the point to be calculated as an intersection between circle and line. If there is one
intersection point, the contact point between the circle and line is calculated. If there is no intersection point,
the intersection point between the approximated line and a perpendicular line from the center of the
approximated circle is detected.
- Middle point of right and left intersection point: The middle point of two intersection points is defined as calculated.
- Left Side: Of the two points, the left-side intersection point is calculated.
- Right Side: Of the two points, the right-side intersection point is calculated.
- Top Side: Of the two points, the top-side intersection point is calculated.
- Bottom Side: Of the two points, the bottom-side intersection point is calculated.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-57

Profile Measurement
Intersection of Profile and Line

Detects intersections of profiles and lines.
Measurement Range (Profile)

Specify the profile range for searching for intersections.


Specify the measurement range for detection of approximated lines.
will not change.
measurement.
Multiple Range Specification (Straight Line)

Functions
Options
Deformation Correction: If enabled, reduces the noise influence during line detection.
Intersection Direction: Specify the profile change direction to be detected as an intersection with a line.
• Both directions: Both rising and falling are the measurement targets.
• Rising: Targets the direction crossing from the bottom of the line to the top.
• Falling: Targets the direction crossing from the top of the line to the bottom.
Detection Direction: Specify the direction to search for the intersection point within the measurement range.
Detection Label: Out of all intersection point candidates which meet the conditions, specifies the label of
detection targets with a number.
Center of Circle
Specifies the measurement range and measures the position of the center of an approximated circle detected
from the profile in the measurement range.
Measurement Range
Specifies the measurement range for detection of approximated circle.
will not change.
Multiple Range Specification

If this option is enabled, another measurement range can be specified and approximated circles can be
Options
Deformation Correction: If enabled, reduces the noise influence during approximated circle detection.
5-58 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Measurement
Straight line
Specifies the measurement range and detects an approximated line from the profile in the measurement range.

Measurement Range
will not change.
• Refer to Other Position (2-Point): Specifies a region from 2 points measured by another profile
measurement.
Multiple Range Specification

Functions
Options
Parallel Translation Distance (mm): It is possible to specify the distance of the parallel translation of detected
lines.
Parallel Translation Reference: Specify the reference for the parallel translation. When Parallel Translation
Distance is set, parallel translation of the detected line is performed by moving the set parallel translation
distance perpendicularly to the detected line.
- Z Reference: Performs parallel translation using the Z direction as a reference. Performing parallel translation of a
line that is around 0° makes it possible to perform parallel translation in the same direction even if the tilt changes.
- X Reference: Performs parallel translation using the X direction as a reference. Performing parallel translation of a
line that is around 90° makes it possible to perform parallel translation in the same direction even if the tilt
changes.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-59

Profile Measurement
Line Passing One Point

Detects an average line passing through a specified point. The line is parallel to the reference line.
A line at a different angle, such as one perpendicular to the reference line, can be created by setting a
tolerance angle.
Measurement Target (Refer to Point)

Select the measurement target from the following:
Point/Auxiliary Target 1/Auxiliary Target 2/Auxiliary Target 3/Auxiliary Target 4
Line Type (Straight Line)

Specifies the type of line.
• Line: Creates an approximate straight line from the profile in the measurement range.
• Horizontal Line: Creates a horizontal line. The line type cannot be referred to when a horizontal line is
specified.
Multiple Region Specification (Straight Line)


Functions
will not change.
measurement.
Multiple Region Specification (Straight Line)

Options
Intersection Angle: An angle intersecting with a reference line can be specified. A line parallel to the reference
line can be created by specifying 0 degrees. Perpendicular reference lines can be created by specifying 90
degrees.
lines.
lines.
changes.
5-60 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Measurement
Line Passing Two Points

Detects a line passing through two points. Refer to two different measurement targets as points that the line
must pass through.
Measurement Target (Refer to Point 1/Refer to Point 2)

Select the measurement target from the following:
Point/Auxiliary Target 1/Auxiliary Target 2/Auxiliary Target 3/Auxiliary Target 4
Options
lines.
changes.
Functions
Bisection of Two Lines
Detects a line bisecting two lines. Perpendicular bisecting lines can be created by setting a rotation angle.
Refer to Another Measurement Target (Line 1/Line 2)

Measurement range (Line 1/Line 2)

will not change.
measurement.
Multiple Region Specification (Line 1/Line 2)

Options
Rotation Angle: An angle rotating around the intersection between two lines can be specified. Perpendicular
bisecting lines can be created by specifying 90 degrees.
Parallel Translation Distance (mm): It is possible to specify the distance of the parallel translation of detected lines.
changes.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-61

Profile Measurement
Cross-section area
Specifies a measurement range and measures the area of regions which are segmented by the zero plane and
profile in the measurement range.
Measurement Range
Specifies the measurement range for detection of cross-section area.
will not change.
Difference from Model Line

Specifies the measurement range, detects a standard model line from the profile in the measurement range,
and measures the difference between the profile.
Measurement Range
Specifies the measurement range for detection of standard model line.
Functions
will not change.

Detection Conditions
Specifies the conditions for detection of the difference between the standard model line.
• Standard Model Line: Specifies the standard model line for the profile to be measured.
- Free-Form Line
- Line
- Circle
• Flattened Range (Common): Set when [Free-Form Line] is selected for standard model line.
Set the value to be large when drawing loose free-form lines, and small when drawing steep free-form lines,
with regards to the profile within the measurement range.
• Detection Direction: Specifies the direction for detection.
- +/-: Detects convex/concave areas in either +/- direction as differences.
- +: Only detects convex/concave areas in the + direction as differences.
- -: Only detects convex/concave areas in the - direction as differences.
- When the standard model line is a circle, [+] indicates the outward direction, and [-] indicates the opposite
direction.
• Detection Threshold: Detects items whose distance from the standard model line exceeds a specified value
as faults (unit: mm).
• Detection Width Min.: Faults whose fault width is smaller than the specified lower limit are not treated as
faults (unit: mm).
If [Difference from Model Line] is used for position detection, this is calculated as the fault location
Reference
which is furthest from the model line.
5-62 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Measurement
Profile Length
Calculates the distance traversed by the profile in the measurement range.
Measurement range
will not change.
measurement.
Options
Interpolation of Invalid Data: Interpolates a line between the termination of one valid point and the start of
another in the measurement range.
Smoothing: Performs moving average processing of profile data in the X direction. Specify the moving average
score. To reduce the variation of profile data, increase the setting value.
Auxiliary Target (Point)

Refers to an auxiliary target for a point.
Functions
Measurement Target (Refer to Point)
Select an auxiliary target.
Auxiliary Target (Line)

Refers to an auxiliary target for a line.
Measurement Target (Refer to Line)

Select an auxiliary target.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-63

Profile Measurement
Measurement Range Settings

Set the range which is to be measured. The measurement range can be set through the following methods.
• Numeric specification (page 5-64)
• Reference to another position measurement (1 point) (page 5-64)
• Reference to another position measurement (2 point) (page 5-65)
Numeric specification
Specifies the left and right edge positions using numbers.
Use when the measurement range does not change.
Left Edge
Specifies the left edge position of the measurement range.
Right Edge
Specifies the right edge position of the measurement range.
Reference to another position measurement (1 point)

Specifies a region while referencing a position (position, center position) measured by another profile
Functions
measurement.
Ref.
• Measurement Item No.: Specifies the measurement “Position” for reference
item number of the position or center position and destination Width
specifies the center position of the measurement

range. Measurement range follows the position
measurement results.
• Offset: Specify when you want to offset the
measurement range position.
• Width: Specify the measurement range width of a
Offset
referenced position used as a center.
5-64 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Measurement
Reference to another position measurement (2 points)

Specifies 2 points of a referenced position (position, center position) measured by another profile measurement
as the left and right edges of the measurement range.
Ref. 1 “Position” for reference “Position” for reference

destination 1
Specifies the left edge position of the measurement destination 2
range.
• Measurement Item No.: Specifies the measurement
item number of the position or center position.
Measurement range follows the position measurement
results.
• Offset: Specify when you want to offset the
measurement range position. Offset Offset
Ref. 2
Specifies the right edge position of the measurement range.
• Measurement Item No.: Specifies the measurement item number of the position or center position.
Measurement range follows the position measurement results.
• Offset: Specify when you want to offset the measurement range position.
Functions
LJ-X UM_GB 5-65

Profile Measurement
Correcting Measured Values of Profile Measurements

Adjust the measured values to match the actual size.
1-Point Correction
Corrects based on 1 measured value.
Specifies the measured value post-correction in contrast to
the current measurement and calculates the offset against
that measurement.
1 Perform measurement.
2 In the [Measured Value Correction] -

[Correction Method] field, select [1-Point].
3 Click [Correction Value Calculation] - [Input

Meas. Value], then enter the current
measurement value in the [Before
Correction] field.
Functions
4 Enter the measurement value post-

correction in the [After Correction] field.
Offset on the measured value is calculated from the
pre-correction and post-correction values.
5-66 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Measurement
2-Point Correction
For both measured values, a pre-correction and post-
correction value is configured, and correction coefficients
A and B are calculated from those results.
1 Perform measurement.
2 In the [Measured Value Correction] -

[Correction Method] field, select [2-Points].
3 Click [Correction Value Calculation] -

[Correction Value 1] - [Input Meas. Value],
then enter the current measurement value
in [Before Correction] of the [Correction
Value 1] field.

correction in the [After Correction] field of
[Correction Value 1].
Functions
5 Perform measurement once more.
6 Click [Correction Value Calculation] -

[Correction Value 2] - [Input Meas. Value],
then enter the current measurement value
in [Before Correction] of the [Correction
Value 2] field.

correction in the [After Correction] field of
[Correction Value 2].
Correction coefficients A and B are calculated from the corrected measured values using correction
values 1 and 2.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-67

Continuous Profile Measurement
What is [Continuous Profile Measurement]?

Draws and measures a sequence of numerous profile lines at regular intervals within a specified region of the height
image. Allows for various measurements of this profile. The individual profile measurement content which can be
applied to these numerous obtained profiles is identical to [Profile Measurement] "Profile Measurement" (page 5-28).
Measurement Image
• Continuous Profile Measurement in a [Rectangular]/ • Line Detection
[Rotated Rectangular] Measurement Region Measurement area
Measurement area
Profile measurement setting: Height Profile measurement setting: Height
Measurement target: Peak
Measurement target: Peak
Detect straight line from
NG determines the part that is less t measurement result
han the default Height
Yellow:
Functions
Judgment OK Detection point
Red:
Judgment NG
Wound Detect straight line
• Plane Detection
Measurement area Measurement area Profile measurement setting: Height
• Continuous Profile Measurement in a [Circular] Measurement target: Peak
Detection plane:Approximate plane
Measurement Region Detect planes from measurement
results
Measurement area Profile measurement setting:
Cross-sectional
The scan range is 180 ° because t Detection point
he measurement area crosses the
center of the profile.
Detection plane
Measurement area
Profile line
Cross-
Section
Area
OK OK OK OK OK NG
5-68 LJ-X UM_GB

Measurement Sample
• When Judging with Profile Measurement Results • When Judging with Judgment Conditions [Consecutive
NG Profile Count]
Measurement area
Measurement area Profile measurement setting: Height
Measurement target: Peak Profile measurement setting: Height
Continuous NG Profile number: 5 Measurement target: Peak
In the judgment condition of the tool, In the determination condition of the
"Continuous NG Profile number" is Profile measurement setting, by
specified, small flaws are disregarde specifying the lower limit of Height, the
and only flaws exceeding a certain portion that is less than the constant
size are judged as NG. Height is determined as "All" NG.
Wound Red: Measurement

judgment NG Red: Measurement
Measuremen
Wound judgment NG
Red: Measurement Red: Measurement

Measuremen
judgment NG judgment NG
Red: Measurement
judgment NG Red: Measurement
Measuremen
Tool judgment: OK judgment NG
Tool judgment: NG
Functions
LJ-X UM_GB 5-69

Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.
 Add a tool
2
3
> >
4
18)
reference image.
5
2
Functions

6
3 Configure image enhance and zero plane
specification (page 5-3).
5-70 LJ-X UM_GB

5 Click and specify the items of the continuous profile to be measured.

For details, see "Profile Measurement Types" (page 5-37).
Deleting Profile Items

Select the items you would like to delete and click .
Updating Profile Item Settings

Select the items you would like to update the settings for and click [Edit].
Copying Profile Items

Select the items you would like to copy and click [Copy].

Functions
LJ-X UM_GB 5-71


Scan Direction Selects a scan direction of the profile line.
Scan Interval Specifies a profile line scan interval (unit: pixels). The smaller the scan interval, the longer the
processing time. At the same time, more profiles can be measured within the same region.
Profile Width Specifies a profile line width (unit: pixels).
Profile Calc. Selects the type of profile to use.
Method • Average Link: Uses the average of the width direction as the profile.
• Max. Link: Uses the maximum value of the width direction as the profile.
• Min. Link: Uses the minimum value of the width direction as the profile.
Max. Number of Specifies the maximum number of profiles which can be measured. Set this such that [Max. Profile
Profiles Count] is larger than [Profile Count]. Also, be aware that the profile count will change along with the
measurement region and scan interval.
Display Condition 1 to Specifies the type of profile to be displayed when the display conditions have been switched by the
Display Condition 4 view bar. By setting conditions which are frequently used, a profile screen can be made which is
suitable for inspection.
• None: Does not display profile. This can be used to reduce resource memory usage.
• NG Count Descending: Displays the top 4 profiles when sorted by profiles which have the most
NG judgments.
Functions
• Measured Value Descending: Displays the top 4 profiles when sorted by profiles for which the
specified measurement item is largest.
• Measured Value Ascending: Displays the bottom 4 profiles when sorted by profiles which have
the most NG judgments.
• Equal Division Descending: Displays profiles from end, when 4 profiles are distributed at regular
intervals in the region.
• Equal Division Ascending: Displays profiles from start, when 4 profiles are distributed at regular
intervals in the region.
Max. Result Display Specifies a profile display range via pixel count. Setting this be small can reduce resource memory
Pixel Count usage. If this is set smaller than the profile to be measured, some portions may not be displayed, so
make sure it is larger than the profile.

Valid Profiles With a profile in which 1 or more measurement items can be detected being a valid profile, specifies
the range judged as OK of those valid profiles with [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
NG Profiles For profiles judged as NG by individual profile measurements, specifies the range judged as OK by
setting [Upper Limit].
Consec. NG Profiles For consecutive profiles judged as NG by individual profile measurements, specifies the range
judged as OK by setting [Upper Limit].
5-72 LJ-X UM_GB

Free Multi-Point Height Measurement
Free Multi-Point Height

Measurement
What is [Free Multi-Point Height Measurement]?

Multiple regions can be placed; and the height, area and volume of each region can be measured.
Multiple regions can be arranged in desired positions.
Measurement Sample
Measures the height of each point of irregularly arranged parts.
A reference plane is set by specifying multiple points on its
perimeter.
Functions
Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.
 Add a tool 2
> > 3
4
18)
reference image.
5
2 Set the inspection region.
desired measurement area. To add a measurement
region, click the [Add Inspection Region] button.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-73

Free Multi-Point Height Measurement

• Set tolerance (maximum and minimum) on measured values.
• For details, see "Setting Detection Conditions" (page 5-74).

Height Unit Select either [mm] or [μm] as the unit for Z and H measurement results. When μm is specified for
Height Unit, the units for noise removal and Z offset become μm.
Functions
Plane Detection A plane is detected with the specified method from multiple pieces of height data obtained for each
measurement region.
• OFF: Does not detect planes.
• Approximate Plane: Detects a plane according to the least-squares method.
• Tangent Plane: Detects a tangent plane based on the information group. Detects a tangent
plane from multiple pieces of height data.
Reference Height Specify the reference method of the height data to use in detecting the plane.
• Average: Detects a plane on the basis of all the data within all the measurement regions.
• Peak: Finds the peak within each measurement region, and then detects a plane on the
basis of all these peaks.
• Bottom: Finds the bottom within each measurement region, and then detects a plane on the
basis of all these bottoms.
Plane Calculation Specify this item when calculating an approximate plane with the reference height [Average].
Method • High Speed: Calculates the plane by skipping height data within the measurement region. If
the plane is not calculated correctly, select [High Accuracy].
• High Accuracy: Calculates the plane by using all the height data within the measurement
region. Processing takes longer with this option selected.
Setting item Settings Tolerance Units

Peak H Specify the range judged as OK by setting [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] for Specified in
the measured peak H. [Length Unit]
Bottom H Specify the range judged as OK by setting [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] for Specified in
the measured bottom H. [Length Unit]
Average H Specify the range judged as OK by setting [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] for Specified in
the measured average H. [Length Unit]
Peak-to-Peak Height H Specify the range judged as OK by setting [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] for Specified in
the measured peak-to-peak height H. [Length Unit]
Area Specify the range of the concave/convex area judged as OK by setting mm2
[Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Volume Specify the range of the concave/convex volume judged as OK by setting mm3
5-74 LJ-X UM_GB

Arranged Multi-Point Height Measurement
Arranged Multi-Point Height

Measurement
What is [Arranged Multi-Point Height Measurement]?

Multiple measurement regions can be placed; and the height, area and volume of each region can each be measured.
The multiple regions can also be arranged in a latticed array form.
Measurement Sample
Measures the height of each point in the 4 x 4 array region.
A reference plane is set by specifying multiple points on its
perimeter.
Functions
Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.
 Add a tool
2
3
> >
4
18)
reference image.
5

desired measurement area. Specify the number of
measurement regions by the numbers of rows and
columns according to the array of measurement
targets.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-75

Arranged Multi-Point Height Measurement

• Set tolerance (maximum and minimum) on measured values.

Height Unit Select either [mm] or [μm] as the unit for Z and H measurement results. When μm is specified for
Height Unit, the units for noise removal and Z offset become μm.
Plane Detection A plane is detected with the specified method from multiple pieces of height data obtained for each
Functions
measurement region.
• OFF: Does not detect planes.
• Approximate Plane: Detects a plane according to the least-squares method.
• Tangent Plane: Detects a tangent plane based on the information group. Detects a tangent
plane from multiple pieces of height data.
Reference Height Specify the reference method of the height data to use in detecting the plane.
• Average: Detects a plane on the basis of all the data within all the measurement regions.
• Peak: Finds the peak within each measurement region, and then detects a plane on the
basis of all these peaks.
• Bottom: Finds the bottom within each measurement region, and then detects a plane on the
basis of all these bottoms.
Plane Calculation Specify this item when calculating an approximate plane with the reference height [Average}.
Method • High Speed: Calculates the plane by skipping height data within the measurement region. If
the plane is not calculated correctly, select [High Accuracy].
• High Accuracy: Calculates the plane by using all the height data within the measurement
region. Processing takes longer with this option selected.
Setting item Settings Tolerance Units

Peak H Specify the range judged as OK by setting [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] for Specified in
the measured peak H. [Length Unit]
Bottom H Specify the range judged as OK by setting [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] for Specified in
the measured bottom H. [Length Unit]
Average H Specify the range judged as OK by setting [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] for Specified in
the measured average H. [Length Unit]
Peak-to-Peak Height H Specify the range judged as OK by setting [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] for Specified in
the measured peak-to-peak height H. [Length Unit]
Area Specify the range of the concave/convex area judged as OK by setting mm2
Volume Specify the range of the concave/convex volume judged as OK by setting mm3
5-76 LJ-X UM_GB

Area
Area
What is [Area] Measurement?

The taken image is binarized (black and white) and the area of "white" or "black" is measured.

When Measured With the Following Conditions:
• Measurement color: Black
Measurement area
Work to be measured
Measure the area of the
white (or black) pixel.
Area
70,000 (Pixel)
Functions
LJ-X UM_GB 5-77

Area
Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.
2
 Add a tool (page 3-24)
3
> >
4
Measurement target image selection
If using the LJ-X Series head or the LJ-V Series
luminance output head, select either a height
image or a grayscale image as the image to be
measured.

18) 5
Functions

reference image.

3 Set height extraction (page 5-6) and image enhance.

Reference
• When the measurement target is a grayscale image, the height extraction is unnecessary.
• For the filters that can be set in image enhance, see “Pre-processing filter for contrast images” (page A-95).
4 Set the threshold for binary.

5-78 LJ-X UM_GB

Area

Detection Color For images converted to binary, select whether to measure the [White] or [Black] area.

Area Specify the range of the area to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Functions
LJ-X UM_GB 5-79

Pattern Search
Pattern Search
What is [Pattern Search]?

Find the most similar part to the image pattern registered in advance, and output the position, inclination and
correlation value of the detected object.

During pattern registration • Label Order: X > Y Ascending
• Judged Label: 0
During pattern Tilt angle
registration (0,0) -30°
LJ Pattern Region X
Match %
Detection point 98
L
LJ J
It can be specified
arbitrarily. Y
Detect position
Functions
LJ
L J LJ X:320、Y:360
LJ Registered pattern
Number of detection
3
During operation
Origin
(0,0)
X
Tilt angle
Search area
L
Y
LJ J
L J LJ
LJ
5-80 LJ-X UM_GB

Pattern Search
Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.

2
> >
3
4
 Measurement target image selection
If using the LJ-X series head or the LJ-V series
measured.

18)
Functions
5
reference image.
2 Set the search region and pattern region.

Set the detection range (search range) from the
model image registered in the pattern region and the model image (pattern region) to detect.

Reference

LJ-X UM_GB 5-81

Pattern Search

Angle Range Specify the angle range when the search target is tilted with ±. The smaller the angle range, the
shorter the processing time.
Reference
The smaller the angle range is, the shorter the processing time.
Detection Count Specify the maximum number of patterns to be detected. Set this option to detect the count and
position of multiple identical patterns on the screen.
Search Sensitivity It is an item related to pattern detection. Increases "search sensitivity" when a miss search occurs
(detects a different location than the subject being searched). Increasing "search sensitivity" will
improve the stability of the detection, but the processing time will be longer.
Reference
When the [Search Sensitivity] level is set higher, the detection stability improves, however, the
processing time also increases.
Accuracy This is an item related to detection accuracy. If you want to increase the detection accuracy, make
the "search accuracy" finer. Fining "search accuracy" will improve the stability of the detection, but
the processing time will be longer.
Reference
Functions
The higher the [Accuracy] level is, the more detection accuracy improves, however, the processing
time also increases.
Min. Match % The [Match %] shows how close to the registered pattern the target is.
The pattern with a lower correlation value than [Min. Match%] is excluded from the patterns to be
measured. This function is useful to prevent false detections.
Reference
Check the variation range of the correlation value of the quality images and set a lower correlation
value. When the value is lowered too much, the number of erroneous detections increases.
Large Area Search Select this option when the pattern region is set to wide.
Mode • Disabled: Wide Search Mode not used.
• Mode 1: If the region size exceeds a width of 2,432 pixels and/or a height of 2,050 pixels, this
mode must be selected.
• Mode 2: If the region size exceeds a width of 4,096 pixels and/or a height of 4,096 pixels, this
mode must be selected.
Label Order Selects how numbers are assigned to numerous detected patterns.
• Y>X Ascending: Sort by Y coordinate in ascending order. If Y coordinates are close in range,
they are sorted by X coordinate in ascending order.
• X>Y Ascending: Sort by X coordinate in ascending order. If X coordinates are close in range,
they are sorted by Y coordinate in ascending order.
• X Ascending: Sort by X coordinate in ascending order.
• X Descending: Sort by X coordinate in descending order.
• Y Ascending: Sort by Y coordinate in ascending order.
• Y Descending: Sort by Y coordinate in descending order.
• Match% Ascending: Sort by correlation values in ascending order.
• Match% Descend: Sort by correlation values in descending order.
• Clockwise: Sort the patterns clockwise setting the reference angle as the start angle from the
region center.
• Counterclockwise: Sort the patterns counterclockwise setting the reference angle as the start
angle from the region center.
Standard Angle Specify the angle at which the sorting begins when "Clockwise" or "Counterclockwise" is selected in
the Label Order setting.
Judgment Label Specifies the pattern for the judged target. Specifies the pattern number (0 to 98) of the pattern to be
judged. Only the pattern of numbers specified here is subject to determination.
5-82 LJ-X UM_GB

Pattern Search

Count Specify the range of the number of detected items to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower
limit".
Position Specify the range of X coordinate/Y coordinate to be determined as OK with "Upper limit" or "Lower
limit".
Angle Specify the range of detection angle to be determined as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
The specifiable angular range is -180.000 ° to 180.000 °.
Match % Specify the range of the correlation value to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" or "Lower limit".
Functions
LJ-X UM_GB 5-83

ShapeTrax3
ShapeTrax3
What is [ShapeTrax3] Measurement?

This tool searches for the most similar parts of the input image to already registered pattern outline data, and
can measure the pattern’s position, tilt angle, and match %.

During pattern registration When Measured With the Following Conditions:
• Label Order: From top-left to bottom
During pattern registration • Judged Label: 0
Pattern Region Origin

(0,0)
X
Tilt angle
Detection point ＋30°
It can be specified arbitrarily.
Match %
Y 85
Number of detection
Functions
3
Registered pattern Detect position
X:320、Y:360
Scale
During operation 1.025
Origin
(0,0)
X
Tilt angle
Search area
Y A pattern is detected
based on the registered pattern,
even if there is a flaw
A pattern is detected based

on the registered pattern, even
if there is an overlapping section
5-84 LJ-X UM_GB

ShapeTrax3
Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.

2
3
> >
4
measured.
 Register the reference image (page 3- 5

18)
Functions
reference image.

6
model image registered in the pattern region and
the model image (pattern region) to detect.

Reference
LJ-X UM_GB 5-85

ShapeTrax3
5 Set feature extraction conditions (page 5-89).


Angle Range Specify the angle range when the search target is tilted with ±.
Scale range Setting the size of the registered feature to 1.000, set the size fluctuation range of the search
object.
Fine Search Precision Specify fine search precision.
• Fine: Increases precision by performing an in-detail fine search.
• Fast: Select to prioritize the search speed over precision.
Light/Shade Inversion Enable to search for the target whose gradation (black and white) is inverted with respect to the
registered pattern.
Functions
Distortion Tolerance When the edge characteristics of a detection candidate are skewed from the registered pattern due
Range to the angle of view or tilting of the work piece etc., detects as edge characteristic using a fine
search if the skewing is within a specified value (pixels).
Min. Match % "A degree of correlation" is a value indicating how similar to the registered pattern. Patterns with a
degree of correlation lower than the "a degree of correlation lower limit" are excluded from
measurement candidates, which is useful when for preventing false detection. Check the variation
range of the correlation value of the quality images and set a lower correlation value. When the
value is lowered too much, the number of erroneous detections increases.
Rotation Direction This is used when you want to calculate the angle of rotation using specific characteristics of
Additional Search circumferential direction for circles, regular polygons, and other work pieces with point symmetry.
The total characteristics of the work piece are separately searched, so this is effective when the
characteristic point used to determine angle of rotation is small.
• Rotation Characteristic Region Setting: Specifies the characteristic shape which determines
angle of rotation with region. If [Enable Mask] is checked, a region can be specified to exclude
from the rotation characteristic area.
• Rotation Condition: Setting this option when a correction range has been determined for the
rotation direction allows for quick and steady angle alignment.
- All Circumference: Effective for work pieces whose shape is entirely round.
- 180° Rotation: Effective when the whole shape is oblong or an ellipse.
- Polygon: Effective for work pieces whose shape is entirely polygonal (3 to 16 vertices).
• Rotation Center Setting: When the rotation center moves, causing an error in the angle of
rotation in the search, allows for correction of the position of the center of rotation for a proper
search.
- Coordinate Specification: Sets the center of rotation by adding a specified X-offset and Y-offset
to the center coordinates of the pattern region.
- Center of Gravity: Sets the center of rotation to the position of the center of gravity of all
registered edge groupings extracted from the base image.
• Eccentricity Margin: When the center of rotation slips out due to the lens angle of view or tilt of
the work piece etc., broadens the search range up to a specified value (pixel) to stabilize
detection.
5-86 LJ-X UM_GB

ShapeTrax3

Overlap Removal When multiple search results overlap on a detection target, removes from the candidate based on
the degree to which the areas of the detection candidates overlap.
• Removal Target: When multiple search results overlap on a detection target, specifies the
standard for removal from the detection candidates.
- Non-Max. Match Candidate: Of those multiple candidates which overlap, leaves the one with
the highest match %.
- All: When multiple candidates overlap, removes all of them.
• Overlap Removal Area: When multiple search results overlap on a detection target, specifies the
degree of overlap in area between detection candidates which will be the standard for removal
from the detection candidates.
Characteristic Pixel A function which specifies a region separate from the measurement region, and selects whether to
Count include it in the detection target or not, based on the characteristics within that region. Sets
Selection characteristic features which only exist on the front of a work piece (symbols etc.); this is effective
(Detection Target for excluding rear-facing items as detection targets, and removing overlap detection by setting
Selection Conditions) around the work piece. Additionally, up to 2 detection target selection conditions can be set at a
time.
• Characteristic Pixel Region Setting: Specifies a region used to find the characteristic pixel count.
• Characteristic Extraction Condition Setting: Sets conditions for the characteristic pixel could
measurement target.
- Link to Input Characteristic: Use the parameters used in the search, as-is.
Functions
- Numeric Specification: Freely change the edge intensity lower limit. This is effective for when
the characteristic pixel count conditions are difficult to extract.
• Conditions for Leaving Detection Target: Allows for conditions to be specified on characteristic
pixel count to leave in search detection results.
- Leave Below: Leaves detection results with a characteristic pixel count lower than a specified
value. Good for removing overlap around the work piece, and other times when there are no
characteristic features.
- Leave Above: Leaves detection results with a characteristic pixel count above a specified
value. Good for when there are characteristic features.
Surrounding Removal • Surrounding Removal Distance:When search results overlap one detection target, specify the
Settings range (number of pixels) from the center of the circumscribed rectangle of the registered feature
(fine) to exclude from the detection candidate. Candidates who meet AND criteria for other
nearby exclusion settings are excluded.
• Surrounding Removal Angle:When search results overlap one detection target, specify the range
to be excluded from detection candidates by using an angle centered on the detection target
angle (reference angle). Candidates who meet AND criteria for other nearby exclusion settings
are excluded.
• Surrounding Removal Scale:When search results overlap with one detection target, specify the
range to be excluded from detection candidates by the scale (%) based on the detection target.
Candidates who meet AND criteria for other nearby exclusion settings are excluded.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-87

ShapeTrax3

Label Order Selects how numbers are assigned to numerous detected patterns.
• Characteristic Pixel Count 1/2 Ascending: Sort by edge characteristic pixel count output based
on detection target selection conditions in ascending order.
• Characteristic Pixel Count 1/2 Descending: Sort by edge characteristic pixel count output based
on detection target selection conditions in descending order.
region center.
• From Upper Left (Left to Right): Sort by the Y coordinate of the detected points in ascending
order. Those whose Y coordinates are close in range are treated as being in the same row and
are sorted by their X coordinates in ascending order.
• From Upper Left to Bottom: Sort by the X coordinate of the detected points in ascending order.
Those whose X coordinates are close in range are treated as being in the same column and are
sorted by their Y coordinates in ascending order.
• From Upper Right to Left: Sort by the Y coordinate of the detected points in ascending order.
Functions
Those whose Y coordinates are close in range are treated as being in the same row and are
sorted by their X coordinates in descending order.
• From Upper Right to Bottom: Sort by the X coordinate of the detected points in descending order.
• From Lower Left to Right: Sort by the Y coordinate of the detected points in descending order.
sorted by their X coordinates in ascending order.
• From Lower Left to Top: Sort by the X coordinate of the detected points in ascending order.
sorted by their Y coordinates in descending order.
• From Lower Right to Left: Sort by the Y coordinate of the detected points in descending order.
• From Lower Right to Top: Sort by the X coordinate of the detected points in descending order.
Grouping Method Specifies a range to be considered to be the same column or the same row regarding sorting via
label order.
• Pattern Length (Longer): The length of the long side of a bounding rectangle around the pattern
region is used as the area considered to be the same column or same row.
• Pattern Length (XY Individual): When finding the area to be considered the same row, uses the
vertical length of a bounding rectangle around the pattern region. Then, when finding the area to
be considered the same column, uses the horizontal length of a bounding rectangle around the
pattern region.
• Numeric Specification: Specifies a range to be considered to be the same column or the same
row in pixels.
Judgment label Specifies the pattern number (0 to 1999) of the pattern to be judged. Only the pattern of numbers
specified here is subject to determination.
Timeout Set the upper limit for processing time. If the processing time of the tool itself exceeds the set value (0.5
to 60 seconds) due to the state of the input image, the processing of the tool is timed out as an error, and
all outputs are set to 0.
5-88 LJ-X UM_GB

ShapeTrax3
Setting Feature Extraction Conditions

Display Feature Specify the characteristics to be displayed in the screen.
• Course: Displays course characteristics used by the course search.
• Fine: Displays fine characteristics used by the fine search.
Characteristic Specify the strength of edge characteristics used in search.
Extraction Settings • Auto: Extracts optimal edge characteristics based on the reference image and pattern region.
• Auto (Low-Contrast): Select this option when the input image has low contrast and other cases
where the search is unstable.
• Custom: Sets edge characteristic extraction conditions manually.
- Edge Intensity Min.(Registered): Edges with an intensity less than the lower limit for edge
intensity (tone change) are excluded from characteristics.
- Edge Intensity Min. (Input): Edges with an intensity less than the lower limit for edge intensity
(tone change) are excluded from characteristics.
Search Sensitivity Changes the reduction rate of the image and characteristics to specify the priority between the
search speed and stability.
• Fast: Select to prioritize the search speed.
• Normal: Select this for most situations.
• Fine: Select this when prioritizing search stability.
Functions
• Custom: Adjust the image and characteristic reduction rate of course searches and fine searches
when detection is unstable.
Course Search  Specify the compression level of the image used for the reference image and the input image in
Image Reduction Rate coarse search. 0 (shrinkage: small) to 10 (shrinkage: large)
Rough Search  Specify the degree of compression of features extracted from the reference image and the input
Characteristic image in coarse search. 0 (shrinkage: small) to 10 (shrinkage: large)
Reduction Rate
Fine Search  Specify the compression level of the reference image and the image used for the input image in fine
Image Reduction Rate search. 0 (Shrinkage: Small) to 10 (Shrinkage: Large)
Characteristic High Increase the setting when you want to capture finer characteristics. The higher the settings, the
Precision longer the search will take, so choose a setting with an allowable processing speed. Selecting
[Auto] will maintain stability while also achieving fast processing.
Large Area Search If this option is enabled, wide search mode will be used. If the search region size or pattern region
Mode (including rotation characteristic region) exceeds a width of 2,432 pixels and/or a height of 2,050
pixels, this mode must be selected.
Feature Drawing Tool When this option is enabled, the feature drawing tool can be used. Draws lines, circles, and other
figures, as well as edges which are automatically extracted from the reference image as
characteristics. Use this when detection is unstable, causing proper characteristics to not be
extracted from the reference image.
• For details, see "Creating feature information from contour information of graphics or images
using ShapeTrax3/ShapeTrax2 (Feature drawing tool)" (page 3-31).
• Cannot be used simultaneously with the [Eraser Tool].
Eraser tool By specifying an arbitrary point on the reference image, detected edges that are within the range can
be eliminated as noise components. This is useful for checking each characteristic noise component by
switching the course and fine characteristic display.
• In the [Size] field,Specify the size of the range to remove noise components when specifying any
location on the image.
• specify whether or not to display the coarse features used for the Coarse search and the fine
features used for the Fine search by selecting or deselecting [Coarse] and [Fine] in the [Display
Feature] field, respectively.
• Cannot be used simultaneously with the [Feature Drawing Tool].
LJ-X UM_GB 5-89

ShapeTrax3

limit".
limit".
The specifiable angular range is -180.000° to 180.000°.
Scale For the magnification of the size change relative to the registered pattern of the detected pattern,
specify the range to be determined as OK by "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Characteristic Pixel Sets the tolerance for characteristic pixel count within and outside of the pattern output based on
Count detection target selection conditions. This can be set for characteristic pixel count for detection
target selection conditions 1 and 2.
Functions
5-90 LJ-X UM_GB

PatternTrax
PatternTrax
What is [PatternTrax] Measurement?

This tool searches for similar parts using tone information that fluctuates around the boundary of image patterns
that are pre-registered and outputs the detected target’s position, inclination, and match result. It will follow even
if there are missing or overlapping measurement objects or changes in surface conditions, in order to search for
gradation variation information around the contour.

• Judged Label: 0
Search area
Origin
Pattern Region (0,0)
X
Tilt angle
Functions
Match %
Y 85
Number of detection
3
X:320、Y:360
During operation
Origin
(0,0)
X
Tilt angle
Search area
Y A pattern is detected based
on the registered pattern,

even if there is an overlapping
section
LJ-X UM_GB 5-91

PatternTrax
Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.
2
3
> >
4
measured.
5
18)
Functions

reference image.
6

Reference
5 Set feature extraction conditions (page 5-94).

Adjust this such that the appropriate characteristics are extracted, while watching the contrast view.
5-92 LJ-X UM_GB

PatternTrax


Angle Range Specify the angle range when the search target is tilted with ±.
Expand Detection If this option is enabled, if the detection point is within the search region, it will also search targets which
Region stick out up to half way of the registered pattern.
Label Order Selects the identification order of the multiple detected patterns.
Functions
region center.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-93

PatternTrax

label order.
region is used as the area considered to be the same column or same row in the XY direction.
pattern region.
row in pixels.
Light/Dark Inversion Enable to search for the target whose gradation (black and white) is inverted with respect to the
registered pattern.
Surrounding Removal When search results overlap one detection target, specify the range (number of pixels) from the
Distance center of the circumscribed rectangle of the registered feature (fine) to exclude from the detection
candidate. Candidates who meet AND criteria for other nearby exclusion settings are excluded.
Functions
Angle range When search results overlap one detection target, specify the range to be excluded from detection
candidates by using an angle centered on the detection target angle (reference angle). Candidates
who meet AND criteria for other nearby exclusion settings are excluded.
Standard Angle Select the reference angle of the proximity exclusion angle with the detection target angle as 0
degree. When excluding cases such as inversion false detection, it is possible to exclude
candidates with angles around 0 degrees and around 180 degrees inverted by selecting “0/180
degrees”.
Setting Feature Extraction Conditions

Display Feature Specify the characteristics to be displayed in the screen.
• Course: Displays course characteristics used by the course search.
Search Sensitivity Changes the reduction rate of an image to specify the priority between the search speed and
stability.
• Low: Select to prioritize the search speed.
• High: Select this when prioritizing search stability.
• Custom: Adjust the image reduction rate of course searches and fine searches when detection is
unstable.
Image Reduction Rate coarse search. 0 (reduction: small) ~ 16 (reduction: large)
Image Reduction Rate search. 0 (reduction: small) ~ 16 (reduction: large)
Angle Sensitivity Changes the angle interval width to specify the priority between rotation direction stability and
speed.
• High: Select this when prioritizing stability and precision along the circumference.
• Custom: Specifies the angle interval width with a number.
Angular Interval Width Set the size of the angle step width at the time of search execution as a numerical value. Smaller
ones increase rotational stability and accuracy, but increase processing time.
5-94 LJ-X UM_GB

PatternTrax

Accuracy Specify fine search precision.
• High: Select this when prioritizing precision.
• Very high: Select to give precision the highest priority.
Large Area Search When enabled, use the broad search mode. This mode is required if the area size is greater than
Mode 2432px wide or 2050px high.
Optimize Automatically sets some characteristic extraction conditions such that the registered pattern will be
detected. If some unintended characteristics are extracted, remove the check and perform settings
manually.
Noise Removal Ignore gradation fluctuation below the specified gradation.
Gain Set the gain to emphasize the extracted tone fluctuation. If the gradation variation is small, increase
the value.
Characteristic Specify the size of gradation variation to be extracted. Increase the value to extract gradual
Extraction Size gradation variation.
Deformation Margin Set the size at which the contour you want to extract changes in proportion to the feature extraction
size. If the outline deviates from the registered pattern due to the angle of view or work inclination,
etc., increase the value.
Detection Mark Sets the mark to display on the position that was detected. It does not affect the measured value.
Functions
Eraser tool When this option is turned on, the eraser tool can be set. By specifying any part of the reference
image, it is possible to remove tone fluctuation within the range.

limit".
limit".
Match % Specify the range of the correlation value to be judged as OK with “Upper limit” or “Lower limit”.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-95

Edge Position
Edge Position
What is [Edge Position] Measurement?

Detects an edge (X or Y direction) in the measurement area and outputs the position.
Measurement Image When the measurement region is a ring

When the measurement region is a rectangle • Judged Label: 0
• Judged Label: 0 • Detection Direction: (Counter clockwise)
• Detection Direction: → • Edge Direction: Dark to light
• Edge Direction: Light to dark
Detected edge
Detected edge Measurement area
Starting Angle
Work to be measured It can be specified arbitrarily.
Measurement area Tilt angle

Functions
Work to be measured
• Judged Label: 1
• Detection Direction: → Measurement Sample
Detected edge • Judged Label: 1
Measurement area • Detection Direction:→
(0,0)
X
Work to be measured
When the measurement region is an arc Detect position

X:560、Y:480
When Measured With the Following Conditions: Y
• Judged Label: 0 Number of edges

• Detection Direction: (Clockwise) 3
Work to be measured When the measurement region is an arc
Detected edge When Measured With the Following Conditions:
• Judged Label: 0
Tilt angle • Detection Direction: (Clockwise)
Measurement area
Edge
1
Distance
+60°
Angle
+240°
5-96 LJ-X UM_GB

Edge Position
Flow of Settings
1 Prepare tool.

2
> >
3
4
measured.

18) 5
Functions
reference image.


Reference

LJ-X UM_GB 5-97

Edge Position

Scan Direction Specify the direction for scanning for the edge within the measurement region.
Edge Direction Specify the light level change for edge detection. Select from "bright->dark", "dark->bright", or
"both".
Starting Angle When "Circle" is selected in the measurement area, specify the position to start the edge scan. The
setting range is 0° to 359.999°.
Edge Sensitivity Sets the percentage of waveform peak to be recognized as an edge when the largest change in
gradation is 100%. Peaks of waveforms below this edge sensitivity are not recognized as edges,
which is useful for ignoring noise.
Edge Filter Width Edge strength waveform can be averaged. When a noise component causes false edge detections,
increasing the filter width can reduce the false detections.
Lower Edge Intensity Sets the lower limit for recognizing edges. Edges below the lower limit are not detected. It may be
possible to exclude noisy edges by adjusting the upper and lower edge intensity values based on
the highest edge intensity shown on the left of the edge graph.
Max. Edge Count Specify the maximum number of edges to detect. Set when there are multiple edges in the
measurement area and you want to detect their number and position.
Judged Label Specify the edge number to be judged. The edge numbers are numbered from 0 in the detection
Functions
order according to the detection direction (if the specified judgment label is not detected, the
measurement result of the judgment label will be 0).
Angled Edge Set "ON" to stabilize the operation of detecting an oblique edge with respect to the measurement
Detection area. If "ON" in the normal state, it may affect the measurement accuracy.

Edge Count Specify the range of the number of edges to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Position Specify the range of edge position (X or Y) to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" or "Lower limit".
The specifiable angular range is 0.000° to 360.000°.
5-98 LJ-X UM_GB

Edge Angle
Edge Angle
What is [Edge Angle] Measurement?

Set two segments in the measurement area, and measure the tilt angle from the edge detected in each segment.

When the detection angle is [+ 75°] • Edge Direction: Both
Segments
Detect position
(Midpoint of Detection edge)
Measurement area Angle

Tilt angle +75°
Work to be measured
Edges detected
Functions
When the detection angle is [- 20°]
Measurement area
Edges detected
Tilt angle
Segments
Detect position
(Midpoint of Detection edge)
Work to be measured
LJ-X UM_GB 5-99

Edge Angle
Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.

2
> >
3
4
measured.

18) 5
Functions

reference image.

Lay out measurement region to surround the desired measurement area.

Reference

5-100 LJ-X UM_GB

Edge Angle

Edge Settings Select "Individual" to specify the edge detection condition for each segment, or "Common" to use a
common edge detection condition. Select "Individual" to measure workpieces with different
detection states for each segment. Since edge detection conditions can be specified in segment
units, edge detection may be stable and accuracy may increase.
Edge Selection Make settings for the setting items in "Detection conditions" with "1st edge" selected, then select
"2nd edge" and perform the same setting.
• Forward: Detects in the direction of the angle of rotation of a rotated rectangle.
• Reverse: Detects in the opposite direction of the angle of rotation of a rotated rectangle.
Edge Direction Specify the light level change for edge detection. Select from "bright->dark", "dark->bright", or
"both".
Specified edge If multiple edges are detected, specify which edge is to be judged. Edge numbers are assigned in
the order specified in the detection direction. When a negative (minus) number is specified,
numbers are assigned from the direction opposite to the detection direction. If it is not necessary,
there is no need to set it.
Functions
Lower Edge Sets the lower limit for recognizing edges. Edges below the lower limit are not detected. It may be
Sensitivity possible to exclude noisy edges by adjusting the upper and lower edge intensity values based on

Edge Count Specify the range of the edge count judged as OK by setting [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit]. Of the
1st and 2nd edges, outputs the outputs the one with fewer detected edges.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-101

Edge Width
Edge Width
What is [Edge Width] Measurement?

It detects two edges in the measurement area and measures the width between the edges.
Measurement Image • When selected mode is [Specified Edge] (Example: 3→4)
When the measurement region is a rectangle/ Measure the edge angle

(1)(2)
rotated rectangle
(0) (3) (4) (5)
• When selected mode is [Outer Gap] Measurement area

Measure the edge width Work to be measured
Measurement area Measurement Sample

Work to be measured
Functions
• When selected mode is [Inner Gap] • Mode Select: Specified Edges

Measure the edge width • Detection Direction:→
• Edge Direction: Both
• Edge 1: 1
Measurement area
• Edge 2: 2
Work to be measured
Edge width
160
• When selected mode is [Specified Edge] (Example: 1→2)
Measure the edge width

(0) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(0) (1)(2) (3)(4) (5) Measurement area

Work to be measured When the measurement region is an arc
• Mode Select: Specified Edges
When the measurement region is a ring/arc
• Detection Direction: (Clockwise)
• When selected mode is [Outer Gap]
Measure the edge angle • Edge 1: 1
• Edge 2: 2
Angle
Measurement area 60°
Work to be measured (1)(2)
(0) (3)
• When selected mode is [Inner Gap]

Measure the edge angle
Measurement area
Work to be measured
5-102 LJ-X UM_GB

Edge Width
Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.

2
> >
3
4
measured.

18)
5
Functions
reference image.


Reference

LJ-X UM_GB 5-103

Edge Width

Select Mode Selects a type of edge width to measure, either [Outer Gap], [Inner Gap], or [Specified Edges].
• Outer Gap: Measures the distance between the two outermost edges in the region.
• Inner Gap: Measures the distance between the two innermost edges in the region.
• Specified Edges: Measures the distance between the specified edges.
Edge direction Specify the light level change for edge detection. Select from "bright->dark", "dark->bright", or
"both".
Edge 1/Edge 2 Specify the start point of the edge width to be measured by "Edge 1" and the end point by "Edge 2".
Functions

Edge Width Specify the range of edge width to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
5-104 LJ-X UM_GB

Edge Pitch
Edge Pitch
What is [Edge Pitch] Measurement?

Outputs the distance between the odd edge and the even edge of multiple detected edges in the measurement
area (gap pitch) and the distance between the centers of the gap pitch (center pitch). If there are multiple
pitches, the maximum and minimum values, and the average value can also be measured.
• Example of gap pitch measurement When Measured With the Following Conditions:
Gap pitch • Mode Select: Gap Pitch
• Detection Direction:→
Detected edge
Measurement area
Functions
Work to be measured Pitch width
Maximum value: 200
• Example of center pitch measurement Minimum value: 180
Average value: 190
Center pitch

Detected edge When Measured With the Following Conditions:
Measurement area • Mode Select: Center Pitch
• Detection Direction: (Counter clockwise)
Work to be measured • Edge Direction: Both
Pitch width angle
When the measurement region is a ring/arc Maximum value: 47°
• Example of gap pitch measurement Minimum value: 44°
Average value: 45°
Gap pitch
Number of pitch
Detected edge 4
Measurement area
Work to be measured
• Example of center pitch measurement
Center pitch
Detected edge
Measurement area
Work to be measured
LJ-X UM_GB 5-105

Edge Pitch
Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.

2
> >
3
4
measured.

18) 5
Functions

reference image.


Reference

5-106 LJ-X UM_GB

Edge Pitch

Select Mode Select a type of edge pitch to measure, either [Center Pitch] or [Gap Pitch].
• Center Pitch: Measures the pitch between centers of the gap pitches and finds the maximum,
minimum and average values.
• Gap Pitch: Measures the maximum, minimum, and average values of the distances between
each odd and even nth edge.
"both".
First edge Specifies the direction of the tone variation of the first edge to be detected.
Functions
Max. Pitch Count Set the maximum number of pitches to be measured.

Count Specify the range of the number of pitches to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Pitch Specify the range of the pitch to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
LJ-X UM_GB 5-107

Edge Pairs
Edge Pairs
What is [Edge Pairs] Measurement?

Detects two edges (edge pairs) in the measurement area and measures the width between the edges. By
setting edge scan conditions and having multiple edge pairs, more optimal detection of the measurement target
can be performed.

When the measurement region is a rectangle/ When the measurement region is a rectangle
rotated rectangle Example 1: When an edge pitch is measured under the
• Example of pair pitch measurement following conditions
• Mode Select: Pair Pitch
Measuring pair width
• Detection Direction (1st scan): →
• Detection Direction (2nd scan): →
Detected edge • Edge Direction (1st scan): Light to dark
• Edge Direction (2nd scan): Dark to light
Measurement area
Functions
• Pair Pitch Upper Limit: 99,999.999

Work to be measured • Pair Pitch Lower Limit: 0050.000
Pair width
Measuring pair width Maximum value: 100
Minimum value: 70
Detected edge
Average value: 80
Pair number
Measurement area 4
Work to be measured Reference
• Example of center pitch measurement The central pin is below the pair pitch lower limit and is therefore
excluded from the search.
Measuring pair width
Example 2: When a center pitch is measured under the

Detected edge following conditions
• Mode Select: Center Pitch
Measurement area
• Detection Direction (1st scan): →
Work to be measured • Detection Direction (2nd scan): →
• Edge Direction (1st scan): Light to dark
When the measurement region is a ring/arc • Edge Direction (2nd scan): Dark to light
• Example of pair pitch measurement • Pair Pitch Upper Limit: 99,999.999
Measuring pair width • Pair Pitch Lower Limit: 0050.000
Pair width
Detected edge Maximum value: 120
Minimum value: 100
Average value: 110
Measurement area
Pair number
Work to be measured 3
• Example of center pitch measurement

Reference
Measuring pair width The central pin is below the pair pitch lower limit and is therefore
excluded from the search.
Detected edge
Measurement area
Work to be measured
5-108 LJ-X UM_GB

Edge Pairs
Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.

2
> >
3
4
measured.

18)
Functions
reference image.

3 Set height extraction (page 5-6) and image

enhance.
Reference

LJ-X UM_GB 5-109

Edge Pairs

Mode Select Select a type of pair edges to measure, either [Pair Pitch] or [Center Pitch].
• Pair Pitch: Detects the edge in the specified detection direction and measures the maximum,
minimum and average values of the distances from the odd-numbered to even-numbered edge.
• Center Pitch: Measures the pitch between centers of the gap pitches and finds the maximum,
minimum and average values.
Scan Select Select which edge detection condition to set, "1st scan" or "2nd scan".
Detection Direction Specify the direction for scanning for the edge within the measurement region.
"both".
Skip edges Specifies the number of edges to skip using the number of edges from the start point of scan.
Lower Edge Intensity Edge strength waveform can be averaged. When a noise component causes false edge detections,
Functions

Edge Intensity Min. Sets the lower limit for recognizing edges. Edges below the lower limit are not detected. It may be
Pair Pitch Specify the pitch upper limit value and lower limit value of the pair to be detected. If the pair's pitch
Upper Limit/Lower is larger than the specified upper limit or smaller than the lower limit, it is not detected as a pair.
Limit
Max. count Specify the maximum number of pairs to measure.
Judged Label Select "All" to make judgments by measuring the maximum and minimum values for all pairs. To
make a judgment on a specific pair, select "Specify" and then specify the pair number to judge. The
pair that is specified here provides the measurement data for judgment in the unit.

Pair Count Specify the range of the number of pairs determined to be OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Pair Width Specify the range of the pair width to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
5-110 LJ-X UM_GB

Defect
Defect
What is [Defect] Measurement?

A location where there is a certain level of intensity difference in the measurement area is recognized as a flaw/dirt,
and the total amount (size) of the detected flaw/dirt is outputted. Contiguous segments can also be grouped to output
the number and location of defects.

When the detection direction is X, Y, or XY When defect or dirt is detected on the surface of
Segments
the work piece
• Detection Direction: XY
Defects detected
Measurement area Total defect area

Work to be measured 20
Functions
When the detection direction is along the
circumference When chipping or burring etc. is detected on the
Segments surface of the work piece
Move in the circumferential • Detection Direction: X
direction.
Measurement area
Work to be measured
Total defect area
Defects detected
55
When damage or dirt is detected on the surface of

a circular work piece
• Detection Direction: Along circumference
Total defect area

35
When a damaged or dirty position is detected on

the surface of the work piece
• Detection Direction: XY
• Grouping: ON
• Detection Count: 2
• Label Order: Y > X Ascending
First result
Defect area 70
Center position
X100、Y100
Second result
Defect area 100
Center position
X200、Y400
LJ-X UM_GB 5-111

Defect
Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.
2
3
> >
4
measured.

18)
Functions

reference image.
5

Reference

5-112 LJ-X UM_GB

Defect

Scan Direction Select the direction for scanning within the measurement region.
• X: Detects shade difference in the X direction. Select this when canceling backgrounds with a
directionality (X direction) for inspection. This is also good for detecting burrs and chipping in the
edge face of a work piece.
• Y: Detects shade difference in the Y direction. Select this when canceling backgrounds with a
directionality (Y direction) for inspection. This is also good for detecting burrs and chipping in the
edge face of a work piece.
• XY: Detects shade difference in the X and Y directions. Select this when inspecting a uniform
face of the front of a work piece etc.
• Circumference: Detects circumferential shade difference. Select this when canceling
backgrounds with a directionality (circumference direction) for inspection. This is also good for
detecting burrs and chipping in the edge face of a work piece.
• Radius: Detects radial shade difference. Select this when canceling backgrounds with a
directionality (radial) for inspection. This is also good for detecting burrs and chipping in the edge
face of a work piece.
High-Speed Mode If turned ON, the inspection will speed up. When the high-speed mode is ON, the segment size and
amount of movement are set only in multiples of 4.
Functions
Defect Level It is a value that defines the "intensity" to be detected as dirt, foreign matter, or defect. Useful for
separating detection target and background noise. Adjust so that only the detected objects are
displayed while viewing the contrast view.
Individual Turn on to set segment settings by detection direction. Segments and movement amounts can be set
independently for X and Y (in the case of a circumference or arc, the circumference and radial direction,
respectively).
Segment Size Set the size of the segment to scan in the measurement area. The current segment size is
displayed with an orange border at the top left of the screen.
Comparison To increase the sensitivity to gradual gradient changes, select "Manual" and change the detailed
settings. In defect measurements, it may be difficult to detect a slight change, such as an overall
discoloration, usually because the difference in concentration between approaching segments is
detected as an injury. In such a case, increase the amount of injury by changing the settings of
"travel distance" and "comparison segment interval" to detect intensity differences at more distant
locations.
Element Shift Specify the amount of movement when calculating the average concentration of a segment. By
increasing the size, a wider range of average intensity can be calculated.
Compare Element Specifies the interval between segments to compare the concentration difference. By enlarging the
distance, the more distant segments will be compared.
Gain Specifies the gain on shade difference for defect detection. Set the gain value high when detecting
defects with a low contrast difference.
Grouping When ON, adjacent injuries can be grouped and treated, and the injury area and the center of
gravity can be detected for each group.
Detection count Specify the maximum number of injury groups to be detected.
Fill holes When the burial is turned on, the group interior will be buried as a detection wound.
Active border Exclude groups that exist on the border of the measurement area as targets for detection. When
ON, the background can become easier to ignore relative to the measurement area.
Defect The amount of injury larger than the specified upper limit or smaller than the lower limit will not be
detected as an injury group.
Roundness Injury groups whose circularity is greater than the specified upper limit (shape is close to a true
circle) or smaller than the lower limit are not detected as injury groups.
Major Axis Injury groups whose spindle length is greater than the specified upper limit or smaller than the lower
limit will not be detected as injury groups.
Aspect Ratio (Major/ Injury groups whose degree of acicular is greater than the specified upper limit (shape is elongated)
Minor) or smaller than the lower limit are not detected as injury groups.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-113

Defect

Equivalent Oval Major Injury groups with an elliptical spindle length greater than the specified upper limit or smaller than
axis the lower limit are not detected as injury groups.
Equivalent Oval Injury groups with a larger equivalent oval spindle/secondary axis ratio than the specified upper limit
Aspect ratio value (the equivalent oval is elongated) or smaller than the lower limit value are not detected as
injury groups.
Detection Order Selects how numbers are assigned to numerous detected groupings.
• Y > X Ascending: Sort by Y coordinate in ascending order. If Y coordinates are close in range,
• X > Y Ascending: Sort by X coordinate in ascending order. If X coordinates are close in range,
• Defect Ascending: Sort by defect size in ascending order.
• Defect Descending: Sort by defect size in descending order.
• Clockwise: Sorts clockwise based on measurement region.
• Counterclockwise: Sorts counter-clockwise based on measurement region.
• Perimeter → Center: Sorts from far away to the center of the measurement region.
• Center → Perimeter: Sorts from the center to far away from the measurement region.
Functions
Judged Label Specify the judgment target from the detected multiple groups.

Total Area Specify the total amount of injury (total of the amount of injury in the measurement area) to be
Groups Specify the range of the number of groups to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Defect Area Specify the amount of injury to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Center of Gravity Specify the range of the barycentric position (X/Y) of the injury group specified by the judgment
label to judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit". The positional coordinates (pixel count)
of the segment that has the largest defect level can be assigned to the calculation.
5-114 LJ-X UM_GB

Blob
Blob
What is [Blob] Measurement?

A grouping of "white" or "black" of a binarized (black and white) image is called a "blob". This tool can measure
feature quantities such as the number and area of blobs, and the center of gravity position.

Assigns label numbers to blobs starting with the one with When Measured With the Following Conditions:
the largest area, and uses these for measurement/ • Detection Order: Y > X Ascend
detection. • Label Selection: 2
Label count
(0) (2) (0) (1) 5
Blob detected
(3) (2)
Measurement target blob
(4) (1) Measurement area (3) (4) Center position X:600, Y:460
Area: 20,000
Work to be measured Circular: 0.85
Functions
LJ-X UM_GB 5-115

Blob
Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.

2
> >
3
4
measured.

18) 5
Functions

reference image.

Lay out measurement region to surround the 6

enhance.
Reference
4 Set the conditions for binary conversion.

5-116 LJ-X UM_GB

Blob

Detection color For images converted to binary, select whether to measure the [White] or [Black] area.
Detection count Specify the maximum number of blobs to be detected.
Area Filter Blobs smaller than the specified lower limit will not be detected. Increase the value to count
(Lower Limit) unwanted noise components.
Fill holes Fill the inside of the blob with the detection color. When this option is turned on, the inside of the
blob is filled and then the area and positional coordinates are calculated.
Active border Excludes blobs on the border of the measurement area from measurement. When ON, the
background can become easier to ignore relative to the measurement area.
Angle Range Specify the range of the major angle to be measured.
• 180°: Measures from -89.999° to 90.000°.
• 360°: Measures from -179.999° to 180.000°.
• OFF: Always measures with 0 (degrees) without measuring the major angle.
Major Axis Length/ Check to detect a circumscribed rectangle parallel to the main axis. In addition, measurement
Minor Axis Length results and judgment conditions, "spindle length", "second axis length" and "needle degree
Measurement (spindle/second axis ratio)" of filter setting become effective.
Equivalent Ellipse If checked, detects equivalent ellipses. In addition, measurement results and judgment conditions,
Functions
Major Axis Length/ "equivalent elliptical main axis length", "equivalent elliptical sub axis length", and "equivalent elliptic
Minor Axis Length main axis/second axis ratio" of filter setting become effective.
Measurement
Label Order Selects how the multiple detected blobs are numbered.
• Area Ascending: Sort by area in ascending order.
• Area Descend: Sort by area in descending order.
• Roundness Ascending: Sort by roundness in ascending order.
• Roundness Descend: Sort by roundness in descending order.
• Clockwise: Sort blobs clockwise beginning from the [Starting Angle].
• Counterclockwise: Sort blobs counterclockwise beginning from the [Starting Angle].
Standard Angle Specifies the start angle for blob numbering when the label order is "clockwise" or
"counterclockwise".
Judgment Label Specifies the blob to be judged.
• Specified: Select [Specified] for [Primary Target] and then specify the No. of the blob used in
judgment. Only the blob that is specified here becomes the target of judgment.
• All: The maximum and minimum values among all the labels are to be judged.
Area When the area of a cluster is larger than the specified Upper Limit or smaller than the Lower Limit, the
cluster is not detected as a blob.
Roundness If the degree of circularity is larger than the specified upper limit (shape is close to a perfect circle)
or smaller than the lower limit, it is not detected as a blob.
Major Axis If the spindle length is larger than the specified upper limit or smaller than the lower limit, it is not
detected as a blob.
Aspect Ratio If the needleness is greater than the specified upper limit (the shape is elongated) or smaller than
the lower limit, it is not detected as a blob.
Equivalent Oval Major If the equivalent elliptical main axis length is larger than the specified upper limit or smaller than the
axis lower limit, it is not detected as a blob.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-117

Blob

Equivalent Oval If the ratio of equivalent elliptic major axis to minor axis is larger than the specified upper limit
Aspect ratio (equivalent elliptical is thin) or smaller than the lower limit, it is not detected as a blob.

Label Count Specify the range of the number of labels judged to be OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Center of gravity Specify the range of the barycentric position (X/Y) to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower
limit".
Major Angle Specify the Rotation range of the Main shaft to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit". The
specifiable angular range is -180.000 ° to 180.000 °.
Feret Diameter Specify the range of Feret diameter (X/Y) judged to be OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Blob Perimeter Result Specify the range of perimeter to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Roundness Specify the range of circularity to be judged as OK by "Upper limit" and "Lower limit". -The
"roundness" sets the true circle to 1.000 and approaches 0.000 as it gets farther from the shape of
the true circle.
Major Axis Specify the range of spindle length to be determined as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Functions
Minor Axis Specify the range of minor axis length to be determined as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Aspect Ratio (Major Specify the range of needle degree to be judged as OK by "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Axis/Minor Axis)
Equivalent Oval Major Specify the range of equivalent elliptical spindle length to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and
axis "Lower limit".
Equivalent Oval Minor Specify the range of equivalent elliptical sub-axis length to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and
axis "Lower limit".
Equivalent Oval Specify the range of the equivalent elliptic principal axis/minor axis ratio to be judged as OK with
Aspect ratio "Upper limit" or "Lower limit".
5-118 LJ-X UM_GB

Grayscale Blob
Grayscale Blob
What is [Grayscale Blob] Measurement?

Clusters having a shade difference a certain level above a standard shade level are detected as blobs. Blob
count, surface area, center of gravity, volume, light/dark and other information can be measured.
With the shading blob tool, clusters having a shade difference a certain level above a specified standard shade
level are called [Blobs]. While the Blob Tool deals with [White] or [Black] clusters as [Blobs] in images which are
converted to binary (black and white), the Shading Blob Tool can use 256 tones of shading data when
processing grayscale images. Blob shade and volume (integrated value of shade) can also be measured as
characteristics from light/shade data, so damage or dirt can be judged using the blob’s darkness. Additionally,
because measurement uses the difference from the standard shade level, even if the overall brightness
fluctuates, it will not greatly affect the difference. As such, this sort of condition gives added stability to
measurements over the Blob Tool which uses binary.

In shading blob measurement, the measurement segment When Measured With the Following Conditions:
Functions
moves a set amount within the measurement region in the • Detection Order: Y > X Ascend
specified detection direction and measures the average • Label Selection: 2
shade in each segment. The values measured are treated
Light blob: (0), (2), (4)
as the [Shade] for that segment. Dark blob: (1), (3)
(0) (1)
(2) Number of labels: 5
Segment size
(3)
(4) Center position X:600, Y:4
Segment Area: 20,000
size Circular: 0.85
Movement direction
Amount of movement
The difference between the shade of each segment and

the standard shade level is called the [Light/Shade Level]
and segment sets whose light/shade level exceeds a set
threshold are detected as blobs.
Point
When segment sets which exceed the threshold are in contact on the
bright side and dark side, they are detected as one blob. To avoid this,
they must be individually detected by specifying the detection target as
either [Bright] or [Dark], or the detection threshold must be set high, to
prevent contact.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-119

Grayscale Blob
Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.
2
 Add a tool
3
> >
4
 Measurement target image
selection
If using the LJ-X series head or the LJ-V
series luminance output head, select either
a height image or a grayscale image as the
image to be measured.
 Register the reference image

Functions

reference image.

6

7
enhance.
Reference
• When the measurement target is a grayscale image, the

height extraction is unnecessary.
• For the filters that can be set in image enhance, see “Pre-
processing filter for contrast images” (page A-95).
5 Set segment operation (page 5-121).
5-120 LJ-X UM_GB

Grayscale Blob
6 Set conditions for the blob to be detected

(page 5-122).


Detection target Selects which characteristics to use as the detection target between [Bright] and [Dark].
• Bright: Of those segments with a shade that is brighter (larger) than the standard shade level,
segments whose light/shade level exceeds the threshold are the detection targets.
• Dark: Of those segments with a shade that is darker (smaller) than the standard shade level,
segments whose light/shade level exceeds the threshold are the detection targets.
• Both: Segments whose light/shade level exceeds the threshold are the detection targets.
• Both (Individual): Sets a detection threshold individually for both light and dark characteristics.
Standard Shade Level Selects a shade level to be used as a standard for light/shade level. Generally, this is set to be
similar to the background shade of the measurement target.
Functions
• Mean: The average of the shade in the measurement region is used as the standard shade level.
• Median: The shade located in the middle of the shade distribution is used as the standard shade
level.
• Mode: The most commonly occurring shade in the measurement region is used as the standard
shade level.
• Specified: A specified value is used as the standard shade level.
• Extraction Plane: The shade value equivalent to the height of the extraction plane is used as the
standard shade level. Height from the extraction plane is equivalent to the light/shade level.
Detection Threshold Specifies the lower limit for light/shade level to be detected as a blob in the range of 0 to 254.
Segment clusters whose light/shade level exceeds this threshold will be detected as blobs.
Convert Volume to Outputs volume in actual size by converting the light/shade level (height) and X/Y dimensions to
Actual Size actual size (mm).
Setting Segment Operation

High-Speed Mode Turning this ON will speed up inspection. When High-Speed Mode is ON, segment size and
movement amount can only be set in multiples of 4.
Settings per If this option is enabled, segment size and movement amount can be set individually for both X and
Directions Y directions.
Segment Size The larger the value, the greater the effect of noise reduction. However, the detected light/shade
levels may change, so adjust the values to be such that the target can be stably detected. The
current segment size is displayed in the orange outlined box in the top-left of the screen.
Segment Interval If [Auto] is selected, a recommended movement amount for the segment size will automatically be
Settings set. If [Manual] is selected, the movement amount can be freely specified.
Amount of movement The larger the value is, the less processing time it will take. However, this will reduce the detection
capacity for detailed targets so adjust this value within a range that will make measurement stable.
Typically, it is set to a value that is less than the segment size.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-121

Grayscale Blob
Setting Blob Detection Conditions

Detection count Specify the maximum number of blobs to be detected.
Area Filter Blobs smaller than the specified lower limit will not be detected. Increase the value to count
Lower Limit unwanted noise components.
Volume Filter
Does not detect blobs that are smaller than the specified lower limit.
Lower Limit
Fill holes Fill the inside of the blob with the detection color. When this option is turned on, the inside of the
blob is filled and then the area and positional coordinates are calculated.
Active border Excludes blobs on the border of the measurement area from measurement. When ON, the
background can become easier to ignore relative to the measurement area.
Angle Range Specify the range of the major angle to be measured.
• 180°: Measures from -89.999° to 90.000°.
• 360°: Measures from -179.999° to 180.000°.
• OFF: Always measures with 0 (degrees) without measuring the major angle.
Volume/Shade Level If this option is enabled, it will measure the volume and light/shade level. Additionally, [Volume],
Measurement [Average Light/Shade Level] and [Max. Light/Shade Level] of measurement result, judgment
condition, and filter settings will be enabled.
Functions
Major Axis Length/ Check to detect a circumscribed rectangle parallel to the main axis. In addition, measurement
Minor Axis Length results and judgment conditions, "spindle length", "second axis length" and "needle degree
Measurement (spindle/second axis ratio)" of filter setting become effective.
Equivalent Ellipse If checked, detects equivalent ellipses. In addition, measurement results and judgment conditions,
Major Axis Length/ "equivalent elliptical main axis length", "equivalent elliptical sub axis length", and "equivalent elliptic
Minor Axis Length main axis/second axis ratio" of filter setting become effective.
Measurement
Label Order Selects how the multiple detected blobs are numbered.
• Area Ascending: Sort by area in ascending order.
• Area Descend: Sort by area in descending order.
• Roundness Ascending: Sort by roundness in ascending order.
• Roundness Descend: Sort by roundness in descending order.
• Clockwise: Sort blobs clockwise beginning from the [Starting Angle].
• Counterclockwise: Sort blobs counterclockwise beginning from the [Starting Angle].
• Volume Ascending: Sort by volume in ascending order.
• Volume Descending: Sort by volume in descending order.
• Average Shade Level Ascending: Sort by average shade level in ascending order.
• Average Shade Level Descending: Sort by average shade level in descending order.
• Max. Shade Level Ascending: Sort by maximum shade level in ascending order.
• Max. Shade Level Descending: Sort by maximum shade level in descending order.
Standard Angle Specifies the start angle for blob numbering when the label order is "clockwise" or
"counterclockwise".
Judgment Label Specifies the blob to be judged.
• Specified: Select [Specified] for [Primary Target] and then specify the No. of the blob used in
judgment. Only the blob that is specified here becomes the target of judgment.
• All: The maximum and minimum values among all the labels are to be judged.
5-122 LJ-X UM_GB

Grayscale Blob

Area When the area of a cluster is larger than the specified Upper Limit or smaller than the Lower Limit, the
cluster is not detected as a blob.
Volume When the volume of a cluster is larger than the specified Upper Limit or smaller than the Lower
Limit, the cluster is not detected as a blob.
Average Shade Level When the average shade level of a cluster is larger than the specified Upper Limit or smaller than
the Lower Limit, the cluster is not detected as a blob.
Max. Shade Level When the maximum shade level of a cluster is larger than the specified Upper Limit or smaller than
the Lower Limit, the cluster is not detected as a blob.
Roundness If the degree of circularity is larger than the specified upper limit (shape is close to a perfect circle)
or smaller than the lower limit, it is not detected as a blob.
Major Axis If the spindle length is larger than the specified upper limit or smaller than the lower limit, it is not
detected as a blob.
Aspect Ratio If the needleness is greater than the specified upper limit (the shape is elongated) or smaller than
the lower limit, it is not detected as a blob.
Equivalent Oval Major If the equivalent elliptical main axis length is larger than the specified upper limit or smaller than the
axis lower limit, it is not detected as a blob.
Equivalent Oval If the ratio of equivalent elliptic major axis to minor axis is larger than the specified upper limit
Aspect ratio (equivalent elliptical is thin) or smaller than the lower limit, it is not detected as a blob.
Functions

Total Area Specifies the range of the total area judged as OK by setting [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Label Count Specify the range of the number of labels judged to be OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Center of gravity Specify the range of the barycentric position (X/Y) to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower
limit".
Major Angle Specify the Rotation range of the Main shaft to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit". The
Average Shade Level Specifies the range of the shade levels judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Max. Shade Level Specifies the range of maximum shade levels judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit].
Volume Specifies the range of the volume judged as OK by setting [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Feret Diameter Specify the range of Feret diameter (X/Y) judged to be OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Blob Perimeter Result Specify the range of perimeter to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Roundness Specifies the allowable roundness range to be judged as OK by setting [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit]. For [Roundness], a full circle is 1.000, and as the shape moves away from being a full circle,
the number approaches 0.000.
Major Axis Specify the range of spindle length to be determined as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Minor Axis Specify the range of minor axis length to be determined as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Aspect Ratio (Major Specify the range of needle degree to be judged as OK by "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Axis/Minor Axis)
Equivalent Oval Major Specify the range of equivalent elliptical spindle length to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and
axis "Lower limit".
Equivalent Oval Minor Specify the range of equivalent elliptical sub-axis length to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and
axis "Lower limit".
Equivalent Oval Specify the range of the equivalent elliptic principal axis/minor axis ratio to be judged as OK with
Aspect ratio "Upper limit" or "Lower limit".
LJ-X UM_GB 5-123

Profile Position
Profile Position
What is [Profile Position] Measurement?

The edges of multiple points in the measurement area are detected, the maximum point (minimum point) among
them is detected, and its position is outputted. A circle or straight line from the detected multi-point edge
information can also obtained.

When the detection direction is [→] and the trend direction is When Measured With the Following Conditions:
[↓] • Trend direction: ↓
Segment movement • Detection Direction:→
Segment size • Edge Direction: Both
Work to be measured Edge position (Max)

Detected edges (Max) 300
Functions
- Maximum segment number Trend

Trend
direction direction
Detected edges (Min) Edge position (Min)
- Minimum segment number 160
Measurement area Detection direction

Detection direction
When the measurement region is a ring/arc When Measured With the Following Conditions:
When the trend direction is clockwise • Trend direction: Clockwise
Segment movement
• Detection Direction: Perimeter → Center
Detected edges (Max)
- Maximum segment number Radius width (Max)
Detection 400
Measurement area direction
Segment size
Work to be measured
Detected edges (Min) Radius width (Min)

Trend direction Trend direction
5-124 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Position
Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.

2
> >
3
4
measured.

18)
Functions
reference image.
5

enhance.
Reference

LJ-X UM_GB 5-125

Profile Position

Trend direction Select the moving direction of the segment to detect the edge.
• Select between [↓] and [→].
• If the measurement region is a rotated rectangle, only [↓] is available (from the top side to
bottom side) and it will link with the rotation direction of the region.
Detection Direction Specify the edge scan direction in the measurement area (segment).
"both".
Segment Size Specify the size of the segment to detect the edge. The larger the size, the less subtle changes can
Functions
be detected, but less susceptible to noise.

Amount of movement Specifies how much the segment that detects the edge moves in the trend direction. Reducing the
amount of movement will increase the processing time, but more points in the same range can be
measured.
Starting Offset/ Specify the amount (angle) to offset the start segment from the start edge of the measurement area.
Max. Segment Count Specifies the maximum number of segments that can be detected. Specify that "maximum number
Judgment Label Select the segment to be determined from the maximum or minimum, numbered.
Circle/Line Detection Detects a circle or a line from the information of detected multiple edge points.
Deformation Turning this option ON reduces the noise influence during circle or line detection.
Correction
5-126 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Position

No. of detected Specify the range of the number of detected segments to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and
segments "Lower limit".
Position (Max) Specify the range of the maximum value of the detected position (X- or Y- coordinate) to be judged
as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit" (when the measurement area is "rectangle" and the trend
direction is → or ↓).
Position (Min) Specify the range of the minimum value of the detected position (X- or Y- coordinate) to be judged
as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit” (when the measurement area is “rectangle” and the trend
direction is → or ↓).
Position Specify the range of the position (X- or Y- coordinate) detected as a judgment object segment to be
judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit” (when the measurement area is “rectangle” and
the trend direction is → or ↓).
Distance (Max) Specify the range of the maximum value of the detected distance to be judged as OK with "Upper
limit" and "Lower limit" (when the measurement area is "rotational rectangle").
Distance (Min) Specify the range of the minimum value of the detected distance to be judged as OK with "Upper
limit" and "Lower limit" (when the measurement area is "rotational rectangle").
Distance Specify the range of the of the radial width detected as a judgment object segment to be judged as
OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit" (when the measurement area is "rotational rectangle").
Functions
Radius (Max.) Specify the range of the maximum value of the detected radial width to be judged as OK with
"Upper limit" and "Lower limit" (when the measurement area is "circumference/arc").
Radius (Min.) Specify the range of the minimum value of the detected radial width to be judged as OK with "Upper
limit" and "Lower limit" (when the measurement area is "circumference/arc").
Radius Specify the range of the of the radial width detected as a judgment object segment to be judged as
OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit" (when the measurement area is "circumference/arc").
Detection Line Angle Specify the range of detection angle to be determined as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Detection Circle Specify the range of the center of detected circle (X/Y) to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and
Center "Lower limit".
Circle radius/diameter Specify the range of the diameter/radius of the detected circle to be judged as OK with "Upper limit"
and "Lower limit".
LJ-X UM_GB 5-127

Profile Width
Profile Width
What is [Profile Width] Measurement?

The width between edges is measured at multiple points in the measurement area and outputted. It is
convenient because it can measure the maximum width and minimum width within a certain range at one time.

• When the detection direction is [→] and the trend direction When Measured With the Following Conditions:
is [↓] • Mode Select: Outer Gap
Segment movement • Trend direction: ↓
Segment size • Detection Direction:→
Detected edge of the width b • Edge Direction: Both
Edge detected (Maximum va
Maximum segment number
Edge Width (Max)
Trend direction 500
Functions
Width between Edge detecte

Edge Width (Min)
(Minimum value)/minimum
200
segment number
Trend direction
Measurement area
Work to be measured
Detection direction Detection direction
• When the trend direction is [Clockwise] and the selected When Measured With the Following Conditions:
mode is [Outer Gap] • Mode Select: Outer Gap
• Trend direction: Clockwise
Segment movement
• Detection Direction: Center to perimeter
Radius width to be detected
(Maximum value) /maximum • Edge Direction: Both
segment number
Work to be measured Outer dimension
Width Maximum value
100
Segment size
Radius width to be detected

(Minimum value)/minimum Minimum outer
segment number gap width
Measurement area 30
Trend direction Trend
direction
• When the trend direction is [Clockwise] and the selected The thickest part is the
mode is [Outer Diameter] Work to be measured
Segment movement
Measurement area
Maximum diameter detected/ Thinnest part of Work
maximum segment number to be measured
Segment size
Minimum diameter detected/
minimum segment number
Work to be measured
Trend direction
5-128 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Width
Measurement Sample (Continued)

When the measurement region is a ring
• Mode Select: Outer Diameter
• Trend direction: Clockwise
Maximum outer
diameter width
100
Minimum outer
diameter width
30
Trend direction
Functions
LJ-X UM_GB 5-129

Profile Width
Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.

2
> >
3
4
measured.

18)
Functions

reference image.
5

Reference

5-130 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Width

Mode Select Selects a type of edge width to measure, either [Outer Gap], [Inner Gap], [Diameter Outer Gap
(Circumference Only)], and [Diameter Inner Gap (Circumference Only)].
• Outer Gap: Measures the distance between the two outermost edges in the region.
• Inner Gap: Measures the distance between the two innermost edges in the region.
• Outer Diameter: Measures the outer diameter of the edge detected by two segments opposing in
a circle area.
• Inner Diameter: Measures the inner diameter of the edge detected by two segments opposing in
a circle area.
"both".
Functions
Lower edge width Specifies the lower limit of the edge width to be detected as a pair.
measured.
Starting Offset/ Specify the amount (angle) to offset the start segment from the start edge of the measurement area.
Judgment Label Select the segment to be determined from the maximum or minimum, numbered.
Measure Peak-to-Peak When enabled, peak-to-peak width is detected. The measurement results, "Peak to Peak Width
Width (Maximum)", "Peak to Peak Width (Minimum)", "Show Peak to Peak Width (Maximum)" and "Show
Peak to Peak Width (Minimum)" of the determination conditions are also enabled.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-131

Profile Width

Edge width (max.) Specify the range of the maximum value of the detected edge width to be judged as OK with "Upper
limit" and "Lower limit".
Edge width (min.) Specify the range of the minimum value of the detected edge width to be judged as OK with "Upper
limit" and "Lower limit".
Edge width Specify the range of the detected edge width as a judgment object segment to be judged as OK
P-P Width (Max.) Specify the range of the maximum value of a distance between detected peaks to be judged as OK
P-P Width (Min.) Specify the range of the minimum value of a distance between detected peakes to be judged as OK
Functions
5-132 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Defect
Profile Defect
What is [Profile Defect] Measurement?

A point with large variations is detected as defects (burrs/defects) from reference model lines (straight or circles,
ellipses, free curves) of contours calculated from multiple edge information.

When the standard model line in the measurement When the measurement region is a rectangle and
region is a curve the standard model is a line
Detection direction
• Standard Model Line: Straight line
Defective part • Detection Direction: ↑
• Fault Detection Direction: +
Number of defected
segments
5
Trend direction
Functions
Defect level
3.328
Amount of defects
Detection 12.285
Detection screen image direction Defect position
X：128.235、Y：54.332
Edges detected Position
point column by Trend When the standard model is a circle and the
Edge Position
measurement region is a circumference
The base model line
calculated from the Edge • Standard Model: Circle
point column • Detection Direction: From perimeter to center
Defect Level Waveform
• Fault Detection Direction: +/-
Defect detection
direction Number of defected
Detection direction
+Side segments
Defect position
Defect level X：125.432、Y：198.631
Defect threshold
Defect threshold Amount of defects
-Side Defect Amount (colored part) 11.376
Defect level
Defect position
2.149
Defect Level Waveform
Number of defected segments
4
When the standard model is an oval and the

measurement region is an arc
• Standard Model: Oval
• Fault Detection Direction: -
Detection Defect position

direction X：285.211、Y：98.631
Number of defected segments
5
Amount of defects
14.562
Defect level
5.482
LJ-X UM_GB 5-133

Profile Defect
Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.

2
> >
3
4
measured.

18)
Functions

reference image.
5

enhance.
Reference
4 Set edge detection conditions (page 5-135).
5 Set defect detection conditions (page 5-136).

5-134 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Defect
Setting Edge Detection Conditions

"both".
Functions
measured.
Starting Offset / Specify the amount (angle) to offset the start segment from the start edge of the measurement area.
Edge Intensity Specify the segment position and edge strength waveform, edge strength numerical value, segment
Waveform to be displayed on the screen of the edge detection position.
Segment No.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-135

Profile Defect
Setting Defect Detection Conditions

Standard Model Line Select a standard model line which fits the outline shape of the inspection target from [Straight Line
(Rectangle/Rotated Rectangle Region)], [Circle (Circumference/Arc Region)], [Free-Form Line],
[Oval (Circumference/Arc Region)].
• Straight Line: Uses a straight line as the standard model line.
• Circle: Uses a circle as the standard model line.
• Free-Form Line: Uses a free-form line as the standard model line.
• Oval: Uses an oval as the standard model line.
Flat Range Set if "free curve" is selected for the reference model line. When drawing a loose free curve on the
contour of the object to be measured, increase the number. When drawing a sharp free curve,
decrease the number.
Fault Detection Selects fault detection direction from [+], [-], [+/-], and [+/- (Individual)].
Direction • +: Only detects concave/convex portions in the + direction as faults ([+] is the direction going
forwards with respect to the edge detection direction; [-] is the opposite direction).
• -: Only detects concave/convex portions in the - direction as faults ([+] is the direction going
• +/-: Detects concave/convex portions in both the +/- direction as faults ([+] is the direction going
Functions
• +/- (Individual): Detects convex/concave areas in either +/- direction as faults. A level can be
specified at which a fault is detected individually for both the + direction and - direction ([+] is the
direction going forwards with respect to the edge detection direction; [-] is the opposite direction).
Detection count Specify the maximum number of defects to be detected.
Detection Threshold The distance (number of pixels) from the reference model line is defined and any excess is
detected as a defect.
Fault Level Defects with a defect level smaller than the specified lower limit are not detected as defects.
Filter Lower Limit
Fault Segment Count Defects smaller than the specified lower limit number of defect segments are not detected as
Filter Lower Limit defects.
Fault Filter Defects with the amount of defects smaller than the specified lower limit are not detected as
Lower Limit defects.
Label Order Selects how the multiple detected faults are numbered.
• Segment Ascending: Sort by segment number in ascending order.
• Segment Descending: Sort by segment number in descending order.
• Fault Level Ascending: Sort by fault level in ascending order.
• Fault Level Descending: Sort by fault level in descending order.
• Fault Segment Count Ascending: Sort by fault segment count in ascending order.
• Fault Segment Count Descending: Sort by fault segment count in descending order.
• Fault Ascending: Sort by fault in ascending order.
• Fault Descending: Sort by fault in descending order.
Judgment Label Specifies the fault to be judged.
• Specified: Only the fault with the specified number is the judgment target.
• All: Measurement is performed for max./min. on all labels, and all of these are the judgment
targets.
5-136 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Defect

Fault Count Specify the range of the number of detected injuries to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and
"Lower limit".
Total Fault Specify the range of the total amount of defects be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower
limit".
Fault Specify the range of the amount of injury of the injury specified by the judgment label to judged as
OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
Fault Position Specify the range of the barycentric position (X/Y) of the injury specified by the judgment label to
Functions
LJ-X UM_GB 5-137

Intensity
Intensity
What is [Intensity] Measurement?

Measures the average value, maximum value, minimum value, and deviation of the concentration (brightness)
in the set measurement area.
Measurement Image
When the difference between light/dark is great When the difference between light/dark is slight
Contrast inspection tool1 Contrast inspection tool1
Contrast inspection tool2 Contrast inspection tool2

Work to be measured Work to be measured
• Shading inspection tool 1 average shade: 50 • Shading inspection tool 1 average shade: 150
Functions
• Shading inspection tool 2 average shade: 200 • Shading inspection tool 2 average shade: 200
• Shade difference: 150 • Shade difference: 50
5-138 LJ-X UM_GB

Intensity
Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.
 Add a tool (page 3-24) 2

> > 3
4
measured.

18)
Functions
reference image.


Reference

LJ-X UM_GB 5-139

Intensity

Average Specify the range of the average concentration to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower
limit".
Deviation Specify the range of concentration deviation that is determined to be OK with "Upper limit" and
"Lower limit".
Shade Specify the range of the intensity (held by each pixel in the measurement area) judged as OK with
Functions
5-140 LJ-X UM_GB

OCR2
OCR2
What is [OCR2] Measurement?

By cutting out text data in the measurement region and comparing with dictionary data, strings in the image can
be identified.

• String Length (Cut Setting): 6
Measurement area
Measurement target characte
The character information in Recognized String
the Measurement area is cut AB.18E
out and recognized as a string.
Functions
Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.
2
3
> >
4
6
measured.
 Register the reference image (page 3-18)

reference image.
7
LJ-X UM_GB 5-141

OCR2

Reference
4 Select font color.

Compare the text and background colors and set which color should be recognized as a character.
• Black: Black portions will be recognized as text.
• White: White portions will be recognized as text.
5 If the measurement region is an [Arc], select a text orientation.

Set this cutout direction for strings in the region.
Functions
• Clockwise: Cuts out text within the region in a clockwise direction.

• Counterclockwise: Cuts out text within the region in a counter-clockwise direction.
6 Select [Execute Tuning].

With the settings selected in tuning target, tuning is performed, and cut-out settings are adjusted to
ensure that strings are being properly cut out. For the cases where cut-out is not performed properly,
select [Details] in block settings and set block conditions. For details on block settings, see "Setting Cut-
Out Settings" (page 5-144).
7 Check that characters are being properly recognized.

If the recognized characters are not correct, a library other than the built-in one can be registered,
allowing new character patterns to be added, and the reference characters can also be restricted to the
built-in library. For details on how to set the library, see "Editing Dictionary" (page 5-144).
8 Click .
5-142 LJ-X UM_GB

OCR2

Configure tolerance for registered string against 9
recognized content and set tolerance (lower limit)
on recognized result measurements.
When Characters are Incorrectly Recognized
Functions
• When character cut-out does not work properly, changing the cut-out method to [Projection Cut-Out] or [Fixed
Cut-Out] will allow for cutting out following the same procedure as [Character Recognition] or "OCR" (page 5-
160).
• If the recognized characters are not correct, use the dictionary to register an unrecognized character pattern,
and the unnecessary characters can also be restricted to the dictionary. (page 5-144) Further, reference
characters can be limited by character position through the character recognition restriction settings of
Judgment Conditions (page 5-146).
LJ-X UM_GB 5-143

OCR2
Setting Cut-Out Settings

Font color Compare the text and background colors and set which color should be recognized as a character.
String Direction Specifies the read direction for the string when using an arc region.
• Clockwise: Cuts out characters in a clockwise direction based on the starting angle from the
region center.
• Counter Clockwise: Cuts out characters in a counter-clockwise direction based on the ending
Recognize Lower Sets whether to cut out characters while referencing the lower-case character dictionary during
Case Letters tuning. Set this to ON when performing tuning on strings which include lower-case characters.
Block Settings Details Perform settings on cut-out processing.
When printed characters are not being cut out, try the following:
• Set [Border Removal] to OFF
• Set [Noise Width Upper Limit] and [Noise Height Upper Limit] values to be low
• Increase the [Character Count] value
• For dotted and faint characters, increase the values of [X-Direction Interpolation] and [Y-Direction
Interpolation] in [Dotted Character Settings].
Functions
Number of Characters Specifies the amount of characters for cut out from the measurement region.
Follow Zero Suppress Automatically force [Character Count] to conform to judgment string length changes via zero
suppression. Set [Character Count] to default to maximum string length using zero padding.
Block Mode Sets the [Cut-Out] processing method which splits character data into 1-character units within the
measurement region.
Editing Dictionary
Registering Characters in Dictionary

If characters cannot be properly recognized with the dictionary currently being used, add characters to be
recognized to the dictionary.
Point
• The built-in dictionary cannot be directly edited.
• Select [Dictionary No.], to specify whether to use that dictionary alongside the built-in one, or to use one over the other. For details see
"Edit/delete registered dictionary data" (page 5-145).
1 Select [Dictionary No.], then input the number of the dictionary to edit (0 to 999).
If the specified dictionary number does not exist, a new one can be created.
2 Click [Edit Dictionary].

The [Edit Dictionary] screen appears.
Point
If [Edit Dictionary] cannot be selected, [Create Dictionary] can be chosen to create a new one.
3 Select [Register].
The [Select Registration Method] screen appears.
Reference
For details on dictionary editing besides registering new characters, see "Register the character pattern
used for character recognition in the dictionary" (page A-113).
5-144 LJ-X UM_GB

OCR2
4 Select a dictionary registration method.

The following 2 dictionary registration methods can be chosen:
• Individual Registration: Performs dictionary registration by specifying each character type individually of characters to be
cut out.
• Batch Registration: Performs dictionary registration of characters to be cut out with a string all at once.
5 Perform dictionary registration through the selected registration method.

When [Individual Registration] is selected
The [Registration Character Selection] screen appears. Using the mouse, or the / keys, select the
characters to register from the screen and register them.
Repeat this process until all desired characters have been registered.
When [Batch Registration] is selected
The [Batch Registration] screen appears. Enter the characters of the currently cut-out string and register
it.
6 Once registration is complete, click [Close].

The screen returns to the [Dictionary Settings] screen.
7 Select [Close].
Functions
Edit/delete registered dictionary data
Registered dictionary data can be edited/deleted through the following process.
1 Select [Dictionary No.], input the number of the dictionary to (0 to 999), then click [Edit
Dictionary].
The [Edit Dictionary] screen appears.
2 Perform required operations.

Enable/Disable
Temporarily enables/disables the selected character pattern.
The invalid character is displayed with ×, but the data itself is not deleted, so it can be turned back later.
Delete
Deletes the selected character pattern.
Delete All
Deletes all character patterns registered in the selected dictionary number.
Built-In Dictionary Reference Settings
Internal dictionary enable/disable settings for each character type.
Delete All Built-In Dictionary Characters
Deletes all built-in dictionary characters contained in the current dictionary file.
3 Select [Close].
LJ-X UM_GB 5-145

OCR2
Setting Options

Wide Mode When enabled, the wide mode is used. This mode must be selected if the area size exceeds a
width of 2432 or a height of 2050 pixels with [Block Mode] set to [Recognition Cut-Out] and
[Inspection Region] set to [Rectangular].
Enabling this mode increases the amount of resource memory consumption.

Judgment String Input a judgment string to compare recognized content with. Letters and numbers can be entered
as a fixed string.
Calendar Advanced Performs settings for when date tolerance or zero suppression, date encoding, or calculation
Settings results are used as a judgment string.
Recognized Character Typically, in character recognition, all characters registered in a dictionary are used, however if only
Limitation Settings specific characters are being recognized, the reference characters can be limited. Limiting the
reference characters will increase processing speed, and may resolve some character mis-reading
Functions
issues.
Recognition Level [Recognition Level] is a value which indicates how similar a cut-out character is to the dictionary
Lower Limit data.
Cut-out characters which are below the [Recognition Level Lower Limit] are deemed
unrecognizable; [?] is output, and they are judged as NG.
Stability Lower Limit Stability is a value which indicates the difference in recognition level between the 1st and 2nd
candidates for the recognized character.
Specifies a lower limit for this stability minimum value. If a character is below this lower limit, they
are deemed unrecognizable; [?] is output, and they are judged as NG.
Specification Label From multiple recognized characters, characters are specified between 0 and 39 as a specification
label element in calculation.
Reference with 1D/2D Enabled when comparing the recognized string with the read data of the 1D or 2D code reader tool.
Code Read Data
Character Count Specify the range of the character count judged as OK by setting [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Zero Suppression Automatically force the upper limit and lower limit of [Character Count] to conform to judgment
Conform string length changes via zero suppression. Set the upper limit and lower limit of [Character Count]
to default to maximum string length using zero padding.
5-146 LJ-X UM_GB

1D Code Reader
1D Code Reader
What is [1D Code Reader] Measurement?

It detects 1D code information in the measurement area and reads the character string contained in the 1D
code. The scanned character string can be output to the outside, or the pass/fail judgment can be made by
comparing it with the built-in calendar. Also, it can be used for sorting etc.

• Code Type: Code39
Measurement area • Starting Digit: 1
• Data Length: 100
Target code to read • Data Splitting: ON
Detects 1D code information - Data 1: Starting Digit 9, Data Length 2
from within the Measurement
area and recognizes it as a - Data 2: Starting Digit 12, Data Length 4
character string.
Functions
Data read
KEYENCE LJ-X8000 SERIES
Split data 1 LJ
Split data 2 X8000
LJ-X UM_GB 5-147

1D Code Reader
Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.
2
> >
3

4
measured.

18)
5
Functions

reference image.
6
7

Reference
5 Configure/check the read data (page 5-150).
5-148 LJ-X UM_GB

1D Code Reader
6 When performing verification, set the judgment conditions after selecting the verification
method
(page 5-150).

Measure the image which has the proper read data, then click [Copy From Read Data]; the read string
(the string displayed in read data) can now be registered as a reference pattern.
• In the [Reference Pattern] field,Enter a pattern to match the code reading results.
Setting Detailed Conditions

Code Type Select the type of 1D code. Perform auto-tuning to automatically adjust the best settings for code
detection.
Read Direction Specifies the code reading direction.
Code Resolution Specifies the 1D module width resolution (pixels per 1 module) to read. Setting to a value that is
Functions
close to the actual read 1D code will allow for more stable detection.
Recommended values for standard code resolution (pixel) are 1.5 or more.
Detailed Code Type Specifies the code type details.
Standard Contrast Specifies the contrast information to be used when extracting code features. Select from "High",
"Slightly High", "Normal", "Slightly Low", and "Low". Lowering the value increases the possibility of
detecting even weak contrast, but noise may make detection unstable.
Print Color Selects a code color to detect (code color with respect to the background).
• None: Can detect black on a white background or white on a black background. However, this
takes longer, compared to if [Black on White] or [White on Black] are selected.
• Black on White: Can only detect black on a white background.
• White on Black: Can only detect white on a black background.
Read Digits Specify the maximum number of digits of the code to read and the minimum number of digits.
Standard Angle Specify the reference angle at code detection.
Scale Fluctuation Selects the degree of fluctuation to allow when the code size fluctuates. A smaller allowance will
allow for more stable code detection.
• Small: Allow size fluctuations of about ± 10% of size.
• Medium: Allow size fluctuations of about ± 20% of size.
• Large: Allow size fluctuations of about ± 30% of size.
• Unlimited: All size fluctuation which can be read are allowed.
Enable Check Digit When enabled, checks the check digit (check character) of decoded data.
Check Digit Specify the inspection method of check digit (check character) of decoded data.
Timeout Set the upper limit for processing time. If the processing time of the tool itself exceeds the set value
(0.01 to 60 seconds) due to the state of the input image, the tool processing will time out as an
error.
width of 2432 or a height of 2050 pixels.
After changing to this mode, perform auto-tuning again.
Also, review the filter parameters if using a pre-processing filter.
This mode cannot be used at the same time as print quality certification (Verification). To enable this
mode, set [Verification] to [OFF].
LJ-X UM_GB 5-149

1D Code Reader
Read data settings

Read Start Digit Specifies the position of the detected code at which to start reading data.
Read Data Length Specify the number of characters (Byte unit) data to read from the start position.
Data Cut-Off When enabled, the read data is partially cut out and output as cut out data. Cut data can be
Execute matched with patterns.
Output at Fixed When enabled, data is output for the number of characters set in the read data length. If the number
Length of read characters is insufficient, it is completed with the character data specified in "Completion
character (1 character)".
When Read Fails If enabled, the character data specified in "Output string" will be output when reading fails.
Output String
Symbol Identifier When enabled, a symbol identifier (3 bytes) defined by the ISO / IEC 15424 / JIS X 0530 data
Output carrier identifier (including the symbology identifier) is added to the beginning of the read data.
Verification

Verification Selects a method for print quality certification.
Overall Grade Specify the verification items to be included in the overall grade. The overall grade is the lowest
Functions
Target Selection value (grade) of the specified verification items.

Lower Limit Specify the overall grade to be judged as OK in "Lower limit". The overall grade is the lowest value
(grade) of the specified verification items.

Reference Conditions To set multiple criteria for matching, select "Multiple".
Reference Condition Up to 16 collation conditions can be set. If setting multiple collation conditions, it is possible to carry
List out collation that combines multiple arbitrary ranges of read data, and sort by result data of which
number collation condition is met. When using it for sorting, disabling "set collation result as tool
judgment target" allows collation without affecting the judgment result with non-matching result.
Reference Range When "Perform data extraction" is enabled, extraction range 1 to 8 can be specified to compare
against any range of read data.
Reference Pattern Enter a pattern to match the code reading results.
Reference Pattern Specify details as necessary for the conditions involved in matching the code reading results.
Expansion Settings
Read Data Length Specify the range of read data length to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
limit".
Detection Angle Specify the range of detection angle to be determined as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
5-150 LJ-X UM_GB

2D Code Reader
2D Code Reader
What is [2D Code Reader] Measurement?

It detects 2D code information in the measurement area and reads the character string contained in the 2D
code. The scanned character string can be output to the outside, or the pass/fail judgment can be made by
comparing it with the built-in calendar. Also, it can be used for sorting etc.

• Code Type: QR
• Starting Digit: 1
Measurement area
• Data Length: 100
• Data Splitting: ON
Target code to read
Detects 2D code information - Data 1: Starting Digit 9, Data Length 2
from within the Measurement - Data 2: Starting Digit 12, Data Length 4
area and recognizes it as a string.
Functions
Data read
KEYENCE LJ-X8000 SERIES
Split data 1 LJ
Split data 2 X8000
LJ-X UM_GB 5-151

2D Code Reader
Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.
 Add a tool (page 3-24) 2

> > 3

4
measured.

18)
5
Functions

reference image.
6
2 Set the measurement region.
7

Reference
5 Configure/check the read data (page 5-150).
5-152 LJ-X UM_GB

2D Code Reader
6 When performing print quality certification, set the judgment conditions after selecting
the print quality certification method
(page 5-150).

Measure the image which has the proper read data, then click [Copy From Read Data]; the read string
(the string displayed in read data) can now be registered as a reference pattern.
• In the [Reference Pattern] field,Enter a pattern to match the code reading results.
Setting Detailed Conditions

Code Type Select the type of 2D code. Perform auto-tuning to automatically adjust the best settings for code
detection.
When [Composite Symbol] is selected, detection conditions must be configured individually for the
2D code and 1D code portions contained in composite symbols.
Functions
Standard Code Specify the resolution (number of pixels per cell) that is the basis of the 2D code. By setting the 2D
Resolution code to be actually read and a close value, faster and more stable detection can be performed.
Standard code resolution (pixel) of 4.0 or more is recommended.
Standard Contrast Specifies the contrast information to be used when extracting code features. Select from "High",
"Slightly High", "Normal", "Slightly Low", and "Low". Lowering the value increases the possibility of
detecting even weak contrast, but noise may make detection unstable.
Cell Count Select the number of vertical and horizontal cells of the 2D code to be detected. When "Not
specified", the code can be detected regardless of the number of cells, but processing time will
increase.
Print Color Selects a code color to detect (code color with respect to the background).
• None: Can detect black on a white background or white on a black background. However, this
takes longer, compared to if [Black on White] or [White on Black] are selected.
• Black on White: Can only detect black on a white background.
• White on Black: Can only detect white on a black background.
Mirror Reflection The internal processing is switched so that it can correspond to the code which is inverted by the
passage direction and the direction of the work and is picked up.
• None: Can detect normal codes as well as mirrored codes. However, this takes longer,
compared to if [Not Inverted] or [Inverted] are selected.
• Not Inverted: Can only detect normal codes (cannot detect mirrored codes).
• Inverted: Can only detect mirrored codes (cannot detect normal codes).
Standard Angle Specify the reference angle at code detection.
Angle range Specify the code detection range for the reference angle. By limiting the angular range, faster and
more stable detection is possible.
Scale Fluctuation Selects the degree of fluctuation to allow when the code size fluctuates. A smaller allowance will
increase processing speed and allow for more stable code detection.
• Small: Allow size fluctuations of about ± 10% of size.
• Medium: Allow size fluctuations of about ± 20% of size.
• Large: Allow size fluctuations of about ± 30% of size.
• Unlimited: All size fluctuation which can be read are allowed.
Timeout Set the upper limit for processing time. If the processing time of the tool itself exceeds the set value
(0.01 to 60 seconds) due to the state of the input image, the tool processing will time out as an
error.
width of 2432 or a height of 2050 pixels.
After changing to this mode, perform auto-tuning again.
Also, review the filter parameters if using a pre-processing filter.
• This mode cannot be used at the same time as print quality certification (Verification). To enable
this mode, set [Verification] to [OFF].
LJ-X UM_GB 5-153

2D Code Reader
Read Data Settings

Read Start Digit Specifies the position of the detected code at which to start reading data.
Read Data Length Specify the number of characters (Byte unit) data to read from the start position.
Data Cut-Off When enabled, the read data is partially cut out and output as cut out data. Cut data can be
Execute matched with patterns.
Output at Fixed When enabled, data is output for the number of characters set in the read data length. If the number
Length of read characters is insufficient, it is completed with the character data specified in "Completion
character (1 character)".
When Read Fails If enabled, the character data specified in "Output string" will be output when reading fails.
Output String
Symbol Identifier When enabled, a symbol identifier (3 bytes) defined by the ISO / IEC 15424 / JIS X 0530 data
Output carrier identifier (including the symbology identifier) is added to the beginning of the read data.
Expansion Channel When enabled, ECI is output as the result of reading code that contains ECI. It does not affect the
Interpretation (ECI) read operation of code that does not contain ECI.
Print Quality Certification

Functions
Print Quality Selects a method for print quality certification.

Certification
Overall Grade Specify the verification items to be included in the overall grade. The overall grade is the lowest
Target Selection value (grade) of the specified verification items.
Lower Limit Specify the overall grade to be judged as OK in "Lower limit". The overall grade is the lowest value
(grade) of the specified verification items.

Reference Conditions To set multiple criteria for matching, select "Multiple".
Reference Condition Up to 16 collation conditions can be set. When setting, multiple collation conditions, it is possible to
List carry out collation that combines multiple arbitrary ranges of read data, and sort by result data of
which number collation condition is met. When using it for sorting, disabling "set collation result as
tool judgment target" allows collation without affecting the judgment result with non-matching result.
Reference Range Choose the range to match against the matching pattern. When "Perform data extraction" is
enabled, extraction range 1 to 8 can be specified to compare against any range of read data.
Reference Pattern Enter a pattern to match the code reading results.
Reference Pattern Specify details as necessary for the conditions involved in matching the code reading results.
Expansion Settings
Read Data Length Specify the range of read data length to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
limit".
Detection Angle Specify the range of detection angle to be determined as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
5-154 LJ-X UM_GB

ShapeTrax2
ShapeTrax2
What is [ShapeTrax2] Measurement?

This tool searches for the most similar parts of the input image to already registered pattern outline data, and
can measure the pattern’s position, tilt angle, and match %.

Search area • Judged Label: 0
Pattern Region Origin

(0,0)
X
Tilt angle
Match %
Y 85
Number of detection
Functions
3
X:320、Y:360
Scale
During operation 1.025
Origin
(0,0)
X
Tilt angle
Search area
section
LJ-X UM_GB 5-155

ShapeTrax2
Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.
2
3
> >
4
measured.
5
18)
Functions

reference image.
6

Reference
5-156 LJ-X UM_GB

ShapeTrax2
5 Set characteristic extraction conditions (page 5-158).


Angle range Specify the angle range when the search target is tilted with ±.
Scale range Setting the size of the registered feature to 1.000, set the size fluctuation range of the search
object.
Detection count Specify the maximum number of patterns to be detected. Set this option to detect the count and
Accuracy Specify fine search precision.
• High: Increases precision by performing an in-detail fine search.
• Low: Select to prioritize the search speed over precision.
Distortion Tolerance When the edges of a detection candidate are skewed from the registered pattern due to the lens
Range angle of view or tilting of the work piece etc., detects as edge using a fine search if the skewing is
within a specified value (pixels).
Functions
Label Order Selects the identification order of the multiple detected patterns.
region center.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-157

ShapeTrax2

label order.
region is used as the area considered to be the same column or same row in the XY direction.
pattern region.
row in pixels.
Light/Dark Inversion Enable to search for the target whose gradation (black and white) is inverted with respect to the
registered pattern.
Surrounding Removal When search results overlap one detection target, specify the range (number of pixels) from the
Distance center of the circumscribed rectangle of the registered feature (fine) to exclude from the detection
candidate. Candidates who meet AND criteria for other nearby exclusion settings are excluded.
Functions
Angle range When search results overlap one detection target, specify the range to be excluded from detection
candidates by using an angle centered on the detection target angle (reference angle). Candidates
who meet AND criteria for other nearby exclusion settings are excluded.
Standard Angle Select the reference angle of the proximity exclusion angle with the detection target angle as 0 degree.
When excluding cases such as inversion false detection, it is possible to exclude candidates with angles
around 0 degrees and around 180 degrees inverted by selecting "0/180 degrees".
Surrounding Removal When search results overlap with one detection target, specify the range to be excluded from
Scale detection candidates by the scale (%) based on the detection target. Candidates who meet AND
criteria for other nearby exclusion settings are excluded.
Overlap Removal When multiple search results overlap on a detection target, removes from the candidate based on
the degree to which the areas of the detection candidates overlap.
Removal Target When multiple search results overlap on a detection target, specifies the standard for removal from
the detection candidates.
• Non-Max. Match Candidate: Of those multiple candidates which overlap, leaves the one with the
highest match %.
• All: When multiple candidates overlap, removes all of them.
Overlap Removal When multiple search results overlap on a detection target, specifies the degree (%) of overlap in
Area area between detection candidates which will be the standard for removal from the detection
candidates.
Setting Characteristic Extraction Conditions

Display Specify the characteristics to be displayed in the screen.
Characteristics • Course: Displays course characteristics used by the course search.
Search sensitivity Changes the reduction rate of the image and characteristics to specify the priority between the
search speed and stability.
• High: Select this when prioritizing search stability.
• Custom: Adjust the image and characteristic reduction rate of course searches and fine searches
when detection is unstable.
Image Reduction Rate coarse search. 0 (shrinkage: small) to 10 (shrinkage: large)
5-158 LJ-X UM_GB

ShapeTrax2

Rough Search  Specify the degree of compression of features extracted from the reference image and the input
Characteristic image in coarse search. 0 (shrinkage: small) to 10 (shrinkage: large)
Reduction Rate
Image Reduction Rate search. 0 (Shrinkage: Small) to 10 (Shrinkage: Large)
Characteristic High Increase the setting to capture finer characteristics. The higher it is, the slower the search will be.
Precision
Edge Intensity Min. Edges with intensities lower than the lower limit of edge intensity (tone change) are excluded from
the features. Specify the lower edge intensity limits for the coarse and fine features of the reference
image, respectively, so that only characteristic parts of the object can be extracted as edges, while
checking the edges displayed on the screen.
Wide Search Mode When enabled, use the broad search mode. This mode is required if the area size is greater than
2432px wide or 2050px high.
Feature Drawing Tool When this option is enabled, the feature drawing tool can be used. Draws lines, circles, and other
figures, as well as edges which are automatically extracted based on the reference image as
characteristics. Use this when detection is unstable, causing proper characteristics to not be
extracted from the reference image.
• For details, see "Creating feature information from contour information of graphics or images using
ShapeTrax3/ShapeTrax2 (Feature drawing tool)" (page 3-31).
Functions
• Cannot be used simultaneously with the [Eraser Tool].
Eraser tool When this option is turned on, the eraser tool can be set. By specifying an arbitrary point on the
reference image, detected edges that are within the range can be eliminated from characteristic
data as noise components. Further, it cannot be used simultaneously with the [Feature Drawing
Tool].

Quantity Specify the range of the number of detected items to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower
limit".
limit".
Scale For the magnification of the size change relative to the registered pattern of the detected pattern,
specify the range to be determined as OK by "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
LJ-X UM_GB 5-159

OCR
OCR
What is [OCR] Measurement?

By cutting out text data in the measurement region and then comparing with dictionary data, strings in the image
can be identified.
Reference Since the OCR function is included in the OCR2 function, we generally recommend the use of OCR2.

• String Length (String Cut Setting): 6
Measurement area
Measurement target
character Recognized String
The character information in AB.18E
the Measurement area is cut
out and recognized as a string.
Functions
Flow of Settings
1 Prepare tool.
2
3
> >
4
measured.

18)
reference image.
5-160 LJ-X UM_GB

OCR


Reference
Functions
4 Set the read character, then click (page 5-162).
5 Configure the row cut-out settings, then

click (page 5-162). 5
6 Configure the character cut-out settings,

6
then click (page 5-163).
7 Set the dictionary, then click

164).
(page 5-
7
LJ-X UM_GB 5-161

OCR

Configure tolerance for judgment strings against 8
recognized content and set tolerance (lower limit)
on recognized result measurements.
When Characters are Incorrectly Recognized

Instead of the above steps 4 through 6, try the operations
indicated in "When Characters Cannot be Correctly
Recognized with Normal Cut-Out Method (Fixed Cut-Out)"
(page 5-166).
Settings Read Character

Functions

Font color Compare the text and background colors and set which color should be recognized as a character.
Cut-Out Method The process of dividing character information in the measurement area into single character units is
called "cut out". Proper segmentation requires proper recognition of characters. Select the method
of character extraction and set the characters to be extracted one character at a time.
Character Direction If the text is rotated by 90 ° with respect to the screen horizontal, change the direction of the text.
Mirror Reflection When checked, the characters which are inverted depending on the passing direction and
orientation of workpiece for capturing can be recognized.
Setting Row Cut-Out Settings

Cut-Out Target If the cut-out is not being performed properly due to background noise, sometimes changing the
cut-out target will allow cut-out to be performed.
Rotation Correction Check if the cut out line is inclined to the measurement area and the height of the line fluctuates.
Projection Waveform Specify the lower threshold of the projected waveform as waveform strength. Lowering the
Threshold threshold increases the sensitivity of the incision, but may increase noise.
Waveform Expansion Apply the inflation treatment to the projected waveform for a specified number of times to make the
Count shape of the waveform smooth. This improves the situation where the character is composed of
dots, etc. and the separation is more than necessary, but may reduce the sensitivity of detection for
a slight line spacing.
Row Height Upper Specify the upper limit of the height of the line to be cut out as a percentage of the measurement
Limit (Region Height area width. If the line spacing is narrow and two lines have been erroneously detected as one line,
Ratio) etc., it can be forcibly cut into two lines.
Noise Intensity Upper Specify the upper limit of the intensity of the projection waveform to be treated as noise information
Limit in the projection waveform by the difference from the projection waveform threshold. Excludes
noise information with a Strength less than the upper limit from the extraction target.
5-162 LJ-X UM_GB

OCR

Noise Width Upper Specify the maximum width in pixels of the projected waveform to be treated as noise information in
Limit the projected waveform. Exclude noise information with a width less than the upper limit from the
extraction target.
Setting Character Cut-Out Settings

Cut-Out Target If the character cut-out is not being performed properly due to background noise, this may be
effective.
Character Count Specify the number of cutout characters from the measurement area.
Slant Correction If the cut out character is deformed diagonally, set "Skew correction" to ON. When set to ON,
correction is performed on the slope.
Fitting Fine-tune the size of the cutout area determined by the projection waveform with the size of the
actual character. Reduces the impact on recognition when text size changes.
Fitting Choose whether to have the cut area reflect the actual character size. When it turns ON, the actual
(When Cut-Out character size can be reflected in the clipping area, and the influence on the recognition degree
Method is [Fixed Cut- when the character size changes is reduced.
Out])
Functions
Active border When performing fitting processing within the fixed extraction or projection extraction (ratio
specification) extraction area, noise on the boundary of the extraction area that causes a
malfunction is excluded from the process.
Projection Waveform Specify the lower threshold value of the projection waveform to be used for clipping by the
Threshold waveform strength. Lowering the threshold increases the sensitivity of the incision, but may
increase noise.
Waveform Expansion Apply the inflation treatment to the projected waveform for a specified number of times to make the
Count shape of the waveform smooth. This improves the situation where the character is composed of
dots, etc. and the separation is more than necessary, but may reduce the sensitivity of detection for
a slight line spacing.
Character Width Specifies the upper limit of the character width to be cut out as a percentage of the character height.
Upper Limit If the space between characters is narrow and two characters have been misdetected as one
(Character Height character, the characters can be forcibly separated.
Ratio)
Noise Intensity Upper Specify the upper limit of the intensity of the projection waveform to be treated as noise information
Limit in the projection waveform by the difference from the projection waveform threshold. Excludes
noise information with a Strength less than the upper limit from the extraction target.
Noise Width Upper Specify the maximum width in pixels of the projected waveform to be treated as noise information in
Limit the projected waveform. Exclude noise information with a width less than the upper limit from the
extraction target.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-163

OCR
Editing Dictionary
1 Click [Edit Dictionary].

2 Select the registered dictionary file with [Dictionary No.] (0 to 999).

To update the list format, update [Display Format].
• Character List: A list of registered characters is displayed in a matrix.
• Registered List: Registration state of all character types is shown in a list.
To change the dictionary’s title, enter any title in the [Dictionary Title] field (up to 30 full-width characters,
or 60 half-width characters).
3 Select [Register].
The [Select Registration Method] screen appears.
4 Select a dictionary registration method.

The following 2 dictionary registration methods can be chosen:
• Individual Registration: Performs dictionary registration by specifying each character individually of characters to be cut
Functions
out.
• Batch Registration: Performs dictionary registration of characters to be cut out with a string all at once.
5 Perform dictionary registration through the selected registration method.

When [Individual Registration] is selected
If the cut-out characters are selected form the screen, the [Registration Character Selection] screen
appears. Once the characters to be registered have been selected, register them. Repeat this process
until all desired characters have been registered.
When [Batch Registration] is selected
The [Batch Registration] screen appears. Enter the characters of the currently cut-out string and register
it.
6 Once registration is complete, click [Close].

The screen returns to the [Edit Dictionary] screen.
7 Select [Close].
5-164 LJ-X UM_GB

OCR
Editing/deleting registered dictionary data

Registered dictionary data can be edited/deleted through the following process.
1 Click [Edit Dictionary] in the [Dictionary Settings] screen.

2 Perform required operations.

Enable/Disable
Temporarily enables/disables the selected character pattern.
The invalid character is displayed with ×, but the data itself is not deleted, so it can be turned back later.
Delete
Deletes the selected character pattern.
Delete All
Deletes all character patterns registered in the selected dictionary number.
3 Select [Close].
Functions
Judgment String Enter the judgment string to be matched with the recognized content. Up to 20 characters or
symbols can be entered as a fixed string.
String Expansion If a date or calculation result is used as a judgment string, specifies how those strings will be
Settings expanded. Specifies date offset or error tolerance, date encryption settings, calculation result
expansion digits, base, and whether zero suppression is enabled. This item can only be configured
when date or calculation result is selected under judgment string.
Limit Characters to Usually character recognition uses all the characters registered in the dictionary, but In situations
Recognize where only certain characters are recognized and determined, the number of reference characters
can also be restricted. Limiting reference characters may improve processing speed or eliminate
false positives.
Recognition Level "A degree of recognition" is a value that indicates how similar the extracted character is to the
Lower Limit dictionary data. For the cutout character below "Recognition Lower Limit", "?" is outputted as
unrecognizable, and it is judged to be NG.
Stability Lower Limit The degree of stability expresses the difference between the recognition degree of the first and
second candidates of the recognized character as a numerical value. Specify the lower limit for this
minimum stability value. If below this lower limit, "?" is outputted as unrecognizable and it is judged
to be NG.
Shade Deviation Specify the lower limit of concentration deviation that is judged blank (SPACE) in the cutout area. If
Lower Limit the noise component of the underground to be inspected is recognized as a character, raise the
lower limit to correspond. Conversely, if a space is recognized because the contrast between the
letter and the background is low, the lower limit may be recognized as a letter.
Specification Label Specify characters between 0 and 19 that are referenced as elements of the specified label in the
operation from the recognized multiple characters.
Reference with 1D/2D When comparing the recognized string to the read data of [1D Code Read] or [1D Code Reader]
Code Read Data (page 5-147), [2D Code Read] or [2D Code Reader] (page 5-151) tools, places a check in
[Reference with 1D/2D Code Read Data].
LJ-X UM_GB 5-165

OCR
When Characters Cannot be Correctly Recognized with Normal Cut-Out

Method (Fixed Cut-Out)
1 Click [Projection Cut-Out] in the [Basic Settings] screen.

The [Cut-Out Method] screen appears.
2 Click [Fixed Cut-Out], then click [OK].
3 Click .
4 Add a character cut-out region.

Click , then click the top left and bottom
right corners of an area that will enclose the
character (repeat this operation as needed for each
character).
5 Check the [Fitting] box to enable fitting.
6
Functions
Click .
From this point, proceed as per the explanation in
"Flow of Settings" (page 5-160).
5-166 LJ-X UM_GB

Image Region Generator
Image Region Generator
What is the [Image Region Generator] tool?

It generates a free-form measurement region. This measurement region can be used in the desired
measurement tool. This function is useful when a measurement region for complicated shapes is needed.
Example
Current image
Measure execution
Functions
2 Value Image Area Generation Tool Defect tool processing Measurement Tool
processing results (unused image area)
Generates two contrast
images
(1)
(2) Measurement area

(3)
Number of defects
detected: 3
Apply BLOB Filter

Defect tool processing results
(unused image area)
Eliminate unwanted
defects and generate
image area
Actual measurement area

(1)
Use the black pixel
portion of the image
area as the
measurement area Number of defects
detected: 1
LJ-X UM_GB 5-167

Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.
 Add a tool
2
> >
3
measured.

18)
4
Functions

reference image.

enhance.
5
Reference

6
7
For details on supported image enhances for Image
Region Generator, see "Image Enhance filter list".
3 Set the threshold for binary.
4 To apply the blob filter, change the settings after checking the [Blob Filter] box.
For details on blob filter, see "Blob" (page 5-115).
5 To perform shrink processing of the white pixels and black pixels, check the [Shrink
White Pixels Process] and [Shrink Black Pixels Process] boxes (page 5-169).
5-168 LJ-X UM_GB

6 Select the range for image region generation in the [Image Region Generation Range]
field.
Select a generation range for the image region.
• Full Image: The entire image is the range for image region generation.
• Rectangle: The image region generation range can be specified. The region is generated from the specified range.
7 Select the target image for application of the generated image region in the [Image
Region Generation Target Image] field.
• Current Image: Applies the image region to the current image and displays it.
• Reference Image: Applies the image region to the reference image and displays it.
8 Specify the generated image region as a measurement region for another measurement
tool.
On the [Measurement Region] screen that is displayed by clicking [Measurement Region]
in the measurement tool, check the [Use Image Region] box and specify the image region
generator tool number that will serve as the reference for the region shape.
The detection color (white or black) can be specified, and the shape can also be
previewed for checking.
Functions
Shrinking

Shrink White Pixels Enable this to shrink white pixels and remove white pixel noise.
Shrink Black Pixels Enable this to shrink black pixels and remove black pixel noise.
Reference
The [Shrink White Pixels] process is a shrink filter, while the [Shrink Black Pixels] process is an expand filter. For
details on each filter, see "Pre-processing filter list".
LJ-X UM_GB 5-169

Line Display
Line Display
This tool displays a line (line connecting 2 points, horizontal line, or vertical line).
There are two manners for specifying a point: Specifying it with a fixed point, and by referencing a detection position of
another tool which is already specified.
Image of display
Straight line connecting
two points (line) Horizontal line Vertical straight line
P1
P1
P2 P1
Functions
Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.
> >

measured.

18)
reference image.
2 Select the line type in the [Straight Line Type] field.
3 Draw a line.
5-170 LJ-X UM_GB

Line Display
Draw a line connecting two points
1 Select [Point-to-Point] in the in [Straight Line Type] field.
2 Either click directly on the desired coordinate, or click the point (green point) detected
by another tool to select the 1st point for the line.
Line Display.
3 This tool displays a line (line connecting 2 points, horizontal line, or vertical line).
A line is drawn between the 2 selected points.
Draw a horizontal or vertical line
1 Select either [Horizontal] (if drawing a horizontal line) or [Vertical[ (if drawing a vertical
line] in the [Straight Line Type] field.
Functions
Either click directly on the desired coordinate, or click the point (green point) detected
by another tool.
A horizontal or vertical line passing through the selected point is drawn.
Correcting a drawn line
Correcting the point which the line passes through

Use either of the methods below to correct the point.
• Click [Reset] for [Point 1] or [Point 2] and then either click directly on the desired coordinate, or click the point
(green point) detected by another tool.
• Click on the coordinates and enter the coordinates directly. Click on the [Point 1] or [Point 2] coordinates and
enter the coordinates directly.
Changing the line thickness or color displayed in Run mode
1 Click [Display].
The [Display] screen appears.
2 Change the [Line Thickness] or [Color] field settings as necessary.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-171

Circle Display
Circle Display
Shows a circle or an arc.
Image of display
Circle Arc
P1 P1
P2 P3 P2 P3
Flow of settings
Functions
1 Prepare tool.
> >

measured.

18)
reference image.
2 Select the circle type in the [Circle Type] field.
3 Draw a circle.
5-172 LJ-X UM_GB

Circle Display
Drawing a circle
1 In the [Circle Type] field, click [Circle].
2 Click point 1 on the edge of the circle.
Functions
To redo either point 1 or point 2, click [Undo].
A circle that passes through the 3 selected points is drawn.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-173

Circle Display
Drawing an arc
1 In the [Circle Type] field, click [Arc].
2 Click the start point on the arc.
3 Click the end point on the arc.

Functions
To reset the starting point and end point of the arc, click [Undo].
4 Click the center point on the arc.
A Arc that passes through the 3 selected points is drawn.
Correcting a Drawn Circle/Arc
Correcting a Circle/Arc
Click on the [Center] or [Radius] coordinates in the case of [Circle], or on [Center], [Radius], [Starting
Angle], or [Ending Angle] fields in the case of [Arc] and enter the coordinates directly.
Changing the Circle/Arc Thickness or Color Displayed in Run mode
1 Click [Display].
5-174 LJ-X UM_GB

Point Display
Point Display
Shows a point (rotating cross).
Image of display
Horizontal
P1
Drawing a point
Functions
1 Prepare tool.
> >

measured.

18)
reference image.
2 Click directly on the desired coordinate.

A cross is drawn with the center at the selected point.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-175

Point Display
Correcting a drawn point
Correcting the point position
1 Click on the [Center] coordinates and enter the coordinates directly.
2 Click [Angle] and enter the rotation angle for the cross.
3 Click [Width] and select the cross size.
Changing the point thickness or color displayed in Run mode
1 Click [Display].

Functions
5-176 LJ-X UM_GB

Scale Display
Scale Display
This tool displays scales.

There are two manners for specifying a point: Specifying it with a fixed point, and by referencing a detection position of
another tool which is already specified.
Image of display
Horizontal Vertical Horizontal/Vertical
P1
P1
P1
Functions
Drawing a scale
1 Prepare tool.
> >

measured.

18)
reference image.
2 Select the scale line type in the [Type] field.
3 Either click directly on the desired coordinate, or click the point (green point) detected
by another tool.
A scale passing through the selected point is drawn.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-177

Scale Display
Correcting a drawn scale
Correcting the scale position or scale span
1 Click on the [Position] field coordinates and enter the coordinates directly.
2 Click the [Large Scale Span] field and select the interval for the large scale tick marks.
3 Click the [Small Scale Span] field and select the interval for the small scale tick marks.
Changing the scale color displayed in Run mode
1 Click [Display].
2 Change the settings in the [Color] field as required.

Functions
5-178 LJ-X UM_GB

Calculation
Calculation
Calculation
The calculation tool is used for processing multiple functions in as a calculation string with the results being
used directly as the output of the calculation unit or for populating user specified variables. As the results of
multiple operational expressions can be substituted into another operational expression, it is possible to handle
complex judgments based on various judgment results and measurement values.
Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.
Functions
> >
2 Set the calculation details.
Click the following buttons to enter functions other than values.
For more information about functions, refer to "Operation Notations" (page A-11).
LJ-X UM_GB 5-179

Calculation
3 Set the calculation results.

Input of the value in any of calculation results [ANS0], [ANS1] or [ANS2] can be used as the calculation
result.
• (Example) ANS0 = T100.RSLT.N [0] : MS
• Judgment tolerance can be set for the calculation result.
4 Execute Calculation Test to check if there is a calculation error.
5 Set judgment conditions.

Set the tolerance (upper limit and lower limit) for [ANS0], [ANS1] and [ANS2].
Functions
5-180 LJ-X UM_GB

Position Correction

3D Inspection
Functions
 Position Correction
Position Correction
LJ-X UM_GB 5-181

Position Correction With Shading Pattern
Position Correction With Shading

Pattern
What is [Position Correction With Shading Pattern]?

This tool detects the most similar portion to the previously registered image pattern to output the position and
slope of the detected target. This position correction tool references the configured position correction’s edge as
reference for the positional adjustment.
For details on how to set the detailed items , see "Pattern Search" (page 5-80).

During pattern registration
• Label Order: X > Y Ascending
• Judged Label: 0
During pattern
registration Tilt angle
Position Correction
LJ Pattern Region (0,0)

X
-30°
Match %
Detection point 98
It can be specified
L
LJ J
arbitrarily. Y
Detect position
L J LJ X:320、Y:360
LJ
LJ Registered pattern
Number of detection
3
During operation
Origin
(0,0)
X
Tilt angle
Search area
L
Y
LJ J
L J LJ
LJ
5-182 LJ-X UM_GB

Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.

2
> >
3
4
luminance output head, select either a height 5
measured.

18)
Position Correction
reference image.

Set the detection range (search range) from the model image registered in the pattern region and the
model image (pattern region) to detect.

Reference
4 Set angle range.

Specify the angle range when the search target is tilted with ±. The smaller the angle range, the shorter
the processing time.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-183


• In the [Position] field,Specify the range of X coordinate/Y coordinate to be determined as OK with "Upper limit" or "Lower
limit".
• In the [Angle] field, Specify the range of detection angle to be determined as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit". The
• In the [Match %] field,Specify the range of the correlation value to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" or "Lower limit".
After settings are completed

The added tool is registered as [Reference] tool, and it can be used as a reference for the Position Correction of
other tools. For details on position correction, see "Correct the Position (Position Adjustment)" (page 3-40).
When Expected Measurement Results Cannot be Obtained
State How to Address

Detection point is not visible. Select display after filter
▼ ▼ ▼ ▼ ▼
Some of the targets cannot be located. Decrease [Min. Match %].

Position Correction
A target with large inclination cannot be located. Increase [Angle Range].

The incorrect target is located. Set [Search Sensitivity] to [High].
The target is located, but there is positional deviation. Set [Accuracy] to [High].
The target is out of the search region and detection is Change the pattern region to a region which does not go
▼
unstable. out of the search region.

Judge acceptance by position variation. Set upper/lower limit of [Position] or [Angle] in [Judgment
▼
Conditions].
5-184 LJ-X UM_GB

Position Correction With Outline Pattern
Position Correction With Outline

Pattern
What is [Position Correction With Outline Pattern]?

Finds the most similar part to the previously registered contour information and outputs the position and
inclination of the detected object. This position correction tool references the configured position correction’s
edge as reference for the positional adjustment.
For details on how to set the detailed items , see "ShapeTrax3" (page 5-84) or "ShapeTrax2" (page 5-155).

Search area • Judged Label: 0
Pattern Region
Origin
Position Correction
(0,0)
X
Detection point Tilt angle
It can be specified arbitrarily. ＋30°
Match %
Y 85
Number of detection
Registered pattern 3
Detect position
X:320、Y:360
During operation Scale
Origin 1.025
(0,0)
X
Tilt angle
Search area
section
LJ-X UM_GB 5-185

Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.
2
3
> >
4
5
measured.

6
18)
Position Correction

reference image.


Reference
4 Set angle range.

Specify the angle range when the search target is tilted with ±.
5-186 LJ-X UM_GB

5 Set characteristic extraction conditions.

• In the [Position] field,Specify the range of X coordinate/Y coordinate to be determined as OK with "Upper limit" or "Lower
limit".
• In the [Angle] field, Specify the range of detection angle to be determined as OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit". The
specifiable angular range is -180.000° to 180.000°.
• In the [Match %] field,Specify the range of the correlation value to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" or "Lower limit".

Position Correction
Registered characteristic and input characteristic not Select [Fine] under [Display Characteristics] in
▼
visible. [Characteristic Extraction Conditions].

Some of the targets cannot be located. Decrease [Min. Match %].
▼ ▼
A target with a different size cannot be located. Change the upper/lower limit in [Scale Range].
Processing time is slow. • Select [Fast] in [Fine Search Precision] (for ShapeTrax3), or
select [Low] in [Search Precision] (for ShapeTrax2).
▼
• Narrow the search region.

There are unnecessary characteristics in registered Delete unnecessary characteristics with the eraser tool,
▼
characteristics and the search is not stable. and edit characteristics with the feature drawing tool.
A target with inverted light/shade cannot be located. Check [Light/Shade Inversion].
▼
Search is sometimes not possible due to view angle or tilt Increase [Distortion Tolerance Range].
▼
of the work piece etc.

Only the detection angle is unstable with rotational Change the settings with [Rotation Direction Additional
▼
symmetry work. Search] so that the rotation direction can be detected.

An overlapped target cannot be detected. Reduce the [Surrounding Removal Distance] and [Angle
Range] in [Surrounding Removal Settings]
▼
(surrounding removal distance and angle range are an

AND condition).
I do not want to detect an overlapped target. Select [All] as the removal target in [Overlap Removal].
▼
I want to additionally specify whether to include in or Change the settings for specifying the region for
exclude from the detection target based on characteristics referencing characteristics or detection target etc. in
▼
around the pattern. [Characteristic Pixel Count Selection].

There are too few characteristics with the input Select [Fine] under [Search Sensitivity] in [Characteristic
characteristics and the search is not stable. Extraction Conditions] (for ShapeTrax3), or [High] (for
▼
ShapeTrax2).
• There are unnecessary characteristics in registered characteristics and the search is not stable.
→ Delete unnecessary characteristics with the eraser tool, and edit characteristics with the feature drawing
tool.
• Registered characteristic and input characteristic not visible.
→ Select [Fine] under [Display Characteristics] in [Characteristic Extraction Conditions].
LJ-X UM_GB 5-187

Position Correction with the Edge
Position Correction with the Edge
What is [Edge Position Correction]

Detects an edge (X or Y direction) in the measurement area and outputs the position. Corrects the positional
error of the correction destination tool according to the change in the position of the edge detected by this tool
that is the source of positional error correction.
For details on how to set the detailed items , see "Edge Position" (page 5-96).

• Judged Label: 0 When Measured With the Following Conditions:
• Detection Direction: → • Judged Label: 1
• Edge Direction: Light to dark • Detection Direction:→
Detected edge
(0,0)
Position Correction
Work to be measured
Detect position
Measurement area X:560、Y:480
Y
Number of edges
• Judged Label: 1 3
• Detection Direction: →
Detected edge
Measurement area
Work to be measured
5-188 LJ-X UM_GB

Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.

2
> >
3
4
5
luminance output head, select either a height 6
measured.
7
18)
Position Correction
reference image.


Reference
4 Set detection direction.

Specify the direction to scan the edge in the measurement area. Choose from “→” “←” “↓” “↑”.
5 Set edge direction.

Specify the light level change for edge detection. Select from "bright->dark", "dark->bright", or "both".
LJ-X UM_GB 5-189

6 Set edge sensitivity.

Sets the percentage of waveform peak to be recognized as an edge when the largest change in gradation
is 100%. Peaks of waveforms below this edge sensitivity are not recognized as edges, which is useful for
ignoring noise.
For details, see "What is an edge?" (page A-106).

In the [Position] field,Specify the range of edge position (X or Y) to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" or
"Lower limit".


Position Correction
Edge intensity waveform is not displayed Select display after filter

▼
To detect an edge on the right, not on the left Set detection direction to [←] (with a rectangle etc., [↑], [
▼
↓], [→], and [←] can be selected).

I only want to detect only edges that become dark Select [Light to Dark] in edge direction.
▼
Instead of the desired edge, a dark edge in the Reduce edge sensitivity while viewing the edge sensitivity
▼
measurement region is detected erroneously. graph.

I want to detect curved edges, but it goes inward. Reduce the edge filter width while viewing the detected
▼
edge position.
Weak noise is detected erroneously. While viewing the edge graph, increase [Lower Edge
▼
Intensity] or [Edge Sensitivity].

Angled edge detection position is not stable. Check the [Angled Edge Detection] box or increase [Edge
▼
Filter Width].
• Instead of the desired edge, a dark edge in the measurement region is detected erroneously.
→ Reduce edge sensitivity while viewing the edge intensity waveform.
• I want to detect curved edges, but it goes inward.
→ Reduce the edge filter width while viewing the detected edge position.
5-190 LJ-X UM_GB

Position Correction With Straight Line Position and Angle
Position Correction With Straight

Line Position and Angle
What is [Position Correction With Straight Line Position and Angle]

Measurement?
Edges are detected at multiple points in the measurement area, and straight lines are obtained from the edge
information of the detected multiple points. The position correction of the correction destination tool is performed
according to the variation of the position and inclination of the straight line obtained by this tool that is the origin
of position error correction.
For details on how to set the detailed items , see "Profile Position" (page 5-124).

When the detection direction is [→] and the trend direction is When Measured With the Following Conditions:
Position Correction
[↓] • Trend direction: ↓
Segment movement • Detection Direction:→
Segment size • Edge Direction: Both
Work to be measured Edge position (Max)

Detected edges (Max) 300
- Maximum segment number Trend
Trend
direction direction
Detected edges (Min) Edge position (Min)
Measurement area Detection direction

Detection direction
LJ-X UM_GB 5-191

Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.

2
3
> >

4
4
measured.

18) 5
5
Position Correction

reference image.

Click two points on the desired line.

Reference
4 If the line is not detected, remove check from [Optimize] and adjust the set value.
For details on setting values, see "Profile Position" (page 5-124).
5-192 LJ-X UM_GB


In the [Detection Line Angle] field,Specify the range of detection angle to be determined as OK with
"Upper limit" and "Lower limit". The specifiable angular range is -180.000 ° to 180.000 °.


The desired line is not detected. Remove the check from [Optimize] and set the detection
▼
direction and edge direction.
Instead of the desired edge, a dark edge in the ▼ Reduce edge sensitivity while viewing the edge sensitivity
The desired line is not detected.
Position Correction
→ Remove the check from [Optimize] and set the detection direction and edge direction.
LJ-X UM_GB 5-193

Position Correction of Circle Center
Position Correction of Circle Center
What is [Position Correction of Circle Center] Measurement?

Edges are detected at multiple points in the measurement area, and a circle is determined from the edge
information of the detected multiple points. This tool is applied as a position correction reference for another tool
(target) where the position adjustment is performed according to the deviation from the center position of the
detected circle.
For details on how to set the detailed items , see "Profile Position" (page 5-124).

When the trend direction is clockwise When Measured With the Following Conditions:
Segment movement • Trend direction: Clockwise
• Detection Direction: Perimeter → Center
Detected edges (Max)
- Maximum segment number • Edge Direction: Both
Position Correction
Measurement area Radius width (Max)

Detection 400
Segment size direction
Work to be measured
Detected edges (Min)

- Minimum segment number
Trend direction Radius width (Min)
300
Trend direction
5-194 LJ-X UM_GB

Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.

2
> >
3
 Measurement target image selection 4

measured.

18)
5
5
Position Correction
reference image.

Click three points on the desired circle.

Reference
4 If the circle is not detected, remove the check from [Optimize] and adjust the set values.
For details on setting values, see "Profile Position" (page 5-124).
LJ-X UM_GB 5-195


• In the [Detection Circle Center] field,Specify the range of the center of detected circle (X/Y) to be judged as OK with
• In the [Detected Circle Radius/Diameter] field,Specify the range of the diameter/radius of the detected circle to be judged


The desired circle is not detected. ▼ Remove the check from [Optimize] and set the detection
direction and edge direction.
Instead of the desired edge, a dark edge in the Reduce edge sensitivity while viewing the edge sensitivity
▼
Position Correction
5-196 LJ-X UM_GB

Position Correction With Center of Gravity of Cluster
Position Correction With Center of

Gravity of Cluster
What is [Position Correction with Gravity Center of Cluster]

Measurement?
Detects a block of extracted color and outputs its center of gravity position. This tool is applied as a position
correction reference for another tool (target) where position adjustment is performed according to the positional
gap from the detected cluster’s gravity center.
For details on how to set the detailed items , see "Blob" (page 5-115).

Assigns label numbers to blobs starting with the one with When Measured With the Following Conditions:
the largest area, and uses these for measurement/ • Detection Order: Y > X Ascend
detection. • Label Selection: 2
Position Correction
Label count
(0) (2) (0) (1) 5
Blob detected
(3) (2)
(4) (1) Measurement area (3) (4) Center position X:600, Y:460
Area: 20,000
Work to be measured Circular: 0.85
LJ-X UM_GB 5-197

Flow of settings
1 Prepare tool.
2
2
3
> >
4
measured.

18)
5
5
Position Correction

reference image. 6
7
7
8
9

enhance.
Reference
4 Set the conditions for binary conversion.
5 Select detection color.

For images converted to binary, select whether to measure the [White] or [Black] area.
5-198 LJ-X UM_GB

6 Set area filter lower limit.

Blobs smaller than the specified lower limit will not be detected. Increase the value to count unwanted
noise components.
7 Set whether holes will be filled in.

Fill the inside of the blob with the detection color. When this option is turned on, the inside of the blob is
filled and then the area and positional coordinates are calculated.
8 Set whether borders will be excluded.

Excludes blobs on the border of the measurement area from measurement. When ON, the background
can become easier to ignore relative to the measurement area.

• In the [Label Count] field,Specify the range of the number of labels judged to be OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
• In the [Center of gravity] field,Specify the range of the barycentric position (X/Y) to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and
"Lower limit".
Position Correction
LJ-X UM_GB 5-199


The blue point is not the detection target. Select black under detection color.
▼ ▼ ▼
31 or more blobs cannot be detected. Increase [Detection Count] to the number required.
A small target cannot be located. Reduce [Lower Area Filter].
Detect a target with the same area filter for which the Check the [Fill Holes] box.
▼
center is not extracted.
I do not want to detect a target that goes over the Check the [Active Border] box.
▼
measurement region
To locate only round targets Set the roundness filter.
▼ ▼
To locate only long and thin targets Set the aspect ratio filter.
Judge based on the number of targets Set the upper/lower limits of labels for the judgment
▼
condition.
Position Correction
5-200 LJ-X UM_GB

Dark (Light) Cluster Center of Gravity Position Correction
Dark (Light) Cluster Center of

Gravity
Position Correction
What is [Dark (Light) Cluster Center of Gravity Position Correction]

Measurement?
Detects a cluster that is dark or light with respect to the background and outputs its position of center of gravity.
Measurement is stable even under conditions where the target item’s shape or position is not, or when
brightness within the measurement area changes. This tool is automatically registered as an adjustment source
in Position Correction settings, and adjusts the position of the measurement region in adjustment tools based on
the shift of the detected gravity center of cluster.
For details on how to set the detailed items , see "Grayscale Blob" (page 5-119).
Position Correction
LJ-X UM_GB 5-201

Flow of Settings
1 Prepare tool.
2
> >
3
 Measurement target image selection 4

5
measured.
6
18)
Position Correction

reference image.
7
8
9
enhance.
Reference

4 Specify a detection target.

Select which characteristics to use as the detection target between [Bright] and [Dark].
5-202 LJ-X UM_GB

5 Set a standard shade level.

Select a shade level which will be uses as a basis for light/shade level.
6 Set the threshold for detection.

Specify the lower limit for light/shade level to be detected as a blob in the range of 0 to 254.
7 Set segment size.

The larger the value, the greater the effect of noise reduction. However, the detected light/shade levels
may change, so adjust the values to be such that the target can be stably detected.
8 Set the cluster to be detected as a blob.

For details on each setting item, see "Setting Blob Detection Conditions" (page 5-122).

• In the [Label Count] field,Specify the range of the number of labels judged to be OK with "Upper limit" and "Lower limit".
• In the [Center of gravity] field,Specify the range of the barycentric position (X/Y) to be judged as OK with "Upper limit" and
"Lower limit".
Position Correction

I want to detect either the brighter or darker cluster. Select either [Light] or [Dark] as detection target.
▼
Standard shade level is determined automatically. I want Select specified value for standard shade level, then input
▼
to set it to any value. the desired value.

The detection status of clusters and background is not Check whether the difference between clusters and the
visible. background can be distinguish using color with the stability
▼
display.
Things other than clusters are colored with the stability Increase the detection threshold so that it only adds color
▼
display. to damage.
Increasing the detection threshold makes it so that small Reduce the segment size. Set the segment size to be the
▼
clusters are not detected. same size as the smallest cluster to be detected.
I only want to detect faults with a large area. Increase the area filter lower limit in blob settings.
▼
LJ-X UM_GB 5-203

Position Correction
5-204 LJ-X UM_GB

6
Chapter
Execute Condition ......................................................6-2

Displaying [Execute Condition Settings] Screen ..... 6-2
Display/Output
Setting execute conditions 
(Execute Condition Settings) ...................................6-2
Main application of execute conditions 
(Example) ................................................................ 6-3
Overview of Output Settings ......................................6-4
Displaying [Output Settings] Screen ........................6-4
Judgment Settings ................................................... 6-4
OR Terminal ............................................................6-5
OUT Terminal .......................................................... 6-6
RS-232C (non-procedural) ......................................6-6
Ethernet (non-procedural) ....................................... 6-7
SD Card 2 ................................................................ 6-9
USB HDD .............................................................. 6-10
PC Program ........................................................... 6-11
PLC-Link ................................................................6-12
EtherNet/IP, EtherNet/IP Unit ................................ 6-12
PROFINET, PROFINET Unit .................................6-14
EtherCAT Unit .......................................................6-16
Display/Output
FTP ........................................................................6-17
Image Output ......................................................... 6-18
LJ-X UM_GB 6-1

Execute Condition
Execute Condition
On the [Execute Condition Settings] screen, execution/non-execution of each tool can be changed. It is useful for switching
inspection process of an individual program.
Displaying [Execute Condition Settings]

Screen
1 Click (Execute condition) in Setup mode.
The [Execute Condition Settings] screen appears.
• Following the Execute No.

Only when the set Execute No. matches the [Currently
Valid Execute No.] will the target tool be executed.
• Following Multiple Execute Nos.
Multiple Execute Nos. can be specified for executing the
Display/Output
target tool. Click the Specify Execute No. field on the

right of the execute condition and check the box of the
execute number of the the tool condition to be executed
Setting execute conditions (Execute on the [Select Execute Nos.] screen.
Condition Settings) • Do not execute the tool when its condition reference tool
is not executed
Execution/non-execution of each tool can be changed. It is
If this option is checked, the execution target tool will not
useful for switching inspection process of an individual
be executed if its condition reference tool is not executed
program.
in cases where: (1) the execution target tool is
1 Set execute conditions are for each tool. referencing the judgment result of another tool or (2) the
• Always Execute execution target tool is referencing a tool whose
Always applies the inspection tool. execution/non-execution is based on the judgment result
• Never Execute of another tool.
Never applies the inspection tool. This is used to make
non-execution temporarily in order to confirm the
operation of other tools.
• Following the Judged Result of Changing the Execute No.
Changes between execution and non-execution
If [Following the Execute No.] or [Following Multiple
depending on the OK/NG result of other tools. After
Execute Nos.] is selected, the [Currently Valid Execute No.]
selecting this, click the empty field to the right and specify
field is displayed in the lower part of the [Execute Condition
the target tool on the [Select Judgment Result Reference
Settings] screen. When the execute No. is set here, only
Tool] screen.
the tool where the execute No. is set performs
measurement.
The [Currently Valid Execute No.] can be rewritten
externally by using the EXW command (page XX-XX).
6-2 LJ-X UM_GB

Execute Condition
Main application of execute conditions

(Example)
External instruction to change the type is given to change
the inspection immediately (as per Execute No.).
During inspection, when the [Currently Valid Execute No.] is
changed to the number of the next object type with the
EXW command, execution/non-execution is changed for
the arrival of the object. Since only execute conditions are
changed, the setting change time can be reduced.
Start of program
Specify the object number using the command [EXW]

(When “Currently Valid Execute No.” is “1” )
Execute Execute Execute

condition No. 0 condition No. 1 condition No. 2
Mismatch Match Mismatch
Display/Output
T-100 T-100 T-102
Test 1-1 Test 1-1 Test 3-1
OK
T-103 T-104 T-105

Test 1-2 Test 2-2 Test 1-2
End of program
Executed program
Not executed program
LJ-X UM_GB 6-3

Overview of Output Settings
Overview of Output Settings
The judgment result or measured values of the unit can be output from the parallel I/O connector of the unit or an Ethernet or
other communication port. Images can be output to an SD card or USB HDD.
Item Description Ref.

Judgment Settings Set [Total Status] and [Partial Judgment]. page 6-4
OR Terminal Set the output method for when the total status value is output from the OR terminal. page 6-5
OUT Terminal Set the output item for I/O output of [Total Status], [Tool Judgment], [In-Tool Judgment] page 6-6
and [Partial Judgment].
RS-232C (non-procedural) Set the items for output of results with RS-232C non-procedural communications. page 6-6
Ethernet (non-procedural) Set the items for output of results with non-procedural communications from an page 6-7
Ethernet interface.
SD card 2 Set the items for output of results to the SD card inserted in the SD2 slot. page 6-9
USB HDD Set the items for output of results to the USB HDD connected to the controller. page 6-10
PC Program Set the items for output of results to a PC application (LJ-H1X) from an Ethernet page 6-11
interface.
PLC-Link Set the items for output of results with PLC-Link (RS-232C) or PLC-Link (Ethernet). page 6-12
EtherNet/IP Set the items for output of results with EtherNet/IP. page 6-12
PROFINET Set the items for output of results with PROFINET. page 6-14
EtherCAT Unit Set the items for output of results with EtherCAT unit. page 6-16
Display/Output
EtherNet/IP Unit Set the items for output of results with EtherNet/IP unit. page 6-12
PROFINET Unit Set the items for output of results with PROFINET unit. page 6-14
FTP Set the items for output of results to the FTP server. page 6-17
Image Output Change the settings for output of the image used for measurement via the Ethernet page 6-18
interface to an external device or for saving it on SD card 2 or USB HDD.
Reference
• Data can be output only in Run mode.

• The SD card 1 cannot be specified as the data output destination.
Displaying [Output Settings] Screen Judgment Settings

Selects the tool as a target of the total status and partial
Click the in Setup mode. judgment.
The "Output Settings" screen will be displayed.
Total Status
The value of the logical add (OR) for the tool judgment.
1 In the left part of the [Output Settings] screen (page

6-4), select [Judgment Settings].
The [Judgment Settings] screen appears.
6-4 LJ-X UM_GB

2 Click the [Total Status] tab.

OR Terminal
This unit's OR terminal’s output method can be changed.
Reference
For details on OR terminal output, see "Terminal Block Interface

(LJ-XXX Series)" ().
1 On the left side of the "Output Settings" screen

(page 6-4), click "OR Terminal".
The [OR Terminal Output Settings] screen appears.
3 Specify the tool as a target of total status.
Partial Judgment
The value of the logical add (OR) or logical multiply (AND)
of the judged value for the selected tool or judged group.
1 In the left part of the [Output Settings] screen (page

6-4), select [Judgment Settings].
Display/Output
The [Judgment Settings] screen appears. 2 Select the output method in the [OR Terminal
Output Mode] field.
2 Click the [Partial Judgment] tab. • Update Every Judge: Outputs for each total status in
synchronization with STO. The timing of STO can be set
from [External Terminal] (page 8-2).
• Hold Output Status: Once NG judgment is output, NG
status is held regardless of subsequent judgment results.
To cancel this, it is necessary to reset the unit (it is
canceled also when moving from Run mode to Setup
mode).
• One Shot Output: If an NG occurs, the OR terminal is
ON only for the duration set in [One Shot Time] and it is
then OFF.
3 Select the output timing in the [OR Terminal Output

Timing] field.
• Output on NG Status: Outputs when judged as NG.
3 Click [Add]. • Output on OK Status: Outputs when judged as OK.
The partial judgment group is added.
4 Click [Judgment Settings] and specify the tool for
judgment and the partial judgment.
5 Select [Condition Logic].

• OR: If there is even one NG in the items specified in
[Judgment Settings], judges as NG.
• AND: Only when all items specified in [Judgment
Settings] are NG, judges as NG.
LJ-X UM_GB 6-5

6 Select the output item.

OUT Terminal • None: Output is not performed.
• Total Judgment: Outputs the total judgment result.
Sets the output items of [Total Judgment], [Tool Judgment],
• Partial Judgment: Outputs the desired partial
[In-Tool Judgment], and [Partial Judgment] which are
judgment results
output from the unit’s parallel I/O interface.
• Tool Judgment: Output any tool judgment result.
1 On the left side of the "Output Settings" screen • Tool Inside Judgment: Output any tool inside
(page 6-4), click "Out terminal". judgment result.
The [OUT Terminal Output Settings] screen appears. If multiple judgments or tools are allocated in [Partial
Judgment], [Tool Judgment] or [In-Tool Judgment], the
logical addition (OR) for each judgment value is output.
7 Select the output timing in the [Output Timing]

field.
• On NG Status: Outputs when the judgment result is NG.
• On OK Status: Outputs when the judgment result is OK.
8 Check [Do Not Output When Tool(s) Unexecuted] if

output is not to be executed when the
measurement specified in Step 3 is not executed.
When a check is placed, output is not done when a tool is
skipped due to the execute condition or it is not executed
due to settings errors. Check this option if [On OK Status]
2 Specify the number of outputs from 1 to 8 with the was selected in Step 7 and the OUT terminal must not
"Output Times" field. become ON when the specified measurement is not
Display/Output
Output Times tabs are displayed matching the specified executed.

number of outputs.
3 Select the output method in the [OUT Terminal
Output Mode] field.
RS-232C (non-procedural)
• Update Every Judge: Outputs for each judgment in
synchronization with STO. The timing of STO can be set Output details such as measured value, judgment result,
via “External terminal” (page 8-2). number of measurement, etc. are specified for output in
• One Shot Output: If an NG occurs, the OUT terminal is RS-232C non-procedural communication of this unit. The
ON only for the duration set in [One Shot Time] and it is data to be output and the output order in accordance with
then OFF. the environment in which the system can be specified.
Reference
Reference
The "OUT Terminal Output Method" setting is only enabled when If an overflow occurs from the unit’s output buffer, measurement
Output Times is set to 1. data (measured value, judgment values, etc.) may be omitted from
4 Click on the Output Times tab to configure the the output.
required output items.
5 Click [Output Items] of the desired output terminal

for change of allocation. (page 6-4), click "RS-232C(non-procedural)".

The [Output Item Settings] screen appears. The [RS-232C (Non-procedural) Output Settings] screen
appears.
6-6 LJ-X UM_GB

• If a delimiter is required, add the string item for output of

the delimiter.
4 If there are other desired items for output, repeat

step 3.
6 To change the output format, click the of the

output item to be changed and change the setting
on the [Output Format Settings] screen.
Check [Customize Format] and specify the number of
output digits and the use or non-use of the plus sign and
the zero suppression process. When [Use For All Output
Data] is checked, the same setting can be reflected to the
The default is set to no output of data.
other output items as well.
2 Click [Select Data].
7 In [Result Output at Skipped Tool], select the action
The [Output Item Settings] screen appears.
when the measurement specified in Step 3 is
3 Select the item for output and click [Add]. skipped by the execute condition or when no
Added items are shown on the list and items are output in execution occurs due to setting error.
the order from the top. • Output "0": When the specified tool is not executed,
outputs "0".
Measured value • None: Nothing is output.
Click the [Measured Value] tab, select the tool for outputting
the measured value and the measured value, then click 8 In [Data Delimiter], select the delimiter character to
place between output data.
Display/Output
[Add].
Judgment value 9 After completing the setting, click [OK].
Click the [Judgment Value] tab and select the Judgment

value for output (0: OK: 1: NG). Changing the output order
Variables After selecting the output item for change of sequence in
Click the [Variables] tab and select the item for output. the output data display, click or .
• Number of Measurement: Outputs the number of
measurement in a 10-digit number. Delete the item to stop the output
• OK Count: Outputs the OK count in a 10-digit number.
• NG Count: Outputs the NG count in a 10-digit number. After selecting the output item for discontinuing output in
• Measurement Time: The measurement time is output the output data display, click .
in the form of integer 7 digits + decimal number 1 digit
(Unit: ms). Temporarily stop output for each output item
• Trigger Interval: Outputs the trigger interval in 7
integers + 1 decimal digit (Unit: ms). Uncheck the boxes to the left of the output items to
• Date & Time: The measurement date and time is temporarily stop output for in the output data display.
output for date and time in 2 digits for each
(YYMMDDHHMMSS).
Ethernet (non-procedural)
• Screening Correction Factor: Outputs the screening
correction factors (X direction, Y direction, longitudinal Output details such as measured value, judgment result,
direction). number of measurement, etc. are specified for output in
• Execute No.: Outputs the execute No. at the time of Ethernet interface non-procedural communication of this
measurement in a 2-digit number. unit. The data to be output and the output order in
accordance with the environment in which the system can
Symbol
be specified.
Click the [Symbols] tab and select the item for output.
Reference
String If an overflow occurs from the unit’s output buffer, measurement
Click the [String] tab, then click [Add] and input the desired data (measured value, judgment values, etc.) may be omitted from
string for output. the output.
• A delimiter (,) is not output after the output of symbols
and character strings.
LJ-X UM_GB 6-7

1 On the left side of the "Output Settings" screen String

(page 6-4), click "Ethernet (non-procedural)". Click the [String] tab, then click [Add] and input the desired
The [Ethernet (Non-procedural) Output Settings] screen string for output.
appears. • A delimiter (,) is not output after the output of symbols
the delimiter.

step 3.

Data] is checked, the same setting can be reflected to the
2 Click [Select Data]. other output items as well.
3 Select the item for output and click [Add]. when the measurement specified in Step 3 is
Added items are shown on the list and items are output in skipped by the execute condition or when no
the order from the top. execution occurs due to setting error.
Display/Output
• Output "0": When the specified tool is not executed,

Measured value outputs "0".
Click the [Measured Value] tab, select the tool for outputting • None: Nothing is output.
the measured value and the measured value, then click
[Add]. 8 In [Data Delimiter], select the delimiter character to
place between output data.
Judgment value
value for output (0: OK, 1: NG).

Changing the output order
Variables
Click the [Variables] tab and select the item for output. After selecting the output item for change of sequence in
• Number of Measurement: Outputs the number of the output data display, click or .
measurement in a 10-digit number.
Delete the item to stop the output
• NG Count: Outputs the NG count in a 10-digit number.
• Measurement Time: The measurement time is output After selecting the output item for discontinuing output in
in the form of integer 7 digits + decimal number 1 digit the output data display, click .
(Unit: ms).
Temporarily stop output for each output item
integers + 1 decimal digit (Unit: ms).
• Date & Time: The measurement date and time is Uncheck the boxes to the left of the output items to
output for date and time in 2 digits for each temporarily stop output for in the output data display.
(YYMMDDHHMMSS).
correction factors (X direction, Y direction, longitudinal
direction).
• Execute No.: Outputs the execute No. at the time of
Symbol
6-8 LJ-X UM_GB

• Date & Time: The measurement date and time is

SD Card 2 output for date and time in 2 digits for each
(YYMMDDHHMMSS).
Output details such as measured value, judgment result,
number of measurement, etc. are specified for saving on
the SD card (SD card 2) inserted in the SD2 slot. The data
direction).
to be output and the output order in accordance with the
environment in which the system can be specified.
Reference
If an overflow occurs from the unit’s output buffer, measurement Symbol

data (measured value, judgment values, etc.) may be omitted from Click the [Symbols] tab and select the item for output.
the output.
String
Click the [String] tab, then click [Add] and input the desired
string for output.
(page 6-4), click "SD Card 2". • A delimiter (,) is not output after the output of symbols
The [SD Card 2 Output Settings] screen appears. and character strings.
the delimiter.

step 3.
Display/Output
The default is set to no output of data. Data] is checked, the same setting can be reflected to the
The [Output Item Settings] screen appears. 7 In [Result Output at Skipped Tool], select the action
3 Select the item for output and click [Add]. skipped by the execute condition or when no
Added items are shown on the list and items are output in execution occurs due to setting error.
the order from the top. • Output "0": When the specified tool is not executed,
outputs "0".
Measured value
• None: Nothing is output.
the measured value and the measured value, then click 8 After completing the setting, click [OK].
[Add].
Judgment value Changing the output order

Click the [Judgment Value] tab and select the Judgment After selecting the output item for change of sequence in
value for output (0: OK, 1: NG). the output data display, click or .
Variables
Click the [Variables] tab and select the item for output. Delete the item to stop the output
After selecting the output item for discontinuing output in
the output data display, click .
• Measurement Time: The measurement time is output
(Unit: ms).
LJ-X UM_GB 6-9

Temporarily stop output for each output item • Measurement Time: The measurement time is output
Uncheck the boxes to the left of the output items to (Unit: ms).
temporarily stop output for in the output data display. • Trigger Interval: Outputs the trigger interval in 7
USB HDD
Output details such as measured value, judgment result, (YYMMDDHHMMSS).
number of measurement, etc. are specified for saving on • Screening Correction Factor: Outputs the screening
the USB HDD. The data to be output and the output order correction factors (X direction, Y direction, longitudinal
in accordance with the environment in which the system direction).
can be specified. • Execute No.: Outputs the execute No. at the time of
Reference
If an overflow occurs from the unit’s output buffer, measurement Symbol

data (measured value, judgment values, etc.) may be omitted from
the output.
String
1 In the left column of the [Display/Output Settings] Click the [String] tab, then click [Add] and input the desired
string for output.
screen (page 6-4), click [USB HDD].
The [USB HDD Output Settings] screen appears.
the delimiter.

Display/Output
step 3.

The default is set to no output of data. Data] is checked, the same setting can be reflected to the
The [Output Item Settings] screen appears. 7 In [Result Output at Skipped Tool], select the action
3 Select the item for output and click [Add].
skipped by the execute condition or when no
Added items are shown on the list and items are output in
execution occurs due to setting error.
the order from the top.
Measured value outputs "0".
Click the [Measured Value] tab, select the tool for outputting • None: Nothing is output.
the measured value and the measured value, then click 8 After completing the setting, click [OK].
[Add].
Judgment value Changing the output order

After selecting the output item for change of sequence in
the output data display, click or .
Variables
Click the [Variables] tab and select the item for output.
Delete the item to stop the output
measurement in a 10-digit number. After selecting the output item for discontinuing output in
• OK Count: Outputs the OK count in a 10-digit number. the output data display, click .
6-10 LJ-X UM_GB

Temporarily stop output for each output item Variables

Uncheck the boxes to the left of the output items to
temporarily stop output for in the output data display.
PC Program • NG Count: Outputs the NG count in a 10-digit number.
Output details such as measured value, judgment result, in the form of integer 7 digits + decimal number 1 digit
number of measurement, etc. are specified for output to the (Unit: ms).
PC program (LJ-X Series Terminal-Software) from this • Trigger Interval: Outputs the trigger interval in 7
unit’s Ethernet interface. The data to be output and the integers + 1 decimal digit (Unit: ms).
output order in accordance with the environment in which • Date & Time: The measurement date and time is
the system can be specified. output for date and time in 2 digits for each
Reference
(YYMMDDHHMMSS).
If an overflow occurs from the unit’s output buffer, measurement • Screening Correction Factor: Outputs the screening
data (measured value, judgment values, etc.) may be omitted from correction factors (X direction, Y direction, longitudinal
the output. direction).
1 In the left column of the [Output Settings] screen
(page 6-4), click [PC Program]. Symbol
The [PC Program Output Settings] screen appears. Click the [Symbols] tab and select the item for output.
String
Click the [String] tab, then click [Add] and input the desired
Display/Output
string for output.
the delimiter.

step 3.
The default is set to no output of data. Changing the output order

2 Click [Select Data]. After selecting the output item for change of sequence in
The [Output Item Settings] screen appears. the output data display, click or .

Added items are shown on the list and items are output in Delete the item to stop the output
the order from the top. After selecting the output item for discontinuing output in
Measured value
[Add].
Judgment value
LJ-X UM_GB 6-11


PLC-Link in the form of 2 words (Unit: ms).
• Trigger Interval: Outputs the trigger interval in 2 words
(Unit: ms).
number of measurement, etc. are specified for output to
PLC-Link (RS-232C) or PLC-Link (Ethernet). The data to
output for year/month/day/hour/minute/second in 2
be output and the output order in accordance with the
words for each.
environment in which the system can be specified.
Reference
If an overflow occurs from the unit’s output buffer, measurement
direction).
the output.
measurement in a 2 words.

step 3.
(page 6-4), click "PLC-Link".
The [PLC-Link Output Settings] screen appears. 5 After completing the setting, click [OK].

outputs "0".
7
Display/Output
After completing the setting, click [OK].

The default is set to no output of data. the output data display, click or .

The [Output Item Settings] screen appears. Delete the item to stop the output
Temporarily stop output
Measured value
Click the [Measured Value] tab, select the tool for outputting Uncheck the [Output] box in the output data display.
[Add].
EtherNet/IP, EtherNet/IP Unit
Judgment value
measurement count, etc. are specified for output via
EtherNet/IP communication from the Ethernet port or from
• Total: Select total judgment or partial judgment.
a connected EtherNet/IP unit (CB-NEP20E: option). The
• Tool Judgment: Click [Add] to display the [Output Item
data to be output and the output order in accordance with
Settings] screen. By assigning any tool judgment value
the environment in which the system can be specified.
to the bit, a maximum of 32 tool judgment values can be
Reference
output in a batch.
Variables data (measured value, judgment values, etc.) may be omitted from
Click the [Variables] tab and select the item for output. the output.
measurement in 2 words.
• OK Count: Outputs the OK count in 2 words.
• NG Count: Outputs the NG count in 2 words.
6-12 LJ-X UM_GB

Setting the bit allocation area output items Setting the byte allocation area output items
1 In the left column of the [Display/Output Settings] 1 In the left column of the [Display/Output Settings]
screen (page 6-4), click [EtherNet/IP] or [EtherNet/ screen (page 6-4), click [EtherNet/IP] or [EtherNet/
IP Unit]. IP Unit].
The [EtherNet/IP Output Settings] or [EtherNet/IP Unit The [EtherNet/IP Output Settings] or [EtherNet/IP Unit
Output Settings] screen appears. Output Settings] screen appears.
2 Click the [Bit Allocation Area] tab. 2 Click the [Byte Allocation Area] tab.
The output settings screen for the bit allocation area The output settings screen for the byte allocation area
appears. appears.
The default is set to no output of data. The default is set to no output of data.
Display/Output
3 Click the [Item to Output] field of the address for 3 Click [Select Data].
change of allocation. The [Output Item Settings] screen appears.
4 Select the output item. Added items are shown on the list and items are output in
• None: Output is not performed. the order from the top.
• Total Judgment: Outputs the total judgment result.
• Partial Judgment: Outputs the desired partial Measured value
judgment results (page 6-5). Click the [Measured Value] tab, select the tool for outputting
• Tool Judgment: Outputs the desired tool judgment the measured value and the measured value, then click
results. [Add].
If multiple judgments or tools are allocated in [Partial
Judgment value
Judgment] or [Tool Judgment], the logical addition (OR) for
each judgment value is output. Click the [Judgment Value] tab and select the Judgment
5 Select the output timing in the [Output Timing] • Total: Select total judgment or partial judgment.
field. • Tool Judgment: Click [Add] to display the [Output Item
• On NG Status: Outputs when the judgment result is NG. Settings] screen. By assigning any tool judgment value
• On OK Status: Outputs when the judgment result is OK. to the bit, a maximum of 32 tool judgment values can be

output in a batch.
LJ-X UM_GB 6-13

Variables
PROFINET, PROFINET Unit
• Number of Measurement: Outputs the number of Output details such as measured value, judgment result,
measurement in 2 words. measurement count, etc. are specified for output via
• OK Count: Outputs the OK count in 2 words. PROFINET communication from the Ethernet port or from a
• NG Count: Outputs the NG count in 2 words. connected PROFINET unit (CB-NPN20E: option). Output
details and output sequence can be specified according to
in the form of 2 words (Unit: ms).
the environment in which the system is used.
Reference
(Unit: ms).
If an overflow occurs from the output buffer of the controller, output
of some measurement data (measured value, judgment values,
output for year/month/day/hour/minute/second in 2
etc.) may be omitted.
words for each.
correction factors (X direction, Y direction, longitudinal Setting the bit allocation area output items
direction).
1 On the left side of the [Output Settings] screen
(page 6-4), click [PROFINET] or [PROFINET Unit].
measurement in a 2 words.
The [PROFINET Output Settings] or [PROFINET Unit
5 If there are other desired items for output, repeat Output Settings] screen appears.
step 4.
2 Left-click the [Bit Allocation Area] tab.
6 After completing the setting, click [OK]. The output settings screen for the bit allocation area

appears.

Display/Output

outputs "0".

Delete the item to stop the output 3 Left-click the [Item to Output] field of the address
for change of allocation.
After selecting the output item for discontinuing output in The [Output Item Settings] screen appears.
4 Select the output item.
• None: Output is not performed.
Temporarily stop output • Total Status: Outputs the total status result.
Uncheck the [Output] box in the output data display. • Partial Judgment: The desired partial judgment
results are output (page 6-5).
• Tool Judgment: The desired tool judgment results
are output.
If multiple judgments or tools are allocated in [Partial
Judgment] or [Tool Judgment], the logical addition (OR)
for each judgment value is output.
6-14 LJ-X UM_GB

5 Select the output timing in the [Output Timing] Variables

field. Left-click the [Variables] tab and select the item for
• On NG Status: Outputs when the judgment result is output.
NG. • Total Count: Measurement count is output in 2 words.
• On OK Status: Outputs when the judgment result is • OK Count: Outputs the OK count in two words.
OK. • NG Count: Outputs the NG count in two words.
• Program Time: Program time is output in 2 words
6 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
(Unit: ms).
• Interval: Outputs the trigger interval in two words.
Setting the byte allocation area output items (Unit: ms).
output as the year/month/day/hour/minute/second in
(page 6-4), click [PROFINET] or [PROFINET Unit].
2 words each.
The [PROFINET Output Settings] screen or
• Scaling Coefficient: Outputs the scaling coefficient
[PROFINET Unit Output Settings] screen appears.
(X, Y, and lengthwise directions).
2 Left-click the [Byte Allocation Area] tab. • Execute No.: Outputs the execute condition No.
The output settings screen for the byte allocation area during measurement in 2 words.
appears.
5 If there are other desired items for output, repeat step 4.

for when the measurement specified in Step 4 is
skipped by the execute condition (page 6-2) or
Display/Output
when no execution occurs due to a setting error.
output "0".
The default is set to no output of data. Changing the output sequence

3 Left-click [Select Data]. After selecting the output item for change of sequence in
The [Output Item Settings] screen appears. the output data display, left-click or .
4 Select the item for output and left-click [Add].

Deleting items canceling output
Added items are shown on the list and items are output
in the order from the top. After selecting the output item for discontinuing output in
the output data display, left-click .
Measured Value
Left-click the [Measured Value] tab, select the desired
Temporarily stopping output
tool for output and the measured value, and left-click
[Add]. Uncheck the [Output] box in the output data display.
Judged Value
Left-click the [Judged Value] tab and select the
judgment value for output (0: OK, 1: NG).
• Total Status: Total Status and Partial Judgment can
be selected.
• Tool Judgment: Left-click [Add] to display the [Output
Item Settings] screen. By allocating any tool
judgment value to the bit, a maximum of 32 tool
judgment values can be output in a batch.
LJ-X UM_GB 6-15


EtherCAT Unit
Output details such as measured value, judgment result, Setting the byte allocation area output items
measurement count, etc. are specified for output via
EtherCAT communication from a connected EtherCAT unit 1 On the left side of the [Output Settings] screen
(CB-NEC20E: option). (page 6-4), click [EtherCAT Unit].
The data to be output and the output order can be specified The [EtherCAT Unit Output Settings] screen appears.
in accordance with the environment of the system.
2 Click the [Byte Allocation Area] tab.
The output settings screen for the byte allocation area
Reference
appears.
the output.
Setting the bit allocation area output items

(page 6-4), click [EtherCAT Unit].
The [EtherCAT Unit Output Settings] screen appears.
2 Click the [Bit Allocation Area] tab.

The output settings screen for the bit allocation area
appears.
Display/Output


Measured value
[Add].
The default is set to no output of data. Judgment value
3 Click the [Item to Output] field of the address for Click the [Judgment Value] tab and select the judgment
change of allocation. value for output (0: OK, 1: NG).
The [Output Item Settings] screen appears. • Total: Select total judgment or partial judgment.
• Tool Judgment: Click [Add] to display the [Output Item
4 Select the output item. Settings] screen. By assigning any tool judgment value
• None: Output is not performed. to the bit, a maximum of 32 tool judgment values can be
• Total Judgment: Outputs the total judgment result. output in a batch.
• Partial Judgment: Outputs the desired partial judgment
results (page 6-5). Variables
• Tool Judgment: Outputs the desired tool judgment Click the [Variables] tab and select the item for output.
results. • Number of Measurement: Outputs the number of
If multiple judgments or tools are allocated in [Partial measurements in 2 words.
Judgment] or [Tool Judgment], the logical addition (OR) • OK Count: Outputs the OK count in 2 words.
for each judgment value is output. • NG Count: Outputs the NG count in 2 words.
• Measurement Time: Outputs the measurement time in 2
5 Select the output timing in the [Output Timing]
words (unit: ms).
field.
• On NG Status: Outputs when the judgment result is NG.
(unit: ms).
• On OK Status: Outputs when the judgment result is OK.
6-16 LJ-X UM_GB

• Date & Time: Outputs the measurement date and time

with 2 words for each of the year, month, day, hour,
FTP
minute, and second.
number of measurement, etc. are specified for output to the
FTP server. The data to be output and the output order in
direction).
accordance with the environment in which the system can
be specified.
measurement with 2 words.
Reference
5 If there are other desired items for output, repeat If an overflow occurs from the unit’s output buffer, measurement
step 4. data (measured value, judgment values, etc.) may be omitted from
the output.
6 After completing the setting, click [OK]. If SFTP is enabled in the FTP client settings (page 8-4), the SFTP

icon will be displayed below the output items list. Only ASCII
characters can be used for the output destination folder and file
names with SFTP.
skipped by the execute condition (page 6-2) or
when no execution occurs due to setting error.
• Output "0": When the specified tool is executed, outputs 1 In the left column of the [Output Settings] screen
"0". (page 6-4), click [FTP].
• None: Nothing is output. The [FTP Output Settings] screen appears.
Changing the output sequence

Display/Output
the output data display, left-click or .
Deleting items canceling output

the output data display, left-click .
Temporarily stopping output

Uncheck the [Output] box in the output data display.

Measured value
[Add].
Judgment value
Variables
LJ-X UM_GB 6-17

• Measurement Time: The measurement time is output Delete the item to stop the output
(Unit: ms). After selecting the output item for discontinuing output in
• Trigger Interval: Outputs the trigger interval in 7 the output data display, click .
• Date & Time: The measurement date and time is Temporarily stop output for each output item
Uncheck the boxes to the left of the output items to
(YYMMDDHHMMSS).
temporarily stop output for in the output data display.
• Judgment Results: Outputs the execution count, OK
count, NG count.
• Screening Correction Factor: Outputs the screening Image Output
direction). Change the settings for output of the image used for
• Execute No.: Outputs the execute No. at the time of measurement via the Ethernet interface to an external
measurement in a 2-digit number. device or for saving it on SD card 2, USB HDD, or FTP.
Reference
Symbol
If a large number of files is present at the destination folder, it may
Click the [Symbols] tab and select the item for output. take additional time to save.
If [FTP] is selected for the image output location and SFTP transfer
String
(page 8-4) is enabled, only ASCII characters can be used for the
Click the [String] tab, then click [Add] and input the desired folder and file names.
string for output.
and character strings. 1 On the left side of the "Output Settings" screen
• If a delimiter is required, add the string item for output of (page 6-4), click "Image Output".
Display/Output
the delimiter. The "Image Output Settings" screen will be displayed.

step 3.

output digits (integer) and the use or non-use of the plus
sign and the zero suppression process. When [Use For All
Output Data] is checked, the same setting can be reflected
to the other output items as well.

2 To output a image, check [Enable Image Output]
and change output settings.
execution occurs due to setting error. Destination
• Output "0": When the specified tool is not executed, Select the image output destination. When FTP is
outputs "0". selected, specify the output destination folder as well.
Image Output Condition
8 In [Saving Folder], set the FTP server output
Select the image output timing.
destination folder.
Processing Priority
Select whether to prioritize image processing or output
processing when the memory in the controller that is used
Changing the output order for image output is full.
• Image First: Since measurement processing is
prioritized, there may be some omission in the image
output.
• Output First: Since image output is prioritized, image
processing is resumed after image output is completed.
6-18 LJ-X UM_GB

Image to Output use as the specified string is set in [Fixed Name]

Specify the type of image to output. (max. 32-byte characters). If the maximum
• Height Image: Only the height image will be output. sequential number is exceeded, the sequence
• Grayscale Image: Only the grayscale image will be returns to 0. Therefore, older images may be
output. overwritten when folder splitting is set to [None] or
• Height Image + Grayscale Image: The height and [Date], or when the number of images specified in
grayscale images will be output. [No. Images] is larger than the maximum
sequential number.
Naming Rule Specify the [Fixed Name] field or the [External
Click [Advanced Settings] to display the [Advanced Fixed Name 0] to [External Fixed Name 9] fields
Settings] screen. The file saving folder and output file name for the [Character String].
settings for image output can be changed. When the [Fixed Name] is specified, the file name
• Folder Rules: Specifies the method to split the folders is set to the character string entered in the text box
for image output. (max. 32-byte characters).
- No Folder Division: Save all image capture When [External Fixed Name 0] to [External Fixed
images in the designated folder without folder Name 9] are specified, the file name is initially set
division. to the character strings entered in the text boxes
- Switch Date: Create a new folder "YYMMDD" for (max. 64-byte characters). The external fixed
each output to the designated folder and save the name can be updated with the STW command
image from that date in that folder. When the date from an external device.
changes, a new folder is created and the image - Custom: Click [Edit File Name] to display the [Edit
saving location is changed. File Name] screen where [Measured Value],
- Switch Image Count (pages) (initial value): [Judgment Value], [Variables], [Date & Time],
Create a new folder "YYMMDD_HHMMSS" in the [Character String], [External Fixed Name], and
designated folder for each save and save the [Image-specific Information] can be used to edit
Display/Output
image from that date and time in that folder. When the format of the output file name.
the number of files stored in the folder exceeds the • File Format: Select the image save format.
specified value, a new folder is created and the - BMP: Save files as bitmap files.
destination of the image is changed accordingly. - BMP (1/2 thinning)): Vertical and horizontal reduce
- Automatically delete old filters (only during SD the number of pixels to 1/2 in each direction and
card output):If this option is checked, it will be save it in a bitmap format.
automatically deleted from old filters when it - BMP (1/4 thinning): Vertical and horizontal reduce
exceeds the specified upper limit of the number of the number of pixels to 1/4 in each direction and
folders held. Specify the upper limit of folders held save it in a bitmap format.
using the "number of folders held" (initial value: - BMP (1/8 thinning): Vertical and horizontal reduce
10). the number of pixels to 1/8 in each direction and
Point save it in a bitmap format.
• If "automatically delete old filters (only during SD card - JPG: Saves the images in JPEG format.
output)" is checked, the output time is delayed when - PNG (initial configuration value): Saves the
deleting a folder. images in PNG format.
• File Naming Rule: Selects the rule for naming image Point
files. • Images are compressed with the [JPEG] and [PNG] formats,
- Auto (initial value): Names the file "{Date at time of so output may take longer compared to the BMP format.
image output}_HHMMSS_{Number of • For JPEG format images, the measurement results may
measurements}_IMG_{Total judgement}.{File differ from those of images registered with the BMP or PNG
format}" (* Height image= HEIGHT, grayscale format due to image degradation attributable to
compression.
image = INTENSITY)
• Due to image degradation attributable to compression,
The file name will be as (example:
correct height data cannot be obtained if a [JPEG] format
120601_092309_0000000001_IMG_
height image is specified (this degradation does not happen
HEIGHT_OK.bmp). with the [PNG] format because its compression is lossless).
- Serial No.: Names the file "serial No. _character Use the [BMP] or [PNG] save format with height images.
string_IMG_Judgement.File format" (* Height
Reference
image= HEIGHT, grayscale image = INTENSITY)
When [No. Images] is selected in [New Folder Rule], the output
Specify the maximum sequential number in the
folder is created at the time of the first image output after:
[Sequence Limit] field.
- The controller is turned on.
Specify the maximum sequential number in the - The controller is reset.
[Sequence Limit] field, and the character string to - When programs are changed
LJ-X UM_GB 6-19

- When image output settings are changed

- When settings to clear the archived image are changed
- When changed with the OW command

Display/Output
6-20 LJ-X UM_GB

Statistics ..................................................................... 7-33
7
Chapter Set the measurement items for statistics. .............. 7-33
Displaying statistics (Meas.Values List) ................. 7-34
Displaying measured values along the time axis 
(Trend Graph)......................................................... 7-35
Displaying the distribution of measured values
Utility (Histogram)............................................................. 7-36
Evaluating quantitative process capability 
(Process Monitor) ................................................... 7-37
Batch Test................................................................... 7-38
Archived Image Setting ............................................. 7-39
Image Strip Settings .................................................. 7-40
Security Settings........................................................ 7-41
Overview of Utility........................................................ 7-2 Change Account ........................................................ 7-42
3D Observation ............................................................ 7-4 File Management........................................................ 7-43

Check files stored on SD card or USB HDD .......... 7-43
Adjustment Navigation................................................ 7-5
Managing folders and files ..................................... 7-44
Share Judgment Condition ......................................... 7-7 Perform SD card 2 removal processing 
Trace Logs.................................................................... 7-8 (SD card 2 removal) ............................................... 7-46
Collecting Trace Logs .............................................. 7-8 Perform USB HDD removal processing
Viewing Trace Logs.................................................. 7-9 (Remove USB HDD) .............................................. 7-46
Setting the Collection Condition for Trace Logs ..... 7-11 Checking and formatting SD cards and USB HDD
Checking the Communication Data........................ 7-11 (Memory Utility) ...................................................... 7-47
Saving and Importing Trace Logs .......................... 7-13 Remove External Media............................................. 7-48
Removing SD Card 2 ............................................. 7-48
Utility
I/O Monitor .................................................................. 7-15
Removing USB HDD .............................................. 7-48
RS-232C Monitor ........................................................ 7-16
Ethernet Monitor ........................................................ 7-17
PLC-Link Memory Monitor ........................................ 7-18
EtherNet/IP Memory Monitor..................................... 7-19
PROFINET Memory Monitor...................................... 7-20
EtherCAT Memory Monitor ....................................... 7-21
Encoder Monitor ........................................................ 7-22

Monitoring the Encoder Input Status ...................... 7-22
Line Scan Period Changes over Time 
(Trend Graph) ........................................................ 7-22
Scaling Correction ..................................................... 7-24

Convert measurements by multiplying them by a
constant factor........................................................ 7-24
Specify the desired physical size based 
on the actual measurement.................................... 7-25
Operation Screen Setting.......................................... 7-26

Adding new operation screen................................. 7-26
Manage the operation screen settings ................... 7-27
Editing an operation screen ................................... 7-28
Editing display content at the common area .......... 7-29
Editing display content of the data screen ............. 7-29
Editing display content of the measured value....... 7-30
Editing display content of the judgment value ........ 7-31
Editing display content of the string ....................... 7-32
LJ-X UM_GB 7-1

Overview of Utility
Overview of Utility
Click on the menu bar to display the [Utility] screen.

Utility
This function supports the confirmation of the 3D-shape of the object to be observed using the height image.
Adjust according to the navigation (page 7-5).

It can eliminate over-detection and improve yield rate.
Share judgment conditions between tools (page 7-7).

Can share decision criteria by creating groups.
Can check the display of the timing chart format (page 7-8).
By verifying the collected trace logs, the points where the timing of external control and measurement execution can
be efficiently identified as out of sync.
Check the connection status of input/output signals (page 7-15).

The connection status of signals input and output via the I/O connector (parallel I/O interface and terminal block
interface) of this machine can be checked during run mode and setup mode.
Check communication status of RS-232C (non-procedural communication) (page 7-16).

The communication status of signals input and output via the RS-232C connector of the controller can be checked
during Run mode and setup mode.
Check the communication status of Ethernet (non-procedural communication) (page 7-17).

The communication status of signals input and output via the Ethernet connector of the controller can be checked
during Run mode and setup mode.
7-2 LJ-X UM_GB

Overview of Utility
Check the communication status of PLC-Link (page 7-18).

The communication status of data that is input/output by PLC-Link communications can be checked during run mode
and setup mode.
When the communication mode is set to "PLC-Link" in [Environment Setting] → External Input Output Setting → PLC-
Link, it is displayed in the utility.
Check the communication status of EtherNet/IP (page 7-19).
The communication status of data that is input/output by EtherNet/IP of the controller can be checked during run mode
and setup mode.
When [Enable EtherNet/IP communication] is checked in [Environment Setting] → External Input Output Setting →
EtherNet/IP, it is displayed in the utility.
Check the communication status of PROFINET (page 7-20).
The communication status of data that is input/output by PROFINET of the controller can be checked during run mode
and setup mode.
When [Enable PROFINET] is checked in [Environment Setting] → External Input/Output Setting → PROFINET, it is
displayed in the utility.
Check the communication status of EtherCAT (page 7-21).
The communication status of data that is input/output by EtherCAT of the controller can be checked during run mode
and setup mode.
When [Enable EtherCAT] is checked in [Environment Setting] → External Input/Output Setting → EtherCAT, it is
displayed in the utility.
Check the communication status of Encoder Input of the controller. (page 7-22)
Can calculate the image processing results on a pixel-by-pixel basis (page 7-24).
It is possible to handle measured values calculated to actual values via the screen display, judgment, calculation,
external input/output, etc.
A function to add Run mode, custom operation screens (page 7-26).
Utility
Analyzes the operation result (page 7-33).
All measurement results during operation are recorded in the memory of the controller. The statistical results can be
checked/saved during operation in Run and Setup modes.
The measurement result can be verified through editing the settings of the tool together with the archived image (page
7-38).
All of the archived images saved in main unit’s memory can be tested with the current program settings, and then the
tools adjusted based on the results.
Change the save settings of archived images (page 7-39).

The captured image during operation can be saved in the main memory and read out later or retested to check the
measurement value.
Configure the image strip settings (page 7-40).

In addition to the images (archived images) recorded in the controller, the images saved in the SD card or USB HDD or FTP
server can be displayed on the image strip to specify them for re-test.
Protect settings from a third party (page 7-41).

To protect tool settings from a third party, viewing and editing of tool settings can be locked. To prevent diversion of
inspection settings, the controller that can use the inspection settings can be limited.
Change the user account (page 7-42).

For more information about user accounts that are available on this machine, refer to [Restrict User's Operation
Range] (account settings).
Manages the files in the SD card and USB HDD (page 7-43).
From the [Manage Files] screen, the files saved in the SD card and USB HDD can be managed, and the SD card and
USB HDD can be verified/formatted.
Do the removal process for the SD card 2 and USB HDD (page 7-48).
LJ-X UM_GB 7-3

3D Observation
3D Observation
Select [3D Observation] from the utility to display the profile Profile Width
of the position of the measurement line specified on the Specify a profile line width. For example, if 3 is specified, an
image or specify the measurement range on the profile to average profile from 3 measurement lines is obtained.
measure height, distance, and angle.
Profile Calculation Method
Select the profile calculation method to be used.
• Average connection: The profile line is the average of
the profiles obtained from multiple measurement lines.
• Maximum connection: The profile line is maximum
profile that can be obtained from multiple measurement
lines.
• Minimum connection: The profile line is minimum
profile that can be obtained from multiple measurement
lines.
Profile Shape Correction

• Rotation + Projection: Even if the zero plane tilts in
the direction of the cross section or perpendicular to it,
there will be no shape distortion.
Profile is rotated within the cross section, then a vertical
Applying filter in the image (preprocessing)
cross section is projected onto the zero plane.
Filters can be applied in the image. • Rotation Only: Even if the zero plane tilts in the
For details, see "Height measurement filters" (page 5-15). direction of the cross section, there will be no shape
Utility
distortion.
Specify the zero plane (zero plane Profile is rotated within the cross section based on its tilt.
specification) Used for measurement with a cross section parallel to
the Z-axis.
Any surface that is different from the reference plane can
• None: The zero plane’s height is subtracted to calculate
be set as the basis for a 3D measurement.
the profile. If the zero plane tilts, there will be shape
For details, see "Specifying the Measurement Reference
distortion.
Plane" (Zero Plane Specification) (page 5-13).
Effective pixel boundary processing
Select how to process the profile at the boundary between
Measuring height, distance, and angle by
valid and invalid pixels. Affects only the edge and inflection
specifying a profile line (profile line)
point measurements.
Specify a profile line on the image. Measures the height, • Extend Up: Connect the upper limit and valid pixels.
distance, and angle of the profile line relative to the profile • Extend Down: Connect the lower limit and valid pixels.
at which the profile line is located. • None: Do not connect the profile in the border area. This
will mean that edges and inflection points are not
1 In the [3D observation] screen select [Profile Line
detected.
Settings].
The [Profile Line Settings] screen appears. 3 Click [OK].
2 Select the profile line specification method. 4 Click the [Add] of the [Measured Item List].
The [Profile Measurement Type] screen appears.
Profile Line
• 2-Point: Specifies a start and end point in the image,
5 Select a profile measurement type to add and then
select [Add].
and takes a profile line.
For details on the profile measurement that can be used in
• Horizontal line: Draw a straight profile line in the X
3D observation, see the description for profile
direction on the image.
measurement tool (page 5-4).
• Vertical line: Draw a straight profile line in the Y
direction on the image. 6 Specify details for each measurement type and
• Circle: Draw a profile line in a circumferential direction then click [Complete].
on the image.
7-4 LJ-X UM_GB
Adjustment Navigation
Adjustment Navigation
By using a archived NG image, the setting of a tool that 5 Click [Next].

would incorrectly judge the good part as NG can be The [Position Correction Check] screen is displayed, and
adjusted. the image selected in Step 4 is displayed in the [Position
Correction Target] column.
1 Leave a history of NG images in Run mode.
The [Adjustment Navigation] screen appears.
For tools that do not have Position Correction setup, go to

step 11.
6 In the [Position Correction Check Target], select an

image that has not been corrected, and then
click to move to the [Image Adjustment
Utility
The analysis is performed for the archived image, and the Correction Failed] column.
tool that was NG is displayed in the [Tool Number NG
Count Ranking] column on the right side of the screen.
7 Click [Next].
The [Position Correction] screen is displayed, and the
3 Select the tool to be adjusted, and then click [Begin image selected in Step 6 is displayed in the [Correct
Adjustment]. Position Correction] column.
The [OK/NG Selection] screen is displayed, and the image
that is judged to be NG with the selected tool is displayed in
the [Image to be NG in the Target Tool] column.
8 Select the image that needs to be adjusted for

misalignment correction, and then click [Correct
Positron Adjustment Source].
4 In the [Image to be NG in the Target Tool] column, The Position Correction source tool correction screen
select the image that should be OK, and then appears.
click to move to the [Image to be OK in
When more than one Position Correction source
the target tool] column.
tool exists
The [Position Correction Source Tool Select] screen
appears.
LJ-X UM_GB 7-5

From the [Position Correction Source Tool List] column,

select the Position Correction source tool that cannot be
measured correctly, and click [Tool Correction].
9 Correct the setting value of the Position Correction

source tool so that it can be measured correctly.
10When all the images have been correctly position

adjusted, click [Next].
The [Tool Correction] screen is displayed.
11Adjust the setting value of the tool so that the

image in the [Correct to be judged as OK] column
is judged as OK, and the image in the [Correct to
be judged as NG] column is judged as NG.
Which tool to edit can be specified if the tool is a
Utility
dimensions and geometric shape tool with reference to

another tool.
12Click [Complete] when all the image corrections

are done and [No image needs to be corrected] is
displayed.
Continue to make corrections to other tools as needed.
7-6 LJ-X UM_GB

Share Judgment Condition
Share Judgment Condition
Shared judgment conditions can be used for multiple tools. 4 Click "OK".
When the same judgment conditions are used, it is not The judgment conditions are now shared among the tools
necessary to specify the judgment conditions for each tool, selected in Step 3.
helping to reduce the amount of setup work.
A maximum of 100 groups of shared judgment conditions
5 Click "OK".
can be registered.
Canceling judgment condition sharing
1 From on the menu bar, click . 1 On the [Share Judgment Condition] screen, click
The [Share Judgment Condition] screen appears. the group to cancel judgment condition sharing for
to select it.
Utility
2 Click [Add].
The [Share Group Settings] screen appears.
2 Then click at the top right of the screen.
3 Click "OK".
Sharing of judgment conditions is canceled.
Editing judgment condition sharing

New tools can be added or removed from the judgment
conditions.
1 In the [Share Judgment Condition] screen, click the

input column of the share target to be edited.
The [Share Group Settings] screen appears.
2 Change the share settings.

3 Check the boxes of the tools that will share the • Check the box of the tools to add.
same judgment conditions. • Uncheck the boxes of tools to remove from sharing.
Judgment conditions can be shared only by tools that
contain the same judgment conditions. 3 Click [OK].
If more than one tool already has a judgement 4 Click [OK].
condition
If the judgment conditions are different between the
selected tools, the [Judgment Condition Overwrite
Confirmation] screen sppears.
Check the box of the tool with the judgment conditions that
will be kept, then click [OK].
The judgment conditions of the checked tool are kept, and
the judgment conditions of the other tools are overwritten.
LJ-X UM_GB 7-7

Trace Logs
Trace Logs
The status changes (ON/OFF) of the controller terminals,

the commands from connected devices, and the execution
Collecting Trace Logs
status of each tool can be checked on the [Trace Log]
Trace logs are collected from the controller
screen with a timing chart display.
By verifying the trace log collected on the production line, it
is possible to efficiently identify the point where the timing 1 Click the [Go to Run mode] button to switch the
deviation of flow execution and external control occurs and controller to Run mode.
where the processing time is bottlenecked. Data
Point
transmitted in communications with an external device can
Trace logging cannot be started in Setup mode.
be collected to check what data was transmitted and when.
Point
In a controller that is collecting trace logs, processing time occurs
for each event logged. Because of that, if there is a large number
The [Trace Log] screen appears.
of objects to be collected in 1 measurement, the measurement
time of the controller during the collection may vary. If the Point
measurement time variation is a problem, use only the minimum If trace logging has been executed in the past, trace logs that have
required collection targets. been collected previously are displayed on the [Trace Log] screen.
Previously collected trace logs are cleared when collection is
started anew.
Trace Logs Recording Targets
The trace log records the running state of the connected
controller in units called "events" immediately after the start
of the collection. An event is a change point for each
Utility
collection target, such as the following:

• Terminal ON/OFF (1 event at ON, 1 event at OFF)
• Program settings and tool beginning/completion (1 event
when beginning, 1 event when completing)
• Accepting/completing a command (1 event when accepting,
1 event when completing)
Trace Logs Recording Amount

The maximum number of collected events in the trace log is
15000.
3 Click [Condition Setting] and specify the logging
condition as necessary.
When the total number of events for all items to be
For details on trace log collection condition setting,see
collected reaches the maximum number after the start of
"Setting the Collection Condition for Trace Logs" (page 7-
collection, the collection continues by overwritting the old
11).
event records.
Reference
Limiting the logging targets to the bare essentials can reduce the
impact on controller measurement time.
4 Click [Record].
Trace log collection will start in accordance with the logging
condition.
Reference
This is available only on the operation screen.
5 Execute the inspection.
7-8 LJ-X UM_GB

Trace Logs
6 Click [Stop].
Viewing Trace Logs
Moving to Setup mode automatically stops
NOTICE
trace logging. The collected trace logs are displayed on the [Trace Log]
screen.
The collected trace logs are displayed on the [Trace Log]
screen.
Timing Chart
For more details on how to look at the screen, see "Viewing
Trace Logs" (page 7-9). Displays trace logs in the timing chart format.
• Cursor position: After the timing chart are displayed, the
cursor (red line) can be moved by clicking the timing chart.
The value of the cursor position is displayed under [Cursor
Value] in the list of log types.
• Communications data collection position: A blue line is
displayed on the position where communications data was
Utility
collected.
• Program setting: Displayed in a rectangle. The number in
the rectangle is the program setting number.
• Measurement count: Displayed in a rectangle. The number
in the rectangle is the measurement count.
A measurement count for which total status is NG is
displayed with a red frame.
Right-clicking the measurement count and then judgment
value and execution time of each tool are displayed.
The execution time and judgment value for the tools

added can be checked.
• Commands: Displayed in a rectangle. The characters in the
rectangle are the command name. Commands that resulted
in an error are displayed in a yellow frame.
• The statuses of external terminals, PLC-Link, EtherNet/IP,
PROFINET, EtherCAT: Displayed as an ON or OFF
waveform (timing chart).
LJ-X UM_GB 7-9

Trace Logs
Reference
Log Collection Period
• Placing the cursor over the program setting, measurement
count, or commands displays information on the timing chart. Displays the period (YYMMDD HHMMSS msec.) which
indicates when the trace logs displayed on the [Trace Log]
The information displayed according to the cursor position varies
screen were collected.
depending on the type of trace log.
• The scroll bar of the timing chart can be moved using the mouse
wheel. Cursor Position
Displays the time (YYMMDD HHMMSS msec.) of the
Jump position of the cursor that is displayed when the timing
chart is clicked.
Jump to events from the current cursor position on the
timing chart.
• : Moves to the previous event. Until Mouse Cursor
• : Moves to the next event. Displays the relative time from the cursor position (red line)
to the mouse cursor position.
Scale
Record
Enlarge or reduce the scale of the timing chart in the
horizontal direction (time axis). Starts collecting trace logs.
• : Enlarges the scale.
• : Reduces the scale. Stop
• : Adjusts the scale so that the entire trace log
isdisplayed. Ends the collection of trace logs.
Reference
The scale of the timing chart in the horizontal direction (time axis) Import
can also enlarged or reduced by moving the mouse wheel over the
Loads and displays the binary data file of the trace log. For
timing chart.
details, see "Saving and Importing Trace Logs" (page 7-
13).
Utility
List of Log Types

The trace logs to be collected are displayed in a list. Save
Select the check box under [Display] for the log type to Saves the data of the displayed trace log file. For details,
display. To refresh the trace log display, click [Update] in the see "Saving and Importing Trace Logs" (page 7-13).
[Display Target] field.
The value for the position where the cursor (red line) is on
the timing chart is displayed under [Cursor Value]. Condition Setting
Reference This displays the [Trace Logging Condition Setting] screen
• The information for the cursor value varies depending on the (page 7-8) that is used to set the collection condition for
type of trace log. trace logs.
• The selection state of the log type is cleared when the power is
Point
turned off.
The collection condition for trace logs can only be set in Setup
mode.
Display Target
Communicated Data Display
Select the display target and click [Update] to refresh the
trace log display. Displays the collected communication data.
For details, see"Checking the Communication Data" (page
• Display All: Displays the trace log of all log types.
7-11).
• Selected Targets Only: Displays only the trace log of the log
types that have their [Display] check box selected in the list Point
of log types. This can only be displayed when collecting communication data.
Whether or not to collect communication data is set through
Click [Select All] or [Deselect All] to select or clear all the
Condition Setting (page 7-11).
[Display] check boxes in the list of log types at the same
time.
Trigger
A trigger is issued with each click.
Reference
This button is only displayed when the [Trace Log] screen is

displayed in Run mode.
7-10 LJ-X UM_GB

Trace Logs
Setting the Collection Condition for Checking the Communication Data

Trace Logs
The communication data collected can be checked.
Set whether to collect communication data (command • PLC-Link (page 7-11)
parameters, command results, flag details, and so on) • EtherNet/IP, EtherNet/IP unit, PROFINET, PROFINET unit,
transmitted in communications with an external device EtherCAT (page 7-12)
when collecting trace logs. The displayed value is the value of the communication data
Point
at the current cursor position (red line).
The collection condition for trace logs can only be set in Setup Point
mode. This can only be displayed when collecting communication data.
Whether or not to collect communication data is set through
Condition Setting (page 7-11).

The [Trace Log] screen appears. PLC-Link

Utility
2 Click [Condition Setting].
The [Trace Logging Condition Setting] screen appears.
2 Click the point to check the communication data of

on the timing chart.
3 Click [Communicated Data Display].

The [Communicated Data Display (PLC-Link)] screen
appears.
Reference
3 Select the [Collect Communicated Data] check box
The state at the time of logging is displayed for [Mode].
to also collect communication data when collecting
trace logs. 4 Click [Command Data] or [Result Data].
4 After completing the setting, click the [OK] button.

The screen returns to the [Trace Log] screen.
Point
The setting state of the collection condition is saved in the global
settings data (env.dat).
LJ-X UM_GB 7-11

Trace Logs
5 Check the communication data. EtherNet/IP, EtherNet/IP unit, PROFINET,

Command Data List Screen PROFINET unit, EtherCAT
This section explains the EtherNet/IP trace log as an
example.

• Use the down arrow () on the top right corner of the
screen to select the format of the value to monitor from
Hexadecimal, Decimal (unsigned), or Decimal (signed).
• Command Parameter Display Count: To change the
number of command parameters displayed.
• Command Result Display Count: To change the
number of command results displayed. 2 Click the point to check the communication data of
Reference on the timing chart.
• The maximum number of command parameters that can be
displayed is 49.
3 Click [Communicated Data Display].
The [Communicated Data Display (EtherNet/IP)] screen
• The maximum number of command results that can be
appears.
Utility
displayed is 50.
Result Data List Screen
Reference
The state at the time of logging is displayed for [Communication].
4 Click [Receive-Data] or [Send-Data].
• Result Data Display Count: To change the number of
items of results data displayed.
Reference
The maximum number of items of results data that can be

displayed is 200.
6 Click [Close].
7 Click [Close].
7-12 LJ-X UM_GB

Trace Logs
5 Check the communication data.

Saving and Importing Trace Logs
Receive-Data List Screen
The collected trace logs can be saved to and loaded from an SD
card.
Point
Trace logs can be saved and loaded in both Setup mode and Run
mode.
Saving Collected Trace Logs

Save the data of the displayed trace log to an SD card.
1 On the [Trace Log] screen, click [Save].

The [Save] screen appears.
Use the down arrow () on the top right corner of the
Reference
496 bytes of data are displayed in the receive-data list.
Send-Data List Screen

2 Specify [Destination] and [File Name], and then
click [Execute].
Once the trace log has been saved, a notification message
appears.
Utility
Click [Close].
Reference
Saved trace log files can also be opened with the Simulation-
Software. When opening with the Simulation-Software, the trace
log file that has been saved with this procedure, places the file
directly under the SD2 path of the selected workspace and then
execute the importing process of the trace log.
Reference
496 bytes of data are displayed in the send-data list.
6 Click [Close].
7 Click [Close].
LJ-X UM_GB 7-13

Trace Logs
Importing Saved Trace Logs

Load and display trace log files saved in an SD card.
1 On the [Trace Log] screen, click [Import].

The [Import] screen appears.
2 Specify the trace log file to load and click

[Execute].
The trace log file is loaded and displayed on the [Trace
Log] screen.
Utility
7-14 LJ-X UM_GB

I/O Monitor
I/O Monitor
The connection status of signals input and output via the I/

O connector (parallel I/O interface and terminal block
interface) of this machine can be checked during run mode
and setup mode. When proper signal transmission between
the connected devices fails, this feature is very useful as
the connection status of the terminal in this machine can be
verified while the controller and external equipment are
connected.

The [I/O Monitor] screen appears.
Utility
2 Verify the connections.
In [IN] on the left of the screen, input terminal is displayed.
In [OUT] on the right of the screen, output terminal is
displayed.
• The status display of each terminal is updated in real
time in response to input and output signals, and the
check mark is enabled for ON (short circuit) terminal.
• To turn ON a specific output terminal, check [Perform
Forced Output] and then enabled the check mark for the
required terminal (only in setting mode).
3 Select [Close].
LJ-X UM_GB 7-15

RS-232C Monitor
RS-232C Monitor
The communication status of signals input and output via

the RS-232C connector of the controller can be checked
during Run mode and setup mode. When proper data
transmission between the connected devices fails, this
feature is very useful as the communication content can be
connected. The latest communication log for 10 KB can
also be saved.

The [RS-232C Monitor] screen appears.
Utility
2 Verify the communication status.

The current communication status is updated in real time in
response to input and output commands.
• "<" appears at the beginning of the data outputted from
the controller, and ">" appears at the beginning of the
data inputted to the controller.
• Characters other than ASCII code are displayed in
hexadecimal.
3 Perform the following operations , as needed.

• Temporarily stop updating the screen display:
Select [Stop updating].
• Clear communication log: Select [Clear].
• Save communication log on SD card: The file
name "rs_232c_YYMMDD_HHMMSS_{SD card
number}_{Inspection setting number}.log" is saved to "lj-
x3 d/com_log" of SD card 2 when [Save] is selected.
4 Select [Close].
7-16 LJ-X UM_GB

Ethernet Monitor
Ethernet Monitor
The communication status of signals input and output via

the Ethernet connector of the controller can be checked
during Run mode and setup mode. When proper data
transmission between the connected devices fails, this
feature is very useful as the communication content can be
connected. The latest communication log for 10 KB can
also be saved.
The [Ethernet Monitor] screen appears.
Utility
The current communication status is updated in real time in
response to input and output commands.
• "<" appears at the beginning of the data outputted from
the controller, and ">" appears at the beginning of the
data inputted to the controller.
• Characters other than ASCII code are displayed in
hexadecimal.
3 Perform the following operations , as needed.

• Temporarily stop updating the screen display:
Select [Stop updating].
• Clear communication log: Select [Clear].
• Save communication log on SD card: The file
name "Ethernet_YYMMDD_HHMMSS_{SD card
number}_{Inspection setting number}.log" is saved to "lj-
x 3 d/com_log" of SD card 2 when [Save] is selected.
4 Select [Close].
LJ-X UM_GB 7-17

PLC-Link Memory Monitor
PLC-Link Memory Monitor
This monitor is used to check the communication status of Command Data List Screen
the input/output signals of PLC-Link of the controller. When
proper data transmission between the connected devices
fails, this feature is very useful as the communication
content can be verified while the controller and external
equipment are connected.
Reference
• Use of the PLC-link memory monitor is available only when the

PLC-link is enabled.
• When the PLC-link is not connected, monitoring is not possible.
Use the monitor after establishing the PLC-link connection.
The [PLC-Link Memory Monitor] screen appears. • Use the down arrow () on the top right corner of the
• Command Parameter Display Count: To change the
number of command parameters displayed.
• Command Result Display Count: To change the
number of command results displayed.
• Perform Forced Output: Check this box to manually
Utility
change the value for the selected address and confirm

the change on the PLC side.
Result Data List Screen
2 Click [View List] in the [Command Data] field or

[Result Data] field according to the item to be
checked.
Communication Settings
• Result Data Display Count: To change the number of
items of results data displayed.
• Perform Forced Output: Check this box to manually
change the value for the selected address and confirm
the change on the PLC side.
4 Click [Close].
5 Click [Close].
7-18 LJ-X UM_GB

EtherNet/IP Memory Monitor
EtherNet/IP Memory Monitor
This monitor is used to check the communication status of Send-Data List Screen
the input/output signals during EtherNet/IP communication
using the Ethernet port of the controller or an EtherNet/IP
unit (CB-NEP20E: option). When proper data transmission
between the connected devices fails, this feature is very
useful as the communication content can be verified while
the controller and external equipment are connected.
Reference
• Use of the EtherNet/IP memory monitor is available only when

EtherNet/IP [Enabled/Disabled] (page 8-9) is set to [Enable
EtherNet/IP] or [Enable EtherNet/IP unit].
• When EtherNet/IP communication is not connected, monitoring
is not possible.
Use the monitor after establishing this connection.
1 From on the menu bar, click . screen to select the format of the value to monitor from
The [EtherNet/IP Memory Monitor] screen appears. Hexadecimal, Decimal (unsigned), or Decimal (signed).
Manual Output
Check this box to manually change the value for the
selected address and confirm the change on the PLC side.
4 Click [Close].
Utility
5 Click [Close].
2 Click [View List] of either [Receive-Data] or [Send-

Data] according to the items to be checked.
Receive-Data List Screen
LJ-X UM_GB 7-19

PROFINET Memory Monitor
PROFINET Memory Monitor
This monitor is used to check the communication status of Controller send-data list screen
the input/output signals during PROFINET communication
using the Ethernet port of the controller or a PROFINET
unit (CB-NPN20E: option). When proper data transmission
between the connected devices fails, this feature is very
useful as the communication content can be verified while
the controller and external equipment are connected.
Reference
• Use of the PROFINET memory monitor is available only when
PROFINET [Enabled/Disabled] (page 8-11) is set to [Enable
PROFINET] or [Enable PROFINET unit].
• When PROFINET communication is not connected, monitoring
is not possible. Use the monitor after establishing this
connection.
Select at the top right of the byte allocation area to
select hexadecimal display, decimal display
1 From of the menu bar, left-click . (unsigned), or decimal display (signed) for the monitor
The [PROFINET Memory Monitor] screen appears. values.
Manual Output
selected address and confirm the change on the PLC
side.
Utility
4 Left-click [Close].
2 Left-click [View List] of either [Receive-Data] or

[Send-Data] according to the items to be checked.
Controller receive-data list screen

(unsigned), or decimal display (signed) for the monitor
values.
7-20 LJ-X UM_GB

EtherCAT Memory Monitor
EtherCAT Memory Monitor
This monitor is used to check the communication status of Controller send-data list screen
the input/output signals during EtherCAT communication
using an EtherCAT unit (CB-NEC20E: option). When
proper data transmission between the connected devices
fails, this feature is very useful as the communication
content can be verified while the controller and external
equipment are connected.
Reference
• Use of the EtherCAT memory monitor is available only when the
[Enable EtherCAT] setting (page 8-12) is enabled.
• When EtherCAT communication is not connected, monitoring is
not possible. Use the monitor after establishing this connection.
1 From of the menu bar, left-click . Select at the top right of the byte allocation area to
The [EtherCAT Memory Monitor] screen appears. select hexadecimal display, decimal display
values.
Manual Output
selected address and confirm the change on the PLC
side.
Utility
2 Left-click [View List] of either [Receive-Data] or

[Send-Data] according to the items to be checked.
Controller receive-data list screen

values.
LJ-X UM_GB 7-21

Encoder Monitor
Encoder Monitor
Check the communication status of Encoder Input of the

controller. When moving the target workpiece by a fixed
Line Scan Period Changes over Time
distance, the encoder input can be checked to see if it (Trend Graph)
works as expected.
Encoder line scan period changes over time can be
checked with the trend graph display.
Point
The encoder monitor can be used only when "Specify encoder" is
specified for the line scan interval in the line scan setting of the 1 Select [Graph Display] on the [Encoder Monitor]
head setting. screen.
The [Encoder Monitor (Graph)] screen appears.
Monitoring the Encoder Input Status
The [Encoder Monitor] screen appears.

Utility
2 Check the line scan period changes over time.
Graph
The Y axis shows the trigger frequency and the X axis the
Point
The encoder monitor can be displayed even if [Encoder Monitor]
number of points.
displayed for the line scan interval setting in the head settings is The fastest line scan period (yellow line) and the line scan
selected. period (blue line) are displayed on the graph.
Moving Average (For Display)

2 Check the operation status. Select the number of points for the moving average used to
The current encoder information is displayed. calculate the line scan period.
The larger the value, the larger the change in count value
3 Select [Close].
between samples and the smaller the line scan period
error.
Clear
Clears the encoder count value.
Start Collection
Starts collecting the graph data. Collection stops
automatically when the corresponding time elapses.
Graph Data Collection Time

Specifies the time for collecting graph data.
7-22 LJ-X UM_GB

Encoder Monitor
A large frequency may be displayed on the

encoder monitor (graph) when the encoder
count is reset.
NOTICE This occurs because the frequency is
calculated from encoder count changes and
does not indicate that a trigger pass will
occur in the actual measurement.
3 When finished checking the data, select [Close].

The [Encoder Monitor (Graph)] screen closes.
Utility
LJ-X UM_GB 7-23

Scaling Correction
Scaling Correction
Specify a scaling correction value to handle measurements 4 In the [Tools for Scaling] field, specify the tools to
that have been converted into actual size values by apply scaling.
displaying the screen, determining, calculating, external • All: Specifies all tools for scaling correction.
input/output, etc. • Specify: Click [Settings] and specify the tool scaling
correction.
Convert measurements by multiplying 5 After completing the setting, click [OK].

them by a constant factor
If the correction factor is already known, change the setting
so that the measured value is multiplied by a constant
factor.
Reference
The initial value is set according to the connected head.
The [Scaling Correction Settings] screen appears.

Utility
2 To set the scaling factor by X direction/Y direction/

length direction, check the[Setting by Direction].
3 In the [Scaling Correction Factor] [Correction

Factor] column, specify the correction factor
coefficient (how many pixels are converted to 1)
directly, and then select the unit.
7-24 LJ-X UM_GB

Scaling Correction
(Example) Specify the width of a SD card, which is already

Specify the desired physical size known to be 24 mm, with rectangle size
based on the actual measurement
The correction factor is obtained from the measurement
result of the workpiece width or pitch interval whose actual
size value is known. It is convenient to use a ruler or other
tool to determine the length when the target’s length is
unknown.

The [Scaling Correction Settings] screen appears.
2 What is known of the actual value will be imaged.
3 In the [Correction Factor] column, click [Specify

Measurement Result and Actual Measurement 6 Specify the specified/measured width or pitch
Value]. interval dimensions and units in the [Calculate
The [Scaling Correction Factor Settings] screen appears. Correction Factor] column, then click
[Recalculate].
4 Click the tab to convert (X direction/Y direction/
The scaling coefficient is automatically calculated.
length direction), if "Direction Settings" are
enabled. 7 If [Direction Settings] is enabled, click the tabs for
the other conversions (X direction/Y direction/
5 When selecting Spec. Size by Rectangle
length direction) and repeat steps 5 through 6.
Specify the area which you can see the actual size of the
captured workpiece with the size of the area. 8 After completing all conversion settings, select
(Example) Specify the width of a SD card, which is already [OK].
known to be 24 mm, with rectangle size
9 In the [Tools for Scaling] field, specify the tools to
Utility
apply scaling.
correction.
When selecting Meas. Size by Edge

Measure the width or pitch of the object whose actual size
you have already know.The measured value is displayed
[Measurement value] in [Adjustment Coefficient
Calculation].
For more information about measurement of edge, refer to
"What is an edge?" (page A-106).
LJ-X UM_GB 7-25

Operation Screen Setting
Operation Screen Setting
Multiple customized screen displays can be made 3 Select the number of data screens to display in
according to the environments. Appropriate displays can be [Number of Data Screens].
used for different applications or user accounts.
4 Select the base template for desired operation
screen and click [Add].
Adding new operation screen As an example here, the [1 Input Image] of [1 Data Screen]
is selected.
To display the customized operation screen, first an
operation screen must be added.

The [Operation Screen Settings] screen appears.
5 The template selected in Step 4 is added as the

operation screen and the screen returns to the
Utility
[Operation Screen Settings] screen.

Measured values or judgment values can be added on the
added operation screen or the display details of the data
screen can be changed. For details, see"Editing an
2 Click [Add New].
operation screen" (page 7-28).
The [Operation Screen Catalog] screen appears.
6 Click [Save] to save the settings data of the
operation screen.
7 Click [End].
7-26 LJ-X UM_GB

Manage the operation screen Limiting operation screen which can be used
settings for each user account
1 Click [Display Options] on the [Operation Screen
Copy and add operation screen Settings] screen.
Select the operation screen to copy in the [Operation The [Operation Screen Display Settings] screen appears.
Screen Settings] screen, and then click .
Delete an operation screen

1 Select the operation screen to delete in the
[Operation Screen Settings] screen, and then click
.
2 Click [OK].
Change the name of the operation screen.

1 Select the operation screen to change the name of 2 Select the operation screens and the default which
can be used for each account.
in the [Operation Screen Settings] screen, and then
• Display: Check on the operation screens which can be
click [Rename].
used.
The [Rename] screen appears. • Default: Select the operation screen type which is
2 Enter the new name, then click [OK].
displayed as default at start-up of this machine or at
change of the user account.
Utility
Verifying display content of the operation Click [OK].
screen (preview)
Select the operation screen to verify the display
contents of in the [Operation Screen Settings]
screen, and then click [Preview].
The operation screen is displayed in full screen view.
After confirmation, click [Preview] again.
LJ-X UM_GB 7-27

Editing an operation screen Placing a new part that was added.

1 Right-click any position on the screen.
Editing an operation screen The context menu appears.
The operation screen can be edited in the [Operation 2 Select [Add].

Screen Settings] screen by clicking [Edit]. The selected part is added onto the operation screen, and
the settings screen for the selected part is displayed.
3 Edit part details.
4 According to the displayed contents, drag the

handle of the outer frame of the part to change the
size.
5 After adding the part and changing settings, click

[Done].
The screen returns to the [Operation Screen Settings]
screen.
Deleting parts
Editing part details 1 Right-click the desired part for deletion and select
[Delete] from the context menu.
1 Click the part to edit.
[Edit] is displayed in the upper right. 2 After deletion is complete, click [Settings
Complete].
2 Click [Edit]. The screen returns to the [Operation Screen Settings]
The selected parts’ settings screen appears. screen.
Utility
• Measurement value: See "Editing display content of the

measured value" (page 7-30).
• Judgment value: See "Editing display content of the
judgment value" (page 7-31).
• Character string: See "Editing display content of the
string" (page 7-32).
3 Edit the part, then click [OK].
4 When editing of the operation screen is complete,

click [Settings Complete].
screen.
Moving parts
1 Click the part to move.
[Edit] is displayed in the upper right.
2 Drag from within the frame of the displayed part to

moving the part.
Drag the handle of the outer frame to change the size.
3 After completing the move, click [Settings

Complete].
screen.
7-28 LJ-X UM_GB

Editing display content at the common Editing display content of the data
area screen
Display content at the common area at the upper part of the 1 Select the desired data screen for editing the
screen can be edited. display content of, and click [Edit].
1 Click the common area and click [Edit]. The [Edit Data Display] screen appears.
The [Parts Settings] screen appears.
2 Change the settings.

Reference
Click [Transparent] to check the area hidden by the [Edit Data

Display] screen in transparent mode. To return to the original
display, click [Transparent] again.
2 Uncheck items not to be displayed. Display Image

Select the image type to display.
3 After completing the setting, click [OK]. • Input image: Displays the image captured most
recently.
• Standard image: Displays the standard image
corresponding to the tool selected.
Utility
• NG archived image: Displays the archived image in
the event of an NG judgment.
• Archived image: Displays the archived image.
• Display target generation: Specify the generation to
be displayed for the NG archived image or the archived
image. Depending on the type of head of cameras
connected, and the contents of the program settings, the
range of the generation that can be set is different. This
setting item is only displayed when NG archived images
or archived images are selected as the displayed
images.
• NG tool display: When NG has occurred in the tool
specified in [Display Target Tool], the tool that NG has
occurred in is displayed. This setting item is only
displayed when NG archived images are selected as
the displayed images.
Fit
Selects automatic zoom-in/out (fit display) suitable for the
display image size.
• Screen size: Displays in fit according to the screen size.
• Measurement region: Displays in fit according to the
measurement region of selected tool.
• Position detection: For the tool that measures the
position, displays in fit so that the detection position may
be at the center. For other tools, displays in fit so that the
inspection region position may be at the center.
LJ-X UM_GB 7-29

Display Target Tools

Editing display content of the measured
Select the tool for display target.
• All: Specifies all tools for display.
value
• Select: Specifies only specific tools for display. Click
1 Select the desired measured value for editing the
[Select Tool] to display the [Select Tool] screen. Check
display content of, and click [Edit].
the tool for display and click [OK].
The [Edit Measured Value] screen appears.
Display Label
The labels linked to the data status will be displayed at the
top of the total judgment. If the [NG Archived Image] is
selected in [Display Image], the updated date will be
displayed at the bottom of the data screen.
Display Items
Click to display the [Select Display Item] screen. After
selecting the measured value Variables or String for
display, click [Add].
Display Link Settings

Utility
When multiple data screens are placed on the operation

screen, select which data screen’s measured value is to be
displayed. Click to display the [Image Display Link Settings]
data screen. In [Display Link], select the target screen.
Display Options
Since when clicking the [Display Options] screen is
displayed, and set the display method of the measured
value.
• Display Options
- Display: Check for display of the measurement
value on the operation screens.
- Color a background: Check for coloring the
background.
- Display style: Select the style from Basic Style
and Table Style.
7-30 LJ-X UM_GB

• Measured Value Setting

- Font size: Select the display size of the measured
Editing display content of the judgment
value. value
- Label: Check for display of the label of measured
value.
1 Select the desired judgment value for editing the
- Measurement value Check for display of the display content of, and click [Edit].
measured value. The [Edit Judgment Value] screen appears.
- Upper/lower limit: Check for display of upper/lower
limits (valid when [Table Style] is selected).
- Judgment value: Check for display of judgment
value (OK/NG).
• [String Settings] (valid when [Basic Style] is
selected)
- Font size: Select the display size of the string.
- Text color: Select the display color of the string.
- Background color: Select the background color
of the string.
Display Items
Click to display the [Select Display Item] screen. After
selecting the measured value for display, click [Add].
Display Link Settings

When multiple data screens are placed on the operation
Utility
screen, select which data screen’s judgment value is to be
displayed. Click to display the [Image Display Link Settings]
data screen. In [Display Link], select the target screen.
Display Options
Since when clicking [Display Options] the screen is
displayed, set the display method of the judgment value.
• Display Options
- Display: Check for display of the judgment value
on the operation screens.
background.
LJ-X UM_GB 7-31

• Judgment Value Settings

- Font size: Select the display size of the judgment
Editing display content of the string
value.
1 Select the desired string for editing the display
- Label: Check for display of the label of judgment
content of, and click [Edit].
value.
- Judgment value: Check for display of judgment The [Edit String] screen appears.
value (OK/NG).
• String settings
of the string.
Add
Click to add a string for display on the operation screen.
The [String] screen appears. Enter the string for display.
Display Options
Select the desired string for change of display on the [Edit
String] screen and click. The [Display Options] screen
appears. Set the display method of the string.
Utility
• Display Options
- Display: Check for display of the character string
on the operation screens.
background.
• String settings
of the string.
7-32 LJ-X UM_GB

Statistics
Statistics
When measurement results are set as statistical targets in 3 Select the item for statistics and click [Add].
advance, the results can be recorded in the memory of the If there are other desired items for addition, repeat this
main unit during operation, and the statistical results can be step.
checked and saved. In operation mode, the statistics and
graphs are updated in real time and the upper and lower
tolerances can be changed, so it is convenient to check the

optimal tolerances from the statistics and understand the Deleting measurement items from statistics
status of the inspection process during operation in the test target
run before introduction.
To delete some or all of the measurement items displayed
on the setting screen of the Select Data.
Set the measurement items for
In [List Selected] of the [Select Statistics Target]
statistics.
screen, select the data to be excluded from the
Specify the measurement item of the tool subject to statistics target and click .
statistics (only in the setting mode). The measurement
items of the tools with the tolerance already set are
automatically added to the statistics.

The [Statistics] screen appears.
Utility
2 Click [Select Data] at the lower left of the screen.
The [Select Statistics Target] screen appears.
LJ-X UM_GB 7-33

Statistics
6 To adjust the tolerance, directly change the [Upper]

Displaying statistics (Meas.Values List) or [Lower] value, then click [OK].
The judgment record changes according to the changed
The statistical results of items specified as the target for the
lower and upper limits. Make adjustments while observing
statistics can be checked numerically. In addition to
changes such as yield, etc.
checking the statistics such as OK/NG judgment number
By clicking on [Tolerance Calculation], the result of adding
and deviation for each item, process capability index (Cpu,
to/subtracting from the average value by multiplying the
Cpl, Cpk), measurement values and judgment results can
deviation value of the measurement item by an arbitrary
also be saved to the SD card 2. In addition, it is also
scale factor can be automatically set as the upper/lower
possible to analyze the cause of NG by matching the image
limits of the tolerance.
data recorded in the image archives.

Reference
Items whose limits are to be adjusted in Run mode must be

registered beforehand in the Custom Menu with the [Permit to
Change Judgment Conditions in Run mode] option enabled.
7 After checking is complete, click [OK].
Save the recorded measurement results on

the SD card 2 (Export)
The currently recorded measurement results, judgment
2 results, and measurement item names as text data can be

Utility
Click the [Measured Value List] tab.

selected and saved while the SD card 2 is inserted in this
The measured value list screen appears.
unit.
3 In [Select Tool] and [Select Measured Value] on the The measurement item name and measurement results
left of the screen, select the tool and the measured (number of measurement/statistical target/individual
value to check. judgment) are saved in a csv text file as "{save date}_{save
The specified statistical values displayed. time}_{SD card number}_{inspection setting
number}_dat.csv" to "lj-x3d/stat" of SD card 2.
4 To check the measured value of each item, move
the cursor to the measurement item list part.
If an NG occurs at the time of measurement, an NG icon
appears at the left side of number of measurement. If the
item is OK or no limit is set, an OK icon appears.
5 To display the image at the time of measurement,

select the number of measurements displayed with
[*].
Double-click the number of measurement displayed with [*]
to display the image saved at the time of the measurement.
7-34 LJ-X UM_GB

Statistics
Displaying measured values along the Zoom in/out the trend graph display
time axis (Trend Graph) The trend graph size can be enlarged or reduced. During
Run mode, click [Stop] to stop updating the graph and
Measured values can be displayed along the time axis zoom in/out of the graph for an enlarged/reduced view.
(Trend Graph). This function is useful for checking how • : Click at any place to display the upper/lower/left/right
data is changing over the course of time or several buttons. The image can be zoomed in/out with the zoom
inspections during Run mode. cursor position serving as the center.
In Run mode, variation of the graph and the yield rate which • : While keeping zoom-in/out, the display area can be
are updated in real time can be checked, and in the setting moved to a desired place.
mode, the upper and lower tolerance limits can be changed • : Returns the Y-axis direction to the initial automatic
to match the observed data range. The graph also displays adjustment state.
whether the image data was recorded in the image
archives and allows for images to be viewed directly.
Check measured values on the trend graph
1 From on the menu bar, click . Click any point on the graph to display the cursor at the
position. The number of measurement and the measured
value at the cursor position are displayed.
2 Click the [Trend Graph] tab.
The [Trend Graph] screen appears.
Utility
Check the image saved on the trend graph
3 In [Select Tool] and [Select Measured Value] on the
With respect to the measurement result for which the image
left of the screen, select the tool and the measured
is saved in the image archives,  is displayed on the trend
value to check.
graph when the cursor bar is displayed,
The trend graph of the specified measured value appears.
By clicking on the displayed area of , the image saved at
4 To adjust the tolerance, directly change the [Upper the time of the measurement gets displayed.
Limit] or [Lower Limit] value, then click [OK].
Tolerances can also be adjusted by dragging the upper or
bottom bar up and down.
At the time of change, the judgment result and the yield
change in conjunction with the upper and lower limit
values. Make adjustments while observing changes such
as yield, etc.
Reference

LJ-X UM_GB 7-35

Statistics
Displaying the distribution of measured Zooming IN/OUT of the displayed image

values (Histogram) The trend graph size can be enlarged or reduced. During
Run mode, click [Stop] to stop updating the graph and
This can be used to display the distribution of values as a zoom in/out of the graph for an enlarged/reduced view.
histogram. This function allows the user to visually grasp • : Click at any place to display the upper/lower/left/right
the overall dispersion of measured values, so it is useful buttons. The image can be zoomed in/out with the zoom
when adjusting tolerance level. cursor position serving as the center.
In Run mode, variation of the graph and the yield rate which • : While keeping zoom-in/out, the display area can be
are updated in real time can be checked, and in the setting moved to a desired place.
mode, the upper and lower tolerance limits can be changed • : Returns the Y-axis direction to the initial automatic
to match the observed data range. The graph also displays adjustment state.
whether the image data was recorded in the image
archives and allows for images to be viewed directly.
Check the measured value on the histogram
1 From on the menu bar, click . Click any point on the graph to display the cursor at the
position. The record count and the measured value range
at the cursor position are displayed.
2 Click the [Histogram] tab.
The [Histogram] screen appears.
Utility
Check the image saved on the histogram

With respect to the measurement result for which the image
is saved in the image archives,  is displayed on the
value to check.
histogram when the cursor bar is selected.
Histogram of the specified measured value is displayed.
By clicking on the displayed area of , the image saved at
4 To adjust the tolerance, directly change the [Upper the time of the measurement will be displayed in test mode.
Limit] or [Lower Limit] value, then click [OK].
Tolerances can also be adjusted by dragging the upper or
lower bars left and right.
At the time of change, the judgment result and the yield
change in conjunction with the upper and lower limit
values. Make adjustments while observing changes such
as yield, etc.
Reference

7-36 LJ-X UM_GB

Statistics
Evaluating quantitative process Zooming IN/OUT of the graph display of the

capability (Process Monitor) process monitor
The graph display of the process monitor can be enlarged
The current values of yield rate and process capability
or reduced. During Run mode, click [Stop] to stop updating
index or change with time can be monitored. It is useful to
the graph and zoom in/out of the graph for an enlarged/
analyze the inspection process in statistical perspective
reduced view.
without being subject to the influence of the judgment
• : Click at any place to display the upper/lower/left/right
results of each object.
buttons. The image can be zoomed in/out with the zoom
cursor position serving as the center.
1 From on the menu bar, click . • : While keeping zoom-in/out, the display area can be
The [Statistics] screen appears. moved to a desired place.
• : Returns the Y-axis direction to the initial automatic
2 Click the [Process Monitor] tab. adjustment state.
The Process Monitor screen appears.
Save the recorded measurement results on

the SD card 2 (Export)
If you select [Save] while the SD card 2 is inserted in this
unit, you can save the currently recorded measurement
results, judgment results, and measurement item names as
text data.
The measurement results (number of measurement in
plotting/yield/Cpk/Cpu/Cpl) are saved in a csv text file as
"{save date}_{save time}_{SD card number}_{inspection
setting number}_stat.csv” to “lj-x3d/stat" of SD card 2.
Utility
value to check.
4 In the menu at the upper part of the graph, select

the desired item for display.
Yield Rate
Displays the quality ratio of the inspection process.
Cpk
Displays the process capability index which is one of the
indexes used to evaluate the process capability of a
process quantitatively. The smaller value between Cpu and
Cpl is used.
Cpu
Displays the process capability index only for the upper
limit standard.
Cpl
Displays the process capability index only for the lower limit
standard.
5 Click on the [MANUAL Settings] to change the plot

interval of graph display.
As the [MANUAL Settings] screen appears, adjust the plot
interval of graph display.
Reference
You can adjust the plot interval of the graph display only when
using the process monitor in setting mode.
LJ-X UM_GB 7-37

Batch Test
Batch Test
Since the tool setting values based on the past archived

image (images on the image strip) are adjusted, they can
be re-tested in batch. Here is an example of adjusting the
tool judged NG to be OK.
1 In Run mode, you can leave a archive of the image,

and then switch to the setting mode.
The [Batch Test Results] screen will be displayed.

Utility
3 In [Tool], select the target tool for adjustment and

in [Test Target], select the image which has been
judged NG during measurement.
4 Click [Edit Tool].

The edit screen of the target tool appears.
5 Adjust the setting values of OK and judgment.
6 When the adjustment is finished, click [Batch Test]

to confirm that there is no effect other than the
adjusted image.
7-38 LJ-X UM_GB

Archived Image Setting
Archived Image Setting
The captured image during operation can be saved in the 3 Click [Settings] in [Memory Allocation] to specify
image buffer memory of the controller and read out later. whether to allocate the memory in the main unit in
You can also re-measure with the read image and check favor of archive accumulation or image output
the measurement value. This is useful when you want to according to your needs.
check the image at a later time when NG occurs while • Allocation in favor of archive accumulation:
operating. Memory is prioritized so that more archived images can
Reference
be left.
Since the archived image is saved in the image buffer memory of • Allocation in favor of image output: Use memory
this machine, the saved image will be erased in the following as a buffer for image output.
cases. When you want to preserve the saved image, save it to SD • Allocation with the same priority for archive
card 2, USB HDD, FTP server. storage and image output: Use memory equally for
• When this machine is turned off archive accumulation and image output.
• When the RESET operation is performed
Reference
• When program settings are changed
Depending on the settings, whether you select [Allocate in Favor
• When the model, or number of head to be connected is changed
of History Accumulation] or [Allocate in Favor of Image Output],
• When the image condition of the connected head is changed
the number of archive accumulations may not change.
• When the storage condition of the archived image setting is
changed 4 After completing the setting, click [OK].
• When the settings related to the NG archived image on the
operation screen settings is changed
Number of images that can be saved
The number of images you can be saved depends on the
1 From on the menu bar, click . settings and the combination of the connected head and
Utility
The [Archived Image Settings] screen appears. the number of pixels in the Y direction.
Reference
The accumulated archived image in the image strip can be

checked (Max. 1024 times) or specified as an archived image in
the operation screen setting (Max. 300 times). Over that that can
be used as a buffer for image output.
2 In the [Archive Storage Condition] column, select

the storage condition of the archived image.
• Auto (initial value): Record all captured images. Since
the NG archived image is recorded in another area in the
memory, the NG archived image is not overwritten as
long as the number of NG times does not exceed a
certain number.
• Latest: Records all captured images. In order to record
the OK archived image and the NG archived image in
the same region in the memory without distinction, more
recent archived images compared to [Automatic] can be
accumulated.
• Total Judgment NG: Total judgment will save only the
measurement image of NG.
LJ-X UM_GB 7-39

Image Strip Settings
Image Strip Settings
In addition to the images (archived images) recorded in the

controller, images saved in the SD card or USB HDD or
FTP server can be displayed on the image strip to specify
them for re-test.
Reference
For more information about image strip operations, refer to "Check

Past Image in the Image Strip" (page 3-15).
The [Image Strip Settings] screen appears.

Utility
2 Specify the image to be displayed in the image

strip.
• Displaying the archived images (memory of the
controller) (initial setting): Displays the images stored
in the controller (archived images) on the image strip.
• Displaying the external image file: Displays images
saved in the SD card or USB HDD or FTP server on the
image strip. Specify also the device and read source
folder. If [OK Status] is selected as the Loading
Condition, only OK images can be displayed. If [NG
Status] is selected, only NG images can be displayed.
Reference
The file names ("YYMMDD_HHMMSS_{number of

measurement}_{image name}_{total judgment}.bmp/jpg/png" or
"{serial number}_{specified character string}_{image name}_{total
judgment}.bmp/jpg/png") of image files loaded as external files
must conform to the following image output file naming rules.
Example:190615_123456_0000000001_IMG_HEIGHT_OK.bmp
Point
If [FTP] is selected as the source and SFTP transfer (page 8-4) is
enabled, only ASCII characters can be used for the folder and file
names.
3 In the [Display character Settings], select the text

to display as an explanation for the images below
the image strip image from [Time] (measurement
time) or [Number of Measurement].
7-40 LJ-X UM_GB

Security Settings
Security Settings
To protect tool settings from a third party, viewing and 4 The current settings in controllers other than the
editing of tool settings can be locked. To prevent diversion registered controller ID cannot be used if the check
of inspection settings, the controller that can use the box of "Lock Controller ID" is enabled.
inspection settings can be limited. The controller ID can be checked on the [System
Information] screen (page 8-22).
Security password
Reference
To enable the security function, a password must be set.
If the controller ID is different, the settings cannot be loaded. Input
This password used exclusively for the security function is
of the security password allows for loading of settings. In this case,
required when editing or other operation of the security
the ID of the controller which loaded the settings is automatically
function. Note that the password cannot be changed again registered.
if you forget it. (Password can be set for each inspection
setting). 5 After completing the setting, click [OK].
Change the registered password

1 From on the menu bar, click . 1 Click [Change Password] in the [Security
The [Security Settings] screen appears. Password] field.
The [Change Security Password] screen appears.
2 Enter the currently used password in the [Old

Password] and then enter a new password in the
[New Password] and [New Password (Confirm)],
Utility
Delete the registered password
1 Click [Delete Password] in the [Security Password]
field.
The [Delete Security Password] screen appears.
2 Click [Password Settings] in the [Security 2 Enter the password in the [Password], and then
Password] field, and set a password with 4 to 32 click [OK].
characters.
Enter a password to be registered in the [Password] and
re-enter it in the [Password (Confirm)] for confirmation, and
then click [OK].
3 If you do not want to add tools or edit from the

toolbar, check [Lock Tool Edit].
The following items are prohibited by Lock Tool Edit.
• Addition of a new tool
• Editing (excluding items registered in the custom menu
deleting, copying, pasting and specified tool ID pasting of
a tool
• Adjustment Navigation
• Batch Test
LJ-X UM_GB 7-41

Change Account
Change Account
Change the user account operating the controller For more

information about user accounts that are available on this
machine, refer to [Restrict User's Operation Range]
(account settings).
The [Change Account] screen appears.
2 In [Select Account], select the desired account to

change to and enter the account password.
3 Click [OK].
This changes the account.
Utility
7-42 LJ-X UM_GB

File Management
File Management
From the [Manage Files] screen, files saved in the SD card

or USB HDD can be managed, and the SD card or USB
Check files stored on SD card or USB
HDD can be verified/formatted. HDD
Point 1 From the [Manage Files] screen, select the [File
You cannot manage files on an FTP server with [Manage Files].
Location].
Considering SD card 1 as SD1, SD card 2 as SD2, and
Displaying the [Manage Files] screen USB HDD as USB, the icons are displayed representing
SD card 1, SD card 2, and USB HDD.

The [Manage Files] screen appears.
Utility
Click with the mouse over the drive or folder for
which you want to check the contents.
A list of files and folders contained in the folder is displayed.
2 Select [Close] to finish managing files.
To display the sub folder of a drive or folder, click [+] on the

left of the drive of file location or folder icon.
LJ-X UM_GB 7-43

File Management
Switch the display method of list display Managing folders and files
Check [Preview] at the upper right of the screen if you want
Folders and files in the SD card or USB HDD can be
to display the contents of the image file,
managed just in the same way as folders and files on a
computer.
Copying folders and files

To replicate folders and files follow this procedure.
1 Select the folders or files to be copied and enable

the check mark in the list display screen.
Display order
The order for displaying the list of files and folders can be
switched between ascending and descending order based
on file name, last saved time, or file size.
To change the display order, select the desired display
order from the menu on the right side of the screen.
2 Select [Copy].
Utility
3 Select [Close].
4 In [File Location], select the duplicated folder or

the location where you want to save the files.
5 Select [Paste].
6 Click [OK].
The folders or files selected in step 1 are copied and added
to the list display screen.
7-44 LJ-X UM_GB

File Management
Moving folders and files Renaming folders and files

To move folders and files follow this procedure. 1 Select 1 folder or file to be renamed and enable the
1 Select the folders or files to be moved and enable check mark in the list display screen.
the check mark in the list display screen. 2 Click [Rename].
2 Select [Cut].
The [Rename] screen appears.
A confirmation screen appears. 3 Change the name of the folder or file and click
3 Select [Close].
[OK].
For more information about entering text, refer to "Enter
4 In [File Location], select the duplicated folder or Text" (page 3-11).
the location where you want to save the files. A confirmation screen appears.
5 Select [Paste]. 4 Select [Close].

6 Click [OK]. Creating new folders

The folders or files selected in step 1 are moved.
1 From the [File Location], select the location to
create the folder.
Deleting folders and files
2 Click [Create Folder].
1 Select the folders or files to be deleted and enable
The [Create Folder] screen appears.
the check mark in the list display screen.
3 Enter the folder name, then click [OK].
2 Select [Delete]. For more information about entering text, refer to "Enter
A confirmation screen appears. Text" (page 3-11).
3 Click [OK].
4 Select [Close].
Utility
4 Select [Close].
LJ-X UM_GB 7-45

File Management
Perform SD card 2 removal Perform USB HDD removal processing

processing (SD card 2 removal) (Remove USB HDD)
Choose [Remove SD Card 2] operation, then press the SD Remove the USB cable and the USB HDD after executing
card in the SD2 slot inward to release and remove the card. [Remove USB HDD].
Point Point
• Take the following steps to protect the SD card and the data it • Be sure to follow the procedure to protect the USB HDD and the
contains. data it contains.
• When removing SD card 1, make sure to turn off the controller • If you remove the USB HDD using a procedure other than that
first. specified, or if the power is turned off while the USB HDD is
• If you remove the SD card using a procedure other than that being accessed, the file saving operation will stop resulting in a
specified, or if power is turned off when the card is being possible loss of data or damage to the USB HDD.
accessed, any writing task will stop resulting in a possible loss of
data or damage to the SD card.
1 In the [Manage Files] screen, select [Remove USB
HDD].
1 From the [Manage Files] screen, select [Remove
SD Card 2].
2 Select [OK].
USB HDD can be removed.
2 Select [OK].
The LED indicator turns off, indicating that SD card 2 can
3 Remove the USB cable and remove the USB HDD.
now be removed.
3 Press the SD card in the SD2 slot inward to release

and remove the SD card.
Utility
7-46 LJ-X UM_GB

File Management
Checking and formatting SD cards and Checking the SD card

USB HDD (Memory Utility) If an error occurs within an SD card it may cause additional
problems such as the inability to load files or the loss of
files. If these types of problems occur, the Check function
Formatting the SD cards and USB HDD
can be used to resolve such errors.
(Format)
Point
1 From the [Manage Files] screen select [Memory
Utility].
• When the memory is formatted, all data stored on the card will
be lost. Formatting erases all of the data on the memory, and The [Memory Utility] screen appears.
data cannot be restored. Copy the data from the memory onto
an SD card or a computer before formatting the memory.
2 Select [Check] of the SD card to be verified.
• When using a USB HDD on the controller, be sure to use the
USB HDD formatted on the controller. If you use a USB HDD
that has not been formatted on the controller, the data in the
3 Click [OK].
After the check is complete, the "Check is complete"
USB HDD may be damaged.
confirmation message appears.
1 From the [Manage Files] screen select [Memory

4 Select [Close].
Utility].
The [Memory Utility] screen appears.
Utility
Select [Format] of SD card or USB HDD to be formatted.
3 Click [OK].
After formatting, a confirmation screen appears.
4 Select [Close].
LJ-X UM_GB 7-47

Remove External Media
Remove External Media
Removing SD Card 2 Removing USB HDD

Choose [Remove SD Card 2] operation, then press the SD Remove the USB cable and the USB HDD after executing
card in the SD2 slot inward to release and remove the card. [Remove USB HDD].
Point Point
• Take the following steps to protect the SD card and the data it • Be sure to follow the procedure to protect the USB HDD and the
contains. data it contains.
• When removing SD card 1, make sure to turn off the controller • If you remove the USB HDD using a procedure other than that
first. specified, or if the power is turned off while the USB HDD is
• If you remove the SD card using a procedure other than that being accessed, the file saving operation will stop resulting in a
specified, or if power is turned off when the card is being possible loss of data or damage to the USB HDD.
accessed, any writing task will stop resulting in a possible loss of
data or damage to the SD card.
1 From on the menu bar, click . The [Remove External Media] screen appears.
The [Remove External Media] screen appears.

Utility
2 Remove [USB HDD].

2 Select SD card 2.
3 Select [OK].
4 When the confirmation screen appears to notify

3 Select [OK]. that it is ready for removal, click [OK] to close the
The LED indicator turns off, indicating that SD card 2 can confirmation screen.
now be removed. USB HDD can be removed.
4 When the confirmation screen appears to notify 5 Select [Close].

that it is ready for removal, select [OK] to close the
confirmation screen.
6 Remove the USB cable and remove the USB HDD.
5 Select [Close].
6 Press the SD card in the SD2 slot inward to release

and remove the SD card.
7-48 LJ-X UM_GB

8
Chapter
External Input/Output Settings .................................... 8-2

Network ..................................................................... 8-2
Environmental Settings
External Terminal ...................................................... 8-2
Encoders ................................................................... 8-3
RS-232C.................................................................... 8-4
FTP............................................................................ 8-4
VNC........................................................................... 8-5
PLC-Link.................................................................... 8-6
PLC-Link via RS-232C .............................................. 8-6
PLC-Link via Ethernet ............................................... 8-7
Common Settings for PLC-Link................................. 8-8
EtherNet/IP................................................................ 8-9
PROFINET .............................................................. 8-11
EtherCAT Unit ......................................................... 8-12
SNTP....................................................................... 8-13
System Settings .......................................................... 8-15

Controller Name ...................................................... 8-15
Choose the standard save format of the standard 
image (standard image, standard save format)....... 8-15
Screen Capture Settings ......................................... 8-15
Mouse Settings........................................................ 8-16
ERROR Output Settings.......................................... 8-17
Notification Window Settings................................... 8-17
Decimal Display....................................................... 8-17
Change the display settings common between the 
tools (Tool Common Display Settings) .................... 8-18
Startup Mode Settings............................................. 8-18
Account Settings ..................................................... 8-19
Protect from Incorrect Operation ............................. 8-19
Limit Authority of Operator Account 
(Operator Settings).................................................. 8-20
Specify Startup Account After Power-on 
(Startup Account Settings) ...................................... 8-20
Date Settings........................................................... 8-21
Language ................................................................ 8-21
Reboot..................................................................... 8-22
Switch to 2D mode .................................................. 8-22
System Information ................................................. 8-22
LJ-X UM_GB 8-1

External Input/Output Settings
External Input/Output Settings
Non-Procedural (Command/Result Output)

Network
• Port Number:Enter the port number to use when
You can change the settings for inputting and outputting communicating without procedure (command/result
various data on the Ethernet port of this unit. If you make a output) (default: 8500).
mistake, not only this unit but also the devices on the • Delimiter:Select the delimiter of the Ethernet
network may not operate properly. For details of the setting communication from among [CR] (Default), [CR+LF] and
value, consult the system or network administrator. [Other]. In [Other], delimiters can be set for each
command and result output function.
Reference
For details on input/output of signals from/to external devices, refer PC Application Connection Port Number
also to "Chapter 9 Communication Control" (page 9-1). Inputs the first number of the three ports to use with the
communication with the PC program (Default: 8502). The
1 From [Global], select [Communications & I/O] - PC program uses three consecutive port numbers from
[Network]. the input value.
"Network Settings" screen will be displayed. Jumbo frame

When using jumbo frames, select the frame size to use
(4 kB; initial configuration value: disabled).
Point
• This is only enabled when a communication expansion unit

(CB-NEC20E/NEP20E/NPN20E) is connected to the
controller.
• When using jumbo frames, they must be supported by all
devices on the network.

External Terminal
2 Change the settings as required.
You can change the settings for inputting/outputting data
IP Address Setting with the external terminal (parallel I/O connector, terminal
Set network configuration information (IP address and block) of this device.
subnet mask, default gateway). To specify an IP address Reference
for this device, enter the IP address (initial value: Please refer to for more information on external terminals.
192.168.10.10), the subnet mask (initial value:
255.255.255.0) and the default gateway (initial value:
0.0.0.0).
1 Select "External Input/Output Settings", "External
Terminal" from "Environmental Settings".
Automatically Acquire IP Address (BOOTP) "External Terminal" screen will be displayed.
Network setting information (IP address and subnet mask,
default gateway) is acquired from the BOOTP server at
controller startup (default setting: disabled). The received
network information is reflected in the Global settings.
When receiving the information from the BOOTP server
fails at the next activation, the stored configuration is used
for activation.
Reference
Click on "Confirm Connection" and enter the IP address of the

connection destination you wish to check to confirm if data
transmission is possible with that connection destination.
8-2 LJ-X UM_GB

STO Output Startup Time (ms) Output terminal

Set the time required from finishing output data settings to
Terminal Initial Assignable Signal
STO startup from 1 to 999 (ms) (initial configuration value:
name Assignment
5 ms).
F_OUT0 READY READY
STO/ACK/NACK Output Time (ms) F_OUT2 ERROR ERROR
Set the time required from starting up STO to shutting F_OUT3 RUN RUN
down STO from 5 to 999 (ms) (initial configuration value: OUT0 ACK ACK, RUN, ERROR
10 ms). OUT1 NACK NACK, RUN, ERROR
OUT4 --- READY, RUN, ERROR
OUT Output Switching Frequency (ms)
OUT5 --- RUN, ERROR
Set the time required from starting up STO to starting up
OUT18 OUT_DATA12 OUT_DATA12, RUN, ERROR,
the next STO from 2 to 1000 (ms) (initial configuration OUTPUT_IMG_BUSY,
value: 15ms). OUTPUT_IMG_STATUS
OUT19 OUT_DATA13 OUT_DATA13, RUN, ERROR,
Enable Handshake OUTPUT_IMG_BUSY,
Check this option to enable handshake for communication OUTPUT_IMG_STATUS
through the input/output terminals. OUT20 OUT_DATA14 OUT_DATA14, RUN, ERROR,
OUTPUT_IMG_BUSY,
Reference OUTPUT_IMG_STATUS
You can only enable "Enable Handshake" if a PST has been OUT21 OUT_DATA15 OUT_DATA15, RUN, ERROR,
assigned with input terminal assignment. Also, timeout is disabled OUTPUT_IMG_BUSY,
as long as the handshake is enabled. For details, see "(2) Terminal OUTPUT_IMG_STATUS
data output timing (with handshaking)" (page 9-80).
Input Terminal Assignment Encoders

Right click to display the "Input Terminal Assignment"
screen. Choose the signal to be assigned to the terminal If using an encoder, adjust the continuous operation timing
and click "OK." of the device and the external device.
Click "Filter Length Settings" to specify the signal filter
length for the input terminal as 40 to 153600 ns (initial
1 Select "External Input/Output Settings", "Encoder"
configuration value: 40000 ns) for F_IN* and 40 to from "Environmental Settings".
81264600 ns (initial configuration value: 40000 ns) for IN*. "Encoder Settings" screen will be displayed.
Output Terminal Assignment
Click to display the "Output Terminal Assignment" screen.
Choose the signal and output format to be assigned to the
terminal and click "OK."
• Normally Open: Normal output method.
• Normally Closed: All output terminals invert from
Normally Open to allow output.
2 Change settings as required.

Terminals that allow signal assignment
Filter Length
modification
To remove the noise signal on the encoder signal, set the
The input and output terminals for which the assigned time range that is considered a noise signal to 40 to 9999
signal can be changed from "Input Terminal Assignment"
(ns) (initial value: 1000 ns).
and "Output Terminal Assignment" are as follows.
Input terminals Reference
Ignore any changes to the signal within the specified time. Using
Terminal Initial Assignable Signal the initial configuration value is recommended, unless otherwise
name Assignment required.
F_IN2 TEST TEST
F_IN3 EXT EXT 3 After completing the setting, click [OK].
IN6 CMD_PARAM6 CMD_PARAM6, TEST, EXT
Reference
IN7 CMD_PARAM7 CMD_PARAM7, TEST, EXT
The device must be rebooted to enable settings.
IN14 PST PST, TEST, EXT
IN15 PLC PLC, TEST, EXT
LJ-X UM_GB 8-3

RS-232C FTP
Use the following procedures to communicate with external Various settings for operating the device as an FTP client or
devices in the RS-232C non-procedural mode. an FTP server can be changed (FTP: file transfer protocol).
Point
Reference
If [FTP] is selected as the source and SFTP transfer is enabled,
• For details on input/output of signals from/to external devices,
only ASCII characters can be used for the folder and file names.
refer also to "Chapter 9 Communication Control" (page 9-1).
• Settings cannot be applied if PLC-Link (RS-232C) is enabled.
1 Select "External Input/Output Settings", "FTP"
1 Select "External Input/Output Settings", "RS-232C" from "Environmental Settings".
from "Environmental Settings". "FTP" screen will be displayed.
"RS-232C (non-procedural)" screen will be displayed.
Baud rate 2 Change the settings as required.

Select the baud rate from 9600 (initial configuration value)
or from 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, 230400 (bps). FTP Client (terminal side) Settings
The FTP function of this device can be used to access an
Stop Bit FTP server (a hard disk drive compatible with a network
Select [1] (initial value) or [2] for the stop bit. having a PC or FTP server function) from an Ethernet
Parity Bit interface.

• Timeout: Enter the timeout time (s) for a response from
Select the parity bit from "none" (initial configuration value)
the FTP server when outputting data (initial configuration
or "odd"/"even".
value: 5 s).
Flow Control • Connection Retries: Enter the number of retries when
Select the flow control from "none" (initial configuration a login error to the FTP server has occurred (initial
value) or "CTS/RTS". configuration value: 1 time).
• Server-side Port Number: Enter the control port
Delimiter number on the FTP server side (initial configuration
Choose from "CR" (initial configuration value), "CR+LF" or value: 21. 22 when SFTP is in use).
"Other". When [Other] is selected, the delimiter can be • Passive Mode: Check the box to use the FTP in
specified for each function set of command and result passive mode (initial configuration value: Enabled
outputs. (passive mode)).
• SFTP: Select this check box to use SSH File Transfer
Data Length
Protocol (SFTP) (default: Cleared).
Displays the data length for specified data transmission.
Point
3 After completing the setting, click [OK]. When using SFTP, it is recommended that the controller’s FTP
server function be disabled to strengthen security.
FTP Server (connection destination) Settings

• Server IP Address: Specify the IP address of the FTP
server (initial configuration value: 192.168.10.30).
• Controller IP Address: The IP address of this device
will be displayed.
• User name: Enter the user name for logging into the
FTP server.
8-4 LJ-X UM_GB

• Password: Enter the password for logging into the FTP

server. VNC
Reference This unit operates as a VNC server. By enabling the VNC
• Click on "Confirm Connection" and enter the IP address of the server function, devices equipped with VNC client software
connection destination you wish to check to confirm if data can remotely access this machine via Ethernet.
• Click on "Restore Initial Values" to restore the FTP server
(connection destination) settings to their initial configuration 1 Select "External Input/Output Settings", "VNC"
values. from "Environmental Settings".
Point "VNC Server Settings" screen will be displayed.
• The FTP command "APPE" is used to output data to the FTP
server on this controller. If your FTP server does not support the
"APPE" command, data cannot be outputted.
• If there is a firewall on the FTP server or on the network path to
the FTP server, it may fail to connect. If this is the case, you will
need to take measures such as disabling the firewall. Please
check with your network administrator or PC manufacturer for
details.
• The FTP server function can be used at the same as the FTP
client function. However, when using SFTP with the FTP client
function, it is recommended that the FTP server function be
disabled to strengthen security.
Specify FTP Output Base Path
Ticking this box will allow you to specify the base path for Enable VNC Server Settings
the FTP output. Note that the base path specified here will Check the box to use the VNC server function.
be applied to all FTP outputs including result and image • Port Number: Specify the communication port
outputs. number used by the VNC server function (initial
configuration value: 5900).
Create Folder Per Controller • Password: Enter the password used to access the
If you tick this box, a folder with the controller’s IP address VNC server.
as its name will be created and output via FTP is done.
3
This option is useful as it allows you to separate the data After completing the setting, click [OK].
when outputting data from multiple controllers to the same
FTP server.
Tested VNC clients
Settings to access the unit’s SD card externally We test connections with the following VNC clients (as of
The device will operate as an FTP server. The SD card of June, 2019).
the device can be accessed from an external FTP client
through an Ethernet. Available users are "admin"
PC software
(Administrator), "operator" (Operator) and "anonymous" • UltraVNC_1.2.2.3
("operator" and "anonymous" are read-only users). The Touch panel displays (Supports Monitor screen
password is the same as that used for "Account Settings".
display only.)
• Enabling FTP Server Function: Check this box to
• KEYENCE VT3-XXX, VT5-XXX
use the device as an FTP server. The controller must be
• Digital Electronics Corporation GP-XXX series
rebooted to enable changes to "Enabling FTP Server
Function".
• Allowing Anonymous Users: Check this box to
enable access by anonymous users (initial configuration
value: enabled). When the server is accessed by an
anonymous user, files and folders on the terminal cannot
be operated and files cannot be sent to the terminal (files
may be acquired).
• Standby Port Number: Enter the port number open to
the FTP client (initial configuration value: 21). The
controller must be rebooted to enable changes to
"Standby Port Number".
LJ-X UM_GB 8-5


PLC-Link
Now, items specific to PLC-Link via RS-232C will be
PLC-Link is a communication mode that directly inputs and described. For details on PLC-Link common settings, refer
outputs data memory of PLC (Programmable Logic to "Common Settings for PLC-Link" (page 8-8).
Controller) in RS-232C interface or Ethernet interface of Communication Settings
this unit. In addition to outputting measurement result data,
• Baud rate: Select the baud rate for the RS-232C
you can also execute commands.
interface from 9600 (initial configuration value) or from
Reference 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 and 230400 (bps).
Please refer to "Control/Data Output via the PLC-Link" (page 9-29) • Stop bit:Select [1] (default) or [2] for the stop bit.
for more information on PLC-Link. • Parity bit:Select [Even] (default), [Odd], or [None] for
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, and EtherCAT cannot be used in
the parity bit.
conjunction with PLC-Link.
• Flow control: Types of flow control will be displayed.
When using the RS-232C port, nonprocedural RS-232C
• Data length: The length of data when communicating
communication cannot be used in conjunction with PLC-Link.
with the specified settings will be displayed.
Reference
PLC-Link via RS-232C Settings will be restricted as shown below depending on the
selected PLC type.
Follow the steps below to enable PLC and PLC-Link via
RS-232C. For more information about the data address, Baud rate Stop Bit Parity Bit Flow
refer to "Common Settings for PLC-Link" (page 8-8). Control
KV-L20 (Unlimited) "1" fixed "Odd" "None"
Series Fixed Fixed
1 Select "External Input/Output Settings", "PLC- MELSEC (Unlimited) (Unlimited) (Unlimited) "CTS/
Link" from "Environmental Settings". AnN Series RTS"
fixed
The [PLC-Link] screen appears.
MELSEC  (Unlimited) (Unlimited) (Unlimited) "CTS/
Q/L/iQ-R/ RTS"
iQ-F Series fixed
MELSEC  "38400" (Unlimited) (Unlimited) "CTS/
FX Series "19200" RTS"
"9600" fixed
only
SYSMAC  "19200" (Unlimited) (Unlimited) "None"

C Series "9600" Fixed
only
SYSMAC  (Unlimited) (Unlimited) (Unlimited) "None"
CJ/CS1/CP1 Fixed
Series
YASKAWA (Unlimited) (Unlimited) (Unlimited) "None"
MP Series Fixed
2 Select [PLC-Link (RS-232C)] in [Mode].
3 Select the name of the series to be connected from

"PLC Type".
The settings for the selected PLC type appear.
8-6 LJ-X UM_GB


PLC-Link via Ethernet
Now, items specific to PLC-Link via Ethernet will be
Follow the steps below to enable PLC and PLC-Link via described. For details on PLC-Link common settings, refer
Ethernet. For more information about the data address, to "Common Settings for PLC-Link" (page 8-8).
refer to "Common Settings for PLC-Link" (page 8-8). IP Address
Specify the IP address of the communication destination
1 Select "External Input/Output Settings", "PLC- unit (initial configuration value: 192.168.10.20). Make sure
Link" from "Environmental Settings". that the specified IP address is unique and different from
the IP addresses for other devices.
Controller IP Address
The IP address of this device will be displayed (initial
configuration value: 192.168.10.10).
Port
Enter the port number used for PLC-Link (initial
configuration value: 8502 (KV series), 5000 (MELSEC Q/L/
iQ-R/iQ-F), 9600 (SYSMAC CJ/CS1/CP1), 1024
(YASKAWA MP)). Specify the communication destination
port for this device from 1025 to 4999 or 5010 to 65535 if
connecting to a built-in MELSEC Q/L/iQ-R/iQ-F Ethernet
port.
2 Select [PLC-Link (Ethernet)] in [Mode]. Resend time

Sets the retry intervals (ms) at a transmission error
(Default: 10000ms).
NODE No. (when selecting SYSMAC)

Enter the node number used to identify the controller. Note
that the node number must be unique for each device
connecting to the identical network (Default: 001).
3 Select the name of the series to be connected from

"PLC Type".
The settings for the selected PLC type appear.
LJ-X UM_GB 8-7

Command Address
Common Settings for PLC-Link
Specify the head address of data memory that stores
command codes and parameters executed by this device
(initial configuration value: 00100).
Reference
The command code and parameter are specified by 2 words

each.
Command Result Address

Specify the heading address of the data memory where the
machine stores the command execution result (default:
00200). If command execution fails, an error code is stored.
Result Output Settings

Measurement Result Output Address
Common Settings
Specify the header address of the data memory where the
Decimal Point measurement results are stored (default: 00500). The data
Select the data expression method when outputting result memory to use is 2 words for each item. However for
data. characters, 2 words for each character (1 byte).
• Fixed point (initial configuration value): The original data Acknowledge result output completion
is multiplied by 1000, and handled as a signed 32-bit
If enabled, 1 will be written to the data memory specified in
integer data. (address m: lower 16 bit, address m+1:
"Result Output Completion Address (bit)" when the
higher 16 bit).
measurement result output is completed. If disabled, care
• Floating decimal point: uses the measured result in the
must be taken for the data reception timing, but the time to
data memory as a single-precision floating-point data (32
write 1 to "Result output complete address (bit)" can be
bits).
shortened.
• Result Output Completion Address (bit):Specify the
Command Control address of the data memory for the unit to notify the PLC
that the measurement result data has been written (initial
Command Execute Event setting: 00000). The used data memory is 1 word. The unit
Select the method of executing the command when issuing writes 1 when the data output for one measurement has
the command using PLC-Link. been completed successfully.
• PLC Terminal (initial configuration value):Executes a • Result Output Control Address (bit):Notify that the
command at a rising edge of the PLC terminal. measurement result data stored in the data memory
• Polling:Monitor (poll) the value of the data memory specified by the measurement result output address has
specified in the "Command Execution Address (bit)" and been confirmed by the PLC, and specify the data memory
execute the command when the value of the data memory address to be used when requesting the writing of the next
at this address changes from 0 to 1. measurement result data from this machine (Initial setting:
- Command Execution Address:Used when "command 00001). The used data memory is 1 word. When the PLC
execution method" is "polling" (initial setting: 00002). The writes 1 to the Result Output Control Address (bit), the
used data memory is 1 word. The command is executed machine writes the Result Output Completion Address (bit)
when the value of this address data memory changes back to 0. Also, write 0 when writing the next measurement
from 0 to 1. result to this unit.
• Enable Handshake: Choose whether to write next result
Command Complete Address
data after checking that the PLC has received measurement
Specify the address of the data memory that notifies that
result output data. If enabled, this device will write 1 to a
writing to "command result address" is completed after the
result output completion address (bit) when measurement
command execution is completed (initial setting: 00003).
result output is complete. Upon reception of this, the PLC
The used data memory is 1 word.
checks the result output area and writes 1 to the Result Ack
Address (bit). The device will detect this and write 0 to the
result output completion address (bit). If the PLC requests
that the next measurement results are written, the device will
write 0 to the result output control address (bit).
8-8 LJ-X UM_GB

Enable DHCP
EtherNet/IP
Select this check box to automatically assign the IP
EtherNet/IP is an industrial protocol for communicating with address, subnet mask, and default gateway (only settable
a programmable logic controller (PLC) via the Ethernet when the EtherNet/IP unit is enabled; initial configuration
interface. Through EtherNet/IP, data can be input/output value: disabled).
between PLC and this machine, and commands can be MAC address
issued from PLC to this machine.
Displays the MAC address of the Ethernet port when
Reference [Enable EtherNet/IP] is selected and the MAC address of
For details on communication/control using EtherNet/IP, also refer the EtherNet/IP unit when [Enable EtherNet/IP unit] is
to "Overview of Control and Data Output by EtherNet/IP" (page 9- selected for [Enable/Disable].
86).
Data size
1 From [Global], select [Communications & I/O] -

Specifies the data size of Assembly Object in the cyclic
communication and the message communication (Default:
[EtherNet/IP].
496 byte). For the cyclic communication, a connecting PLC
The [EtherNet/IP] screen appears. is given priority to specify data size. Therefore, the data
size specified here may differ from that in actual
processing. Use a PLC compatible with Large Forward
Open in order to transact data exceeding 496 byte.
Enable/Disable
Select whether to communicate via the controller’s
Ethernet port or via an EtherNet/IP unit.
• Disable EtherNet/IP: EtherNet/IP communication is not
performed.
• Enable EtherNet/IP: Select this option to communicate
via the controller’s Ethernet port.
• Enable EtherNet/IP unit: Select this option to
communicate via an EtherNet/IP unit connected to the
controller.
Reference
PLC-Link, PROFINET, and EtherCAT cannot be used in

conjunction with EtherNet/IP.
IP address
Enter the IP address of the PROFINET unit (initial
Subnet mask
Enter the subnet mask of the EtherNet/IP unit (initial
Default gateway
Enter the IP address of the default gateway of the
EtherNet/IP unit (initial configuration value: 0.0.0.0).
LJ-X UM_GB 8-9

Connect to Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 Decimal Point

Checking the box limits the data size settable up to 248 Select the data notation of result data output and decimal-
byte. PLCs specified here do not support the cyclic related commands.
communication, therefore, the data size of Assembly • Fixed-point (initial value): The original data is
Object in the message communication should be changed multiplied by 1000, and handled as a signed 32-bit
according to the specifications of the PLCs. integer data.
Reference
E.g: "1.234" is output as "1234".
• Although there is no problem if the cyclic communication data • Floating decimal point: The data is handled as 32-bit
size set at the controller is not the same as the cyclic single-precision floating decimal point data.
communication data size on the PLC side, it is recommended Reference
that the same value as the PLC data size be set so that the For commands that handle integers, command parameters are
allocated data can be sent and received correctly. always rounded to 1 decimal place when they are read, regardless
• The value set here is used as the data size when accessing of the setting, and command data output is written using integers.
assembly object input data (instance 100, attribute 3) and
output data (instance 101 [if using the unit’s Ethernet port] / 150 Enable Handshake
[if using the communication expansion unit], attribute 3) during After confirming that the PLC has received the
message communication. measurement result output data, select whether to write
Data Configurations the next result data. If enabled, the instrument will turn on
the Result ready flag when the measurement result output
Click "Settings"Displays an overview of data assignment in
is complete. Upon reception of the ready flag, the PLC
EtherNet/IP cyclic communication. For a command
reads the output data and turns on "Result ack flag". The
returning a text string, the response data may be large.
unit detects this and turns off the Result ready flag. To
When such command is used, ensure a certain larger size
request that the PLC write the next measurement result,
for "Command Response Output Area" (Default: 24 byte).
turn off the Result ack flag.
Click [View List] shows the detailed allocation statuses of
the receive-data and send-data. Create EDS File
Outputs an EDS file and icon that include information
related to the controller EtherNet/IP functions. The naming
convention for each file is as follows.
• Controller:
- Keyence_3006_0101.eds
- LJ-X8000Series.ico
• Communication expansion unit (CB-NEP20E):
- Keyence_3008_0101.eds
- LJ-X8K-CB-NEP20E.ico
Reference
• Received Data: Display an outline of how received data • The file output path is SD2:/lj-x3d/EDS on the controller and
SD2/lj-x3d/EDS_EX on the communication expansion unit.
is assigned to this device from the PLC.
• Since the EDS file does not contain the information that was set
• Sent Data: Display an outline of how sent data is
or changed in the controller global settings, the created EDS file
assigned to the PLC from this device. The range for the
will always contain the same information.
command response output area in the byte allocation
area can be specified. 3 After completing the setting, click [OK].
8-10 LJ-X UM_GB

IP address
PROFINET Enter the IP address of the PROFINET unit (initial
PROFINET is an industrial protocol for communicating with configuration value: 192.168.10.20).
a programmable logic controller (PLC) via the Ethernet Subnet mask
interface. Through PROFINET, data input and output Enter the subnet mask of the PROFINET unit (initial
between the controller and the PLC, as well as command configuration value: 255.255.255.0).
issuance from the PLC to the controller are possible.
Default gateway
Reference
Enter the IP address of the default gateway of the
For details about communication/control using PROFINET,
PROFINET unit (initial configuration value: 0.0.0.0).
also refer to "Overview of control and data output by
PROFINET" (page 9-119). MAC address
Displays the MAC address of the Ethernet port when
1 From [Global], select [Communications & I/O] - [Enable PROFINET] is selected and the MAC address
[PROFINET]. of the PROFINET unit when [Enable PROFINET unit]
The [PROFINET] screen appears. is selected for [Enable/Disable].
Data Configurations
Left-click [Set] to display an overview of data
allocations in Shows the overview of the data
allocations in the PROFINET cyclic data
communication. For a command returning a text string,
the response data may be large. When such command
is used, ensure a certain larger size for “Command
Response Output Area”. (Default: 24 byte) Pressing
“View List” shows the detailed allocation statuses of the
receive-data and send-data.
2 Change the settings as necessary.
Enable/Disable
Select whether to communicate via the controller’s
Ethernet port or via a PROFINET unit.
• Disable PROFINET: PROFINET communication is not
performed.
• Enable PROFINET: Select this option to communicate
via the controller’s Ethernet port.
• Receive-Data: Displays an overview of the
• Enable PROFINET unit: Select this option to
allocations for data received by the controller from
communicate via a PROFINET unit connected to the
the PLC.
controller.
• Send-Data: Displays an overview of the allocations
Reference
for data sent from the controller to the PLC. The
PLC-Link, EtherNet/IP, and EtherCAT cannot be used in
conjunction with PROFINET.
range for the command response output area in the
byte allocation area can be specified.
PROFINET Name
Specifies a unique name of this controller so that the Decimal Point
connecting PLC can identify the controller in Select the decimal point notation of result data output
PROFINET network. Unless a proper name is and decimal-related commands.
specified, the PLC cannot find the controller and • Fixed-point (default): The original data is multiplied
cannot ensure PROFINET communication. A name to by 1000, and handled as a 32-bit signed integer
be specified here must be identical to that given to this data.
controller when the PLC configures its PROFINET • Floating-point: The data is handled as a 32-bit
specifications. single-precision floating decimal point data.
LJ-X UM_GB 8-11

Reference
For commands that handle integers, command parameters are EtherCAT Unit
always rounded to 1 decimal place when they are read, regardless
of the setting, and command data output is written using integers. EtherCAT is an industrial protocol for communicating with a
programmable logic controller (PLC) via the Ethernet
Endian interface. Through EtherCAT, data can be input/output
Endian is a method of arranging multi-byte data in the between PLC and this machine, and commands can be
PLC data memory. Select a correct endian according to issued from PLC to this machine.
the type of PLC (default: big endian). Reference
The endians for typical PLC are as shown below. For details on communication/control using EtherCAT, also refer to
• Siemens: Big endian ("Overview of Control/Data Output Using EtherCAT" (page 9-135).
• Omron: Little endian
Enable Handshake [EtherCAT Unit].
The Handshake keeps this controller from loading its The [EtherCAT] screen appears.
measurement result output data to the memory until it
acknowledges that the PLC has received the last
output data. When “Enable Handshake” box is
checked, the controller turns on “Result ready flag”
after the completion of a measurement result
output.Upon reception of the ready flag, the PLC reads
the output data and turns on “Result ack flag”. And
then, the controller turns off its ready flag after
recognizing the ack flag of the PLC. The PLC turns off
“Result ack flag” to request the controller to load next
output data.
Issue Alarm Manually 2 Change the settings as required.

Checking “Issue Alarm Manually” box will issue an
alarm under PROFINET protocol through an alarm CR Enable EtherCAT
function. Click the wheel button of the mouse to Select whether to use EtherCAT. Check this box to enable
actually issue the alarm. it.
Reference
Create GSDML File When PLC-Link, EtherNet/IP, or PROFINET is enabled, EtherCAT
Outputs a GSDML file and icon that include information cannot be used. Disable these other protocols.
related to the controller PROFINET functions. The naming
rules for these files are as shown below. Data Configurations
• Controller: Click [Set] to display an overview of data allocations in the
- GSDML-V2.33-Keyence-LJ-X8000-20190706.xml EtherCAT cyclic data communication. For a command
- GSDML-01FD-0BBA-LJ-X8000.bmp returning a text string, the response data may be large.
• Communication expansion unit (CB-NPN20E): When such a command is used, ensure a certain larger
- GSDML-V2.34-Keyence-LJ-X8K-CB-NPN20E- size for [Command Response Output Area] (default: 24
20200305.xml bytes).
- GSDML-01FD-LJ-X8K-CB-NPN20E.bmp Clicking [View List] shows the detailed allocation statuses
of the receive-data and send-data.
Reference
• The file output path is SD2:/lj-x3d/GSDML on the controller and

SD2:/lj-x3d/GSDML_EX on the communication expansion unit.
• Because the GSDML file does not contain the information that
was set or changed in the controller global settings, the created
GSDML file will always contain the same information.
3 After completing the setting, left-click [OK].
8-12 LJ-X UM_GB

SNTP
The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) is a
communication protocol for synchronizing the times of
devices connected on the network.
Enabling SNTP using the controller installed on a network
that can communicate with the SNTP server will allow you
to connect to the SNTP server to acquire the correct time
and periodically synchronize the time of the controller.
1 Select "External Input/Output Settings", "SNTP"

• Controller receive-data: Display an outline of how from "Environmental Settings".
received data is assigned to this device from the PLC.
The "SNTP" screen will be displayed.
• Controller send-data: Display an outline of how sent
data is assigned to the PLC from this device. The range
for the command response output area in the byte
allocation area can be specified.
Decimal Point
Select the data notation of result data output and data that
handles decimal points with command control.
• Fixed-point (initial value): The original data is
multiplied by 1000 and handled as signed 32-bit integer
data.
• Floating-point: The data is handled as 32-bit single- 2 Change the settings as required.
precision floating decimal point data.
Enable SNTP
Reference
Choose whether to connect to the SNTP and synchronize
For commands that handle integers, command parameters are
always rounded to 1 decimal place when they are read, regardless times. Check this box to enable.
of the setting, and command data output is written using integers.
SNTP Server Settings (Connection Destination)
Enable Handshake • Server IP Address: Specify the IP address of the
The Handshake keeps this controller from loading its SNTP server (initial configuration value: 192.168.10.40).
Reference
acknowledges that the PLC has received the last output
Click on "Confirm Connection" and enter the IP address of the
data.
connection destination you wish to check to confirm if data
If enabled, the controller turns on the “Result ready flag”
after the completion of a measurement result output. Upon
reception of the ready flag, the PLC reads the output data Timezone
and turns on the “Result ack flag”.
Select the timezone of the time acquired from the SNTP
The controller detects this and turns off the “Result ready
server (initial configuration value: 14: GMT).
flag”. The PLC turns off the “Result ack flag” to request the
Reference
controller to load the next output data.
Main Timezones
Create ESI File • 4:GMT -8:00 Pacific Time Zone
Outputs an ESI file that includes information related to the • 6:GMT -6:00 Central Standard Time, Mexico City, Central
controller’s EtherCAT function. The naming rules for the file America
are as follows. • 9:GMT -4:00 Atlantic Standard Time
• File output path: SD2:/lj-x3d/ESI • 11:GMT -3:00 Brasilia
• ESI file name: Keyence LJ-X8k_CB-NEC20E.xml • 12:GMT -2:00 Mid-Atlantic
• 14:GMT London, Coordinated Universal Time
Reference
• 15:GMT +1:00 Berlin, Brussels, Rome, Paris, Bern
Because the ESI file does not contain the information that was set
• 16:GMT +2:00 Athens, Jerusalem
or changed in the controller global settings, the created ESI file will
always contain the same information. • 17:GMT +3:00 Kuwait
• 19:GMT +4:00 Moscow
3 After completing the setting, click [OK]. • 22:GMT +5:30 New Delhi
• 26:GMT +7:00 Bangkok
• 27:GMT +8:00 Kuala Lumpur, Singapore, Taipei, Beijing
• 28:GMT +9:00 Japan, Seoul
• 30:GMT +10:00 Canberra, Sydney
LJ-X UM_GB 8-13

Update Cycle (mins)

Set the cycle at which to acquire time from the SNTP
server (initial configuration value: 1).
Point
If an error occurs when attempting to synchronize time with the
server, an error message will be displayed at the bottom left of the
screen. This error message will continue to be displayed until the
correct synchronization at the next update cycle or the SNTP is
reconfigured.
8-14 LJ-X UM_GB

System Settings
System Settings
1 Select "System Settings", "Standard Image

Controller Name Standard Save Format" from "Environmental
Settings".
Enter a controller name. The set name will be displayed on The [Standard Image Standard Save Format] screen
the "System Information" screen (page 8-15). appears.
1 Select "External Input/Output Settings",

"Controller Name" from "Environmental Settings".
The "Controller Name" screen will be displayed.

• PNG (initial configuration value): Saves the images in
PNG format.
2 Enter the name of the controller in the "Controller
• BMP: Save files as bitmap files.
• JPG: Saves the images in JPEG format.
Name" box.
The name of the controller must not be longer than 32
3 Click [OK].
characters. Only alphabet characters may be used. Point

The format for saving images displayed in the VIEW bar for 3D
3 Click [OK]. Observation (page 7-4) can be selected from PNG, BMP or CSV.
Choose the standard save format of the Screen Capture Settings

standard image (standard image,
standard save format) Change the save destination, naming rules and file type for
image files that are saved when saving the screen of the
device displayed on the external monitor as an image
Specify the initial save format of the standard image.
(screen capture). A screen capture can be taken from the
Standard image registration using an external command is common context menu by holding the right button down for
always performed using the save format specified here. around 1 second on the screen. The folder for output can
The standard image registration by the command is be specified because the FTP can be specified via a
always performed in the save format specified here. command.
Division rules, naming rules and file type of the image files
Reference saved via screen capture can be changed.
Specifying "JPG" as the save format has the following advantages Point
and disadvantages. Please choose the save format to match the When using a command to save a screen capture to the FTP with
purpose of use. SFTP transfer (page 8-4), only ASCII characters can be used for
• Advantage: the folder and file names.
You can save more standard images or inspection settings on
the SD card because the file size is compressed.
• Disadvantage:
1 Select "System Settings", "Screen Capture
Settings" from "Environmental Settings".
- The measurement result where the BMP format
(uncompressed) standard image is performed as standard
The "Screen Capture Settings" screen will be displayed.
may differ because the image information taken undergoes
compression.
- It may take more time to change the inspection settings
compared to when using a BMP format standard image
because a compressed image is unpacked when changing
the inspection settings.
- The file size of the image and the number of savable images
may vary because the compression rate varies depending on
the content of the image.
- Due to image degradation attributable to compression, correct
height data cannot be obtained if a [JPEG] height image is
specified (this degradation does not happen with the [PNG]
format because its compression is lossless). Use the [BMP] or
[PNG] save format with height images.
LJ-X UM_GB 8-15

System Settings
2 Change the settings as required. When the [External Fixed Name] is specified, the file
name is initially set to the character string entered in the
New Folder Rule
text box (max. 64-byte characters). The external fixed
This option specifies how to split a folder for saved
name can be updated with the STW command from an
captured images.
external device.
• No Folder Division (initial configuration value): Save
all screen capture images in the designated folder File Format
without folder division.
Select save format for files on screen capture.
• Switch Date: Create a new folder "YYMMDD" for each
• BMP (initial configuration value): Save files as bitmap
output to the designated folder and save the screen
files.
capture from that date in that folder. When the date
• JPG: Save files as JPEG files.
changes, a new folder is created and the screen capture
• PNG: Save files as PNG files.
saving location is changed.
• Switch Image Count: Create a new folder 3 After completing the setting, click [OK].
"YYMMDD_HHMMSS" in the designated folder for each
save and save the screen capture from that date and
time in that folder. When the number of files stored in the Mouse Settings
folder exceeds the specified value, a new folder is
created and the destination of the captured data is Change the mouse pointer speed and the functions of the
changed accordingly. left and right buttons.
Reference
If "Switch Image Count" is selected, the output folder is created 1 Select "System Settings", "Mouse Settings" from
upon the first screen capture after the following times. "Environmental Settings".
• The controller is turned on.
The "Mouse Settings" screen will be displayed.
• Any of the image capture settings is changed.
Saving Folder
• SD card: Saved in SD1 or SD2: /lj-x3d/capture/.
• FTP: You can specify the FTP output folder using the
communication command as it allows you to select an
FTP server as the file save destination.
Point
• The FTP command "APPE" is used to output data to the FTP
server on this controller. If your FTP server does not support the
"APPE" command, data cannot be outputted. 2 Change the settings as required.
• If there is a firewall on the FTP server or on the network path to
Toggle between the main and sub button
the FTP server, it may fail to connect. If this is the case, you will
need to take measures such as disabling the firewall. Please Checking this box allows the right/left button function of the
check with your network administrator or PC manufacturer for mouse to be toggled.
details.
Don't display error message and don't activate
File Naming Rule ERROR output when unsupported USB device is
Select naming rules for files on screen capture. connected
• Automatic (initial configuration value): Will have the file
When this check box is selected, there is no error message
name "{Date and time at time of screen capture}.{save
displayed or ERROR output when an unsupported USB
type}".
device is connected.
• Continuous: Will have the file name "continuous
number character string.save type". Specify the Mouse Tracking
maximum sequential number in the [Sequence Limit] Set the migration speed of the mouse pointer.
field. Since the serial number returns to 0 when it
exceeds the maximum serial number, the old output data 3 After completing the setting, click [OK].
file may be overwritten when folder division is set to "No
folder division" "Switch Date", or the specified number of
"number of copies" is larger than the maximum serial
number. Specify the [Fixed Name] field or the [External
Fixed Name] field for the [Character String].
When the [Fixed Name] is specified, the file name is set
to the character string entered in the text box (max. 64-
byte characters).
8-16 LJ-X UM_GB

System Settings
• Trigger pass: If a line trigger error has occurred at a

ERROR Output Settings shorter interval than the imaging cycle when connected
to LJ-V and the line trigger is ignored, the ERROR output
Items associated with ERROR terminal output can be
terminal is turned ON (initial configuration value:
specified.
disabled).
1 Select "System Settings", "ERROR Output


The "ERROR Output Settings" screen will be displayed. Notification Window Settings
Trigger Path
Displays a notification window when some profiles are not
successfully acquired.
Occurs when a profile acquisition signal that is faster than
the fastest trigger cycle has been input.
Background Buffer Over

Displays a notification window when the front imaging
number has been reached.
2 Check the error to be output from the ERROR output
terminal.
The error is not output when the box is unchecked. Decimal Display
• Errors Related to the SD card: If an error related to
How to display decimal points in numerical boxes and when
the SD card has occurred, the ERROR output terminal is
displaying results can be specified.
turned ON (initial configuration value: enabled).
• Errors Related to USB HDD: If an error related to the
USB HDD has occurred or an unsupported USB device 1 Select "System Settings", "Decimal Settings" from
has been connected, the ERROR output terminal is "Environmental Settings".
turned ON (initial configuration value: enabled). When
The "Decimal Display" screen will be displayed.
the check box for "Don't display error message and
don't output ERROR output when unsupported USB
device is connected" is selected in "Mouse settings," the
ERROR output terminal is turned ON when an
unsupported USB device is connected.
• Shutting Off EtherNet/IP Cyclic Communication:
When shutting off EtherNet/IP cyclic communication, the
• Period (initial configuration value): Display decimals
ERROR output terminal is turned ON (initial
after periods.
configuration value: disabled).
• Comma: Display decimals after commas.
• Disconnect in PROFINET Cyclic Communication: 
When shutting off PROFINET cyclic communication, the 3 Click [OK].
• Disconnect in EtherCAT Cyclic Communication:
When shutting off EtherCAT cyclic communication, the
• Errors Related to FTP: If an error related to the FTP
has occurred, the ERROR output terminal is turned
ON (initial configuration value: enabled).
• PC Application-related Error: If an error related to
the PC application has occurred, the ERROR output
terminal is turned ON (initial configuration value:
enabled).
LJ-X UM_GB 8-17

System Settings
Change the display settings common Startup Mode Settings

between the tools (Tool Common
Select the Run mode when turning on this device among
Display Settings)
Configuration Mode and Run mode.
The display details of the Area Line Display, Zero Screen
and Icons displayed on the data screen can be set as 1 Select "Startup Mode Settings" from
common display settings between the tools.
"Environmental Settings".
The "Startup Mode Settings" screen will be displayed.
1 Select "System Settings", "Tool Common Display
The [Tool Common Display Settings] screen appears.

• Run mode: Startup the device in Run mode when the
device is turned on.
• Configuration Mode (initial configuration value):
Startup the device in Configuration Mode when the
device is turned on.
• Startup Hiding Menu Bar: When this box is checked,
the controller starts wherein the menu bar will be in
hidden state when operation screens S00 - S09 are
selected.
Area Line Display
• Thickness of line (pt): You can change the thickness

of the area line (initial value: 6pt).
Zero Screen Display

• No 3D Shape Correction: Generates the Zero Screen
Display image by subtracting the height of the Zero
Screen. The 3D shape displays with the Zero Screen
slanting.
• With 3D Shape Correction(initial value): The 3D
shape displays with the Zero Screen slanting.
Icon Display on the Data Screen

• Always Display (initial value): Always display icons on
the data screen where there is focus.
• Always Hide: Do not display icons.
• Display when hovering: Display icons only when the
mouse is on the data screen.
3 Click [OK].
8-18 LJ-X UM_GB

System Settings
Account Settings Protect from Incorrect Operation

Change settings such as passwords and authority for the Specify a password required when changing to the
accounts of administrators, operators and visitors prepared administrator or operator account.
as accounts for this device.
• Administrator: Can use all functions of this device. To
restrict the permission for data setting and system operation,
1 Click "Password Settings" from the "Account
change this option to the operator or user account. Password Settings" area on the "Account
• Operator: Limited to setting only some items. Settings" screen.
• User: Cannot change any settings. The "Account Password Settings" screen will be displayed.
1 Select "Account Settings" from "Environmental

Settings".
The "Account Settings" screen will be displayed.
2 Enter a password to be registered in the

[Password] and re-enter it in the [Password
(Confirm)] for confirmation, and then click [OK].
Change the registered password

1 Click "Change Password" from the "Account
Password Settings" area on the "Account
2 Change the settings as required. Settings" screen.
3 After completing the setting, click [OK]. The "Change Account Password" screen will be displayed.
2 Enter the currently used password in the [Old
Password] and then enter a new password in the
[New Password] and [New Password (Confirm)],
LJ-X UM_GB 8-19

System Settings
Delete the registered password Limit Authority of Operator Account

1 Click "Delete Password" from the "Account (Operator Settings)
Password Settings" area on the "Account
Check the operations to allow from the "Operator Settings"
Settings" screen.
area on the "Account Settings" screen.
The "Delete Account Password" screen will be displayed.
Allow for the changing programs
Check this box to allow the operator to change programs.
Allow saving
Check this box to allow the operator to change and save
the settings.
Allow standard image registration

Check this to allow standard image to be registered.
2 Enter the password in the [Password], and then "Operator" accounts can also use this standard image
click [OK]. registration button.
Display only custom menu in Setup mode

Check this box to always display the custom menu with
"Operator" account when Setup mode is entered.
Specify Startup Account After Power-on

(Startup Account Settings)
Select the account to be used upon startup from the
"Startup Account Settings" area on the "Account Settings"
screen.
• Account at Last Shutdown (initial configuration value):
Use account that was used at last shutdown.
• Administrator: Always startup using the administrator
account, regardless of the account used at the time of last

shutdown.
• Operator: Always startup using an operator account,
regardless of the account used at the time of last shutdown.
• Visitor: Always startup using a visitor account, regardless of
the account used at the time of last shutdown.
Reference
If this device is accessible to anyone who is not a system

administrator upon startup, select "Start with Operator" or "Start
with User" to prevent any accident unexpectedly caused by
incorrect setting.
8-20 LJ-X UM_GB

System Settings
Date Settings Language

Set the date for the time stored in the device. The in-built The language displayed on the screen of the controller can
date and time can be used for recorded dates and times be changed.
when data is written from the device.
1 Select "Language" from "Environmental Settings".

1 Select "Date Settings" from "Environmental The "Language" screen will be displayed.
Settings".
The "Date Settings" screen will be displayed.
2 Select the display language.
Reference
• The device must be rebooted after changing language settings

to display the new language.
2 Specify the date from the "Date" menu.
3 Specify the time from the "Time" menu.
LJ-X UM_GB 8-21

System Settings
Reboot System Information

The controller can be rebooted without turning off the Check hardware information, free space in memory and
power. other aspects of this device.
1 Select "Reboot" from "Environmental Settings". 1 Select "System Information" from "Environmental
The "Confirm" screen will be displayed. Settings".
The "System Information" screen will be displayed.
2 Click "Save and reboot".

The device will reboot.
Switch to 2D mode
Switch the application mode of this unit to 2D mode.
1 Select "Switch to 2D mode" from "Environmental

Settings".
The "Confirm" screen will be displayed.
2 Confirm information.
• Model (version number): Displays the model,
application mode and version of the controller.
• Serial No.: Displays the serial number of this device

2 Click "Save and reboot". and the head connected.
• Controller ID: Displays the fixed ID assigned to the
The device will reboot.
controller.
Reference • MAC Address: Displays the MAC address of this
3D mode Settings are saved. device (cannot be changed).
• Controller name: Displays the name of the controller
set in this device.
• Hardware Version: Displays the version of hardware
used in this device.
• Head Version: Displays the version of the head
connected.
• Input Unit Version: Displays the version of the input
unit connected to this controller.
• Current Settings File Version: Displays the version
of the program settings file and global settings file
currently used by this device.
• Resource Memory Capacity: Displays the capacity of
the current resource memory.
• Working Memory Capacity: Displays the capacity of
the current working memory.
• Free Space: Displays the amount of free space on the
SD cards currently installed in each slot in the form of
"free space/total space".
3 After confirmation, click [Close].
8-22 LJ-X UM_GB

9
Chapter
List of Communication Control Commands............... 9-2

Control/Data Output via the PLC-Link ...................... 9-29
Communication Control
Types of Compatible PLC-Link Connections ........... 9-30
Preparing the PLC....................................................... 9-33
Outputting Measurement Data via PLC-Link............ 9-38
Controlling this machine via PLC-Link 
(PLC terminal) ............................................................. 9-41
Controlling this machine via PLC-Link (Polling)...... 9-44
Troubleshooting.......................................................... 9-47
Control/Data Output via I/O Terminals...................... 9-49
Using Command Inputs via I/O Terminals................ 9-65
Outputting Data Values via I/O Terminals ................ 9-71
Timing Chart................................................................ 9-72
Overview of Control and Data Output by 
EtherNet/IP................................................................... 9-86
Prepare EtherNet/IP Unit 
(when using CB-NEP20E)........................................... 9-88
EtherNet/IP Communication Specifications ............. 9-89
Changing the EtherNet/IP Settings ........................... 9-94
Outputting Measurement Data via EtherNet/IP 
Cyclic Communication (Data Output) ....................... 9-96
Controlling Controller with EtherNet/IP Cyclic
Communication (Command Control) ........................ 9-98
Changing Execute Condition No. Using EtherNet/
IP Cyclic Communication (Execute No. Change)... 9-100
Troubleshooting........................................................ 9-101
Communicating with the Controller Using 
EtherNet/IP Message Communication .................... 9-103
Overview of control and data output by 
PROFINET.................................................................. 9-119
Prepare PROFINET Connection 
(when using CB-NPN20E) ........................................ 9-120
PROFINET communication specifications ............. 9-121
Changing the PROFINET settings ........................... 9-126
Output of measurement data using PROFINET 
cyclic communications (Data Output) .................... 9-128
Controlling the controller with PROFINET cyclic
communication (Command Control)....................... 9-130
Changing the execute condition No. using 
PROFINET cyclic communication 
(Execute Condition No. Change) ............................. 9-132
Overview of Control/Data Output Using 
EtherCAT ................................................................... 9-135
Prepare EtherCAT Connection ................................ 9-136
EtherCAT Communication Specifications.............. 9-137
Changing the EtherCAT Settings ............................ 9-143
Output of measurement data using EtherCAT 
cyclic communications (Data Output) ................... 9-145
Controlling the controller with EtherCAT cyclic
communication (Command Control)....................... 9-147
Changing the execute condition No. using 
EtherCAT cyclic communication (Execute Condition
No. Change)............................................................... 9-149
LJ-X UM_GB 9-1

List of Communication Control Commands
List of Communication Control Commands
Notes on command input/output When using number-specified commands

Specification and execution of each command number is
processed in 1 word.
When using non-procedural commands
Command input during operation
Command input during operation
Usually, command input is accepted during operation.
• Usually, command input is accepted during operation.
However, if commands need to be executed in a high-
However, if commands need to be executed in a high-speed
speed operation line, the execution of commands may
operation line, the execution of commands may suspend
suspend image acceptance.
image acceptance.
• The execution time of a command depends on the amount When an error occurs on command acceptance
of load on the controller and the type of operation performed The error code is written in the command result address as
on the image processing side. For the use in which a the execution result. The error response consists of the
program must wait for command execution to be completed following information:
before starting the next inspection, be cautious of the waiting • 02: Command error (The received command is invalid.)
time fluctuation according to the conditions mentioned • 03: Command action disabled (The received command
above. cannot work.)
Number of characters for command parameters • 22: The number or range of the parameter is incorrect.
Any number of parameter characters within the range An example of error output
specified for each command can be entered. When the No. 1005 (unavailable number) is specified for
When an error occurs on command acceptance program No. changing command, "22" is written in the
command result address as binary data of 1 word.
An error response "ER, **, nn" will be returned.
The error response consists of the following information: Example: Changing the current program No. to
• **: Received command that caused the error program No. 10 stored in SD card 1 using the PLC-
• nn: 2-digit error code
Link.
- 02: Command error (The received command is invalid.)
The detailed command assignments for this example is
- 03: Command action disabled (The received command
shown below.
cannot work.)
- 22: Parameter error (The value of parameter data or the LJ-X8000 PLC
number of data pieces is outside the range.) Series Command read
Command DM100 24 Command address
- 91: Timeout error execution DM101
DM102 1 Command address+2
An example of error output Switch to SD DM103
When the No. 1005 (unavailable number) is specified for card 1; setting DM104 10 Command address+4
No.10 DM105
program No. changing command (PW), "ER,PW,22" is Command
execution result During success
returned as response data. DM200 0 Command result address
In case of error 03
DM200 3 Command result address
9-2 LJ-X UM_GB

Operation mode and input allowed command (3D mode)

 = Possible
Availability by device
Number- PLC-Link,
Comman specified- EtherNet/IP,
Command type Command detail Non-procedural
d command PROFINET,
No. EtherCAT
Run Setup Run Setup
Trigger A trigger is issued. T1 1  
System control Switch to Run mode R0 8  
Switch to Setup mode S0 9  
Reset RS 10  
Reboot RB 11  
Save Program SS 12  
Clear error CE 13    
Changing the operation screen VW 14  
Read run/Setup mode RM 16    
Change inspection Change inspection programs PW 24  
program
Read program setting PR 25  
Capture control Trigger delay CTD 34  
Measurement Standard image registration (update reference BS 40  
value)
Write execute condition EXW 41  
Read execute condition EXR 42  
Change judgment string CW 43  
Read judgment string CR 44  
Change judgment condition DW 45  
Read judgment condition DR 46  
Change Defect Level SLW 47  
Read Defect Level SLR 48  
Dictionary 1 Character Registration CA 49  
Dictionary 1 Character Deletion CD 50  
Measured Value Correction of the Conversion MCC 52  
of the Previously Corrected Measured Value
Write Measured Value Correction MCW 53  
Read Measured Value Correction MCR 54  
I/O control Enable/Disable Trigger Input TE 56    
Enable/Disable Output OE 57  
Utility Change Externally Specified String STW 60  
Read Externally Specified String STR 61  
Clear Statistical Data TC 64  
Save Statistical Data TS 65  
Clear Archived Image HC 66  
Save Archived Image HS 67  
Image Capture BC 68    
Change Output File/Folder OW 69  
Echo EC -  
System Write Date & Time TW 80  
Read Date & Time TR 81  
Read Version Information VI 82    
Write Time Zone TZW 83  
Read Time Zone TZR 84  
LJ-X UM_GB 9-3

Trigger System control
T1 trigger is issued. R0 Switch to Run mode

A trigger is issued. This command switches the controller from Setup mode to
Run mode.
For non-procedural commands
(If the controller is already in Run mode, the command
• Send execution finishes normally without making any changes.)
T1 A trigger is issued.
• Receive
• Send
T1
R0
For number-specified commands • Receive
The number-specified command No. is "1". R0
• Send
For number-specified commands
Word Device *
The number-specified command No. is "8".
1 A trigger is issued.
• Send
* Starting word device (command address)
Word Device *
• Receive
8
Word Device *
Return value Executio
n result • Receive
* Starting word device (command result address) Word Device *

Execution result n result
• 0: Success * Starting word device (command result address)
• 22: An unnecessary parameter is included.
• 03: The command was sent when triggers could not be Execution result
accepted or when trigger input was disabled (when • 0: Success
READY* is not turned on). • 22: An unnecessary parameter is included.
• 03: When an operation that does not accept switching to
Real-time performance Run mode such as [Edit Tool] or [Statistics] is being
This command does not affect the measurement performed

processing time.
Real-time performance
This command is instantly executed.
9-4 LJ-X UM_GB

S0 Switch to Setup mode For number-specified commands

This command switches the controller from Run mode to
• Send
Setup mode. (If the controller is already in Setup mode, the
command execution finishes normally without making any Word Device *
changes.) 10
• Receive
• Send
Word Device *
S0
• Receive n result
S0 * Starting word device (command result address)
For number-specified commands Execution result

The number-specified command No. is "9". • 0: Success
• Send • 22: An unnecessary parameter is included.
Word Device * Real-time performance
9 When a tool is being executed, reset is executed after the
* Starting word device (command address) tool execution.
• Receive
Word Device * RB Reboot
n result
This command saves the current program settings and
reboots the system.
* Starting word device (command result address)
Execution result
• Send
• 0: Success
• 03: The command was sent during operation that does RB
not accept switching to Setup mode. • Receive
RB
When a tool is being executed, the controller is switched to
Setup mode after the tool execution.
• Send
Word Device *
RS Reset 11
This command performs all of the following: * Starting word device (command address)
• Clears all buffers including the image buffer. • Receive
• Creates a new file name for the file used to store data.
Word Device *
• Initializes total status output.
• Clears all of history data.
n result
• Clears all of statistical data.
• Clears all number of measurement.
• Clears OUT_DATA0 to OUT_DATA15. Execution result
For non-procedural commands • 0: Success
• 22: When some unnecessary parameter was included.
• Send
(Failure to access the SD card is not considered to be an
RS error and the system is rebooted.)
• Receive
RS
• When a tool is being executed, the command is
executed after the tool execution.
• When data is being output, the process is synchronized
according to the OE timing, and then the command is
executed.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-5

SS Save Program Execution result

• 0: Success
Saves the current program settings and global settings.
• Send
This command does not affect the measurement
SS processing time.
• Receive
SS VW Change Operation Screen
For number-specified commands Changes the display to the specified operation screen.
• Send
• Send
Word Device *
VW,n,mm
12
• Receive
VW
• Receive
Word Device * For number-specified commands
Return value Executio The number-specified command No. is "14".
n result • Send
* Starting word device (command result address) Word
*+1
*+2
*
Device
Execution result
14 n mm
• 0: Success
• 03: The SD card has not been inserted or cannot be • Receive
accessed. Word Device *
n result
processing time.
Parameters (common)
• n: Tab type (0 - 1)
CE: Clear error
0: Tool list tab

This command clears the error status. Even when an error 1: S** tab
status does not exist, the command execution finishes • mm: Tab number (0 to 9 (S00 to S09))
normally.
Execution result
For non-procedural commands • 0: Success
• Send • 22: The number or the range of the parameter is
CE incorrect.
• 03:
• Receive
- When the tab number does not exist.
CE - When the operation screen tab cannot be operated
For number-specified commands because a dialog is opened.
The number-specified command No. is "13". Real-time performance
• Send This command does not affect the measurement
Word Device * processing time.
13
• Receive
Word Device *
n result
9-6 LJ-X UM_GB

RM Read Run/Setup mode Change inspection program

Reads the status of the controller (i.e. whether it is in Run
mode or Setup mode).
PW: Change programs
For non-procedural commands This command closes all open dialogs and loads the
• Send program of the specified No. (nnn) from the SD card.
RM • Any changes to the setting data is discarded.
• If the command successfully finishes, the global setting file is
• Receive
saved after the command execution.
RM,n
• Send
PW,d,nnn
• Send
• Receive
Word
*
Device PW
16
• Receive • Send
Word Word
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
Device *
Device
Return Executio n 24 d nnn
value n result
• Receive
Parameters (common)
Word
• n: Controller status *
Device
0: Setup mode Return Executio
1: Run mode value n result
Execution result
• 0: Success Parameters (common)
• 22: An unnecessary parameter is included. • d: SD card No. (1 or 2)
1: SD1
2: SD2
• nnn: Program No. (0 to 999)
processing time.
Execution result
• 0: Success
• 22: The number or the range of the parameter is
incorrect.
• 03:
- The program does not exist.
- The SD card has not been inserted or cannot be
accessed.
- The controller ID lock is applied to the specified
program.
The program is changed after measurement processing
finishes.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-7

PR Read program setting Capture control

This command returns the SD card number and the
inspection program of the program currently being read.
CTD Trigger delay
For non-procedural commands This command places a delay time between the trigger
• Send input and the start of image capture.
PR
• Receive • Send
PR,d,nnn
CTD,1,nnn
For number-specified commands • Receive

The number-specified command No. is "25". CTD
• Send
Word
* The number-specified command No. is "34".
Device
25
• Send
* Starting word device (command address) Word
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*
Device
• Receive
34 1 nnn
Word * Starting word device (command address)
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*
Device
• Receive
Return Executio d nnn
value n result Word
*
Device
Return Executio
Parameters (common) value n result
• d: SD card No. (1 or 2) * Starting word device (command result address)

1: SD1
Parameters (common)
2: SD2
• nnn: Trigger delay (0 to 999) (ms)
• nnn: Program No. (0 to 999)
Reference
Execution result For the encoder trigger, this will be a 5-digit integer (0 to
• 0: Success 65535).
Execution result
Real-time performance • 0: Success
This command does not affect the measurement • 22:
processing time. - The number or the range of the parameter is
incorrect.
Executes by stopping the current measurement
temporarily.
9-8 LJ-X UM_GB

Execution result
Measurement
• 0: Success
• 22:
BS Standard image registration - The number or the range of the parameter is
incorrect.
This command saves the latest current image as a
- A number other than between 000 and 399 is
standard image with number nnn, and then calculates the
specified as the standard image No.
reference value based on the saved standard image. If no
• 03:
argument is specified, the command recalculates the
reference value based on the current standard image.
accessed.
Reference - The SD card is full and no more images can be
• If a file with the same number exists, that file will be overwritten registered.
unless it is read-only.
- The file of the specified number is read-only.
• For number-specified commands, setting 0 for the first argument
- The registration of the standard image data failed.
will recalculate the reference value based on the current
- Insufficient processing memory causing failure to
standard image.
calculate the reference value.
For non-procedural commands - The head is invalid or connected incorrectly.
• Send
BS Recalculates the reference value This command is executed by stopping the current
based on the current standard image.
measurement temporarily.
BS,1,nnn Registers the latest current image as
standard and calculates the reference
value.
EXW Write execute condition
• Receive
This command changes the number of the execution
BS
condition currently enabled to the specified number.
For number-specified commands For non-procedural commands
The number-specified command No. is "40". • Send
• Send
EXW,n
Word
* • Receive
Device
40 EXW
Word For number-specified commands
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*
Device
40 1 nnn
• Send
Word
*+1
*+2
*+3
• Receive *
Device
Word 41 n
*
Device
Return Executio
value n result • Receive
* Starting word device (command result address) Word
*
Device
Parameters (common) Return Executio
• nnn: Standard image No. (0 to 399) value n result
Parameters (common)
• n: 0 to 99 (Execute number)
Execution result
• 0: Success
incorrect.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-9

EXR Read execute condition CW Change judgment string

This command reads the number of the execute condition The judgment string of the OCR tool and OCR2 tool with
currently enabled. tool number nnn, along with the reference pattern string of
the 1D code reader tool and the 2D code reader tool are
rewritten to the specified string ssss. If you do not specify
• Send the ssss judgment string, the latest read result for that tool
EXR is set.
• Receive Reference
EXR,n • If you do not specify the ssss judgment string, the latest read
result for that tool is used as the judgment string.
For number-specified commands • In order to store the received characters as ASCII characters,
The number-specified command No. is "42". special characters such as Year4 and eYear (0) cannot be
• Send specified.
• The following limitations apply when using the OCR/OCR2 tool:
Word - The characters that can be used with the OCR tool are
*
Device
"English upper/lower case letters:.-/ # *". The characters that
42 can be used with the OCR2 tool are "English upper/lower
* Starting word device (command address) case letters:.-/ #*()+". Letter that cannot be used are
considered errors.
• Receive
- When rewriting with the latest reading result, a space is set
Word when a measurement is not made (OCR tool: 20 characters,
*+1
*+2
*+3
*
Device
OCR2 tool: 40 characters). If the number of read characters
Return Executio n does not reach the maximum number of characters, a space
value n result
is set.
* Starting word device (command result address) - If the character is "? (Unrecognizable)", a space is set.
- If no string is specified (CW,nnn,m," ), the specified
Parameters (common)
string is cleared.
• n: 0 to 99 (Execute number) - If it is unmeasured, the space will be set.
• The following limitations apply when using the 1D code reader
Execution result
tool and 2D code reader tool:
• 0: Success - it will be cleared.
• 22: An unnecessary parameter is included. - The judgment string ssss can go up to 200 characters.
Real-time performance For non-procedural commands

This command does not affect the measurement • Send
processing time.
CW,nnn,m, "ssss Rewrite judgment string with the
specified string
CW,nnn,m Set the most recent reading
result to a judgment string
• Receive
CW
• Parameter
- nnn: Tool No. (100 to 199)
- m: Line No./matching condition No.
For OCR tool or OCR 2 tool: 1 fixed
For 1D code reader tool, 2D code reader tool: 1 to
16
- ssss: Judgment string
For OCR tool: Character count 0 to 20
For OCR2 tool: Character count 0 to 40
For 1D code reader tool: Character count 0 to 128
For 2D code reader tool: Character count 0 to 200
9-10 LJ-X UM_GB

For number-specified commands CR Read judgment string

The judgment string of the OCR tool and the OCR2 tool
• Send (t=0)
with tool number nnn, along with the reference pattern
Word string of the 1D code reader tool and the 2D code reader
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
*
Device
tool are read, then the same string is returned as "judgment
43 nnn m t
string" and "reference pattern string" on the tool editing
* Starting word device (command address) screen. If the end of the judgment string is reached by the
• Send (t=1) number specification command, it stores 0 and ends.
Word For non-procedural commands
*+10
*+11
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
*+8
*+9
* …
Device
• Send
43 nnn m t s1 s2 …
CR,nnn,m
• Receive
• Receive
CR,ssss
Word
*
Device • Parameter
Return Executio - nnn: Tool No. (100 to 199)
value n result - m: Line No./matching condition No.
* Starting word device (command result address) For OCR tool or OCR 2 tool: 1 fixed
• Parameter For 1D code reader tool, 2D code reader tool: 1 to
- nnn: Tool No. (100 to 199) 16
- m: Line No./matching condition No. - ssss: Judgment string
For OCR tool or OCR 2 tool: 1 fixed For OCR tool: Character count 0 to 20
For 1D code reader tool, 2D code reader tool: 1 to For OCR2 tool: Character count 0 to 40
16 For 1D code reader tool: Character count 0 to 128
- t: For 2D code reader tool: Character count 0 to 200
0: use the most recent reading result.
1: Set the character specified in ssss.
- ssss: Judgment string (Use 2 words per character, The number-specified command No. is "44".
the end code is 0 (zero)) • Send
For OCR tool: Character count 0 to 20 Word
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
* *+5
For OCR2 tool: Character count 0 to 40 Device
For 1D code reader tool: Character count 0 to 128 44 nnn m
For 2D code reader tool: Character count 0 to 512 * Starting word device (command address)
Execution result • Receive

• 0: Success Word
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
* …
• 03: Device
- When a tool other than OCR, OCR2, 1D code Return Executio s1 s2 s3 …
value n result
reader, or 2D code reader is specified
- When the specified tool has a configuration error * Starting word device (command result address)
• 22: • Parameter
- The number or the range of the parameter is - nnn: Tool No. (100 to 199)
incorrect. - m: Line No./matching condition No.
- When an unnecessary parameter is included For OCR tool or OCR 2 tool: 1 fixed
- or when an unusable character is specified For 1D code reader tool, 2D code reader tool: 1 to
16
- ssss: Judgment string (Use 2 words per character,
This command is executed by stopping the current
the end code is 0 (zero))
measurement temporarily.
For OCR tool: Character count 0 to 20
For OCR2 tool: Character count 0 to 40
For 1D code reader tool: Character count 0 to 128
For 2D code reader tool: Character count 0 to 512
LJ-X UM_GB 9-11

Execution result - "Floating Decimal Point" When selected: Single-

• 0: Success precision floating point data
• 22: The number or the range of the parameter is Reference
incorrect. Use the CW command to rewrite judgment strings for the OCR
• 03: tool, OCR2 tool, 1D code reader tool, or the 2D code reader tool.
- When tools other than OCR, OCR2, 1D code
Execution result
reader or 2D code reader are specified.
- When the judgment string is not set. • 0: Success
- The specified reference pattern does not exist. • 22: The number, the number of digits, or the range of the
parameter is incorrect.
Real-time performance • 03:
This command does not affect the measurement - The specified type does not exist for that tool.
processing time. - A screen where judgment conditions can be changed
(custom menu, statistics, etc.) is open.
- The new value is incorrect.
DW Change judgment condition
Changes the upper limit and lower limit in the judgment
conditions for the specified tool. This command does not affect the measurement
processing time.
• Send
DW,nnn,aaa,b,mmm
• Receive
DW

• Send
Word
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
*+8
*+9
*
Device
45 nnn aaa b mmm
• Receive
Word
*
Device
Return Executio
value n result
Parameters (common)
• nnn: Tool No. (100 to 199)
Reference
When the multi-region mode is ON, the area number can be

specified by specifying the following values.
100 * Tool number (100 to 199) + area number (0 to 31)
If the area number is not specified (when specified with a value
of 100 to 199), the area with the lowest number is used.
• aaa: Item ID for judgment condition type

• b: Specify upper limit (0) or lower limit (1).
• mmm: Judgment condition value (in the case of a
number-specified command, contents vary depending
on the [Decimal Point] setting for PLC-Link, EtherNet/IP,
PROFINET, or EtherCAT)
- "Fixed-Point” When selected: The setting value is
multiplied by 1000 and is a signed 32-bit integer
data.
9-12 LJ-X UM_GB

DR Read judgment condition Execution result

• 0: Success
Reads the upper limit and lower limit in the judgment
• 22: The number, the number of digits, or the range of the
conditions for the specified tool.
parameter is incorrect.
For non-procedural commands • 03: The specified type does not exist for that tool.
• Send • 05: Command response output failed (insufficient
command response output area)
DR,nnn,aaa,b
• Receive
DR,mmm processing time.
• Send
Word
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
*
Device
46 nnn aaa b
• Receive
Word
*+1
*+2
*+3
*
Device
Return Executio mmm
value n result
Parameters (common)
• nnn: Tool No. (100 to 199)
Reference

If the area number is not specified (when specified with a value
of 100 to 199), the area with the lowest number is used.
• aaa: Item ID for judgment condition type
• b: Specify upper limit (0) or lower limit (1).
• mmm: Judgment condition value (in the case of a
number-specified command, contents vary depending
on the [Decimal Point] setting for PLC-Link, EtherNet/IP,
PROFINET, or EtherCAT)
- "Fixed-Point"When selected: The setting value is
multiplied by 1000 and is a signed 32-bit integer
data.
- "Floating Decimal Point" When selected: Single-
precision floating point data
Reference
Use the CR command to read judgment strings for the OCR tool,
OCR2 tool, 1D code reader tool, or the 2D code reader tool.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-13

SLW Change defect Level SLR Read Defect Level

Rewrites the defect level of the specified defect tool. Reads the defect level of the specified defect tool.
For non-procedural commands For non-procedural commands

• Send • Send
SLW,nnn,mmm SLR,nnn
• Receive • Receive
SLW SLR,mmm
For number-specified commands For number-specified commands

The number-specified command No. is "47". The number-specified command No. is "48".
• Send • Send
Word Word
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+1
*+2
*+3
* *
Device Device
47 nnn mmm 48 nnn
* Starting word device (command address) * Starting word device (command address)
Word Word
*+1
*+2
*+3
* *
Device Device
Return Executio Return Executio mmm
value n result value n result
* Starting word device (command result address) * Starting word device (command result address)
Parameters (common) Parameters (common)

• nnn: Tool No. (100 to 199) • nnn: Tool No. (100 to 199)
Reference Reference
When the multi-region mode is ON, the area number can be When the multi-region mode is ON, the area number can be
specified by specifying the following values. specified by specifying the following values.
100 * Tool number (100 to 199) + area number (0 to 31) 100 * Tool number (100 to 199) + area number (0 to 31)
If the area number is not specified (when specified with a value If the area number is not specified (when specified with a value
of 100 to 199), the area with the lowest number is used. of 100 to 199), the area with the lowest number is used.
• mmm: Defect level value • mmm: Defect level value

Execution result Execution result

• 0: Success • 0: Success
• 22: The number, the number of digits, or the range of the • 22: The number, the number of digits, or the range of the
parameter is incorrect. parameter is incorrect.
• 03: • 03: When the specified tool is not a defect tool
- When the specified tool is not a defect tool. • 05: Command response output failed (insufficient
- When the custom menu screen is open. command response output area)
- The new value is incorrect.
Real-time performance This command does not affect the measurement
This command does not affect the measurement processing time.
processing time.
9-14 LJ-X UM_GB

CA Dictionary 1 Character Registration CD Dictionary 1 Character Deletion

Register the characters scanned by the OCR tool or OCR2 Removes the last registration number character of the
tool in the dictionary. specified character type from the dictionary.

• Send • Send
CA,nnn,m,aa,ccc CD,nnn,ccc
CA CD

• Send • Send
Word Word
*+10
*+12
*+13
*+14
*+15
*+16
*+11
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
*+8
*+9
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
*+8
* *
Device Device
49 nnn m aa ccc 50 nnn ccc
Word Word
*+1
*+1
* *
Device Device
Return Exec Return Exec
value ution value ution
result result

• nnn: Tool No. (100 to 199) • nnn: Tool No. (100 to 199)
• m: Detection result line number (1) • ccc: Character type of deletion target
• aa: Character No. of Detection Results - For OCR tool: -1 to 65 (do nothing when -1)
- For OCR tool: 1 to 20 - For OCR2 tool: -1 to 68 (do nothing when -1)
- For OCR2 tool: 1 to 40
Execution result
• ccc: Registered character type
- For OCR tool: -1 to 65 (do nothing when -1) • 0: Success
- For OCR2 tool: -1 to 68 (do nothing when -1) • 03:
Execution result accessed.
• 0: Success - When the tool does not exist or is not , OCR/
• 03: OCR2.
- The SD card has not been inserted or cannot be - When the built-in dictionary is selected by the tool
accessed. or when there is no specified dictionary file.
- When the tool does not exist or is not OCR/OCR2. - When there is no registration of specified character
- When the built-in dictionary is selected by the tool type.
or when there is no specified dictionary file. - When dictionary deletion failed.
- When the dictionary registration fails. • 22:
• 22: - The number or the range of the parameter is
- The number or the range of the parameter is incorrect.
incorrect.
Real-time performance This command is instantly executed.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-15

Character types specified by CA/CW command MCC Measured Value Correction of the
For the registered character types specified by CA Conversion of the Previously Corrected
command and the deletion target character types used by
Measured Value
CD command, corresponding codes are used to specify
them. Calculates the previously corrected measurements for any
The following table shows character types and the value.
corresponding codes.
Character Character • Send
Code Code
type type
MCC,nnn,m,a
Not specified -1 - 36
0 0 . 37
• Receive
1 1 : 38 MCC,c
2 2 / 39 • Parameter
3 3 a 40 - nnn: Tool No. (100 to 199)
4 4 b 41 Reference
5 5 c 42 When the multi-region mode is ON, the area number can be

6 6 d 43 specified by specifying the following values.
7 7 e 44
If the area number is not specified (when specified with a
8 8 f 45
value of 100 to 199), the area with the lowest number is used.
9 9 g 46
- m:
A 10 h 47
Measurement item No. (if 0 to 31, profile
B 11 i 48
measurement or continuous profile measurement)
C 12 j 49
Item ID for judgment condition type (for height
D 13 k 50
measurement or trend height measurement)
E 14 l 51
- a: Numerical value
F 15 m 52 - c: Correction value
G 16 n 53
H 17 o 54
I 18 p 55 The number-specified command No. is "52".
• Send
J 19 q 56
K 20 r 57 Word
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
*
Device
L 21 s 58
52 nnn m a
M 22 t 59
N 23 u 60
O 24 v 61 • Receive
P 25 w 62 Word
*+1
*+2
*+3
*
Q 26 x 63 Device
R 27 y 64 Return Execu c
value tion
S 28 z 65 result
T 29 * Cannot be
specified
U 30 # Cannot be • Parameter
specified - nnn: Tool No. (100 to 199)
V 31 (Space) Cannot be Reference
specified When the multi-region mode is ON, the area number can be
W 32 ( 66 specified by specifying the following values.
X 33 ) 67 100 * Tool number (100 to 199) + area number (0 to 31)
Y 34 + 68 If the area number is not specified (when specified with a
Z 35
9-16 LJ-X UM_GB

- m: MCW Write Measured Value Correction

measurement or continuous profile measurement) Rewrite the correction value setting and calculate the correction
Item ID for judgment condition type (for height value. Calculate according to the specification of the parameter by
measurement or trend height measurement) either of the following methods.
- a: Numerical value (1) For the specified tool, specify the values before and after
- c: Correction value the 1-point correction, then perform the correction.
(2) For the specified tool, the specified value is corrected by
Execution result subtracting the specified offset from the value after the
• 0: Success correction, to obtain the correction value.
• 03: (3) For the specified tool, specify the values before and after
- When a tool does not exist, or when a tool other corrections 1 and 2 for the 2-point correction, then perform
than height measurement, trend height the correction.
measurement, profile measurement, or continuous (4) For the specified tool, the specified coefficient A and
profile measurement is specified coefficient B are back-calculated from the corrected value in
- When a non-target measurement item number is the 2-point correction, and is used as the correction value.
specified when specifying the profile measurement
or the continuous profile measurement
- When the calculation of the previously corrected • Send
measurement has failed MCW,nnn,m,l,c,f (1)
• 22: MCW,nnn,m,l,o (2)
- When the number of parameters is different MCW,nnn,m,l,c1,f1,c2,f2 (3)
- When the range of the parameter is incorrect MCW,nnn,m,l,a,b (4)
- When the number of parameter digits is large
• Receive
Real-time performance MCW
• Parameter
processing time.
- nnn: Tool No. (100 to 199)
Reference

- m:
AL (all measurement items)
- 1: Correction method
0: 1-Point Correction (1)(2)
1: 2-Point Correction (3)(4)
- c: Value before correction
- f: Value after correction
- o: Offset value
- c1: Value 1 before correction
- f1: Value 1 after correction
- a: Coefficient A
- b: Coefficient A
LJ-X UM_GB 9-17

For number-specified commands Execution result

The number-specified command No. is "53". • 0: Success
• Send • 03:
Word - When a tool does not exist, or when a tool other
*+10
*+12
*+13
*+11
*
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
*+8
*+9
Device than height measurement, trend height
53 nnn m l t c f measurement, profile measurement, or continuous
profile measurement is specified
Word
*+10
*+11
*
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
*+8
*+9
Device - When a non-target measurement item number is
53 nnn m l t o specified when specifying the profile measurement
or the continuous profile measurement
Word - When the correction calculation fails
*+10
*+12
*+13
*+14
*+15
*+16
*+17
*+11
*
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
*+8
Device *+9
• 22:
53 nnn m l t c1 f1 c2 f2
- When the number of parameters is different
Word - When the range of the parameter is incorrect
*+10
*+12
*+13
*+11
*
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
*+8
*+9
Device - When the number of parameter digits is large

53 nnn m l t a b
This command is executed by stopping the current
• Receive measurement temporarily.
Word
*
Device
Return Executio
value n result
• Parameter
- nnn: Tool No. (100 to 199)
Reference

- m:

AL (all measurement items)
- 1: Correction method
0: 1-Point Correction (1)(2)
1: 2-Point Correction (3)(4)
- t: Specification Method
0: Specified correction value
b: Offset, coefficient specification
- o: Offset value
- a: Coefficient A
- b: Coefficient A
9-18 LJ-X UM_GB

MCR Read Measured Value Correction • Parameter

- nnn: Tool No. (100 to 199)
Returns the value of the measured value correction set by
Reference
the specified tool. When the multi-region mode is ON, the area number can be
• Send
MCR,nnn,m value of 100 to 199), the area with the lowest number is used.
• Receive - m:
MCR,0,c,f,o for 1-point correction
MCR,1,c1,f1,c2,f2,a,b for 2-Point Correction
• Parameter
- nnn: Tool No. (100 to 199)
Reference
When the multi-region mode is ON, the area number can be - o: Offset value
- m:
- a: Coefficient A
- b: Coefficient A
Item ID for judgment condition type (for height Execution result
measurement or trend height measurement) • 0: Success
- c: Value before correction • 03:
- f: Value after correction - When a tool does not exist, or when a tool other
- o: Offset value than height measurement, trend height
- c1: Value 1 before correction measurement, profile measurement, or continuous
- c2: Value 2 before correction profile measurement is specified
- f1: Value 1 after correction - When a non-target measurement item number is
- f2: Value 2 after correction specified when specifying the profile measurement
- a: Coefficient A or the continuous profile measurement
- b: Coefficient A - When the correction calculation fails
• 22:
- When the number of parameters is different
- When the range of the parameter is incorrect
• Send
- When the number of parameter digits is large
Word
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
* Real-time performance
Device
54 nnn m This command does not affect the measurement
* Starting word device (command address) processing time.
• Receive
Word
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
*+8
*+9
*
Device
Return Exec 0 c f o
value ution
result
Word
*+10
*+12
*+13
*+14
*+15
*+11
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
*+8
*+9
*
Device
Return Exec 1 c1 f1 c2 f2 a b
value ution
result
LJ-X UM_GB 9-19

I/O control OE Enable/disable output

This command disables the data/image output to the output
buffer and clears the data in the buffer, so that data output
TE Enable/disable trigger input
to external devices is controlled. This command controls
When "TE,0" is executed, the READY terminal is set to the following output functions:
remain off and thus no trigger input will be accepted. When • Results output (terminal block, Ethernet, RS-232C, PLC-
"TE,1" is executed, trigger input will be accepted. Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, EtherCAT, SD card, USB
Reference HDD, PC Program, FTP)
When "TE,0" is executed, the laser will turn off. • Image output (SD card, FTP, USB HDD, PC Program)

• Send • Send
TE,n OE,n
TE OE

• Send • Send
Word Word
*+1
*+2
*+3
*
*+1
*+2
*+3
* Device
Device
56 n 57 n
Word Word
* *
Device Device
Return Executio Return Executio

• n: Format • n: Format
0: Trigger input disabled 0: Output disabled

1: Permit trigger input. 1: Permit output

• 22: The number or the range of the parameter is • 22: The number or the range of the parameter is
incorrect. incorrect.
Real-time performance Real-time performance

This command does not affect the measurement This command does not affect the measurement
processing time. processing time.
9-20 LJ-X UM_GB

Details of command behavior when executed

Utility
• Data output
- Output is stopped for each trigger. (As for output to RS-
232C, Ethernet, SD card, USB HDD, PLC-Link, STW Change Externally Specified String
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, or EtherCAT, when output is
Changes the content of the externally specified string.
disabled during result data output for 1 trigger, data
output for that trigger does not stop.) For non-procedural commands
- When enabled, output is resumed at the next trigger • Send
execution.
STW,n,"ssss
• Parallel terminal output
- Immediately stop the output to the terminal block of STO, • Receive
OUT_DATA 0 to 15, OR, and put it in the normal state. STW
- Although the total judgment results change even when • Parameters
output is prohibited, OR does not reflect on the terminal - n: Specify the Externally Specified String to be
block. changed (0 to 9)
- STO and OUT_DATA 0 to 15 resume output at the next Externally Specified String for screen capture
trigger execution. (1000)
• Relationship with TEST - ssss: Changing string (number of characters 0 to 64)
- There is no priority setting between OE and TEST
terminal. The latest status, enabled or disabled, is For number-specified commands
reflected to the internal operation. The number-specified command No. is "60".
For example, inputting "OE,1" (enable) when TEST=ON • Send
(disable) enables output. (Then, specifying ON (disable) Word
* ...
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
when TEST=OFF (enable) disables output.) Device
- Output is enabled or disabled based on the status (level) 60 n s1 s2 ...
of TEST immediately after the controller is turned on, * Starting word device (command address)
reset, or the program is changed. For example, inputting
• Receive
"OE,1" (enable) when TEST is ON (disable) enables
output. (Then, when the program is changed later, output Word
*
Device
is disabled when TEST=ON (disable).)
Return Execution
value result
• Parameters
- n: Specify the Externally Specified String to be
changed (0 to 9)
Externally Specified String for screen capture
(1000)
- ssss: Changing string (number of characters 0 to 64)
Two words per character are used, and the
termination code is 0 (zero)
Execution result
• 0: Success
• 03: When the Externally Specified String cannot be
utilized (in the case of old version of program setting etc.)
• 22:
- An unnecessary parameter is included.
Point
Only ASCII characters can be specified if SFTP transfer (page 8-
4) is enabled for FTP and the externally specified string being
referred to by the file naming conventions for the image output is
rewritten with this command.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-21

STR Read Externally Specified String TC Clear statistical data

Reads the content of the externally specified string. This command clears the statistical data and then resumes
taking statistics.
• Send For non-procedural commands
STR,n
• Send
• Receive TC
STR,ssss
• Receive
• Parameters TC
- n: Specify the Externally Specified String to be For number-specified commands
read (0 to 9)
• Send
(1000)
- ssss: Read string (number of characters 0 to 64) Word
*
Device
For number-specified commands 64
The number-specified command No. is "61". * Starting word device (command address)
• Send
• Receive
Word
* Word
*+1
*+2
*+3
Device *
Device
61 n
Return Executio
* Starting word device (command address) value n result
• Receive * Starting word device (command result address)
Word Execution result

* ...
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
Device
• 0: Success
Return Execution
s1 s2 s3 ... • 22: An unnecessary parameter is included.
value result
* Starting word device (command result address) Real-time performance
• Parameters It stops the taking of statistics and is executed immediately.
- n: Specify the Externally Specified String to be
read (0 to 9)
(1000)
- ssss: Read string (number of characters 0 to 64)
Two words per character are used, and the
termination code is 0 (zero)
Execution result
• 0: Success
• 03: When the Externally Specified String cannot be
utilized (in the case of old version of program setting etc.)
• 22:
- An unnecessary parameter is included.
9-22 LJ-X UM_GB

TS Save statistical data Execution result

• 0: Success
This command selects the type of statistical data file to be
• 22:
saved to the SD card.
- The number or the range of the parameter is
• The measured values files and the statistics files create their
incorrect.
own CSV files respectively.
- The file type is invalid.
• The naming rule of the file which will store the data conforms
- The folder name is invalid.
to the file naming rules of statistics for both of measured
- The number of specified characters is 0 or
values files and the statistics files.
exceeds the maximum number.
• If a folder for saving the data does not exist, a new folder will
- An invalid character is included (0x7F, 0x80, 0xA0,
be created.
0xFD and up, '*', '?', '"', '<', '>', '|',)
• If the file for saving the data already exists, it will be
- A single-byte period or space exists at the
overwritten (regardless of read-only or other file attributes).
beginning or ending of the folder name.
• Once the data is saved, it will not be output any more
• 03:
(including data saved from the statistics menu).
- The saving failed.
• In the case of the number specification command, the
- The SD card is not inserted.
output destination folder name is fixed at "lj-x3d/stat" of the
- The saving destination folder or file cannot be
SD card 2.
created.
For non-procedural commands - The saving destination file cannot be opened.
• Send - The SD card capacity is full.
- There is no target of statistical measurement set.
TS,n,ssss
• Receive
HC Clear archived profile
TS
This command clears the archived images.
• Parameter
- n: File type for saving For non-procedural commands
0: Measured values file (a save file using the list of • Send
measured values)
HC
1: Statistics files (a save file using process monitor)
- sss: Output Folder Name (a string with a maximum • Receive
of 221 characters, a double-byte character is HC
counted as two single-byte characters)
The number-specified command No. is "65". • Send
• Send
Word
*
Word Device
*+1
*+2
*+3
*
Device 66
65 n
• Receive
• Receive
Word
*
Word Device
*
Device Return Executio
Return Executio value n result
value n result * Starting word device (command result address)
Execution result
• Parameter
• 0: Success
- n: File type for saving
0: Measured values file (a save file using the list of
measured values) Real-time performance
1: Statistics files (a save file using process monitor) This command does not affect the measurement
Real-time performance processing time.

processing time.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-23

HS Save archived image • Parameter

- n: Compression format (0: No compression (BMP),
This command saves the archived image to the SD card or 1: 1/2,
USB HDD. 2: 1/4, 3:1/8, 9: JPEG, 10: PNG)
• If a folder for saving the data does not exist, a new folder will - m: Type of the archived image
be created. 0: Latest Archive
• The export destination folder is "lj-x3d/hist/{Examination 1: Total NG Archive
setting number}/YYMMDD_HHMMSS" of SD card 2 or USB - h: Number of measurement (binary of 2 words)
HDD. 1 to 1000000000: Number of measurement
• If the file for saving the data already exists, it will be 0: Latest measurement (NW)
overwritten (regardless of read-only or other file attributes). -1: All measurement counts (AL)
• Even when the error 03 occurs during the process, the - d: Device
command tries to save all archived images to avoid 0: SD Card 2
interruption of the process. 1: USB HDD
• All specified archives are saved regardless of whether they
are already saved or not. Execution result
• If there is no archived image for saving, the error 03 is • 0: Success
returned. • 22: The number or the range of the parameter is
incorrect.
For non-procedural commands • 03:
• Send - Data saving failed at least once (per image).
- The SD card or USB HDD is not inserted.
HS,n,m,h,1
- The saving destination folder or file cannot be
HS,n,m,h,1,d
created.
• Receive - The saving destination file cannot be opened.
HS - The SD card or USB HDD capacity is full.
- When the following parameter settings and results
• Parameter
exist.
- n: Compression format (0: No compression (BMP),
When NW or an integer value is specified for
1: 1/2,
number of measurement and the archived image
2: 1/4, 3:1/8, 9: JPEG, 10: PNG)
with the specified number of measurement does
- m: Type of the archived image (if the image
not exist.
archive condition is total status NG, the buffer of 1
When AL is specified and no archived images
is read even when 0 is specified.)
exist.
0: Latest Archive
When AL is specified and the image archived at

1: Total NG Archive
the time of receiving the command is not available
- h: Number of measurement
for output (overwritten).
AL: All measurement counts
NW: Latest measurement Real-time performance
Integer value: Number of measurement This command does not affect the measurement
- d: Device processing time.
0: SD Card 2
1: USB HDD

• Send
Word
*+10
*+11
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
*+8
*+9
*
Device
67 n m h 1 d
• Receive
Word
*
Device
Return Executio
value n result
9-24 LJ-X UM_GB

BC Image capture OW Change output file/folder

This command captures an image of the screen and saves This command changes the output file/folder.
it to the SD card or FTP server. • When changing a data output file, a new result file is created
The file name for saving follows the setting in [Screen using the latest date and time.
Capture Settings] (page 8-15) of the global setting. • When changing an image output folder, a new image output
folder is created using the latest date and time.
BC
• Send
BC,n OW,n
BC OW

• Send • Send
Word Word
*+1
*+2
*+3
*
*+1
*+2
*+3
* Device
Device
68 n 69 n
Word Word
* *
Device Device
Return Executio Return Executio

• n: Destination • n: Select the target for changing
- None: SD2 - 0: Result output file change (SD2, FTP, USB HDD)
- 0: SD2 - 1: Image output folder change (SD2, FTP, USB
- 1: FTP HDD, PC application)
• 22: An unnecessary parameter is included. • 22: The number or the range of the parameter is
• 03: incorrect.
- The SD card is not writable.
- The SD card is not found.
- FTP output failed.
processing time.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-25

EC Echo System
This command returns the same character string as the
one that was sent from the external device.
TW Write Date/Time
Reference
This command sets the date and time of the controller.
The number-specified commands cannot be used.
• Send
• Send
TW,yy,mo,dd,hh,mi,ss
EC,ssss
TW,yyyy,mo,dd,hh,mi,ss
• Receive
• Receive
EC,ssss
TW
• Parameter
- sss: String (character string of 128 characters or For number-specified commands
less consisting of alphabets and numbers) The number-specified command No. is "80".
• Send
The number-specified commands cannot be used. Word
*+10
*+12
*+13
*+11
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
*+8
*+9
*
Device
Execution result 80 yy mo dd hh mi ss
• 0: Success
Word
*+10
*+12
*+13
*+11
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
*+8
*+9
• 22: *
Device
- When the number of parameters is different. 80 yyyy mo dd hh mi ss
- The parameter is longer than 128 characters long.
- The parameter includes other than alphabet or
numbers. • Receive
Word
Real-time performance *
Device
This command does not affect the measurement Return Executio
processing time. value n result
Parameters (common)
• yy: When year (0 to 99, lower two digits of the western
calendar (16 for 2016)) 00 - 99 is specified, 2000 is

added and processed.
• yyyy: Year (2000 to 2099)
• mo: Month (1 to 12)
• dd: Day (1 to 31)
• hh: Hour (0 to 23, 24-hour format)
• mi: Minutes (0 to 59)
• ss: Seconds (0 to 59)
Execution result
• 0: Success
incorrect.
• 03: The date/time setting failed.
processing time.
9-26 LJ-X UM_GB

TR Read date/time VI Read Version Information

This command reads the current date and time on the Returns the controller system information ( model number,
controller. ROM version).

• Send • Send
TR VI
TR,yy,mo,dd,hh,mi,ss VI,nnnn,vvvv
For number-specified commands • Parameter

- nnnn: String of model type
- vvvv: ROM version (14-character string)
• Send
Word For number-specified commands
*
Device The number-specified command No. is "82".
81 • Send
* Starting word device (command address) Word
*
*+1
• Receive Device
82
Word
*+10
*+12
*+13
*+11
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
*+8
*+9
*
Device • Receive
Return Execu yy mo dd hh mi ss
Word
*+10
*+12
*+11
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
*+8
*+9
value tion *
Device
result
Return Execu nnn g m hw mj mn
* Starting word device (command result address) value tion
result
Parameters (common)
• Parameter
• yy: Year (0 to 99, lower two digits of the western calendar
- nnn: Model type number (4 digits)
(16 for 2016))
- g: Package (0 = no E, 1 = E)
• mo: Month (1 to 12)
- m: Application mode (0 = 2D mode, 1 = 3D mode)
• dd: Day (1 to 31)
- hw: The top first position of the major version in the
• hh: Hour (0 to 23, 24-hour format)
ROM version information is represented as a
• mi: Minutes (0 to 59)
numeric value.
• ss: Seconds (0 to 59)
- mj: The top second position of the major version in
Execution result the ROM version information is represented as a
• 0: Success numeric value.
• 22: An unnecessary parameter is included. - mn: The minor version in the ROM version
information is represented as a numeric value.
This command does not affect the measurement Execution result
processing time. • 0: Success
processing time.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-27

TZW: Write Time Zone TZR: Read Time Zone

Configure the SNTP timezone. The SNTP time zone is read.

TZW,n
• Send
• Receive TZR
TZW
• Receive
TZR,n
The number-specified command is "83". For number-specified commands
• Send The number-specified command is "84".
• Send
Word
*+1
*+2
*+3
*
Device Word
*+1
*
Device
83 n
84
• Receive
• Receive
Word
*
Device Word
*+1
*+2
*
Device
Execu
tion Return Execu n
result value tion
result
Parameters (common)
• n: Timezone (0 to 33)
Parameters (common)
• n: Timezone (0 to 33)
Execution result
Execution result
incorrect. • 22: An unnecessary parameter is included.
Real-time performance Real-time performance

This command does not affect the measurement This command does not affect the measurement
processing time. processing time.
9-28 LJ-X UM_GB

Control/Data Output via the PLC-Link
Control/Data Output via the PLC-Link
Using the PLC-Link with the RS-232C or Ethernet interface

enables the following operations.
Example of the PLC-Link usage
• Outputting data via PLC-Link: Allows measurement data in
this machine to be output directly to the DM (data memory) Example 1: Data output
of the PLC.
• Controlling this machine via PLC-Link: Allows the operation of Outputting the measurement results 1 to 3 to KV-
the this machine by reading of the commands stored in the DM 7000 series.
(data memory) of the PLC.
Main unit PLC
Reference
Measurement result 1 DM0000-DM0001（32bit）
• DM (data memory) is referred to as data register (D) for the 1111.111 1111111
Mitsubishi Electric PLC, as data memory (D) for the Omron PLC, Measurement result 2 DM0002-DM0003（32bit）
and as data register (M) for the YASKAWA Electric PLC. 2222.222 Data writing 2222222
• EtherNet/IP, PROFINET and EtherCAT cannot be used in Measurement result 3 DM0004-DM0005（32bit）
3333.333 3333333
conjunction with PLC-Link. When using the RS-232C port,
nonprocedural RS-232C communication cannot be used in (In the case of decimal point treatment is fixed point)
conjunction with PLC-Link. • The measurement results in this machine are saved to the
specified DM of the PLC for each trigger.
• 2 DMs (32bits) are used for 1 measurement result.
Example 2: Command control (number-

specified)
Changing the date and time setting on this machine
using 80 "TW command"
Main unit PLC

DM100 80 Command No.
DM101
The date and DM102 12 Year
time setting of DM103
the Main unit Command DM104 2 Month
will be read DM105
rewritten on DM106 12 Date
February 12, Command
DM107
2012, 3 Hrs: execution
DM108 3 Hours
27 Mins : 10 s. DM109
DM110 27 Minutes
DM111
DM112 10 Seconds
DM113
• This machine reads the command No. and required

parameters previously stored in the DM of the PLC using the
terminal input or polling to execute the command.
• The assigned command No. uses 16 bits and command
parameters use 32 bits (little endian) in binary when saved
to the DM.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-29

Types of Compatible PLC-Link Connections
Types of Compatible PLC-Link Connections
The following PLCs are compatible with the PLC-Link connection on this machine.
Reference
• The range of data memories differ depending on the system. For more details, refer to the manual for each PLC.
• For the majority of PLCs, only connections via link unit are supported.
Via RS-232C interface
Keyence Corporation
Series name PLC Controller Link unit PLC operation mode PLC type
KV KV-700 KV-L20 KV BUILDER mode KV-L20 Series
KV-1000 KV-L20R KV STUDIO mode KV-L20 Series
KV-3000, KV-5000, KV-5500, KV-XL202, KV-L20V, KV-L21V KV STUDIO mode KV-L20 Series
KV-7300, KV-7500, KV-8000
KV Nano KV-N10L, KV-NC10L, KV-NC20L KV STUDIO mode KV-L20 Series
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

MELSEC-AnS A1S, A1SH, A1SJ, A1SJH1, A2S, A2SH, A1SJ71 (U) C24-R2, Exclusive protocol format 1 MELSEC AnN Series
A171S, A171SH A1SJ71 (U) C24-PRF
A1CPUC24-R2 Calculator link port Exclusive protocol format 1 MELSEC AnN Series
A2US, A2USH A1SJ71 (U) C24-R2, Exclusive protocol format 1 MELSEC AnN Series
A1SJ71 (U) C24-PRF
MELSEC-A0J2 A0J2, A0J2H A0J2-C214-S1 Exclusive protocol format 1 MELSEC AnN Series
MELSEC-AnN A1N, A2N, A3N AJ71C24, AJ71C24-S3, AJ71C24-S6, Exclusive protocol format 1 MELSEC AnN Series
AJ71C24-S8, AJ71UC24
MELSEC-AnA A2A, A3A AJ71C24-S6, AJ71C24-S8, Exclusive protocol format 1 MELSEC AnN Series
AJ71UC24
MELSEC-AnU A2U, A3U, A4U AJ71C24-S6, AJ71C24-S8, Exclusive protocol format 1 MELSEC AnN Series
AJ71UC24
MELSEC-QnA Q2A, Q2A-S1, Q3A, Q4A AJ71QC24 (N), AJ71QC24 (N) R2, Exclusive protocol format 5 MELSEC Q/L series
AJ71QC24 (N) R4
Q2AS, Q2AS-S1, Q2ASH, Q2ASH-S1 A1SJ71QC24, A1SJ71QC24-R2 Exclusive protocol format 5 MELSEC Q/L series
MELSEC-Q Q00CPU, Q01CPU QJ71C24, QJ71C24 (N) -R2 MC protocol format 5 MELSEC Q/L series
Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q02UCPU, QJ71C24, QJ71C24 (N) -R2 MC protocol format 5 MELSEC Q/L series
Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU,
Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU,
Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU,
Q26UDEHCPU, Q06HCP, Q12HCPU,
Q25HCPU, Q02UCPU, Q03UDVCPU,
Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU,
Q26UDVCPU
Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A, Q06HCPU-A A1SJ71 (U) C24-R2 Exclusive protocol format 1 MELSEC AnN Series
A1SJ71 (U) C24-PRF
MELSEC-L L02CPU, L26CPU-BT LJ71C24, LJ71C24-R2 MC protocol format 5 MELSEC Q/L series
MELSEC iQ-R R04CPU RJ71C24 MC protocol format 5 MELSEC Q/L series
MELSEC iQ-F FX5U None * MC protocol format 5 MELSEC Q/L series
MELSEC-FX FX1S FX1N-232-BD,FX2NC-232ADP Exclusive protocol MELSEC FX Series
communication
FX3G FX3G-232-BD,FX3U-232ADP Exclusive protocol MELSEC FX Series
communication
FX3U, FX3UC FX3U-232-BD, FX3U-232ADP Exclusive protocol MELSEC FX Series
communication
*Connection via link unit is not supported.
9-30 LJ-X UM_GB

Omron Corporation
PLC operation
Series name PLC Controller Link unit PLC type
mode
SYSMAC SPM1 SRM1-C01 CPM1-C1F01 Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC C Series
SRM1-C02
SYSMAC CPM1 CPM1 CPM1-C1F01 Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC C Series
SYSMAC CPM1A CPM1A
SYSMAC CPM2A CPM2A-30CD□□, CPM2A-40CD□□, CPM1-C1F01 Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC C Series
CPM2A-60CD□□
SYSMAC CPM2C CPM2C-10CD□□, CPM2C-20CD□□ CPM1-C1F01 Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC C Series
CPM2C-C1F01
SYSMAC CQM1H CQM1H-CPU11*, CQM1H-CPU21*, CPM1-C1F01 Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC C Series
CQM1H-CPU51/61 CQM1H-SCB41
SYSMAC C C120, C120F C120-LK201-V1 Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC C Series
C200H C200H-LK201 (-V1) Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC C Series
C200HS-CPU01, C200HS-CPU03, C200HS-CPU21/23, C200H-LK201 (-V1) Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC C Series
C200HS-CPU31/33
C500, C500F, C1000H, C1000HF, C2000, C2000H C120-LK201-V1 Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC C Series
C500-LK201-V1
C500-LK203
SYSMAC α C200HE-CPU11, C200HE-CPU32, C200HE-CPU42 C200H-LK201 (-V1) Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC C Series
C200HG-CPU33, C200HG-CPU43, C200HG-CPU53, C200H-LK201 (-V1) Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC C Series
C200HG-CPU63
C200HX-CPU34, C200HX-CPU44, C200HX-CPU54, C200HX- C200H-LK201 (-V1) Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC C Series
CPU64, C200HX-CPU65-Z, C200HX-CPU85-Z
SYSMAC CJ CJ1M-CPU11-ETN, CJ1M-CPU12, CJ1M-CPU12-ETN, CJ1W-SCU21 (-V1), CJ1W- Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC CJ/CS1/CP1
CJ1M-CPU13, CJ1M-CPU13-ETN, CJ1M-CPU22, SCU22, Series
CJ1M-CPU23, CJ1G-CPU44, CJ1G-CPU45, CJ1W-SCU41
CJ1G-CPU42H, CJ1G-CPU43H, CJ1G-CPU44H,
CJ1G-CPU45H, CJ1H-CPU64H-R, CJ1H-CPU65H,
CJ1H-CPU65H-R, CJ1H-CPU66H, CJ1H-CPU66H-R, CJ1H-
CPU67H, CJ1H-CPU67H-R, CJ2M-CPU11,
CJ2M-CPU12, CJ2M-CPU13, CJ2M-CPU14,
CJ2H-CPU64-EIP, CJ2H-CPU65-EIP, CJ2H-CPU66-EIP,
CJ2H-CPU67-EIP, CJ2H-CPU68-EIP
SYSMAC CS1 CS1G-CPU42 (H), CS1G-CPU43 (H), CS1G-CPU44 (H), CS1W-SCU21 (-V1) Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC CJ/CS1/CP1
CS1G-CPU45 (H), CS1H-CPU63 (H), CS1H-CPU64 (H), Series
CS1H-CPU65 (H), CS1H-CPU66 (H), CS1H-CPU67 (H)
SYSMAC CP1 CP1H-Y20DT-D, CP1H-XA40D□-□, CP1H-X40D□-□, CP1L- CP1W-CIF01 Upper link (SYSWAY) SYSMAC CJ/CS1/CP1
M60D□-□, CP1L-M40D□-□ CP1L-M30D□-□, Series
CP1L-L20D□-□, CP1L-L14D□-□, CP1E-NA20D□-□, CP1E-
N60D□-□ CP1E-N40D□-□, CP1E-N30D□-□
*The CQM1H-SCB41 link unit cannot be used.
YASKAWA Electric Corporation
MP2000 MP2200, MP2300, MP2310, MP2300S 217IF-01, 218IF-01, 218IF-02 MEMOBUS YASKAWA MP Series
MP900 MP920*, MP930* 217IF** MEMOBUS YASKAWA MP Series
*Also compatible with the built-in RS-232C interface on the system.
Cannot be connected to **MP930.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-31

Via Ethernet Interface
Keyence Corporation

KV KV-700, KV-1000 KV-LE20, KV-LE20A KV Series
KV-3000, KV-5000*, KV-5500* KV-LE20V, KV-LE21V, KV Series
KV-EP21V**
KV-7300, KV-7500*, KV-8000* KV-XLE02, KV-LE20V,  KV Series
KV-LE21V, KV-EP21V
KV Nano KV-NC1EP KV Series
*Also compatible with the built-in Ethernet interface on the system.
Only CPU version 2 or later can be used for **KV-3000, KV-5000 and KV-5500.
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

MELSEC-Q Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q02UCPU, QJ71E71 MELSEC Q/L series
Q03UDECPU*, Q04UDEHCPU*, Q06UDEHCPU*, Q10UDEHCPU*, QJ71E71-100
Q13UDEHCPU*, Q20UDEHCPU*, Q26UDEHCPU*, Q06HCPU,
Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU, Q03UDVCPU*, Q04UDVCPU*,
Q06UDVCPU*, Q13UDVCPU*, Q26UDVCPU*
MELSEC-L L02CPU*, L26CPU-BT* None ** MELSEC Q/L series
MELSEC iQ-R R04CPU*, R04ENCPU* RJ71EN71 MELSEC Q/L series
MELSEC iQ-F FX5U*/FX5UC* None ** MELSEC Q/L series
* Also compatible with the built-in Ethernet interface on the system.
** Connection via link unit is not supported.
Omron Corporation

SYSMAC CJ CJ1M-CPU11-ETN*, CJ1M-CPU12, CJ1M-CPU12-ETN*, CJ1W-ETN11, SYSMAC CJ/CS1/CP1 series
CJ1M-CPU13, CJ1M-CPU13-ETN*, CJ1M-CPU22, CJ1M-CPU23, CJ1W-ETN21
CJ1G-CPU44, CJ1G-CPU45, CJ1G-CPU42H, CJ1G-CPU43H,

CJ1G-CPU44H, CJ1G-CPU45H, CJ1H-CPU64H-R,
CJ1H-CPU65H, CJ1H-CPU65H-R, CJ1H-CPU66H,
CJ1H-CPU66H-R, CJ1H-CPU67H, CJ1H-CPU67H-R,
CJ2M-CPU11, CJ2M-CPU12, CJ2M-CPU13, CJ2M-CPU14,
CJ2M-CPU15, CJ2M-CPU31*, CJ2M-CPU32*, CJ2M-CPU33*,
CJ2M-CPU34*, CJ2M-CPU35*, CJ2H-CPU64-EIP*,
CJ2H-CPU65-EIP*, CJ2H-CPU66-EIP*, CJ2H-CPU67-EIP*,
CJ2H-CPU68-EIP*
SYSMAC CS1 CS1G-CPU42 (H), CS1G-CPU43 (H), CS1G-CPU44 (H), CS1W-ETN11, SYSMAC CJ/CS1/CP1 series
CS1G-CPU45 (H), CS1H-CPU63 (H), CS1H-CPU64 (H), CS1W-ETN21
CS1H-CPU65 (H), CS1H-CPU66 (H), CS1H-CPU67 (H)
SYSMAC CP1 CP1H-Y20DT-D, CP1H-XA40D□-□, CP1H-X40D□-□ CP1W-CIF41, SYSMAC CJ/CS1/CP1 series
CJ1W-ETN21**
CP1L-M60D□-□, CP1L-M40D□-□, CP1L-M30D□-□, CP1W-CIF41 SYSMAC CJ/CS1/CP1 series
CP1L-L20D□-□, CP1L-L14D□-□, CP1E-NA20D□-□,
CP1E-N60D□-□, CP1E-N40D□-□, CP1E-N30D□-□
** The CJ unit adapter, CP1W-EXT01, is required.
YASKAWA Electric Corporation

MP2000 MP2200, MP2300, MP2310*, MP2300S*, MP2400* 218IF-01, 218IF-02 YASKAWA MP Series
9-32 LJ-X UM_GB
Preparing the PLC
Preparing the PLC
1. Wiring overview
The PLC is wired to this machine in the following way.
PLC Main unit
PLC
(CPU internal RS-232C or
port or link unit) Ethernet
Terminal
I/O Unit block (PLC)
Reference
• When the controller is not receiving commands from the PLC or when it is polling, the PLC does not need to be connected to the terminal
block (PLC).
• Since this machine is defined as a modem, when connecting to a device that complies with the terminal definition via RS-232C, connect
the RD signal of this machine to the RD signal of the device and the SD signal of this machine to the SD signal of the device.
2. Wiring for the PLC-Link and setting the link unit (RS-232C)
When connecting to a Keyence KV Series (other than the KV-XL202)

• Use OP-26486 (D-sub 9-pin female connector) and OP-26487 (2.5 m straight cable).
• Set the link unit operation mode to [KV-Builder mode] (for the KV-700) or [KV-STUDIO mode] (for the KV-Nano, KV-1000/3000/
5000/5500/7300/7500/8000).
LJ-X Series PC/KV-L20 Series
(RJ-11 modular jack) (9-pin)
5.RD 3.SD
3.SD 2.RD
1.CS 4.ER
6.RS 6.DR
7.RS
2.NC 8.CS
4.SG 5.SG
1.CD
9.RI
When connecting to a Keyence KV-XL202 Series PLC

• Process the KV-side connector of the OP-26487 (2.5 m straight cable) into loose wires, and then wire it directly to the terminal
block of the KV as shown in the following figure.
• Set the link unit operation mode to [KV-STUDIO mode].
LJ-X Series KV-XL202

(RJ-11 modular jack) (7-pin terminal block)
5.RD 1.SD
3.SD 2.RD
1.CS 5.ER
6.RS 6.DR
3.RS
4.CS
4.SG 7.SG
LJ-X UM_GB 9-33

Preparing the PLC
When connecting to an Omron SYSMAC PLC

Reference
When connecting to a SYSMAC C, adapt the wiring described here to the pins on the actual connectors used for the connection.
• Use OP-84384 (D-sub 9-pin male connector) and OP-26487 (2.5 m straight cable) for the SYSMAC (9-pin).
• Set the PLC side communication port operation mode to "upper link (SYSWAY)".
• Set the 1:1 or 1:N process to "1:N process".
• Set the unit number to "No. 0".
• Set the CS control to "None".
• When enabling settings using CX-Programmer 6.0 or later, make sure to set the [Optional settings on/off] item to [On]. When set
to "Off", changes to other settings will not be enabled.
For 9-pin For 25-pin
LJ-X Series SYSMAC LJ-X Series SYSMAC

(RJ-11 modular Jack) (9 pins) (RJ-11 modular Jack) (25 pins)
5.RD 2.SD 5.RD 2.SD

3.SD 3.RD 3.SD 3.RD
1.CS 4.RS 1.CS 4.RS
6.RS 5.CS 6.RS 5.CS
8.ER
7.DR
4.SG 9.SG 4.SG 7.SG
6.+5V
Point
• If OP-26486 and OP-26487 are used as is to connect to a SYSMAC (9-pin), it may cause damage to this machine or the connected
device. Do not use this connector.
• The controller's SG and power source 0V are insulated.
Connecting to a MELSEC AnN, Q/L/iQ-R/iQ-F Series PLC

• Use OP-86930 (D-sub 9-pin male connector) and OP-26487 (2.5 m straight cable) for the MELSEC AnN, Q/L/iQ-R series.
• Use OP-26486 (D-sub 9-pin female connector) and OP-26487 (2.5 m straight cable) for the MELSEC iQ-F series.
• The operation mode of the PLC side communication port is set to "MC protocol format 5" for Q series and L series, iQ-R series,
and iQ-F series, and "dedicated protocol format 1" for the A series.
• When using Q series and iQ-R series, set "save during RUN" to "permit".
• Set the checksum setting to [On].
Reference
• When connected to the A Series, "RS-232C CD terminal unchecked" must be defined in the ladder. Refer to the manual for the Mitsubishi
Electric computing link unit for more details.
• In the MELSEC AnN, Q/L/iQ-R series, it is necessary to convert to a D-sub 9 pin male connector when using the OP-26486 (D-sub 9 pin
female connector). Use a commercially available gender converter (D-sub 9 pin female to D-sub 9 pin male, straight connection).
• To use the Q Series link unit QJ71C24 (N) -R2, set "Baud rate 115200 bit/s, data length 8 bits, stop bit 1, even parity", and the switch
setting in the PC parameters to "0BEE (hexadecimal)".
LJ-X Series MELSEC

(RJ-11 modular Jack) AnN, Q / L / iQ-R / iQ-F series
(9 pins)
5.RD 3.SD
3.SD 2.RD
1.CS 4.ER
6.RS 6.DR
7.RS
2.NC 8.CS
4.SG 5.SG
1.CD
Point
9-34 LJ-X UM_GB

Preparing the PLC
When connecting to a Mitsubishi MELSEC FX Series (Outside the FX5 Series) PLC
• Use OP-26486 (D-sub 9-pin female connector) and OP-26487 (2.5 m straight cable).
• Assignment of the communication channels starts from the "communication function expansion board" and the "communication
special adapter" which are closer to the CPU.
• Set the PLC side communication port operation mode to [Exclusive Protocol Communication]. Set the checksum setting to [On].
• Set the H/W type to [Normal/RS-232C], the transmission control procedure to [Type 1 (without CR, CF)], the station number to
[00H].
LJ-X Series MELSEC
(RJ-11 modular Jack) FX series
(9 pins)
5.RD 3.SD
3.SD 2.RD
1.CS 4.ER
6.RS 6.DR
7.RS
2.NC 8.CS
4.SG 5.SG
1.CD
9.RI
Point
• When connecting to a MELSEC FX5 series, please refer to "when connecting to a MELSEC AnN, Q/L/iQ-R/iQ-F series".
Connecting to a YASKAWA MP Series PLC

• Work on OP-26487 (2.5 m straight cable) and connect it to the commercially available D-sub 9 pin male connector as shown in
the figure below.
• Set the communication protocol to "MEMOBUS".
• Set Master/Slave to "Slave".
• Set the transmission mode to "RTU".
• Set the device address to "1".
• Describe the MSG-RCV processing in the ladder. (Set the automatic reception to "Specified" for a module that allows automatic
reception.) Refer to the manual for the YASKAWA Electric communication unit for more details.
LJ-X Series MP Series
(RJ-11 modular Jack) (9 pins)
5.RD 2.SD
3.SD 3.RD
1.CS 4.RS
6.RS 5.CS
4.SG 7.SG
6.SR
9.TR
1.FG
Point
• If OP-26486 and OP-26487 are used as is for connection, it may cause damage to this machine or the connected device. Do not use this
connector.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-35

Preparing the PLC
3. Wiring for the PLC-Link and setting When connecting to a Mitsubishi MELSEC
the PLC side (Ethernet) link unit
When it is a Q/L series
• Make sure that the specified IP address is unique and
different from the IP addresses for other devices. Change settings using the network parameters in GX
• For all devices on a connected network, use the same Developer or GX Works 2.
subnet mask. For additional networks use a unique and • MELSECNET/Ethernet
different subnet mask. - Network types: Select [Ethernet].
• Use a category 5e or greater shielded twisted pair (STP) - Mode: Select [Online].
cable for connection. When connecting the equipment • Operation settings
directly (1 to 1), use a cross cable. When connecting - Data communication code setting: Select [Binary
through a hub, use a straight cable. code communication].
- Initial timing setting: Select [Always Open].
- IP address setting: Set the IP address which is
When connecting to a Keyence KV Series specified for the PLC-Link settings on this machine.
PLC - Send frame setting: Select [Ethernet (V2.0)].
- Authorize writing during RUN: Select [Permit].
Use KV BUILDER or KV STUDIO for setting.
• IP address: Set the IP address which is specified for the When it is iQ-R series
PLC-Link settings on this machine. Change settings using the unit parameters in GX Works 3.
• Port No. (VT): Set the port number which is specified for [Primary Settings] > [Other Device Connection
the port in the PLC-Link settings on this machine. Configuration Settings] > [Advanced Settings] from the unit
list, add [UDP Connection Device] to Ethernet configuration
When connecting to an Omron SYSMAC PLC and configure as the following:
• Communication method: Select both [Fixed Buffer (if
Change the settings using CX-Programmer. Before starting present) and [Random Access Buffer].
this setting, complete NODE No. for the PLC-Link settings • Sequencer (port number)/sensor device (port
on this machine. (Normally specify "1" for the number.) number): Set the port number of the PLC to either (setting
• IP address: Set the IP address which is specified for the range: 1025 to 4999, 5010 to 65534)
PLC-Link settings on this machine. • Sensor device (IP Address): Set the IP of a router for this
• FINS UDP port: Select [Define user], and set the specified machine.
port number which is specified for the PLC-Link settings on • Confirm existence: Select [Don’t Confirm Existence].
this machine. • Authorize writing during RUN: Select [Permit].
• IP address table: Set the IP address and node address
specified in the [Ethernet] screen of the global settings on

this machine. The node address is normally [1].
• IP router table: Set this only when using a router. Set the
IP of a router for the router address. Set the IP address
specified in the [Ethernet] screen of the global settings on
this machine.
Reference
Specify a NODE No. for the PLC side communication port which is
different from the NODE No. for the PLC-Link setting on this
machine.
9-36 LJ-X UM_GB

Preparing the PLC
Connecting to a Mitsubishi MELSEC PLC Connecting to a YASKAWA MP Series PLC

with built-in Ethernet port Use MP720 for setting.
Point • Communication protocol: Select "EXTENSION
• The built-in Ethernet port does not support Auto open UDP port MEMOBUS".
(port number initial value: 5000) like the QJ71E71-100. Specify • Master/slave: Select [Slave].
the communications port on this machine to a value from 1025 • Code: Select [BIN].
to 4999, or 5010 to 65535. • Select [UDP] for connection type.
• Do not set more than one controller to the same port number. When • Remote IP address: Set the IP address which is specified
connecting multiple controllers via a hub, set each controller with a for the PLC-Link settings on this machine.
different communication port number, and set multiple local port
• Local Port No.: Set the port number which is specified for
numbers that correspond to them.
the port in the PLC-Link settings on this machine.
When it is a Q/L series • Describe the MSG-RCV processing in the ladder. (Set the
Change settings using the PC parameters in GX Developer automatic reception to "Specified" for a module that allows
or GX Works 2. automatic reception.)
• Built-In Ethernet port settings Refer to the manual for the YASKAWA Electric
- IP address: Set the IP address which is specified for the communication unit for more details.
PLC-Link settings on this machine.
- Data communication code setting: Select [Binary
code communication].
- Authorize writing during RUN: Enable this setting.
• Open settings: Add these settings.
- Protocol: Select [UDP].
- Open method: Select [MC protocol].
- Local port number: Specify a hexadecimal value within
the range 0401 to 1387, and 1392 to FFFE. Numbers
from 1388 to 1391 (5000 to 5009 in decimal) are
reserved.
Specify the [Port] setting in this machine with the decimal
notation of the hexadecimal value specified here.
(Example, if the local node port number is 1387, specify
4999 in this machine).
When it is iQ-R/iQ-F series
Change settings using the unit parameters in GX Works 3.
• Own Node Setup
- IP address: Set the IP address which is specified for the
PLC-Link settings on this machine.
- Data communication code setting: Select [Binary].
- Authorize writing during RUN: Select allow all
(SLMP) (only in the case of iQ-R)
• Other device connection configuration settings:
[Primary Settings] > [Other Device Connection
Configuration Settings] > [Advanced Settings] from the unit
list, add [SLMP Connection Device] to Ethernet
configuration and configure as follows.
- Protocol: Set the [UDP].
- Sequencer (port number)/sensor device (port
number): Set the port number of the PLC to either
(setting range: 1025 to 4999, 5010 to 65534)
- Sensor device (IP Address): Set the IP of a router for
this machine.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-37

Outputting Measurement Data via PLC-Link
Outputting Measurement Data via PLC-Link
Data output procedure (Data Output Flow)

This machine outputs data via the PLC-Link in the following manner. *1
Main unit (LJ-X Series) PLC
Image processing is completed in the Main unit, and

result data is stored
(2)
(1)
Check that the value of the result output control
Write "0" to the result output control address (bit)
address (bit) is "0" (level)
(2)
(3)
Write the measurement data to the measurement result
Write measurement data from the Measurement output address.
result output address to a continuous DM
(3)
(4) The value of the result output completion
Write "1" to the result output completion address (bit) address (bit) is replaced by "1" to confirm the
DM after the data is written for one measurement. completion of the measurement data for one
measurement.
(5)
Detect that the DM value of the result output (5)
control address (bit) has changed to "1" and Write "1" to the result output control address (bit)
confirm the data read completion
(6) (6)
Write "0" to the result output completion address Detect that the result output completion address
(bit) DM (bit) has been changed (falling edge) to "0"
(1)
Write "0" to the result output control address (bit)
• For processing with the [Acknowledge result output completion] and [Enable Handshake] options enabled, all result data can be retrieved
on the PLC side.
If all result data is not necessary and only the latest result data needs to be retrieved on the PLC side, the following settings can reduce
the time required to output the results.
If you disable [Enable Handshake], you can restrict Result Ack Address (bit) value confirmation in Steps 2 and 5 (in this case, this
machine outputs the result data regardless of whether data has been completely read or not on the PLC side). Moreover, if the
[Acknowledge result output completion] is disabled, writing can be restricted to the Result Ready Address (bit) in Steps 4 and 6 (on the
PLC it cannot be determined whether the result data has been updated).
Timing Chart
Image processing Image processing
(2)
Result Ack Address (bit) PLC writes.
Result Ready Address (bit) Controller writes.
Measurement Result Output Address Controller writes.
(1) (3) (4) (5) (6) (1)

See the descriptions from following pages for required settings.
9-38 LJ-X UM_GB

6 Specify the starting address of the data memory to

Using the PLC-Link via RS-232C
which this machine outputs data for the PLC unit in
(Measurement Data Output)
the [Result Output Address] field as required.
Change the settings on this machine to output data via the As all measurement data on this machine is output in 32
PLC-Link. bits, a word device for 1 data is 2 words.
Reference Reference
When this machine is changed to Run mode, the warning message This machine can write data to the PLC within the following data
"Failed to establish a link with the PLC." may be repeatedly memory ranges.
displayed. In this case, the PLC-Link settings or connection of an • KV-L20 Series: 00000 to 65535
active PLC may be incorrect. • MELSEC AnA Series: 0000 to 8191
• MELSEC Q/L/iQ-R/iQ-FSeries: 00000 to 32767
• MELSEC FXSeries: 0000 to 7999
1 From [Global], select [Communications & I/O] - • SYSMAC CSeries: 0000 to 9999
[PLC-Link] in Setup mode. • SYSMAC CJ/CS1/CP1Series: 00000 to 32767
• YASKAWA MPSeries: 0000 to 4095
If the data is written outside the specified data memory range, an
2 Select [PLC-Link (RS-232C)] in [Mode]. error message appears, indicating communication is interrupted.
Additionally, the data memory range actually available for the
3 In [PLC Type], select the PLC type for the device of the same series varies depending on the PLC
connected PLC model. specifications and settings, and therefore, there may be a case
where the range cannot be used up to the maximum.
When the connection destination model is selected, the
relevant setting items for the selected PLC type are 7 Check the [Acknowledge result output completion]
displayed. to be notified that data output is completed.
For more details on the [PLC Type] to be selected for the
Unchecking this option can reduce the communication
connected PLC model, refer to "Types of Compatible PLC-
time. However, it is necessary to pay attention to the data
Link Connections" (page 9-30).
reception timing control at the PLC side in this case. See
4 Change the communication settings as required. "Data output procedure (Data Output Flow)" (page 9-38)
for details on various data communication with the PLC.
Baud rate
8 To be notified of data output completion, specify
or from 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, 230400 (bps). the data memory address to which the data is
output in the [Result Ready Address (bit)].
Stop Bit
When data output to the PLC is successfully completed,
Select [1] (initial value) or [2] for the stop bit.
this machine writes "1" to this memory.
Parity Bit
Select [Even] (initial value), [Odd], or [None] for the parity
bit. 10Restart this machine.
5 Select the data expression method in [Decimal
Point].
• Fixed-Point (initial value): The original data is multiplied
by 1000, and handled as a signed 32-bit integer data
(address m: lower 16 bit, address m+1: higher 16 bit).
• Floating decimal point: uses the measured result in
the data memory as a single-precision floating-point data
(32 bits).
Reference
The setting in [Decimal Point] is applied only to the measured

values. The data other than measured values, such as number of
measurements, are always output with the same integer as the
displayed value.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-39

6 Specify the starting address of the data memory to

Using the PLC-Link via Ethernet
which this machine outputs data for the PLC unit in
(Measurement Data Output)
the [Result Output Address] field as required.
Change the settings on this machine to output data via the As all measurement data on this machine is output in 32
PLC-Link. bits, a word device for 1 data is 2 words.
Reference Reference
When this machine is changed to Run mode, the warning message This machine can write data to the PLC within the following data
"Failed to establish a link with the PLC." may be repeatedly memory ranges.
displayed. In this case, the PLC-Link settings or connection of an • KV Series: 00000 to 65535
active PLC may be incorrect. • MELSEC Q/L/iQ-R/iQ-FSeries: 00000 to 32767
• SYSMAC CJ/CS1/CP1Series: 00000 to 32767
• YASKAWA MPSeries: 0000 to 4095
1 From [Global], select [Communications & I/O] - If the data is written outside the specified data memory range, an
[PLC-Link] in Setup mode. error message appears, indicating communication is interrupted.
Additionally, the data memory range actually available for the
device of the same series varies depending on the PLC
2 Select [PLC-Link (Ethernet)] in [Mode]. specifications and settings, and therefore, there may be a case
where the range cannot be used up to the maximum.
3 In [PLC Type], select the PLC type for the
connected PLC model.
7 Check the [Acknowledge result output completion]
to be notified that data output is completed.
relevant setting items for the selected PLC type are Unchecking this option can reduce the communication
displayed. time. However, it is necessary to pay attention to the data
For more details on the [PLC Type] to be selected for the reception timing control at the PLC side in this case. See
connected PLC model, refer to "Types of Compatible PLC- "Data output procedure (Data Output Flow)" (page 9-38)
Link Connections" (page 9-30). for details on various data communication with the PLC.
4 Change the settings as required. 8 To be notified of data output completion, specify

the data memory address to which the data is
IP Address output in the [Result Ready Address (bit)].
Enter the IP address for the unit that the controller is When data output to the PLC is successfully completed,
communicating with. this machine writes "1" to this memory.
Port 9 After completing the setting, click [OK].
Enter the port number to be used for the PLC-Link.
10Restart this machine.

Resend time (ms)
Reference
Enter the resend time (ms) for use if a communication error
The changes will not take effect until this machine is restarted.
occurs.
NODE No. (when selecting SYSMAC)

Data output setting
Enter the node number used to identify the controller.

• All of the output data and output order via the PLC-Link are
specified in the [PLC-Link] screen of the [Output Settings].
Point].
For details, see [Change the communication method of PLC
• Fixed-Point (initial value): The original data is multiplied communication (PLC-Link)].
by 1000, and handled as a signed 32-bit integer data • Every time a trigger is input, the measurement results set in
(address m: lower 16 bit, address m+1: higher 16 bit). the output data setting are written to the specified result
• Floating decimal point: uses the measured result in output address.
the data memory as a single-precision floating-point data • After the measurement result for 1 trigger is written, 1 is
(32 bits). written to the specified result ready address (bit).
Reference
The setting in [Decimal Point] is applied only to the measured

values. The data other than measured values, such as number of
measurements, are always output with the same integer as the
displayed value.
9-40 LJ-X UM_GB

Controlling this machine via PLC-Link (PLC terminal)
Controlling this machine via PLC-Link (PLC terminal)
Shorting/opening the PLC terminals directly allows commands to be read and executed as with command execute address
(bit). Wiring to the PLC terminals is required (page 9-33).
Command execution procedure via PLC terminal (Command Processing Flow)

A command is executed between this machine and the PLC in the following manner.
(1)
Write command number and parameters to the
command address
(2)
At the rising timing of the PLC terminal, read the
(2)
command number and parameters from the Turn ON the terminal input "PLC" of main unit.
command address DM and execute the command.
(3)
(4)
Write reply data from command result address to
successive DM after command execution is Reply data is written to the command result
completed*1 address
(5)
(5)
The command completion address (bit) is
Write the reply data of the command execution replaced with "1" to confirm the completion of the
and write "1" to the DM value of the command command execution and confirm the reply data.
completion address (bit)
(6)
(7) Lower the PLC terminal of the Main unit
Detect the fall of the PLC terminal and return to (7)
the command completion address (bit) value to "0"
Confirm that the command completion address
(bit) has been changed (falling) to "0" and moves
to the next command action
• The returned data varies depending on the commands. For more details, see "Detailed Explanation of Communication Control
Commands" and confirm the received data of each command.
Timing Chart
Command execution status Command execution
PLC Terminal (2) (6) PLC writes.
Command completion address(bit) (7) Controller writes.
Command address PLC writes.
(3) (5)
Command result address Controller writes.
(1) (4)
LJ-X UM_GB 9-41

6 Select [PLC Terminal] in [Command Execute

Event].
(PLC Terminal)
7 In the [Command Complete Address (bit)], specify
Change the settings to control this machine via the PLC-
the data memory address used by this machine to
Link (PLC terminal).
The number-specified commands can be used for notify of the completion of command execution.
controlling the system. For more information on number- Check the written results when the command complete
specified commands, see "Detailed Explanation of address (bit) changes to 1.
Communication Control Commands".
8 In the [Command Address], specify the starting
Reference address of the data memory in which instruction
When this machine is changed to Run mode, the warning message
(command) codes and parameters for this machine
"Failed to establish a link with the PLC." may be repeatedly
displayed. In this case, the PLC-Link settings or connection of an are stored.
active PLC may be incorrect. • Only a starting address can be specified. Multiple
addresses cannot be specified at a time.
• Using the number-specified commands format, the
command No. is stored in the starting address in 16bit-
[PLC-Link] in Setup mode. binary and the command parameters are stored
The [PLC-Link] screen appears. successively from the starting address +2 in 32bit-binary
for 1 data item.
9 In the [Command Result Address], specify the
starting address of the data memory which stores
the data string returned to the PLC as a result of
the command execution.
relevant setting items for the selected PLC type are
displayed. • Only a starting address can be specified. Multiple
For more details on the [PLC Type] to be selected for the addresses cannot be specified at a time.
Link Connections" (page 9-30). command response is stored in the starting address in
16bit-binary and the command data is stored
4 Change the settings as required. successively from the starting address +2 in 32bit-binary
for 1 data item.
Baud rate

or from 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, 230400 (bps).
11Restart this machine.
Stop Bit
Parity Bit
Select [Even] (initial value), [Odd], or [None] for the parity
bit.

Point].
(32 bits).
9-42 LJ-X UM_GB

6 Select [PLC Terminal] in [Command Execute

Using the PLC-Link via Ethernet
Event].
(PLC Terminal)
7 In the [Command Complete Address (bit)], specify
Link (PLC terminal).
The number-specified commands can be used for notify of the completion of command execution.
controlling the system. For more information on number- Check the written results when the command complete
specified commands, see "Detailed Explanation of address (bit) changes to 1.
8 In the [Command Address], specify the starting
Reference address of the data memory in which instruction
(command) codes and parameters for this machine
displayed. In this case, the PLC-Link settings or connection of an are stored.
active PLC may be incorrect. • Only a starting address can be specified. Multiple
command No is stored in the starting address in 16bit-
[PLC-Link] in Setup mode. binary and the command parameters are stored
The [PLC-Link] screen appears. successively from the starting address +2 in 32bit-binary
for 1 data item.
2 Select [PLC-Link (Ethernet)] in [Mode].
9 In the [Command Result Address], specify the
starting address of the data memory which stores
the data string returned to the PLC as a result of
the command execution.
displayed. • Only a starting address can be specified. Multiple
For more details on the [PLC Type] to be selected for the addresses cannot be specified at a time.
command response is stored in the starting address in
16bit-binary and the command data is stored
4 Change the settings as required. successively from the starting address +2 in 32bit-binary
for 1 data item.
IP Address
Enter the IP address for the unit that the controller is
communicating with. A confirmation message will appear if any setting is
changed.
Port
Enter the port number to be used for the PLC-Link. 11Restart this machine.
Resend time (ms)
Enter the resend time (ms) for use if a communication error
occurs.

Point].
(32 bits).
LJ-X UM_GB 9-43

Controlling this machine via PLC-Link (Polling)
Controlling this machine via PLC-Link (Polling)
Set this machine to perform constant monitoring (polling) on the bit changes in the command execute address (bit) to read
and execute a command.
Command execution procedure via Polling (Command Processing Flow)

A command is executed between this machine and the PLC in the following manner.
(1)
Write command number and parameters to the
(2) command address
Detects that the value of the command execution

(2)
address (bit) has changed (rises) to "1", and Write "1" to the command execution address (bit)
reads the command No. and parameters from when you want to run the command
the DM of the command address
(3)
(4)
Write reply data from command result address to
successive DM after command execution is Reply data is written to the command result
completed*1 address
(5)
(5)
Check the completion of the command execution
Write the reply data of the command execution to confirm the reply data of the command result
and write "1" to the DM value of the command address by replacing the command completion
completion address (bit) address (bit) with the value "1".
(6)
(7)
Return the command execution address (bit) value to "0"
Returns the command completion address (bit)
value to "0" by detecting that the value of the (7)
command execution address (bit) is changed Confirm that the command completion address
(falling edge) to "0" (bit) has been changed (falling) to "0" and moves
to the next command action
• The returned data varies depending on the commands. For more details, see "Detailed Explanation of Communication Control
Commands" and confirm the received data of each command.
Timing Chart
Command execution address (bit) (2) (6) PLC writes.
Command completion address (bit) (7) Controller writes.
Command address PLC writes.
(3) (5)
Command result address Controller writes.
(1) (4)
9-44 LJ-X UM_GB

6 Select [Polling] in [Command Execute Event].

(Polling) 7 In the [Command Execute Address (bit)], specify
the data memory address which indicates the
command execution timing.
Link (Polling).
The number-specified commands can be used for For control via polling, reading data from this machine will
controlling the system. For more information on number- start when this bit device changes to 1.
specified commands, see "Detailed Explanation of 8 In the [Command Complete Address (bit)], specify
Reference notify of the completion of command execution.
Check the written results when the command complete
address (bit) changes to 1.
displayed. In this case, the PLC-Link settings or connection of an
active PLC may be incorrect. 9 In the [Command Address], specify the starting
address of the data memory in which instruction
1 From [Global], select [Communications & I/O] - (command) codes and parameters for this machine
[PLC-Link] in Setup mode. are stored.
The [PLC-Link] screen appears. • Only a starting address can be specified. Multiple
3 In [PLC Type], select the PLC type for the command No. is stored in the starting address in 16bit-
binary and the command parameters are stored
successively from the starting address +2 in 32bit-binary
for 1 data item.
displayed. 10In the [Command Result Address], specify the
For more details on the [PLC Type] to be selected for the starting address of the data memory which stores
connected PLC model, refer to "Types of Compatible PLC- the data string returned by this machine as a result
of the command execution.
4 Change the settings as required. • Only a starting address can be specified. Multiple
Baud rate • Using the number-specified commands format, the
Select the baud rate from 9600 (initial configuration value) command response is stored in the starting address in
or from 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, 230400 (bps). 16bit-binary and the command data is stored
Stop Bit
for 1 data item.
Parity Bit
Select [Even] (initial value), [Odd], or [None] for the parity 12Restart this machine.
bit.

Point].
(32 bits).
LJ-X UM_GB 9-45

6 Select [Polling] in [Command Execute Event].

Using PLC-Link via Ethernet
(Polling) 7 In the [Command Execute Address (bit)], specify
the data memory address which indicates the
command execution timing.
Link (Polling).
The number-specified commands can be used for For control via polling, reading data from this machine will
controlling the system. For more information on number- start when this bit device changes to 1.
specified commands, see "Detailed Explanation of 8 In the [Command Complete Address (bit)], specify
Reference notify of the completion of command execution.
Check the written results when the command complete
address (bit) changes to 1.
displayed. In this case, the PLC-Link settings or connection of an
active PLC may be incorrect. 9 In the [Command Address], specify the starting
address of the data memory in which instruction
1 From [Global], select [Communications & I/O] - (command) codes and parameters for this machine
[PLC-Link] in Setup mode. are stored.
The [PLC-Link] screen appears. • Only a starting address can be specified. Multiple
2 Select [PLC-Link (Ethernet)] in [Mode].
3 In [PLC Type], select the PLC type for the command No. is stored in the starting address in 16bit-
binary and the command parameters are stored
for 1 data item.
displayed. 10In the [Command Result Address], specify the
For more details on the [PLC Type] to be selected for the starting address of the data memory which stores
connected PLC model, refer to "Types of Compatible PLC- the data string returned by this machine as a result
of the command execution.
4 Change the settings as required. • Only a starting address can be specified. Multiple
IP Address • Using the number-specified commands format, the
Enter the IP address for the unit that the controller is command response is stored in the starting address in
communicating with. 16bit-binary and the command data is stored
Port
for 1 data item.
Enter the port number to be used for the PLC-Link.
Resend time (ms)
Enter the resend time (ms) for use if a communication error 12Restart this machine.
occurs.

Point].
(32 bits).
9-46 LJ-X UM_GB

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
When correct operation does not occur
The message "Initializing PLC-Link Try No. *" PLC-Link is established, however, data
appears repeatedly at the bottom right of the cannot be written to the connected PLC.
screen. There is a limit to the range of data memory that can be
The system failed to establish PLC-Link communication written. Check the range that can be written to at the
with the PLC, and the initialization process is occurring in connected PLC.
order to reconnect.
• When connected by RS-232C: Check the PLC-Link
Monitoring of the communications status is
communication settings, connection cable, and status at the
being performed with the RS-232C or
device the cable is connected to.
• When connected by Ethernet: Check the PLC-Link Ethernet monitor, however, the text is
communication settings, IP address, connection cable garbled.
(cross cable if connected directly), and status at the device The RS-232C or Ethernet monitor does not support
the cable is connected to. monitoring of the communications used in PLC-Link
communications.
When a trigger command is issued by PLC-
Link, the capture timing is later compared
with trigger signal input from the terminal
block.
When a command is executed from PLC-Link, more time is
required before execution starts and variation is larger
compared with when the terminal block is used (in
particular with polling control).
If the timing variation is a problem when capturing an object
moving at a high speed, input the trigger from the terminal
block.
Data cannot be acquired correctly when

reading data based on the change in the rise of
STO output from an external terminal.
STO is the data strobe signal for the terminal output.
Therefore, it cannot be used as the strobe signal for any
other data output.
Refer to the result ready address for the timing as to when
to read data by PLC-Link.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-47

Troubleshooting
Error Messages
Error
Message Cause Corrective Action Cause
No.
Failed to establish a link with An error occurred in the connection with • Check the connection with the PLC and the
the PLC. the PLC when the [PLC-Link (RS-232C)] settings of the PLC.
or [PLC-Link (Ethernet)] • If PLC-Link is not used, change communication
function was enabled.
mode to [Disable PLC-Link].
13301
• If an error message is displayed after trigger
input, check that the data memory destination
specified is within the range that matches the
PLC format.
Unable to output to the PLC- The controller output buffer for outputting Reduce the amount of data to be output so the data
Link due to a full output buffer. via PLC-Link is full. (handshake OFF) is output via PLC-Link at a faster rate than it builds
up. Or, extend the time between triggers/processing 13302
to allow for data to be output. Note: Results data are
not written when the buffer is full.
The delay of the handshake The controller output buffer for outputting Reduce the amount of data to be output so the data
control causes skipping of the via PLC-Link is full. (handshake ON) is output via PLC-Link at a faster rate than it builds
PLC communication result up. Or, extend the time between triggers/processing
13303
output. to allow for data to be output. Note: When the output
buffer is full, measurement waits until the buffer is
emptied.
9-48 LJ-X UM_GB

Control/Data Output via I/O Terminals
Control/Data Output via I/O Terminals
This machine has the following I/O terminals: Control

• Parallel I/O interface: Uses a specialized parallel connection • Command input: Instructs change of a program or execute
cable (3 m) OP-51657 (optional) conditions, etc.
• Terminal Block Interface: The standard installed on this • Control input: Interrupts data output or image capture.
machine is a detachable type terminal block (OUT, IN,
ENCODER, and I/O Connector).
Output
Main functions available with I/O
Data output
terminals
• Judgment output: Outputs upper/lower limit measurement
results on the processed images.
Input
Control
Capture • Control output: Outputs signals for system errors or
• Trigger input: Allows a camera to capture the profile of the synchronization with external devices.
head at a specified timing.
• Encoder input: Accepts the encoder signal as a trigger.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-49

Terminal Block Interface
Standard specifications
Terminal block specifications for this machine are as follows.
NOTICE Tightening above the specified torque may cause damage to the terminal block.
OUTPUT connector INPUT connector
(1)
(1)
(9)
(6)
Suitable wiring
Suitable wiring
AWG16 to 28
AWG16 to 28
Terminal block screw torque
Terminal block screw torque
Below 0.25 Nm
Below 0.25 Nm
Terminal Layout
OUTPUT connector
No. Terminal name Signal Terminal block Signal Description*2 Circuit diagram
display
at time of
shipment
1 OUT22 STO STO Strobe signal output for data output C
2 OUT23 OR OR Total status output C
3 F_OUT2 ERROR*1 F_OUT2 Error output *1 C
4 F_OUT3 RUN*1 F_OUT3 Run mode output*1 C
5 COMOUT1 - COMOUT Common for terminal block outputs -
6 F_OUT0 READY*1 RDY Trigger input permission output*1 C
7 F_OUT1 - F_OUT1 C
8 N.C. - - - -
9 COMOUT_F - COMF Common terminal for F_OUT -
*1It is the default assigned value on the terminal where the signal assignment can be changed. These assignments may vary if the Global
settings have been changed.
*2 For details about the signal description, refer to "Main functions of the input/output terminal block" (page 9-52).
• Power source 0V and COMOUT1 and COMOUT_F are all isolated.
Reference
• COMOUT1 is a common terminal exclusively used for terminal outputs 1 and 2.
• COMOUT_F is a common terminal exclusively used for terminal outputs 3 to 4 and 6 to 7.
9-50 LJ-X UM_GB

INPUT connector
No. Terminal name Signal Terminal block Signal Description*2 Circuit diagram
display
at time of
shipment
1 COMIN1 - COMIN1 Common for terminal block inputs -
2 IN15 PLC*1 IN15 PLC command B
readout request*1
3 F_IN0 TRG TRG Trigger input A
4 F_IN1 - F_IN1 A
5 F_IN2 TEST*1 F_IN2 Trial run input*1 A
6 F_IN3 EXT*1 F_IN3 Disable trigger input*1 A
*1It is the default assigned value on the terminal where the signal assignment can be changed. These assignments may vary if the Global
• Power source 0V and COMIN1 are both isolated.
Reference
• COMIN1 is the common terminal for inputs IN1 2 to 6.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-51

Main functions of the input/output terminal block

The I/O terminals on this machine have the following functions.
Reference
The output signals STO, OR, and OUT_DATA0 to 15 are output only in Run mode.
Terminal Block Interface (OUT)
Signal Signal Description Function

STO Strobe signal output for Used to read the data of the total status output (OR) and OUT_DATA0 to OUT_DATA15,
data output based on leading edge synchronization.
OR Total status output Used to output the OR result for the judgment value of tool specified in the output settings.
ERROR Error output This signal is output while any of system errors occur with the dialog displayed on the
screen. For details on typical system errors, see "error messages" (page 9-48).
In the "ERROR output settings" (page 8-17) of the global settings, enabling or disabling the
error output for the SD card-related errors only can be specified.
RUN Run mode output This signal is output while this machine operates in Run mode.
COMOUT1 Common for terminal block Output common terminal for terminal block interface (OUT) 1 to 2.
outputs
READY Trigger input permission Turns on when trigger input is acceptable.
output
COMOUT_F High-speed general- Output common terminal for the terminal block interface (OUT) 3, 4, 6, 7.
purpose output common
terminal
Terminal Block Interface (IN)

COMIN1 Common for terminal block Input common terminal for terminal block interface (IN) 2 to 6.
inputs
PLC PLC command readout Used to execute command control via the PLC terminal using the PLC-Link (leading edge
request synchronization). As the request acceptance may be delayed depending on other process
conditions, hold the ON state for input until the command complete address (bit) on the PLC
unit changes to 1 (the command execution is confirmed).
TRG Trigger input Starts head image (leading edge synchronization).

The input is accepted when the trigger mode shows that READY is ON for the external
trigger.
TEST Trial run input Used to suspend the status output for trial run or any other reasons. When this signal is
input, the result data that have not been output will be deleted.
While this signal is on, OR output, STO output, and data output of OUT_DATA0 to 15 is
forcibly set to normal state (level synchronization).
The data output from the communication port is also canceled and stopped during the input.
As soon as the input turns off, the measurement result obtained immediately after that will
start being output again.
EXT Disable trigger input Used to suspend the occurrence of internal triggers and the acceptance of external triggers.
When the input turns on, READY terminal is forced to be off to stop the acceptance of all
triggers (level synchronization).
9-52 LJ-X UM_GB

Parallel I/O Interface
(1) (21)
(20) (40)
Reference For wiring the connector, use the specialized parallel connection cable (3 m) OP-51657 (optional).
Pin Layout: Cable colors when optional OP-51657 is used
No. Terminal name Signal Signal Description*2 Circuit diagram Cable color
1 COMIN2 - Connector input common terminal - Brown
2 IN0 CMD_PARAM0 Command parameter bit 0 B Red
3 IN1 CMD_PARAM1 Command parameter bit 1 B Orange
4 IN2 CMD_PARAM2 Command parameter bit 2 B Yellow
5 IN3 CMD_PARAM3 Command parameter bit 3 B Green
6 IN4 CMD_PARAM4 Command parameter bit 4 B Blue
7 IN5 CMD_PARAM5 Command parameter bit 5 B Purple
8 IN6 CMD_PARAM6*1 Command parameter bit 6*1 B Gray
*1 7*1
9 IN7 CMD_PARAM7 Command parameter bit B White
10 IN8 CMD_CODE0 Command input bit 0 B Black
11 IN9 CMD_CODE1 Command input bit 1 B Brown
12 IN10 CMD_CODE2 Command input bit 2 B Red
13 IN11 CMD_CODE3 Command input bit 3 B Orange
14 IN12 CST Command confirmation input B Yellow
15 IN13 RESET Reset B Green
16 IN14 PST*1 Output data switch input*1 B Blue
17 COMOUT2 - Connector output common terminal - Purple
18 OUT0 ACK*1 Verification of successfully executed C Gray
command input*1
19 OUT1 NACK*1 Verification of unsuccessfully executed C White
command input*1
20 OUT2 BUSY BUSY Signal C Black
21 OUT3 CMD_READY Command input permission C Brown
22 OUT4 -*1 -*1 C Red
*1 -*1
23 OUT5 - C Orange
24 OUT6 OUT_DATA0 Data output bit 0 C Yellow
25 OUT7 OUT_DATA1 Data output bit 1 C Green
26 OUT8 OUT_DATA2 Data output bit 2 C Blue
27 OUT9 OUT_DATA3 Data output bit 3 C Purple
28 OUT10 OUT_DATA4 Data output bit 4 C Gray
29 OUT11 OUT_DATA5 Data output bit 5 C White
30 OUT12 OUT_DATA6 Data output bit 6 C Black
31 OUT13 OUT_DATA7 Data output bit 7 C Brown
32 OUT14 OUT_DATA8 Data output bit 8 C Red
LJ-X UM_GB 9-53

No. Terminal name Signal Signal Description*2 Circuit diagram Cable color
33 OUT15 OUT_DATA9 Data output bit 9 C Orange
34 OUT16 OUT_DATA10 Data output bit 10 C Yellow
35 OUT17 OUT_DATA11 Data output bit 11 C Green
36 OUT18 OUT_DATA12*1 Data output bit 12*1 C Blue
*1 13*1
37 OUT19 OUT_DATA13 Data output bit C Purple
38 OUT20 OUT_DATA14*1 Data output bit 14*1 C Gray
*1 *1
39 OUT21 OUT_DATA15 Data output bit 15 C White
40 COMOUT2 - Connector output common terminal - Black
*1 It is the default assigned value on the terminal where the signal assignment can be changed. These assignments may vary if the Global
• COMOUT2 for Pin 17 and Pin 40 are common.

Reference
• COMIN2 is a common terminal for input for the parallel I/O connector.
• COMOUT2 is a common terminal for output for the parallel I/O connector.
• Power source 0V and COMIN1, COMIN2, COMOUT1, COMOUT2, and COMOUT_F are all isolated.
9-54 LJ-X UM_GB

Main Parallel Interface Action
Parallel I/O Interface

COMIN2 Connector input common Common input terminal for the parallel I/O interface.
terminal
CMD_PARAM0 Command parameter input bit 0 Used to input parameters necessary for commands from the parallel I/O
(LSB) interface in binary.
CMD_PARAM1 Command parameter input bit 1
(MSB)
CMD_CODE0 Command input bit 0 (LSB) Used to input command codes from the parallel I/O interface in binary.
CMD_CODE1 Command input bit 1
CMD_CODE2 Command input bit 2
CMD_CODE3 Command input bit 3 (MSB)
CST Command confirmation input Execute commands and parameters from the parallel I/O interface (rising
synchronization).
• When confirming the CST acceptance, confirm the falling of
CMD_READY after CST input.
• When confirming the completion of command execution, confirm the
rise of ACK (success) or NACK (failure) after CST input.
RESET Reset Used to reset operation.
• The OR output, OUT_DATA 0 to 15 becomes normal.
• The number of measurements returns to 0.
• All tools undergo a measurement reset.
• All of archived image data are deleted.
• All of the data in the output buffer are reset.
• The name of a new output file for the measurement result is created in
SD card 2. A new name for the image output folder is created in the SD
card and the FTP.
PST Output data switch input Used to give an order to change data when handshake output is used.
After the first STO output, if there is no PST input even if the set output
period time has elapsed, data switching will be performed automatically
as a timeout (except when set to perform handshake).
"With handshake"
COMOUT2 Connector output common Common output terminal for the parallel I/O interface. This will be
terminal internally common with No. 40 COMOUT2.
ACK Execution success confirmation Output when the command from parallel I/O interface is completed
output for command inputs normally.
NACK Execution failure confirmation Output when the command from the parallel I/O interface ends
output for command inputs abnormally.
BUSY BUSY Signal Output This signal is outputted during measurement processing or command
processing.
The next measurement processing or command processing accepted
during BUSY may delay the start of execution.
CMD_READY Permission output for command Output when it is possible to accept command execution from the parallel
input I/O interface.
If input when CMD_READY is OFF, CST is ignored.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-55


OUT_DATA0 Data output bit 0 (LSB) Either tool judgment, partial judgment, or total status for measurement
OUT_DATA1 Data output bit 1 results is outputted according to the output settings.
OUT_DATA2 Data output bit 2

OUT_DATA15 Data output bit 15 (MSB)
OUTPUT_IMG_BUSY This signal is output while Output while images are being output.
images are being output.
OUTPUT_IMG_STATUS This signal is output when there Output when there are remaining images that need to be output in an
is image output data. image output buffer.
COMOUT2 Connector output common Common output terminal for the parallel I/O interface.
terminal This is internally common with No. 17 COMOUT2 and No. 40 COMOUT2.
9-56 LJ-X UM_GB

Encoder terminal block interface
The specifications of the parallel I/O connector are as follows.
Point • Tightening above the established torque may cause damage to the terminal block.
Encoder connector I/O connector
24V (1)
12V
5V
(+)
COM
(-)
24V
12V
5V
(+)
COM
(-)
24V
12V
(1)
5V
(+)
COM
(-) (15)
(5)
• Suitable wiring: AWG 16 to 28 • Suitable wiring: AWG 16 to 28

• Terminal block screw torque: Less than 0.25 Nm • Terminal block screw torque: Less than 0.25 Nm
Terminal Layout
Encoder connector
Terminal block
display Toward the Circuit
No. Terminal name Terminal statement
at time of signal diagram
shipment
1 OC A 24 24V Open collector encoder input A (24V) Input D
4 422 A+ + RS-422 encoder input A+ Input D
5 ENC A COM COM(-) Encoder A input common (-) - -
6 OC B 24 24V Open collector encoder input B (24V) Input D
9 422 B+ + RS-422 encoder input B+ Input D
10 ENC B COM COM(-) Encoder B input common (-) - -
11 OC Z 24 24V Open collector encoder input Z (24V) Input D
14 422 Z+ + RS-422 encoder input Z+ Input D
15 ENC Z COM COM(-) Encoder Z input common (-) - -
Point • To connect to the encoder, use a shielded cable that matches the RS-422 signal and ensure that the cable shielded is
connected to the FG.
• Conduction occurs between each input circuit. Take care not to generate a potential difference between the signals.
• ENC A COM, ENC B COM, ENC Z COM, 0V OUT, and LD COM are isolated from the controller common respectively.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-57

I/O connector
Terminal block
display Toward the Circuit
No. Terminal name Terminal statement
at time of signal diagram
shipment
1 5V OUT 5V OUT Service power supply for the encoder - -
(150 mA MAX)
2 0V OUT 0V OUT - -
3 N.C - - - -
4 LD COM COM Laser ON input common - -
5 LD ON LD ON Laser ON input Input E
Point • The rated output of 5V OUT is 150 mA. If using an encoder that exceeds this value, prepare an external 5 V supply.
• The Laser ON input is a non-voltage input. The head emits a laser beam in a short circuit with the input common, and
stops the radiation of all the heads in the open state and stops accepting the trigger (the short pin at the time of
shipment from the factory).
• ENC A COM, ENC B COM, ENC Z COM, 0V OUT, and LD COM are isolated from the controller common respectively.
9-58 LJ-X UM_GB

Input/Output Circuit Input Connections
Input circuit diagram Example of connections

Circuit A (For F_IN0 to 3 only, EV compatible) When connecting an NPN PLC output to the system
input
7.5kΩ
IN
OUT IN
910Ω
COMIN※
COM(−) COMIN※
• Max. applied voltage: 26.4 V

PLC (NPN output) Input circuit of main unit
• ON voltage: 19 V or greater
• ON current: 2.2 mA or greater When connecting a PNP output to the controller
• OFF voltage: 5 V or less input
• OFF current: 1 mA or less
Circuit B (other inputs) IN
15kΩ
IN COM(+)
COMIN※
2.7kΩ
Input circuit of main unit

COMIN※
OUT
PLC (PNP output)

• Max. applied voltage: 26.4 V
• ON voltage: 19 V or greater
• ON current: 1.2mA or greater
• OFF voltage: 3V or less
• OFF current: 0.3mA or less
* The commons which are connected differ

according to the IN terminals.
The common terminal for IN connectors 2 - 6
Important
Point is COMIN1, and the common terminal for
parallel Point I/O connectors 2 - 16 is
COMIN2.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-59

Input/Output Circuit Output Connections
Output circuit diagram

Circuit C (common for all output terminals)
• Max. applied voltage: 30V Poly Switch
• Max. sink current: 50 mA OUT
• Leakage current: 0.1 mA or less

• Residual voltage:
Below 1.4 V (50 mA) COMOUT*
Below 1.0 V (20 mA)
Since this unit utilizes a photo MOSFET in the output elements, any one of the NPN inputs, or PNP inputs is Point
Point connectable.
Connection example (when connecting the controller's output with a positive common)
Point If the input instrument is compatible with the NPN open collector outputs, then refer to this connection example.
When connecting an output from the controller to a PLC with a positive common
IN
Poly Switch
OUT
COMOUT*
COM(+)
PLC input circuit positive common Output circuit of main unit
When connecting an output from the controller to a relay

Poly Switch
Load
OUT
COMOUT*
Relay Output circuit of main unit
* The commons which are connected differ according to the OUT terminals. The common terminal for OUT connectors
Point 1 - 2 is COMOUT1, and the common terminal for OUT connectors 3 - 4/6 - 7 is COMOUT_F, and the common terminal
for parallel I/O connectors 18 - 39 is COMOUT2.
9-60 LJ-X UM_GB

Connection example (when connecting the controller's output with a negative common)
Point If the input instrument is compatible with the PNP open collector outputs, then refer to this connection example.
When connecting an output from the controller to a PLC with a negative common
IN
Poly Switch
OUT
COMOUT*
COM(-)
PLC input circuit negative common Output circuit of main unit
When connecting an output from the controller to a

relay
Poly Switch
Load
OUT
COMOUT*
Relay Output circuit of main unit
* The commons which are connected differ according to the OUT terminals. The common terminal for OUT connectors
Point 1 - 2 is COMOUT1, and the common terminal for OUT connectors 3 - 4/6 - 7 is COMOUT_F, and the common terminal
for parallel I/O connectors 18 - 39 is COMOUT2.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-61

Encoder Input Connections
Input circuit diagram

Circuit D (Encoder input) Circuit E (Laser ON input)
+5V +5V
3kΩ
OC 24
1.6kΩ 2.2kΩ
OC 12 1kΩ
220Ω
OC 5
120Ω
Internal circuit
422 + REMOTE
1kΩ
Poly Switch Internal
circuit
150Ω
ENC COM
Poly Switch RMT COM
Poly Switch
• Max. applied voltage: 26.4/13.2/5.5 V • Non-voltage Input

• ON voltage: 21.6/10.8/3.5 V or greater • ON voltage: 1 V or less
• ON current: 2 mA or greater • OFF current: 0.6mA or less
• OFF voltage: 3.6/2.4/1.0 V or less • Short circuit current (Typ.): 2 mA
RS-422 encoder input (when using a line driver)
• Corresponding to AM26LS31
Connection example (circuit D)

When connecting the encoder for the NPN open collector output
Twisted pair wire
with shield OC 24
NPN of encoder 12V *
Open collector output
OC 12
OC 5
422 +
OUT circuit
A PHASE / ENC COM
B PHASE / Poly Switch
Z PHASE+ Input circuit of Main unit
COM(-)
* This is an example using 12V. Adjust at 5V/12V/24V depending on the power supply.
Point Use a shielded cable to connect.
When connecting the encoder for the PNP open collector output
A PHASE / Twisted pair wire

B PHASE / with shield OC 24
PNP of encoder
Open collector output Z PHASE+
OC 12
OC 5
422 +
COM(+) 12V * circuit
ENC COM
Poly Switch
Input circuit of Main unit
OUT
* This is an example using 12V. Adjust at 5V/12V/24V depending on the power supply.
Point Use a shielded cable to connect.
9-62 LJ-X UM_GB

When connecting the encoder for the RS-422 output
OC 24
RS422 output of encoder
A PHASE / Twisted pair wire
with shield OC 12
B PHASE /
Z PHASE+ OC 5
422 +
Poly Switch
Internal
circuit
A PHASE / ENC COM

Poly Switch
B PHASE /
Z PHASE- Input circuit of Main unit
Point Use a shielded cable conforming to RS-422 signal to connect.
Wiring example with a KEYENCE encoder relay unit (CA-EN100U)
CA-EN100U The controller
(1)
...
(15)
(1)
...
(5)
(1) ... (10)
ENCODER connector
CA-EN100U terminal block
No. Terminal name*
No. Terminal name Terminal statement 1 24V
1 24V DC+ Power supply (24 VDC) input 24 VDC power supply 2 12V
2 24V DC- Power supply (0 VDC) input (sold separately)
3 5V
3 NC Unused 4 (+)
4 422A+ RS-422 Encoder output A+ Black 5 COM(-)
5 422A- RS-422 Encoder output ARS- Black/White 6 24V
6 422B+ RS-422 Encoder output B+ Red 7 12V
7 422B- RS-422 Encoder output BRS- Red/White 8 5V
8 422Z+ RS-422 Encoder output Z+ Green 9 (+)
9 422Z- RS-422 Encoder output Z- Green/White 10 COM(-)
10 SG Signal GND Transparency 11 24V
12 12V
13 5V
14 (+)
15 COM(-)
I/O connector
No. Terminal name*
1 5V OUT
RS-422 Cable 2 0V OUT

(2.5 m: Encoder relay unit accessory) 3 N.C.
4 COM
5 RMT
LJ-X UM_GB 9-63

Example of connections (circuit E)
When connecting the PLC for the NPN open When connecting the PLC for the PNP open
collector output collector output
+5V +5V +5V +5V
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
OUT REM
LD ON
OTE CO M (+) REM OTE
CO M (-) RM COM
LD T CO M OUT RM T CO M
Poly Switch Poly Switch
PLC Input circuit of main unit PLC Input circuit of main unit
(NPN output) (PNP outputs)
9-64 LJ-X UM_GB

Using Command Inputs via I/O Terminals
Using Command Inputs via I/O Terminals
Command input timing

Reference
Except for image capture and clear error, commands can be input only when the controller is operating in Run mode.
Basic flow (an example of real-time command execution)
CMD_CODE (3-0) Command

command type
CMD_PARAM (7-0) Parameter

command parameter
(1)
CST D A
C (2)
BUSY C
(3)
ACK (Execution successful) B
(3)
NACK (Execution failed) B (4)
(5)
CMD_READY
C C
(6)(Always ON)
READY
More than A: 1 msec Within C: 1 msec

B: STO output time and common More than D: 500 μsec
(1) A command input is confirmed at the leading edge of CST.
(2) BUSY turns on to indicate that measurement processing or a command from the terminal block is being executed.
(3) The result of the command execution (success or failure) can be checked by either ACK or NACK being turned on for STO
output ON time.
(4) CMD_READY turns ON when ACK or NACK turns off.
(5) When CST is input with CMD_READY turned off, CST is ignored. In this case, neither an ACK nor NACK response is given for
CST.
(6) If a command is not based on real-time execution, READY turns off during execution of the command.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-65

Timing of commands which are not based on real-time execution
When no command request is received
TRG
READY
When a command request is received
TRG1
READY1 More than 1μsec
CST
Acquisition Measurement Command

ACK Time process execution
time time
Command execution
waiting time
• When a command request is received during processing, the command is executed as soon as image processing is completed.
• READY signal does not turn ON until the command execution is completed. Therefore, a next trigger input is not accepted until
READY signal turns ON.
When there is no image capture
READY1 Within 500 μsec More than 1 μsec
CST
Command
execution
ACK time
The command is executed immediately and READY signal turns off during the command execution.
9-66 LJ-X UM_GB

I/O command inputs available

The I/O command inputs available on this machine are shown below.
See the descriptions in the following pages for more details on each command.
Valu CMD_CODE CMD_PARAM
Command name Command detail
e 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 Save Program This is the same function as 0 0 0 0 None
the SS command.
1 Specify parameter in upper 8 0 0 0 1 0 to 255
bits
2 Change programs (SD card 1) This is the same function as 0 0 1 0 0 to 255: Inspection setting number
the PW command (SD1
fixed).
3 Change programs (SD card 2) This is the same function as 0 0 1 1 0 to 255: Inspection setting number
the PW command (SD2
fixed).
4 Standard image registration The same function as BS 0 1 0 0 IN7 to IN6 "0" fixed
(with parameters) command IN5 to IN0: Destination number
5 Update Reference Value The same function as BS 0 1 0 1 None
(without parameters)
command
6 Image Capture This is the same function as 0 1 1 0 IN0: Data output (0: SD2, 1: FTP)
the BC command.
7 Write execute condition This is the same function as 0 1 1 1 0 to 99: Execute number
the EXW command.
8 Clear error This is the same function as 1 0 0 0 None
the CE command.
9 Change Output File/Folder This is the same function as 1 0 0 1 IN0: Changes data output files when set to 1
the OW command. IN1: Changes image output folders when set
to 1
10 Change Operation Screen This is the same function as 1 0 1 0 IN7 to IN6: Specified screen type (specified
the VW command. by 0, 1)
IN3 to IN0: Screen number (specified by 0 to
9)
11 Save Statistical Data This is the same function as 1 0 1 1 IN0: Type of file for writing data
the TS command. - 0: Measured value
- 1: Statistical data
1: ON (short), 0: OFF (open)
Reference
• Except for image capture and clear error, I/O commands can be input only when the controller is operating in Run mode.
• To confirm a command, input the command to CMD_PARAM0 to 7, CMD_CODE0 to 3 and then turn the CST input on (recognition of the
leading edge).
• ACK output and NACK output ON time is of the same duration as STO output time.
• As the commands based on real-time execution are executed along with the measurement process, execution of that kind of command
does not affect the image processing. However, command execution time for this case will take longer than when the command alone is
solely executed.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-67

0. Save programs 3. Change programs (SD card 2)

Saves the setting. Changes the current program to the target program,
specified in 16 bits, on the SD card 2.
Parameter
None Parameter
Program No. 0 to 255 (To select 256 to 999, specify the
upper bits 15 to 8 in the parameter of "1. Specify parameter
1. Specify parameter in upper 8 bits
in upper 8 bits", and the lower bits 7 to 0 in this parameter.)
Specifies the upper bits of a parameter used with a different
command.
4. Standard image registration
Reference
The specified parameter is held until the next command execution Regarding the head specified by the head number, it
or shut down of the controller. registers the latest input image as standard.
Parameter Parameter
• When referencing with [Change Programs]: Specifies the • CMD_PARAM 5 to 0: Destination No. 0 to 63 (When
upper 8 bits of the parameter. specifying destination No. 64 to 899, select [1. Specify
• When referencing with [Standard image registration]: parameter in upper 8 bits] for the upper bits, and specify 5 to
CMD_PARAM7 to 4: Not used 0 in this parameter.)
CMD_PARAM3 to 0: Upper 4 bits of destination number • CMD_PARAM7 to 6: 0 is fixed.
2. Change programs (SD card 1) 5. Update Reference Measurement Value

Changes the current program to the target program, The command recalculates a reference measured value
specified in 16 bits, on the SD card 1. using the latest standard image.
Parameter Parameter
Program No. 0 to 255 (To select 256 to 999, specify the None
upper bits 15 to 8 in the parameter of "1. Specify parameter
in upper 8 bits", and the lower bits 7 to 0 in this parameter.)
6. Image capture
This command captures an image on the screen.
Parameter
CMD_PARAM0: Output location of the captured image

(0: SD2, 1: FTP)
7. Write execute condition

This command changes the number of the execution
condition currently enabled to the specified number.
Parameter
CMD_PARAM6 to 0: Value of execute number (0 to 99)
8. Clear error
This command clears the error status.
Parameter
None
9-68 LJ-X UM_GB

9. Change output file/folder

• When changing a data output file, a new result file is created
using the latest date and time.
• When changing an image output folder, a new image output
folder is created using the latest date and time.
Parameter
CMD_PARAM1 to 0: Select target. (1: data output file, 2:
image output folder, 3: both)
10. Change operation screen

Changes the display to the specified operation screen.
Parameter
• CMD_PARAM6: Specified screen type
(0: Tool list 1: Customized operation screen)
• CMD_PARAM 3 to 0: Screen number (0 to 9: Customized
screen No.)
11. Save statistical data

Output the accumulated statistical data to the SD card 2.
For details about the content of the file to be written, refer to
"Save the recorded measurement results on the SD card 2
(Export)" (page 7-34).
Parameter
CMD_PARAM0: Type of file for writing data (0: Measured
value 1: Statistical data)
LJ-X UM_GB 9-69

I/O command control procedures

Use the following procedures to operate this machine via the I/O commands.
Example of changing to the program 15 on the SD card 1 using the I/O commands.
CMD_CODE (3-0) (1)

command type
CMD_PARAM (7-0) (2)

command parameter
(3)
CST
(4) (5)
CMD_READY
Seting No.
(6)
ACK(NACK)
a Enter the command codes of the change program (SD card 1) command in CMD_CODE0 to 3.
CMD_CODE3:0(OFF)
CMD_CODE2:0(OFF)
CMD_CODE1:1(ON)
CMD_CODE0:0(OFF)
Enter the codes of program 15 to which the setting is changed in CMD_PARAM 7 to 0.
CMD_PARAM7:0(OFF)
CMD_PARAM3:1(ON)
CMD_PARAM2:1(ON)
CMD_PARAM1:1(ON)
CMD_PARAM0:1(ON)
Turn the input of CST on.
CMD_READY turns off and program change starts.
When the setting is changed to program 15, ACK turns ON for a certain time, and then CMD_READY turns on after ACK falls.
Reference
ACK output and NACK output duration time is the same as the time set with STO (initial value: 10 ms).
9-70 LJ-X UM_GB

Outputting Data Values via I/O Terminals
Outputting Data Values via I/O Terminals
Output order
TRG
According to the output order, the data specified in the

output settings is output from OUT_DATA0 to
OUT DATA
15sequentially. 0 - 15
(1)
The items and order for output can be specified in [OUT

terminal] of [Output Settings] (page 6-6) as required.
Examples of output details and timing are shown in the STO
following pages.
A: Output rise time
B: Output time
Reference
C: Output switching time
STO output is generated one time even when none of the output
settings is specified.
When this machine is operating in Setup mode or TEST terminal is (1)
ON, the data is not output.
OUT6 T100 Judgment
value
Example of output OUT7 T101 Judgment

value
If measurement is performed using the settings below, the OUT8 T102 Judgment
value
timing chart is as in the following figure.
OUT9 0
• Measurement requirements
OUT10 0
- T100: Height measurement
- T101: Profile Measurement OUT11 0
- T102: Inspection for defects/stains. OUT12 0

• Output Settings OUT13 0
- 3 tool judgments in total: T100 to T102 measurement OUT14 0
conditions OUT15 0
On the output device, OUT16 0
read OUT_DATA0 to 15 in synchronization with the leading
OUT17 0
edge of STO. OUT18 0
OUT19 0
OUT20 0
OUT21 0
For details on how to set A to C in the diagram above, refer

to "External Terminal"(page 8-2).
If the duration of output cycle via the I/O is longer than the
trigger input cycle, priority is given to measurement
processing. Therefore, output delay may be caused, which
will lead to the data being omitted. To avoid this, set the
output cycle time shorter than the trigger input cycle time.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-71

Timing Chart
Timing Chart
Operations at startup
(1) Operations at startup
Point • To input a trigger after startup, check that the READY is ON.
• To execute a command after startup, check that the CMD_READY is ON.
ON Power supply input
Power supply
A B
OFF
BUSY
(1)
RUN
E C
CMD_READY D F
(2)
(3)
READY
ACK
NACK
OUT_DATA
ERROR
STO
OR
More than A: 20 seconds More than B: 1 second More than C: 5 ms More than D: 50 ms
More than E: 50 seconds More than F: 0.5 ms
(1) When the system enters Run mode, the RUN terminal turns on (When the startup mode is [Run mode]).
(2) After startup, turn CMD_READY ON and then OFF one time. After that when it turns ON, command inputs
will be accepted.
(3) In the external trigger mode, the READY signal turns ON when capturing becomes available.
9-72 LJ-X UM_GB

Timing Chart
Normally open (N.O.)/normally closed (N.C.) reflection timing
ON Power supply input
Power supply
OFF
(1) A (2)
Open
N.O
All Output terminal
(Other than F_OUT terminal)
N.C
Close
(1) B (2)
Open
N.O
F_OUT
N.C
Close
More than A: 6 seconds More than B: 5 seconds
(1) The state immediately after startup will be normally open (N.O.), regardless of the settings.
(2) The normally closed settings are reflected after a certain period of time.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-73

Timing Chart
Standard operation at trigger input
(1) basic capture control via TRG terminal

A
OFF
(1) (2)
READY
C
Imaging/Transfer
A: Trigger Minimum Input time More than 1ms

B: READY1 Falling Response delay Less than 1ms
(1) TRG can be entered during the period when the READY output is ON.
(2) When the trigger is input, the imaging and transfer of the profile is performed and READY is turned OFF.
(2) Basic action for multiple measurements (external trigger)
1 When the measurement process is shorter than the imaging/transfer period
Trigger mode External

Advanced image 1 times
capture count
First trigger Second trigger Third trigger
TRG1 (1)
READY1
First shooting / transfer Second shooting / transfer Third imaging / transfer
First time Image processing Image processing for second time Image processing for third time
Measurement time
2 When the measurement process is longer than the imaging/transfer period
Trigger mode External

capture count
First trigger Second trigger Third trigger 4th trigger
TRG1 (1)
READY1
3rd waiting time
※
First shooting / transfer Second shooting / transfer Third imaging / transfer Fourth shooting / transfer
First time Image processing Second Image processing (use the second imaging)
Measurement time
* Because the advanced image buffer became full at the 2nd, 3rd and 4th imaging/transfer, the 5th imaging/
transfer image overwrites the oldest image data and the 2nd imaging/transfer image is discarded and not
used in the measurement.
9-74 LJ-X UM_GB

Timing Chart
(3) Basic action for multiple measurements (internal trigger)
1 Basic Operation
Trigger mode Internal trigger

capture count
A
(1)
Internal trigger
READY1

1st Result output Second Result output
A: Internal trigger interval time (1 to 999 ms)
(1) If internal trigger is chosen, the device repeatedly makes trigger signals occur in the set trigger cycle. The
READY signal must be in an ON state for the sensor to process internal trigger cycles. Any internal trigger
signal sent when READY is OFF will be ignored, and a lag will occur.
Thus, if you want to perform processing during the shortest cycle, it is recommended that you shorten the
time lag by having a trigger cycle of 1 ms. In addition, if you want to perform imaging at a certain cycle, it is
recommended that you set the trigger cycle longer than the trigger interval time displayed (That way, an
internal trigger will not occur while the READY of the device is ON).
2 Stopping the internal trigger

The internal trigger always occurs during operation, and the occurrence of the trigger itself cannot be stopped. This is
provided that a control similar to stopping can be performed using the following method.
• Stop results output using TEST terminal input:
Use this when you want to forcibly stop just the results output, such as the status output, without stopping imaging.
Internal trigger
READY

(1) Output stop Second Result output
TEST
(1) Results output stops while the TEST terminal is on.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-75

Timing Chart
• Stop imaging using EXT terminal input:

Use this to stop the image processing itself. This is provided that the results output of the triggers received so far cannot be
stopped.
Internal trigger
(1) Stop receiving

READY
First image capture Second imaging Third imaging

First time Image processing Image processing for second time
1st Result output Second Result output
EXT
(1) READY output turns off while the EXT terminal is on. Thus, the internal trigger will not be received, and
imaging is not performed.
9-76 LJ-X UM_GB

Timing Chart
Capture action of image
(1) If sheet uptake is used
Number of lines 10 lines

Line scan interval Encoders
1 count/line
Sampling 1 time
TRG
(2)
EXT D
Encoder (A phase)
A A
(1)
READY B B C
Image capture Image 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Image 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

* Numbers indicate
encoder coordinates. Final capture line copy
A: Depends on TRG input timing and encoder input timing

B: READY Falling edge response delay 1 ms or less
C: READY Start response delay 1 ms or less
D: EXT Start response delay 1 ms or less
(1) Capture starts by trigger input to TRG, and READY always turns off during capture.
(2) Capture finishes by EXT input, and the last captured line is copied to the remaining lines.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-77

Timing Chart
(2) If consecutive capture (total number of lines off) is used

Aspect ratio None
No. of overlapping 2 lines
Total number of lines Invalid
1 count/line
Sampling 1 time
For simplicity of explanation, we have 10 lines and 2 overlapping lines. When specifying the number of overlapping lines,
the minimum number of lines that can be set is 64 overlapping lines out of 128 lines.
TRG
RESET (2)
Encoder (A phase)
A
(1)
READY B
Image capture image 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

* Numbers indicate
encoder coordinates.
Image 2 9 10 11 1213 14 15 16 17 18
Erase 17 18 19 20 21 22

(2) Consecutive capture is stopped by RESET input, and the data that has been imaged until then is eliminated
by the reset process.
Reference
• If the action during external trigger input is "counter reset + external trigger input, the encoder count and encoder coordinates are reset
during external trigger input.
• The behavior due to EXT input is the same as sheet intake (page 9-77).
9-78 LJ-X UM_GB

Timing Chart
(3) If consecutive capture (total number of lines on) is used

No. of overlapping 2 lines
Total number of lines Valid
23 lines*
1 count/line
Sampling 1 time
For simplicity of explanation, we have 10 lines, 2 overlapping lines and 23 total lines.
If specifying the number overlapping lines, the minimum number of lines that can be actually set is 128 lines, 64 overlapping
lines and 128 total lines.
TRG
Encoder (A phase)
A
(1)
READY B
Image capture Image 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
* Numbers indicate
encoder coordinates. Image 2 9 10 11 1213 14 15 16 17 18
(2)
Image 3 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Final capture line copy

Total number of lines: 23

(2) Capture finishes once the number of captured lines reach the number of total lines, and the last captured
line is copied to the remaining lines.
Reference
• If the action during external trigger input is "counter reset + external trigger input, the encoder count and encoder coordinates are reset
during external trigger input.
• The behavior due to EXT input is the same as sheet intake (page 9-77).
LJ-X UM_GB 9-79

Timing Chart
Standard operation of the data output terminals
(1) Terminal data output timing (no handshaking)
Measurement
C
process complete
(2)
OUT_DATA[15:0]
OR
B
(1) A (3)
STO
A: Output rise time (1 to 999 ms) B: Output time (1 to 999 ms) C: Output switching period (2 to 1000 ms)
However, please set it as "A + B ≦ C".
(1) To change the time of A to C, refer to "Changing the terminal output settings (external terminal)".
(2) Outputs the judgment result data to OUT_DATA [15:0].
(3) When there is no handshaking, data switching is performed automatically with a set output period. The
STO output turns ON after a (output rise time) ms elapses for each data change, and turns OFF after B
(output time) ms elapses.
To read each measurement result data, synchronize the timing with the STO rise time.
Reference
For more information about the output from the terminal, refer to "Outputting Data Values via I/O Terminals" (page 9-71).
(2) Terminal data output timing (with handshaking)
Measurement C
process complete
OUT_DATA[15:0] a
d
OR
A b c A e f
STO
c d
PST
E F
A: Output rise time (1 to 999 ms) B: Output time (1 to 999 ms) C: Output cycle (2 to 1000 ms)
D: PST OFF Response time (Less than 0.5 ms) E: PST minimum input time (Less than 1.0 ms) F: PST ON response time (Less than 0.5 ms)
However, please set it as "A + B ≦ C".
(1) Outputs the judgment result data to OUT_DATA [15:0]. The judgment result data is output by switching
OUT_DATA [15:0] sequentially.
(2) The first data is output after the measurement process is finished, and the STO output turns ON after a
(output rise time) (ms) elapses. To read each measurement result data, synchronize the timing with the
STO rise time.
(3) By checking the rise of STO and then turning the PST input ON → OFF, STO output will be OFF.
(4) Next, the data is switched by turning the PST input to OFF → ON.
(5) After the data is changed, the STO output turns ON after a (output rise time) ms elapses. By repeating 3 to
5, the output data is switched sequentially. After the judgment result data is output to the last, no further data
switching or STO ON/OFF is performed even if this operation is performed.
(6) If there is a handshake, the data can be switched at any time.
Reference
• For more information about the output from the terminal, refer to "Outputting Data Values via I/O Terminals" (page 9-71).
• Output after the first STO rise is stopped unless there is a handshake control of the PST input. For that, the output data of the terminal
output carried out during the stop is accumulated in the buffer memory, and new output data cannot be accumulated in the buffer when
the buffer memory is full. In this case, data that could not be accumulated is not output.
9-80 LJ-X UM_GB

Timing Chart
Operations of inputting using the control terminal
(1) RESET terminal operation

This terminal is used to set the output terminals to normal state and reset the trigger wait state.
When the program is changed, the RESET is performed simultaneously.
1 When there is no trigger input
RESET
C B
READY
C (1)
BUSY
A: RESET minimum input time (more than 1 ms, common as given below)
B: RESET time (Less than 1 second, common as given below )
C: RESET response delay time (Less than 1 ms, common as given below)
(1) The completion confirmation of the RESET process monitors the falling of BUSY.
2 When there is trigger input
RESET ON
OFF
TRG
(2)
READY
OUT_DATA[15:0] D
OR D
STO
Measurement
Capture process Reset processing
BUSY
(1)
D: More than 0 ms
(2) While the RESET operation is in progress, the "READY" PIN goes OFF once, and turns ON after the reset
operation is complete.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-81

Timing Chart
3 When data is output
RESET
TRG
(2)
READY
OUT_DATA[15:0] (3)
OR
STO
Image
Image capture processing Result output Reset processing
(1)
BUSY
(2) While the RESET operation is in progress, the "READY" PIN goes OFF once, and turns ON after the reset
operation is complete.
(3) When the current output for one measurement is completed, the OR and OUT_DATA return to the normal
statuses.
(2) TEST terminal operation

TEST terminal is used to cancel output operations.
The one shot input allows the result output state to be reset to normal state. It is also used to prevent upper/lower limit
judgment from being output even if the image processing during setting adjustment is operated using the level input.
(1) (3)
TEST
A
TRG
READY
B
(1)
OUT_DATA[15:0]
(1)
OR
(1)
STO
RS-232C, Ethernet, SD card 2 Result output (2) (3)
A: TEST minimum input time (More than 1 ms)

B: less than 500 μs
(1) While the TEST input is ON, terminal output (OUT_DATA[15:0], OR, STO) is forcibly set to normal state.
(The response delay is within 500 µs).
(2) For output to RS-232C and Ethernet, SD card, PLC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, EtherCAT, PC
application, even if the TEST terminal is turned on during the result output for one trigger, the result output
for one trigger is not stopped.
(3) If the TEST terminal is ON before data output for 1 trigger starts, all of output for that trigger is stopped, and
result output is not performed even when the TEST terminal is turned OFF later on.
9-82 LJ-X UM_GB

Timing Chart
(3) EXT terminal operation

The EXT terminal is used to pause an image capture. This is useful in case that external trigger inputs and continuous
trigger acceptances need to be stopped due to setting adjustments.
EXT
A
(1) (2)
READY
ＢＢ
A: EXT minimum input time (More than 1 ms) B: READY response delay (Less than 0.5 ms)
(1) When the EXT input is ON, the READY output is OFF. At this time, no trigger can be input (all of the external
terminals, PLC communication, RS-232C, Ethernet, and mouse). Even if an continuous trigger has been selected,
when the READY turns OFF, the image capturing and measurement processing are stopped. The result of the
trigger input accepted before the EXT input has turned ON continues being output regardless of the EXT status.
(2) When the EXT input turns off, the status returns to READY output corresponding to the head state at that time for
triggers to be able to be accepted.
(4) LD ON terminal operation
ON
LD ON
OFF
A B
Light can
be emitted
Laser light
Stop
emission
A: Laser-Off response time, Fastest line scan period +10 ms

B: Laser lighting response time, Fastest line scan period +10 ms
(5) Capture stop operation of the LD ON terminal
The capture operation can be paused by the LD ON terminal. This is useful in case that external trigger inputs and
continuous trigger acceptances need to be stopped due to setting adjustments.
ON
LD ON
OFF A
(1) (2)
ON
READY
OFF
ＢＢ
A: LD ON minimum input time (More than 1 ms) B: READY response delay (Less than 0.5 ms)
(1) When the LD ON input is OFF, READY output is OFF. At this time, no trigger can be input (including inputs
from all of the external terminals, PLC communication, RS-232C, Ethernet, and mouse). Even if continuous
trigger or encoder trigger is selected, capture and measurement processing will be stopped. The result
output for the trigger input received before the LD ON input is turned off continues regardless of the LD ON
status.
(2) When the LD ON input is turned ON, the READY output status returns according to the head status at that
time, and triggers are accepted.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-83

Timing Chart
(6) Using command inputs via I/O terminals

For details, see "Using Command Inputs via I/O Terminals" (page 9-65).
(7) TEST terminal operations for the total status output (OR) when the "OR terminal output mode"
is set to "Hold Status"
The status condition is normally updated for each trigger. However, if the status is NG, the condition is unchanged until input
such as TEST is executed.
TRG1
READY1
OUT_DATA[15:0]
(1)
OR
STO
TEST
(Continued)
TRG1
READY1
(2)
OUT_DATA[15:0]
(2) (3)
OR
STO
(2)
TEST
A
A: TEST minimum input time (More than 1 ms)

(1) If [Hold Status] is enabled and the last status is NG, the OR output remains NG regardless of an actual status result.
(2) When the TEST input is turned on/off, the hold status is canceled and all terminals are reset to the normal status. The
OR output condition will be updated when the result for the next OR output is output.
(3) As the TEST input is not turned on, if the last status result is NG, the OR output remains NG regardless of an actual
status result.
9-84 LJ-X UM_GB

Timing Chart
(8) Output operations of the total status output (OR) when "OR terminal output mode" is set to "One
Shot Output"
TRG1
Image processing Image processing Image processing Image processing

NG judgment NG judgment OK judgment
OR (One shot (1) (3) (5)

A A
output)
OR (Update every (2) (4)

judgment decision)
STO (5)
A: One shot time (1 to 9999 ms)
(1) If the one shot output is enabled, the OR output is in NG state when the image processing started by trigger input is
NG after the image processing finishes (not synchronized with the STO rise).
(2) When "Update Every Judge" is enabled, the OR output is in the NG state along with the STO rise.
(3) If the one shot output is enabled, the OR output holds the NG state for the specified period of time, and then resets
the NG state.
(4) When "Update Every Judge" is enabled, the OR output holds the NG state until the next result output for image
processing is started. Therefore, if output results are consecutively judged as NG, the OR output holds the NG state.
(5) If image processing is continuously performed with one shot output enabled, the previous NG state may remain at
the time of image processing results being finalized by the STO.
Reference
If a result is judged as NG while the NG state is held, the OR output holds NG state for one shot time from that timing. If signals need to rise
and fall for each NG, set the one shot time to the value smaller than output cycle.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-85

Overview of Control and Data Output by EtherNet/IP
Overview of Control and Data Output by EtherNet/IP
This system supports communication with EtherNet/IP. Message communication

EtherNet/IP is an open communications standard with
specifications that are managed by ODVA (Open This can be used for communications that do not require
DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.). Communication is punctuality as is needed with cyclic communications (Explicit
possible with all devices that support it, regardless of the message).
vendor. There is no functional difference between the controller
The following functions are possible by EtherNet/IP message communication function and cyclic communication
connection. function. As a result, it is not necessary to use it in most cases.
However, it can be used for EtherNet/IP communications with
PLC devices that do not support cyclic communication (SLC5/
Cyclic communication 05 Series, etc.).
Cyclic communication at RPI (Request Packet Interval)
communication cycle intervals allows high-speed control at
intervals of several ms to several tens of ms (implicit
communication). In addition, because it is possible to
control the controller by referencing and updating variables
and devices in the PLC without considering the
communication, it allows programs to be written easily on
the PLC side.
• Controlling the controller: Control the controller by using
cyclic communication to send the commands for execution.
• Output result data: Data can be output by cyclic communication
when the items for output from EtherNet/IP are set in the output
settings.
• Change execute number: The controller can be controlled
by specifying the execute No. by cyclic communication.
Reference
• Settings such as the cyclic communication cycle (RPI), data

size, timeout time, and sending trigger are made on the PLC
side. For cyclic communication with this machine, set an RPI of
5 ms or more (1 ms or more when using the communication
expansion unit). When COS (Change of State) is selected with a
PLC where a sending trigger can be selected (KEYENCE
KV Series, etc.), in the same way set a minimum sending
interval (Inhibit Time) of 5 ms or more (1 ms or more when using
the communication expansion unit).
• In a network where many devices are connected, including
EtherNet/IP devices, if a large load is constantly or temporarily
applied to the network, then delays and packet loss may occur.
Be sure to perform sufficient verification prior to operation.
• PLC-Link, PROFINET, and EtherCAT cannot be used in
conjunction with EtherNet/IP.
9-86 LJ-X UM_GB

Overview of Control and Data Output by EtherNet/IP
Operation flow
Checking the specifications (page 9-89)

• Check whether or not the connected PLC is a model that
supports EtherNet/IP connections.
• Check the allocation conditions of the input and output
data.

Changing the EtherNet/IP settings (page 9-94)
• Configure the LJ-X Series settings for EtherNet/IP
connection.
Main setting items: IP address, data size, data
configuration of the LJ-X Series

Establishing an EtherNet/IP link
• To check whether or not a link has been established by
cyclic communications, select [Global] - [Communications
& I/O] - [EtherNet/IP], and check with [Cyclic
Communication Status].
• If the EtherNet/IP connection is successful, the controller /
communication expansion unit Ethernet port LINK LED
(green) begins flashing.

Executing the necessary processes
Data output (page 9-96)
• The data specified in the output settings is written to the
results output area.
• The "Result ready flag" is used to check the completion of
data writing.
• The "Result ack flag" is turned ON to report that reading
was completed.
Command Control (page 9-98)
• Communication control commands can be executed.
• Enter the command code and command parameters in the
command input area and turn the "Command request flag"
ON to execute the command.
• When the "Command ready flag" is ON, the command can
be executed.
• The "Command complete flag" is used to check that
command execution was completed.
Execute No. change (page 9-100)

• Change the Exec Cond No. to change the execute No.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-87

Prepare EtherNet/IP Unit (when using CB-NEP20E)
Prepare EtherNet/IP Unit (when using CB-NEP20E)
Installing the EtherNet/IP Unit Connecting to an EtherNet/IP

Network
The optional EtherNet/IP unit CB-NEP20E is used when
communicating over EtherNet/IP. Connect the EtherNet/IP network cable to the P1 port or the
Remove the protective cover from the expansion unit P2 port of the RJ connector. If an adapter is present
connector on the right side of the controller and install the downstream of this unit, connect a network cable to the
EtherNet/IP unit as shown below. unused port.
Point The controller must be turned off before connecting
or disconnecting the CB-NEP20E.
P1 port
P2 port
Point Use a category 5e or greater STP (shielded twisted

pair) cable for the network cable. You can use either
a straight cable or a crossover cable.
Wiring example (P1 port / P2 port)
CB-NEP20E EtherNet/IP Unit

Specifications
Item
Compliant standard IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX) No Signal name Function
Communication speed 100 Mbps (100BASE-TX) 1 TX+ Transmit data (+)
Communication cycle 1 ms min. 2 TX- Transmit data (-)
Connection cable Category 5e or greater shielded twisted 3 RX+ Receive data (+)
pair (STP) cable 4 - Connect 75 Ω terminating resistance
Node interval 100 m 5 - Connect 75 Ω terminating resistance
Communication port RJ45 connector × 2 6 RX- Receive data (-)
Communication size 1436 bytes 7 - Connect 75 Ω terminating resistance
Supported functions Cyclic communication (Implicit 8 - Connect 75 Ω terminating resistance
message), Message communication
(Explicit message) UCMM/Class3-
compliant,
DLR (Device Level Ring)-compliant
Conformance test Complying with Version.CT17
version
9-88 LJ-X UM_GB

EtherNet/IP Communication Specifications
EtherNet/IP Communication Specifications
Communication expansion unit 

Ethernet port
(CB-NEP20E)
Cyclic Connection count Max. 32 1 (Exclusive Owner)
communication*1 4 (Input Only)
(Implicit Communication size As set in the communications settings on the PLC side.
communication) Up to 248 bytes (when Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 is connected)
Up to 496 bytes (when Allen-Bradley ControlLogix/CompactLogix is connected)
Up to 1436 bytes (when Keyence KV Series or Omron SYSMAC CJ2/CJ1/CS1/NJ is
connected)
Sending trigger As set in the communications settings on the PLC side.
• Cyclic
• COS*2
Instance ID • 100: Input data (controller sending) • 100: Input data (transmission of
• 101: Output data (controller receiving) communication expansion unit)
(254 during Input Only connection) • 150: Output data (reception of
communication expansion unit) (3 for
Input Only)
Sending message Connection count Max. 32 Max. 6
(Explicit message) Support Explicit UCMM/Class3
Message format
Conformance test Complying with Version.CT15. Complying with Version.CT17.
*1 The conditions for the cyclic communication status to be "connected" are a bidirectional communication (Exclusive Owner) connection
or an Input Only connection being established in the case of the controller's Ethernet port and a bidirectional communication (Exclusive
Owner) connection being established in the case of a communication expansion unit.
*2 Only the PLC compliant with COS (Keyence's KV-3000/5000/5500/7300/7500/8000, KV-nano, etc.) can be specified. When the COS
transmission trigger is selected, the controller sends the data at the timing when the transmission data is changed. (If the transmission
data is not changed, it sends the data at specified RPI (communication frequency) intervals.) If the transmission data is continuously
changed, the transmission is held during InhibitTime (minimum transmission interval). Changes to the send-data are checked with the
Result ready flag and Command complete flag for the controller's Ethernet port and with all the send-data for the communication
expansion unit.
When to use message communication and cyclic communication

There is no functional difference between the controller message communication function and cyclic communication
function. As a result, it is not necessary to use it in most cases. However, it is necessary for EtherNet/IP communications
with PLC devices that do not support cyclic communication (SLC5/05 Series, etc.).
Reference
• Since the message communication is communication performed using TCP/IP, it is less suited for high-speed control than cyclic
communication, which uses UDP.
• Message communication is communication using TCP/IP. However, depending on the network status and other conditions, it is possible
that the data may not arrive. On the PLC side, give consideration to such cases when designing the controls (resending process following
timeout, etc.).
LJ-X UM_GB 9-89

Allocation conditions of cyclic communication data (3D mode)
Example of this machine receive-data settings (Keyence→KV-7500 Series → this machine)

Example when 1 of this machine is connected to a KV-7500 Series, cyclic communication data size is 496 bytes (addresses 0000
- 0495), and the command response output area is set to 24 bytes (B****/W**** in the table are examples of KV-7500 link relay and
link register address allocation)
Setting Addres 7bit 6bit 5bit 4bit 3bit 2bit 1bit 0bit
condition s (byte)
Bit 0000 B007 Reserved B006 Reserved B005 Reserved B004 Result OR B003 Result B002 Cmd B001 Cmd Error B000 Cmd
Region Ready Ready Complete
0001 B00F Reserved B00E RUN B00D Reserved B00C ERROR B00B BUSY B00A Reserved B009 TRG_ack B008 READY
0002 B017 Reserved B016 Reserved B015 Reserved B014 Reserved B013 Reserved B012 Reserved B011 Reserved B010 Reserved
0003 B01F OUTPUT B01E OUTPUT B01D Reserved B01C Reserved B01B Reserved B01A Reserved B019 Reserved B018 Reserved
_IMG _IMG
_STATUS _BUSY
Tool 0004 B027 Tool Judge B026 Tool Judge B025 Tool Judge B024 Tool Judge B023 Tool Judge B022 Tool Judge B021 Tool Judge B020 Tool Judge
Judgment Value7 Value6 Value5 Value4 Value3 Value2 Value1 Value0
Area
0005 B02F Tool Judge B02E Tool Judge B02D Tool Judge B02C Tool Judge B02B Tool Judge B02A Tool Judge B029 Tool Judge B028 Tool Judge
Value15 Value14 Value13 Value12 Value11 Value10 Value9 Value8
0006 B037 Tool Judge B036 Tool Judge B035 Tool Judge B034 Tool Judge B033 Tool Judge B032 Tool Judge B031 Tool Judge B030 Tool Judge
Error 0012 W000 Error Code
Code region
0013
Reserved 0014 W001 Reserved
Region
0015
Number of 0016 W002 Total Count

measurement
0017
Region
0018
0019
Command 0020 W004 Command Result
Output
0021
region
0022
0023
0024 W006 Command Data 1
0025
0026
0027
0029
0030
0031
Command
…
Output
region
0045
0046
0047
9-90 LJ-X UM_GB

Setting Addres 7bit 6bit 5bit 4bit 3bit 2bit 1bit 0bit
condition s (byte)
Data output 0048 W012 Result Data 1
Region
0049
0050
0051
0052 W014 Result Data 2
0053
0054
0055
…
Names and Operations of Input Signals
Allocated area Name Remarks

Bit area Cmd Complete Turns on when command processing is complete.
Cmd Error Turns off when command processing is successful and turns on when it fails.
Cmd Ready Turns on when command processes can be received.
Result Ready Turns on when data transmission is complete.
Result OR Used to output the OR result for the judged value of toosl specified in the output
settings.
READY Output when trigger input is acceptable.
TRG_ack Becomes ON when Trigger input is accepted. Becomes OFF when Trigger input is set
to OFF.
BUSY This signal is output during image processing or command processing.
ERROR This signal is output while any of system errors occur with the dialog displayed on the
screen.
For details on typical system errors, see "Error Message" (page 9-134).
In "ERROR Output Settings" (page 8-17) in the Global Settings, enabling or disabling
the error output for the SD card-related errors, etc. can be specified.
RUN This signal is output when the controller is in Run mode.
OUTPUT_IMG_BUSY Output while images are being output.
OUTPUT_IMG_STATUS Output when there are remaining images that need to be output in an image output
buffer.
Tool judgment area Tool Judge Value0 Returns the judgment value allocated to the bit allocation region (Address 0004:bit0).
Tool Judge Value1 Returns the judgment value allocated to the bit allocation region (Address 0004:bit1).
··· ···
Error code area Error Code Error code corresponding to the error cause.
Measurement count area Total Count Displays the measurement count.
Command output area Command Result Indicates the command execution results.
Command Data 1 Returns the command execution result data 1.
··· ···
Command Data6 Returns the command execution result data 6.
Result output area Result Data 1 Returns the measurement result data 1.
Result Data 2 Returns the measurement result data 2.
··· ···
LJ-X UM_GB 9-91

Example of this machine receive-data settings (Keyence→KV-7500 Series → this machine)

Example when 1 of this machine is connected to a KV-7500 Series and cyclic communication data size is 496 bytes (addresses
0000 - 0495) (B****/W**** in the table are examples of KV-7500 link relay and link register address allocation)
Setting Address 7bit 6bit 5bit 4bit 3bit 2bit 1bit 0bit
condition (byte)
Bit 0000 B067 Reserved B066 Reserved B065 Reserved B064 Error reset B063 Result ack B062 Reserved B061 Reserved B060 Command
Region request request
0001 B06F Reserved B06E Reserved B06D Reserved B06C Reserved B06B Reserved B06A Reserved B069 Reserved B068 TRG
0002 B077 Reserved B076 Reserved B075 Reserved B074 Reserved B073 Reserved B072 TEST B071 EXT B070 RESET
0003 B07F Reserved B07E Reserved B07D Reserved B07C Reserved B07B Reserved B07A Reserved B079 Reserved B078 Reserved
Reserved 0004 B087 Reserved B086 Reserved B085 Reserved B084 Reserved B083 Reserved B082 Reserved B081 Reserved B080 Reserved
Area
0006 B097 Reserved B096 Reserved B095 Reserved B094 Reserved B093 Reserved B092 Reserved B091 Reserved B090 Reserved
0008 B0A7 Reserved B0A6 Reserved B0A5 Reserved B0A4 Reserved B0A3 Reserved B0A2 Reserved B0A1 Reserved B0A0 Reserved
0009 B0AF Reserved B0AE Reserved B0AD Reserved B0AC Reserved B0AB Reserved B0AA Reserved B0A9 Reserved B0A8 Reserved
0010 B0B7 Reserved B0B6 Reserved B0B5 Reserved B0B4 Reserved B0B3 Reserved B0B2 Reserved B0B1 Reserved B0B0 Reserved
0011 B0BF Reserved B0BE Reserved B0BD Reserved B0BC Reserved B0BB Reserved B0BA Reserved B0B9 Reserved B0B8 Reserved
Execute 0012 W0F2 ExecCondNo
Condition
0013
No.
0014 W0F3 Reserved
0015
Command 0016 W0F4 Command number
Input region
0017
0018
0019
0020 W0F6 Command Parameter1
0021
0022
0023
0024 W0F8 Command Parameter2
0025
0026
0027
0028 W0FA Command Parameter3
0029
0030
0031
…
Reference
ExecCondNo is acquired to this controller only when it changes, so rewriting the execute condition using commands can be done as well.
9-92 LJ-X UM_GB

Names and Operations of Output Signals

Bit area Command Request Requests command execution when the signal switches from OFF to ON.
Result ack Provides notification of data acquisition when the signal switches from OFF to ON.
Error reset request Clears Error when the signal switches from OFF to ON.
TRG Allows the head to capture images (leading edge synchronization). The input is
accepted when READY is ON.
RESET Used to perform reset operation.
• The Result OR output will become 0.
• The measurement count returns to 0.

• A new measurement result output destination file is created. A new image output
destination folder is created.
• The trigger waiting state of individual triggers is canceled.
EXT Used to suspend the occurrence of internal triggers and the acceptance of external
triggers. While this is on, READY is forced to be off to stop the acceptance of all
TEST Used to suspend the status output and other outputs for trial run or any other reasons.
• The result data not output at the time of input are deleted.
• Resets the Result OR output during input.

• As soon as the input turns off, result outputs for the processed images will resume.
Execute Condition No. ExecCondNo Change Execute Condition No.
Command input area Command number The command No. is written.
Cmd Parameter1 The command argument 1 is written.
··· ···
LJ-X UM_GB 9-93

Changing the EtherNet/IP Settings
Changing the EtherNet/IP Settings
Reference
Displaying the EtherNet/IP settings • Although there is no problem if the cyclic communication data
screen size set at the controller is not the same as the cyclic
communication data size on the PLC side, it is recommended
The settings can be changes in the "EtherNet/IP" screen. that the same value as the PLC data size be set so that the
allocated data can be sent and received correctly.
• The value set here is used as the data size when accessing
assembly object input data (instance 100, attribute 3) and output
data (instance 101 [if using the unit’s Ethernet port] / 150 [if
using the communication expansion unit], attribute 3) during
message communication.
Data Configurations
Click "Settings"Displays an overview of data assignment in
EtherNet/IP cyclic communication. For a command
for "Command Response Output Area" (Default: 24 byte).
Click [View List] shows the detailed allocation statuses of
Reference the receive-data and send-data.
• Controller Ethernet settings such as the IP address and subnet
mask are changed in the "Network Settings" screen (page 8-2).
• If the EtherNet/IP settings were changed, it is necessary to
restart the LJ-X Series in order to apply the settings.

[EtherNet/IP] or [EtherNet/IP Unit].
The [EtherNet/IP] or [EtherNet/IP Unit Output Settings]
screen appears.
2 To enable/disable EtherNet/IP communication,

select/clear the [Enable EtherNet/IP

communication] or [Enable EtherNet/IP unit] check
box.
Controller receive-data
Reference
Displays an overview of the allocations for data received by
PLC-Link, PROFINET, and EtherCAT cannot be used in
conjunction with EtherNet/IP. this machine from the PLC.
3 Change the settings as required. Controller send-data

the PLC from this machine. The range for the command
Communication data setting
response output area in the byte allocation area can be
Data size specified.
Specifies the data size of Assembly Object in the cyclic
communication and the message communication (Default:
496 byte). For the cyclic communication, a connecting PLC Decimal Point
is given priority to specify data size. Therefore, the data size
Select the data notation of result data output and decimal-
specified here may differ from that in actual processing. Use
a PLC compatible with Large Forward Open in order to related commands.
transact data exceeding 496 byte. • Fixed-point (initial value): The original data is
multiplied by 1000, and handled as a signed 32-bit
Connect to Allen-Bradley SLC5/05
integer data.
Checking the box limits the data size settable up to 248
• Floating decimal point: The data is handled as 32-bit
byte. PLCs specified here do not support the cyclic
communication, therefore, the data size of Assembly single-precision floating decimal point data.
Object in the message communication should be changed
according to the specifications of the PLCs.
9-94 LJ-X UM_GB

Changing the EtherNet/IP Settings
Communication expansion unit network Create EDS File

settings Outputs an EDS file and icon that include information
related to the controller EtherNet/IP functions. The naming
• If incorrect settings are used, the controller and
Point convention for each file is as follows.
other network equipment may not work properly.
Consult your system administrator or network • Controller:
administrator about setting values. - Keyence_3006_0101.eds
• For communication through the controller's - LJ-X8000Series.ico
EtherNet/IP port, set the IP address, subnet • Communication expansion unit (CB-NEP20E):
mask, and default gateway on the [Ethernet] - Keyence_3008_0101.eds
screen. For details.
- LJ-X8K-CB-NEP20E.ico
Reference When [Disable] or [Enable] is selected for [Enable/ Reference

Disable], the setting details of the controller's • The file output path is SD2:/lj-x3d/EDS on the controller and
Ethernet port are displayed. SD2/lj-x3d/EDS_EX on the communication expansion unit.
• IP address: • Since the EDS file does not contain the information that was set
Enter the IP address (Default value: 192.168.10.20). or changed in the controller global settings, the created EDS file
• Subnet mask: will always contain the same information.
Enter a subnet mask (Default value: 255.255. 255.0). 4 Select [OK].

• Default gateway:
Enter a default gateway IP address (Default value:
0.0.0.0).
The set value is common with the P1 port and P2
Point
port of the communication expansion unit.
• Enable DHCP (only when [Enable module] is selected)
Select this check box when the network setting
information (IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway) is provided by a DHCP server when the
controller starts. (Default: disabled)
• When DHCP is enabled, the settings of the IP
Point
address, subnet mask, and default gateway
cannot be changed on the [EtherNet/IP] menu.
• If the DHCP server has not been started, the
controller retries DHCP processing until there is
a reply from the server. Clear this check box to
change to manual assignment of the settings.
Reference

Other settings
Enable Handshake
After confirming that the PLC has received the
measurement result output data, select whether to write the
next result data. If enabled, the instrument will turn on the
Result ready flag when the measurement result output is
complete. Upon reception of the ready flag, the PLC reads
the output data and turns on "Result ack flag". The unit
detects this and turns off the Result ready flag. To request
that the PLC write the next measurement result, turn off the
Result ack flag.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-95

Outputting Measurement Data via EtherNet/IP Cyclic Communication (Data Output)
Outputting Measurement Data via EtherNet/IP

Cyclic Communication (Data Output)
Change the output settings for data output using EtherNet/IP.
Data output flow (example of connection with PLC EtherNet/IP unit)
Set the data and address for output in the output settings.
The controller outputs data via EtherNet/IP in the following manner.
Reference
• Data output via EtherNet/IP is performed only in Run mode. Data is not output in Setup mode.
• With EtherNet/IP, images and other binary data cannot be output.
• If data is not output to EtherNet/IP, no data is output and the Result ready flag does not change.
Image processing is completed in the Main unit,

and result data is stored
(2)
(1)
Verify that Result ACK flag is OFF*1
Result ack flag is OFF
(3)
(3)
Data is written to data memory corresponding to
Write data to ResultData and Result OR flag, ResultData and Result OR flag, Tool Judge Value
Tool Judge Value
(4)
(4)
TURN on Result ready flag after data write is
complete The Result ready flag changes to on to confirm
the data write completion and to refer to the data
(5) (5)
Detect that Result ACK flag has changed to Result ack flag is ON.
ON and confirm data read completion
(6) (6)
Result ready flag is OFF Detect that the Result ready flag has changed
to OFF
(1)
Result ack flag is OFF
Reference
• If results output is executed when the "Result ack flag" is still ON, the data is stored in the output buffer, however, it is not written to
ResultData. When the "Result ack flag" turns OFF, the data in the buffer is written. Be aware that if the inspection flow continues to be
executed when the "Result ack flag" remains ON, overflow of the output buffer will occur and output will be skipped.
• When handshake is OFF, output data is overwritten and updated without checking whether the Result ack flag is OFF. To take the rise of
Result ready flag as a data reference synchronization signal, turn the Result ack flag ON at each output, which will turn the Result ready
flag OFF.
9-96 LJ-X UM_GB

Outputting Measurement Data via EtherNet/IP Cyclic Communication (Data Output)
Timing Chart
Image processing Image processing
(2)
Result ack flag PLC writes.
Result ready flag Controller writes.

A
Result OR flag Controller writes.
ResultData Controller writes.
Tool Judge Value Controller writes.
(1) (3) (4) (5) (6) (1)
A: More than 0 ms (The link-scan speed depends on the state.)
Reference
The "Result OR flag" is updated in coordination with results output with EtherNet/IP as the output destination. When the "Result OR flag" is
used, it is necessary to configure the output setting so that 1 or more data item is output via EtherNet/IP.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-97

Controlling Controller with EtherNet/IP Cyclic Communication (Command Control)
Controlling Controller with EtherNet/IP Cyclic

Communication (Command Control)
The communication control commands can be executed at any time.
Flow of command process using EtherNet/IP (example of connection with PLC

EtherNet/IP unit)
The controller performs command control via EtherNet/IP in the following manner.
(1)
Write the command parameter to the data

memory corresponding to CommandParameter
in the data memory that corresponds to CMD
Number.
(3) (2)
It detects the rise of command request flag, Make sure that command ready flag is ON and
executes the command from command Number, turn ON the Command request flag
reads the commands parameter from the
address corresponding to the CommandParame- Detect that command ready flag is OFF, and
ter, and turn Command ready flag OFF confirm the start of commands
(4)
After command execution completes, write the
Reply data is written to data memory
reply data to Command data and set the error
corresponding to Command data *1
state to Command error flag.
(5)
(5) Check the completion of Command execution
Command complete flag is ON and see the reply data and Command execution
results by detecting command complete flag ON

(7)
Verify that command request flag is OFF, and
(6)
turn command complete flag, Command error Command request flag is OFF
flag OFF, and Command ready flag ON.
• In the case of a command for which there is no response data, data is not output in response to the Command Data.
Reference
When an error occurs, the command execution results are written to Command Result. (0: Success, <Error code>: Failure). The error cords
conform to "When an error occurs on command acceptance" (page 9-2).
9-98 LJ-X UM_GB

Controlling Controller with EtherNet/IP Cyclic Communication (Command Control)
Timing Chart
Command request flag A A PLC writes.
Command ready flag A Controller writes.
Command complete flag A Controller writes.
Command error flag Controller writes.
Command Number PLC writes.
Command Parameter PLC writes.
Command Data Controller writes.
(1) (2)(3) (4)(5) (6)(7)
A: More than 0 ms (The link-scan speed depends on the state.)
LJ-X UM_GB 9-99

Changing Execute Condition No. Using EtherNet/IP Cyclic Communication (Execute No. Change)
Changing Execute Condition No. Using EtherNet/

IP Cyclic Communication (Execute No. Change)
The execute No. can be changed at any time.
Flow of execute No. change using EtherNet/IP (example of connection with PLC
EtherNet/IP unit)
The controller changes the link value of the execute No. using EtherNet/IP in the following manner.
The changed value is applied at the next measurement.
Refer to the value of data memory corresponding Write data to data memory corresponding to
to ExecCondNo and rewrite the execution ExecCondNo
condition number
9-100 LJ-X UM_GB

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Checking whether or not the EtherNet/IP Although results data is output beginning
connection is correct from byte address 0048, it is unknown where
Select the controller [Global] - [Communications & I/O] - the data is output to on the PLC (KV Series)
[EtherNet/IP], then check side.
[Cyclic Communication Status:] at the bottom of the [EtherNet/ With the KV Series, when automatic allocation is used for the
IP] screen. If [Not Connected] is displayed here, then first LJ-X Series, the LJ-X Series results data is written
communication has failed. Check the cable (cross cable when beginning from link register W0012.
connected directly), IP address, communications settings on With KV series automatic allocation, allocation byte addresses
the PLC side, and other items again. 0000-0011 are for the link relay (beginning from B0000), and
Reference byte addresses 0012 beginning from 00 are for the link
When connecting to an Allen-Bradley SLC5/05, because cyclic register. Allocation begins at the start from W0000, with 1
communication is not performed, [Not Connected] is displayed register used for each 2-byte address.
even when the connection is correct. When the results data byte address is 0048, then (48 - 12)/2 =
No. 18→12H, and results data is written beginning from
W0012.
Result OR flag is not output.
The "Result OR flag" is updated in coordination with results
output with EtherNet/IP as the output destination. When the
"Result OR flag" is used, it is necessary to configure the
output setting so that 1 or more data item is output via
EtherNet/IP.
Result ready flag remains ON and does not

change.
There is the possibility that "Result ack flag" control is not
being performed correctly. The "Result ready flag" turns OFF
when the "Result ack flag" rise is recognized in sending (this
machine receiving). This is the same regardless of whether
handshake is ON or OFF.
Data cannot be acquired correctly when

reading data based on the change in the rise of
STO output from an external terminal.
STO is the data strobe signal for the terminal output.
Therefore, it cannot be used as the strobe signal for any other
data output.
Refer to the "Result ready flag" for the timing as to when to read
data by EtherNet/IP.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-101

Troubleshooting
Error Messages
Error
Message Cause Corrective Action Cause
No.
EtherNet/IP communication Cyclic communication was interrupted. • Check that the Ethernet cable is connected
failed. (When recovery is possible, recovery correctly.
occurs automatically.) • Check whether both this machine and the
master side were restarted after the
communications settings were updated.
13601
• Change the cyclic communication cycle and
timeout time on the PLC side.
• With the factory default, ERROR output is not
set. Please set in"ERROR output setting" (page
8-17) screen.
EtherNet/IP output failed due The controller output buffer for outputting Change the RPI setting so the data is output via
to a full buffer. via the EtherNet/IP port is full. EtherNet/IP at a faster rate than it builds up. Or,
13602
extend the time between triggers. Note: Results
data is not written when the buffer is full.
The delay of the handshake When the EtherNet/IP handshake is ON, Change the RPI setting so the data from the tool is
control causes skipping of the delayed handshake caused results output via EtherNet/IP at a faster rate than it builds
EtherNet/IP communication output via EtherNet/IP to be skipped. up. Or, extend the time between triggers. Note: 13603
result output. Output does not occur when the output buffer is
full.
The EtherNet/IP unit cannot be The EtherNet/IP unit is not recognized, • Make sure the EtherNet/IP unit is installed
recognized. and the controller cannot use EtherNet/IP correctly.
communication. • Make sure the EtherNet/IP unit is not damaged. 13604
• Do not connect/disconnect the EtherNet/IP unit
while the controller and unit are powered on.
9-102 LJ-X UM_GB

Communicating with the Controller Using EtherNet/IP Message Communication
Communicating with the Controller Using

EtherNet/IP Message Communication
For details on the basic specifications of communication, refer to "EtherNet/IP Communication Specifications" (page 9-89).
Object configuration
The EtherNet/IP functions provided by the controller’s Ethernet port and the communication expansion unit include the following
objects, which can be accessed using message communication.
Class (Object name) Class ID Instance ID Controller's Ethernet Communication

port expansion unit
Identity Object 1 (01H) 1 (01H)  
Message Router Object 2 (02H) 1 (01H)  -
Assembly Object 4 (04H) 100 (64H): Input  
101 (65H): Output  -
150 (96H): Output - 
Connection Manager Object 6 (06H) 1 (01H)  
Device Level Ring Object 71(47H) 1 (01H) - 
QoS Object 72(48H) 1 (01H) - 
Port Object 244 (F4H) 1 (01H)  -
TCP/IP Interface Object 245 (F5H) 1 (01H)  
EtherNet Link Object 246 (F6H) 1 (01H)  
: Supported, -: Not supported
Reference
• For details of the procedure for issuing messages with the PLC device that is used, refer to the PLC instruction manual.
• This manual primarily explains the Measurement Object, which is an object unique to the controller. For details of other objects, refer to
the EtherNet/IP specifications that are issued by ODVA (www.odva.org).
Notation in this explanation

The following terms are used when explaining object attributes and services.
Data notation
• The bit position in the data is indicated as "Bit n". (Bit0 is indicated as LSB.)
• Array type data is indicated by [ ]. Example: DWORD[10] (DWORD type array, No. of elements: 10)
Data type
The data type is prescribed as follows in the EtherNet/IP specifications.
Data type Explanation Range
Min. Max.
BOOL Boolean 0: FALSE 1: TRUE
SINT Short integer -128 127
INT Integer -32768 32767
DINT Double precision integer -231 231-1
USINT Unsigned short integer 0 255
UINT Unsigned integer 0 65535
UDINT Unsigned double precision 0 232-1
integer
BYTE Bit string: 8 bits - -
WORD Bit string: 16 bits - -
DWORD Bit string: 32 bits - -
REAL Floating decimal point Range of single-precision floating decimal points
Reference
All values are stored as little endians.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-103

ClassID: 4 (04H) Assembly Object (3D Mode)
Explanation
The same data that is sent and received by cyclic communications can be accessed and controlled directly by messages.
This can be used to perform control using the same data format as with cyclic communication for models that do not support cyclic
communication (such as Allen-Bradley SLC5/05).
Reference
Be aware that with messages, it is not possible to perform time-specific control as it is with cyclic communications.
Instance: 100 (64H)

This is information concerning the input assembly and is sent using cyclic communication by the controller.
Attribute
Attribute ID Access Name Data type Details

3 (03H) Get data Byte array This information is specified by the input data for the cyclic communication
data allocation in the global settings. It includes the controller status,
command execution results, results data, and other information.
4 (04H) Get size UINT Attribute3 size (bytes)
This is the size that is specified for cyclic communications data size in the
cyclic communication data allocation in the global settings.
Example of input assembly data format

The input assembly configuration is as prescribed in the cyclic communication data allocation in the global settings.
For the purpose of explanation, the configuration is shown with the settings listed below.
• Cyclic communication data size: 496 bytes (Addresses 0000 - 0495)
• Command response output area: 24 bytes
Address 7bit 6bit 5bit 4bit 3bit 2bit 1bit 0bit
(Byte)
0000 Reserved Reserved Reserved Result OR Result Ready Cmd Ready Cmd Error Cmd Complete
0001 Reserved RUN Reserved ERROR BUSY Reserved TRG_ack READY
0002 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

0003 OUTPUT OUTPUT Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
_IMG _IMG
_STATUS _BUSY
0004 Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0012 Error Code
0013
0014 Reserved
0015
9-104 LJ-X UM_GB


(Byte)
0016 Total Count
0017
0018
0019
0020 Command Result
0021
0022
0023
0024 Command Data 1
0025
0026
0027
0028 Command Data 2
0029
0030
0031
…
0044 Command Data 6

0045
0046
0047
0048 Result Data 1
0049
0050
0051
0052 Result Data 2
0053
0054
0055
…
Service
Service code Name Details
14 (0EH) GetAttributeSingle Acquires the attribute value.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-105

Instance: 101 (65H)/150 (96H)

This is information concerning the output assembly and is received using cyclic communication by the controller.
The number is 101 when using the unit’s Ethernet port and 150 when using the communication expansion unit.
Attribute

3 (03H) Get/Set data Byte array This information is specified by the output data for the
cyclic communication data allocation in the global settings.
Controller controls, command input, and other data
can be written to it.
4 (04H) Get size UINT Attribute3 size (bytes)
This is the size that is specified for cyclic communications
data size in the cyclic communication data allocation in the
global settings.
Example of output assembly data format

The output assembly configuration is as prescribed in the cyclic communication data allocation in the global settings.
For the purpose of explanation, the configuration is shown with the settings listed below.
• Cyclic communication data size: 496 bytes (Addresses 0000 - 0495)
(Byte)
0000 Reserved Reserved Reserved Error reset Result ack Reserved Reserved Cmd Request
request
0001 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved TRG
0002 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved TEST EXT RESET

0012 ExecCondNo
0013
0014 Reserved
0015
0016 Command number
0017
0018
0019
0020 Command Parameter1
0021
0022
0023
0025
0026
0027
0029
0030
0031
…
9-106 LJ-X UM_GB

Service

16 (10H) SetAttributeSingle Sets the attribute value. Whether or not it can be set depends on the
attribute access properties
LJ-X UM_GB 9-107

ClassID: 113 (71H) Measurement Object
Explanation
This object is unique to the controller, and provides the attributes and services that are necessary to control the controller by means of
messages.
For details concerning control by attributes, refer to the control sequence for cyclic communication.
Instance: 1 (01H)
Attribute

100 (64H) Get Measurement BYTE Indicates the controller status.
Object Status • Bit 0: ERROR
• Bit 1: Reserved
• Bit 2: RUN
101 (65H) Get Process  DWORD Indicates the measurement status.
Status • Bit 0: READY
• Bit 1: Reserved
• Bit 2: Reserved
• Bit 3: Reserved
• Bit 4: Reserved
• Bit 5: Reserved
• Bit 6: Reserved
• Bit 7: Reserved
• Bit 8: TRG_ack
• Bit 9: Reserved
• Bit 10: Reserved
• Bit 16: BUSY

• Bit 20-31: Reserved
102 (66H) Get/Set RESET BOOL Initializes the measurement process.
0->1: Initialize the measurement process.
103 (67H) Get/Set TEST BOOL Restricts the output. Clears the output buffer when 0->1.
• 1: Restrict output
• 0: Permit output
104 (68H) Get/Set EXT BOOL Restricts trigger input.
• 1: Restrict trigger input.
• 0: Permit trigger input.
105 (69H) Get/Set TRG BYTE Inputs trigger.
• Bit 0: TRG
• Bit 1 - 7: Reserved
113 (71H) Get Results  BYTE Indicates the results output status.
Status • Bit 0: Result ready flag
• Bit 1: Result OR flag
107 (6BH) Get/Set Result  BOOL Performs results output handshake control.
ack flag
9-108 LJ-X UM_GB


108 (6CH) Get Inspection Result DWORD [124] Displays the results data. The data size is fixed at 248 bytes
when the selected PLC type is Allen-Bradley SLC5/05, and at
496 bytes in other cases. The amount that was specified in the
cyclic communication allocations can be acquired from the
starting address.
109 (6DH) Get/Set Command request BOOL Requests the communication control command.
flag • 1: Request command execution.
• 0: Does not request command execution.
110 (6EH) Get/Set Command Structure Specifies the communication control command No. and
Command DWORD parameters.
Number The data size is 248 bytes when the selected PLC type is Allen-
Command DWORD Bradley SLC5/05, and 496 bytes in all other cases.
Param *At setup, only the size that requires update can be specified
(4-byte integer multiple).
111 (6FH) Get Command Status BYTE Indicates the command execution status.
• Bit 0: Command complete flag
• Bit 1: Command error flag
• Bit 2: Command ready flag
112 (70H) Get Command Result Structure Indicates the command execution results.
Command DWORD The data size is 248 bytes when the selected PLC type is Allen-
Result Bradley SLC5/05, and 496 bytes in all other cases. The data
Command DWORD size varies depending on the command execution result. The
Data maximum data size is 248 bytes when the selected PLC type is
Allen-Bradley SLC5/05, and 496 bytes in all other cases.
113 (71H) Get Total count UDINT Indicates the number of measurement.
114 (72H) Get/Set Exec Cond No UINT If a value was specified that exceeds the maximum value for
the execute No., then the value is set as the maximum value +
1. The update timing for Set is the same as for EXW however it
is different from EXW in that update occurs even when
operation is stopped.
With Get, an IMMEDIATE execute No. is acquired and
returned.
115 (73H) Get NGCount UDINT Indicates the NG count.
116 (74H) Get/Set Program ID Structure Sets and references the program No.
SD No. UINT Specifies the SD card No. (1 - 2).
Program No. UINT Specifies the program No. (0 - 999).
118 (76H) Get Program Load UINT Indicates the status/results of program change by attribute 116.
Status • 0: Program change successful
• 1: Program change failed
• 2: Program change in progress
• For Get access, the GetAttributeSingle service (0EH) is used. For Set, the SetAttributeSingle service (10H) is used.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-109

Service

5 (05H) Reset Initializes the measurement process.
16 (10H) SetAttributeSingle Sets the attribute value. Whether or not it can be set depends on the attribute access
properties.
75 (4BH) Capture Execute the imaging.
76 (4CH) Execute Command Issues a command request. The command execution results are returned by message
response.
77 (4DH) GetResultsData Acquires the measurement results.
78 (4EH) ChangeExecuteNo Changes the execute No.
79 (4FH) GetAreaAllocationInfo Acquires the cyclic communication allocation settings.
80 (50H) Clear error Clears the error status.
Service details
• Reset service (05H)
Initializes the measurement process. The executed contents are the same as for I/O control reset control.
- Send parameter: None
- Response data: None
• Image service (4BH)
Enter a trigger to acquire the profile.
- Send parameter
Name Data type Details

TriggerBit BYTE Head information to instruct capture
• Bit 0: TRG
- Returned error code
Error Code Name Details

09(09H) Abnormal parameter value A parameter value other than 1 was specified.
21 (15H) Parameter size is too A parameter was specified with a size larger than 2 bytes.
large.
19 (13H) Parameter size is too Parameter is missing.

small.
16 (10H) Status error The "Ready" which corresponds to the specified trigger is OFF
(not in Run mode, receive image capture not permitted, etc.).
- Result data: None
Reference
In the communication process using messages, a processing delay of several tens of ms or longer occurs. If this is a problem, use cyclic
communication or terminal input for control.
9-110 LJ-X UM_GB

• Communication control command execution service (4CH)

Executes communication control commands.
- Send parameter

Command Number DWORD Specifies the communication control command No.
Command Param DWORD Specifies the command parameters. A maximum of 492 bytes of
parameters can be specified (4-byte integer multiple). For more
information on the command specification method, see "Detailed
Explanation of Communication Control Commands".
Error Code Sub code Name Details

00 (00H) Command execution  Command execution was completed.
completion
19 (13H) Parameter too small error The parameter was not specified in the send-data.
21 (15H) Parameter too large error Parameter larger than 496 bytes was specified in
the send-data.
31 (1FH) 2 Command error The specified command does not exist.
3 Command operation Operation of the received command is not
prohibited possible.
5 Command  The command results area is insufficient.
response error
22 Parameter error The parameter number or range is incorrect.
16 (10H) Status error The "Command ready flag" is OFF.
- Results data:
When the execution of a command that includes command results is successful, the results data is returned in the
format shown below.

Command Data DWORD "" Returns the command execution results. The data contained in
this area corresponds to the Command Data part. The maximum
size of the returned data is 248 bytes when the selected PLC type
is Allen-Bradley SLC5/05, and 496 bytes in all other cases.
Reference
LJ-X UM_GB 9-111

• Results data acquisition service (4DH)

Acquires the final measurement results.
- Send parameter

Size UINT Specify the result size in bytes to be fetched (result data is 4 bytes.
Must be a multiple of 4).
Offset UINT Specifies the offset of the result data to be retrieved, in bytes (the
result data is 4 bytes in length. Must be a multiple of 4).

09(09H) Abnormal parameter value Offset or size value is incorrect.
21 (15H) Parameter size is too Parameter size is too large.
large.
19 (13H) Parameter size is too Parameter size is insufficient.
small.
- Results data

Result BYTE "" Returns results data with the specified offset and size.
The maximum data size is 248 bytes when the selected PLC type
is Allen-Bradley SLC5/05, and 496 bytes in all other cases.
Reference
• In the communication process using messages, a processing delay of several tens of ms or longer may occur. If this is a problem, use
cyclic communication or terminal input for control.
• The results data that can be acquired is up to the size specified in the cyclic communication allocations.
• When this command is used, set the handshake to OFF.
• Execute number change service (4EH)

Changes the execute number.
- Send parameter

No DWORD Execute number to set

09(09H) Abnormal parameter value Size value is incorrect.
21(15H) Parameter size is too Parameter size is too large.
large.
19(13H) Parameter size is too Parameter size is insufficient.
small.
- Result data: None
Reference
9-112 LJ-X UM_GB

• Area allocation information acquisition service (4FH)

Acquires the address and size for the areas allocated to cyclic communication.
- Send parameter

Direction UINT Direction
• 0: Receiving side
• 1: Sending side
Index UINT When Direction is 0 (receiving side)
• 0: Bit area
• 1: Fixed byte data area
• 2: CommandParam area
When Direction is 1 (sending side)
• 0: Bit area
• 1: Fixed byte data area
• 2: CommandData area
• 3: ResultData area

09(09H) Abnormal parameter value A parameter value other than 0 to 1, 2, 3 was specified.
large.
small.
- Results data:

Size UINT Size of specified area
Offset UINT Starting address of specified area
• Clear error service (50H)

Clears the error status.
- Send parameter

Index UINT Error to be cleared
• Bit 0: Error

09(09H) Abnormal parameter value A parameter value other than 1 was specified.
large.
small.
- Result data: None
Reference
LJ-X UM_GB 9-113

Services
Controlling the controller using
Specify the contents for execution. The primary services that
EtherNet/IP message can be used with the controller are the following:
communication • Access to attributes:
GetAttributeSingle/SetAttributeSingle
Using message communication • Object-specific service:
Services that are prepared for individual objects.
The controller functions as the message communication
server. The procedure for issuing message communication
varies depending on the device. However, information such as Control using message communication
the following must be specified. For details, refer to "EtherNet/ When using messages to control the controller, access
IP Communication Specifications" (page 9-89) and the manual Measurement Object.
of each device. Measurement Object provides the following services.
IP Address Service name Service ID Explanation
Specify the controller IP address. Reset 5 (05H) Resets the controller
measurement contents. It is the
Class, instance
same as the reset command in
Specify the following classes and instances that are provided the communications control
by the controller EtherNet/IP function. commands.
Class name Class ID Instance ID GetAttribute 14 (0EH) Acquires the specified attribute
Identity Object 1 (01H) 1 (01H) Single value.
Message Router 2 (02H) 1 (01H) SetAttribute 16 (10H) Writes a value to the specified
Object Single attribute.
Assembly Object 4 (04H) 100 (64H): Input Capture 75 (4BH) Inputs the specified trigger
101 (65H): Output (when signal and performs image
using the controller's
capture.
Ethernet port)
Execute 76 (4CH) Executes communication
150 (96H): Output 
(when using a communication Command control commands.
expansion unit) GetResultsData 77 (4DH) Acquires the measurement
Connection Manager 6 (06H) 1 (01H) results.
Object Execute No. 78 (4EH) Changes the execute No.
Measurement Object 113(71H) 1 (01H) Rewrite
Port Object 244 (F4H) 1 (01H) GetArea 79 (4FH) Acquires the allocation
TCP/IP Interface 245 (F5H) 1 (01H) AllocationInfo information for each area
Object
(command response output
Ethernet Link Object 246 (F6H) 1 (01H) area, system variable allocation
area, results output area, etc.)
Reference
The primary classes that are used for message communication are that were allocated for cyclic
the following: communication data.
• Measurement Object: This object is unique to the controller, and Clear error 80 (50H) Clears the error status.
is tasked with all image sensor controls.
Reference
• Assembly Object: With a PLC that does not support cyclic
communication, by directly reading and writing the data of this For more details about each service, refer to "EtherNet/IP
object, it is possible to achieve control that is the same as cyclic Communication Specifications" (page 9-89).
communication.
Attributes
Specify the attributes that exist in the specified class and
instance. For details of the attributes of each class, refer to
"EtherNet/IP Communication Specifications" (page 9-89) and the
specifications of the EtherNet/IP functions issued by ODVA.
Reference
To obtain the specifications issued by ODVA, refer to the URL

below.
ODVA home page: www.odva.org/
9-114 LJ-X UM_GB

Resetting the controller using Controlling image capture with

EtherNet/IP message EtherNet/IP message
communication communication
Controller measurement can be reset using message
communication by means of the Measurement Object reset Image capture service (4BH) control image
service. Enter the trigger and acquire the profile.
Main unit
Reset service (05H) control image PLC
(LJ-X Series)
Resets the measurement contents. The contents that are

Image capture service
executed are the same as I/O reset.
Main unit Response

PLC
(LJ-X Series)
Reference
Reset service
The following conditions must be satisfied in order to use this
service.
Response • EtherNet/IP must be enabled when started.
• EtherNet/IP must be enabled in the external trigger type
settings.
• READY is true (READY state)
Example of data
Send-data
Example of data
Class ID 71H Measurement Object
When trigger is the input, specify 0x01 with the trigger
Instance ID 01H Fixed value
information bits 0 as 1.
Service ID 05H Reset service
Attribute ID - - Send-data
Data - - Class ID 71H Measurement Object
Response Service ID 4BH Image capture service
Execution result Execution result Attribute ID - -
Additional code None Data 0th byte 01H bit0: Trg enabled
Bit1-7: Invalid
Execution result
0 (00H): Service execution was successful. Response

Additional code None
Execution result
• 0 (00H): Service execution was successful.
• 9 (09Hex): Data value is not correct (not a valid value).
• 16 (10H): Service was not available (one of the specified
triggers was not in ready state.)
• 19 (13H): Incorrect data size (too small)
• 21 (15H): Incorrect data size (too large)
LJ-X UM_GB 9-115

Response data
Command control with EtherNet/
IP message communication Execution result Execution result
Additional code Refer below.
Data 0th byte Execution result byte No. 0
Command execution service (4CH) control 1st byte 00H
image 2nd byte 00H
Executes command data. 3rd byte 00H
Main unit Execution result

PLC
(LJ-X Series) • 0 (00H): Service execution was successful.
Command execution service
• 31 (1FH): A vendor-specific error occurred. The detailed
Response reason is indicated in the additional code.
• 16 (10H): Status error The "Command ready flag" is OFF.
Reference
• The following conditions must be satisfied in order to use this

Additional code
service. Contain binary command error codes.
- EtherNet/IP must be enabled when started. 2 (02H) Command error The specified command
- The "Command ready flag" must be true (service is available).
does not exist.
• The upper limit for the data that can be specified and acquired
3 (03H) Command operation Operation of the received
by command input and command output with this service is 248
prohibited command is not possible.
bytes when the selected PLC type is Allen-Bradley SLC5/05,
and is 496 bytes in all other cases. This size is unrelated to the 5(05H) Command  The command results area is
command area size that was allocated for the cyclic response error insufficient.
communication area on the Global screen. 22 (16H) Parameter error The parameter number or
• The command output data returns a response corresponding to range is incorrect.
the size of the results data for the executed command.
Example of data
When specifying number specified command 24 (PW) and
changing to program 10 in SD1
Send-data

Service ID 4CH Command execution service
Attribute ID - -
Data 0th byte 18H Number specified command
No. 24 (Change inspection
program)
1st byte 00H
2nd byte 00H
3rd byte 00H
4th byte 01H SDNo.1(01H)
5th byte 00H
6th byte 00H
7th byte 00H
8th byte 0AH Program No.10(0AH)
9th byte 00H
10th byte 00H
11th byte 00H
9-116 LJ-X UM_GB

Acquiring measurement data by Example of data

EtherNet/IP message communications Acquiring 20 bytes starting from byte 12 in the results data
(Acquire Data) Send-data

Results data acquisition service (4DH) Instance ID 01H Fixed value
control image Service ID 4DH GetResultsData
Specify the offset and size in bytes for the results data that Services
was allocated in the output settings, and acquire the results Attribute ID - -
data. Data 0th byte 14H Acquire 20 bytes.
1st byte 00H
Main unit
PLC 2nd byte 0CH Acquire results
(LJ-X Series)
data beginning from byte No.
Results data acquisition service 12
3rd byte 00H
Response
Response data
The upper limit size for the results data that can be acquired is Execution result Execution result
the results data area size that was allocated in the cyclic Additional code None
communication area. However, it is limited to 248 bytes when Data 0th byte Results data byte No. 12
the selected PLC type is Allen-Bradley SLC5/05, and to 496 1st byte Results data byte No. 13
bytes in all other cases. If a larger size is specified, data is
2nd byte Results data byte No. 14
returned only in the maximum size that can be returned.
3rd byte Results data byte No. 15
Reference (...)
The following conditions must be satisfied in order to use this 16th byte Results data byte No. 28
service.
17th byte Results data byte No. 29
• EtherNet/IP must be enabled when started.
18th byte Results data byte No. 30
• Results data must be allocated in the cyclic communication
area. 19th byte Results data byte No. 31
• Output data with destination [EtherNet/IP] must be set in the
output settings. Execution result
• Measurement with the current settings must be completed
(number of measurement = 1 or more).
• 9 (09Hex): Data value is incorrect. (Offset or size is negative,
or value is too large.)
LJ-X UM_GB 9-117

Changing the execute number using

EtherNet/IP message communication
(Change Execute Condition Number)
Execute number change service (4EH)

control image
Change the execute number to the specified value.
Main unit
PLC
(LJ-X Series)
Synchronous system
variable rewriting service
Response
Reference
The following conditions must be satisfied in order to use this

service.
• EtherNet/IP must be enabled when started.
Example of data
Writing execute number 5
Send-data

Service ID 4EH Execute number change
service
Attribute ID - -
Data 0th byte 05H Value written as the execute
1st byte 00H number
2nd byte 00H

3rd byte 00H
Response data

Additional code None
Execution result
• 9 (09H): Data value is not correct (not within valid range).
• 19 (13 H): Incorrect data size (too small)
9-118 LJ-X UM_GB

Overview of control and data output by PROFINET
Overview of control and data output by PROFINET

This system supports communication with PROFINET.
PROFINET is an open communication standard prescribed Operation flow
by PI (PROFIBUS & PROFINET International). In this
system, the controller’s Ethernet port conforms to Checking the specifications (page 9-121)
Conformance Class A and the communication expansion • Check whether or not the connected PLC is a model
unit conforms to Conformance Class C. that supports PROFINET connections.
The following functions are possible by PROFINET • Check the allocation conditions of the input and output
connection. data.

Cyclic communication Changing the PROFINET settings (page 9-126)
Cyclic communication at update time intervals allows high- • Configure the controller settings for PROFINET
speed control at intervals of several ms to several tens of connection.
ms. In addition, because it is possible to control the Main setting items: Controller IP address, PROFINET
controller by referencing and updating variables and device name, data configuration
devices in the PLC without considering the communication, 
it allows programs to be written easily on the PLC side.
Establishing PROFINET communications
• Control controller: Control the controller by using cyclic
• To check whether or not PROFINET communications have
communication to send the commands for execution.
been established, check [Communication Status] in the
• Results data output: Data can be output by cyclic
PROFINET memory monitor, or check [Communication
communication when the items for output from
Status] from the [Global] - [PROFINET] screen.
PROFINET are set in the output settings (page 6-15).
• If the PROFINET connection is successful, the
• Change execute condition number: The controller can be
controller Ethernet port LINK LED (green) begins
controlled by specifying the execute condition number by
flashing.
cyclic communication.
Reference

• Set a cyclic communication update time of 4 ms or more Executing the necessary processes
(1 ms or more when using the communication expansion Data output (page 9-128)
unit). • The data specified in the output settings is written to the
• In a network where many devices are connected, including results output area.
PROFINET devices, if a large load is constantly or • The "Result ready flag" is used to check the completion
temporarily applied to the network, then delays and packet of data writing.
loss may occur. Be sure to perform sufficient verification • The "Result ack flag" is turned ON to report that reading
prior to operation. was completed.
• PLC-Link, EtherNet/IP, and EtherCAT cannot be used in
conjunction with PROFINET. Command control (page 9-130)
• Communication control commands (page 9-2) can be
executed.
Record data communication 
• Enter the command code and command parameters in
(acyclic communication)
the command input area and turn the "Command
This can be used for communication applications that do request flag" ON to execute the command.
not require punctuality as is needed with cyclic • When the "Command ready flag" is ON, the command
communication. With this communication method, special can be executed.
commands are used to read and write from/to data records • The "Command complete flag" is used to check that
(1024 bytes/record), and it is possible to access areas that command execution was completed.
exceed the maximum size (1408 bytes; 1252 bytes when
using the communication expansion unit) for cyclic Changing the execute condition No. (page 9-132)
communication. • Change the Exec Cond No. to change the execute
condition No.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-119

Prepare PROFINET Connection (when using CB-NPN20E)
Prepare PROFINET Connection (when using CB-

NPN20E)
Installing the PROFINET Unit Connecting to an PROFINET

The optional PROFINET unit CB-NPN20E is used when
Network
communicating over PROFINET.
Connect the PROFINET network cable to the P1 port or the
Remove the protective cover from the expansion unit
P2 port of the RJ connector. If a slave unit is present
connector on the right side of the controller and install the
downstream of this unit, connect a network cable to the
PROFINET unit as shown below.
unused side.
Point The controller must be turned off before connecting
or disconnecting the CB-NPN20E.
P1 port
P2 port

Wiring example (P1 port / P2 port)

CB-NPN20E PROFINET Unit
Specifications
Item
Compliant standard IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX)
Communication speed 100 Mbps (100BASE-TX) No Signal name Function
Communication cycle 1 ms min. 1 TX+ Transmit data (+)
Connection cable Category 5e or greater shielded twisted 2 TX- Transmit data (-)
pair (STP) cable
3 RX+ Receive data (+)
Node interval 100 m
4 - Connect 75 Ω terminating resistance
Communication port RJ45 connector × 2
Communication size 1252 bytes
6 RX- Receive data (-)
Supported functions Data I/O communication (cyclic
communication)
Record data communication (non-cyclic 8 - Connect 75 Ω terminating resistance
communication)
Applicable protocol LLDP, DCP, MRP, SNMP
Conformance test Complying with Conformance Class C
version V2.34
9-120 LJ-X UM_GB

PROFINET communication specifications
PROFINET communication specifications
The PROFINET communications of this system support 2 types of communication: cyclic communication and record data
communication (acyclic communication).
Cyclic communication
This function performs cyclic communication at a regular update time interval, and is suitable for real-time control.
• The update time and communication size are specified by connection settings on the PLC side. (Maximum
communication size is 1408 bytes; 1252 bytes when using the communication expansion unit.)
Record data communication (acyclic communication)

This communication method uses special commands to access "records" that divide byte information into 1024-byte units.
• There are two types of commands: Read Record and Write Record. When a command is executed, a response is
returned.
• This can be used for communications applications where real-time performance is not required.
• It can access areas larger than the maximum size (1408 bytes; 1252 bytes when using the communication expansion
unit) in cyclic communication.
• An index is allocated to each record, and data access is performed by specifying the index and size.
The areas of byte information that can be accessed are as shown below.
Controller receive-data: Read Record and Write Record are possible.

Addresses that can be accessed
Index
LJ-X port Expansion unit
1 0012 to 1035 0012 to 1011
2 1036 to 2059 1012 to 2011
3 (None) 2012 to 2059
Controller send-data: Read Record only
Addresses that can be accessed
Index
LJ-X port Expansion unit
10 0012 to 1035 0012 to 1011
11 1036 to 2059 1012 to 2011
12 2060 to 3083 2012 to 2059
13 3084 to 4107 3012 to 4011
14 (None) 4012 to 4107
• The Read Record and Write Record commands are issued from the PLC using blocks "RDREC" (SFB 52) and "WRREC"
(SFB 53).
Reference
When the Write Record command is issued and cyclic communications are used to write to the Parameter module, a memory area conflict
may occur. When using the Write Record command, design so that a conflict between the cyclic communications and memory area does
not occur.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-121

Cyclic communication data allocation conditions (3D mode)
Example of controller send-data settings

Example when the command response output area is set to 24 bytes
Setting  Address 7bit 6bit 5bit 4bit 3bit 2bit 1bit 0bit
status (byte)
Bit 0000 Reserved Reserved Reserved Result OR Result Ready Cmd Ready Cmd Error Cmd Complete
Area 0001 Reserved RUN Reserved ERROR BUSY Reserved TRG_act READY
0003 OUTPUT_ OUTPUT_IMG_ Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
IMG_STATUS BUSY
Tool 0004 Tool Judge Value 7 Tool Judge Value 6 Tool Judge Value 5 Tool Judge Value 4 Tool Judge Value 3 Tool Judge Value 2 Tool Judge Value 1 Tool Judge Value 0
Judgment 0005 Tool Judge Value 15 Tool Judge Value 14 Tool Judge Value 13 Tool Judge Value 12 Tool Judge Value 11 Tool Judge Value 10 Tool Judge Value 9 Tool Judge Value 8
Area
0006 Tool Judge Value 23 Tool Judge Value 22 Tool Judge Value 21 Tool Judge Value 20 Tool Judge Value 19 Tool Judge Value 18 Tool Judge Value 17 Tool Judge Value 16
Error 0012 Error code
Code 0013
Area
Reserved 0014 Reserved
area 0015
Measure 0016 Total count
ment  0017
count 
0018
area
0019
Command  0020 Command Result
output  0021
area
0022
0023
0024 Command Data 1

0025
0026
0027
0028 Command Data 2
0029
0030
0031
…
0044 Command Data 6

0045
0046
0047
Results 0048 Result Data 1
output  0049
area
0050
0051
0052 Result Data 2
0053
0054
0055
…
9-122 LJ-X UM_GB

Names and Operations of Input Signals

settings.
to OFF.
screen.
For details on typical system errors, see "Error Message" (page 9-134).
buffer.
··· ···
··· ···
··· ···
LJ-X UM_GB 9-123

Example of controller receive-data settings
status (byte)
Bit 0000 Reserved Reserved Reserved Error reset request Result ack Reserved Reserved Command Request
Area 0001 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved TRG
Reserved 0004 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
area 0005 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Execution  0012 ExecCondNo
condition  0013
No.
area 0015
Command  0016 Command Number
input  0017
area
0018
0019
0020 Cmd Parameter1
0021
0022
0023
0024 Cmd Parameter2
0025
0026
0027
0028 Cmd Parameter3
0029
0030
0031
…
Reference
ExecCondNo is acquired to this controller only when it changes, so rewriting the execute condition using commands can be done as well.
9-124 LJ-X UM_GB

Names and Operations of Output Signals



··· ···
LJ-X UM_GB 9-125

Changing the PROFINET settings
Changing the PROFINET settings
PROFINET Name
Displaying the PROFINET settings
screen Specifies a unique name of this controller so that the
connecting PLC can identify the controller in PROFINET
Various settings can be changed on the [PROFINET] screen. network. Unless a proper name is specified, the PLC
cannot find the controller and cannot ensure PROFINET
communication. A name to be specified here must be
identical to that given to this controller when the PLC
configures its PROFINET specifications.
Data Configurations
Left-click [Set] to display an overview of data allocations in
Shows the overview of the data allocations in the
PROFINET cyclic data communication. For a command
for “Command Response Output Area”. (Default: 24 byte)
Pressing “View List” shows the detailed allocation statuses
of the receive-data and send-data.
Reference
• Controller Ethernet settings such as the IP address and subnet

mask are changed in the [Network] screen (page 8-2).
• If the PROFINET settings were changed, it is necessary to
restart the controller in order to apply the settings.

[PROFINET] or [PROFINET Unit].
The [PROFINET] or [PROFINET Unit] screen appears.
2
To enable/disable PROFINET communication,

Controller receive-data
select/clear the [Enable PROFINET] or [Enable
PROFINET unit] check box. the controller from the PLC.
3 Specify [PROFINET Name]. Controller send-data
4 Change the settings as required. Displays an overview of the allocations for data sent from
the controller to the PLC. The range for the command
5 Click [OK]. response output area in the byte allocation area can be
specified.
Reference
PLC-Link, EtherNet/IP, and EtherCAT cannot be used in conjunction

Decimal Point
with PROFINET.
Select the data notation of result data output and decimal-
related commands.
• Fixed-point (default): The original data is multiplied by
1000, and handled as a signed 32-bit integer data.
• Floating-point: The data is handled as 32-bit single-
Reference

9-126 LJ-X UM_GB

Changing the PROFINET settings
Communication expansion unit network Issue Alarm Manually

settings Checking “Issue Alarm Manually” box will issue an alarm
under PROFINET protocol through an alarm CR function.
• If incorrect settings are used, the controller and
Point Click the wheel button of the mouse to actually issue the
other network equipment may not work properly.
Consult your system administrator or network alarm.
administrator about setting values.
• For communication through the controller's
Create GSDML File
Ethernet port, set the IP address, subnet mask,
and default gateway on the [Ethernet] screen. Outputs a GSDML file and icon that include information
For details, refer to "Ethernet (non-procedural)" related to the controller PROFINET functions. The naming
(page 6-7). rules for these files are as shown below.
When [Disable] or [Enable] is selected for [Enable/ • Controller:
Reference
Disable], the setting details of the controller's - GSDML-V2.33-Keyence-LJ-X8000-20190706.xml
Ethernet port are displayed. - GSDML-01FD-0BBA-LJ-X8000.bmp
• IP address: • Communication expansion unit (CB-NPN20E):
Enter the IP address (Default value: 192.168.10.20). - GSDML-V2.34-Keyence-LJ-X8K-CB-NPN20E-
• Subnet mask: 20200305.xml
Enter a subnet mask (Default value: 255.255. 255.0). - GSDML-01FD-LJ-X8K-CB-NPN20E.bmp
• Default gateway: Reference
Enter a default gateway IP address (Default value: • The file output path is SD2:/lj-x3d/GSDML on the controller and
0.0.0.0). SD2:/lj-x3d/GSDML_EX on the communication expansion unit.
• Because the GSDML file does not contain the information that
The set value is common with the P1 port and P2
Point was set or changed in the controller global settings, the created
port of the communication expansion unit.
GSDML file will always contain the same information.
Cyclic Data Size

The maximum data size for the cyclic communication
available with the controller is displayed (1408 bytes or
1252 bytes when using a communication expansion unit).
The actual data size to be sent or received will
Point
depend on the setting on the PLC.
Endian
Endian is a method of arranging multi-byte data in the PLC
data memory. Select a correct endian according to the type
of PLC (default: big endian).
The endians for typical PLC are as shown below.
• Siemens: Big endian
• Omron: Little endian
Enable Handshake
The Handshake keeps this controller from loading its
data. When “Enable Handshake” box is checked, the
controller turns on “Result ready flag” after the completion
of a measurement result output.Upon reception of the
ready flag, the PLC reads the output data and turns on
“Result ack flag”. And then, the controller turns off its ready
flag after recognizing the ack flag of the PLC. The PLC
turns off “Result ack flag” to request the controller to load
next output data.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-127

Output of measurement data using PROFINET cyclic communications (Data Output)
Output of measurement data using PROFINET

cyclic communications (Data Output)
Change the output settings for data output using PROFINET.
Data output flow (example of connection with PLC PROFINET unit)

The controller outputs data via PROFINET in the following manner.
Reference
• Data output via PROFINET is performed only in run mode. Data is not output in setup mode.
• With PROFINET, images and other binary data cannot be output.
• If data output via PROFINET was not executed, no data is output. In this case, the "Result ready flag" does not change.
Controller (LJ-X series) PLC
The image processing is completed in the

controller, the result data is stored.
②
①
Confirm that Result ack flag is turned off.
Turn off Result ack flag.
③
③
The data is written to the data memory
Write data to Result Data and Result OR flag, corresponding to Result Data and Result OR flag,
Tool Judge Value. Tool Judge Value.
④
④
When the data writing is completed, turn on
Check the completion of data writing by confirming that
Result ready flag.
Result ready flag changes to on, and then reference the data.
⑤ ⑤
Check completion of the data reading by Turn on Result ack flag.
detecting that Result ack flag is turned on.
⑥ ⑥
Turn off Result ready flag. The change of Result ready flag to off is detected.
①
• When handshake is OFF, output data is overwritten and updated without checking whether the Result ack flag is OFF. To take the rise of
Result ready flag as a data reference synchronization signal, turn the Result ack flag ON at each output, which will turn the Result ready
flag OFF.
9-128 LJ-X UM_GB

Output of measurement data using PROFINET cyclic communications (Data Output)
Timing Chart
Image processing Image

processing
②
Result ack flag The PLC writes.
Result ready flag The controller writes.

A
Result OR flag The controller writes.
ResultData The controller writes.
Tool Judge Value The controller writes.
① ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ①
A: 0 ms or more (depends on the link scan speed)
Reference
The "Result OR flag" is updated in coordination with results output with PROFINET as the output destination. When the "Result OR flag" is
used, it is necessary to configure the output setting so that 1 or more data item is output via PROFINET.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-129

Controlling the controller with PROFINET cyclic communication (Command Control)
Controlling the controller with PROFINET cyclic

communication (Command Control)
Flow of command process using PROFINET (Example of connection with PLC

PROFINET unit)
The controller performs command control via PROFINET in the following manner.
①
Write the command No. and command
parameters of a desired command to the data
memory corresponding to Command Number
and those corresponding to Command Parameter
respectively.
③ ②
When the controller detects that Command Confirms that Command ready flag is turned on
request flag is turned on, it reads the command and turns on Command request flag.
from Command Number and the command
parameters from the addresses corresponding to
Confirm the start of command execution by
Command Parameter, and then it turns off
detecting that Command ready flag has turned off.
Command ready flag.
④
When the command execution is completed,
the response data is written to Command Data The response data is written to the data memory
and the error status is set in Command error flag. corresponding to Command Data.
⑤
⑤ Confirm completion of the command execution by
detecting that Command complete flag has
Command complete flag turns on. turned on. Reference the response data and
⑦ command execution result.
When the controller confirms that Command

⑥
request flag is turned off, it turns off Command Turn off Command request flag.
complete flag and Command error flag and turns
on Command ready flag.
Reference
When an error occurs, the command execution results are written to Command Result. (0: Success, <Error code>: Failure). The error codes
9-130 LJ-X UM_GB

Controlling the controller with PROFINET cyclic communication (Command Control)
Timing Chart
Command Execute Conditions Command

execution
Command request flag A A The PLC writes.
Command ready flag A The controller writes.
Command complete flag A The controller writes.
Command error flag The controller writes.
Command Number The PLC writes.
Command Parameter The PLC writes.
Command Data The controller writes.
①②③ ④⑤ ⑥⑦
LJ-X UM_GB 9-131

Changing the execute condition No. using PROFINET cyclic communication (Execute Condition No. Change)
Changing the execute condition No. using PROFINET

cyclic communication (Execute Condition No. Change)
The execute condition No. can be changed at any time.
Flow of execute condition No. change using PROFINET (Example of connection with
PLC PROFINET unit)
The controller changes the execute condition No. value using PROFINET in the following manner.
Command
Reference the value of the data memory execution request Write data to the data memory corresponding to
corresponding to ExecCondNo, and change the
ExecCondNo.
execute condition No. accordingly
9-132 LJ-X UM_GB

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Checking whether or not the PROFINET The Ethernet settings (IP address, etc.) were
connection is correct unintentionally changed.
Select the controller [Global] - [Communications & I/O] - With PROFINET, the IP address that is set for the controller
[PROFINET], then check [Cyclic Communication Status:] at on the PLC side is applied by overwriting the Ethernet
the bottom of the [PROFINET] screen. If [Not Connected] is settings (IP address, etc.) on the controller side when
displayed here, communication has failed. Check the cable communication starts. Set the controller Ethernet settings
connection, IP address, communication settings on the on the PLC side.
PLC side, and other items again.
A different operation from the module address
"Result OR flag" is not output. allocated to the PLC occurs.
The “Result OR flag” is updated in coordination with results If a bit module is deleted, an operation that is different from the
output with EtherCAT as the output destination. When the address set at the PLC side may occur.
“Result OR flag” is used, it is necessary that at least 1 data Do not delete the bit modules.
item is output via EtherCAT.
"Result ready flag" remains ON and does not

change.
There is the possibility that "Result ack flag" control is not
being performed correctly. The "Result ready flag" turns OFF
when the "Result ack flag" rise is recognized in sending
(controller receiving). This is the same regardless of whether
handshake is ON or OFF.
Data cannot be acquired correctly when reading
data based on the change in the rise of STO output
from an external terminal.
STO is the data strobe signal for terminal output. Therefore,
it cannot be used as the strobe signal for any other data
output.
Refer to the "Result ready flag" for the timing as to when to
read data by PROFINET.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-133

Troubleshooting
Error Message
Message Cause Corrective Action Error

cause No.
PROFINET communication Communication was interrupted. (When • Check that the Ethernet cable is connected
failed. recovery is possible, recovery occurs correctly.
automatically.) • Check whether both the controller and the
communications settings were updated.
13701
set. Set this on the "ERROR Output Settings"
(page 8-17).
PROFINET output failed due The output buffer for output via Change the update time setting on the PLC side so
to a full buffer. PROFINET is full. the data is output via PROFINET at a faster rate
than it builds up. Or, extend the time between 13702
triggers. Note: Results data are not written when
the buffer is full.
The delay of the handshake When the PROFINET handshake is ON, Change the update time setting on the PLC side so
control causes skipping of the delayed handshake caused results the data is output via PROFINET at a faster rate
PROFINET communication output via PROFINET to be skipped. than the output data from the tool builds up. Or, 13703
result output. extend the time between triggers. Note: Results
data are not written when the buffer is full.
The PROFINET unit cannot be The PROFINET unit is not recognized, • Make sure the PROFINET unit is installed
recognized. and the controller cannot use PROFINET correctly.
communication. • Make sure the PROFINET unit is not damaged. 13704
• Do not connect/disconnect the PROFINET unit
9-134 LJ-X UM_GB

Overview of Control/Data Output Using EtherCAT
Overview of Control/Data Output Using EtherCAT

EtherCAT is the open real-time Ethernet network originally
developed by Beckhoff. This system operates as an Check the specifications (page 9-137)
EtherCAT slave, and the functions shown below can be • Check whether the PLC to be connected is a model that
realized by connecting the optional EtherCAT unit CB- supports EtherCAT connection.
NEC20E. • Check the input/output data assignments.

Process data object communication 
Change the EtherCAT settings (page 9-143)
(cyclic communication)
• Configure the settings to use EtherCAT to connect the controller.
Communication at update time intervals allows for high- Major setting items: input/output data assignments
speed control at intervals of several ms to several tens of
ms. In addition, because it is possible to control the

controller by referencing and updating variables and Establish the EtherCAT communication
devices in the PLC without considering the communication, • You can confirm whether EtherCAT communication has been
it allows programs to be written easily on the PLC side. established or not by checking [Communication Status] on the
• Control controller: Control the controller by using cyclic [EtherCAT Monitor & Diagnostics] screen or [Communication
communication to send the commands for execution. Status] on the [EtherCAT Unit] screen in the global settings.
• Results data output: Data can be output by cyclic 
communication when the items for output from EtherCAT
Execute necessary processing.
are set in the output settings (page 6-16).
Data output (page 9-145)
• Change execute condition number: The controller can be
• The data specified in the output settings is written to the
controlled by specifying the execute condition number by
results output area.
cyclic communication.
• The “Result ready flag” is used to check the completion
• Set a cyclic communication update time of 500 μs of data writing.
Point
or more. • The “Result ack flag” is turned ON to report that reading
• Even when a cyclic communication update time was completed.
of 500 μs or more is set, due to the controller
measurement settings, dialog box operations, Command control (page 9-147)
commands, combined use with FTP, remote • Communication control commands (page 9-2) can be
desktop, or other communications, the controller
executed.
may temporarily or continuously be subject to the
• Enter the command code and command parameters in
maximum load, causing delays in processing or
the command input area and turn the “Command
temporary interruption of communications due to
timeout. In such cases, it is necessary to review request flag” ON to execute the command.
the cyclic communication settings. Be sure to • When the “Command ready flag” is ON, the command
verify that there are no problems with operating can be executed.
performance, including the issues above, prior to • The “Command complete flag” is used to check that
operation. command execution was completed.
• In a network where many devices are connected,
including EtherCAT devices, if a large load is Changing the execute condition No. (page 9-149)
constantly or temporarily applied to the network, • Change the Exec Cond No. to change the execute
delays and packet loss may occur. Perform condition No.
sufficient verification prior to operation.
• PLC-Link, EtherNet/IP, and PROFINET cannot be
used in conjunction with EtherCAT.
Mailbox communication 
(non-cyclic communication)
This method can be used for communication which does
not require regularity like the cyclic communication. This
communication method uses dedicated commands to read/
write data records and can access addresses exceeding
the maximum size allowed to cyclic communication (536
bytes for input and 532 bytes for output).
Operation Flow
LJ-X UM_GB 9-135

Prepare EtherCAT Connection
Prepare EtherCAT Connection
Installing the EtherCAT Unit Connecting to an EtherCAT

The optional EtherCAT unit CB-NEC20E is used when
Network
communicating over EtherCAT. Connect the master-side network cable to the IN port of the
Remove the protective cover from the expansion unit RJ connector. If a slave unit is present downstream of this
connector on the right side of the controller and install the unit, connect a network cable to the OUT port of the RJ
EtherCAT unit as shown below. connector.
Point • The controller must be turned off before

connecting or disconnecting the CB-NEC20E.
• Restart the controller and master station after
changing the EtherCAT settings.
Connect the master-side

network cable.
(IN port)
Connect the slave-side

network cable.
(OUT port)

Wiring example (IN port/OUT port)

CB-NEC20E EtherCAT Unit

Specifications
Standard specifications No Signal name Function

1 TX+ Transmit data (+)
Item 2 TX- Transmit data (-)
Compliant standard IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX) 3 RX+ Receive data (+)
Communication speed 100 Mbps (100BASE-TX) 4 - Connect 75 Ω terminating resistance
Communication cycle 500 μs min. 5 - Connect 75 Ω terminating resistance
Connection cable Category 5e or greater shielded twisted 6 RX- Receive data (-)
pair (STP) cable
Node interval 100 m
Communication port RJ45 connector × 2
Communication size 536 bytes (input), 532 bytes (output)
Supported functions Process data object communication
(cyclic communication)
Mailbox communication (non-cyclic
communication)
Supports CoE
Explicit Device Identification
Conformance test Complying with Version.2.2.1.0.
version
9-136 LJ-X UM_GB

EtherCAT Communication Specifications
Standard controller specifications

This system supports two types of EtherCAT communication: "process data object communication (cyclic communication)"
and "mailbox communication (non-cyclic communication)."
Process Data Object Communication (Cyclic Communication)

This is a function that performs periodic communication at specified update time intervals and is suitable for real-time
control.
• The update time and communication size depend on the connection settings on the PLC (the maximum size for cyclic
communication is 536 bytes for input and 532 bytes for output).
Mailbox Communication (non-cyclic communication)

This is a communication method in which dedicated commands are used to access "objects" in which byte information is
divided into units of 1000 bytes.
• Commands such as reading (SDO Upload) and writing (SDO Download) are available. When these commands are
executed, a response to the command is returned.
• This method can be used for communication which does not require real time processing.
• It is possible to access to the addresses exceeding the maximum size allowed to the cyclic communication (input: 536
bytes, output: 532 bytes).
• Each record is assigned with an index. Data is accessed based on the specified index and size.
The accessible ranges for each byte information are as follows:
Output data (received by the controller) - Read/write

Index Accessible address
201AH 0020 to 1019
201BH 1020 to 2019
201CH 2020 to 2055
Input data (sent from the controller) - Read only

Index Accessible address
200BH 0024 to 1023
200CH 1024 to 2023
200DH 2024 to 3023
200EH 3024 to 4023
200FH 4024 to 4103
Reference If the SDO Download command is issued while the Parameter module is being written in the cyclic communication, memory
area conflict may occur. Design the use of the SDO Download command in such a way as to avoid the memory area conflict
with the cyclic communication.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-137

EtherCAT Connection Supporting Models

For PLC setup methods, refer to the instruction manual included with each PLC.
Beckhoff PLC
PLC model EtherCAT Version of firmware Software used Version of software used
Communication unit
C6920-0050 (TwinCAT) - (Built in the unit) Windows7 Ultimate TwinCAT3 v3.1.4020 (Build4020)
Service Pack1
OMRON PLC
PLC model EtherCAT Version of firmware Software used Version of software used
Communication unit
NJ101-9000 - (Built in the unit) 1.1.521 Sysmac Studio Ver.1.15
NJ301-1100 - (Built in the unit) 1.1.521 Sysmac Studio Ver.1.15
Process Data Object Map

The data that can be assigned as process data objects are shown below.
Use the configuration software to select the indexes to assign as process data objects.
Index Initial Size Name Assignable Data Index

(Hex) Assignment (Bytes) (Hex)
1600H  5 ControlBit 2011: 01 to 28 This is without exception assigned as PDO.
1601H  7 ReservedBit 2012: 01 to 38 This is without exception assigned as PDO.
1602H  2 ExecCondNo 2013 This is without exception assigned as PDO.
1603H  4 Command Number 2014 This is without exception assigned as PDO.
1604H 32 Parameter 32Byte 2015: 01 to 08 Objects from 1604H to 1608H cannot be
1605H 64 Parameter 64Byte 2016: 01 to 10 assigned at the same time. Select and assign
one object at a time.
1606H  128 Parameter 128Byte 2017: 01 to 20
1607H 256 Parameter 256Byte 2018: 01 to 40

1608H 512 Parameter 512Byte 2018: 01 to 80
x1A00H  4 StatusBit 2001: 01 to 20 This is without exception assigned as PDO.
x1A01H  8 Tool Judge Value 2002: 01 to 40 This is without exception assigned as PDO.
x1A02H  2 Error Code 2003 This is without exception assigned as PDO.
x1A03H  4 Total count 2004 This is without exception assigned as PDO.
x1A04H  4 Total count 2005 This is without exception assigned as PDO.
x1A05H 32 Result Data 32Byte 2006: 01 to 08 Objects from 1A05H to 1A09H cannot be
x1A06H 64 Result Data 64Byte 2007: 01 to 10 assigned at the same time. Select and assign
one object at a time.
x1A07H  128 Result Data 128Byte 2008: 01 to 20
x1A08H 256 Result Data 256Byte 2009: 01 to 40
x1A09H 512 Result Data 512Byte 200A: 01 to 80
9-138 LJ-X UM_GB

Cyclic communication data allocation state (3D mode)
Examples of controller send-data settings

Examples with the command response output area set to 24 bytes
status (byte)
Bit 0000 Reserved Reserved Reserved Result OR Result Ready Cmd Ready Cmd Error Cmd Complete
Area 0001 Reserved RUN Reserved ERROR BUSY Reserved TRG_act READY
0003 OUTPUT_ OUTPUT_IMG_ Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
IMG_STATUS BUSY
Tool 0004 Tool Judge Value 7 Tool Judge Value 6 Tool Judge Value 5 Tool Judge Value 4 Tool Judge Value 3 Tool Judge Value 2 Tool Judge Value 1 Tool Judge Value 0
Judgment 0005 Tool Judge Value 15 Tool Judge Value 14 Tool Judge Value 13 Tool Judge Value 12 Tool Judge Value 11 Tool Judge Value 10 Tool Judge Value 9 Tool Judge Value 8
Area
Error 0012 Error code
Code 0013
Area
Area 0015
Measure 0016 Total count
ment  0017
count 
0018
area
0019
Command  0020 Command Result
output  0021
area
0022
0023
0024 Command Data 1
0025
0026
0027
0028 Command Data 2
0029
0030
0031
…
0044 Command Data 6

0045
0046
0047
Result 0048 Result Data 1
Output 0049
Area
0050
0051
0052 Result Data 2
0053
0054
0055
…
LJ-X UM_GB 9-139

Name and Operation of Input Signals

settings.
to OFF.
screen.
For details on typical system errors, see "Error Messages" (page 9-151).
buffer.
··· ···
··· ···
··· ···
9-140 LJ-X UM_GB

Examples of controller receive-data settings

Example when connecting one LJ-X Series to a Siemens S7-300 Series (Q***/PQB***/PIW***/PQD***/ in the table are
allocated to the Q address of the Siemens S7-300 Series)
status (byte)
Bit 0000 Reserved Reserved Reserved Error reset request Result ack Reserved Reserved Command Request
Area 0001 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved TRG
Reserved 0004 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Area 0005 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Execute 0012 ExecCondNo
Condition 0013
No.
Area 0015
Comm 0016 Command Number
and 0017
Input
0018
Area
0019
0020 Cmd Parameter1
0021
0022
0023
0024 Cmd Parameter2
0025
0026
0027
0028 Cmd Parameter3
0029
0030
0031
…
Reference
ExecCondNo is only loaded when there are changes, so can also be used when changing execution conditions via commands.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-141

Name and Operation of Output Signals



··· ···
9-142 LJ-X UM_GB

Changing the EtherCAT Settings
Changing the EtherCAT Settings
Opening the EtherCAT Setting EtherCAT setting items that can

Screen be set with this system
On the [Global] - [Communications & I/O] - [EtherCAT Unit]
screen, various settings can be changed for input and Enable EtherCAT
output of various data by EtherCAT using the EtherCAT unit Select whether to use EtherCAT. Check this box to enable
(CB-NEC20E: option) connected to the controller. it.
Communication data settings

Data Configurations
Click [Set] to display an overview of data allocations in the
EtherCAT cyclic data communication. For a command
When such a command is used, ensure a certain larger
size for [Command Response Output Area] (default: 24
bytes). Clicking [View List] shows the detailed allocation
statuses of the receive-data and send-data.
PLC-Link, EtherNet/IP, and PROFINET cannot be
Reference
used in conjunction with EtherCAT.

[EtherCAT].
The [EtherCAT] screen appears.
2 Click [Enable EtherCAT] to check the box.
See "EtherCAT setting items that can be set with this
system" (page 9-143) for details of the settings for each
item. • Controller receive-data: Displays an overview of the
allocations for data received by the controller from the PLC.
4 Click [OK].
• Controller send-data: Displays an overview of the
allocations for data sent from the controller to the PLC.
The range for the command response output area in the
byte allocation area can be specified.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-143

Changing the EtherCAT Settings
Decimal Point
Select the data notation of result data output and data that
handles decimal points with command control.
• Fixed-point (initial configuration value): The original
data is multiplied by 1000 and handled as signed 32-bit
integer data.
• Floating-point: The data is handled as 32-bit single-
Reference For commands that handle integers, command

parameters are always rounded to 1 decimal place
when they are read, regardless of the setting, and
command data output is written using integers.
Other settings
Enable Handshake
The Handshake keeps this controller from loading its
data. If enabled, the controller turns on the “Result ready
flag” after the completion of a measurement result output.
Upon reception of the ready flag, the PLC reads the output
data and turns on the “Result ack flag”. The controller
detects this and turns off the “Result ready flag”. The PLC
turns off the “Result ack flag” to request the controller to
load the next output data.
Create ESI File

Outputs an ESI file that includes information related to the
controller’s EtherCAT function. The naming rules for the file
are as follows.
• File output path: SD2:/lj-x3d/ESI

• ESI file name: Keyence LJ-X8k_CB-NEC20E.xml
Reference Because the ESI file does not contain the

information that was set or changed in the controller
global settings, the created ESI file will always
contain the same information.
9-144 LJ-X UM_GB

Output of measurement data using EtherCAT cyclic communications (Data Output)
Output of measurement data using EtherCAT cyclic

communications (Data Output)
Change the output settings for data output using EtherCAT.
Reference EtherCAT cannot be used when the PLC-Link, EtherNet/IP, or PROFINET is enabled.
Data output flow (example of connection with PLC EtherCAT unit)

The controller outputs data via EtherCAT in the following manner.
Reference • Data output via EtherCAT is performed only in run mode. Data is not output in setup mode.
• With EtherCAT, images and other binary data cannot be output.
• If data output via EtherCAT was not executed, no data is output. In this case, the "Result ready flag" does not change.
The image processing is completed in the

controller, the result data is stored.
②
①
Confirm that Result ack flag is turned off.
③
③
The data is written to the data memory
Write data to Result Data and Result OR flag, corresponding to Result Data and Result OR flag,
Tool Judge Value. Tool Judge Value.
④
④
When the data writing is completed, turn on
Check the completion of data writing by confirming that
Result ready flag.
Result ready flag changes to on, and then reference the data.
⑤ ⑤
Check completion of the data reading by Turn on Result ack flag.
detecting that Result ack flag is turned on.
⑥ ⑥
Turn off Result ready flag. The change of Result ready flag to off is detected.
①
• If handshake is OFF, the controller overwrites the corresponding data memory when the data output unit is processed regardless of the
status of the Result ack flag, and the Result ready flag remains ON. If you need to confirm the completion of writing based on the change
of the Result ready flag from OFF to ON, set the Result ready flag to OFF by setting the Result ack flag to ON.
LJ-X UM_GB 9-145

Output of measurement data using EtherCAT cyclic communications (Data Output)
Timing Chart
Image processing Image

processing
②
Result ack flag The PLC writes.
Result ready flag The controller writes.

A
Result OR flag The controller writes.
ResultData The controller writes.
Tool Judge Value The controller writes.
① ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ①
Reference The "Result OR flag" is updated in coordination with results output with EtherNet/IP as the output destination. When the
"Result OR flag" is used, it is necessary to configure the output setting so that 1 or more data item is output via EtherNet/IP.
9-146 LJ-X UM_GB

Controlling the controller with EtherCAT cyclic communication (Command Control)
Controlling the controller with EtherCAT cyclic

communication (Command Control)
Flow of command process using EtherCAT (Example of connection with PLC

EtherCAT unit)
The controller performs command control via EtherCAT in the following manner.
①
Write the command No. and command
parameters of a desired command to the data
memory corresponding to Command Number
and those corresponding to Command Parameter
respectively.
③ ②
When the controller detects that Command Confirms that Command ready flag is turned on
request flag is turned on, it reads the command and turns on Command request flag.
from Command Number and the command
parameters from the addresses corresponding to
Confirm the start of command execution by
Command Parameter, and then it turns off
detecting that Command ready flag has turned off.
Command ready flag.
④
When the command execution is completed,
the response data is written to Command Data The response data is written to the data memory
and the error status is set in Command error flag. corresponding to Command Data.
⑤
⑤ Confirm completion of the command execution by
detecting that Command complete flag has
Command complete flag turns on. turned on. Reference the response data and
⑦ command execution result.
When the controller confirms that Command

⑥
request flag is turned off, it turns off Command Turn off Command request flag.
complete flag and Command error flag and turns
on Command ready flag.
Reference
When an error occurs, the command execution results are written to Command Result. (0: Success, <Error code>: Failure). The error codes
LJ-X UM_GB 9-147

Controlling the controller with EtherCAT cyclic communication (Command Control)
Timing Chart
Command Execute Conditions Command

execution
Command request flag A A The PLC writes.
Command ready flag A The controller writes.
Command complete flag A The controller writes.
Command error flag The controller writes.
Command Number The PLC writes.
Command Parameter The PLC writes.
Command Data The controller writes.
①②③ ④⑤ ⑥⑦

9-148 LJ-X UM_GB

Changing the execute condition No. using EtherCAT cyclic communication (Execute Condition No. Change)
Changing the execute condition No. using EtherCAT

cyclic communication (Execute Condition No. Change)
The execute condition No. can be changed at any time.
Flow of execute condition No. change using EtherCAT (Example of connection with
PLC EtherCAT unit)
The controller changes the execute condition No. value using EtherCAT in the following manner.
Command
Reference the value of the data memory execution request Write data to the data memory corresponding to
corresponding to ExecCondNo, and change the
ExecCondNo.
execute condition No. accordingly
LJ-X UM_GB 9-149

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Problems and Countermeasures
I want to check whether the EtherCAT

connection has been established
successfully.
On the controller, check [Utilities] - [EtherCAT Monitor &
Diagnostics]. When [Disconnected] is shown here, the
communication has failed. Check the cable connection, IP
address, communication settings on the PLC side, and
other items again.
The Result OR flag is not output.

The “Result OR flag” is updated in coordination with results
output with EtherCAT as the output destination. When the
“Result OR flag” is used, it is necessary that at least 1 data
item is output via EtherCAT.
The Result ready flag remains ON and

does not change.
The Result ack flag may not be controlled properly. The
Result ready flag turns off when the rise of the Result ack
flag is recognized during sending (received by the
controller). This is true whether the handshake is ON or

OFF.
I tried to read data when the STO output

from the terminal block changes to rise,
but could not obtain the data properly.
STO is the data strobe signal for terminal output. Therefore,
it cannot be used as the strobe signal for any other data
output.
For the data read timing through EtherCAT, reference the
Result ready flag.
9-150 LJ-X UM_GB

Troubleshooting
Error Messages
Message Cause Countermeasure Error
factor No.
EtherCAT communication Cyclic communication was interrupted. • Check that the Ethernet cable is connected
failed. (When recovery is possible, recovery correctly.
occurs automatically.) • Check whether both the controller and the
communication settings were updated.
13801
set. Set this on the [ERROR Output Settings]
screen (page 5-31).
EtherCAT output failed due to The buffer for output via EtherCAT is full. Change the update time on the PLC so the data
a full buffer. from the tool is output via EtherCAT at a faster rate
than it builds up. Or, extend the time between 13802
triggers. Note: Result data is not written when the
output buffer is full.
The delay of the handshake With the EtherCAT handshake ON, a Change the RPI setting so the data from the tool is
control causes skipping of the delayed handshake caused results output via EtherCAT at a faster rate than it builds
EtherCAT communication output via EtherCAT to be skipped. up. Or, extend the time between triggers. Note: 13803
result output. Output does not occur when the output buffer is
full.
The EtherCAT unit cannot be The EtherCAT unit is not recognized, and • Make sure the EtherCAT unit is installed
recognized. the controller cannot use EtherCAT correctly.
communication. • Make sure the EtherCAT unit is not damaged. 13804
• Do not connect/disconnect the EtherCAT unit
LJ-X UM_GB 9-151

Troubleshooting
9-152 LJ-X UM_GB

10
Chapter
Specifications ............................................................. 10-2

Controller specifications ......................................... 10-2
Specifications Communication expansion unit specifications ........ 10-4
Head Specifications ................................................ 10-5
Cable Specifications ............................................. 10-18
Monitor Specifications .......................................... 10-18
Diagram of External Dimensions ............................ 10-19
Head ..................................................................... 10-19
Controller(LJ-X8000,LJ-X8000E) ......................... 10-29
Head cable ........................................................... 10-31
Head extension cable ........................................... 10-31
Head extension cable (L-shape connector 
cable) .................................................................... 10-31
Dedicated Mouse(OP-87506) ............................... 10-32
Monitor (CA-MP120)/Monitor Stand 
(OP-87262) ........................................................... 10-33
Power supply (CA-U4) .......................................... 10-34
Characteristics ......................................................... 10-35
Spot diameter ....................................................... 10-35
Mutual interference region .................................... 10-41
Reference plane for the head ............................... 10-49
Options ..................................................................... 10-56
Cables .................................................................. 10-56
Other .................................................................... 10-56
Specifications
LJ-X UM_GB 10-1

Specifications
Specifications
Controller specifications
LJ-X8000/LJ-X8000E
LJ-X8000/LJ-X8000E *6
Model
2D mode 3D mode
Head input Up to 2 heads
Compatible with LJ-X8000 series heads and LJ-V7000 series heads
* When using 2 units, heads A and B are the same model.
Sampling period (trigger interval) Fastest 1 kHz (1 ms) *1 When the LJ-X 8000 series is connected: max
speed 16 kHz (63 μs) *2
When the LJ-V 7000 series is connected: max
speed 64 kHz (16 μs) *3
(Output luminance models that end with the
letter “B” are fastest 8 kHz (125 μs)) *4
Number of devices registered for SD card 1, 2 each up to 1000 (depends on SD card capacity and settings), external switching is
inspection setting possible
Number of master profiles/standard Up to 200 per setting and head (dependent on Up to 400 per setting (dependent on SD card
images SD card capacity) capacity)
Memory card • SD card slot x2
• Supports OP-87133 (512 MB), CA-SD1G (1 GB), CA-SD4G (4 GB), and CA-SD16G (16 GB)
* SD1 slot is equipped with CA-SD4G (LJ-X8000) or CA-SD1G (LJ-X8000E) as standard
Number of tools 100 pcs / setting (20 pcs for position correction) Up to 100 pcs / setting
Interface Control input 20 (5 input terminals, 15 parallel I/Os)
Control output • 28 (6 output terminals, 22 parallel I/Os)
• Photo MOSFET *5
RS-232C • Numerical output and control input/output (exclusive use with PLC-Link using RS-232C)
• Supports up to 230400 bps baud rate
PLC-Link • Numeric output and control input/output using Ethernet port or RS-232C port (exclusive use with
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET and EtherCAT. When using RS-232C port, exclusive use with RS-
232C non-procedural communication)
Specifications
Ethernet • In addition to the above functions, uploading, downloading, transmission / reception various
simulations, various types of data including profile / image data, and remote desktop are
possible by connecting with our PC application software
• Supports FTP client & server function, SFTP client function, VNC server function (monitor
screen display only supported for clients other than Pcs), BOOTP function
• 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
• Supports jumbo frames (when the CB-NEC20E/NEP20E/NPN20E is connected)
USB • In addition to numerical output (3D mode only), uploading and downloading of inspection
settings, various simulations, transmission / reception of various data including profile / image
data, and remote desktop are possible by connection with our PC application software
• USB2.0 only
EtherNet/IP • Numeric input and control input/output using Ethernet port or optional EtherNet/IP unit CB-
NEP20E(exclusive use with PLC Link, PROFINET, and EtherCAT)
• Compatible with cyclic transmission (up to 1,436 bytes) and message transmission
• Up to 32 connections (ETHERNET)/1: Exclusive Owner, 4: Input Only (CB-NEP20E)
• Conform to Conformance Test Version.CT15 (ETHERNET)/CT17 (CB-NEP20E)
PROFINET • Numeric input and control input/output using Ethernet port or optional PROFINET unit CB-
NPN20E(exclusive use with PLC Link, EtherNet/IP, and EtherCAT)
• Compatible with cyclic communication (max. 1408 byte (Ethernet port) / 1252 bytes (CB-NPN20E))
• Compatible with non-cyclic (record data) communication
• Conform to Conformance Class A (ETHERNET)/C (CB-NPN20E)
10-2 LJ-X UM_GB

Specifications
LJ-X8000/LJ-X8000E *6
Model
2D mode 3D mode
Interface EtherCAT • By connecting the optional EtherCAT unit CB-NEC20E, numeric output and control input/output can
beperformed (exclusive use with PLC Link, EtherNet/IP, and PROFINET)
• Compatible to the cyclic communication (process data object communication) (input: max. 536 byte/
output: max.532 byte)
• Compatible to the noncyclic communication (mailbox communication)
• Compatible to CoE
• Explicit Device Identification
• Compliant with the conformance test V2.2.1.0
Mouse Operate various menus with our special mouse (included with the Controller)
SNTP Automatic correction of the date and time of this unit is possible by connecting to the SNTP server
USB HDD By connecting the HDD (up to 2 TB) to the dedicated USB port (USB 3.0 compliant / bus power
compatible: rated output 900 mA), various data output including profile / image data is possible
Monitor output Analog RGB output XGA 1024 × 768 (24 bit color, 60 Hz)
Encoder input One system: RS-422 line driver output (with 5 V output: Up to 150 mA)
Open collector output (5 V / 12 V / 24 V compatible) combined use
Response RS-422 Single phase/Z-phase: 1.6 MHz, 2-phase/1-multiplier: 1.6 MHz, 2-phase/2-multiplier: 3.2 MHz, 2-
frequency phase/4-multiplier: 6.4 MHz
Open collector Single phase/Z-phase: 100 kHz, 2-phase/1-multiplier: 100 kHz, 2-phase/2-multiplier: 200 kHz, 2-
phase/4-multiplier: 400 kHz
Laser ON input Non-voltage Input (a short circuit via the short pin at the time of shipment from the factory)
Cooling fan Yes
Minimum display unit 0.1 µm, 0.01°, 0.00001 mm2 0.1 μm, 0.001°, 0.0001 mm2, 0.00001 mm3
Language Switchable between Japanese, English, Chinese (Simplified), Chinese (Traditional), Korean, Thai,
German, French, Italian, Czech, Hungarian, and Polish
Rating Power voltage 24 VDC±10%
Max. current 3.3A
consumption
Environmental Ambient 0 to + 45 °C (DIN rail mounting) / 0 to + 40 °C (bottom mounting)
resistance temperature
Relative humidity 85%RH or less (No condensation)
Weight Approx. 2500 g
*1 If LJ-X8080 or LJ-X8200 is connected, when binning (Z) is ON, or when the measurement range (Z) is set to 1/2. 
If LJ-X8900 is connected, when the measurement range (Z) is set to 1/2.
*2 When the measurement range is narrowed according to the binning settings.
Specifications
*3 When the measuring range is minimum, binning ON, and parallel imaging is ON. Other settings are initial settings.
*4 When the binning ON and parallel imaging is ON. Other settings are initial settings.
*5 Both plus common connection for NPN input devices and minus common connection for PNP input devices are possible.
*6 The US model for LJ-X8000 is LJ-X8002. 3D mode is not available for LJ-X8000E.
LJ-X UM_GB 10-3

Specifications
Communication expansion unit specifications
EtherCAT unit (CB-NEC20E)
Model CB-NEC20E
Communication Compliant standard IEEE802.3u(100BASE-TX)
Communication speed 100Mbps(100BASE-TX)
Communication cycle 500 μs at the shortest
Connection cable STP type cable of category 5e or higher
Distance between nodes 100m
Communication port RJ-45×2
Power supply Supplied from the controller
Environmental Ambient operating temperature 0 to +45°C (DIN rail mounted)/0 to +40°C (Bottom mounted)
resistance Ambient operating humidity 85%RH or less (no condensation)
EtherNet/IP unit (CB-NEP20E)
Model CB-NEP20E
Communication cycle 1 ms at the shortest
PROFINET (CB-NPN20E)
Model CB-NPN20E
Specifications

Communication cycle 1 ms at the shortest
10-4 LJ-X UM_GB

Specifications
Head Specifications
LJ-X Series
Model LJ-X8020 LJ-X8060 LJ-X8080 LJ-X8200 LJ-X8400 LJ-X8900
Reference distance 20 mm 64mm 73mm 245mm 380mm 980mm
Measure Z-axis (height) ±2.2 mm ±7.3mm ±20.5mm ±34mm ±60 mm to +95 to -220 mm ±400 mm
ment (F.S.=4.4 mm) (F.S.=14.6mm) (F.S.=41mm) (F.S.=68mm) *11
to (F.S.=315 mm) (F.S.= 800 mm)
range
X-axis NEAR side 7mm 15mm 30mm 64mm 180 mm (163 mm *11) 300 mm
(width) Reference 7.5mm 16mm 35mm 72mm 210 mm 510 mm
distance
FAR side 8mm 16mm 39mm 80mm 240 mm (320 mm *11) 720 mm
Optical Blue semiconductor laser
source
Wavelength 405 nm (visible light)
Laser class (IEC60825-1, Class 2M laser product *9
FDA(CDRH) Part 1040.10 *1)
Output 10 mW
Spot shape (standard distance) Approx. 16 mm x Approx. 25 mm x Approx. 44 mm x Approx. 115 mm Approx. 275 mm ×  Approx. 622 mm × 
32 µm 49 µm 72 µm ×116 μm 249 μm 566 μm
Repeatability *2 Z-axis (height) *3 0.3 µm 0.4 µm 0.5 µm 1 μm 5 μm 10 μm
X-axis (width) *4 0.3 μm 0.5 µm 1.0 μm 3 μm 10 μm 25 μm
Linearity Z-axis (height) ±0.05% of F.S. ±0.04% of F.S. ±0.03% of F.S. ±0.04% of F.S. Reference distance±60 Near to Reference
*5
(±0.012%) (±0.008%) (±0.004%) (±0.006%) mm: ±0.025% of F.S. distance: ±0.015% of
(±0.003%) F.S.(±0.004%)
Entire region: ±0.035% Entire region: ±0.05% of
of F.S. (±0.005%) F.S.(±0.006%)
Profile data interval *12 X-axis (width) 2.5 μm  5 μm  12.5 μm 25 μm 75 μm (from 50 μm)  225 μm (from 100 μm)
(from 2 μm) (from 4 μm) (from 10 μm) (from 20 μm) 100 μm (from 50 μm)*11
Profile data count 3,200
HDR (high dynamic range) Single shot HDR *10
Laser emission spot Optical source Blue LED (405 nm)
check function
Temperature characteristics 0.01% of F.S./°C
Environmental resistance Protective IP67 (IEC60529)
structure *6
Ambient White lamp: 10,000 lx or less
luminance *7
Specifications
Ambient 0 to +45°C
temperature *8
Relative 85%RH or less (no condensation)
humidity
Vibration 10 to 57 Hz, double amplitude 1.5 mm X, Y, Z, 3 hours in each direction
resistance
Shock 15G / 6 msec
resistance
Material Aluminum
Weight Approx. 1000 g Approx. 1000 g Approx. 1100 g Approx. 1200 g Approx. 1300 g Approx. 1600 g
*2 Value when measured on average 4,096 times at a standard distance.
*3 Measured object is a standard object as determined by us. Value when measuring average height of initial setting area with height/position tool. Other settings are
initial settings.
*4 Pin gauge measured. Value when measuring position of intersection between pin gauge R-face and edge level with height/position tool. Other settings are initial
settings.
*5 Measured object is a standard object as determined by us. Profile data when measured with smoothing occurring 64 times and averaging occurring 8 times. Other
settings are initial settings.
Values in brackets are typical examples of averaged total profile data.
*6 When the head cable (CB-B*) or extension cable (CB-B*E) is connected. Except when CB-B05L* is connected.
*7 Illuminance on a sensor head light-receiving surface when a light is shined on white paper during white-paper measurement.
*8 The head must be mounted to a metal plate for use.
*9 Never look directly at a beam through an optical apparatus (magnifying glass, magnifier, microscope, telescope, binocular, etc.).
Viewing laser output with an optical apparatus may damage the eyes.
*10 Characteristic that can be stably measured with high precision in one measurement (exposure) from a black surface (low reflectivity) to a glossy surface (high
reflectivity).
*11 When the range is extended.
*12 The profile data is changeable. If change it, the X direction measurement range will be changed accordingly.
LJ-X UM_GB 10-5

Specifications
LJ-V Series
Model LJ-V7020K *1/ LJ-V7020 *1/ LJ-V7060K / LJ-V7060/ LJ-V7080/ LJ-V7200/ LJ-V7300/
LJ-V7020KB *1 LJ-V7020B *1 LJ-V7060KB LJ-V7060B LJ-V7080B LJ-V7200B LJ-V7300B
Installation Specular Diffuse Specular Diffuse reflection
reflection reflection reflection
Reference distance 24.2 mm 20 mm 54.6 mm 60 mm 80 mm 200 mm 300 mm
Z-axis (height) ±2.3 mm ±2.6 mm ±7.6 mm ±8 mm ±23 mm ±48 mm ±145 mm
Measurement range
(F.S.=4.6 mm) (F.S.=5.2 mm) (F.S.=15.2 mm) (F.S.=16 mm) (F.S.=46 mm) (F.S.=96 mm) (F.S.=290 mm)
X-axis NEAR side 6.5 mm 6.5 mm 8 mm 13.5 mm 25 mm 51 mm 110 mm
(width)
Reference 7 mm 7 mm 14 mm 15 mm 32 mm 62 mm 180 mm
distance
FAR side 7.5 mm 7.5 mm 8 mm 15 mm 39 mm 73 mm 240 mm
Blue semiconductor laser
Optical source
Wavelength 405 nm (visible light)

Laser class Class 2M *3 Class 2 Class 2M *3 Class 2
(IEC60825-1, FDA(CDRH)
Part 1040.10 *2)
Output 10 mW 4.8mW 10 mW 4.8mW
Spot shape (standard distance) Approx. 14 mm x 35 µm Approx. 21 mm x 45 µm Approx. 48 Approx. 90 Approx. 240
mm x 48 µm mm x 85 µm mm x 610 µm
Repeatability *4 Z-axis (height) 0.3 μm 0.4 μm 0.5 µm 1 μm 5 μm
*5
X-axis (width) 2.5 μm 5 μm 10 μm 20 μm 60 μm
*6
Linearity Z-axis (height) ±0.1% of F.S. ±0.05% to
*7 ±0.15% of F.S.
*8
Profile data X-axis (width) 10 μm 20 μm 50 μm 100 μm 300 μm
interval
Profile data count 800
HDR (high dynamic range) Single shot HDR *12
Temperature characteristics 0.01% of F.S./°C
Environmental Protective IP67 (IEC60529)
resistance structure *9
Ambient White lamp: 10,000 lx or less
luminance *10
Ambient 0 to +45°C
temperature
*11
Specifications
Relative 85%RH or less (no condensation)

humidity
Vibration 10 to 57 Hz, double amplitude 1.5 mm X, Y, Z, 3 hours in each direction
resistance
Shock 15G / 6 msec
resistance
Material Aluminum
Weight Approx. 410 g Approx. 450 g Approx. 400 g Approx. 550 g Approx. 
1000 g
*1 Double polarization effect is not available.
*3 Never look directly at a beam through an optical apparatus (magnifying glass, magnifier, microscope, telescope, binocular, etc.).
Viewing laser output with an optical apparatus may damage the eyes.
*4 Value when measured on average 4,096 times at a standard distance.
*5 Measured object is a standard object as determined by us. Value when measuring average height of initial setting area with height/
position tool. Other settings are initial settings.
*6 Pin gauge measured. Value when measuring position of intersection between pin gauge R-face and edge level with height/position
tool. Other settings are initial settings.
*7 Measured object is a standard object as determined by us. Profile data when measured with smoothing occurring 64 times and
averaging occurring 8 times. Other settings are initial settings.
10-6 LJ-X UM_GB

Specifications
*8 Linearity differs depending on measurement region (see diagram on right). 110

*9 When the head cable (CB-B*) or extension cable (CB-B*E) is connected. Except when
CB-B05L* is connected.
*10 Illuminance on a sensor head light-receiving surface when a light is shined on white 145 ±0.05％ of F.S.
paper during white-paper measurement.
*11 The head must be mounted to a metal plate for use. 180
*12 Characteristic that can be stably measured with high precision in one measurement
(exposure) from a black surface (low reflectivity) to a glossy surface (high reflectivity).
• Models that end with the letter "B" are models that output luminance. Imaging modes 145 ±0.1％ of F.S.
"Multiple light emission (composite)" and "Multiple light emission (light optimization)" are
not available. 240
±0.15％ of F.S.
Specifications
LJ-X UM_GB 10-7

Specifications
Measurement range
Measurement ranges for this device are indicated below. Measures the shape of the object within the Z-axis measurement
range and the trapezoidal area surrounded by the X-axis measurement range.
• Measurement range of LJ-X8020
Unit: mm
Reference
distance 12
(Near side)
0 ＋
20 27 30
+2.2
-3.5 +3.5
-3.75 +3.75
-4 +4
-2.2 測定領域
Measurement range
Measurement ー
ー 0 ＋
scope details (Far side)
X Axis Measurement Range Z Axis Measurement Range
• When installing specular reflection for LJ-X8020
Unit: mm
Specifications
Reference
distance
12
27 30 (Near side) 45°
0 +
+2.03
-3.5 +3.5
-3.75 +3.75 Measurement range
-4 +4
-2.03
ー
Measurement ー 0 ＋ (Far side)
scope details X Axis Measurement Range Z Axis Measurement Range
10-8 LJ-X UM_GB

Specifications
Unit: mm
Reference
distance 12
27 30
64
(Near side)
＋
0
+7.3
-7.5 +7.5
-8 +8
-8 +8
-7.3 測定領域
Measurement range
ー
Measurement ー 0 ＋ (Far side)
• When installing specular reflection for LJ-X8060
Unit: mm
Specifications
nce
fere
Re ance
27 30 s t
12 di
64
(Near side)
0 ＋
+6.96
-7.5 +7.5
-8 +8
-8 +8
-6.96 測定領域
Measurement range
Measurement ー 0 ＋ー
X Axis Measurement Range
Z Axis Measurement Range
LJ-X UM_GB 10-9

Specifications
Unit: mm
Reference
distance
12
27 30
73
(Near side)
＋
+20.5
-15 +15
0
-17.5 +17.5
-19.5 +19.5 測定領域

-20.5 Measurement range ー
Measurement (Far side)
scope details ー 0 ＋
Specifications
10-10 LJ-X UM_GB

Specifications
• LJ-X8200
Unit: mm
Reference 12
distance
27 28
245
(Near side)
+
+34
-32 +32
-36 0 +36
-40 +40
-34 Measurement range
Measurement ௅
scope details ௅ 0 + (Far side)
X Axis Measurement Range Z Axis Measurement Range
Specifications
LJ-X UM_GB 10-11

Specifications
• LJ-X8400
Unit: mm
Reference
distance
12
27 28
380
(Near side)
Measurement range +
-81.5 +95 +81.5
+60
-90 +90
Measurement
range
-105 0 +105
-120 +120
-60
-160 -220 +160 Measurement range ௅

scope details Z Axis Measurement Range
௅ 0 +
Specifications
10-12 LJ-X UM_GB

Specifications
• LJ-X8900
Unit: mm
Reference
distance
28 12
27
952 (Near side)

+
+400
-150 +150
0
-255 +255
-360 +360
-400
Measurement range ௅
Measurement
௅ 0 +
• LJ-V7020/LJ-V7020B
Unit: mm
Specifications
Reference
distance
20 (Near side) 12
＋
+2.6 18.5 23.5
-3.25 +3.25
-3.5 +3.5
-3.75 +3.75
-2.6 Measurement range
Measurement ー
scope details ー 0 ＋ (Far side)
LJ-X UM_GB 10-13

Specifications
• LJ-V7020K / LJ-V7020KB
Unit: mm
Reference
distance
24.2
(Near side) 45°
18.5 23.5 ＋
+2.3
-3.25 +3.25
-3.5 +3.5
-3.75 +3.75
-2.3 Measurement range
Measurement ー
(Far side)
scope details ー 0 ＋ Z Axis Measurement Range
• LJ-V7060/LJ-V7060B
Unit: mm
18.5 23.5 12
Specifications
Reference distance 60
Measurement range (Near side)
＋
-6.75 +8 +6.75
0
-7.5 +7.5 0
-7.5 -8 +7.5
scope details X Axis Measurement Range (Far side)
10-14 LJ-X UM_GB

Specifications
• LJ-V7060K / LJ-V7060KB
Unit: mm
18.5 23.5 35°

Reference distance 54.6 (Near side)
Measurement range
＋
+7.6
-4.0 +4.0
0
-7.0 +7.0 0
-4.0 +4.0
-7.6
scope details X Axis Measurement Range (Far side)
• LJ-V7080/LJ-V7080B
Unit: mm
18 24 12 Specifications
Measurement range
Reference distance 80 (Near side)
+23 ＋
-12.5 +12.5
0 0
-16 +16
-19.5 +19.5
-23 ー 0 ＋ー
LJ-X UM_GB 10-15

Specifications
• LJ-V7200/LJ-V7200B
Unit: mm
18 24 12
Measurement range
(Near side)
+48 ＋
-25.5 +25.5
0 0
-31 +31
-36.5 +36.5
-48 ー 0 ＋ー
(Far side)
Measurement X Axis Measurement Range Z Axis Measurement Range
scope details
Specifications
10-16 LJ-X UM_GB

Specifications
• LJ-V7300/LJ-V7300B
Unit: mm
30 27 12
Measurement range
(Near side)
+145 ＋
-55 +55
0
-90 +90
0
-120 +120
-145 ー
scope details
ー 0 ＋ Z Axis Measurement
X Axis Measurement Range Range
Lighting Status of Laser Radiation LED

The lighting status of the laser radiation LED is determined by the average height of the valid profile data within the "LED
lighting X-axis range".
It lights up in green when the average height is within the "LED lighting Z-axis range", and it lights up in orange when it is
within the other Z-axis measurement range. The light flashes orange when the average height is in a range other than the Z-
Specifications
axis measurement range.
Model LED lighting X-axis range LED lighting Z-axis range

LJ-X Series LJ-X8020 Approx. ±0.02 ±0.22
LJ-X8060 Approx. ±0.04 ±0.73
LJ-X8080 Approx. ±0.1 ±2.05
LJ-X8200 Approx. ±0.2 ±3.4
LJ-X8400 Approx. ±0.6 ±10
LJ-X8900 Approx. ±1.8 ±40
LJ-V Series LJ-V7020/LJ-V7020B Approx. ±0.02 ±0.13
LJ-V7020K / LJ-V7020KB Approx. ±0.02 ±0.12
LJ-V7060/LJ-V7060B Approx. ±0.04 ±0.4
LJ-V7060K / LJ-V7060KB Approx. ±0.04 ±0.38
LJ-V7080/LJ-V7080B Approx. ±0.1 ±1.15
LJ-V7200/LJ-V7200B Approx. ±0.2 ±2.25
LJ-V7300/LJ-V7300B Approx. ±0.6 ±7.25
LJ-X UM_GB 10-17

Specifications
Cable Specifications
Model CB-B3 CB-B10 CB-B5E CB-B10E CB-B20E CB-B05LU CB-B05LR CB-B05LL

Cable Type Head cable Extension cable Extension Extension Extension
cable cable cable
L-shape L-shape L-shape
connector connector connector
(top) (right) (left)
Cable length 3m 10m 5m 10m 20m 0.5m
Minimum bending R 22mm
Protective structure *1 IP67(IEC60529) -
Material (jacketing) PVC
Weight Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. 70g
250g 750g 400g 800g 1500g
*1: Value when connected to sensor head. Does not include connector portion on controller side.
• Regarding head cable length: Total length of the head cable should be within 30 m and only up to two extension cables can be connected
(Up to three extension cables can be used if one of the three extension cables is a 0.5m L-shaped connector cable).
Monitor Specifications
Model CA-MP120
Liquid crystal panel Display element a-Si TFT active matrix
Effective display 245(W)x184(H) mm
area
Display dot count 1024(W)x768(H) dots or 800(W)x600(H) dots
Display colors 16,777,216 colors
Backlight Lifespan Average lifespan: 100,000 hours (when installed vertically at 25°C)
Input/output Input signal Analog RGB signal (0.7 Vp-p, 75Ω) horizontal, vertical frequency signal
Input signal mode 1024(W)x768(H) vertical frequency 60 Hz or 800(W)x600(H) vertical frequency 60 Hz
Input signal Dense mini D-sub15 female pin (3WAY, inch screw)
connector
Rating Power voltage 24 VDC±10%
Current consumption Less than 1.5 A
Ambient temperature 0 to +40°C
Specifications
Relative humidity 85%RH or less

Structure Embedded panel on front, dust-proof according to IP65f, droplet proof
Weight Approx. 2.3 g
10-18 LJ-X UM_GB

Diagram of External Dimensions
Diagram of External Dimensions
Head
LJ-X8020
4×M4
Effective depth 2.8
13.5
4 100
30
3×φ4.4
57 117 Mounting hole
30 4×M3 100
13.5 Effective depth 2.2 4 90 (87)
114
105
40
36
12
2.2
27
7
20
7.5
45°
8
2.2
2.2
2.2
LJ-X8020 (when installing specular reflection)
4×M4
Effective depth 2.8
13.5
Specifications
30
100
90
57 4 （134.2）
30 （92.4）（30.9）（5.2）
13.5
105
（38.3）
4×M3
Effective depth 2.2 4
（123.9）
3×φ4.4
4
（62.6）
Mounting hole
22.5°
（16.6）
27 12 45°
（2.03）
（37）
（2.03）
7
7.5
（2.03）
（2.03）
8
（0.84）
2.2
（0.84）
2.2
* Values in brackets are reference values calculated with the dimension in normal installation inclined by 22.5
degrees.
LJ-X UM_GB 10-19

LJ-X8060
4×M4
Effective depth 2.8
4 108
13.5
30
3×φ4.4
Mounting hole
57 127
30 108
13.5 4 100 (87)
4×M3
Effective depth 2.2
120
111
40
27
12
4
27
35°
64
15
16
16
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
LJ-X8060 (when installing specular reflection)

13.5
30
4×M4
Effective depth 2.8
108
57 100
4
Specifications
30
(138.8)
13.5
(103) (25.7) (4.7)
(32.5)
111
4×M3
Effective depth 2.2
(132.1)
(75.8)
3×Φ4.4
4
17.5°
64
12
(17)
27 35°
(75.6)
(6.96)
(6.96)
(6.96)
15
16
16
7.3
(6.96)
(2.2)
(2.2)
7.3
* Values in brackets are reference values calculated with the dimension in normal installation inclined by 17.5
degrees.
10-20 LJ-X UM_GB

LJ-X8080
4×M4
Effective depth 2.8
13.5
4 77
30
57 4×M3 145
30 Effective depth 2.2 133
13.4 4 33 (87)
75
108
85
18
3×φ4.4
9.5
Mounting hole
28
27 12
35°
20.5
73
30
20.5
35
20.5
39
20.5
Specifications
LJ-X UM_GB 10-21

LJ-X8200
51 60 3×M5
Effective depth 7.5
11
12
24
185 (87)
55 164
12.5 30 5 70
4×M3
Effective depth 2.2
73
108
45
23
îĳ
Mounting hole
31
30
12
27
21.7°
245
245
64
34
34
72
34
34
80
Specifications
10-22 LJ-X UM_GB

LJ-X8400
35 93 3×M5
Effective depth 7.5
24 11
12
196 (87)
55 184
12.5 30 5 31
4×M3
Effective depth 2.2
91
108
68
43
îĳ
Mounting hole
30
12
12
12
27
17.65°
380
163
95
95
180
60
60
210
60
60
Specifications
240
220
220
320
LJ-X UM_GB 10-23

LJ-X8900
85 110 4×M5
15.5
Effective depth 7.5
24
277 (87)
55 165
15.5 24 40 135
4×M3
Effective depth 2.2
75
108.5
83.5
1
12
28
7
27 îĳ
Mounting hole
12.2°
980
(952)
300
400
400
Specifications
510
400
400
720
10-24 LJ-X UM_GB

LJ-V7020/LJ-V7020B
4 96 Unit: mm
11
21
20
M4
2xM4
Effective depth2.8
Effective depth2.8 E
42 110 （85）
13 16 4 81
4xM3
Effective
depth3
30 70 71
20 2xφ4.4
30 Mounting hole
10 12
20 18.5 6.5 20 4
2.6 2.6
7
2.6 2.6 45°
7.5
LJ-V7020K / LJ-V7020KB
Unit: mm
11
21
20
M4
Effective depth2.8 2xM4
Effective depth 4.7
42 111.3
13 16 106.6
4.6
103.3
4xM3
Effective depth3
[ĳ
60.5 Mounting hole
25.9
12
18.5
24.2 2.3 24.2 2.3
6.5 45°
7 0.95
2.3 2.3
7.5
0.95
48.3
Specifications
LJ-V7060/LJ-V7060B
Unit: mm
22 65
11
21
20
M4 2xM4
Effective depth 4.2 Effective depth 2.8
42 110 （85）
13 16 4xM3 28 59 2xφ4.4
Effective depth 3.5 Mounting hole
30 80 71
25
4
18.5 12 35°
60 60
13.5
8 15 8
8 8
15
LJ-X UM_GB 10-25

LJ-V7060K / LJ-V7060KB
Unit: mm
11
21
20
M4 2xM4
Effective depth 4.2 Effective depth 2.8
114.3
42
83.5
13 16 [ĳ
48.6 Mounting
hole
4xM3
Effective 104.1
depth 3.5
96.7
11.3
35°
54.6 18.5
54.6
8
7.6 14 7.6
7.6 7.6
2.4 2.4
8 52.6
LJ-V7080/LJ-V7080B
4 84 Unit: mm
11
21
20
M4 2xM4
Effective depth 2.8 Effective depth 6
42 96 （85）
14 16 4xM3 71
4
Effective
depth 3.5
30 71 62
20
4
2xφ4.4
18 12 25° Mounting hole
80 80
Specifications
25
23 23
32
23 23
39
10-26 LJ-X UM_GB

LJ-V7200/LJ-V7200B
32 105 Unit: mm
11
20
4xM4
Effective depth 2.8
42 145 （85）
13 16 4xM3 32 105 3xφ4.4

Effective depth 3.5 Mounting hole
30 77 68
25
18 12
24.2°
200 200
51
48 48
62
48 48
73
Specifications
LJ-X UM_GB 10-27

LJ-V7300/LJ-V7300B
38 100 Unit: mm
16
25
4xM4
3xφ5.4
Effective depth 2.8
Mounting hole
57 173 （85）
16 25 4xM3 38 100
Effective depth 3.5
50
88 79
20
4
30
12
21.2°
110
300 300
145 145
Specifications
180
145 145
240
10-28 LJ-X UM_GB

Controller(LJ-X8000,LJ-X8000E)
199.2
171.5 19.3 141.6
DIN
168
35.9
139.2
83.3
65.3
6
124.6
94
111.8
6-M4
12.1
93 56.2 Effective depth 6
With a communication expansion unit (CB-NEC20E/NEP20E/NPN20E) installed
231.1
203.4
Specifications
171.5
118 141.6
DIN-rail
mounts
168
35.9
139.2
83.3
65.3
90 124.6
Unit: mm
(Total weight: approx. 3010g)
LJ-X UM_GB 10-29

EtherCAT unit CB-NEC20E, EtherNet/IP unit CB-NEP20E, PROFINET unit CB-NPN20E

12.4
31.9
DIN-rail
mounts
168 35.9
83.3
65.3
124.6
2×M4
Depth:6
22.1
94
12.1
Unit: mm
Specifications
10-30 LJ-X UM_GB

Head cable
Bending resistant straight type
Head side Φ7.6 Controller side

Φ16.5
32
31
54 A 41 Unit: mm
Model name Cable length (A) Minimum bending R Material (jacketing) Weight
CB-B3 3m 22 mm PVC Approx. 250g
CB-B10 10m Approx. 750g
Head extension cable

Unit: mm
51 Φ7.6 55
Cable length 5m, 10m, 20m
14 18
Φ16.5
Φ16.5
CB-B cable side Sensor head side
Model name Cable length (A) Weight

CB-B5E 5m Approx. 400 g
CB-B10E 10m Approx. 800 g
CB-B20E 20m Approx. 1500g
Total length of the head cable should be within 30 m and only up to two extension cables can be connected (Up to three
Reference
extension cables can be used if one of the three extension cables is a 0.5m L-shaped connector cable).
Specifications
Head extension cable (L-shape connector cable)
CB-B05LU
Sensor head side Controller side
CB-B05LL CB-B05LR
I16.5
30
I7.6
I14 18
38 A 55
Model name Cable length (A) Weight

CB-B05LU
CB-B05LR 0.5 m Approx. 70g
CB-B05LL
Total length of the head cable should be within 30 m and only up to two extension cables can be connected (Up to three
Point
extension cables can be used if one of the three extension cables is a 0.5m L-shaped connector cable).
LJ-X UM_GB 10-31

Dedicated Mouse(OP-87506)
57.9
31.2
f12.4
f3.3
39.2
1860.0±85 113.7
Unit: mm
Specifications
10-32 LJ-X UM_GB

Monitor (CA-MP120)/Monitor Stand (OP-87262)
CA-MP120
247.4 75
(Effective display unit) 4-M4
Effective depth 10
(Effective display unit)

6.5
75
35
240
186
255
15 28
360 6 49.5 342
55.5
Unit: mm
OP-87262
151.5
334.3
315
20°
187.5
5°
200
5
4×2×R2.5
85
8
40
250
260
Specifications
LJ-X UM_GB 10-33

Power supply (CA-U4)
(12) 120 When mounted on the front (Mounting bracket: OP-42174)
43.3
122.5
35.9
10
170
14.3
16.1 85.5 16.5

2.5
15
59
15.5
60 28 t=2
12.5
40
59 122
4-φ5
28
Mounting screw hole
4-M3 Insertion depth 5MAX
Bottom mounted (Mounting bracket: OP-42175) When installing on the side (Mounting bracket: OP-51629)
132.5
157
t=2
12.5 7 15
12.5
t=2 12.5 50
60 75 20.5
55
40
Side mounting brackets can be mounted on either left or right side.
150 4-φ5
160
Specifications
10-34 LJ-X UM_GB

Characteristics
Characteristics
Spot diameter
LJ-X8020
mm
mm 2.2
20
mm
2.2 16 49
mm μm
16 32
mm μm
16 49
mm μm
LJ-X8060
mm
7.3
mm mm
64 7.3 91
25 μm
mm
25 49
mm μm
25 91
mm μm
Specifications
LJ-X UM_GB 10-35

Characteristics
LJ-X8080
m
.5m
20
m
mm .5m
73 20 44 16
mm 3μ
m
44 72
mm μm
44 16
mm 3μ
m
LJ-X8200
PP

PP
P
PP P
16
3ȝ
P
P
P 11
6ȝ
P
P
P 22
9ȝ
P
Specifications
10-36 LJ-X UM_GB

Characteristics
LJ-X8400
P
P

PP
P PP 40
P 9P
P P
P
31 51
1P 3ȝ
P P

P
P
23 17
8P 1ȝ
P P
21 24
7P 9ȝ
P P
40
1ȝ
49 P
9ȝ
P
LJ-X8900
m
0m
40
86
m 6m
0m m
Specifications
40
mm
980
46
4ȝ
62 P
2m
m
56
6ȝ
P
37
7m
m
92
0ȝ
P
LJ-X UM_GB 10-37

Characteristics
LJ-V7020 / LJ-V7020B / LJ-V7020K / LJ-V7020KB
mm )
2.6 mm
3
mm ) (2
.
20 2mm
. mm )
(2
4 2.6 mm 90
. 3 14
(2 mm μm
14 35
mm μm
90
14 μm
mm
() Is inside LJ-V7020K / LJ-V7020KB

( )内はLJ-V7020K/LJ-V7020KB
m
8m mm)
mm ) (7
.6
60 6mm
4 . m
(5 8m mm)
.6 20 13
(7 mm 5μ
m
21 45
mm μm
22 13
mm 5μ
m
()( )内はLJ-V7020K/LJ-V7020KB
Is inside LJ-V7020K / LJ-V7020KB
Specifications
10-38 LJ-X UM_GB

Characteristics
LJ-V7080/LJ-V7080B
mm
m 2.3
m
80
mm
2.3 56 29
0μ
mm m
48 48
mm μm
40 29
mm 0μ
m
LJ-V7200/LJ-V7200B
mm
48
mm 10
48 6m 31
mm m 0μ
200 m
85
μm
74 31
mm 0μ
m
Specifications
LJ-X UM_GB 10-39

Characteristics
LJ-V7300/LJ-V7300B
m
5m
14
m
5m 33
14 5m 22
m 0μ
0mm m
30
24
0m 61
m 0μ
m
14 11
5m 00
m μm
Specifications
10-40 LJ-X UM_GB

Characteristics
Mutual interference region
LJ-X8020
12
27
20
17
23
17
8 5.7
23
9.2 6.3
Unit: mm
LJ-X8060
Unit: mm
12
Specifications
27
56
56
72
72
64
10.4
16.5
12.0
19
LJ-X UM_GB 10-41

Characteristics
LJ-X8080
Unit: mm
12
27
51.5
51.5
94.5
73
33.2
25.7
94.5
34.6
42.6
LJ-X8200
12
Specifications
24°
27
19.7°
209.5
25.4
245
280.5
72
35.5
35.5
90 31.6
Unit: mm
10-42 LJ-X UM_GB

Characteristics
LJ-X8400
12
22.75
°
380
11.59°
27
185 67.679
206
100
63
241
63
276
230
370 138.38 Unit: mm
Specifications
LJ-X UM_GB 10-43

Characteristics
LJ-X8900
27
12 8.7°
20°
560
128.538
980
340
1400
420
420
Specifications
838 305.735 Unit: mm
10-44 LJ-X UM_GB

Characteristics
Unit: mm
12
18.5 5.6
17
17
20
23
7.5
23
3
3
8.5
6.4
Unit: mm
18.5 12
Specifications
10.5
51.6
51.6
60
68.4
68.4
15
8.4
8.4
18
13.1
LJ-X UM_GB 10-45

Characteristics
LJ-V7080/LJ-V7080B
Unit: mm
18 12
17
55.85
55.85
27.7
80
104.15
104.15
42.6 27.8 24.15

24.15
Specifications
10-46 LJ-X UM_GB

Characteristics
LJ-V7200/LJ-V7200B
Unit: mm
30 12
37
150
150
200
250
250
56
50
50
81.7 57.3
Specifications
LJ-X UM_GB 10-47

Characteristics
LJ-V7300/LJ-V7300B
Unit: mm
30 12
80.7
147.75
147.75
124
300
452.25
452.25
152.25
152.25
Specifications
278.8 219.5
10-48 LJ-X UM_GB

Characteristics
Reference plane for the head

Hatched areas are standard areas on each surface.
LJ-X8020
LJ-X8060
Specifications
Drawing view A
LJ-X UM_GB 10-49

Characteristics
LJ-X8080
LJ-X8200
Specifications
10-50 LJ-X UM_GB

Characteristics
LJ-X8400
Specifications
LJ-X UM_GB 10-51

Characteristics
LJ-X8900
Specifications
10-52 LJ-X UM_GB

Characteristics
Reference plane
Reference plane
Reference plane
Reference plane
Reference plane
LJ-V7060/LJ-V7060B
Reference plane
Specifications
Reference plane
Reference plane
LJ-X UM_GB 10-53

Characteristics
LJ-V7080/LJ-V7080B
Reference plane Reference plane
Reference plane
LJ-V7200/LJ-V7200B
Specifications
Reference plane
Reference plane
Reference plane
10-54 LJ-X UM_GB

Characteristics
LJ-V7300/LJ-V7300B
Reference plane
Reference plane
Reference plane
Specifications
LJ-X UM_GB 10-55

Options
Options
Cables
Model name Description

CB-B3 Head connection cable 3 m
CB-B10 Head connection cable 10 m
CB-B5E Head connection extension cable 5 m
CB-B05LU Head connection extension cable L-shape connector (top)
CB-B05LR Head connection extension cable L-shape connector (right)
CB-B05LL Head connection extension cable L-shape connector (left)
Other
Model name Description

OP-87262 Monitor stand for CA-MP120
OP-42279 Pole mounting bracket for CA-MP120
OP-66842 Monitor cable (3 m)
OP-87055 Monitor cable (10m)
CA-SD16G SD card 16 GB (industrial specifications)
OP-87133 SD card 512 MB (industrial specifications)
OP-51657 Parallel connection cable (3 m)
OP-26486 D-sub9 pin connector (female)
OP-26485 D-sub25 pin connector (female)
OP-86930 D-sub 9-pin connector (MELSEC)
OP-84384 D-sub 9-pin connector (SYSMAC)
Specifications
OP-26487 Serial connection cable (2.5 m, straight)

OP-66843 Ethernet cable (3 m, cross cable)
OP-66844 USB 2.0 cable (2 m)
CA-U4 Ultra-compact switching power supply (6.5 A)
LJ-XF1 ND filter
10-56 LJ-X UM_GB

Appendix
Appendix
Fast Sampling Frequency ........................................... A-2
LJ-X Series................................................................A-2
LJ-V Series................................................................A-9
Calculation Overview................................................. A-10
Operation Notations .................................................. A-11
Supported Character Sets.......................................A-12
Operation Notations ................................................A-12
Programming...........................................................A-12
Temporary variables................................................A-13
Expressions and Operators.....................................A-14
Statements ..............................................................A-15
Operation Function List ............................................ A-18
Mathematical functions............................................A-20
Trigonometric functions ...........................................A-24
Two-dimensional geometric operation function.......A-26
Three-dimensional geometric operation function......A-41
Calendar Functions .................................................A-48
BIT functions ...........................................................A-49
Other .......................................................................A-50
Table(Measured Value/Judgment Value) ................. A-51
Pre-processing filter for contrast images................ A-95
Filter Details ............................................................... A-99
Extract chips and dirts with difference filters ...........A-99
Reduce the effect of illuminance variation with 
the illumination correction filter..............................A-100
Remove background information with the 
real-time difference filter........................................A-101
Remove shading with a real-time contrast 
correction filter.......................................................A-102
Emphasizing only linear defects with a line 
defect extraction filter ............................................A-104
Remove or extract bright or dark pixel block 
with noise control filter...........................................A-105
Technical Explanation ............................................. A-106
What is an edge? ..................................................A-106
What is trend edge measurement? .......................A-107
What is a defect measurement?............................A-109
Supplementary Explanation of Recognition 
Appendix
Category Tool........................................................... A-111
ASCII code table (hexadecimal/
decimal notation) ...................................................A-111
Set conversion table to determine encrypted 
date and time information by built-in calendar 
(date and time encryption setting) .........................A-112
Register the character pattern used for 
character recognition in the dictionary...................A-113
Saved File Types...................................................... A-117
Remedy when the screen display is slow ............. A-118
Perform recalculations manually ...........................A-118
Error Messages ........................................................ A-119
System error..........................................................A-119
Typical errors.........................................................A-130
Execution Error......................................................A-135
LJ-X UM_GB A-1

Fast Sampling Frequency
Fast Sampling Frequency
LJ-X Series
Refer to the sampling frequency table below according to the head(s) that are used and the conditions.
(Exposure mode: Standard)
Number of heads
Head Model Capture Area Settings
1 2
Table (4) (mutual interference prevention: OFF)
LJ-X8020 - Table (2)
Table (6) (mutual interference prevention: ON)
Binning (Z) OFF (initial value) Table (1)
LJ-X8080
Binning (Z) ON Table (2)
Binning (Z) OFF (initial value) Table (1)
LJ-X8200
Binning (Z) ON Table (2)
Expansion Area OFF (initial value) Table (2)
LJ-X8400
Expansion Area ON Table (1)
When Multiple flash is set as the exposure mode, refer to Tables 7-12.
Appendix
A-2 LJ-X UM_GB

Number of heads: 1, exposure mode: Standard

Table (1) LJ-X8080 (binning (Z) OFF), LJ-X8200 (binning (Z) OFF), LJ-X8400 (expansion area ON), LJ-X8900
Number of heads 1
Exposure mode Standard
Luminance Output OFF ON
X binning ON OFF ON OFF
Irregular reflection removal function One or One or One or One or
Both OFF Both OFF Both OFF Both OFF
Image mask position correction more ON more ON more ON more ON
FULL 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz
1/2 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz
1/3 1.5kHz 1.5kHz 1.5kHz 1.5kHz 1.5kHz 1.5kHz 1.5kHz 1.5kHz
Measurement 1/7 3.5kHz 3.5kHz 3.5kHz 3.5kHz 3.5kHz 3.5kHz 3.5kHz 3.5kHz
range 1/8 4kHz 4kHz 4kHz 4kHz 4kHz 4kHz 4kHz 4kHz
(Z) 1/9 4.5kHz 4kHz 4.5kHz 4kHz 4.5kHz 4kHz 4kHz 4kHz
Table (2) LJ-X8020, LJ-X8060, LJ-X8080 (binning (Z) ON), LJ-X8200 (binning (Z) ON), LJ-X8400 (expansion area OFF)
Number of heads 1
FULL 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz
1/1.5 1.5kHz 1.5kHz 1.5kHz 1.5kHz 1.5kHz 1.5kHz 1.5kHz 1.5kHz
Appendix

Measurement 1/4 4kHz 4kHz 4kHz 4kHz 4kHz 4kHz 4kHz 4kHz
range
1/4.5 4.5kHz 4kHz 4.5kHz 4kHz 4.5kHz 4kHz 4kHz 4kHz
(Z)
LJ-X UM_GB A-3

Number of heads: 2, exposure mode: Standard, mutual interference prevention: OFF

Number of heads 2
Mutual interference prevention OFF
(Z) 1/9 4kHz 4kHz 4kHz 4kHz 4kHz 4kHz 4kHz 4kHz
Number of heads 2
FULL 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz
Appendix

range
1/4.5 4kHz 4kHz 4kHz 4kHz 4kHz 4kHz 4kHz 4kHz
(Z)
A-4 LJ-X UM_GB

Number of heads: 2, exposure mode: Standard, mutual interference prevention: ON

Number of heads 2
Mutual interference prevention ON
1/2 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz
(Z) 1/9 2kHz 2kHz 2kHz 2kHz 2kHz 2kHz 2kHz 2kHz
1/10 2.5kHz 2kHz 2.5kHz 2kHz 2.5kHz 2kHz 2.5kHz 2kHz
Number of heads 2
Appendix
1/1.5 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz

range
(Z)
LJ-X UM_GB A-5

Number of heads: 1, exposure mode: Multiple flash

Number of heads 1
Multiple flash
Exposure mode (light quantity optimization) (synthesis) (light quantity optimization) (synthesis)
2 times 3 times 4 times 5 times
Luminance Output OFF or ON
1/4 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 200Hz 200Hz
1/6 1.5kHz 1.5kHz 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz
Measurement 1/8 2kHz 2kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz 500Hz
range 1/9 2kHz 2kHz 1.5kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz 500Hz
(Z) 1/10 2.5kHz 2kHz 1.5kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz
1/12 3kHz 2kHz 2kHz 1kHz 1.5kHz 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz
1/14 3.5kHz 2kHz 2kHz 1kHz 1.5kHz 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz
1/16 4kHz 2kHz 2.5kHz 1kHz 2kHz 1kHz 1.5kHz 500Hz
6kHz 4kHz 3kHz 2kHz
1/24 2kHz 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz
(4kHz)* (2.5kHz)* (2kHz)* (1.5kHz)*
8kHz 5kHz 4kHz 3kHz
(4kHz)* (2.5kHz)* (2kHz)* (1.5kHz)*
*Top level: X binning ON, within ( ) on bottom level: X binning OFF
Number of heads 1
Multiple flash
Appendix

1/2.5 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz
1/3.5 1.5kHz 1.5kHz 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz
1/4 2kHz 2kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz 500Hz
Measurement
1/4.5 2kHz 2kHz 1.5kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz 500Hz
range
1/5 2.5kHz 2kHz 1.5kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz
(Z)
6kHz 4kHz 3kHz 2kHz
(4kHz)* (2.5kHz)* (2kHz)* (1.5kHz)*
8kHz 5kHz 4kHz 3kHz
(4kHz)* (2.5kHz)* (2kHz)* (1.5kHz)*
A-6 LJ-X UM_GB

Number of heads: 2, exposure mode: Multiple flash, mutual interference prevention: OFF
Number of heads 2
Multiple flash
Measurement 1/8 2kHz 2kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz 500Hz
range 1/9 2kHz 2kHz 1.5kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz 500Hz
(Z) 1/10 2.5kHz 2kHz 1.5kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz
4kHz 3kHz 2kHz
1/24 4kHz 2kHz 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz
(2.5kHz)* (2kHz)* (1.5kHz)*
4kHz 4kHz 3kHz
1/32 4kHz 2kHz * 1kHz * 1kHz 500Hz
(2.5kHz) (2kHz) (1.5kHz)*
Number of heads 2
Multiple flash
Appendix

1/3.5 1.5kHz 1.5kHz 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz
1/4 2kHz 2kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz 500Hz
Measurement
1/4.5 2kHz 2kHz 1.5kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz 500Hz
range
1/5 2.5kHz 2kHz 1.5kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz
(Z)
4kHz 3kHz 2kHz
1/12 4kHz 2kHz 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz
(2.5kHz)* (2kHz)* (1.5kHz)*
4kHz 4kHz 3kHz
1/16 4kHz 2kHz * 1kHz * 1kHz 500Hz
(2.5kHz) (2kHz) (1.5kHz)*
LJ-X UM_GB A-7

Number of heads: 2, exposure mode: Multiple flash, mutual interference prevention: ON

Number of heads 2
Multiple flash
Measurement 1/8 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 200Hz 200Hz
range 1/9 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 200Hz 200Hz
(Z) 1/10 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 200Hz
1/12 1.5kHz 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 500Hz 200Hz
1/16 2kHz 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz 1kHz 500Hz 500Hz 200Hz
3kHz 2kHz 1.5kHz 1kHz
1/24 1kHz 500Hz 500Hz 200Hz
(2kHz)* (1kHz)* (1kHz)* (500Hz)*
4kHz 2.5kHz 2kHz 1.5kHz
1/32 * 1kHz * 500Hz 500Hz 200Hz
(2kHz) (1kHz) (1kHz)* (500Hz)*
Number of heads 2
Multiple flash
Appendix

Measurement
range
(Z)
1/8 2kHz 1kHz 1kHz 500Hz 1kHz 500Hz 500Hz 200Hz
3kHz 2kHz 1.5kHz 1kHz
1/12 1kHz 500Hz 500Hz 200Hz
(2kHz)* (1kHz)* (1kHz)* (500Hz)*
4kHz 2.5kHz 2kHz 1.5kHz
1/16 * 1kHz * 500Hz 500Hz 200Hz
(2kHz) (1kHz) (1kHz)* (500Hz)*
A-8 LJ-X UM_GB

LJ-V Series
Measurement range
Binning Parallel capture Maximum sampling frequency
Z Direction X Direction
FULL 2 kHz
3/4 FULL 4.13 kHz
1/2 4.13 kHz
FULL 4.13 kHz
3/4 3/4 OFF 4.13 kHz
1/2 8 kHz
FULL 4.13 kHz
3/4 1/2 8 kHz
1/2 8 kHz
OFF
FULL 8 kHz
3/4 FULL 8 kHz
1/2 16 kHz*1
FULL 8 kHz
3/4 3/4 ON 16 kHz*1
1/2 16 kHz*1
FULL 16 kHz*1
3/4 1/2 16 kHz*1
1/2 32 kHz*1
FULL 4 kHz
3/4 FULL 4.13 kHz
1/2 8 kHz
FULL 4.13 kHz
3/4 3/4 OFF 4.13 kHz
1/2 8 kHz
FULL 4.13 kHz
3/4 1/2 8 kHz
1/2 16 kHz*1
ON
FULL 8 kHz
3/4 FULL 16 kHz*1
1/2 16 kHz*1
FULL 16 kHz*1
3/4 3/4 ON 16 kHz*1
Appendix
1/2 32 kHz*1
FULL 16 kHz*1
3/4 1/2 32 kHz*1
1/2 64 kHz*1
• The following settings slow the maximum sampling frequency down to about 1/2 of that before the settings.
- Turn on [Mutual interference prevention].
- With [Peak selection], select [Remove X multiple reflection] or [Remove Y multiple reflection].
• The following settings slows the maximum sampling frequency by the multiple number of the time of emissions compared with that before
the settings.
- With [Exposure mode], select [Optimized].
- With [Exposure mode], select [Combined].
• When two heads are used, the maximum sampling frequency is the slower sampling frequency of the two heads.
*1 8 kHz when using heads that support luminance output (types with a model number ending in B).
LJ-X UM_GB A-9

Calculation Overview
Calculation Overview
The operators and functions as well as the operation symbol that is supported by the calculation tool will be explained.
• Operation Notations (page A-11)
• Functions List (page A-18)
• Operation Symbol/Output Item Comparison Table (Measured Value/Judgment Value) (page A-51)
Appendix
A-10 LJ-X UM_GB

Operation Notations
Operation Notations
Follow the following rules when describing an operation on the LJ-X Series.
• Supported Character Sets (page A-12)
• Operation Notations (page A-12)
• Programming (page A-12)
• Temporary Variables (page A-13)
• Expressions and Operators (page A-14)
• Statements (page A-15)
Appendix
LJ-X UM_GB A-11

Operation Notations
Example3 (Error)
Supported Character Sets
IF (@a > 100) AND
Calculations and scripts can be created using the following (@a < 200) THEN
characters. ...(omitted)
END IF
Type Character set
Example4 (Correct)
Space <Space> <TAB>
Letters ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
@max = Max(@a, @b, @c,_
@d, @e, @f)
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
Numbers 0123456789 Commentary on the example
Symbol ,.()[]+-*/^=<>_@’:% Example 1: Processed correctly because the function is
• Spaces and tabs are identified as token (language) written on a single line.
separators. Example 2: Processed correctly because the line
• Letters are case-sensitive. continuation syntax is used.
Example 3: Results in an error because the line
continuation syntax is missing.
Operation Notations Example 4: Example of separating function arguments over
two lines.
Functions and lines

• Operation programs are made up of multiple lines. Programming
• Each line can contain a set of elements for defining a single
function. Arithmetic expression
• A function is the smallest unit of execution in a calculation/
script. Arithmetic expressions are comprised of statements.
Statements
Comment
• Comments are indicated by a single quotation (‘) mark.
Statements
• Functions after a single quotation (‘) on the same line are
ignored. Statements are categorized into Assignment, IF, FOR, and
DO LOOP statements.
Example
Assignment statement
@a = 100 ‘Set initial values
‘Date created:May23 IF THEN Statements
FOR NEXT Statements

Line continuation
DO LOOP statement
To separate a long line into several lines, use a space and
an underscore ("space" + "_").
Appendix
Example1 (Correct) Other

IF (@a > 100) AND (@a < 200) THEN • The maximum number of characters that can be used is
...(omitted) 5000.
END IF • The levels of nesting allowed for parentheses, IF, FOR, and
DO LOOP statements is subject to the amount of free
Example2 (Correct)
memory. If the available memory space is exceeded, a
IF (@a > 100) AND_
programming error will occur when the calculation is applied,
(@a < 200) THEN
and the cursor moves to the beginning of the expression
...(omitted)
where the error occurs.
END IF
A-12 LJ-X UM_GB

Operation Notations
Type Notation Method Internal

Temporary variables
Storage Type
Description of a string starting with [@] can treat the string Plane** Variable name.PPA 64-bit floating point
as a temporary variable. By assigning a value into the number
temporary variable, it can be quoted again during Variable name.PPB 64-bit floating point
calculation. number
Variable name.PPC 64-bit floating point
Example
number
@a=10
*The following is the line-type notation.
ANS0=20+@a - RH(ρ): Length (pixels) of the
[ANS0] is set to a value of "30". perpendicular line connecting the
θ
ρ
straight line from the origin (0,0)
Example (Error)
- T(θ): Clockwise angle where the
@a_10[10] = … (1)
three o’clock direction of the
Commentary on the example perpendicular line of RH (ρ) is 0
(1) cannot use arrays. degrees
** The following is the plane-type notation.

Variable type of temporary variables PPA, PPB, PPC: Value of each coefficient
when a plane is expressed with z=PPAx+PPBy+PPC.
A temporary variable is fixed by the value type which is
input first in the calculation. Since a temporary variable of Example
which the type is not fixed cannot be used, be sure to input
@a=AsPoint(20,30)
a value into the variable in advance.
Since "@a" is treated as position variable, it is treated as "@a.X
6 types are available; "Scalar", "Position", "Line", "Circle",
=20" and "@a.Y=30".
"3D Position" and "Plane". Each consists of the data in the
table below.
Precautions for use of temporary variables
Type Notation Method Internal
Storage Type • Temporary variables cannot be referred between different
Scalar Variable name 64-bit floating point calculation tools.
number • Variable names have to be 32 characters or less including
Position Variable name.X (X coordinate) 64-bit floating point
the @ sign.
number
Variable name.Y (Y coordinate) 64-bit floating point
number
Line* Variable name.T (θ) 64-bit floating point
number
Variable name.RH (r) 64-bit floating point
number Appendix
Circle Variable name.CX (X coordinate of 64-bit floating point
the center of the circle) number
Variable name.CY (Y coordinate of 64-bit floating point
the center of the circle) number
Variable name.CR (circle radius) 64-bit floating point
number
3D Position Variable name.TX (X coordinate) 64-bit floating point
number
Variable name.TY (Y coordinate) 64-bit floating point
number
Variable name.TZ (Z coordinate) 64-bit floating point
number
LJ-X UM_GB A-13

Operation Notations
• If @a is less than @b, the result of the statement is TRUE

Expressions and Operators (1), otherwise it is FALSE (0):
IF @a < @b THEN
Mathematical operators ...
END IF
Mathematical operators can be used for processing
• If @a is equal to @b, the result of the statement is TRUE
numerical values. The following operators are available.
(1), otherwise it is FALSE (0):
Operator
Descriptio
Syntax Explanation
IF @a >= @b THEN
n ...
^ Power A^B Raises A to the power of B. END IF
+ Positive +A A • If @a is equal to @b, the result of the statement is TRUE
- Negative -A Inverts the sign of A. (1), otherwise it is FALSE (0):
* Multiply A* B Multiplies A by B. IF @a <= @b THEN
/ Divide A/B Divides A by B. ...
MOD Modulo A MOD B The remainder when A is END IF
divided by B. Reference
+ Add A+ B Adds A and B. Comparative operators can only be used in conditionalstatements
- Subtract A-B Subtracts B from A. (such as IF and WHILE) and cannot be processed on their own. If
a statement such as "@a=@b<>@c", 0 or 1 is used for defining
@a, a programming error will occur.
To define @a, the script must be written using the IF statement as
Comparison operators
shown.
Comparison operators compare scalar data and produce IF @b<>@c THEN
Boolean (true or false) results. @a=1
A true/false value of 1 indicates true and a value of 0 ELSE
indicates false. @a=0
END IF
Descriptio
Operator Syntax Explanation
n
= Equal to A= B A is equal to B. Logic operators
<> Not equal to A <> B A is not equal to B. Logic operators can be used in conditional functions for
> Greater than A > B A is greater than B. performing true/false operations. Logic operators can only
< Less than A< B A is less than B. be used in conditional statements (such as IF and WHILE).
>= Greater than A >= B A is greater than or equal to The following logic operators are available.
or equal to B.
Operator Description Syntax Explanation
<= Less than or A <= B A is less than or equal to B.
NOT Logical inverse NOT A Inverts A.
equal to
AND Multiplication A AND B Multiplies A and B.
Reference OR Addition A OR B Adds A and B.
Comparison operations are executed in 64-bit floating point
XOR Exclusive A XOR B Exclusive OR of A and
decimal form.
Appendix
Addition B
Example Example
• If @a is equal to @b, the result of the statement is TRUE • If @a is a value other than 1, the result of the statement is
(1), otherwise it is FALSE (0): TRUE (1), and if it is 1, the expression is FALSE (0):
IF @a= @b THEN IF NOT (@a = 1) THEN
... ...
END IF END IF
• If @a is not equal to @b, the result of the statement is TRUE • If @a is greater than -1 and less than +1, the result of the
(1), otherwise it is FALSE (0): statement is TRUE (1), otherwise it is FALSE (0):
IF @a <> @b THEN IF (@a > -1) AND (@a < +1) THEN
... ...
END IF END IF
• If @a is greater than @b, the result of the statement is • If @a is less than -1 or greater than +1, the result of the
TRUE (1), otherwise it is FALSE (0): statement is TRUE (1), otherwise it is FALSE (0):
IF @a >b THEN IF (@a < -1) OR (@a > +1) THEN
... ...
END IF END IF
A-14 LJ-X UM_GB

Operation Notations
• If one of @a or @b are 0 and the other value is not 0, the

result of the statement is TRUE (1)
Statements
If both @a and @b are 0 or both not 0, the result of the
statement is FALSE (0): Assignment statement
IF (@a = 0) XOR (@b = 0) THEN
An item (result, setting, value, etc.) can be substituted to a
variable.
Priority of Operator • The item on the right of the expression is assigned to the
variable on the left of the "=" sign.
If a statement contains more than one operator, the order of
• Only items of the same type can be assigned to each other.
execution is based on the priority of the operators.
Operators are evaluated in the following order. Syntax
(1) Mathematical Operators variable = expression
(2) Comparison Operators
Syntax
(3) Logic Operators
The priority of operators is shown in the table below. Variable = Expression
Operator Descriptio Processing

Example (Correct)
n Priority
• Assignment of a scalar variable:
Mathematical ^ Power 1
@a = @a + 1
Operators + Positive 2
• Assignment of the X component (scalar value) of a circle to
- Negative
a scalar variable:
* Multiply 3 @a = @circle.CX
/ Divide • Assignment of the three scalar components of a circle (CX,
MOD Modulo 4 CY, CR) to a circle type variable:
+ Add 5 @circl_A = @circle
- Subtract
Example (Error)
Comparison = Equal to 6
• Incorrect assignment of a circle value into a scalar variable:
Operators <> Not equal to
@a = @circle
> Greater than
• Incorrect assignment of a scalar value into a circle variable:
< Less than
@circle = @a
>= Greater than
or equal to
<= Less than or
equal to
Logic Operators NOT Logical 7
inverse
AND Multiplication 8
OR Addition 9
XOR Exclusive 10
Appendix
Addition
Example
• IF @a > -1 AND @a < +1 THEN …a
...
END IF
• IF (@a > -1) AND (@a < +1) THEN…b
...
END IF
• @a = 1 + 2 * 3 … c
• @a = 1 + (2 * 3) … d
• @a = (1 + 2 ) * 3 … e
Commentary on the example
• a and b result in being processed the same way.
• c and d result in being processed the same way.
• The result of c is 7.
• The result of d is 7.
• The result of e is 9.
LJ-X UM_GB A-15
Operation Notations
IF THEN: Conditional function FOR TO: Loop with counter (specified count)
Process a single set of functions as a block from multiple Processing a set of functions multiple times in a loop
blocks based on the result of a conditional expression. fashion (from FOR to NEXT) for a specified number of
iterations.
Syntax
If <conditional expressions> THEN Syntax
- statements - FOR < Variable > = < Initial value > TO < Final value > [STEP
[ELSE IF] <increment>]
- statements - - statements -
[ELSE] NEXT
- statements -
END IF Explanation
• Before the loop is processed, an initial value is assigned to a
Reference
variable, which is then incriminated each time through the
The parts in the [ ] brackets in the syntax shown above can be
loop. This loop is repeated until the variable value exceeds
omitted.
the final value.
Explanation • STEP can be omitted (in which case the incremental value
• If the result of the IF statement condition is true, execute the is 1).
block after THEN and branch to END IF. • A loop can be exited using the EXIT FOR statement.
- If false, branch to the next ELSE IF. Processing resumes at the line following the NEXT
- If false and ELSE IF is omitted, branch to ELSE. statement.
- If no ELSE IF or ELSE is programmed and the Example
condition is FALSE, execution branches to END IF. @a = 0
• If the result of the ELSE IF statement condition is true, FOR @i = 1 TO 10
execute the block after THEN and branch to END IF. @a = @a + @i
- If false, branch to the next ELSE IF. IF @a > 11 THEN
- If false and ELSE IF is omitted, branch to ELSE. EXIT FOR
- If no ELSE IF or ELSE is programmed and the END IF
condition is FALSE, execution branches to END IF. NEXT
• The ELSE IF statement can be used as many times as Commentary on the example
necessary.
In the above example, the value of @a becomes 15.
• The ELSE statement can only be used as the last ELSE
term before END IF.
Example
@a = 4
IF @a < 3 THEN
@b = 333
ELSE IF @a < 4 THEN
Appendix
@b = 444
ELSE IF @a < 5 THEN
@b = 555
ELSE
@b = 999
END IF
Example explanation
In the above example, @b is assigned the value of 555.
A-16 LJ-X UM_GB

Operation Notations
DO: Conditional loop (unspecified count)

Processing a set of functions multiple times in a loop
fashion (from DO to LOOP) while a conditional statement is
true.
Syntax
• Pre-loop evaluation:
DO WHILE < conditional expression > -statements- LOOP
• Post loop evaluation:
DO - statements - LOOP WHILE < conditional expression >
Explanation
The DO statement uses pre-loop evaluation when the
condition is written after the DO statement and post-loop
evaluation when the condition is written after the LOOP
statement.
• In the pre-loop evaluation, the loop condition must be true in
order to process the functions below. When processing
reaches the LOOP statement, it returns to the DO
statement. If the conditional expression is false, the loop is
finished and processing resumes on the line after the LOOP
statement.
• In the post loop evaluation, the statements in the loop are
processed first and then the loop condition is checked. If
true, processing returns to the DO statement, otherwise the
loop is finished and processing resumes on the next line.
• The loop condition can be omitted (resulting in an endless
loop).
• LOOP can be exited using the EXIT DO statement in the
loop after the desired condition.
Processing resumes on the next line after the LOOP
statement LOOP. If WHILE is omitted the loop function must
include EXIT DO.
Example
(Pre-loop evaluation)
@a = 0
@i = 0
DO WHILE @i < 10
@i = @i +10
Appendix
@a = @a + @i
LOOP ...(1)
(Post loop evaluation)
@a = 0
@i = 10
DO
@i = @i + 1
@a = @a + @i
LOOP WHILE @i < 10 ...(2)
Example explanation
(1) In the above example @a is assigned the value of 10.
(2) In the above example @a is assigned the value of 11.
LJ-X UM_GB A-17

Operation Function List
Operation Function List
The following functions can be used in the operations on Two-dimensional geometric operation
the LJ-X Series.
function
Function name Description Ref.
Mathematical functions AddVector () Addition of two-dimensional page A-26
Function Description Ref. vectors
Abs() Absolute value page A-20 AngC () Center angle page A-26
Ave() Average page A-20 Angle () 2 point angle page A-26
AveR() Average value in a set range page A-20 AngleConv () Angle conversion page A-27
Ceil() Round up page A-20 AngW () Angle width page A-27
Deg() Convert radians to degrees page A-21 Circle3() Circle detection (3 points page A-28
Exp() Exponential page A-21 specified)
Floor() Round down page A-21 CircleTangent () Circular contact detection page A-28
Hist() Refer to the previous page A-21 ConvCrd () Coordinate system page A-29
measurement conversion
Int() Convert to integer page A-21 ConvCrd2() Coordinate system page A-29
Ln() Natural logarithm page A-21 conversion 2
Log() Common logarithm page A-22 Dist () Distance between 2 points page A-30
Max() Maximum value page A-22 I2Circle() Intersection point of two page A-30
MaxN() Location of Maximum value page A-22 circles
Min() Minimum value page A-22 I4XY() 4 point intersection page A-31
MinN() Location of minimum value page A-23 I4Line() Intersection of quadrilateral page A-31
diagonals
Pi() Circle ratio page A-23
ILineCircle () Circle, Straight line page A-32
Rad() Convert angle to radians page A-23
intersection
Round() Round to the nearest integer page A-23
InnerProd () Inner product of two- page A-32
Sqr() (2) page A-23
dimensional vectors
Sqrt() Square root page A-24
ISect () 2 straight line intersection page A-32
Stdev() Standard Deviation of a page A-24
Line () Line detection (2 points page A-33
Range of Values
specified)
LLAngle () 2 straight lines angle page A-33
Trigonometric functions LnAngle () Straight line angle page A-33
Function Description Ref. LnDist () Point, Distance between page A-33
Appendix
Acos() Angle formed by adjacent & page A-24 straight lines

hypotenuse LnDistP () Perpendicular vector page A-34
Asin() Angle formed by opposite & page A-24 distance from point to line
hypotenuse LnDistXY () Intersection point with page A-34
Atan() Angle formed by opposite & page A-25 perpendicular
adjacent MidLine () Bisector page A-34
Atan2() Angle formed by opposite & page A-25 MidXY () Middel point page A-35
adjacent (P1/P2)
OuterProd () Outer product of two- page A-35
Cos() Adjacent/Hypotenuse: Cosine page A-25
dimensional vector
Sin() Opposite/Hypotenuse: Sine page A-25
Rotate () Rotation page A-35
Tan() Opposite/Adjacent: Tangent page A-25
RotCenter () Rotation center page A-36
SubVector () Subtract of two-dimensional page A-36
vectors
VMidLine () Vertical bisector page A-37
AsCircle () Circular variable substitution page A-37
CX() Center x coordinate of page A-37
circular variable
A-18 LJ-X UM_GB

Function name Description Ref. Function name Description Ref.

CY() Center Y coordinate of page A-37 As3DPoint() 3D positional variable page A-45
circular variable substitution
CR() Radius of circular variable page A-38 TX() X coordinate of 3D positional page A-45
C.CX Center x coordinate of page A-38 variable
circular variable TY() Y coordinate of 3D positional page A-45
C.CY Center Y coordinate of page A-38 variable

TZ() Z coordinate of 3D position page A-45
circular variable
variable
C.CR Radius of circular variable page A-38
T.TX X coordinate of 3D positional page A-45
AsLine () Linear type variable page A-39
variable
substitution
T.TY Y coordinate of 3D positional page A-46
T () Angle of straight linear page A-39
variable
variable
T.TZ Z coordinate of 3D position page A-46
RH() Distance from origin of linear page A-39 variable
variable AsPlane() Define Plane from A, B and C page A-46
L.T Angle of straight linear variable page A-39 Value
L.RH Distance from origin of linear page A-39 PPA() X slope of planar variable page A-46
variable PPB() Y slope of planar variable page A-47
AsPoint () Positional variable page A-39 PPC() Z-intercept of planar variables page A-47
substitution P.PPA X slope of planar variable page A-47
X () X coordinate of positional page A-40 P.PPB Y slope of planar variable page A-47
variable
P.PPC Z-intercept of planar variables page A-47
Y () Y coordinate of positional page A-40
variable
Q.X X coordinate of positional page A-40
Calendar functions
variable Function Description Ref.
Q.Y Y coordinate of positional page A-40 ShiftDay() No. Day(s) offset page A-48
variable ShiftMonth() No. Month(s) offset page A-48
ShiftYear() No. Year(s) offset page A-48
Three-dimensional geometric operation

function BIT functions
Function name Description Ref. Function Description Ref.
AddVector3D() Addition of three-dimensional page A-41 B_And() Multiplication page A-49
vectors B_Not() Inverse page A-49
Dist3D() Distance between 3D page A-41
B_Or() Addition page A-49
coordinates
B_Xor() Exclusive Addition page A-49
I2Plane() Intersection line of two planes page A-41
Bind() Bind Bits page A-50
Appendix
ILine3DPlane() Intersection point of a 3D page A-41
straight line and a plane
Line3DDist() Distance between point and page A-42 Other
3D line
Function Description Ref.
Line3DDistXYZ() A perpendicular foot from a page A-42
ANS0 Operation result 0 page A-50
point to a 3D straight line
LnLn3DDist() Distance between 3D straight page A-43 ANS1 Operation result 1 page A-50
lines ANS2 Operation result 2 page A-50

Plane2Angle() Angle of two planes page A-43
PlanePassPt () Parallel Movement of Plane page A-43
PlDist () Distance of a plane to a point page A-44
PlDistP () Distance of a plane to a point page A-44
(signed)
PlDistXYZ () Foot of Perpendicular from page A-44
Point to Plane
SubVector3D() Subtract of three-dimensional page A-44
vectors
LJ-X UM_GB A-19

Mathematical functions AveR(Max, Min, P0, P1, ...,Pn): Average value

in a set range
Reference
Calculates the average value of terms that fall between a
The sample calculations given in the following explanations may
specified Min-to-Max range from P0-Pn (Maximum of 40
be not be precise due to computational errors inherent with
processors. items).
• The function will still calculate the average if the Min and
Max are reversed.
Abs(P): Absolute value • Results in 0 if none of terms P0 to Pn fall between the Min-
Calculates the absolute value of P. to-Max range.
Parameters Parameters
• P: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results in a • Max: Maximum value. Constant, scalar variable, or a
scalar value. function that results in a scalar value.
• Min: Minimum value. Constant, scalar variable, or a function
Return value that results in a scalar value.
Scalar value • P0 to Pn: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results
in a scalar value.
Example
@integer = -128 Return value
@natural = Abs(@integer) Scalar value
Commentary on the example Causes of errors

@natural is set to a value of 128. • An error occurs if none of the terms from P0 - Pn are
specified.
• An error occurs if P0 - Pn is more than 40 terms.
Ave(P0, P1, ...,Pn): Average
Example
Calculates the average value of P0-Pn (Maximum of 40
items). @max = 25
@min = 20
Parameters @a = 21
P0 to Pn: A constant, scalar variable, or a function that @b = 26
returns a scalar value. @c = 23
@average = AveR(@max, @min, @a, @b, @c)
Return value
Scalar value Commentary on the example
@average is set to a value of 22.
Causes of errors
• An error occurs if none of the terms P0 - Pn are specified.
• An error occurs if P0 - Pn is more than 40 terms. Ceil(P): Round up
Example Rounds P up to the nearest integer.
Appendix
@a = 8 Parameters
@b = 9
P: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results in a
@c = 2
scalar value.
@d = 3
@average = Ave(@a, @b, @c, @d) Return value
Scalar value
@average is set to a value of 5.5. Example
@a = Ceil(1.5)
@b = Ceil(-1.5)

@a and @b are set to values of 2 and -1, respectively.
A-20 LJ-X UM_GB

Deg(P): Convert radians to degrees Hist(P): Refer to the previous measurement

Converts the angle P from radians into degrees. Refer to the value of the previous measurement for P.
Parameters Parameters
P: Constant, scalar variable, or function that results in a P: Measured value or judgment value.
scalar value in radians. Reference
Return value • When the LJ-X Series is started, the program No. is changed, or
immediately after reset, the value is "0" regardless of the P
Scalar value (unit: degrees (°))
value.
Example • Self-quotation is useful for integration of the measured values in
the past. For example, when "ANS = Hist (ANS of own tool) +
@degree = Deg(3.14)
judgment result of measurement tool" is specified, NG count can
Commentary on the example be calculated for any measurement tool.
@degree is set to a value of 179.909...

Int(P): Convert to integer
Exp(): Exponential Truncate the first decimal place of P.
Returns the exponential base e value (2.71828183...). Parameters
Parameters P: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results in a
None scalar value.
Return value Return value

Scalar value Scalar value
Example Example
@a = Exp() @a = Int(1.5)
@b = Int(-1.5)
@a is set to a value of 2.718...
@a and @b are set to values of 1 and -1, respectively.
Floor(P): Round down

Ln(P): Natural logarithm
Truncate the first decimal place of P.
Calculates the natural logarithm of P.
Parameters
Parameters
scalar value. P: Scalar ((larger than 0).

Scalar value Scalar value Appendix
Example Causes of errors

@a = Floor(1.5) An error occurs if the value of P is 0 or less.
@b = Floor(-1.5) Example
Commentary on the example @e = Exp()
@a and @b are set to values of 1 and -2, respectively. @a = Ln(@e)

@a is set to a value of 1.
LJ-X UM_GB A-21

Log(P): Common logarithm MaxN(P0, P1, ..., Pn): Location of maximum

Calculates the common logarithm (base 10) of P. value
Returns the location (from 0 to n) of the largest value in P0-
Parameters
Pn (maximum of 40 items).
P: Scalar (larger than 0).
Parameters
Return value
P0 to Pn: A constant, scalar variable, or a function that
Scalar value
returns a scalar value.
Causes of errors
Return value
An error occurs if the value of P is 0 or less.
Scalar value
Example
Causes of errors
@a = Log(10)
• An error occurs if none of the terms from P0 - Pn are
Commentary on the example specified.
The value becomes @a=1. • An error occurs if P0 - Pn is more than 40 terms.
Example
Max(P0, P1, ...,Pn): Maximum value @a = 8
@b = 9
Calculates the largest value in P0 - Pn (Maximum of 40
@c = 2
items)
@d = 3
Parameters @maxn = MaxN(@a, @b, @c, @d)
P0 to Pn: A constant, scalar variable, or a function that Commentary on the example
@maxn is set to a value of 1.
Return value Reference
Scalar value • Note that it is counted from 0.
• If there are multiple maximum values, the smallest index among
Causes of errors them is outputted.
specified.
• An error occurs if P0 - Pn is more than 40 terms. Min(P0, P1, ...,Pn): Minimum value
Calculates the smallest value in P0 - Pn (maximum of 40
Example
items).
@a = 8
@b = 9 Parameters
@c = 2 P0 to Pn: A constant, scalar variable, or a function that
@d = 3 returns a scalar value.
@max = Max(@a, @b, @c, @d)
Return value
Appendix
Commentary on the example Scalar value

@max is set to a value of 9.
Causes of errors
specified.
Example
@a = 8
@b = 9
@c = 2
@d = 3
@min = Min(@a, @b, @c, @d)

@min is set to a value of 2.
A-22 LJ-X UM_GB

MinN(P0, P1, .........,Pn): Location of minimum Rad(D): Convert angle to radians

value Converts the angle D from degrees to radians.
Returns the location (from 0 to n) of the smallest value in
Parameters
P0-Pn (maximum of 40 items).
D: Constant, scalar variable, or function that results in a
Parameters scalar value in degrees (°).
P0 to Pn: A constant, scalar variable, or a function that
Return value
Scalar value in radians
Return value
Example
Scalar value
@radian = Rad(30)
Causes of errors
@radian is set to a value of 0.523...
specified.
Round(P): Round to the nearest integer
Example
@a = 8 Rounds P up or down to the nearest integer.
@b = 9
Parameters
@c = 2
@d = 3
scalar value.
@minn = MinN(@a, @b, @c, @d)
Return value
Scalar value
@minn is set to a value of 2.
Reference
Example
• Note that it is counted from 0. @a = Round(1.5)
• If there are multiple minimum values, the smallest index among @b = Round(1.4)
them is outputted. @c = Round(-1.4)
@d = Round(-1.5)
Pi(): Circle ratio Commentary on the example

Returns the value of p (circular constant) in double @a, @b, @c and @d are set to values of 2, 1, -1 and -2,
precision. respectively.
Parameters
None Sqr(P): Square
Calculates P to the power of 2.
Return value
Scalar value Parameters
Appendix
Reference P: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results in a

180 (deg) = n (radian). scalar value.
Return value
Scalar value
Example
@param = 2
@result = Sqr(@param)

@result is set to a value of 4.
LJ-X UM_GB A-23

Sqrt(P): Square root Trigonometric functions

Calculates the square root of P.
Parameters
Acos(P): Angle formed by adjacent &
hypotenuse
scalar value. Calculates the angle of an arc of a right-angled triangle
based on (P) (adjacent/hypotenuse).
Return value
Causes of errors
scalar value within the range of -1 to 1.
An error occurs if the value of P is negative.
Return value
Example
Scalar value (0 to 180) (Unit: degrees (°))
@param = 256
@result = Sqrt(@param) Causes of errors
An error occurs if the value of P falls outside of -1.0 to +1.0.
@result is set to a value of 16. Example
@degree = Acos(0.5)
Stdev(P0,P1,…,Pn): Standard deviation Commentary on the example

Finds the standard deviation of a range of values P0 to Pn @degree is set to a value of 60 (°).
(up to 40).
Parameters Asin(P): Angle formed by opposite &

P0 to Pn: A constant, scalar variable, or a function that hypotenuse
returns a scalar value. Calculates the angle of an arc of a right-angled triangle
Return value based on (P) (opposite/hypotenuse).

Causes of errors P: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results in a
scalar value within the range of -1 to 1.
specified. Return value
• An error occurs if P0 - Pn is more than 40 terms. Scalar value (-90 to 90) (Unit: degrees (°))
Example Causes of errors
@a = 8 An error occurs if the value of P falls outside of -1.0 to +1.0.
@b = 9
@c = 2 Example
@d = 3 @degree = Asin(0.5)
Appendix
@stdev = Stdev(@a, @b, @c, @d)

Commentary on the example @degree is set to a value of 30 (°).
@stdev is set to a value of 3.041.
A-24 LJ-X UM_GB

Atan(P): Angle formed by opposite & Cos(D): Adjacent/Hypotenuse: Cosine

adjacent Calculates opposite, hypotenuse ratio for a right-angled
Calculates the angle of an arc for a right-angled triangle triangle based on an arc (D) (°).
based on (P) (opposite/adjacent).
Parameters
Parameters D: Constant, scalar variable, or function that results in a
P: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results in a scalar value in degrees (°).
scalar value.
Return value
Return value Scalar value
Scalar value (-90 to 90) (Unit: degrees (°))
Example
Example @a = Cos(60)
@degree = Atan(1)
Commentary on the example @a is set to a value of 0.5.
@degree is set to a value of 45 (°).
Sin(D): Opposite/Hypotenuse: Sine

Atan2(P1, P2): Angle formed by opposite Calculates opposite, hypotenuse ratio for a right-angled
&adjacent (P1/P2) triangle based on an arc (D) (°).
Angle formed by opposite & adjacent (P1/P2) Parameters
If P2 = 0, the function processes as follows.
D: Constant, scalar variable, or function that results in a
• P1>0 ® 90
scalar value in degrees (°).
• P1<0 ® -90
• P1 = 0 ® error Return value
Scalar value
Parameters
P1, P2: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results Example
in a scalar value. @a = Sin(30)
Return value Commentary on the example

Scalar value (-180 to 180) (Unit: degrees (°)) @a is set to a value of 0.5.
Causes of errors
An error occurs if both P1 and P2 are 0. Tan(D): Opposite/Adjacent: Tangent
Example Calculates opposite, adjacent ratio for a right-angled
@degree = Atan2(1, 1) triangle based on an arc (D) (°).
Commentary on the example Parameters

@degree is set to a value of 45 (°). D: Constant, scalar variable, or function that results in a
Appendix
scalar value in degrees (°)
Return value
Scalar value
Example
@a = Tan(45)

@a is set to a value of 1.
LJ-X UM_GB A-25

Two-dimensional geometric operation Angle (Q1, Q2): Angle of 2 points

function Find the angle that the line connecting coordinates Q1 and
Q2 makes with the horizontal line.
AddVector(Q1, Q2): Addition of two- • Find the angle of Q2 centering on Q1.
• The angle is positive clockwise value against the horizontal
dimensional vectors
line.
Calculates the addition value of a two-dimensional vector.
Argument
Argument Q1, Q2: Positional variables or functions that return
Q1, Q2: Positional variables or functions that return positional values.
positional values.
Return value
Return value Scalar value (unit: degrees (°))
Positional value. • -Returns a value greater than 180 degrees and less than or
equal to 180 degrees.
Example
@vector1=AsPoint(1,1) Causes of errors
@vector2=AsPoint(2,2) If Q1 and Q2 have the same value, the function terminates
@resultVector = AddVector ( @vector1, @vector2 ) abnormally.
Commentary on the example Example

The value of @resultVector is (3, 3). @Q1 = AsPoint(0, 0)
@Q2 = AsPoint(1, 1)
@ang = Angle(@Q1, @Q2)
AngC(D1, D2): Center angle
Find the center angle when viewed clockwise from angle Commentary on the example
D1 (°) to angle D2 (°). @ang is set to a value of 45(°).
Argument Q1 X
D1,D2: Constant, scalar variable, or function that results in Angle(Q1,Q2)
a scalar value in degree (°). Q2
Return value Y
Example
@degree = AngC(30, 90)

The value of @degree is 60 (°).
D1
(30˚)
Appendix
D2
(90˚) AngC(D1, D2)=60˚
A-26 LJ-X UM_GB

AngleConv(D1, D2, P): Angle conversion AngW(D1, D2): Angle width

Add the angle D2 to the angle D1 and find the converted Find the angle width as viewed clockwise from angle D1 (°)
angle within the range specified by P. to angle D2 (°).
• In the normal case, the angle is measured clockwise using
Argument
the horizontal line at 3 o'clock as the reference line.
• Using this function, it is possible to convert to an angle D1,D2: . Constant, scalar variable, or function that results in
based on any reference line direction. a scalar value in degree (°).
Argument Return value

• D1: Angle before conversion (unit: degree (°)). Specify Scalar value (unit: degrees (°))
constant, scalar variable, or function that results in a scalar Example 1
value.
@degree = AngW(30, 90)
• D2: Angle to be added (unit: degree (°)). Specify constant,
scalar variable, or function that results in a scalar value Commentary of the example 1
• In the case of P: 0, it returns as an angle between -180 and The value of @degree is 60 (°).
180 (°).
In case of 1, it returns as an angle between 0 and 360 (°).
Example 2
Specify constant, scalar variable, or function that results in a @degree = AngW(90, 30)
scalar value. Commentary of the example 2
Return value The value of @degree is 300 (°).
Angle after conversion (unit: degree (°)). D1
(30˚)
Scalar value
Causes of errors D2
(90˚)
AngW(D1, D2)=60˚
If P is other than 0 or 1, the function terminates abnormally
Example
@after0 = AngleConv(225, 90, 0) AngW(D1, D2)=300˚
@after1 = AngleConv(225, 90, 1)
D2(30˚)
D1(90˚)
The above is converted to an angle with the 12 o'clock
direction as the reference line.
The value of @ after0 is -45 (°).
The value of @ after1 is 315 (°).
D2(90°)
AngleConv(225, 90, 0)
D1(225°)
Appendix
AngleConv(225, 90, 1)
LJ-X UM_GB A-27

Circle3(Q1,Q2,Q3): Detect Circle (3 Points) CircleTangent(C, Q, P): Circular contact

Calculates the circle that passes through three X,Y detection
positions (Q1, Q2, Q3). Calculate tangent points (two points) drawn from point Q to
circle C.
Argument
Q1, Q2, Q3: Positional variables or functions that return Argument
positional values. • C: Circular variable or a function that returns a circular value.
• Q: Positional Variable or a function that returns a circular
Return value
value.
Circular value.
• P: A function that returns a constant, a scalar type variable,
Causes of errors or a scalar type value.
If two or more points are equal coordinates or if three points - 0: Looking at point Q from circle C, return the value of the
are aligned, a function tarminates abnormally. left intersection point.
- 1: Looking at point Q from circle C, return the value of the
Example
right side intersection point.
@point0 = AsPoint(10,0)
@point1 = AsPoint(0,10) Return value
Positional value (unit: pixel).
@circle = Circle3(@point0, @point1, @point2)
Causes of errors
• If point Q is inside a circle, the function ends abnormally.
If two or more points are equal coordinates or if three points
• If P is other than 0 or 1, the function terminates abnormally
are aligned, a function ends abnormally.
Example
Q1
@circle = AsCircle(10, 10, 10)
@point = AsPoint(-10,10)
C @tangent0 = CircleTangent(@circle, @point, 0) … (1)
@tangent1 = CircleTangent(@circle, @point, 1) … (2)
Q3
Q2 (1) contact is (5, 18.660 ...).
(2) contact is (5, 1.339...).
Q0
Appendix
A-28 LJ-X UM_GB

ConvCrd(Q1, Q2, D, P): Coordinate system ConvCrd2(Q1, Q2, D, P1, P2): Coordinate
conversion system conversion 2
Invert D ° with Q2 as the origin, and find the position of Q1 Convert the coordinates of the points represented in the
when expressed in a P-fold coordinate system (coordinate image's coordinate system to ones viewed from an any
system conversion). coordinate system.
• Outputs the position of Q1 in terms of the origin set at Q2,
Argument
rotated D degrees and scaled by P1.
• Q1, Q2: Positional variables or functions that return • Converts to a right hand system or a left hand system.
positional values.
• D: Constant, scalar variable, or function that results in a Argument
scalar value in degree (°). • Q1: Transformation source coordinates (coordinates are
• P:Constant, scalar variable, or a scalar value expressed in transformation source coordinate system)
Positional variable or function that returns a positional value.
Return value
• Q2: The origin of the coordinate system on conversion
Positional value (unit: pixel). destination (coordinates are expressed on the conversion
Causes of errors source coordinate system) Positional variable or function
that returns the positional value .
If P = 0, the function terminates abnormally.
• D: Rotation angle of X axis in the destination coordinate
Example system (coordinates expressed in terms of the source
@before = AsPoint(10,10 + 10 * Sqrt(2)) coordinate system) Constant, scalar variable, or function
@origin = AsPoint(10,10) that returns a scalar value.
@after = ConvCrd(@before, @origin, 45, 1) • P1: Magnification of the coordinate system on conversion
destination (coordinates are expressed on the conversion
Commentary on the example source coordinate system) Constant, scalar variable, or
@after is set to a value of (10, 10). function that results in scalar value.
0 X • P2: 0 if the positive side of the Y axis faces the same way in
Q2 the source and destination. 1 if the positive side of the Y axis
Ｄ° faces in the opposite direction between the source and
Q1 P times
destination. (Constant, scalar type variable, or function that
X returns a scalar value.)
Y
Return value
Positional value.
Causes of errors
• If P = 0, the function terminates abnormally.
• An error occurs if the value of P2 is neither 0 nor 1.
Example
@before = AsPoint(10,10 + 10 * Sqrt(2))
Appendix
@origin = AsPoint(10,10)
@after0 = ConvCrd2(@before, @origin, 45, 1, 0) … (1)
@after1 = ConvCrd2(@before, @origin, 45, 1, 1) … (2)

(1) The value of @after0 is (10,10).
(2) The value of @after1 is (10,-10).
0 X
y
Q2
Q1 Ｄ°
X
P times
Y
LJ-X UM_GB A-29

Dist(Q1, Q2): Distance between 2 points I2Circle(C1,C2,P): Intersection point of two

Calculates the distance between two X,Y positions Q1 and circles
Q2. Calculate the intersection point of two circles C1 and C2 (if
they are in contact, the same coordinates are output for
Argument
both points).
Q1, Q2: Positional variables or functions that return
positional values. Argument
• C1, C2: Circular variable or a function that returns a circular
Return value
value.
Scalar value (unit: pixel).
• P: Constant, scalar variable, or a scalar value
Example - 0: Returns the left intersect point when looking at the line
@point1 = AsPoint(70,20) passing through the intersecting points (Q0, Q1) from the
@point2 = AsPoint(30,50) center of the circle (C1).
@distance = Dist(@point1, @point2) - 1: Looking at the straight line passing Q0 and Q1 from the
Commentary on the example center point of circle C1, return the value of the right
@distance is set to a value of 50. intersection point.
0 X Return value
Q1
Causes of errors
Q2
• If the circles do not intersect, the function ends abnormally.
Y • If P is other than 0 or 1, the function terminates abnormally
Example
@circle0 = AsCircle(10, 10, 10)
@circle1 = AsCircle(20, 20, 10)
@point0 = I2Circle(@circle0, @circle1, 0) … (1)
@point1 = I2Circle(@circle0, @circle1, 1) … (2)

(1) (20,10) is returned for a intersection point.
(2) (10,20) is returned for a intersection point.
Q0
C1
C2
Appendix
Q1
A-30 LJ-X UM_GB

I4XY(Q1,Q2,Q3,Q4): 4 point intersection I4Line(L1,L2,L3,L4): Intersection of a

Finds the intersection of diagonals from four points. quadrilateral’s diagonal lines
Argument Finds the intersection of the diagonals of a quadrilateral
Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4: Positional variables or functions that that is composed by four straight lines.
return positional values.
Return value Argument
Positional value. L1,L2,L3,L4: Linear variables or a function that return linear
Causes of errors value.
• The function terminates abnormally if Q1 and Q3 as well as
Return value
Q2 and Q4 have the same coordinates.
Position value
• The function terminates abnormally because an intersection
cannot be found if lines Q1Q3 and Q2Q4 are parallel. Causes of errors
Example • The function terminates abnormally if at least 1 of the 4

required intersections cannot be found.
@p0 = I4XY(@Q1,@Q2,@Q3,@Q4)
• The function terminates abnormally if diagonals cannot be
Commentary on the example found from the 4 line intersections.
The coordinates of the intersection point Q0 are returned to
Example
@ p0.
@p0 = I4Line(@L1,@L2,@L3,@L4)
Q2
Q1 Commentary on the example
The coordinates of the intersection point Q0 are returned to
Q0 @ p0.
L1
Q3
L2
Q4
Q0
L4
L3
Appendix
LJ-X UM_GB A-31

ILineCircle(C,L,P): Circle, straight line InnerProd(Q1, Q2): Inner product of two-

intersection dimensional vector
Calculates the two intersecting points of a circle (C) and a Calculates the inner product of the 2D vector consisting of
line (L). The points will have the same value if the circle and Q1 and Q2.
line are touching but not passing through each other.
Argument
Argument Q1, Q2: Positional variables or functions that return
• C: Circular variable or a function that returns a circular value. positional values.
• L: Line variable or a function that results in line data
Return value
- 0: Looking at a straight line L from the center point of circle Scalar value
C, return the value of the left intersection point. Example

- 1: Returns the right intersect point when looking at the line @vector1=AsPoint(1,1)
(L) from the center of the circle (C). @vector2=AsPoint(2,2)
@result = InnerProd( @vector1, @vector2 )
Reference
When line L passes through the center of circle C, it is not Commentary on the example
determined. Specification by P value is not allowed. @result is set to a value of 4 (@vector1.X * @vector2.X +
Return value @vector1.Y * @vector2.Y).

ISect(L1, L2): Intersection of 2 lines
Causes of errors
• An error occurs if the circle and line do not intersect. Calculates the intersecting point of line L1 and line L2.
• If P is other than 0 or 1, the function terminates abnormally.
Argument
Example L1, L2: Line variable or a function that results in line data.
Return value
@line = AsLine(15 * Sqrt(2), 45) … (1)
@point0 = ILineCircle(@circle, @line, 0) … (2)
@point1 = ILineCircle(@circle, @line, 1) … (3) Causes of errors
Commentary on the example An error occurs if L1 and L2 are parallel.
(1) straight line y = -x + 30 is expressed. Example

(2)(20, 10) is returned for the intersection point. @point0 = AsPoint(20,0)
(3) (10, 20) is returned for the intersections. @point1 = AsPoint(0,10)
L
C @intersect = ISect( Line(@point0,@point1),
Q0 Line(@point2,@point3))
Appendix

Q1
@intersect.X is 10 and @intersect.Y is 5.
L1
L2
A-32 LJ-X UM_GB

Line(Q1, Q2): Create line from 2 points LnAngle(L): Angle of line to horizontal
Find a straight line connecting coordinates Q1 and Q2. Find the angle that the straight line L makes with the
horizontal line (the angle that the straight line makes with
Argument
the horizontal line is -90°＜θ≦90°).
Point
positional values.
If the straight line is vertical to the horizontal line, it is treated as 90
Return value °.
Line data Argument
Causes of errors L: Line variable or a function that results in line data.
If Q1 and Q2 have the same value, the function terminates Return value
abnormally.
Scalar value (unit: degrees (°)).
Example
Example
@line = AsLine(Sqrt(3) / 2,60)
@ang = LnAngle(@line)
@line = Line(@point1, @point2)
@ang is set to a value of -30(°).
@line.T is set to a value of 45°, and @line.RH to 49.497.
0 X LnAngle(L)
0 X
Q1
L
Q2
Y
Y
LLAngle(L1, L2): Angle between 2 lines

LnDist(L, Q): Circle, distance between 2
Calculates the angle (0° £ q < 180°) formed by lines L1 and
straight lines
L2 where the angle is the absolute difference of the angle
formed (-90°＜θ≦90°) by L1 and L2 with a horizontal line. Calculates the perpendicular distance between line L and
X,Y position Q.
Point
If the straight line is vertical to the horizontal line, it is treated as  Argument
90 °.
• L: Line variable or a function that results in line data.
Argument • Q: position variable or a function that results in position data.
L1, L2: Line variable or a function that results in line data.
Return value
Return value Scalar value (unit: pixel).
Appendix

Example
Example @point = AsPoint(0,0)
@line0 = AsLine(Sqrt(3) / 2, 60) @line = AsLine(1.5, 60)
@line1 = AsLine(0, 120) @distance = LnDist(@line, @point)
@angle = LLAngle(@line0, @line1)
Commentary on the example @distance is set to a value of 1.5.
The value of @angle is 60 (°). Q L
LnDist(L,Q)
L1
LLAngle (L1,L2)
L2
LJ-X UM_GB A-33

LnDistP(L, Q): Distance from point to line MidLine(L1,L2,P): Bisector

(Signed) Calculates two bisecting lines based on the intersection of
Calculates the signed perpendicular distance between line two straight lines L1 and L2.
L and X,Y position Q. When the point Q is below the
Argument
straight line L it is a positive value, and when it is above the
• L1, L2: linear variables or functions that return linear values.
line L it is a negative value.
Argument - 0: q component returns the median between L1 and L2.
• L: Line variable or a function that results in line data. - 1: returns the line perpendicular to the median when 0 is
• Q: position variable or a function that results in position data. specified.

Scalar value (unit: pixel). Line data
• When point Q is more on the positive side of the Y axis than
line L, a positive value is returned. Causes of errors
• However, when line L is parallel to axis Y, it is when point Q • An error occurs if L1 and L2 are parallel.
is more on the positive side of axis X than line L that a • If P is other than 0 or 1, the function terminates abnormally.
positive value is returned.
Example
Example @Line0 = AsLine(10, 60)
@point = AsPoint(0,0) @Line1 = AsLine(0, 120)
@line = AsLine(1.5, 60) @line = MidLine(@Line0, @Line1, 0) …(1)
@distance = LnDistP(@line, @point) @line = MidLine(@Line0, @Line1, 1) …(2)
Commentary on the example Commentary on the example

@distance is set to a value of -1.5. (1) It will be θ=90°, ρ=5.7735(10 / √3)
Q (2) It will be θ=0°, ρ=10
L
LnDistP(L,Q)
L2 0 X
L1' (specify P = 0)
LnDistXY(L, Q): Intersection in respect to Y
perpendicular L2' (specify P = 1)
Calculates the intersecting point between the line L and the

perpendicular line from X,Y position Q.
Argument
• L: Line variable or a function that results in line data.
Appendix
• Q: position variable or a function that results in position data.
Return value
Example
@point = AsPoint(10,10)
@line = AsLine(5 * Sqrt(2), 45)
@intersect = LnDistXY(@line, @point)

@intersect is set to a value of (5, 5).
L
LnDistXY(L,Q)
A-34 LJ-X UM_GB

MidXY(Q1, Q2): Midpoint Rotate(Q1,Q2,D,P): Rotation

Calculates the point Q halfway between X,Y positions Q1 Rotate Q1 by D degrees centering Q2 and calculate
and Q2. coordinates multiplied by P.
Argument Argument
Q1, Q2: Positional variables or functions that return • Q1: The rotation source coordinates. Position variable or a
positional values. function that results in position data.
• Q2: Rotation center. Position variable or a function that
Return value
results in position data.
Positional value (unit: pixel). • D: Rotation angle. Constant, scalar variable, or a function
Example that results in a scalar value make clockwise positive.
• P: Magnification Constant, scalar variable, or a function that
results in a scalar value.
@mid =MidXY(@point0, @point1) Return value
Commentary on the example Positional value (unit: pixel).
@mid is set to a value of (50, 50). Example

0 X @before = AsPoint(15,15)
Q1
@origin = AsPoint(10,10)
@after = Rotate(@before, @origin, 90, 2)
Q
Q2
@After is (0, 20).
Y
(0,0)
X
OuterProd(Q1, Q2): Outer product of vectors Q2(Rotation center)
Calculates the outer product of the 2D vector consisting of
Q1 and Q2.
Ｄ°
Argument P times SrcQ(Before conversion)

positional values.
Y
Return value DstQ(After conversion)
Scalar value
Example
@vector1=AsPoint(1,1)
@vector2=AsPoint(2,2)
@result = OuterProd( @vector1, @vector2 )
Appendix

The value of @result is 0 (@vector1.X * @vector2.Y -
@vector1.Y * @vector2.X).
LJ-X UM_GB A-35

RotCenter(Q1,Q2,D): Rotation center SubVector(Q1, Q2): Subtract of 2D vectors

Find the rotation center coordinates when rotated D Calculates the vector by subtracting position vector Q2
degrees from Q1 to Q2. from position vector Q1.
Argument Argument
• Q1: Positional variables or functions that return positional Q1, Q2: Positional variables or functions that return
values (Coordinates before rotation). positional values.
• Q2: Positional variables or functions that return positional
Return value
values (Coordinates after rotation).
• D: Constant, scalar variable, or function that results in a Positional value.
scalar value in degrees (°) (Rotation angle from Q1 to Q2). Example
Return value @vector1=AsPoint(1,1)
Positional value. @vector2=AsPoint(2,2)
@result = SubVector( @vector1, @vector2 )
Causes of errors
• If Q1 and Q2 have the same value, the function ends
abnormally. The value of @result is (-1,-1).
• If D is a multiple of 360 degrees (such as -360 degrees, 0
degrees, 360 degrees, 720 degrees, etc.), the function ends
abnormally.
Example
@origin=RotCenter( @before, @after, 30 )

Assigns to @origin the rotation center value used for
rotating the point of @before 30 degrees to move it to the
coordinate of @after.
Reference
@circle = AsCircle(10, 20, 30) @radius = @circle.CR
If D is positive and left-handed If D is negative and left-handed

0 X 0 X
Rotation center
Q1
-D
Q1
D Q2
Q2
Rotation center
Y Y
Appendix
Rotation center
Q1 D
Q2
X
0
If D is positive and right-handed
A-36 LJ-X UM_GB

VMidLine(Q1, Q2): Bisector between two CX (C): Center x coordinate of circular

points variable
Calculates the perpendicular line that bisects the line Extract the X coordinate of the center of the circle from the
passing through X,Y positions Q1 and Q2. circular variable.
Argument Argument
Q1, Q2: Positional variables or functions that return C: Circular variable or function that returns circular value.
positional values.
Return value
Return value Scalar value
Line data
Example
Causes of errors @circle = AsCircle(10, 20, 30)
An error occurs if Q1 and Q2 are the same coordinates. @x = CX(@circle)
Example Commentary on the example

@point0 = AsPoint(10*Sqrt(3),0) @X will be10.
@point1 = AsPoint(0,10) Reference
@line =VMidLine(@point0, @point1) It has the same result as the following operation.
@x = @circle.CX
@line.T is set to a value of -30°, and @line.RH to 5.
0 X
CY (C): Center Y coordinate of circular
Q1
variable
VMidLine(Q1,Q2)
Extract the Y coordinate of the center of the circle from the
Q2
circular variable.
Y
Argument
C: Circular variable or function that returns circular value.
AsCircle(P1, P2, P3): Define circle from
single X,Y and radius values Return value
Scalar value
Create a circular variable by assigning P1 as the X center
coordinate of a circle, P2 to as Y center coordinate, and P3 Example
as radius R. @circle = AsCircle(10, 20, 30)
@y = CY(@circle)
Argument
• P1: X-coordinate value of the center point (a constant, a Commentary on the example
scalar variable, or a function that returns a scalar value). @y is set to a value of 20.
• P2: Y-coordinate value of the center point (a constant, a
Reference
Appendix
scalar variable, or a function that returns a scalar value).
It has the same result as the following operation.
• P3: Radius value (a constant, a scalar variable, or a function
that returns a scalar value). @y = @circle.CY
Return value
Circular value.
Example
LJ-X UM_GB A-37

CR (C): Radius of circular variable C.CY: Center Y coordinate of circular

Extract the circle radius from the circular variable. variable
Argument Argument
C: Circular variable or function that returns circular value. None

Scalar value Scalar value
Example Example: Only center Y coordinate is individually

@circle = AsCircle(10, 20, 30) updated.
@radius = CR(@circle) @circle = AsCircle(10, 20, 30)
@circle.CY = 40 ‘Update of center Y coordinate
Commentary on the example @y = @circle.CY
@radius is set to a value of 30.
Reference
@y is set to a value of 40.
@circle = AsCircle(10, 20, 30) Reference
@radius = @circle.CR It has the same result as the following operation.
@circle.CY = 40
C.CX: Center x coordinate of circular variable @y = CY(@circle) 'When using CY (C)
Argument
None C.CR: Radius of circular variable
Return value Argument
Scalar value None
Example: Only center X coordinate is individually Return value

updated. Scalar value
Example: Only radius value is individually updated.
@circle.CX = 40 'Update of center x coordinates
@x = @circle.CX @circle = AsCircle(10, 20, 30)
@circle.CR = 40 'Update of radius value
Commentary on the example @radius = @circle.CR
@x is set to a value of 40.
Reference
@radius is set to a value of 40.
@circle = AsCircle(10, 20, 30) Reference
@circle.CX = 40 It has the same result as the following operation.

@x = CX(@circle) ‘When using CX (C) @circle = AsCircle(10, 20, 30)
Appendix
@circle.CR = 40
@radius = CR(@circle) 'When using CR (C)
A-38 LJ-X UM_GB

AsLine(P, D): Linear variable substitution L.T: Angle of linear variable

Assign a linear variable when expressing a straight line as Gets the clockwise angle which has the 3 o’clock direction
xcosD + ysinD = P. of the perpendicular line (drawn from the origin (0,0) to the
line) as 0°.
Argument
• P: Distance between origin and straight line (constant, scalar Argument
variable, or a function that results in a scalar value). None
• D: The clockwise angle that the perpendicular drawn
Example: Only θ is individually updated.
straight from the origin forms with the 3 o'clock direction
(unit: °) (constant, scalar variable, or a function that results in @line = AsLine(10, 45)
a scalar value). @line.T = 30 ‘Update of θ
@theta = @line.T
Return value
Line data
@theta is set to a value of 30.
Example
Reference
@line = AsLine(10, 45) It has the same result as the following operation.
@line = AsLine(10, 45)
@line.T = 30
T (L): Angle of linear variable
@theta = T(@line) ‘When using T(L)
Gets the clockwise angle which has the 3 o’clock direction
of the perpendicular line (drawn from the origin (0,0) to the
line) as 0°.
L.RH: Distance from origin of linear variable
Gets the perpendicular line length (pixel) drawn from the
Argument
origin (0, 0) to the line.
T (variable name): θ: 64 bit floating point number.
Argument
Example
None
@theta = T(@line) Example: Only ρ is individually updated.
@line.RH = 30 ‘Update of ρ
@theta is set to a value of 45.
@rho = @line.RH
Reference
@line = AsLine(10, 45) @rho is set to a value of 30.
@theta = @line.T Reference

RH (L): Distance from origin of linear variable
@line.RH = 30
Gets the perpendicular line length (pixel) drawn from the @rho = RH(@line) ‘When RH(L) is used
Appendix
origin (0, 0) to the line.
Argument AsPoint(P1, P2): Positional variable

L: Line variable or a function that results in line data substitution
Example Substitute position variables with P1 as X coordinate and
@line = AsLine(10, 45) P2 as Y coordinate.
@rho = RH(@line) Argument
Commentary on the example • P1: The value of X coordinate (Constant, scalar variable, or
@rho is set to a value of 10. a function that results in a scalar value).
• P2: The value of Y coordinate (Constant, scalar variable, or
Reference
a function that results in a scalar value).
@line = AsLine(10, 45) Return value
@rho = @line.RH Positional value.
Example
@point = AsPoint(10, 20)
LJ-X UM_GB A-39

X (Q): X coordinate of positional variable Q.X: X coordinate of positional variable

Obtain the X coordinate from a positional variable. Argument
Argument None
Q: Positional variables or functions that return positional Example: Update only X coordinate individually
value. @point = AsPoint(1, 2)
Example @point.X = 10 ‘Update of X coordinate
@x = @point.X
@x = X(@point) Commentary on the example
Commentary on the example @X will be10.
@x is set to a value of 1. Reference

Reference
@point.X = 10
@x = X(@point) ‘When X(Q) is used
@x = @point.X
Q.Y: Y coordinate of positional variable

Y (Q): Y coordinate of positional variable
Obtain the Y coordinate from a positional variable. Argument
None
Argument
Q: Positional variables or functions that return positional Example: Update only Y coordinate individually
value. @point = AsPoint(1, 2)
@point.Y = 10 ‘Update of Y coordinate
Example @y = @point.Y
@y = Y(@point) Commentary on the example
Reference
Reference @point = AsPoint(1, 2)
It has the same result as the following operation. @point.Y = 10
@point = AsPoint(1, 2) @y = Y(@point) ‘When Y(Q) is used
@y = @point.Y
Appendix
A-40 LJ-X UM_GB

Three-dimensional geometric operation I2Plane(A1,A2,P,V): Intersection line of two

function planes
Finds the line of intersection of two planes.
AddVector3D(Q1,Q2): Addition of three- Argument
dimentional vectors • A1,A2: Planar variables or functions that return planar
(3) Calculate the addition value of three-dimensional values.
vectors. • P: 3D positional variable (The found point on the intersection
line is stored).
Argument • V: 3D positional variable (The found direction vector of the
Q1,Q2: 3D positional variables or functions that return 3D intersection line is stored).
positional value.
Return value
Return value Scalar value (0=Success). When the error conditions are
3D positional value. fulfilled, the function abnormally terminates, so the return
Example value is not returned.
@P1 = As3DPoint (10,10,10) Causes of errors

@P2 = As3DPoint (20,20,20) If the normal vectors of the two planes are parallel, the
@P = AddVector3D (@P1,@P2) function ends abnormally.
Commentary on the example Reference
The value of @P is (30,30,30). Since the plane formula is expressed as z = ax + by + c, it is not

possible to calculate a plane with a normal perpendicular to the Z
axis.
Dist3D(Q1,Q2): Distance between 3D

ILine3DPlane(P,V,A): Intersection of 3D line
coordinates
and plane
Find distance between 3D coordinates Q1 and Q2.
Finds the intersection of a 3D line and a plane. The 3D line
Argument passes through 3D position P and is shown as a straight
Q1, Q2: 3D positional variables or functions that returns 3D line with direction vector V.
positional value.
Argument
Return value • P: 3D positional variables or functions that return 3D
Scalar value (Unit: mm). positional value.
• V: A 3D position variable or a function that returns a 3D
Example
position value.
@Q1 = As3DPoint (TX1,TY1,TZ1) • A: Planar variables or functions that return planar values.
@Q2 = As3DPoint (TX2,TY2,TZ2)
@distance = Dist3D(@Q1,@Q2) Return value Appendix
3D positional value
Distance between two points is returned to @distance. Causes of errors
z • If the direction vector of the 3D line is perpendicular to the
Q2 plane's normal vector, then it is a function abnormal end
occurs.
• If the direction vector V is (0, 0, 0), a function abnormal end
occurs.
Q1
Reference
x
Since the plane formula is expressed as z = ax + by + c, it is not
y
possible to calculate a plane with a normal perpendicular to the Z
axis.
LJ-X UM_GB A-41

Line3DDist(P,V,Q): Distance between point Line3DDistXYZ(P,V,Q): A perpendicular foot from

and 3D line a point to a 3D straight line
Finds the distance between a point and a 3D line (straight Finds the coordinates (XYZ) for the foot of a perpendicular
line in directional vector V passing through 3D position P). line dropped from a point to a 3D line (straight line in
directional vector V passing through 3D position P).
Argument
Argument
• P: 3D positional variables or functions that return 3D • P: 3D positional variables or functions that return 3D
positional value. positional value.
• V: A 3D position variable or a function that returns a 3D • V: A 3D position variable or a function that returns a 3D
position value. position value.
• Q: 3D positional variables or function that return 3D • Q: 3D positional variables or function that return 3D
positional value. positional value.
Scalar value (Unit: mm). 3D positional value.
Causes of errors Causes of errors
If the direction vector V is (0, 0, 0), a function abnormal end If the direction vector V is (0, 0, 0), a function abnormal end
occurs. occurs.
Example Example
@P = As3DPoint (TX1,TY1,TZ1) @P0 = As3DPoint (TX1,TY1,TZ1)
@V = As3DPoint (TX2,TY2,TZ2) @V = As3DPoint (TX2,TY2,TZ2)
@Q = As3DPoint (TX3,TY3,TZ3) @Q = As3DPoint (TX3,TY3,TZ3)
@distance = Line3DDist (@P,@V,@Q) @p1 = Line3DDistXYZ (@P0,@V,@Q)
The distance from point Q to the 3D line is returned to The coordinates of the perpendicular line and straight line
@distance. intersection P1 are returned to @p1.
z V z V
Q
Q
distance P1
x x
y P y
P0
Appendix
A-42 LJ-X UM_GB

LnLn3DDist(P1,V1,P2,V2): Distance between Plane2Angle(A1,A2): Angle of two planes

3D straight lines Find a plane and the angle of the plane.
Finds the distance between two 3D lines (straight lines in
Argument
directional vector V passing through 3D position P).
A1,A2: Planar variables or functions that return planar
Argument values
• P1: 3D positional variables or functions that return 3D
Return value
positional value
Scalar value (Unit: degree (°))
• V1: 3D positional variables or functions that return 3D
A2
positional value
• P2: 3D positional variables or functions that return 3D
positional value
• V2: 3D positional variables or functions that return 3D
A1
positional value
Return value
Scalar value (Unit: mm)
Causes of errors
The function terminates abnormally if direction vector V1 or
V2 is (0,0,0).
PlanePassPt(A,Q): Parallel movement of a
plane
Example
Shift a plane A to find a plane Q passing through the
@P1 = As3DPoint (TX1,TY1,TZ1)
specified point.
@V1 = As3DPoint (TX3,TY3,TZ3)
@P2 = As3DPoint (TX2,TY2,TZ2) Argument
@V2 = As3DPoint (TX4,TY4,TZ4) • A: Planar variables or functions that return planar values
@distance = LnLn3DDist (@P1,@V1,@P2,@V2) • Q: 3D positional variables or function that return 3D
positional value
The distance between the two lines is returned to Return value
@distance. Planar value
z
P1
Q
V1
distance
P2
x
V2
y Appendix
A
LJ-X UM_GB A-43

PlDist(A,Q): Distance between a plane and a PlDistXYZ(A,Q): Foot of perpendicular from

point point to plane
Find distance between a plane A and 3D coordinate Q. Find the coordinates (XYZ) of a perpendicular foot drawn
Argument from a point to a plane.
• A: Planar variables or functions that return planar values
Argument
• Q: 3D positional variables or function that return 3D
positional value • A: Planar variables or functions that return planar values
• Q: 3D positional variables or function that return 3D
Return value positional value
Scalar value (Unit: mm).
Return value
Example 3D positional value.
@Q = As3DPoint (TX,TY,TZ)
Example
@A = AsPlane (P1,P2,P3)
@line =VMidLine(@point0, @point1) @Q = As3DPoint (TX,TY,TZ)
@A = AsPlane(P1,P2,P3)
Commentary on the example Scalar value
Distance from a plane A to a point Q is returned to
@distance.
The 3D coordinates of the perpendicular foot drawn from
Q
point Q on plane A are returned to @p. (Reference) Since
the formula of the plane is expressed by z = ax + by + c, it is
distance not possible to calculate a plane with a normal
perpendicular to the Z axis.
Q
z
A
A
PlDistP(A,Q): Distance between a plane and P
a point (signed)
x
Find the distance between plane A and 3D coordinates Q, y
and find the signed result (PlDist's signed output with
positive normal vector direction).
SubVector3D(Q1, Q2): Subtract of 3D vectors
Argument
• A: Planar variables or functions that return planar values Finds the subtracted value of 3D vectors.
• Q: 3D positional variables or function that return 3D Argument
positional value
Q1,Q2: 3D positional variables or functions that return 3D
positional value.
Appendix
Return value
Scalar value (Unit: mm). Return value
When the point Q is on the positive side of Z-axis more
3D positional value.
than the plane A, a positive value is returned.
Q1 Example
z @P1 = As3DPoint(20,20,20)
@P2 = As3DPoint(10,10,10)
distance>0
@P = SubVector3D (@P1,@P2)
A
@P is set to a value of (10,10,10).
x
y
distance<0
Q2
A-44 LJ-X UM_GB

As3DPoint(P1,P2,P3): 3D positional variable TY(T): Y coordinate of 3D position variable

substitution This function obtains the Y coordinate from a 3D position
Substitute P1, P2 and P3 into 3D position type TX, TY and variable.
TZ.
Argument
Argument T: 3D positional variables or functions that return 3D
• P1: The value of TX (constant, scalar variable, or a function positional value
that results in a scalar value)
Example
• P2: The value of TY (constant, scalar variable, or a function
@p = As3DPoint(10,20,30)
that results in a scalar value)
@ty = TY(@p)
• P3: The value of TZ (constant, scalar variable, or a function
that results in a scalar value) Commentary on the example
Return value @ty is set to a value of 20.
3D positional value. Reference

Example @p = As3DPoint(10,20,30)
@P = As3DPoint(10,20,30) @ty = @p.TY

It has the same result as the following operation. TZ(T): Z coordinate of 3D position variable
@P.TX = 10 This function obtains the Z coordinate from a 3D position
@P.TY = 20 variable.
@P.TZ = 30
Argument
T: 3D positional variables or functions that return 3D
TX(T): X coordinate of 3D position variable positional value
Obtain the X coordinate from a 3D positional variable.
Example
Argument @p = As3DPoint(10,20,30)
T: 3D positional variables or functions that return 3D @tz = TZ(@p)
positional value
Example @tz is set to a value of 30.
@p = As3DPoint(10,20,30) Reference
@tx = TX(@p) It has the same result as the following operation.
@p = As3DPoint(10,20,30)
@tz = @p.TZ
@tx is set to a value of 10.
Reference

T.TX: X coordinate of 3D position variable
Appendix
@p = As3DPoint(10,20,30)
Argument
@tx = @p.TX
None
Example: Update only X coordinate individually

@p = As3DPoint(1,2,3)
@p.TX = 10 ‘X coordinate update
@tx = @p.TX

@tx is set to a value of 10.
Reference

@p.TX = 10
@tx = TX(@p) ‘If TX(T) is used
LJ-X UM_GB A-45

T.TY: Y coordinate of 3D position variable AsPlane(P1,P2,P3): Define plane from A, B

and C value
Argument
None Substitute P1, P2 and P3 into planar A, B and C
respectively.
Example: Update only Y coordinate individually
@p = As3DPoint(1,2,3) Argument
@p.TY = 20 ‘Y coordinate update • P1: The value of A (constant, scalar variable, or a function
@ty = @p.TY that results in a scalar value)
• P2: The value of B (constant, scalar variable, or a function
Commentary on the example that results in a scalar value)
@ty is set to a value of 20. • P3: The value of C (constant, scalar variable, or a function
Reference that results in a scalar value)
Return value
@p.TY = 20 Planar value
@ty = TY(@p) ‘If TY(T) is used
Example
@P = AsPlane(10, 20, 30)
T.TZ: Z coordinate of 3D position variable
Argument It has the same result as the following operation.
None @P.PPA = 10
@P.PPB = 20
Example: Update only Z coordinate individually @P.PPC = 30
@p.TZ = 30 ‘Z coordinate update
@tz = @p.TZ PPA(P): X Slope of Plane Variable
Take the X slope from a planar variable.
@tz is set to a value of 30. Argument
Reference P: planar variables or functions that return planar value.
Example
@p.TZ = 30 @p = AsPlane(10,20,30)
@tz = TZ(@p) ‘If TZ(T) is used @ppa = PPA(@p)

@ppa is set to a value of 10.
Reference

@p = AsPlane(10,20,30)
Appendix
@ppa = @p.PPA
A-46 LJ-X UM_GB

PPB(P): Y Slope of Plane Variable P.PPA: X Slope of Plane Variable

Take the Y slope from a planar variable. Argument
Argument None
P: planar variables or functions that return planar value. Example: Update only X slope individually
Example @p = AsPlane(1,2,3)
@p.PPA = 10 ‘X slope update
@p = AsPlane(10,20,30)
@ppa = @p.PPA
@ppb = PPB(@p)
@ppa is set to a value of 10.
@ppb is set to a value of 20.
Reference
Reference
@p = AsPlane(1,2,3)
@p = AsPlane(10,20,30)
@p.PPA = 10
@ppb = @p.PPB
@ppa = PPA(@p) ‘If PPA(P) is used
PPC(P): Z Intercept of Plane Variable P.PPB: Y Slope of Plane Variable

Take the Z slope from a planar variable.
Argument
Argument None
P: planar variables or functions that return planar value.
Example: Update only Y slope individually
Example @p = AsPlane(1,2,3)
@p = AsPlane(10,20,30) @p.PPB = 20 ‘Y slope update
@ppc = PPC(@p) @ppb = @p.PPB

@ppc is set to a value of 30. @ppb is set to a value of 20.
Reference Reference
It has the same result as the following operation. It has the same result as the following operation.
@p = AsPlane(10,20,30) @p = AsPlane(1,2,3)
@ppc = @p.PPC @p.PPB = 20
@ppb = PPB(@p) ‘If PPB(P) is used
P.PPC: Z Intercept of Plane Variable

Argument
None Appendix
Example: Update only Z intercept individually

@p = AsPlane(1,2,3)
@p.PPC = 30 ‘Z intercept update
@ppc = @p.PPC

@ppc is set to a value of 30.
Reference

@p = AsPlane(1,2,3)
@p.PPC = 30
@ppc = PPC(@p) ‘If PPC(P) is used
LJ-X UM_GB A-47

Calendar Functions ShiftYear(P): No. Year(s) offset

Adds or subtracts the number of days (P) to the current
date of this controller, and returns [Year].
ShiftDay(P): No. Day(s) offset
Adds or subtracts the number of days (P) to the current Parameters
date of this controller, and returns [Day]. P: Number of days to be added or subtracted(constant,
scalar variable, or a function that results in a scalar value).
Parameters
P: Number of days to be added or subtracted(constant, Return value
scalar variable, or a function that results in a scalar value). Scalar value
Return value Causes of errors

Scalar value An error occurs if the number of days P exceeds 9,999.
Causes of errors Example

An error occurs if the number of days P exceeds 9,999. @year = ShiftYear(-365)
Example Commentary on the example

@day = ShiftDay(-1) Returns the year of the date 365 days prior to the current
date.
Returns the day one day prior to the current date.
ShiftMonth(P): No. Month(s) offset

Adds or subtracts the number of days (P) to the current
date of this controller, and returns [Month].
Parameters
P: Number of days to be added or subtracted. Constant,
scalar variable, or a function that results in a scalar value.
Return value
Scalar value
Causes of errors
An error occurs if the number of days P exceeds 9,999.
Example
@month = ShiftMonth(10)

Appendix
Returns the month of the date 10 days after the current

date.
A-48 LJ-X UM_GB

BIT functions B_Or(P1, P2): Addition

Calculates the logical sum of the BIT’s of P1 and P2.
B_And(P1, P2): Multiplication • The function converts P1 and P2 from a scalar value to a 4-
byte integer and returns the calculated result as a scalar
Calculates the logical product of the BIT’s of P1 and P2.
value.
• The function converts P1 and P2 from a scalar value to a 4-
• If the value specified exceeds the maximum for an unsigned
4-byte integer (= 4294967295 = 32nd power of 2 - 1), the
value.
lower 4-bytes are used and all bits above that are ignored.
4-byte integer (= 4294967295 = 32nd power of 2 - 1), the Parameters
lower 4-bytes are used and all bits above that are ignored. P1, P2: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results
in a scalar value.
Parameters
P1, P2: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results Return value
in a scalar value. Scalar value
Return value Example

Scalar value @param1 = 10.1
@param2 = 3.14
Example
@result = B_Or(@param1, @param2)
@param1 = 10.1
@param2 = 3.14 Commentary on the example
@result = B_And(@param1, @param2) @result is set to a value of 11.

@result is set to a value of 2. B_Xor(P1, P2): Exclusive OR
Calculates the exclusive logical OR of the BIT’s of P1 and
B_Not(P): Inverse P2.
• The function converts P1 and P2 from a scalar value to a 4-
Calculates the logical inverse of the BIT’s of P.
• The function converts P from a scalar value to a 4-byte
value.
integer and returns the calculated result as a scalar value.
Parameters
Parameters
P1, P2: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results
in a scalar value.
scalar value.
Return value
Return value
Scalar value
Appendix
Scalar value
Example
Example
@param1 = 10.1
@param = 10.1
@param2 = 3.14
@result = B_And(B_Not(@param), 15)
@result = B_Xor(@param1, @param2)
LJ-X UM_GB A-49

Bind(P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7): Bind Bits Other
Binds the bits from P0 to P7 into an 8-bit value (P0: MSB,
P7: LSB). ANS0: Operation result 0
Parameters A scalar variable defined in advance. It is equivalent to the
P0, P7: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results result data of the calculation tool.
in a scalar value. • ANS has to be referenced in uppercase letters.
• ANS must be referred as left-hand side value.
Return value
Scalar value Example
ANS0 = T101.RSLT.X[JGL]:AB - T100.RSLT.X[JGL]:AB
Causes of errors
An error occurs if the value of P0 to P1 is neither 0 nor 1. Commentary on the example
Puts the difference between the X coordinate measured by
Example the tool whose tool ID is 101 and the X coordinate
@result = Bind(0,1,0,1,0,1,0,1) measured by the tool whose tool ID is 100 into ANS0.
@result is set to a value of 85. ANS1: Operation result 1
A scalar variable defined in advance. It is equivalent to the
result data of the calculation tool.
• ANS has to be referenced in uppercase letters.
Example
ANS1 = T101.RSLT.Y[JGL]:AB - T100.RSLT.Y[JGL]:AB

Puts the difference between the Y coordinate measured by
the tool whose tool ID is 101 and the Y coordinate
measured by the tool whose tool ID is 100 into ANS1.
ANS2: Operation result 2

A scalar variable defined in advance. It is equivalent to the
result data of the calculation tool.
• ANS has to be referenced in uppercase letters.
Example
ANS2 = T101.RSLT.T[JGL]:AB - T100.RSLT.T[JGL]:AB
Appendix

Puts the difference between the angle measured by the tool
whose tool ID is 101 and the angle measured by the tool
whose tool ID is 100 into ANS2.
A-50 LJ-X UM_GB

Operation Symbol/Output Item Comparison Table(Measured Value/Judgment Value)

Table(Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Reference
• ST (Reference value): Measured value for the reference image calculated during setting.
• MS (Measured value): The measured result data that is output.
• JG (Judgment value): Judgment result (OK=0,NG=1).
• AB (Absolute measured value): Measured value before specifying the origin. When Position Correction is used, it is the value before
adjustment.
• EC (Encoder measured value): Value outputted as the measurement result on the coordinate system that reflects the encoder value
when used consecutively.
• HL (Upper limit): The upper limit used for judgment.
• LL (Lower limit): The lower limit used for judgment.
• Items that can use label specification are only MS (measured value) and AB (absolute measured value).
• When the output is set, the selection is automatically set to [MS]. Items for which a decimal number (with any number of digits) is listed
under Format of measurement data are handled as decimal data in PLC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, and EtherCAT. For details, check
“Decimal Point” for each communication method in “Chapter 9 Communication control”.
• For an item with the symbol * shown at the end, the measured value correction function is available. For details, refer to "Correction of
measured values" (page 5-16).
Tool Symbol Description of measurement Description of Form of measured Scaling Label Item
item selection separation/selection data Target Specification ID
Common EXAC Execution Count Integer 10 digits - × -
OKAC OK Count Integer 10 digits - × -
NGAC NG Count Integer 10 digits - × -
TERR Execution Error Integer 1 digit - × -
TEID Execution Error ID Integer 7 digits - × -
EXTM Execution Time Integer 7 digits, 3 digits - × -
after the decimal point
Appendix
LJ-X UM_GB A-51

Height measurement MXX* Max. Height X MS,AB,EC,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × 8051
MXY* Max. Height Y MS,AB,EC,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × 8053
MXZ* Max.Height Z MS,AB,EC,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × 8055
MXH* Max.Height H MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × 8019
MXXYZ* Maximum Height XYZ MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
MNX* Min. Height X MS,AB,EC,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × 8058
MNY* Min. Height Y MS,AB,EC,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × 8060
MNZ* Min.Height Z MS,AB,EC,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × 8062
MNH* Min.Height H MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × 8020
MNXYZ* Min. Height XYZ MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
AVZ* Ave.Height Z MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × 8067
AVH* Ave.Height H MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × 8087
PMH* Peak-to-Peak Height H MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × 8343
EPA Valid Pixel Count MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 8 digits - × 8089
CONC_AR* Concave Area MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 6 digits, 3 digits - × 8022
CONV_AR* Convex Area MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 6 digits, 3 digits - × 8021
CONC_VOL* Concave Volume MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 9 digits, 3 digits - × 8024
CONV_VOL* Convex Volume MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 9 digits, 3 digits - × 8023
DPPABC Plane Formula Info. XYZ of MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 6 digits - × -
Detected Plane after the decimal point
DPPA X Slope of Detected Plane MS,AB Sign, Integer 1 digit, 6 digits - × -
DPPB Y Slope of Detected Plane MS,AB Sign, Integer 1 digit, 6 digits - × -
DPPC Z Intercept of Detected Plane MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits - × -
PPABC Plane Formula Information XYZ of MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 6 digits - × -
Zero Plane after the decimal point
PPA X Slope of the Zero Plane MS,AB Sign, Integer 1 digit, 6 digits - × -
Appendix
PPB Y Slope of the Zero Plane MS,AB Sign, Integer 1 digit, 6 digits - × -
PPC Z Plane of the Zero Plane MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits - × -
A-52 LJ-X UM_GB

Trend height SGN No. of Segments MS Integer 4 digits - × -
DSGN Number of Detected Segments MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 4 digits - × 533
NSGN Number of NG Segments MS,JG,HL Integer 4 digits - × 8229
CNSGN Number of Consecutive NG MS,JG,HL Integer 4 digits - × 8230
Segments
MXX Peak X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
MXXMX Max. Peak X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
MXXMN Min. Peak X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
MXY Peak Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y  -
MXYMX Max. Peak Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
MXYMN Min. Peak Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
MXZ Peak Z MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
MXZMX Max. Peak Z MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
MXZMN Min. Peak Z MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
MXH* Peak H MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  8019
MXHMX* Peak H (Max.) MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × 8241
MXHMN* Peak H (Min.) MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × 8242
MXXYZ Peak XYZ MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
MXXYZMX Max. Peak XYZ MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
MXXYZMN Min. Peak XYZ MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
MXMXSGI Max. Peak Segment Number MS Integer 4 digits - × -
MXMNSGI Min. Peak Segment Number MS Integer 4 digits - × -
MNX Bottom X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X  -
MNXMX Max. Bottom X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
MNXMN Min. Bottom X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
MNY Bottom Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y  -
MNYMX Max. Bottom Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
Appendix

MNYMN Min. Bottom Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
LJ-X UM_GB A-53

Trend height MNZ Bottom Z MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
(continued) after the decimal point
MNZMX Max. Bottom Z MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
MNZMN Min. Bottom Z MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
MNH* Bottom H MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  8020
MNHMX* Bottom H (Max.) MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × 8253
MNHMN* Bottom H (Min.) MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × 8254
MNXYZ Bottom XYZ MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
MNXYZMX Max. Bottom XYZ MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
MNXYZMN Min. Bottom XYZ MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
MNMXSGI Max. Bottom Segment Number MS Integer 4 digits - × -
MNMNSGI Min. Bottom Segment Number MS Integer 4 digits - × -
AVZ Average Z MS Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
AVZMX Max. Average Z MS Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
AVZMN Min. Average Z MS Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
AVH* Average H MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  8087
AVHMX* Average H (Max.) MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × 8265
AVHMN* Average H (Min.) MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × 8266
AVMXSGI Max. Average Segment Number MS Integer 4 digits - × -
AVMNSGI Min. Average Segment Number MS Integer 4 digits - × -
PMHIH* Peak-to-Peak Height H MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  8343
PMHIHMX* Max. Peak-to-Peak Height H MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × 8348
PMHIHMN* Min. Peak-to-Peak Height H MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × 8349
PMMXSGI Peak-to-Peak Height Maximum MS Integer 4 digits - × -
Segment Number
PMMNSGI Peak-to-Peak Height Minimum MS Integer 4 digits - × -
Segment Number
EPA Valid Pixel Count MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 8 digits -  8089
EPAMX Valid Pixel Count (Max.) MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 8 digits - × 8272
Appendix
EPAMN Valid Pixel Count (Min.) MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 8 digits - × 8273

EPAMXSGI Effective Pixel Number Maximum MS Integer 4 digits - × -
Segment number
EPAMNSGI Effective Pixel Number Minimum MS Integer 4 digits - × -
Segment number
CONV_AR* Convex Area MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 6 digits, 3 digits after the -  8021
decimal point
CONV_ARMX* Convex Area (Max.) MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 6 digits, 3 digits after the - × 8274
decimal point
CONV_ARMN* Convex Area (Min.) MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 6 digits, 3 digits after the - × 8275
decimal point
CONV_AMXSGI Max. Convex Area Segment MS Integer 4 digits - × -
Number
CONV_AMNSGI Min. Convex Area Segment MS Integer 4 digits - × -
Number
CONC_AR* Concave Area MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 6 digits, 3 digits after the -  8022
decimal point
A-54 LJ-X UM_GB

Trend height CONC_ARMX* Concave Area (Max.) MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 6 digits, 3 digits after the - × 8276
(continued) decimal point
CONC_ARMN* Concave Area (Min.) MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 6 digits, 3 digits after the - × 8277
decimal point
CONC_AMXSGI Max. Concave Area Segment MS Integer 4 digits - × -
Number
CONC_AMNSGI Min. Concave Area Segment MS Integer 4 digits - × -
Number
CONV_VOL* Convex Volume MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 9 digits, 3 digits after the -  8023
decimal point
CONV_VOLMX* Convex Volume (Max.) MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 9 digits, 3 digits after the - × 8278
decimal point
CONV_VOLMN* Convex Volume (Min.) MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 9 digits, 3 digits after the - × 8279
decimal point
CONV_VMXSGI Max. Convex Volume Segment MS Integer 4 digits - × -
Number
CONV_VMNSGI Min. Convex Volume Segment MS Integer 4 digits - × -
Number
CONC_VOL* Concave Volume MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 9 digits, 3 digits after the -  8024
decimal point
CONC_VOLMX* Concave Volume (Max.) MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 9 digits, 3 digits after the - × 8280
decimal point
CONC_VOLMN* Concave Volume (Min.) MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 9 digits, 3 digits after the - × 8281
decimal point
CONC_VMXSGI Max. Concave Volume Segment MS Integer 4 digits - × -
Number
CONC_VMNSGI Min. Concave Volume Segment MS Integer 4 digits - × -
Number
DCR Circle Radius MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 6 digits, 3 digits after the - × 545
decimal point
DCD Best Fit Circle Diameter MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 6 digits, 3 digits after the - × 2592
decimal point
DCX Circle Center X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 6 digits, 3 digits X × -
DCY Circle Center Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 6 digits, 3 digits Y × -
DCZ Circle Cent. Z MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 6 digits, 3 digits - × -
DCH Circle Cent. H MS Sign, Integer 6 digits, 3 digits - × -
DPPABC Plane Formula Info. XYZ of MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 6 digits - × -
Detected Plane after the decimal point
DPPA X Slope of Detected Plane MS,AB Sign, Integer 1 digits 6 digits - × -
DPPB Y Slope of Detected Plane MS,AB Sign, Integer 1 digit, 6 digits - × -
Appendix

PPABC Plane Formula Information XYZ of MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 6 digits -  -
PPA X Slope of the Zero Plane MS,AB Sign, Integer 1 digit, 6 digits -  -
PPB Y Slope of the Zero Plane MS,AB Sign, Integer 1 digit, 6 digits -  -
PPC Z Plane of the Zero Plane MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits -  -
SGCX Segment Center X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 6 digits, 3 digits X  -
SGCY Segment Center Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 6 digits, 3 digits Y  -
SGCXY Segment Center XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 6 digits, 3 digits -  -
LJ-X UM_GB A-55

Profile Measurement PMSR[].HGT Heght MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × 8920
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].DIFF Height Difference MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × 1642
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].DHGTR Step:Reference Height MS Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].DHGTM Step: Measurement Height MS Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].POS Position MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and X × 8923
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].POSXYZ Position XYZ MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].POSX Position X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and X × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].POSY Position Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and Y × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].POSZ Position Z MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].CTR Center Position MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and X × 8924
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].CTRXYZ Center Position XYZ MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].CTRX Center Position X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and X × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].CTRY Center Position Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and Y × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].CTRZ Center Position Z MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].CPOS1 Center Position: Position (1) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and X × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].CPOS2 Center Position: Position (2) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and X × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].WID Width MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and X × 8927
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].WPOSR Width: Position (1) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and X × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].WPOSM Width: Position (2) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and X × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].HANG Angle from Horizontal MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 3 digits and - × 8930
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].LLANG Angle between Two Straight Lines MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 3 digits and - × 8931
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].LLANGR Reference Angle MS Sign, Integer 3 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].LLANGM Measurement Angle MS Sign, Integer 3 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].PRAD Radius of Circle MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × 8934
Appendix
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].ZAR Cross-section Area MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × 9425
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].LAR Cross-section Area Surrounded by MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × 8935
a Straight Line decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].DLAR Cross-section Area Surrounded by MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × 8936
Two Straight Lines decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].PPDST Points Distance MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × 8937
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].LPDST Point/Line Distance MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × 8938
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].PCNT Count MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits - × 9062
PMSR[].STG Amount of Defects MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × 1627
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].STD Distance from Model Line MS Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].PRMTR Profile length MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and X × 10714
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].LPDST Throat Thickness MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × 8938
decimal 3 digits
A-56 LJ-X UM_GB

Profile Measurement PMSR[].PPDST Leg length MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × 8937
(continued) decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].LPDST Undercut MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × 8938
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].LLANG Overlap MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 3 digits and - × 8931
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].LLANGR Base metal MS Sign, Integer 3 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].LLANGM Approximate straight line of bead MS Sign, Integer 3 digits and - × -
surface decimal 3 digits
PPABC Plane Formula Information XYZ of MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits and - × -
Zero Plane decimal 6 digits
PPA X Slope of the Zero Plane MS,AB Sign, Integer 1 digit and - × -
decimal 6 digits
PPB Y Slope of the Zero Plane MS,AB Sign, Integer 1 digit and - × -
decimal 6 digits
PPC Z Plane of the Zero Plane MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
Specify the value of the item ID added that of the label multiplied by 1000000 as the parameter of the DW/DR
command for height, step, position, center position, width, angle of horizontal, angle between two straight lines,
radius of circle, cross-section area, cross-section area surrounded by a straight line, cross-section area
surrounded by two straight lines, point-to-point distance, point-to-line distance, defect detection, count, profile
length, throat thickness, leg length, undercut and overlap.
Example: When accessing the judgment condition of label 5 of height (Item ID: 8920)
The parameter specification is "8920 + 5 * 1000000 = 5008920".
Appendix
LJ-X UM_GB A-57

Continuous profile PROFN Number of the Profiles MS Integer 5 digits - × -
measurement VPROFN Number of the Effective Profiles MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits - × 9955
NPROFN Number of the NG Profiles MS,JG,HL Integer 5 digits - × 9236
CNPROFN Consecutive NG Profile Count MS,JG,HL Integer 5 digits - × 9237
PROFJG[] Per Profile Integer 1 digit -  -
Judgment Value
VPROF[] Per Profile Integer 1 digit -  -
Effective Invalid
DC1PROFIDX[] (Condition 1) Result Display MS Integer 5 digits -  -
Profile Number
Profile Number
Profile Number
Profile Number
PMSR[].PRERR[] Profile Measurement MS Integer 1 digit -  -
Presence or Absence of Errors
PMSR[].ITEMJG Overall Judgment Value Integer 1 digit - × -
PMSR[].HGT[] Height MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  8920
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MXHGT Height (Maximum) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MNHGT Height (Minimum) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].AVHGT Height (Average) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].DVHGT Height (3σ) MS Integer 5 digits and decimal 3 - × -
digits
PMSR[].DC1HGT[] (Condition 1) Height MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  -
decimal 3 digits
decimal 3 digits
decimal 3 digits
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].DIFF[] Height Difference MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  1642
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].DHGTR[] Step: Reference Height MS Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].DHGTM[] Step: Measurement Height MS Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MXDIFF Step (Maximum) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MNDIFF Step (Minimum) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
Appendix
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].AVDIFF Step (Average) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].DVDIFF Step (3σ) MS Integer 5 digits and decimal 3 - × -
digits
PMSR[].DC1DIFF[] (Condition 1) Step MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[]. (Condition 1) Reference Height MS Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  -
DC1DHGTR[] decimal 3 digits
PMSR[]. (Condition 1) Measurement Height MS Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  -
DC1DHGTM[] decimal 3 digits
decimal 3 digits
A-58 LJ-X UM_GB

Continuous profile PMSR[]. (Condition 2) Reference Height MS Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  -
measurement DC2DHGTR[] decimal 3 digits
(continued) PMSR[]. (Condition 2) Measurement Height MS Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  -
decimal 3 digits
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].POS[] Position MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and X  8923
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].POSXYZ[] Position XYZ MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].POSX[] Position X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and X  -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].POSY[] Position Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and Y  -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].POSZ[] Position Z MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  -
decimal 3 digits
Continuous profile PMSR[].MXPOS Position (Maximum) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and X × -
Measurement decimal 3 digits
(continued) PMSR[]. Position (Maximum) XYZ MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
MXPOSXYZ decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MXPOSX Position (Maximum) X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and X × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MXPOSY Position (Maximum) Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and Y × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MXPOSZ Position (Maximum) Z MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MNPOS Position (Minimum) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and X × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[]. Position (Minimum) XTZ MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
MNPOSXYZ decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MNPOSX Position (Minimum) X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and X × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MNPOSY Position (Minimum) Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and Y × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MNPOSZ Position (Minimum) Z MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].AVPOS Position (Average) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and X × -
Appendix
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].DVPOS Position (3σ) MS Integer 5 digits and decimal 3 X × -
digits
PMSR[].DC1POS[] (Condition 1) Position MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and X  -
decimal 3 digits
decimal 3 digits
decimal 3 digits
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].CTR[] Center Position MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and X  8924
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].CTRXYZ[] Center Position XYZ MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].CTRX[] Center Position X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and X  -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].CTRY[] Center Position Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and Y  -
decimal 3 digits
LJ-X UM_GB A-59

Continuous profile PMSR[].CTRZ[] Center Position Z MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  -
measurement decimal 3 digits
(continued) PMSR[].CPOS1[] Position1 MS Sign, Integer 5 digits and X  -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].CPOS2[] Position2 MS Sign, Integer 5 digits and X  -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MXCTR Center Position (Maximum) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and X × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[]. Center Position (Maximum) XYZ MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
MXCTRXYZ decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MXCTRX Center Position (Maximum) X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and X × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MXCTRY Center Position (Maximum) Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and Y × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MXCTRZ Center Position (Maximum) Z MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MNCTR Center Position (Minimum) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and X × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[]. Center Position (Minimum) XYZ MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
MNCTRXYZ decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MNCTRX Center Position (Minimum) X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and X × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MNCTRY Center Position (Minimum) Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and Y × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MNCTRZ Center Position (Minimum) Z MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].AVCTR Center Position (Average) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and X × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].DVCTR Center Position (3σ) MS Integer 5 digits and decimal 3 X × -
digits
PMSR[].DC1CTR[] (Condition 1) Center Position MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and X  -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[]. (Condition 1) Center Position: MS Sign, Integer 5 digits and X  -
DC1CPOS1[] Position (1) decimal 3 digits
decimal 3 digits
decimal 3 digits
Appendix

decimal 3 digits
Continuous profile PMSR[]. (Condition 4) Center Position: MS Sign, Integer 5 digits and X  -
Measurement DC4CPOS2[] Position (2) decimal 3 digits
(continued) PMSR[].WID[] Width MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and X  8927
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].WPOSR[] Width: Position 1 MS Sign, Integer 5 digits and X  -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].WPOSM[] Width: Position 2 MS Sign, Integer 5 digits and X  -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MXWID Width (Maximum) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and X × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MNWID Width (Minimum) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and X × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].AVWID Width (Average) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and X × -
decimal 3 digits
A-60 LJ-X UM_GB

Continuous profile PMSR[].DVWID Width (3σ) MS Integer 5 digits and decimal 3 X × -
measurement digits
(continued) PMSR[].DC1WID[] (Condition 1) Width MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and X  -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[]. (Condition 1) Width: Reference MS Sign, Integer 5 digits and X  -
DC1WPOSR[] Position decimal 3 digits
PMSR[]. (Condition 1) Width: Measurement MS Sign, Integer 5 digits and X  -
DC1WPOSM[] Position decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].DC2WID (Condition 2) Width MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and X  -
decimal 3 digits
decimal 3 digits
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].HANG[] Angle from Horizontal MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 3 digits and -  8930
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MXHANG Angle of Horizontal (Maximum) MS,JG Sign, Integer 3 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MNHANG Angle of Horizontal (Minimum) MS,JG Sign, Integer 3 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].AVHANG Angle of Horizontal (Average) MS,JG Sign, Integer 3 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].DVHANG Angle from Horizontal (3σ) MS Integer 3 digits and decimal 3 - × -
digits
PMSR[]. (Condition 1) Angle of Horizontal MS,JG Sign, Integer 3 digits and -  -
DC1HANG[] decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].LLANG[] Angle Between Two Straight Lines MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 3 digits and -  8931
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].LLANGR[] Reference Angle MS Sign, Integer 3 digits and -  -
Appendix
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].LLANGM[] Measurement Angle MS Sign, Integer 3 digits and -  -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MXLLANG Angle Between Two Straight Lines MS,JG Sign, Integer 3 digits and - × -
(Maximum) decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MNLLANG Angle Between Two Straight Lines MS,JG Sign, Integer 3 digits and - × -
(Minimum) decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].AVLLANG Angle Between Two Straight Lines MS,JG Sign, Integer 3 digits and - × -
(Average) decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].DVLLANG Angle Between Two Straight Lines MS Integer 3 digits and decimal 3 - × -
(3σ) digits
PMSR[]. (Condition 1) Angle Between Two MS,JG Sign, Integer 3 digits and -  -
DC1LLANG[] Straight Lines decimal 3 digits
PMSR[]. (Condition 1) Reference Angle MS Sign, Integer 3 digits and -  -
DC1LLANGR[] decimal 3 digits
PMSR[]. (Condition 1) Measurement Angle MS Sign, Integer 3 digits and -  -
DC1LLANGM[] decimal 3 digits
LJ-X UM_GB A-61

Continuous profile PMSR[]. (Condition 2) Reference Angle MS Sign, Integer 3 digits and -  -
measurement DC2LLANGR[] decimal 3 digits
(continued) PMSR[]. (Condition 2) Measurement Angle MS Sign, Integer 3 digits and -  -
PMSR[].PRAD[] Radius of Circle MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  8934
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MXPRAD Circle Radius (Maximum) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MNPRAD Circle Radius (Minimum) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].AVPRAD Circle Radius (Average) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].DVPRAD Circle Radius (3σ) MS Integer 5 digits and decimal 3 - × -
digits
PMSR[]. (Condition 1) Circle Radius MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  -
DC1PRAD[] decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].ZAR[] Cross-section Area MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  9425
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MXZAR Cross-section Area (Maximum) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MNZAR Cross-section Area (Minimum) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].AVZAR Cross-section Area (average) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].DVZAR Cross-section Area (3σ) MS Integer 5 digits and decimal 3 - × -
digits
PMSR[].DC1ZAR[] (Condition 1) Cross-section Area MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  -
decimal 3 digits
Appendix
decimal 3 digits
decimal 3 digits
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].LAR[] Cross-section Area Surrounded by MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  8935
a Straight Line decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MXLAR Cross-section Area Surrounded by MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
a Straight Line (Maximum) decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MNLAR Cross-section Area Surrounded by MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
a Straight Line (Minimum) decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].AVLAR Cross-section Area Surrounded by MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
a Straight Line (Average) decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].DVLAR Cross-section Area Surrounded by MS Integer 5 digits and decimal 3 - × -
a Straight Line (3σ) digits
PMSR[].DC1LAR[] (Condition 1) Cross-section Area MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  -
Surrounded by a Straight Line decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].DC2LAR[] (Condition 2) Cross-section Area MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  -
A-62 LJ-X UM_GB

Continuous profile PMSR[].DC3LAR[] (Condition 3) Cross-section Area MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  -
measurement Surrounded by a Straight Line decimal 3 digits
(continued) PMSR[].DC4LAR[] (Condition 4) Cross-section Area MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  -
PMSR[].DLAR[] Cross-section Area Surrounded by MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  8936
Two Straight Lines decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MXDLAR Cross-section Area Surrounded by MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
Two Straight Lines (Minimum) decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MNDLAR Cross-section Area Surrounded by MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
Two Straight Lines (Minimum) decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].AVDLAR Cross-section Area Surrounded by MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
Two Straight Lines (Average) decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].DVDLAR Cross-section Area Surrounded by MS Integer 5 digits and decimal 3 - × -
Two Straight Lines (3σ) digits
PMSR[]. (Condition 1) Cross-section Area MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  -
DC1DLAR[] Surrounded by Two Straight Lines decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].PPDST[] Points Distance MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  8937
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MXPPDST Point-to-point Distance (Maximum) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MNPPDST Point-to-Point Distance (Minimum) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].AVPPDST Point-to-Point Distance (Average) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].DVPPDST Point-to-Point Distance (3σ) MS Integer 5 digits and decimal 3 - × -
digits
PMSR[]. (Condition 1) Point-to-Point MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  -
DC1PPDST[] Distance decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].LPDST[] Point/Line Distance MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  8938
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MXLPDST Distance Between a Point and a MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
Straight Line (Maximum) decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MNLPDST Distance Between a Point and a MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
Straight Line (Minimum) decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].AVLPDST Distance Between a Point and a MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
Appendix
Straight line (Average) decimal 3 digits

PMSR[].DVLPDST Distance Between a Point and a MS Integer 5 digits and decimal 3 - × -
Straight Line (3σ) digits
PMSR[]. (Condition 1) Distance Between a MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  -
DC1LPDST[] Point and a Straight Line decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].PCNT[] Count MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits -  9062
PMSR[].MXPCNT Count (Maximum) MS,JG Integer 5 digits - × -
PMSR[].MNPCNT Count (Minimum) MS,JG Integer 5 digits - × -
PMSR[].AVPCNT Count (average) MS,JG Integer 5 digits - × -
PMSR[].DVPCNT Count (3σ) MS Integer 5 digits and decimal 3 - × -
digits
PMSR[]. (Condition 1) Count MS,JG Integer 5 digits - × -
DC1PCNT[]
DC2PCNT[]
LJ-X UM_GB A-63

Continuous profile PMSR[]. (Condition 3) Count MS,JG Integer 5 digits - × -
measurement DC3PCNT[]
(continued)
DC4PCNT[]
PMSR[].STG[] Amount of Defects MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  1627
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].STD[] Distance from Model Line MS Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MXSTG Defect Amount (Maximum) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MNSTG Defect Amount (Minimum) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].AVSTG Defect Amount (Average) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].DVSTG Defect Amount (3σ) MS Integer 5 digits and decimal 3 - × -
digits
PMSR[].DC1STG[] (Condition 1) Defect Amount MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].DC1STD[] (Condition 1) Distance from Model MS Sign, Integer 5 digits and -  -
Line decimal 3 digits
decimal 3 digits
decimal 3 digits
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].PRMTR[] Profile length MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits X  10714
and decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].MXPRMTR Profile Length (Max.) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits X × -
PMSR[].MNPRMTR Profile Length (Min.) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits X × -
PMSR[].AVPRMTR Profile Length (Average) MS Sign, Integer 5 digits X × -
PMSR[].DVPRMTR Profile length (3σ) MS Integer 5 digits and X × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[]. (Condition 1) Profile Length MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits X  -
DC1PRMTR[] and decimal 3 digits
PMSR[]. (Condition 2) Profile length MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits X  -
Appendix

PMSR[].LPDST[] Throat Thickness MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits -  8938
PMSR[].MXLPDST Throat Thickness (Max.) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits - × -
PMSR[].MNLPDST Throat Thickness (Min.) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits - × -
PMSR[].AVLPDST Throat Thickness (Average) MS Sign, Integer 5 digits - × -
PMSR[].DVLPDST Throat Thickness (3σ) MS Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[]. (Condition 1) Throat MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits -  -
DC1LPDST[] Thickness and decimal 3 digits
PMSR[]. (Condition 2) Throat MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits -  -
A-64 LJ-X UM_GB

Continuous profile PMSR[]. (Condition 3) Throat MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits -  -
measurement DC2LPDST[] Thickness and decimal 3 digits
(continued) PMSR[]. (Condition 4) Throat MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits -  -
PMSR[].PPDST[] Leg Length MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits -  8937
PMSR[].MXPPDST Leg Length (Max.) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits - × -
PMSR[]. Leg Length (Min.) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits - × -
MNPPDST and decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].AVPPDST Leg Length (Average) MS Sign, Integer 5 digits - × -
PMSR[].DVPPDST Leg Length (3σ) MS Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[]. (Condition 1) Leg Length MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits -  -
DC1PPDST[] and decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].LPDST[] Undercut MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits -  8938
PMSR[].MXLPDST Undercut (Max.) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits - × -
PMSR[].MNLPDST Undercut (Min.) MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits - × -
PMSR[].AVLPDST Undercut (Average) MS Sign, Integer 5 digits - × -
PMSR[].DVLPDST Undercut (3σ) MS Integer 5 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[]. (Condition 1) Undercut MS,JG Sign, Integer 5 digits -  -
DC1LPDST[] and decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].LLANG[] Overlap MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 3 digits -  8931
PMSR[].LLANGR[] Base metal MS Sign, Integer 3 digits -  -
PMSR[]. Approximate straight line of MS Sign, Integer 3 digits -  -
LLANGM[] bead surface and decimal 3 digits
Appendix
PMSR[]. Overlap (Max.) MS,JG Sign, Integer 3 digits - × -

MXLLANG and decimal 3 digits
PMSR[]. Overlap (Min.) MS,JG Sign, Integer 3 digits - × -
MNLLANG and decimal 3 digits
PMSR[].AVLLANG Overlap (Average) MS Sign, Integer 3 digits - × -
PMSR[].DVLLANG Overlap (3σ) MS Integer 3 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
PMSR[]. (Condition 1) Overlap MS,JG Sign, Integer 3 digits -  -
DC1LLANG[] and decimal 3 digits
PMSR[]. (Condition 1) Base Metal MS Sign, Integer 3 digits -  -
DC1LLANGR[] and decimal 3 digits
PMSR[]. (Condition 1) Approximate MS Sign, Integer 3 digits -  -
DC1LLANGM[] Straight Line of Bead and decimal 3 digits
Surface
Surface
LJ-X UM_GB A-65

Continuous profile PMSR[]. (Condition 3) Overlap MS,JG Sign, Integer 3 digits -  -
measurement DC3LLANG[] and decimal 3 digits
(continued)
Surface
Surface
PMSR[]. (Condition 1) Profile Integer 3 digits -  -
DC1PRERR[] Measurement Error
PPABC Plane Formula Information XYZ of MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits and - × -
Zero Plane decimal 6 digits
PPA X Slope of the Zero Plane MS,AB Sign, Integer 1 digit and - × -
decimal 6 digits
PPB Y Slope of the Zero Plane MS,AB Sign, Integer 1 digit and - × -
decimal 6 digits
PPC Z Plane of the Zero Plane MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits and - × -
decimal 3 digits
Specify the value of the item ID added that of the label multiplied by 1000000 as the parameter of the DW/DR
command for height, step, position, center position, width, angle of horizontal, angle between two straight lines,
radius of circle, cross-section area, cross-section area surrounded by a straight line, cross-section area
surrounded by two straight lines, point-to-point distance, point-to-line distance, defect detection, count, profile
length, throat thickness, leg length, undercut and overlap.
example: Height (Item ID: When accessing the judgment condition of label 5 of 8920)
he parameter specification is "8920 + 5 * 1000000 = 5008920".
Appendix
A-66 LJ-X UM_GB

[Free Multi-Point Height MXXMX Max. Peak X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
Measurement]  after the decimal point
(page 5-73) MXXMN Min. Peak X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
[Arranged Multi-Point MXYMX Max. Peak Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
Height Measurement] after the decimal point
(page 5-75) MXYMN Min. Peak Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
MXZMX Max. Peak Z MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
MXZMN Min. Peak Z MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
MXHMX* Max. Peak H MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × 8241
MXHMN* Min. Peak H MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × 8242
MXXYZMX Max. Peak XYZ MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
MXXYZMN Min. Peak XYZ MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
MNXMX Max. Bottom X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
MNXMN Min. Bottom X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
MNYMX Max. Bottom Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
MNYMN Min. Bottom Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
MNZMX Max. Bottom Z MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
MNZMN Min. Bottom Z MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
MNHMX* Max. Bottom H MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × 8253
MNHMN* Min. Bottom H MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × 8254
MNXYZMX Max. Bottom XYZ MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
MNXYZMN Min. Bottom XYZ MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
AVZMX Max. Average Z MS Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
AVZMN Min. Average Z MS Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
AVHMX* Max. Average H MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × 8265
AVHMN* Min. Average H MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × 8266
Appendix

PMHMX* Max. Peak-to-Peak Height H MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × 8348
PMHMN* Min. Peak-to-Peak Height H MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × 8349
EPAMX Max. Valid Pixel Count MS Integer 8 digits - × -
EPAMN Min. Valid Pixel Count MS Integer 8 digits - × -
CONC_ARMX* Max. Concave Area MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 6 digits, 3 digits - × 8276
CONC_ARMN* Min. Concave Area MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 6 digits, 3 digits - × 8277
CONV_ARMX* Max. Convex Area MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 6 digits, 3 digits - × 8274
CONV_ARMN* Min. Convex Area MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 6 digits, 3 digits - × 8275
CONC_VOLMX* Max. Concave Volume MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 9 digits, 3 digits - × 8280
CONC_VOLMN* Min. Concave Volume MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 9 digits, 3 digits - × 8281
CONV_VOLMX* Max. Convex Volume MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 9 digits, 3 digits - × 8278
LJ-X UM_GB A-67

[Free Multi-Point Height CONV_VOLMN* Min. Convex Volume MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 9 digits, 3 digits - × 8279
Measurement]  after the decimal point
(page 5-73) DPPABC Plane Formula Info. XYZ of MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 6 digits - × -
(continued) Detected Plane after the decimal point
DPPA X Slope of Detected Plane MS,AB Sign, Integer 1 digit, 6 digits - × -
[Arranged Multi-Point after the decimal point
Height Measurement] DPPB Y Slope of Detected Plane MS,AB Sign, Integer 1 digit, 6 digits - × -
(page 5-75) after the decimal point
(continued)
PPABC Plane Formula Information XYZ of MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 6 digits - × -
PPA X Slope of the Zero Plane MS,AB Sign, Integer 1 digit, 6 digits - × -
PPB Y Slope of the Zero Plane MS,AB Sign, Integer 1 digit, 6 digits - × -
PPC Z Intercept of the Zero Plane MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits - × -
DPRPT Angle created by detected plane MS Integer 2 digits, 3 digits after the - × -
and zero plane decimal point
RGNJG[] Region [] - Judgment Value for MS Integer 1 digit -  -
Each Region
RGNERR[] Region [] - Error Information for MS Integer 1 digit -  -
Each Region
MXX[] Region [] - Peak X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X  -
MXY[] Region [] - Peak Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y  -
MXZ[] Region [] - Peak Z MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
MXH[]* Region [] - Peak H MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  8019
MXXYZ[] Region [] - Peak XYZ MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
MNX[] Region [] - Bottom X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X  -
MNY[] Region [] - Bottom Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y  -
MNZ[] Region [] - Bottom Z MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
MNH[]* Region [] - Bottom H MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  8020
MNXYZ[] Region [] - Bottom XYZ MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
AVZ[] Region [] - Ave. Height Z MS Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
AVH[]* Region [] - Ave. Height H MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  8087
Appendix

PMH[]* Region [] - Peak-to-Peak Height H MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  8343
EPA[] Region [] - Valid Pixel Count MS Integer 8 digits -  -
CONV_AR[]* Region [] - Convex area MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 6 digits, 3 digits -  8021
CONC_AR[]* Region [] - Concave area MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 6 digits, 3 digits -  8022
CONV_VOL[]* Region [] - Convex volume MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 9 digits, 3 digits -  8023
CONC_VOL[]* Region [] - Concave volume MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 9 digits, 3 digits -  8024
Area (page 5-77) AR Area MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 8 digits - × 105
With or without/
distinction on the area of
the specified color (black
and white)
Inspection for defects/
stains on the black or
white area.
A-68 LJ-X UM_GB

Pattern Search N Quantity MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 2 digits - × 90
(page 5-80) X Position X ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X  82
With or Without on the after the decimal point
Shading Pattern/
Y Position Y ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y  83
Distinction
Shading Pattern Position
XY Position XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
(Position/Inclination)
Shading Pattern Position
(Dimensions and T Angle ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits -  84
geometric shape) after the decimal point
Shading Pattern Quantity XY Position/Angle MS Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
Position Adjustment with (Cannot be used in calculation) after the decimal point
the Shading Pattern C Match % MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 2 digits, 3 digits after the -  89
decimal point
ShapeTrax3 N Quantity MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 4 digits - × 90
With or Without/ after the decimal point
Distinction on the
Outline Pattern
Outline Pattern Position
(Position/Inclination)
Outline Pattern Position
(Dimensions and T Angle ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits -  84
geometric shape) after the decimal point
Outline Pattern Quantity XY Position/Angle MS Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
Position Correction With (Cannot be used in calculation) after the decimal point
Outline Pattern C Match % MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 2 digits, 3 digits after the -  89
decimal point
S Scale MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 1 digit, 3 digits after the -  1759
decimal point
QZ1 Number of Feature Pixels 1 MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 6 digit -  9458
QZ2 Number of Feature Pixels 2 MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 6 digit -  9459
ShapeTrax2 N Quantity MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 4 digits - × 90
T Angle ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits -  84
XY Position/Angle MS Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
(Cannot be used in calculation) after the decimal point
C Match % MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 2 digits, 3 digits after the -  89
decimal point
S Scale MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 1 digit, 3 digits after the -  1759
decimal point
PatternTrax N Quantity MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 4 digits - × 90
Appendix
(page 5-91) X Position X ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  82

Y Position Y ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  83
T Angle ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits -  84
XYT XY Position/Angle MS,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
(Cannot be used in calculation) after the decimal point
C Match % MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 2 digits, 3 digits after the -  89
decimal point
LJ-X UM_GB A-69

Edge position N Number of Edges MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 4 digits - × 90
Edge Position (Position/ after the decimal point
Inclination)
Edge Position in the
Circumferential Direction
Edge Position
(Dimensions and
Geometric Shape) T Angle ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits -  84
Number of Edges after the decimal point
Position Correction with P Distance MS,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L  -
the Edge decimal point
I Intensity MS Integer 3 digits, 3 digits after the -  -
decimal point
Edge Angle (%) T Angle ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits - × 84
Edge Inclination N Number of Edges MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 4 digits - × 90
X Center X ST,MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
Y Center Y ST,MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
XY Center XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
X1 Position1X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
Y1 Position 1 Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
XY1 Position 1XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
P1 Distance 1 MS,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × -
decimal point
I1 Intensity 1 MS Integer 3 digits, 3 digits after the - × -
decimal point
X2 Position 2X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
Y2 Position 2Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
decimal point
decimal point
Appendix
A-70 LJ-X UM_GB

Edge Width (page 5- N Number of Pairs MS Integer 1 digit - × -
102) W* Edge Width MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 97
Edge Width decimal point
X1 Position1X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
Y1 Position 1 Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
T1 Angle 1 MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits - × -
decimal point
decimal point
X2 Position 2X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
Y2 Position 2Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
T2 Angle 2 MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits - × -
decimal point
decimal point
Edge Pitch N Number of Pitches MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 4 digits - × 90
(page 5-105) WH Pitch (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 99
Center Pitch decimal point
Gap Pitch
WL Pitch (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 100
decimal point
WA Pitch (Ave) MS,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × -
decimal point
W* Pitch MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L  97
decimal point
X1 Position1X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X  -
Y1 Position 1 Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y  -
XY1 Position 1XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
T1 Angle 1 MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits -  -
P1 Distance 1 MS,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L  -
decimal point
I1 Intensity 1 MS Integer 3 digits, 3 digits after the -  -
Appendix
decimal point
X2 Position 2X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X  -
Y2 Position 2Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y  -
decimal point
decimal point
LJ-X UM_GB A-71

Pair Edge (page 5-108) N Number of Pairs MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 4 digits - × 90
Pair Pitch WH Pair Width (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 99
decimal point
WL Pair Width (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 100
decimal point
WA Pair Width (Ave) MS,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × -
decimal point
W* Pair Width MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L  97
decimal point
X1 Position1X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X  -
Y1 Position 1 Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y  -
decimal point
decimal point
decimal point
decimal point
Defect (page 5-111) SL Level of Defects Detected MS Integer 3 digits - × -
Inspection for number of TSA Total Amount of Defects MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 8 digits - × 374
defects or total defect
area X Position X ST,MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
Inspection for defects on after the decimal point
each defect group Y Position Y ST,MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
XY Position XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
N Number of Groups MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 2 digits - × 90
GSA Amount of Defects MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 8 digits -  377
GX Center of Gravity X ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X  378
GY Center of Gravity Y ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y  379
Appendix

GXY Center of Gravity XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
A-72 LJ-X UM_GB

Blob (page 5-115) N Number of Labels MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 4 digits - × 90
Position of Cluster X Center of Gravity X ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X  82
(Position/Inclination) after the decimal point
Position of Cluster
XH Center of Gravity X (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × 294
(Dimensions and
Geometric Shape)
XL Center of Gravity X (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × 295
Quantity of Clusters
Position Correction with
the Center of Gravity of Y Center of Gravity Y ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y  83
Cluster after the decimal point
YH Center of Gravity Y (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × 296
YL Center of Gravity Y (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × 297
XY Center of Gravity XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
T Major Axis Angle ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits -  84
TH Major Axis Angle (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits - × 298
TL Major Axis Angle (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits - × 299
Center of Gravity XY/Major Axis MS Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
Angle after the decimal point
(Cannot be used in calculation)
AR Area MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  105
ARH Area (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × 306
ARL Area (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × 307
FX Blob X Feret Diameter MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L  106
FXH Feret Diameter X (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × 300
FXL Feret Diameter X (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × 301
FY Feret Diameter Y MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L  107
FYH Feret Diameter Y (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × 302
FYL Feret Diameter Y (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × 303
CL Blob Perimeter Result MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L  108
CLH Perimeter (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × 308
after the decimal point Appendix
LJ-X UM_GB A-73

Blob (page 5-115) CLL Perimeter (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × 309
Position of Cluster after the decimal point
(Position/Inclination) CD Roundness MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 1 digit, 3 digits after the -  109
Position of Cluster decimal point
(Dimensions and CDH Roundness (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 1 digit, 3 digits after the - × 304
Geometric Shape) decimal point
Quantity of Clusters CDL Roundness (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 1 digit, 3 digits after the - × 305
Position Correction with decimal point
the Center of Gravity of
MAA Major Axis MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L  1890
Cluster
decimal point
(continued)
MAAH Major Axis (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 1896
decimal point
MAAL Major Axis (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 1897
decimal point
MIA Minor Axis MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L  1891
decimal point
MIAH Minor Axis (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 1898
decimal point
MIAL Minor Axis (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 1899
decimal point
RTO Aspect Ratio MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the -  1892
decimal point
RTOH Aspect Ratio (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the - × 1900
decimal point
RTOL Aspect Ratio (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the - × 1901
decimal point
MAA2 Equivalent Oval Major Axis MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L  1893
decimal point
MAA2H Equivalent Oval Major Axis (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 1902
decimal point
MAA2L Equivalent Oval Major Axis (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 1903
decimal point
MIA2 Equivalent Oval Minor Axis MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L  1894
decimal point
MIA2H Equivalent Oval Minor Axis (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 1904
decimal point
MIA2L Equivalent Oval Minor Axis (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 1905
decimal point
RTO2 Equivalent Oval Aspect Ratio MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the -  1895
decimal point
RTO2H Equivalent Oval Aspect Ratio MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the - × 1906
Max. decimal point
RTO2L Equivalent Oval Aspect Ratio MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the - × 1907
Min. decimal point
Shading Blob (page 5- DIL Level of Contrast Detected MS Integer 8 digits - × -
119) BLV Reference Gray Level MS Integer 8 digits - × -
Inspection for defects/
stains using the contrast TAR Total Area MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 8 digits - × 2446
Appendix
difference with the N Number of Labels MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 4 digits - × 90

background XY Center of Gravity XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
Position of the Dark
(Light) Cluster
X Center of Gravity X ST,MS,AB,EC,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X  82
Position of the Dark
(Light) Cluster
XH Center of Gravity X (Max) MS,EC,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × 294
Number of Dark (Light)
Clusters
Correcting the Position XL Center of Gravity X (Min) MS,EC,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × 295
of the Dark (Light) after the decimal point
Cluster Center of  Y Center of Gravity Y ST,MS,AB,EC,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y  83
Gravity after the decimal point
YH Center of Gravity Y (Max) MS,EC,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × 296
YL Center of Gravity Y (Min) MS,EC,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × 297
T Major Axis Angle ST,MS,AB,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits -  84
TH Major Axis Angle (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits - × 298
A-74 LJ-X UM_GB

Shading Blob TL Major Axis Angle (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits - × 299
Inspection for defects/ after the decimal point
stains using the contrast AR Area MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 8 digits -  105
difference with the
ARH Area (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 8 digits - × 306
background
Position of the Dark ARL Area (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 8 digits - × 307
(Light) Cluster VOL Volume MS,AB,JG,HL,LL Integer 10 digits, 3 digits after -  2447
Position of the Dark the decimal point
(Light) Cluster VOLH Volume (Max.) MS,AB,JG,HL,LL Integer 10 digits, 3 digits after - × 2451
Number of Dark (Light) the decimal point
Clusters VOLL Volume (Min.) MS,AB,JG,HL,LL Integer 10 digits, 3 digits after - × 2452
Correcting the Position the decimal point
of the Dark (Light)
BOW Light-dark MS Integer 1 digit -  -
Cluster Center of 
Gravity AVI Average Level of Contrast MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 3 digits -  2448
(continued) AVIH Average Level of Contrast (Max.) MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 3 digits - × 2453
AVIL Average Level of Contrast (Min.) MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 3 digits - × 2454
MXI Max. Level of Contrast MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 3 digits -  2449
MXIH Max. Level of Contrast (Max.) MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 3 digits - × 2455
MXIL Max. Level of Contrast (Min.) MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 3 digits - × 2456
FX Blob X Feret Diameter MS,AB,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L  106
FXH Feret Diameter X (Max) MS,AB,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × 300
FXL Feret Diameter X (Min) MS,AB,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × 301
FY Feret Diameter Y MS,AB,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L  107
FYH Feret Diameter Y (Max) MS,AB,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × 302
FYL Feret Diameter Y (Min) MS,AB,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × 303
CL Blob Perimeter Result MS,AB,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L  108
CLH Perimeter (Max) MS,AB,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × 308
CLL Perimeter (Min) MS,AB,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × 309
CD Roundness MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 1 digit, 3 digits after the -  109
decimal point
CDH Roundness (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 1 digit, 3 digits after the - × 304
decimal point
CDL Roundness (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 1 digits, 3 digits after the - × 305
decimal point
MAA Major Axis MS,AB,JG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L  1890
decimal point
Appendix
MAAH Major Axis (Max) MS,AB,JG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 1896
decimal point
MAAL Major Axis (Min) MS,AB,JG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 1897
decimal point
MIA Minor Axis MS,AB,JG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L  1891
decimal point
MIAH Minor Axis (Max) MS,AB,JG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 1898
decimal point
MIAL Minor Axis (Min) MS,AB,JG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 1899
decimal point
RTO Aspect Ratio MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the -  1892
decimal point
RTOH Aspect Ratio (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the - × 1900
decimal point
RTOL Aspect Ratio (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the - × 1901
decimal point
MAA2 Equivalent Oval Major axis MS,AB,JG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L  1893
decimal point
MAA2H Equivalent Oval Major Axis (Max) MS,AB,JG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 1902
decimal point
LJ-X UM_GB A-75

Shading Blob MAA2L Equivalent Oval Major Axis (Min) MS,AB,JG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 1903
Inspection for defects/ decimal point
stains using the contrast MIA2 Equivalent Oval Minor axis MS,AB,JG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L  1894
difference with the decimal point
background MIA2H Equivalent Oval Minor Axis (Max) MS,AB,JG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 1904
Position of the Dark decimal point
(Light) Cluster MIA2L Equivalent Oval Minor Axis (Min) MS,AB,JG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 1905
Position of the Dark decimal point
(Light) Cluster
RTO2 Equivalent Oval Aspect ratio MS,LG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the -  1895
Number of Dark (Light)
decimal point
Clusters
RTO2H Equivalent Oval Aspect ratio MS,LG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the - × 1906
Correcting the Position
(Max.) decimal point
of the Dark (Light)
RTO2L Equivalent Oval Aspect ratio MS,LG,HL,LL Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the - × 1907
Cluster Center of 
Gravity (Min.) decimal point
(continued)
Trend edge position SGN No. of Segments MS Integer 4 digits - × -
(page 5-124) DSGN Number of Detected Segments MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 4 digits - × 533
Position and angle of
line to horizontal N Number of Edges MS Integer 4 digits -  -
Position of Circle Center NHI No. of Edges (Max) MS Integer 4 digits - × -
Edge Position (Position/ NLO No. of Edges (Min) MS Integer 4 digits - × -
Inclination)
Line Detection X Position X ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X  82
Detect Circle after the decimal point
Tip Position XHI Position X (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × 598
(Dimensions and after the decimal point
Geometric Shape) XLO Position X (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × 599
Position Adjustment with after the decimal point
the XA Position X (Ave) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
Position and Angle of after the decimal point
the Line Y Position Y ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y  83
Position Correction of after the decimal point
Circle Center YHI Position Y (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × 600
YLO Position Y (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × 601
YA Position Y (Ave) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
XYHI Position XY (Max) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
XYLO Position XY (Min) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
XYA Position XY (Ave) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
T Angle ST,MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits -  -
Appendix

THI Angle (Max) MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits - × -
TLO Angle (Min) MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits - × -
P* Distance MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L  91
decimal point
PHI Distance (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 110
decimal point
PLO Distance (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 111
decimal point
PA Distance (Ave) MS,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × -
decimal point
RW Radius MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L  541
decimal point
RWHI Radius (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 112
decimal point
RWLO Radius (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 113
decimal point
RWA Radius (Ave) MS,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × -
decimal point
A-76 LJ-X UM_GB

Trend edge position I Intensity MS Integer 3 digits, 3 digits after the -  -
Position and angle of decimal point
line to horizontal IHI Intensity (Max) MS Integer 3 digits, 3 digits after the - × -
Position of Circle Center decimal point
Edge Position (Position/ ILO Intensity (Min) MS Integer 3 digits, 3 digits after the - × -
Inclination) decimal point
Line Detection DCX Circle Center X ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 6 digits, 3 digits X × 546
Detect Circle after the decimal point
Tip Position
DCY Circle Center Y ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 6 digits, 3 digits Y × 547
(Dimensions and
Geometric Shape)
DCXY Circle Center XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 6 digits, 3 digits - × -
Position Adjustment with
the
DCR Circle Radius MS,HL,LL,AB Integer 6 digits, 3 digits after the L × 545
Position and Angle of
the Line decimal point
Position Correction of DCD Best Fit Circle Diameter MS,HL,LL,AB Integer 6 digits, 3 digits after the L × 2592
Circle Center decimal point
(continued) DLT Best Fit Line Angle ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits - × 640
DLX Line Center X ST,MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
DLY Line Center Y ST,MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
DLXY Line Center XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
DLX1 Line X1 MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
DLY1 Line Y1 MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
DLXY1 Best Fit Line XY1 MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
DLX2 Line X2 MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
DLY2 Line Y2 MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
DLXY2 Best Fit Line XY2 MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
MXSGI Maximum Segment No. MS Integer 4 digits - × -
(Cannot be used with output
settings)
MNSGI Minimum segment No. MS Integer 4 digits - × -
settings)
Trend Edge Width SGN No. of Segments MS Integer 4 digits - × -
Width (Max./Min.)
Diameter (Max./Min.) N Number of Pairs MS Integer 4 digits -  -
Peak-to-Peak Width NHI No. of Pairs (Max) MS Integer 4 digits - × -
Appendix
NLO No. of Pairs (Min) MS Integer 4 digits - × -

W* Edge Width MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L  97
decimal point
WHI* Edge Width (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 604
decimal point
WLO* Edge Width (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × 605
decimal point
WA Edge Width (Ave) MS,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × -
decimal point
PMHI* Max. P-P Width MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × 2718
PMLO* Min. P-P Width MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × 2719
X1HI Position 1X (Max) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
LJ-X UM_GB A-77

Trend Edge Width X1LO Position 1X (Min) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
Width (Max./Min.) after the decimal point
Diameter (Max./Min.) X1PHI Peak Position 1X (Max.) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
Peak-to-Peak Width after the decimal point
(continued) X1PLO Peak Position 1X (Min.) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
Y1HI Position 1Y (Max) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
Y1LO Position 1Y (Min) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
Y1PHI Peak Position 1Y (Max.) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
Y1PLO Peak Position 1Y (Min.) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
XY1HI Position 1XY (Max) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
XY1LO Position 1XY (Min) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
XY1PHI Peak Position 1XY (Max.) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
XY1PLO Peak Position 1XY (Min.) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
T1HI Angle 1 (max) MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits - × -
T1LO Angle 1 (min) MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits - × -
decimal point
P1HI Distance 1 (max) MS,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × -
decimal point
P1LO Distance 1 (min) MS,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × -
decimal point
decimal point
I1HI Intensity1 (Max) MS Integer 3 digits, 3 digits after the - × -
decimal point
I1LO Intensity1 (Min) MS Integer 3 digits, 3 digits after the - × -
decimal point
X2HI Position 2X (Max) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
Appendix

X2LO Position 2X (Min) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
X2PHI Peak Position 2X (Max.) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
X2PLO Peak Position 2X (Min.) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
Y2HI Position 2Y (Max) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
Y2LO Position 2Y (Min) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
Y2PHI Peak Position 2Y (Max.) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
Y2PLO Peak Position 2Y (Min.) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
A-78 LJ-X UM_GB

Trend Edge Width XY2 Position 2XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
Width (Max./Min.) after the decimal point
Diameter (Max./Min.) XY2HI Position 2XY (Max) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
Peak-to-Peak Width after the decimal point
(continued) XY2LO Position 2XY (Min) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
XY2PHI Peak Position 2XY (Max.) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
XY2PLO Peak Position 2XY (Min.) MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
T2HI Angle 2 X MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits - × -
T2LO Angle 2 (Min.) MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits - × -
decimal point
P2HI Distance 2 (Max.) MS,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × -
decimal point
P2LO Distance 2 (Min.) MS,AB Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the L × -
decimal point
decimal point
I2HI Intensity2 (Max.) MS Integer 3 digits, 3 digits after the - × -
decimal point
I2LO Intensity2 (Min.) MS Integer 3 digits, 3 digits after the - × -
decimal point
MXSGI Maximum Segment No. MS Integer 4 digits - × -
settings)
MNSGI Minimum segment No. MS Integer 4 digits - × -
settings)
Trend Edge Defect SGN No. of Segments MS Integer 4 digits - × -
Burr/flaw on the line
Burr/flaw on the circle STN Number of Defects MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 4 digits - × 1609
Burr/flaw on the curve TSTG Total Amount of Defects MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 7 digits, 3 digits after the - × 1612
decimal point
TSTL Defect Amplitude Level MS Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the - × -
decimal point
TSTW Total Number of Defected MS Integer 4 digits - × -
Segments
STG[st] Amount of Defects MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 7 digits, 3 digits after the -  1627
decimal point
STGHI Amount of Defects (Max.) MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 7 digits, 3 digits after the - × 1628
Appendix
decimal point
STGLO Amount of Defects (Min.) MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 7 digits, 3 digits after the - × 1629
decimal point
STL[st] Defect Level MS Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the -  -
decimal point
STLHI Defect Level (Max.) MS Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the - × -
decimal point
STLLO Defect Level (Min.) MS Integer 5 digits, 3 digits after the - × -
decimal point
STW[st] Number of Detected Segments MS Integer 4 digits -  -
STWHI Number of Defected Segments (Max.) MS Integer 4 digits - × -
STWLO Number of Defected Segments (Min.) MS Integer 4 digits - × -
STX[st] Defect Position X ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X  1613
STXHI Defect Position X (Max.) MS,JG,HL,LL,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × 1614
LJ-X UM_GB A-79

Trend Edge Defect STXLO Defect Position X (Min.) MS,JG,HL,LL,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × 1615
Burr/flaw on the line after the decimal point
Burr/flaw on the circle STY[st] Defect Position Y ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y  1616
Burr/flaw on the curve after the decimal point
(continued) STYHI Defect Position Y (Max.) MS,JG,HL,LL,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × 1617
STYLO Defect Position Y (Min.) MS,JG,HL,LL,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × 1618
STXY[st] Defect Position XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
STT[st] Defect Angle ST,MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits -  -
STTX[st] Defect Vertex Position X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X  -
STTY[st] Defect Vertex Position Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y  -
STTXY[st] Defect Vertex Position XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
STBX1[st] Defect Bend Position X1 MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X  -
STBY1[st] Defect Bend Position Y1 MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y  -
STBXY1[st] Defect Bend Position XY1 MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
STBX2[st] Defect Bend Position X2 MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X  -
STBY2[st] Defect Bend Position Y2 MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y  -
STBXY2[st] Defect Bend Position XY2 MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
STSN[st] No. of the Segment That Was First MS Integer 4 digits -  -
Defected
STTN[st] No. of the Segment with a Defected MS Integer 4 digits -  -
Vertex
STEN[st] No. of the Segment with a Terminated MS Integer 4 digits -  -
Defect
BMN Number of Reference Model Lines MS Integer 1 digit - × -
BLX1 Reference Line X1 MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
BLY1 Reference Line Y1 MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
BLXY1 Reference Line XY1 MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
BLX2 Reference Line X2 MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
BLY2 Reference Line Y2 MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
Appendix
BLXY2 Reference Line XY2 MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -

BLX Reference Line Center X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
BLY Reference Line Center Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
BLXY Reference Line Center XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
BLT Reference Line Angle MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits - × -
BCR Reference Circle Radius MS,AB Integer 6 digits, 3 digits after the L × -
decimal point
BCX Reference Circle Center X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 6 digits, 3 digits X × -
BCY Reference Circle Center Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 6 digits, 3 digits Y × -
BCXY Reference Circle Center XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 6 digits, 3 digits - × -
A-80 LJ-X UM_GB

Trend Edge Defect BER1 Reference Oval Radius 1 MS,AB Integer 6 digits, 3 digits after the L × -
Burr/flaw on the line decimal point
Burr/flaw on the circle BER2 Reference Oval Radius 2 MS,AB Integer 6 digits, 3 digits after the L × -
Burr/flaw on the curve decimal point
(continued) BEX Reference Oval Center X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 6 digits, 3 digits X × -
BEY Reference Oval Center Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 6 digits, 3 digits Y × -
BEXY Reference Oval Center XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 6 digits, 3 digits - × -
BET Rotation Angle of Reference Oval MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits - × -
BFX Reference Position X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X  -
BFY Reference Position Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y  -
BFXY Reference Position XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
DIFF Difference MS Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
N Number of Edges MS Integer 4 digits -  -
X Edge position X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X  -
Y Edge position Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y  -
XY Edge position XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
T Edge Angle (%) MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits -  -
Shading inspection DA Average Intensity ST,MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 3 digits, 3 digits after the - × 182
(page 5-138) decimal point
With or Without/ DD Intensity Deviation ST,MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 3 digits, 3 digits after the - × 184
Distinction on the decimal point
Contrast Pattern DH Max. Intensity ST,MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 3 digits - × 187
DL Min. Intensity ST,MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 3 digits - × 188
OCR (page 5-160) STR1 Recognized String JG Integer 1 digit - × -
Character Recognition RCG_CHR Recognized Character MS,JG Integer 3 digits -  -
JG_CHR Judged Character MS Integer 3 digits -  -
VR_STR Collated String JG Integer 1 digit -  -
VR_CHR[] Collated String MS Integer 2 digits -  -
CHR1 First Character Candidate MS Integer 3 digits -  -
CHR2 Second Character Candidate MS Integer 3 digits -  -
CRR1 Recognizability of First Candidate MS Integer 2 digits -  -
CRR2 Recognizability of Second MS Integer 2 digits -  -
Appendix
Candidate
STBL Stability MS Integer 2 digits -  -
GDEV Intensity deviation MS Integer 2 digits -  -
CCN1 Number of Segmented Characters MS Integer 2 digits - × -
L1CRR1_H Recognizability (Max.) MS,JG,LL Integer 2 digits - × 1383
L1CRR1_L Recognizability (Min.) MS,JG,LL Integer 2 digits - × 1384
L1STBL_H Stability (Max.) MS,JG,LL Integer 2 digits - × 1385
L1STBL_L Stability (Min.) MS,JG,LL Integer 2 digits - × 1386
Judged Character MS String - × -
OCR2 (page 5-141) STR1 Recognized String JG Integer 1 digit - × -
Character Recognition RCG_CHR Recognized Character MS,JG Integer 3 digits -  -
JG_CHR Judged Character MS Integer 3 digits -  -
VR_STR Collated String JG Integer 1 digit -  -
VR_CHR[] Collated String MS Integer 2 digits -  -
CHR1 First Character Candidate MS Integer 3 digits -  -
CHR2 Second Character Candidate MS Integer 3 digits -  -
LJ-X UM_GB A-81

OCR2 (page 5-141) CRR1 Recognizability of First Candidate MS Integer 2 digits -  -
Character Recognition CRR2 Recognizability of Second MS Integer 2 digits -  -
(continued) Candidate
VR_CPLC1[] No. of the First Registered MS Integer 3 digits -  -
Dictionary Candidate
VR_CPLC2[] No. of the First Registered MS Integer 3 digits -  -
Dictionary Candidate
STBL Stability MS Integer 2 digits -  -
GDEV Intensity Deviation MS Integer 2 digits -  -
CCN1 Number of Segmented Characters MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 2 digits - × 1399
L1CRR1_H Recognizability (Max.) MS,JG,LL Integer 2 digits - × 1383
L1CRR1_L Recognizability (Min.) MS,JG,LL Integer 2 digits - × 1384
L1STBL_H Stability (Max.) MS,JG,LL Integer 2 digits - × 1385
L1STBL_L Stability (Min.) MS,JG,LL Integer 2 digits - × 1386
Judged Character (Cannot be used MS String - × -
in calculation)
1D Code Reading ID_LEN Length of Data Read MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 3 digits -  2006
1D Code Reader ID_DATA Data Read MS Integer 3 digits -  -
(page 5-147)
ID_STR String of the Data Read MS 128 digits -  -
X Position X ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X  82
T Detected Angle MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits -  84
XYT XY Position/Detected Angle MS Sign, integer 5 digits, integer 3 -  -
(Cannot be used in calculation) digits, 3 digits after the decimal
point
ID_LEN1 Segmented Data Length 1 MS Integer 3 digits -  -
ID_DATA1 Segmented Data 1 MS Integer 3 digits -  -
Appendix

ID_STR1 Segmented Data String 1 MS 128 digits -  -
A-82 LJ-X UM_GB

1D Code Reading ID_STR7 Segmented Data String 7 MS 128 digits -  -
1D Code Reader (Cannot be used in calculation)
(continued) ID_STR8 Segmented Data String 8 MS 128 digits -  -
MSIZE Detection code resolution MS Integer 3 digits, 3 digits after the -  -
decimal point
ID_CCLR Printing Color MS Integer 1 digit -  -
ID_CDT Code Angle ST,MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits -  -
ID_CDL Code Data Length MS Integer 4 digits -  -
STB Reading Stability MS Integer 1 digit -  -
ID_ERR Reading Error MS Integer 1 digit -  -
ID_ERSN Cause of Reading Error MS Integer 1 digit -  -
M_IDX Collation Match No. MS Integer 2 digits -  -
M_DATA1 Collation Pattern 1 MS Integer 3 digits -  -
M_STR1 Collation Pattern String 1 MS 128 digits -  -
Appendix

LJ-X UM_GB A-83

1D Code Reading M_STR16 Collation Pattern String 16 MS 128 digits -  -
1D Code Reader (Cannot be used in calculation)
(continued) M_RSLT Collocation Result JG Integer 1 digit -  -
M_RSLT1 Collocation Result 1 MS Sign, Integer 3 digits -  -
BC_ALL BC Overall Grade MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
BC_DEC Result of BC Decoding (DEC) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
BC_EDG Number of BC Edges (EDGE) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
BC_SC BC Symbol MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
Contrast (SC)
BC_MINR BC Minimum reflectance (MINR) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
BC_MINE BC Minimum edge MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
Contrast (MINE)
BC_MOD BC Modulation (MOD) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
BC_QZ BC Minimum quiet zone (QZ) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
BC_DCD Degree of Ease in BC Decoding MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
(DCD)
BC_DEF BC Defect (DEF) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
BC_WNR BC Wide to Narrow Ratio (WNR) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
BC_CGAP Gap between MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
BC Characters (CGAP)
BC_EDG_ Number of BC Edges (EDGE) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
VAL (Evaluated Value) after the decimal point
BC_SC_ BC Symbol Contrast (SC) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
BC_MINR_VAL BC Minimum reflectance (MINR) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
Appendix
(evaluated value) after the decimal point

BC_MINE_VAL BC Minimum edge contrast (MINE) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
BC_MOD_VAL BC Modulation (MOD) (Evaluated MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
Value) after the decimal point
BC_QZ_ BC Minimum Quiet Zone (QZ) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
BC_DCD_VAL Degree of Ease in BC Decoding MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
(DCD) (Evaluated Value) after the decimal point
BC_DEF_ BC Defect (DEF) (Evaluated Value) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
VAL after the decimal point
BC_WNR_VAL BC Wide to Narrow Ratio (WNR) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
(Evaluated Value) after the decimal point
BC_CGAP_VAL Gap Between BC Characters MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
(CGAP) (Evaluated Value) after the decimal point
A-84 LJ-X UM_GB

2D Code Reading ID_LEN Length of Data Read MS,JG,HL,LL Integer 3 digits -  2006
2D Code Reader ID_DATA Data Read MS Integer 3 digits -  -
(page 5-151)
ID_STR String of the Data Read MS 512 digits -  -
CC1D_LEN Length of Data Read MS Integer 3 digits -  -
(Combined Symbols of the 1D Part)
CC1D_ Data Read MS Integer 3 digits -  -
DATA (Combined Symbols of the 1D Part)
CC1D_ID_STR String of the Data Read (Combined MS 128 digits -  -
Symbols of the 1D Part)
CC2D_LEN Length of Data Read MS Integer 3 digits -  -
(Combined Symbols of the 2D Part)
CC2D_ Data Read MS Integer 3 digits -  -
DATA (Combined Symbols of the 2D Part)
CC2D_ID_STR String of the Data Read (Combined MS 512 digits -  -
Symbols of the 2D Part)
X Position X ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X  82
T Detected Angle MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits -  84
XYT XY Position/Detected Angle MS Sign, integer 5 digits, integer 3 -  -
(Cannot be used in calculation) digits, 3 digits after the decimal
point
CC1D_X Position X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
(Combined Symbols of the 1D Part) after the decimal point
CC1D_Y Position Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
CC1D_XY Position XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
CC1D_T Detected Angle MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits -  -
CC1D_XYT XY Position/Detected Angle MS Sign, integer 5 digits, integer 3 -  -
(Combined Symbols of the 1D Part) digits, 3 digits after the decimal
(Cannot be used in calculation) point
CC2D_X Position X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
CC2D_Y Position Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
CC2D_XY Position XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits -  -
CC2D_T Detected Angle MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits -  -
CC2D_XYT XY Position/Detected Angle MS Sign, integer 5 digits, integer 3 -  -
Appendix
(Combined Symbols of the 2D Part) digits, 3 digits after the decimal

(Cannot be used in calculation) point
LJ-X UM_GB A-85

2D Code Reading ID_LEN5 Segmented Data Length 5 MS Integer 3 digits -  -
2D Code Reader ID_LEN6 Segmented Data Length 6 MS Integer 3 digits -  -
(continued)
ID_CSIZE Detection Code Resolution MS Integer 3 digits, 3 digits after the -  -
decimal point
ID_UECR Rate of Unused Error Correction MS Integer 3 digits -  -
ID_CNR Number of Cell Rows MS Integer 3 digits -  -
ID_CNC Number of Cell Columns MS Integer 3 digits -  -
ID_CCLR Printing Color MS Integer 1 digit -  -
ID_MRI With or Without Mirror Effect MS Integer 1 digit -  -
ID_CDT Code angle ST,MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits -  -
ID_CDL Code Data Length MS Integer 4 digits -  -
ID_ERR Reading Error MS Integer 1 digit -  -
ID_ERSN Cause of Reading Error MS Integer 1 digit -  -
CC_HGAP Length of lateral dislocation in the MS Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits -  -
Appendix
combined symbols after the decimal point

M_IDX Collation Match No. MS Integer 2 digits -  -
A-86 LJ-X UM_GB

2D Code Reading M_DATA15 Collation Pattern 15 MS Integer 3 digits -  -
2D Code Reader M_DATA16 Collation Pattern 16 MS Integer 3 digits -  -
(continued)
M_RSLT Collocation Result JG Integer 1 digit -  -
M_RSLT1 Collocation Result 1 MS Integer 3 digits -  -
Appendix

ISO_ALL ISO overall grade MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
ISO_DEC Result of ISO Decoding (DEC) MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
ISO_SC ISO Symbol MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
Contrast (SC)
ISO_MOD ISO modulation (MOD) MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
ISO_RM ISO reflectance margin (RM) MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
ISO_FPD ISO fixed pattern damage (FPD) MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
ISO_AN ISO non-uniformity in the axis (AN) MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
LJ-X UM_GB A-87

2D Code Reading ISO_GN ISO non-uniformity in the grid (GN) MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
2D Code Reader ISO_UEC ISO unused error correction (UEC) MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
(continued)
ISO_FID ISO format information damage MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
(FID)
ISO_VID ISO model number information MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
damage (VID)
ISO_PGH ISO print expansion/contraction- MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
horizontal (PGH)
ISO_PGV ISO print expansion/contraction- MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
vertical (PGV)
AIM_ALL AIM overall grade MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
AIM_DEC Successful AIM Decoding (DEC) MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
AIM_CC AIM cell contrast (CC) MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
AIM_CM AIM cell modulation (CM) MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
AIM_RM AIM reflectance margin (RM) MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
AIM_FPD AIM fixed pattern damage (FPD) MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
AIM_AN AIM non-uniformity in the axis (AN) MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
AIM_GN AIM non-uniformity in the grid (GN) MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
AIM_UEC AIM unused error correction (UEC) MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
AIM_FID AIM format information damage MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
(FID)
AIM_VID AIM model number information MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
damage (VID)
AIM_PGH AIM print expansion/contraction- MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
horizontal (PGH)
AIM_PGV AIM print expansion/contraction- MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
vertical (PGV)
SAE_ALL SAE overall grade MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
SAE_QZ SAE Minimum quiet zone (QZ) MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
SAE_SC SAE Symbol Contrast (SC) MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
SAE_AD SAE angle distortion (AD) MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
SAE_MF SAE module fill (MF) MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
ISO_SC_ ISO Symbol Contrast (SC) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
VAL (evaluated value) after the decimal point
ISO_AN_ ISO non-uniformity in the axis (AN) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
ISO_GN_ ISO non-uniformity in the grid (GN) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
ISO_UEC_ ISO unused error correction (UEC) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
ISO_FID_ ISO format information damage MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 1 digits - × -
VAL (FID) (evaluated value) after the decimal point
ISO_VID_ ISO model number information MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 1 digits - × -
Appendix
VAL damage (VID) (evaluated value) after the decimal point

ISO_PGH_ ISO print expansion/contraction- MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
VAL horizontal (PGH) (evaluated value) after the decimal point
ISO_PGV_ ISO print expansion/contraction- MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
VAL vertical (PGV) (evaluated value) after the decimal point
AIM_CC_ AIM cell contrast (CC) (evaluated MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
VAL value) after the decimal point
AIM_AN_ AIM non-uniformity in the axis (AN) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
AIM_GN_ AIM non-uniformity in the grid (GN) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
AIM_UEC_ AIM unused error correction (UEC) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
AIM_FID_ AIM format information damage MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 1 digits - × -
VAL (FID) (evaluated value) after the decimal point
AIM_VID_ AIM model number information MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 1 digits - × -
VAL damage (VID) (evaluated value) after the decimal point
AIM_PGH_ AIM print expansion/contraction- MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
VAL horizontal (PGH) (evaluated value) after the decimal point
A-88 LJ-X UM_GB

2D Code Reading AIM_PGV_ AIM print expansion/contraction- MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
2D Code Reader VAL vertical (PGV) (evaluated value) after the decimal point
(continued) SAE_SC_ SAE Symbol Contrast (SC) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
SAE_AD_ SAE angle distortion (AD) MS Sign, Integer 2 digit - × -
VAL (evaluated value)
SAE_MF_ SAE module fill (MF) (evaluated MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
VAL value) after the decimal point
ST_ALL ST overall grade MS,JG,LL Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
ST_DEC Result of ST Decoding (DEC) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
ST_EDG Number of ST Edges (EDGE) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
ST_SC ST Symbol Contrast (SC) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
ST_MINR ST Minimum reflectance (MINR) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
ST_MINE ST Minimum edge contrast (MINE) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
ST_MOD ST Modulation (MOD) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
ST_QZ ST Minimum quiet zone (QZ) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
ST_DCD Degree of ease in ST decoding MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
(DCD)
ST_DEF ST defect (DEF) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
ST_CY ST valid code word rate (CY) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
ST_CPQ ST code word printing MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
Corrective patch quality (CPQ)
ST_UEC ST unused error correction (UEC) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
ST_EDG_ Number of ST Edges (EDGE) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
ST_SC_VAL ST Symbol Contrast (SC) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
ST_MINR_VAL ST Minimum reflectance (MINR) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
ST_MINE_VAL ST Minimum edge contrast (MINE) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
ST_MOD_VAL ST Modulation (MOD) (evaluated MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
value) after the decimal point
ST_QZ_ ST Minimum quiet zone (QZ) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
ST_DCD_ Degree of ease in ST decoding MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
VAL (DCD) (evaluated value) after the decimal point
ST_DEF_ ST defect (DEF) (evaluated value) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
ST_CY_ ST valid code word rate (CY) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
ST_CPQ_ ST code word printing MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
VAL Corrective patch quality (CPQ) after the decimal point
(evaluated value)
Appendix
ST_UEC_ ST unused error correction (UEC) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -

BC_DEC Result of BC Decoding (DEC) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
BC_EDG Number of BC Edges (EDGE) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
BC_SC BC Symbol MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
Contrast (SC)
BC_MINR BC Minimum reflectance (MINR) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
BC_MINE BC Minimum edge MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
Contrast (MINE)
BC_MOD BC Modulation (MOD) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
BC_QZ BC Minimum quiet zone (QZ) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
BC_DCD Degree of ease in BC decoding MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
(DCD)
BC_DEF BC defect (DEF) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit - × -
BC_EDG_ Number of BC Edges (EDGE) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
BC_SC_ BC Symbol Contrast (SC) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
LJ-X UM_GB A-89

2D Code Reading BC_MINR_VAL BC Minimum reflectance (MINR) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
2D Code Reader (evaluated value) after the decimal point
(continued) BC_MINE_VAL BC Minimum edge contrast (MINE) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
BC_MOD_VAL BC Modulation (MOD) (evaluated MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
value) after the decimal point
BC_QZ_ BC Minimum Quiet Zone (QZ) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
BC_DCD_VAL Degree of Ease in BC Decoding MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
(DCD) (Evaluated Value) after the decimal point
BC_DEF_ BC Defect (DEF) (Evaluated Value) MS Sign, Integer 1 digit, 2 digits - × -
Points Distance P* Distance MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × 91
XP* Distance X MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × 2574
YP* Distance Y MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × 2575
X1 Best Fit Point 1X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
Y1 Best Fit Point 1Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
XY1 Best Fit Point 1XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
Point/Line Distance P* Distance MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × 91
X1 Best Fit Point X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
Y1 Best Fit Point Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
XY1 Best Fit Point XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
L2T Best Fit Line Angle MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits - × -
L2X Best Fit Line X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
L2Y Best Fit Line Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
L2XY Best Fit Line XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
Lines Distance P* Distance MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × 91
Appendix

L1T Best Fit Line 1 Angle MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits - × -
L1X Best Fit Line 1X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
L1Y Best Fit Line 1Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
L1XY Best Fit Line 1XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
A-90 LJ-X UM_GB

Point/Circle Distance P* Distance MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × 91
X1 Best Fit Point X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
Y1 Best Fit Point Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
XY1 Best Fit Point XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
C2X Detection Circle Center X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
C2Y Detection Circle Center Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
C2XY Detection Circle Center XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
C2R Detection Circle Radius MS,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × -
C2D Best Fit Circle Diameter MS,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × -
Line/Circle Distance P* Distance MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × 91
C2X Detection Circle Center X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
C2Y Detection Circle Center Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
C2XY Detection Circle Center XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
C2R Detection Circle Radius MS,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × -
C2D Best Fit Circle Diameter MS,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × -
Circles Distance P* Distance MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × 91
Appendix

C1X Best Fit Circle 1 Center X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
C1Y Best Fit Circle 1 Center Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
C1XY Best Fit Circle 1 Center XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
C1R Best Fit Circle 1 Radius MS,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × -
C1D Best Fit Circle 1 Diameter MS,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × -
C2X Best Fit Circle 2 Center Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
C2Y Best Fit Circle 2 Radius MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
C2XY Best Fit Circle 2 Diameter MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
C2R Best Fit Circle 2 Radius MS,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × -
C2D Best Fit Circle 2 Diameter MS,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × -
LJ-X UM_GB A-91

Line Passing Two Points DLT Best Fit Line Angle MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits - × 640
DLX Best Fit Line X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
DLY Best Fit Line Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
DLXY Best Fit Line XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
Bisection of Two Lines DLT Median Angle MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 2 digits, 3 digits - × 640
DLX Median X MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × -
DLY Median Y MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × -
DLXY Median XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
Angle Formed by Two T Angle MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits - × 84
Lines after the decimal point
(page 5-42) L1T Best Fit Line 1 Angle MS,AB Sign, Integer 3 digits, 3 digits - × -
Appendix

A-92 LJ-X UM_GB

Line/V-Line Intersection X Intersection X MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × 82
Y Intersection Y MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × 83
XY Intersection XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
Two Lines Intersection X Intersection X MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × 82
Y Intersection Y MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × 83
XY Intersection XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
Center of Quadrangle X Center X MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × 82
Y Center Y MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × 83
XY Center XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
Appendix

LJ-X UM_GB A-93

Midpoint of Points X Midpoint X MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × 82
Y Midpoint Y MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × 83
XY Midpoint XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
Circle Passing Three DCX Circle Center X MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits X × 546
Points after the decimal point
DCY Circle Center Y MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits Y × 547
DCXY Circle Center XY MS,AB,EC Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits - × -
DCR Circle Radius MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × 545
DCD Best Fit Circle Diameter MS,JG,HL,LL,AB Sign, Integer 5 digits, 3 digits L × 2592
Appendix

Calculation ANS0 Operation Result 0 MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 11 digits, 3 digits after - × 975
(page 5-179) the decimal point
ANS1 Calculation Result 1 MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 11 digits, 3 digits after - × 2511
the decimal point
ANS2 Calculation Result 2 MS,JG,HL,LL Sign, Integer 11 digits, 3 digits after - × 2512
the decimal point
ERRC Error Code Integer 7 digits - × -
ERRL Error Line Integer 7 digits - × -
A-94 LJ-X UM_GB

Pre-processing filter for contrast images
Binary Expand
Performs binary processing. Removes dark noise by adjusting pixels to the highest
grayscale intensity from a group of pixels.
Move [LO] and [UP] with a mouse for adjustment.

Brightness between [LO] and [UP] becomes "white". • Processing Shape: Specifies the filter processing shape.
• Auto Set: [LO] and [UP] are automatically set from • Size: Sets the filter size. The greater the size, the stronger
distribution on the graph. the filter effect.
• Direction: Selects the direction of expansion.
• Count: Changes the number of times the filter is applied.
Contrast Conversion
• Border: Put a check when processing including information
Adjusts brightness of the overall image. outside the border.
Shrink
Removes bright noise by adjusting pixels to the lowest
grayscale intensity from a group of pixels.
• Offset: When the value is increased, the image becomes

bright. When decreased, the image becomes dark.
• Span: When the value is increased, the contrast becomes
strong. When decreased, the contrast becomes weak.
• Processing Shape: Specifies the filter processing shape.

Appendix
Contrast Expansion
• Size: Sets the filter size. The greater the size, the stronger
Improves the image contrast by correcting the brightness the filter effect.
distribution in the image. • Direction: Selects the direction of shrink.
outside the border.
• Expansion Width: Adjusts the intensity of the contrast

expansion. Increasing this value will expand the brightness
distribution correction width.
• Noise Cut: Reduces the noise. Noise occurs especially in
the dark areas of the image. Increasing the value will reduce
the noise, but the image may become less sharp.
LJ-X UM_GB A-95
Remove Dark Noise Median

Removes dark noise by close processing (expansion → Removes noise yet maintains definition by taking the
shrink). median (most common) intensity across a group of pixels.
• Processing Shape: Specifies the filter processing shape. • Processing Shape: Specifies the filter processing shape.
• Size: Sets the filter size. The greater the size, the stronger • Size: Sets the filter size. The greater the size, the stronger the
the filter effect. filter effect.
• Direction: Selects the direction of expansion and shrink. • Count: Changes the number of times the filter is applied.
Shading Correction
outside the border..
Using this filter leaves areas where there is a sharp
contrast while removing smooth change in contrast for the
Remove Bright Noise rest of the background.
Removes bright noise by open processing (shrink →
expansion).
See "Eliminating Shading and Gradation" (Page 9-35) for

more details.
• Processing Shape: Specifies the filter processing shape.
• Size: Sets the filter size. The greater the size, the stronger
Blur
the filter effect.
• Direction: Selects the direction of expansion and shrink. Blurs the image.
outside the border.
Appendix
Noise Isolation
Extracts or removes clusters of bright or dark pixels.
• Intensity: Sets the level for blur. The larger the value is, the
stronger blur is.
• Direction: Selects the direction of blur processing.
For details, refer to "Remove or extract bright or dark pixel

block with noise control filter" (page A-105).
A-96 LJ-X UM_GB

Average Scratch Defect Extraction

Removes noise by taking the average intensity across a Extracts only linear defects by removing the shading
group of pixels. variation in the background.
• Count: Changes the number of times the filter is applied. For details, refer to "Emphasizing only linear defects with a line
defect extraction filter" (page A-104).
Subtraction
Preserve Intensity
Outputs the image for tone difference obtained by
overlapping the reference image with the current image. Adjusts brightness according to the intensity on the
reference image.
See "Extract chips and dirts with difference filters" (page A-

99) for more details. See "Reduce the effect of illuminance variation with the
illumination correction filter" (page A-100) for more details.
Image Extraction
Blob Filter
The background of a target can be removed with the Image
Extraction filter, by subtracting the current image from a Extracts the desired target by processing the binary image.
processed version.
Appendix
• Detection Color: Selects which blobs ("White" or "Black")

See "Remove background information with the real-time in the binarized image are to be set as targets for
difference filter" (page A-101) for more details. processing.
• Detection Count: Specifies the maximum number of blobs
to be detected.
• Lower Area Filter: Excludes a blob which is smaller than
the specified lower limit. Increase the value in case an
unnecessary noise component is counted.
• Fill Holes: Fills the inside of the blob with the detection
color.
• Active Border: Excludes the blobs on the frame border of
the inspection region. Setting to ON removes the
background from the inspection region.
LJ-X UM_GB A-97

Sobel X Sobel
Extracts the border of shading variation in the horizontal (X) Extracts low-contrast shading variation and emphasizing it
direction. rather stronger than Prewitt.
• Count: Changes the number of times the filter is applied. • Count: Changes the number of times the filter is applied.
Sobel Y Roberts
Extracts the border of shading variation in the vertical (Y) It has a little weaker extraction in X and Y directions than
direction. Prewitt, but is suitable for extraction of shading variation in
oblique directions.

Sharpen
Laplacian
Enhances regions where there is a change in intensity.
Extracts edge uniformly without depending on the direction.
Appendix

Prewitt
It is the edge extraction processing that composes the
results of shading variation extraction done individually in
the X and Y directions.
A-98 LJ-X UM_GB

Filter Details
Filter Details
Extract chips and dirts with difference Operation flow

filters 1 Set a tool to apply the difference filters.
Here the damage tool is used as example.
About the difference filters For details on how to set the defect tool, see "Defect"
(page 5-111).
Using a difference filter makes possible to output a
difference image of gradation differences obtained by 2 Add the "difference" filters to a tool desired to
overlaying the reference image and the input image. This is apply.
useful when you want to extract only the changed parts Add the "difference" on a "preprocessing" screen.
from the original reference image, such as dirt, chipping,
and deformation. Using it with a defect tool (page 5-111) 3 Set details of the difference filters.
and Position Correction to expand the function to detect
Contour suppression processing
defects and dirt.
Cancel noisy difference information occurs near the
outline due to the error of the reference image and the
Example input image Set between 0 and 9 (initial value: 2) times.
The higher the frequency, the higher the control effect, but
Reference Current Different
image image image the lower the sensitivity to subtle changes.
Hole size Extraction color
change
Select change direction of concentration to be reflected to
Missing
characters
the difference image.
• Light and dark (initial value): Changes in the light
direction and dark direction to the reference image are
reflected in the difference image.
Pin bend • Light: Reflect only changes in the light direction to the
reference image to the difference image.
• Dark: Reflect only changes in the dark direction to the
The process of the difference filters reference image to the difference image.
Changes of the difference image by extraction

Reference
image Current image color setting
Position offset correction

(if there is a position offset)
Appendix
Difference filter
Reference image Input image
Calculates the difference in gray (OK product) (NG product)
level between the input image and
the reference image.
Different image
Difference image Difference Difference
(bright and dark) image (bright) image (dark)
Various measurement processing
4 After completing the settings, select [OK].
LJ-X UM_GB A-99

Filter Details
5 Set a pattern search tool to use as a Position

Reduce the effect of illuminance variation
Correction tool.
with the illumination correction filter
Position of the detection target on the reference image
and the input image is wrong, it is reflected to the By using the illumination correction filter to correct the
difference filters. To prevent this problem, it needs intensity of the reference image as a reference, it is
Position Correction with a pattern search tool etc. For possible to reduce the variation in height and brightness of
details on how to set the pattern search tool, see "Pattern the input image.
Search" (page 5-80).
Example
Reference Current Corrected

image image image
6 Specify the pattern search tool set Position

Correction in procedure 5 as correction source, the Lighting correction process
defect tool as correction destination.
Color extraction (color image only)
For details, see "Correct the Position (Position
Adjustment)" (page 3-40).
Contrast test
Measures the brightness of the
input image.
Lighting correction filter

Apply the reference value /
measurement value coefficient to
the input image.
Various measurement processing
Corrected image
Operation flow
Appendix
1 Set "Shading inspection" tool to measure the

reference value.
The correction will be stable on setting the measurement
area to a place of intermediate brightness ( around an
average intensity value of 128).
2 Set "Lightning correction" filters to a tool desired

to apply the lightning correction.
Add "Lightning correction" on the "Preprocessing" screen.
3 Select a "Shading inspection" tool as the reference

in the "Gradation check of the correction source"
column
A-100 LJ-X UM_GB

Filter Details
Remove background information with Out-of-area reference of the real-time

the real-time difference filter difference filter
It is possible to specify the processing method in an area
Remove background information to calculate the difference
boundary on creating innerly processed image as the
between the input image and the internally processed
reference.
image created from the input image It is convenient to
• ON: Create a processed image by referring to the gradation
extract the target of the relatively small area such as a point
outside the area.
and thin line from varying background.
• OFF (Initial setting value): Creates a processed image with
the gradation outside the area as the same as the area
1 Click after adding the "Real-time difference" boundary.
filter to a tool desired to apply processing.
2 Specify "Dark" or "bright" in the "extraction color"

column, extraction size (2-pixel steps, initial
setting: 5) in the range of 3-39 pixels in the
"extraction size" column, processing direction (X,
Y, XY).
Example
Current image
Processing image
Appendix
Difference
processing
Internally processed image (not displayed)

It is created by applying expansion and contraction
processing to each input image on each image processing.
LJ-X UM_GB A-101

Filter Details
Remove shading with a real-time Change filter settings

contrast correction filter 1 Click after adding the "real-time contrast
correction" filter to a tool desired to apply
Calculate the difference of the input image and innerly
processed image created from the input image to remove processing.
slow contrast change of background (shading). Remove
contrast change of varying background to extract the only
part of sharp contrast change. It is also possible to use the
average and median intensity values in the area to
uniformly correct the overall contrast of the image.
Example
Current image
Processing image 2 Change the settings as required.
Correction method
The real-time contrast correction filter calculate the
Difference difference of the input image and slow contrast change of
processing
background removing sharp change as innerly processed
image. Here, specify the type of internally processed
image that is used for this process.
• Average correction: Regarding the average intensity
value within the entire measurement area as the
reference value, the image is corrected by calculating
the difference from the input image.
Internally processed image (not displayed) • Intermediate value correction: Regarding the
We estimate subtle gradation of background from
input image and remove minute defects.
intermediate intensity value within the entire
measurement are as the reference value, the image is
corrected by calculating the difference from the input
image.
• Shading correction (initial value): Regarding the
shading surface estimated based on the extraction size
as the reference surface, the image is corrected by
calculating the difference from the input image.
Appendix
• Fast shading correction: Partially suppressing the

effect of shading removal to correct faster than
"Shading correction". The correction result is different
to "shading correction".
A-102 LJ-X UM_GB

Filter Details
Extract size (pixel) Out-of-area reference

When "Shading Correction" or "Fast Shading Correction" When "Shading correction" or "Fast shading correction" is
is selected in "Correction Method", specify the size (4 to selected in "Correction method", check and select
200; initial setting value: 16) of the defect (black point, whether to process with reference to the image outside
white point, damage, etc.) to be extracted, as well as the the measurement area.
processing direction (X, Y, XY). • OFF (initial setting value): Process without reference to
Reference
images outside the area.
The smaller the extraction size, the better the followability to finer • ON: Refer to and process images outside the area.
shading (but the processing time will be longer). 3 After completing the setting, click [OK].
Direction
Select the processing direction (X, Y, XY) of the filter
when "Shading correction" or "Fast shading correction"
is selected in "Correction method" (Initial setting value:
XY)
Extraction color
Select the color you want to extract as a defect.
• Light: Select to extract only defects that are brighter
than the background.
• Dark: Select to extract only defects that are darker than
the background.
• Contrast (Initial setting): Select to extract both light
and dark defects.
• Contrast (individual): Select when extracting defects
by setting the extraction sensitivity separately for the
contrast.
Gain (fold)
Set the gain to the corrected image (0 to 10.0, initial
setting value: 2.0). If you want to increase the contrast,
set a larger number.
Noise removal (gradation)

Remove minute noise components of background (0 to 255,
Initial setting value: 0.0). Noise below the specified gradation
is removed.
Contrast equalization
Put check if intensity changes of background are large and Appendix
you want more uniformity. It also has the effect of
maintaining the contrast of the filtered image when the
background brightness changes.
• OFF (Initial setting value): Contrast equalization is not
performed.
• ON: Contrast equalization is performed.
LJ-X UM_GB A-103

Filter Details
Line length
Emphasizing only linear defects with a
Increasing the value makes it easier to extract long line
line defect extraction filter defects. If you want to extract short line defects, decrease
the value.
Generate a reduced image from the input image for speed
and noise removal, and create a background image that Extraction direction
represents the gradual shading of the background. A Specify the direction of the line defect you want to extract.
pretreatment that emphasizes only the linear defects is • All directions: Line defects in all directions are to be
applied to the background-removed image from which the extracted.
background image and the original reduced image have been • Angle specification: The processing speed is
obtained by calculate the difference of the background image improved by limiting the direction of extracted line
and the original reduced image. defects. The direction is specified by the reference angle
1 Click after adding the "line defect extraction" and the angle range.
filter to a tool desired to apply processing. Reference Angle
Specify the range of the direction of the line defect that you
want to extract, using a combination of "reference angle ±
angle range".
Angle range
Specify the range of the direction of the line defect that you
want to extract, using a combination of "reference angle ±
angle range".
Extraction reduction degree

Increasing the extraction reduction degree improves
processing speed but makes it difficult to extract thin line
defects.
Extraction size
Increasing the value makes it easier to extract thick line
defects.
Extraction color
Select the color you want to extract as a line defect.
Appendix
• Light: Extract only line defects that are brighter than the
background.
• Dark: Extract only line defects that are darker than the
background.
• Contrast: Extract both light and dark line defects.
Gain (fold)
Enlarging the gain increases the contrast of the image.
Contrast enhancement is performed on the background-
removed image.
Linearity
If the line defect you want to extract is linear, increase the
value. The smaller the value, the easier it is to extract line
defects with large curvature.
A-104 LJ-X UM_GB

Filter Details
Remove or extract bright or dark pixel Change filter settings.

block with noise control filter 1 Add the "Noise Control" filter to the tool that you
want to process.
A reduced image is generated from the input image for
speeding up and noise removal, and the graduation value
of the target color is converted according to the set area
value. A block below the specified area will be processed.
Example
Example 1
• Processing: Remove
• Target color: bright
• Area: 10
• Image profile
Before processing
Area: 10 Target color

A block of pixels of a specified color is to be processed.
• Light: A block of bright pixels is to be processed.
• Dark: A block of dark pixels is to be processed.
Processing
Choose how to handle the target block.
• Removal: Remove the processing target block.
After processing
• Extraction: Extract only the processing target block.
Area
A block equal to or less than the specified area is
considered to be processed.
Reduction degree
Example 2
• Processing: Extraction Increasing the reduction degree reduces the calculation
• Target color: bright accuracy of the area to be processed, but improves the
• Area: 10 processing speed.
• Image profile 3 After completing the setting, click [OK].
Before processing Appendix
Area: 10
After processing
LJ-X UM_GB A-105

Technical Explanation
Technical Explanation
What is an edge? Edge strength lower limit

The lower limit of detection for this differential waveform is
The machine's edge processing is to detect the boundaries
called the edge strength lower limit, which is the lower limit
of the measurement area. Edge detection is performed not
for recognizing edges (see also the figure below). If it falls
by the absolute value of intensity, but by the amount of
below the lower limit of edge strength, it is not recognized
change in the average intensity, which is projection
as an edge.
processing within the measurement area perpendicular to
the edge detection direction. This amount of change is
called edge strength.
Edge Sensitivity
The rate at which an edge is recognized as the maximum
edge intensity value (where the contrast change is the
Edge Detection
largest) of 100%, is called the edge sensitivity. Edge Edge strength
direction
waveform
detection is stabilized even if there is a lighting change in
+255
the entire image by specifying the edge sensitivity (edge
recognition reference) relative to the maximum edge Edge sensitivity (%)
0
intensity in addition to detecting the edge by the amount of Edge strength
(Edge intensity waveform is a profile image)
change in intensity. lower limit
Difference between edge sensitivity and edge

strength lower limit
While the edge sensitivity specifies with relative value
regarding the maximum value of edge strength as 100%,
the lower limit of edge strength differs in that it specifies the
absolute value of edge strength.
Edge Detection direction How to check edge strength

Projection +255
It is possible to check the maximum edge strength value in
waveform
the measurement area by the numbers of the edge strength
waveform displayed on the "Edge detection condition
0
Edge strength setting" screen.
waveform Edge sensitivity (%)
+255 100%
Appendix
Make this interval 100%

0 0%
(Edge intensity waveform

is a profile image)
Edge Sensitivity 50% (2 edges detected)
50%
Edge Sensitivity 30% (4 edges detected)
30%
A-106 LJ-X UM_GB

Filter width What is trend edge measurement?

By setting the filter width, it is possible to average the edge
In trend edge measurement, the edge detection segment is
strength waveform. If the noise component causes false
scanned in the specified direction in the measurement
detection of an edge, It is possible to reduce false detection
area, and the edge position of each segment is measured.
by increasing the filter width and averaging the noise
As multiple edge position information can be measured in
component.
one measurement area, it is possible to calculate the
Also, if you want to detect a gentle edge, such as when the
average, maximum and minimum of the whole, and to
measurement work is inclined, it is possible to easily detect
detect circles and straight lines based on the detection
a wide range of intensity changes as an edge by increasing
position. It is also possible to determine defects based on
the filter width.
the detected circle or straight line.
At the time of filter width initialization (filter width =5)
Trend direction
Select the moving direction of the segment to detect the
edge.
Edge Detection
direction Select with "↓" or "→" (when the area is rectangular).
Trend direction "↓" Trend direction "→"
If the area is a rotating rectangle

The direction is fixed from the top to the bottom.
Top
Bottom Top
After changing the filter width setting (filter width Bottom

=20)
If the area is a circle or arc
It will be fixed clockwise.
Edge Detection
direction
Appendix
Trend direction
LJ-X UM_GB A-107

Detection direction Movement amount

Specify the direction to scan the edge in the area Specifies how much the segment that detects the edge moves in
(segment). the trend direction. The smaller the movement amount, the
longer the processing time, but it is possible to measure points
If the area is rectangular
more finely.
Specify with "↑", "↓", "←" and "→".
Amount of Amount of
If the area is a rotating rectangle movement “Large” movement “Small”
Specify "Forward" or "Backward".
Maximum number of segments

Forward Reverse Specifies the maximum number of segments that can be
direction direction
detected.
Reference
As increasing the maximum number of segments
Selectable one is perpendicular direction to the trend direction.
consumes resource memory, you may not be able to add
If the area is a circle or arc tools. In that case, check whether there is a tool that
Select from "Center → Outer circumference" or "Outer unnecessarily increases the maximum number of
circumference → Center" of the area. segments.
Edge direction
Specify the light level change for edge detection.
“Day→Night” “Night→Day” “Both directions”
Edge Detection Edge Detection Edge Detection

direction direction direction
Edge Sensitivity (%)

Specify the percentage of edge recognition while regarding
maximum edge strength as 100%.
For details, see "What is an edge?" (page A-106).
Appendix
Segment size
Specify the size of the segment to detect the edge.
When the size is increased, small changes cannot be
detected, but they are less susceptible to noise.
Size (Small) Size (large)
If you want to keep the segment size small and reduce the
effects of noise, use preprocessing.
A-108 LJ-X UM_GB

What is a defect measurement? What is the defect grouping function?

The defect grouping function in the defect tool (page 5-111)
In the defect tool, the measurement segment moves in the
is a function to measure continuous small areas detected
measurement area in the specified detection direction by the
as segments as one group.
specified movement amount, and measures the average
In normal defect detection, among the multiple (number
intensity in the segment.
indicated as total defect area) segments detected above
Segment size the defect level threshold in the measurement area, the one
with the highest difference in intensity (the defect level) is
Segment
detected as the defect position. On the other hand, the
size
Movement direction defect grouping function treats and processes continuous
Amount of movement segments exceeding the defect level threshold as a group.
It is effective when detecting the position of damage or dirt
larger than the segment size, or detecting a condition (such
Difference between defect level and amount
as a stain) where the defect area is large enough that the
The difference between the maximum intensity and the intensity difference within defect (not along the border) is
minimum intensity in the total 4 segments, including the not detected.
current segment, to be compared in detection direction
becomes the "defect level" of the current segment. When detecting the position
In the following example, the defect level's max. intensity of • Defect grouping "OFF": Detects the position of the segment
120 (current segment + position 3) - the min. intensity of 80 with the most intensity difference on the boundary of
(current segment + position 1) = 40 (defect level). damages and dirt.
(1) Current segment (Average concentration 95)
(2) Current segment + 1 (Average concentration 80)

• Defect grouping "ON": It is possible to group surrounding
segments and output the coordinates of the center of gravity.
Reference
The detection segment in the above figure is an image (different from the
actual display). For segment distribution, check [Contrast view] from the
If the "defect level" exceeds the set threshold, it is VIEW bar.
determined that the current segment is defective and is
added to the “defect amount" measurement value (defect
Appendix
area measurements are the number of segments

determined to be defective).
Example: In the case of detecting chipping or burrs

of the outline part by limiting the detection direction
By limiting the detection direction and scanning along the contour,
you can detect only chips and burrs without misdetecting the
contour.
LJ-X UM_GB A-109

When detecting large defects such as stains

• Defect grouping "OFF": Detects the position of the segment
with the most intensity difference in the measurement area.
• Defect grouping "ON": The number of segments exceeding

the defect level at the border (of lower contrast defects) can
be detected and the defect area count includes the area
within the border where intensity is consistent.
Reference
• The detection segment in the above figure is an image (different

from the actual display). For segment distribution, check
[Stability display] from the VIEW bar.
• The defect grouping function is disabled when "Circumferential"
in the measurement area and "Circular direction" or "Radial
direction" is selected as the detection direction.
Appendix
A-110 LJ-X UM_GB

Supplementary Explanation of Recognition Category Tool
Supplementary Explanation of Recognition

Category Tool
ASCII code table (hexadecimal/decimal notation)

When the recognition character of recognition category tool is referred to by calculation, ASCII I code value of each
character is returned. ASCII code value (hex number, decimal number) is as follows.
Symbol ( ) + - . / :
Hex 28 29 2B 2D 2E 2F 3A
number
Decimal 40 41 43 45 46 47 58
number
Numbers 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Hex 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
number
Decimal 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57
number
Letters A B C D E F G H I J K L M
Hex 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D
number
Decimal 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77
number
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Hex 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A
number
Decimal 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90
number
a b c d e f g h i j k l m
Hex 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D
number
Decimal 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109
Appendix
number
n o p q r s t u v w x y z
Hex 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A
number
Decimal 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122
number
Other SPACE
Hex 20
number
Decimal 32
number
Reference
For Kanji data, the shiftJIS 2-byte code value is returned.
LJ-X UM_GB A-111

2 Select the tab to be converted.

Set conversion table to determine
• eYear: Year
encrypted date and time information by • eMonth: Month
built-in calendar (date and time • eDay: Day
encryption setting) • eHour: Hour
• eMinute: Minute
When using the "Date and time encryption setting" to • Shift: Shift
inspect the printed contents for the date and time The conversion table creation screen as the target is
encrypted, create a conversion table that supports the displayed.
judgment string linked to the built-in calendar to be
encrypted. By using this conversion table, it becomes
possible to work with the built-in calendar even when the
judgment string is encrypted, so it is possible to judge the
encrypted date and time printing as same as a normal
character string.
1 Select "Text expansion setting" in "Judgment

condition" of OCR tool or OCR2 tool and select
"Date and time encryption setting".
The "Date/Time Encryption Settings" screen is displayed.
3 Specify the table number (0 to 9).

You can create up to 10 tables. If you are using encryption
patterns that the detection target is different, it is useful to
switch and manage conversion tables.
4 Create a conversion table.

Register replacement string for each replacement source
number (YYMMDDHHMMSS).
For example, if October 14, 2012 is printed as BC (year)
JM (month) BE (day), specify as follows.
Conversion unit Replace source Replacement

Reference specified in step string
"String expansion setting" can be selected only when the date and 2
time or calculation result is specified in the judgment string.
Year 12 BC
Appendix
Month 10 JM
Day 14 BE
Reference
By using "Auto-fill setting", you can specify replacement

characters for each number at once.
A-112 LJ-X UM_GB

If you selected "Shift" in step 2

Register the character pattern used for
Select "Add" on the conversion table creation screen, and
register the time zone and replacement character string as
character recognition in the dictionary
a set on the "Individual shift setting" screen. Up to 24 sets
You can register some symbols such as alphanumeric
of divisions can be registered for each table.
characters and dots.
1 In "Dictionary Settings" of the OCR tool or OCR2

tool, select "Dictionary Edit".
The "Edit dictionary" screen is displayed.
Reference
In the case of a dictionary created with the OCR2 tool, the
headings of the table are displayed in light blue for the character
types for which the built-in dictionary characters are registered.
To change the format of the list

You can change the display format in "Display format".
• Character List: A list of registered characters is displayed
in a matrix.
• Registered List: Registration state of all character types
is shown in a list.
To switch the dictionary to register

Specify the dictionary number you want to register in
"Dictionary number" (000 to 999: However, the number of
dictionaries that can be created may be limited depending
on the remaining amount of internal memory).
To change the dictionary name

Appendix
Select "Dictionary Name" and enter a name of your choice

(up to 30 full-pitch or 60 half-pitch).
To check the image for registration

Click "Transparent" to make the setting screen transparent.
Click "Transparent" again to return to the original state.
LJ-X UM_GB A-113

2 Click on "Registration". Please select a character type to register characters, then

The "Select Registration Method" screen is displayed. register.
Repeat this operation until the required character type is

registered.
Reference
Click "Transparent" to make the setting screen transparent. Click

3 Select the image to be registered as a dictionary in "Transparent" again to restore the original state.
the VIEW bar.
When selecting "batch registration"
• Reference image: Displays the reference image.
The "batch registration" screen is displayed.
• Input Image: Displays the input image from the head.
• Image strip image: Displays the image remaining in
the image strip.
4 Select the dictionary registration method and

extraction method, and register the dictionary.
There are two ways to register a dictionary:
• Individual registration: Register the dictionary while
specifying the character type of the cut out character one
by one.
• Batch registration: The extracted characters are
registered a dictionary in a string batch. Enter the text of the currently cut out character string and
register it.
When "Individual registration" is selected
Select the extracted character from the screen and click
"Register", "Registered character selection" screen is
displayed.
Appendix
A-114 LJ-X UM_GB

5 When registration is complete, click "Close". Edit/delete registered dictionary data

Return to the "Edit dictionary" screen.
You can edit/delete registered dictionary data according to
If necessary, you can check the registration status of the
the following procedure.
dictionary.
Switch between "character list" and "registration list" and
check. 1 Perform the necessary operations on the "Edit
Character list dictionary" screen.
Data registered for each character type is displayed.
Enabled/disabled
Registration list Temporarily enable/disable the selected character pattern.
If registered for each character type, it will be displayed with The invalid character is displayed with ×, but the data itself
a check. is not deleted, so it can be turned back later.
Delete
Deletes the selected character pattern or character type.
Delete all
Deletes all character patterns registered in the selected
dictionary number.
Built-in dictionary reference setting (when using

OCR2 tool)
Set the built-in dictionary to valid/invalid for each character
type in the selected dictionary.
Reference Delete all built-in dictionary characters (when

Click "Transparent" to make the setting screen transparent. Click using the OCR2 tool)
"Transparent" again to restore the original state. Deletes all registered characters in the built-in dictionary
from the character patterns registered in the selected
Appendix
dictionary number.
Point
If you delete all built-in dictionary characters, you cannot restore
the built-in dictionary characters to the specified dictionary. If you
want to use a dictionary that contains built-in dictionary characters,
you need to create the dictionary again.
2 When editing is complete, click "Close".
LJ-X UM_GB A-115

Change the reference setting of characters

registered in the built-in dictionary (when
using the OCR2 tool)
For characters registered in the built-in dictionary, you can
set whether to reference when recognizing characters for
each character type.
1 On the "Dictionary Edit" screen, click "Built-in

dictionary reference setting".
"Built-in dictionary reference setting" screen is displayed.
2 Check the character type to refer to at the time of

character recognition. Uncheck the character types
that you do not refer to.
Check box for each character type

The character type with a check is referenced at the time of
character recognition.
Select all
Click to check all character types.
Cancel all
Click to uncheck all character types.
Select all numbers

Appendix
Every time you click, it switches reference/non-reference

for all numbers.
Select all capital letter

for all upper case letters.
Select all lowercase letter

for all lowercase letters.
Select all symbols

for all symbols.
3 When editing is complete, click "OK".
A-116 LJ-X UM_GB

Saved File Types
Saved File Types
The file types and data contents saved by the operation of this machine are as follows.
Reference
• The number of measurements used for the file name is reset when the power is turned on, when the RESET operation is performed,
when the inspection setting is switched, and returns to the initial value.
• Images that have been saved after being thinned cannot be reloaded on this unit. When using archived images on this machine, set the
file format to "BMP", "JPG" or "PNG in the saved image export of the image output setting (page 6-18) or image strip (page 7-40).
File Name Contained Data

Output File • YYMMDD_HHMMSS_{number • Captured image data saved by image output (page 6-18)
of measurements}_ (24-bit color (height image) or 8-bit grayscale (grayscale image) of bitmap or
Image Name_Total JPEG format or 16-bit grayscale (height image) or 8-bit grayscale (grayscale
Determination.bmp image) of PNG format).
(/.jpg /.png) • If it is not thinned out, you can load it into this machine again.
• Serial Number_Designated • You can select from 3 patterns in the "Image output" setting (page 6-18) for
Character_Image Name_ naming rules for file names.
Total judgment.bmp 
(/.jpg /.png)
• YYMMDD_HHMMSS.bmp  • Display screen data saved by screen capture (1024x768 dots, 24-bit color of
(/.jpg /.png) bitmap or JPEG format or PNG format).
• Serial number_Specified • The file name can be selected from 2 options in the [Image Capture Settings]
character.bmp (/.jpg /.png) (page 8-15).
YYMMDD_HHMMSS.csv • Output data log such as measurement results (comma separated text data)
• The contents set in the output setting of the SD card 2 will be recorded, and
the file name will be automatically assigned by YYMMDD_HHMMSS when
the file was created.
• The file name is reset when the power is turned on, when the RESET
operation is performed, when the inspection setting is switched, when it is
switched by the OW command, and another file is created at the first data
writing time after reset.
YYMMDD_HHMMSS_{SD card Measurement data such as measurement name and measurement result (number of
number}_ measurement / statistical target item / individual judgment) saved in measurement
Inspection setting number _dat. value list of statistics (text data separated by comma)
csv
YYMMDD_HHMMSS_{SD card Number of measurements saved in process monitor of statistics / Measurement data
number}_ such as yield / Cpk / Cpu / Cpl (comma separated text data)
Inspection setting number_stat.csv
YYMMDD_HHMMSS_{Number of • Archived image data saved in saved image export of image strip (page 7-40)
measurements}_ (24-bit color (height image) or 8-bit grayscale (grayscale image) of bitmap or
Image name_Total judgment.bmp JPEG format or 16-bit grayscale (height image) or 8-bit grayscale (grayscale
(/.jpg /.png) image) of PNG format).
• If it is not thinned out, you can load it into this machine again.
YYMMDD_HHMMSS_{Number of • Archived image data stored when the saved image export is checked in the
Appendix
measurements}_ export of inspection settings (24-bit color (height image) or 8-bit grayscale
Image Name_Total (grayscale image) of bitmap or 16-bit grayscale (height image) or 8-bit
Determination.bmp (/.png) grayscale (grayscale image) of PNG format).
• The data can be loaded on the controller again.
rs_232c_YYMMDD_HHMMSS_ RS-232C Monitor Communication log data (text data) saved by (page 7-16)
SD card number_Inspection
setting number.log
Ethernet_YYMMDD_HHMMSS_ Ethernet Monitor Communication log data (text data) saved by (page 7-17)
SD card number_inspection
setting number.log
Global setting file env.dat Configuration data for this machine (binary data in dedicated format)
(File name change Inspect.dat Individual inspection setting data for this machine (binary data in dedicated format)
must not be done) ref1_Reference image Reference image data of this machine
number.bmp (/.jpg /.png) (24-bit color (height image) or 8-bit grayscale (grayscale image) of bitmap or JPEG
format or 16-bit grayscale (height image) or 8-bit grayscale (grayscale image) of PNG
format).
dic dictionary number .dat Dictionary data for this machine's OCR2/OCR tool (binary data in dedicated format)
STF.tbd Feature data created with the feature drawing tool of the ShapeTrax3/ShapeTrax2 tool
of this machine (binary data of dedicated format)
LJ-X UM_GB A-117

Remedy when the screen display is slow
Remedy when the screen display is slow
Perform recalculations manually
Recalculation settings
The display screen may take a while to be updated when
tool editing starts or the parameters are changed.
Tool editing can be done efficiently by changing the
recalculation setting to Manual.
• Automatic (initial value): The display screen is updated
automatically.
• Manual: The display screen is updated when "Recalculate"
is clicked.
Operation flow
1 In Setup Mode, right click and hold.

The context menu appears.
2 Select "Change to manual calc mode".
3 Right click and hold to recalculate.

The context menu appears.
4 Click "Recalculate Now" to perform the

Appendix
recalculation.
5 To return to automatic recalculation, click "Change

to auto calc mode".
Point An icon in the top right corner of the data screen

shows whether automatic or manual
recalculation is currently set. You can click this
icon to change the setting.
• Automatic:
• Manual:
A-118 LJ-X UM_GB

Error Messages
Error Messages
System error
Errors that occur on the controller include hardware errors such as head connection errors and software errors such as incorrect settings.
While the controller operates in Run mode, any error occurrence can be detected via the ERROR terminal which turns ON in the event
of an error.
Head settings
Error Error Messages Cause Remedy

Number
10001 The head cannot be recognized. An error occurred in the connection with • After turning on the power, check that the head
Turn off the controller and check the head. has not been removed.
the connection of the head. • Check that the head is properly connected.
• Make sure that the head cable is not
disconnected.
• Use a head cable that supports the head to
connect.
10004 An internal device error has An error occurred in the internal device of If it does not operate normally even after the power is
occurred on the head *. (Detail the head. turned on again, the head may be broken. Contact your
code: 0x ****) local KEYENCE office.
10005 An internal error occurred at the An internal error occurred at the head. If it does not operate normally even after the power is
head *. (Detail code: 0x ****) turned on again, the head may be broken. Contact your
local KEYENCE office.
10006 An input unit device error has An error occurred in the internal device of If it does not operate normally even after the power is
occurred. (Detail code: 0x ****) the input unit. turned on again, the input unit may be broken. Contact
your local KEYENCE office.
10007 An error occurred in the input An internal error has occurred in the input If it does not operate normally even after the power is
unit. (Detail code: 0x ****) unit. turned on again, the input unit may be broken. Contact
your local KEYENCE office.
10008 The line scan period is too fast. Trigger Pass is generated. Increase the fastest line scan period in the head setting
Check the setting list. or lower the moving speed of the workpiece.
10009 The head * cannot be An error occurred in the connection with • After turning on the power, check that the head
recognized. (Detailed code: 0x the head. has not been removed.
**** )Turn off the controller and • Check that the head is properly connected.
Appendix
check the connection of the • Make sure that the head cable is not
head. disconnected.
14127 The following items do not A different type of head is connected to Check the model of the connected head.
match the head settings. the head set in the head setting of the
• Model/head type inspection setting.
14128 The following items do not A type of head different from the head Check the model of the connected head.
match the head settings. setting (luminance output) of the
• Head luminance output inspection setting is connected.
type
14129 The following items do not The head setting (number of heads) of Check the number of heads connected.
match the head settings. the inspection setting is different from the
• Number of heads number of heads connected.
14130 The error below has occurred. A head not compatible with the controller Check the model of the connected head.
• Unrecognized head is is connected.
connected.
LJ-X UM_GB A-119

Error Messages

Number
14132 The error below has occurred. The head is not connected to the Check the connection between the controller and the
• No head is connected. controller. head.
After turning off the power,
connect the head, then turn
on the power again.
14133 The error below has occurred. The head is not connected to the After turning off the power, connect the head to the
• Connect the head to the connector of the head A. connector of head A, and then turn on the power again.
connector of head A. After
turning off the power,
connect the head, then turn
on the power again.
14134 The error below has occurred. A head that is a different model from Connect a head that is the same model as head A and
• Connect a head that is the head A and head B is connected. head B.
same model as head A and
head B. After turning off the
power, connect the head,
then turn on the power
again.
Appendix
A-120 LJ-X UM_GB

Error Messages
System File

Number
11001 Unable to load the selected The program file that corresponds to the Change the program number to a working program.
program setting file. last saved program No. (or the program
No. selected using the mouse) does not
exist.
The program file for the specified Change the program number to a working program.
program could not be found when
changing or reloading programs.
11002 Failed to load because the The image memory for the program file • Change to a different program file.
image memory of the program loaded at startup is full. • Correct the program to reduce the size of its data.
setting is beyond the size. The program being loaded exceeds the • Change to a different program file.
available image memory. • Correct the program to reduce the size of its data.
11003 Failed to load the system The system settings file used at startup Before powering up the controller, make sure the system
setting. cannot be found on the SD card 1. settings file exists on the SD card.
The system settings loaded at startup is Create a compatible version of the system settings file.
from a incompatible version.
The system settings file has a checksum Use a different system settings file.
error.
The system settings file loaded at startup Use a different system settings file.
is damaged.
11004 Unable to load the program The program loaded at startup is an Change the program to a different working program.
setting file due to unsupported incompatible version.
version. The program being loaded is an Create a compatible version of the program file.
incompatible version.
11005 Unable to load the program The program loaded at startup has a Change the program to a different working program.
setting file due to checksum checksum error.
errors. The program being loaded has a Recreate the program file.
checksum error.
11006 Unable to load the program The program loaded at startup is Change the program to a different working program.
setting file due to damage. damaged.
The program being loaded is damaged. Recreate the program file.
11011 Failed to load because the Resource memory is full in the program • Change to a different program file.
resource memory of the setting file loaded at startup. • Correct the program setting such that it does not
program setting is beyond the exceed the available resource memory.
size. • Change to a different program file.
• Correct the program setting such that it does not
Appendix
exceed the available resource memory.

The program being loaded exceeds the • Change to a different program file.
available resource memory. • Correct the program setting such that it does not
• Change to a different program file.
• Correct the program setting such that it does not
LJ-X UM_GB A-121

Error Messages
SD card

Number
12001 Failed to access the SD card 1. A problem occurred while trying to • From the [Manage Files] menu, run the [Check]
access SD card 1. There is a problem utility on SD card 1.
with access to SD card 1. • If the error persists, format the SD card 1. (Note, this
will erase all contents on SD card 1.)
• If the problem cannot be resolved by any of these
remedies, the SD card may be damaged.
The controller could not recognize the • From the [Manage Files] menu, run the [Check]
format of SD card 1. utility on SD card 1.
• If the error persists, format the SD card 1. (Note, this
An unsupported SD card is being used. The functionality and performance when using
commercially available (non-industrial rated) SD cards is
not guaranteed
The destination file is set to read-only. Disable the read-only setting on the destination file, or
delete it.
12002 Failed to access the SD card 2. A problem occurred while trying to • From the [Manage Files] menu, run the [Check]
access SD card 2. utility on SD card 2.
The controller could not recognize the • From the [Manage Files] menu, run the [Check]
format of SD card 2. utility on SD card 2.
not guaranteed
The destination file is set to read-only. Disable the read-only setting on the destination file, or
delete it.
12003 SD card 1 is full. There is not enough free space on SD Make space available by deleting or moving
card 1. unnecessary files on SD card 1.
Appendix
12004 SD card 2 is full. There is not enough free space on SD Make space available by deleting or moving
card 2. unnecessary files on SD card 2.
12005 Insert SD card 1. No SD card in SD1 slot. Properly insert an SD card into the SD1 slot.
not guaranteed
12006 Insert SD card 2. No SD card in SD2 slot. Properly insert an SD card into the SD2 slot.
After executing [Remove SD Card2], no If the SD card is already inserted, remove it first, and
SD card has been reinserted into SD2 then insert it again.
slot.
not guaranteed
12007 Cannot find SD card 1. SD card 1 was removed while the power Do not remove SD card 1 while the power was ON.
Be sure to keep the SD card 1 was ON. Removing an SD card while it is being accessed may
inserted during the power on. damage the SD card and the data saved on it.
A-122 LJ-X UM_GB

Error Messages

Number
12008 Execute the eject operation The SD card 2 was removed without Execute the [Remove SD Card2] function before
before removing the SD card 2. using the [Remove SD Card2] function. removing the SD card 2. Removing an SD card while it is
The SD card and files may be being accessed may damage the SD card and the data
damaged. saved on it.
12009 SD card 1 is write-protected. The write-protect switch on SD card 1 is Disable the write-protect switch on SD card 1.
enabled.
12010 SD card 2 is write-protected. The write-protect switch on SD card 2 is Disable the write-protect switch on SD card 2.
enabled.
12012 Unable to export to SD card 2 SD card 2 output buffer is full. Reduce the amount of data to be output, so that the data
due to a full output buffer. for each measurement is output at a slower rate than
they are output to the SD card 2. Or, extend the time
between triggers/processing to allow for data to be
output. Note: Results data is not written when the buffer
is full.
12014 The firmware SD card is not No firmware SD card is in the slot. Please turn off the power and reboot after having
inserted. inserted the firmware SD card.
Please turn off the power and
reboot after having inserted the
firmware SD card.
12101 Connect the USB HDD. No USB HDD is connected to the USB Connect correctly a USB HDD to the USB HDD
HDD connector. connector.
A USB HDD that is incompatible with this Do not use a USB HDD that is incompatible with this
controller is being used. controller. Doing so may result in data loss or setting data
damage. For the specifications of the USB HDD that can
be used with this controller, see "Supported USB HDD"
(page 2-12).
12102 Failed to access the USB HDD. • A problem occurred while trying to • If the error persists, format the USB HDD. (Note,
access USB HDD. this will erase all contents on the USB HDD.)
• There is a problem with access to • If the problem cannot be resolved, the USB HDD
the USB HDD. may be damaged. Contact your local KEYENCE
• A USB HDD that is incompatible office.
with this controller is being used.
• The destination file is set to read-
only.
12103 Unable to export to the USB The output buffer for output the USB Reduce the amount of data to be output to the USB
HDD due to a full output buffer. HDD is full. HDDD so the data is output at a faster rate than it builds
up. Or, extend the time between triggers/processing to
allow for data to be output. Note: Results data is not
written when the buffer is full.
12104 The USB HDD is full. There is not enough free space on the Make space available by deleting or moving
USB HDD. unnecessary files. Appendix
12105 The USB HDD is write- The write-protect switch on the USB Disable the write-protect switch on the USB HDD.
protected. HDD is enabled.
12106 Execute the Remove USB HDD The USB HDD was removed without Execute the [Remove USB HDD] function before
operation before removing the using the [Remove USB HDD] function. removing the USB HDD. Removing the USB HDD while
USB HDD. it is being accessed may damage the USB HDD and the
The USB HDD and files may be data saved on it.
damaged.
12107 An unsupported USB device A device other than mass storage class Remove the connected device.
was connected. devices, such as a mouse, is connected
Please remove the connected to the USB 3.0 connector.
USB device.
12108 The format of the USB HDD is The controller could not recognize the Format the USB HDD. (Note, this will erase all contents
incorrect. format of the USB HDD. on the USB HDD.)
Perform format with the memory
utility of the file management.
LJ-X UM_GB A-123

Error Messages
PC Program

Number
13001 Failed in the communication An error occurred with the Ethernet • Make sure the Ethernet cable is connected to the
with the PC Program. communication when the data is output controller and the PC/PLC.
to a PC program. • Make sure the LAN cable is not disconnected.
• Check the Ethernet cable type (cross, straight).
• Check whether the PC at the other end of the
connection is ready to transmit/receive data.
• Check that the correct PC program is running on
the PC and that the PC is connected to the
controller.
13002 Unable to output to PC Program The controller output buffer for outputting Reduce the amount of data to be output, so that the data
due to a full output buffer. to PC Programs is full. for each measurement is output at a slower rate than
they are output to the PC Program. Or, extend the time
is full.
RS-232C

Number
13101 An RS-232C communication RS-232C communication has been • Make sure flow control is not set to [CTS/RTS] in the
time out error has occurred. down for 60 or more seconds when data RS-232C settings.
output via the RS-232C is specified in the • Make sure the serial cable is not disconnected.
output settings.
13102 Unable to output to RS-232C The controller output buffer for outputting Reduce the amount of data to be output, so that the data
due to a full output buffer. via the RS-232C port is full. for each measurement is output at a slower rate than
they are output to the RS-232C.
Or, extend the time between triggers/processing to allow
for data to be output. Note: Results data is not written
when the buffer is full.
Ethernet

Number
Appendix
13201 Ethernet cable is not connected. An error occurred with the Ethernet cable • Make sure the Ethernet cable is connected to the
when data output via the Ethernet is controller and the PC/PLC.
specified in the output settings. • Make sure the LAN cable is not disconnected.
• Check the Ethernet cable type (cross, straight).
• Make sure the orange LED indicator (connection)
of the Ethernet connector is lit.
13202 An Ethernet communication Ethernet communication has been down • Check whether the PC/PLC at the other end of the
time out error has occurred. for 10 or more seconds when data output connection is ready to transmit/receive data.
via the Ethernet is specified in the output • Check that the communication software for
settings. Ethernet is running on the PC/PLC and that the PC/
PLC is connected with the controller.
13203 Failed in the Ethernet (Non- An error occurred with the Ethernet • Check whether the PC/PLC at the other end of the
Procedural) communication. communication when data output via connection is ready to transmit/receive data.
Ethernet is specified in the output • Check that the communication software for Ethernet is
settings. running on the PC/PLC and that the PC/PLC is
connected with the controller.
A-124 LJ-X UM_GB

Error Messages

Number
13204 Unable to output to Ethernet due The controller output buffer for outputting Reduce the amount of data to be output, so that the data
to a full output buffer. via the Ethernet port is full. for each measurement is output at a slower rate than
they are output to the Ethernet. Or, extend the time
is full.
PLC-Link

Number
13301 Failed to establish a link with the An error occurred in the connection with • Check the connection with the PLC and the
PLC. the PLC when the [PLC-Link (RS-232C)] settings of the PLC.
or [PLC-Link (Ethernet)] function was • If PLC-Link is not used, change communication
enabled. mode to [Disable PLC-Link].
• If the error message displayed after a trigger
input, check that the data memory destination
specified is in the range that meets the PLC
format.
13302 Unable to output to the PLC-Link The controller output buffer for outputting Reduce the amount of data to be output, so that the data
due to a full output buffer. via PLC-Link is full. for each measurement is output at a slower rate than
they are output to the PLC-Link. Or, extend the time
is full.
13303 The delay of the handshake As the amount of data output overflows • Check that handshake is controlled properly.
control causes skipping of the the buffer, data output is suspended • Clear the data in the output buffer using the TEST
PLC communication result partially. terminal (bit) or reset input.
output.
Terminal I/O

Number
13401 Unable to make the terminal The output buffer for output via the Reduce the amount of data to be output through the
output due to a full output buffer. terminal is full. parallel/terminal outputs, so the data is output at a faster
rate than it builds up. Or, extend the time between
Appendix
triggers/processing to allow for data to be output. Note:

Results data is not written when the buffer is full.
13402 The delay of the handshake As the amount of data output overflows • Check that handshake is controlled properly.
control causes skipping of the  the buffer, data output is suspended • Clear the data in the output buffer using the TEST
I/O terminal output. partially. terminal (bit) or reset input.
LJ-X UM_GB A-125

Error Messages
FTP/VNC
Point
• The FTP command "APPE" is used to output data to the FTP server on this controller. If your FTP server does not support the "APPE"
command, data cannot be outputted.
• If there is a firewall on the FTP server or on the network path to the FTP server, it may fail to connect. If this is the case, you will need to take
measures such as disabling the firewall. Please check with your network administrator or PC manufacturer for details.

Number
13501 Failed to connect to FTP server. The FTP server is not operating. Make sure the PC and FTP server on the NAS device
(network archived storage) are configured and operating
correctly.
An error occurred in the LAN connection • Make sure the LAN cable is connected to the
with the FTP server. controller and the PC or the NAS device (network
archived storage) running the FTP server.
• Make sure the LAN cable is not disconnected.
• Check the LAN cable type (cross, straight).
• Make sure the orange LED indicator (connection) of the
Ethernet connector is lit.
The IP address for the FTP server is Check the IP address settings specified in the FTP
incorrect. settings.
13502 Failed to login to FTP server. The user ID and/or password for logging Make sure the user name and password specified in the
in to the FTP server is incorrect. FTP settings matches the same settings defined in the
FTP server software.
13503 Timeout error occurred during The controller logged in and began • Check the connection between the controller and
output to FTP server. writing a file but was unable to complete the FTP server.
the process within the specified time. • Make sure the FTP server is operating correctly.
13504 Failed to output the file to FTP The controller was able to log into the • Make sure the user account has write privileges
server. FTP server, but was not able to create a on the FTP server.
file. • Check the remaining capacity of the FTP server.
• Check the connection between the controller and
the FTP server.
• Make sure the FTP server is operating correctly.
13505 VNC connection is not The remote desktop connection is used • Cancel the VNC connection from the touch panel
acknowledged. from the data collection application. The display.
VNC connection is used from the touch • Cancel the other connected VNC client connection.
panel display. The number of VNC clients
being connected from a PC has reached
the upper limit (4).
13506 The specified VNC version is not An unsupported protocol version has Use VNC clients with protocol versions 3.4 or higher.
supported. been selected.
13507 VNC authentication failed. Password authentication failed. Check whether or not the password that is set at the
controller and VNC client is correct.
Appendix
13508 The specified VNC pixel format is An unsupported pixel format has been Select either full color or 16-bit color for the pixel format.
not supported. selected.
13509 The specified VNC encode type An unsupported encoding type has been Select either Hextile or Raw as the encoding type.
is not supported. selected.
13510 FTP output failed due to a full The output buffer for output via FTP is Reduce the amount of data to be output, so that the data
buffer. full. for each measurement is output at a slower rate than
they are output to the FTP. Or, extend the time between
triggers/processing to allow for data to be output. Note:
Results data is not written when the buffer is full.
A-126 LJ-X UM_GB

Error Messages
EtherNet/IP

Number
13601 EtherNet/IP communication An error occurred in the EtherNet/IP • Check the EtherNet/IP connection status and
failed. communication connection when settings.
[EtherNet/IP] was set in the global • If EtherNet/IP is not used,
settings. return the communication mode to [Disable
EtherNet/IP].
13602 EtherNet/IP output failed due to The buffer for output via EtherNet/IP is Reduce the amount of data to be output so that the data
a full buffer. full. for each measurement is output at a slower rate than it is
output to EtherNet/IP. Or, extend the time between
triggers. Note: Result data is not written when the output
buffer is full.
13603 The delay of the handshake Some results could not be output • Check that handshake is controlled properly.
control causes skipping of the because the amount of result output data • Clear the data in the output buffer using the TEST
EtherNet/IP communication overflowed the buffer. terminal (bit) or reset input.
result output.
13604 The EtherNet/IP unit cannot be The EtherNet/IP unit is not recognized, • Make sure the EtherNet/IP unit is installed
recognized. and the controller cannot use EtherNet/ correctly.
IP communication. • Make sure the EtherNet/IP unit is not damaged.
• Do not connect/disconnect the EtherNet/IP unit
PROFINET

Number
13701 PROFINET communication An error occurred in the PROFINET • Check the PROFINET connection status and settings.
failed. communication connection when • If PROFINET is not used, return the
[PROFINET] was set in the global communication mode to [Disable PROFINET].
settings.
13702 PROFINET output failed due The buffer for output via PROFINET is Reduce the amount of data to be output so that the
to a full buffer. full. data for each measurement is output at a slower rate
than it is output to PROFINET. Or, extend the time
between triggers. Note: Result data is not written
when the output buffer is full.
13703 The delay of the handshake Some results could not be output • Check that handshake is controlled properly.
control causes skipping of the because the amount of result output • Clear the data in the output buffer using the TEST
PROFINET communication data overflowed the buffer. terminal (bit) or reset input.
result output.
Appendix
13704 The PROFINET unit cannot The PROFINET unit is not recognized, • Make sure the PROFINET unit is installed
be recognized. and the controller cannot use correctly.
EtherNet/IP communication. • Make sure the PROFINET unit is not damaged.
• Do not connect/disconnect the PROFINET unit
LJ-X UM_GB A-127

Error Messages
EtherCAT

Number
13801 EtherCAT communication failed. Cyclic communication was interrupted. • Check that the Ethernet cable is connected
(When recovery is possible, recovery correctly.
occurs automatically.) • Check whether both the controller and the master
side were restarted after the communication
settings were updated.
• With the factory default, ERROR output is not set.
Set this on the [ERROR Output Settings] screen
(page 8-17).
13802 EtherCAT output failed due to a The buffer for output via EtherCAT is full. Change the update time on the PLC so the data from the
full buffer. tool is output via EtherCAT at a faster rate than it builds
up. Or, extend the time between triggers. Note: Result
data is not written when the output buffer is full.
13803 The delay of the handshake With the EtherCAT handshake ON, a Change the RPI setting so the data from the tool is
control causes skipping of the delayed handshake caused results output via EtherCAT at a faster rate than it builds up. Or,
EtherCAT communication result output via EtherCAT to be skipped. extend the time between triggers. Note: Output does not
output. occur when the output buffer is full.
13804 The EtherCAT unit cannot be The EtherCAT unit is not recognized, and • Make sure the EtherCAT unit is installed correctly.
recognized. the controller cannot use EtherCAT • Make sure the EtherCAT unit is not damaged.
communication. • Do not connect/disconnect the EtherCAT unit
Processing Memory

Number
14001 Insufficient processing memory. Processing memory space available is • The processing memory is consumed in every
insufficient. operation such as measurement/mask region
adding, pattern region as well as subtraction filter
and dictionary data setting.
• Delete unnecessary region and data or reduce the
size of shape and the number of registrations.
Appendix
A-128 LJ-X UM_GB

Error Messages
Firmware

Number
14301 The controller was booted using The controller was started with the Update the firmware to one that is supported by the
an unsupported firmware. firmware version that was not supported controller.
Please turn off the power once by the controller.
and then update the firmware.
14302 The file update is not supported The controller was started with an Replace the file with an update file that is supported for
for the controller. unsupported update file added to the SD the controller, and then start the controller.
Please remove the SD card 2 card 2.
and check the file for updating.
14303 Failed to load the file for • A problem has occurred while • Format the SD card 2. (Note, this will erase all
updating. trying to access SD card 2. contents on SD card 2.)
• The file update is collapsed. • Copy again the update file to the SD card 2.
• An SD card 2 was inserted during • Start the controller with the SD card 2 including
startup. the update file.
14503 The internal temperature of the The controller is improperly installed, or • Check if the installation direction and place follow
controller is high. As this may the ambient temperature has exceeded the instruction manual.
cause a breakdown, please the rated value (e.g.: Ventilation holes • Check if the ambient temperature exceeds the
check the installation status and are blocked). rated value.
ambient temperature. • If no fan unit is used, consider using a fan unit.
14504 The system has been stopped The controller is improperly installed, or • Check if the installation direction and place follow
because the controller internal the ambient temperature has exceeded the instruction manual.
temperature exceeded the the rated value (e.g.: Ventilation holes • Check if the ambient temperature exceeds the
specified value. are blocked). rated value.
Turn off the controller and check • If no fan unit is used, consider using a fan unit.
the installation status and
ambient temperature.
14505 Cannot detect fan rotation. The The fan in the fan unit is not rotating. Do not replace the fan unit.
fan unit may be damaged.
14506 Overcurrent was detected on • A device that consumes large • Check the energy consumption of the device to
the connected USB device. current (the maximum standard is connect.
Please check the device USB2.0: 500 mA, USB3.0: 900 mA) • Make sure the serial cable is not short-circuited.
connected to the USB. is connected to the USB host.
• The cable is short-circuited.
14507 The connected extension unit is An extension unit that cannot be used Check the configuration of the extension unit.
configured incorrectly. with the controller is connected.
Turn off the controller and check Too many extension units are connected. Appendix
the configuration of the
extension unit.
LJ-X UM_GB A-129

Error Messages
Typical errors File Access
Error Error Messages

General Number
30101 Cannot find SD card 2.
30102 Failed to access the SD card 2.
Number
30103 SD card 2 is write-protected.
30001 The operation failed due to insufficient image memory.
30104 SD card 2 is full.
30002 The operation failed due to insufficient resource memory.
30105 Insert SD card 2.
30003 Insufficient processing memory.
30004 The operation is currently unavailable. Retry execution.
30107 Failed to access the SD card 1.
30005 There is a cycle in the dependency between the tools.
30006 IP address collision has occurred between the controller
30109 SD card 1 is full.
and other system on the network.
30110 Insert SD card 1.
30007 There is some tool causing the setting error due to
insufficient object memory.
Check the setting error list.
30113 The character that cannot be input is included.
30008 Invalid controller ID
30114 The folder is invalid.
30009 The specified program setting cannot be read. Create a
new program setting or switch to another. 30115 The position for space or period is invalid.
30010 Failed in updating the reference value. 30116 Copy failure
30011 The currently selected language is not supported in an 30117 SD Card is full.
old version program setting. Change the program setting 30118 Delete failure
to the latest version. 30119 This is a read-only file or folder. Cannot rename.
30012 Failed to verify connection with the connected device. 30120 Failed to save file(s).
30121 Failed to save file(s) due to write protection.
30122 Files cannot be copied to the same folder.
30123 Failed to move file(s) due to write protection.
30124 Files cannot be moved within the same folder.
30125 Failed to delete file(s) due to write protection.
30126 Failed to be renamed.
30127 Failed to rename file or folder due to write protection.
30128 The identical file or folder exists. Failed to be renamed.
30129 Failed to create the new folder.
30130 Failed to create the new folder due to write protection.
30131 The folder with the same name already exists. Failed to
create the new folder.
30132 The specified folder is not found
Appendix
and the new folder cannot be created.

30133 Unable to open the file or folder.
30134 Failed to check SD card 1.
30135 Failed to format SD card 1.
30136 Failed to check SD card 2.
30137 Failed to format SD card 2.
30138 SD card (1-2) is checked.
Broken files were found and converted to
FILEXXX.CHK.
30139 The file name is too long.
30140 Failed to format the USB HDD.
30141 Cannot recognize the USB HDD.
30142 A USB HDD is not connected.
A-130 LJ-X UM_GB

Error Messages
Program Operation Global Settings
Error Error Messages Error Error Messages

Number Number
30201 Copy failure 30401 Failed to save the profile data.
30202 Failed to copy file(s) due to write protection on the 30402 The duplicated address with that of the controller is
copying destination. specified.
Modify the address or cancel the change.
30203 Delete failure
30403 The IP address is the same as the PLC’s IP address.
30204 No deletion can be made because the specified SD card
is write-protected.
30404 A port number that overlaps with a non-procedural
30205 Failed to add new. command / result output or PC application has been
30206 SD card (1-2) is write-protected. specified.
30207 No folder name is set. Modify the port number or cancel the change.
30208 No program setting is selected. 30405 The port number is already assigned as the VNC port
number.
30209 Destination folder already exists.
Modify the port number or cancel the change.
Delete the file with the same type as the one to be
30406 Duplicate IP address of the FTP is specified.
copied, then copy the file. Accept?
30210 Failed to copy file(s) due to write protection on the saving
30407 The IP address setting is invalid. Modify the address, or
destination. cancel setting.
30211 Save failed. The IP address and subnet mask are set to invalid
values. Change the values.
30212 No files selected
30408 The PROFINET device name total length must be 1
30213 Load failed.
to 240 characters long.
30214 Failed to copy file(s) due to write protection on the
30409 The label length must be 1 to 63 characters long.
loading destination.
30410 The PROFINET device name can use only [a] to [z]
30215 Failed to edit the name.
(lower case alphabet), [0] to [9] (number), [-]
30216 Failed to change programs. (hyphen) and [.](period).
30217 Failed to save settings. 30411 Labels must not start with [-] (hyphen).
30218 Failed to change to the latest version due to failure in 30412 Labels must not end with [-] (hyphen).
saving settings.
30413 The first label should have the form \"port-xyz\" or
\"port-xyz-abcde\". a,b,c,d,e,x,y,z cannot be made up
of numerical values [0 to 9].
Tool Operation
30414 The PROFINET device name should not be in the
Error Error Messages form of IP-address.
Number 30415 Labels should not start with [xn-].
30301 Paste Failure 30416 Duplicate IP address of the SNTP is specified.
Cancel pasting. Modify the address or cancel the change.
30303 The operation failed due to insufficient resource.
Head settings
Appendix

Number
30501 Failed to save the profile data.
33201 An error has occurred in the specialized encoder. Check
the wiring and restart the specialized encoder.
33202 The communication setting of RS-232C cannot be
changed because the PLC-link (RS-232C) is enabled.
LJ-X UM_GB A-131

Error Messages
Preprocessing Error Error Messages

Number
Error Error Messages 31008 As the write-protect switch on SD card 2 is enabled,
Number the tool settings have failed to backup. Tool adjustment
30601 Failed auto setting. has stopped.
Resolve the setting error(s) and retry. 31009 As there is not enough free space on SD card 2,
30602 You cannot select it for the copy destination because the the tool settings have failed to backup. Tool adjustment
random setting is enabled. has stopped.
31010 Since SD card 2 cannot be accessed,
the tool settings have failed to backup. Tool adjustment
Output Settings
has stopped.
Error Error Messages 31011 As the write-protect switch on SD card 1 is enabled,
Number the tool settings have failed to roll back.
30701 Output Buffer Overflows. 31012 As there is not enough free space on SD card 1,
Review Settings. the tool settings have failed to roll back.
30702 Setting data cannot be reflected due to insufficient 31013 Since SD card 1 cannot be accessed,
resource memory. the tool settings have failed to roll back.
30703 Too much output data. 31014 As the write-protect switch on SD card 2 is enabled,
the tool settings have failed to roll back.
31015 As there is not enough free space on SD card 2,
Statistics
the tool settings have failed to roll back.
Error Error Messages 31016 Since SD card 2 cannot be accessed,

Number the tool settings have failed to roll back.
30801 Data is not accumulated for saving. 31017 As the write-protect switch on SD card 1 is enabled,
the backup file could not be deleted.
Archive Setting the backup file could not be deleted.
Number
31020 As the write-protect switch on SD card 2 is enabled,
30901 With the current head model settings,
• Storage condition of archived images: Total
Status NG 31021 As there is not enough free space on SD card 2,
• Image Output Condition: Cannot be set to the backup file could not be deleted.
frequent output. 31022 Since SD card 2 cannot be accessed,
31023 You cannot adjust XXX with adjustment navigation.
31024 It cannot be adjusted as there is a cycle in the
Error Error Messages dependency between the source correction tools for
Appendix
Number Position Correction.
31001 Cannot execute end processing. Retry execution. 31026 Failed to roll back due to insufficient resource memory.
Discard the current adjustments and return to the tool
31002 Cannot execute end roll-back. Retry execution.
options for the adjustment target.
31003 The NG archive images needed for adjustment have not
31027 Insufficient processing memory.
been stored.
Adjust the setting so that the work memory usage does
31004 There is no tools that need adjustment.
not exceed 100%.
31005 As the write-protect switch on SD Card 1 is enabled,
31028 The adjustment navigation failed to start. Retry
adjustment navigation.
has stopped.
has stopped.
has stopped.
A-132 LJ-X UM_GB

Error Messages
Security Settings Image Strip
Error Error Messages Error Error Messages

Number Number
31101 Intended to detect by the unauthorized controller. 31201 Cannot find SD card 1.
31102 Input the password containing at least 4 characters. Failed to update the images on the image strip.
31103 Password not set. 31202 Cannot find SD card 2.

Failed to update the images on the image strip.
Set Password.
31203 Failed to connect to FTP server.
31104 The current controller ID in use is not found in the
program setting.
31204 Failed to login to FTP server.
Unavailable at the next loading.
Accept?
31205 Failed to obtain the file list. The FTP server is not
31105 Confirmation password is incorrect. supported.
Re-enter password. Failed to update the images on the image strip.
31106 Old password is incorrect. 31206 Timeout error occurred during communication with the
Re-enter password. FTP server.
31107 Password is incorrect.
Re-enter password. 31207 The file name is too long.
31108 Password is not entered.
31208 No image found
Enter Password.
31209 File is not found.
Failed to read the images on the image strip.
supported.
31215 Timeout error occurred during communication with the
FTP server.
Appendix

Failed the batch test.
supported.
FTP server.
LJ-X UM_GB A-133

Error Messages
Error Error Messages Custom Menu

Number
31226 No image found. Error Error Messages
Failed the batch test. Number
31227 File is not found. 31401 Registered custom menus are full. No more menus are
Failed the batch test. registered.
31228 Failed to connect to FTP server. 31402 Invalid setting items. No edition accepted.
31229 Failed to login to FTP server. 31403 Insufficient memory prevents from editing the custom
31230 Failed to obtain the file list. The FTP server is not menu.
supported.
FTP server. OCR, OCR2
Number
31234 No images to be saved.
32101 The SD card is write-protected.
31235 No tools for testing.
32102 The dictionary file space has been exceeded. Cannot
31236 No images on the image strip. register.
31237 Copy failure 32103 Failed to save dictionary.
31238 Delete failure 32104 The specified item cannot be added due to the cyclic
31239 Failed to connect to FTP server. dependency.
31240 The folder name is too long. Rename the folder within 32105 The dictionary file format is invalid. Do you wish to delete
XXX characters.
the file?
31241 The tool cannot be edited because the setting is not
32106 The dictionary file format is invalid. Cannot register.
completed.
32107 The dictionary file is write-protected.
31242 The batch test failed to start. Retry the processing.
32108 The dictionary file could not be deleted.
31243 An error has occurred in the file access.
Failed to update the images on the image strip. 32109 The starting time has not been set.
31244 An error has occurred in the file access. 32110 The starting time overlaps with other shifts.
Failed to read the images on the image strip. 32111 The number of characters that can be registered per
31245 An error has occurred in the file access. character has been exceeded. Cannot register.
Failed the batch test. 32112 Failed to create dictionary.
31246 Archived image export function is already in use. Cannot 32113 Failed to save dictionary.
execute.
32114 The specified dictionary file cannot be used with the
31247 A USB HDD is not connected. Failed to update the
OCR tool.
images on the image strip.
31248 A USB HDD is not connected. Failed to read the images
on the image strip. 1D code reader/2D code reader

Edit Operation Screen Number
Appendix
Error Error Messages 32200 Failed auto tuning.
Number Make sure that the code set in "Code Type" is capturing
correctly, then redo the auto tuning, or adjust manually.
31301 Operation screen cannot be deleted due to unassigned
It is recommended for the code resolution to be XXX
account.
pixels or more when capturing images.
Check the operation screen setting.
31302 Operation screen cannot be changed due to unassigned
account.
Check the operation screen setting.
A-134 LJ-X UM_GB

Error Messages
ShapeTrax3/ShapeTrax2 Error Error Messages Remarks

Number
Error Error Messages 20010 There are no valid The area is smaller than the
Number segments. segment size with the defect tool.
32401 Failed to save the feature data. 20011 Failed to detect The trend edge defect tool cannot
32402 Failed to load feature data. reference model detect the reference model line
32403 Failed shape fit. line. because it occurs in the area
32404 The features that can be added is full. No more setting that does not exceed the
additions. image size and because the
32405 The reference image could not be filled in due to number of detected segments is
complexities. too small.
32406 If the bounding rectangle containing the pattern area and 20015 Tuning parameter A code resolution of 0 occurs when
the rotation feature area exceeds 2432 pixels in width or is invalid. the code type details are not set.
2050 pixels in height, the broad search mode needs to be 20017 Pattern detection The measurement tool cannot be
enabled. failed. executed due to error occurrences
Are you sure you want to enable the broad search mode? such as insufficient memory space.
When enabled, the image reduction and feature reduction 20020 Failed in height Height information used for plane
are set to 4 or more. extraction/height detection cannot be acquired, such
binarization. as when all extraction areas are
covered with a mask for height
Execution Error extraction/height binarization.
20021 It is impossible to All the measured areas are
This section shows the list of error numbers that are output measure. covered with invalid pixels or a
when a measurement tool execution error occurs. mask area using the height
Error Error Messages Remarks measurement and trend height
Number measurement tools.
20001 The current image If there are too many blob and 20022 Failed to calculate The zero plane cannot be
could not be defect results detected. the zero plane. calculated correctly during the
calculated due to calculation of the zero plane.
complexities. 20023 The current image Occurs when too many results are
20002 The measured The area is completely out with the could not be detected internally by the blob filter
area is all out of the defect tool. calculated due to of the preprocessing.
image range. complexities.
20003 Detect line failed. The dimensions/geometry, trend 20024 Failed to detect The height measurement and
edge position or edge angle tool plane. trend height measurement tools
failed to detect lines. failed to detect planes.
20004 Detect circle failed. The dimensions/geometry or trend 20025 Failed to generate When the generation of the
edge position tool failed to detect an inspection inspection region failed in the tool
circles. region. that is referring to an image region
Appendix
20005 Detect point failed. The dimensions/geometry tool generator tool.

failed to detect points. 20031 Failed to generate The area is outside the image or
20006 Failed to measure The dimensions/geometry tool profile. the profile generation has failed.
the size and shape. failed to measure the size and 20032 Failed to measure The calculation of the
shape of detected results. profile. measurement result failed after the
20007 An invalid The calculation tool cannot be measurement target was obtained.
operation was executed. See the calculation 20033 Failed in tracking. Detection failed in the reference
performed. execution errors (ERRC) for source while using "refer to other
details. position measurement (1 point)" or
20008 The timeout error Timeout has occurred with the "refer to other position
has occurred. ShapeTrax3 tool or the ShapeTrax2 measurement (2 points)" in each
tool, PatternTrax tool, 1D code measurement item.
reader tool and the 2D code reader 20034 It is impossible to The valid profile data is not within
tool. measure. the measurement range.
20009 The dictionary data The dictionary data has not been 20035 Failed to detect The reference model line cannot
has not been registered by the OCR or OCR2 reference model be detected due to the number of
registered. tools. line. scans being too low.
LJ-X UM_GB A-135

Error Messages
Error Error Messages Remarks Error Error Messages

Number Number
20036 All the set items The profile itself is generated but it 4036 B_And function abnormally terminated.
cannot be cannot be measured for all 4037 B_Or function abnormally terminated.
measured. measurement items. 4038 B_Xor function abnormally terminated.
20037 The first candidate The first candidate was not found 4039 B_Not function abnormally terminated.
cannot be found. when the setting was put on "An 4040 Bind function abnormally terminated.
error occurs when the first 4041 Dist function abnormally terminated.
candidate is not found."
4042 Line function abnormally terminated.
20099 Tool execution The measurement tool cannot be
4043 ISect function abnormally terminated.
error has occurred. executed due to error occurrences
4044 LnDist function abnormally terminated.
such as insufficient memory space.
4045 LnDistP function abnormally terminated.
4046 LnDistXY function abnormally terminated.
List of calculation tool execution error codes 4047 Angle function abnormally terminated.
(ERRC) 4048 AngleConv function abnormally terminated.
When a calculation tool execution error (20007) occurs, 4049 LnAngle function abnormally terminated.
more detailed error status is output as a calculation error 4050 LLAngle function abnormally terminated.
code (ERRC). The list is shown below. 4051 ConvCrd function abnormally terminated.
Error Error Messages 4052 MidXY function abnormally terminated.
Number 4053 VMidLine function abnormally terminated.
1000 Division by 0 was performed. 4054 Circle3 function abnormally terminated.
1002 Exceeding the 64-bit floating is detected during the 4056 I2Circle function abnormally terminated.
operation. 4057 CircleTangent function abnormally terminated.
2020 Failed to acquire the system variable. 4058 ILineCircle function abnormally terminated.
2030 Failed to acquire the values of setting and measurement. 4060 MidLine function abnormally terminated.
4000 Max function abnormally terminated. 4061 ConvCrd2 function abnormally terminated.
4001 Min function abnormally terminated. 4062 Rotate function abnormally terminated.
4002 Ave function abnormally terminated. 4064 ShiftYear function abnormally terminated.
4003 Abs function abnormally terminated. 4065 ShiftMonth function abnormally terminated.
4004 Sqr function abnormally terminated. 4066 ShiftDay function abnormally terminated.
4005 Sqrt function abnormally terminated. 4067 AsPoint function abnormally terminated.
4006 AveR function abnormally terminated. 4068 AsLine function abnormally terminated.
4007 Int function abnormally terminated. 4069 AsCircle function abnormally terminated.
4008 Floor function abnormally terminated. 4073 RotCenter function abnormally terminated.
4009 Round function abnormally terminated. 4074 InnerProd function abnormally terminated.
4010 Ceil function abnormally terminated. 4075 OuterProd function abnormally terminated.
4011 MaxN function abnormally terminated. 4076 AddVector function abnormally terminated.
Appendix
4012 MinN function abnormally terminated. 4077 SubVector function abnormally terminated.
4019 Log function abnormally terminated. 4100 As3DPoint function abnormally terminated.
4022 Exp function abnormally terminated. 4101 AsPlane function abnormally terminated.
4023 Ln function abnormally terminated. 4110 Dist3D function abnormally terminated.
4024 Cos function abnormally terminated. 4112 PlanePassPt function abnormally terminated.
4025 Acos function abnormally terminated. 4113 PlDist function abnormally terminated.
4026 Sin function abnormally terminated. 4115 PlDistP function abnormally terminated.
4027 Asin function abnormally terminated. 4119 Stdev function abnormally terminated.
4028 Tan function abnormally terminated. 4127 I4XY function abnormally terminated.
4029 Atan function abnormally terminated. 4128 I4Line function abnormally terminated.
4030 Atan2 function abnormally terminated. 4129 AddVector3D function abnormally terminated.
4031 AngC function abnormally terminated. 4130 SubVector3D function abnormally terminated.
4032 AngW function abnormally terminated. 4131 ILine3DPlane function abnormally terminated.
4033 Rad function abnormally terminated. 4132 I2Plane function abnormally terminated.
4034 Deg function abnormally terminated. 4133 Line3DDist function abnormally terminated.
4035 Pi function abnormally terminated. 4134 Line3DDistXYZ function abnormally terminated.
A-136 LJ-X UM_GB

Error Messages

Number
4135 PlDistXYZ function abnormally terminated.
4136 LnLn3DDist function abnormally terminated.
4137 Plane2Angle function abnormally terminated.
5000 Timeout has occurred.
Appendix
LJ-X UM_GB A-137

Revision History
Date of printing Version Revision contents
July 2019 First Edition
December 2019 Revised 1st edition Version 1.1 supported
April 2020 2nd revision 1st edition Version 1.2 supported
June 2020 2nd revision 2nd edition
October 2020 2nd revision 3rd edition
February 2021 3rd revision 1st edition Version 1.3 supported
September 2021 3rd revision, 2nd edition Version 1.4 supported
February 2022 3rd revision, 3rd edition Version 1.5 supported
July 2022 3rd revision, 4th edition

WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS
(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from
the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or samples were used merely to
illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to represent that the Products would necessarily
conform to said models or samples. Any Products found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE with all
shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon examination by
KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any
Products found to be defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer,
including but not limited to improper installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification,
misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture, vibration or
outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only suggestions, and it is
Buyer's responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyer’s intended use. KEYENCE will not be
responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
(3) The Products and any samples ("Products/Samples") supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally in humans, for
human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications state otherwise.
Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way, KEYENCE assumes no
responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE harmless from any liability or
damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples.
(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF
INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE COST OF
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR
ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTY’S CLAIM FOR DAMAGES
OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing warranty disclaimers or
damage limitations may not apply.
BUYER'S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:

If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must provide such
third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written information provided
to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.
E 1101-3
Copyright (c) 2021 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 122145GB 2072-4 A78GB Printed in Japan

As 128518 LJ-X8000 Um A78gb WW GB 2072 4

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

As 128518 LJ-X8000 Um A78gb WW GB 2072 4

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A78GB

,ASER0ROÚLER 1 Before Use

Installing the LJ-X8000

Basic Operations and

User’s Manual 4 Head settings

(3D mode) 5 Measurement Tools

Point Indicates additional information on proper operation.

Indicates items to enhance system understanding and other useful information.

A78GB LJ-X UM_GB 3

Safety Information for LJ-X/LJ-V Series

Safety information for LJ-X/LJ-V Series

Precautions for use

Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs

Operating environment and conditions (precautions on installation)

• Do not wipe the unit with a wet wipe, benzene, or thinner.

Insulated condition between each I/O circuit

Input terminal (IN connector 2 to 6) Input circuit

Input terminal (parallel I/O connector 2 to 16) Input circuit

COMIN2 (parallel I/O connector 1)

COMOUT2 (parallel I/O connector 17, 40)

RS-232C Signal line RS-232C Driver circuit

ENCODER Input Encoder input circuit

Connector shield for Ethernet port

Connector shield and signal GND for USB port

Head connector shield

Connector shield and signal GND for RGB output

Notes on the + grounding environment

External devices such as Earthing

Precautions on Regulations and Standards

Precautions on laser products

Models LJ-X8020 LJ-X8060 LJ-X8080 LJ-X8200 LJ-X8400 LJ-X8900

LJ-V7020K LJ-V7020 LJ-V7060K LJ-V7060 LJ-V7080 LJ-V7200 LJ-V7300

Safety equipment for LJ-X Series

Laser radiation LED

Laser radiation LED

* The laser ON terminal is shipped with a short circuit

Information displayed on warning labels

Warning label attachment positions

Safety Precautions on LED Product

Model Light source Risk Group*

• Exempt Group Does not pose any photobiological hazard.

Introduction ..............................................................2 Run mode screen .............................................. 3-6

Custom Menu .................................................... 3-45 Edge Pitch ....................................................... 5-105

PROFINET, PROFINET Unit ........................... 6-14 Change Account ................................................ 7-42

Change inspection program ...............................9-7 Capture action of image .................................. 9-77

Prepare PROFINET Connection  Changing the execute condition No. using 

Operation Symbol/Output Item Comparison

Checking the Package Contents ................................ 1-2

System Configuration.................................................. 1-5

LJ-X UM_GB 1-1

Checking the Package Contents

- LJ-X8200 (hexagon socket head bolt M5 x 60, 3 pieces)

- LJ-X8400 (hexagon socket head bolt M5 x 60, 3 pieces)

- LJ-X8900 (hexagon socket head bolt M5 x 60, 3 pieces)

- LJ-V7020 / LJ-V7020B / LJ-V7020K / LJ-V7020KB

- LJ-V7060 / LJ-V7060B / LJ-V7060K / LJ-V7060KB

1-2 LJ-X UM_GB

• Monitor stand (OP-87262)

• Warning labels (page 10)

• RS-232C conversion adapter

• Head extension cable Please select according to the connected

• USB cable (OP-66844: 2 m)

• Extension cable L-shape connector